Htz I
II 5|-§5-«j«-?4|K4|^ ^4| § I 5«q $в] Ы1-|^ яз]чv j 5^§5’qI’”’’‘’5’»‘’^^’I’’ V I «Kl’|’«’S
^S-gvpcv I
*M|5^v3w’3^’««?i^	i	i V^v
। йс.-ч)ч;я-з]ад§Яа|«1^я^д|^§-Ч(15^'5ч^-*>5-?|с.1
qiS-Mvaww^J-p.^ [
54|Mots-q§4^«E^-qf5-«|444i5-^^^-4^e.-|
^•«•qiffrqp-qT «^«npw
ЛЬ Zi ^’3lq| ^ ^ |

pq*r||?rq|«l||
4*i5'4’5C’9'5qj’-4i6^-^’«i>^3j5;w^'yt'cigq;«i d??||
¥U)’8^V3’’’t>5*r<tf II
yecqba]4'5b««]^5b?iX^5,g5'gc.'?^’Hj5,q4p,q^
M	а'ч'ч^ч-ч-2-<^ч5ь-9|ч^-<5ьф^Цг^>г[-ч-у
q^-^qq? r
Published at the Bengal Secretariat Book Depot,
Writers’ Buildings, Calcutta.
OFFICIAL AGE1TTS.
In India—
Messes. Thacker, Spink & Co., Calcutta and Simla,
Messes. Newman & Co., Calcutta.
Messes. Higoineotham & Co., Madras.
Messes. Thackee & Co., Ld., Bombay.
Messes. A. J. Combeidoe & Co., Bombay.
The Supeeintendent, Ameeican Baptist Mission Peess, Bangoon.
Mes. Badhabai Atmaeam Sagoon, Bombay.
Messes. S. K. Lahiri & Co., Printers and Book-sellers, College Street,
Calcutta.
Bai Sahib M. Gulab Singh & Sons, Proprietors of the Mnfid-i-am Press,
Lahore, Punjab.
Messes. V. Kalyanaeama Iyee & Co., Book-sellers, &c., Madras.
Messes. D. B. TAEAroaEVALA, Sons & Co., Book-sellers, Bombay.
Messes. G. A. Natbson & Co., Madras.
In England—
Me. E. A. Arnold, 37 Bedford Street, Strand, London.
Messes. Constable & Co., 2 Whitehall Gardens, London.
Messes. Sampson Low, Marston & Co., St. Dunstan’s House, Fetter Lane,
London.
Messes. Luzac & Co., 46 Great Bussell Street, London.
Messes. Began Paul, Trench, Teubnee & Co., Charing Cross Bead,
London.
Mr. B. Alfred Quabitch, 15 Piccadilly, London.
Messes. P. S. King & Son, 2 & 4 Great Smith Street, Westminster, London.
Messes. H. S. Kino & Co., 65 Cornhill, London.
Messes. Williams & Noegate, Oxford.
Messes. Deighton Bell & Co., Cambridge.
On the Continent—
Messes. B. Friedlander <Sr Sohn, Berlin, N. W. Carlstrasse, 11.
Me. Otto Hareassowitz, Leipzig.
Me. Kael Hieesemann, Leipzig.
Me. Eenest Leeoux, 28 Bue Bonaparte, Paris.
Me. Maetinus Nijhoff, The Hague.
TIBETAN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY
WITH SANSKRIT SYNONYMS
SARAT CHANDRA DAS, Rai Bahadur, C.I.E.,
AUTHOR OF “A JOURNEY TO LHASA AND
CENTRAL TIBET.”
anlr Oittb uitber ф orbers of ф 6obcrnment of Bengal
GRAHAM SANDBERG, B.A.,
CHAPLAIN, H. M. INDIAN SEBVICE; AUTHOR OP “A HAND-BOOK OF COLLOQUIAL
TIBETAN,” “MANUAL OF THE SIKKIM-BHUTIA LANGUAGE,” “ MILARASPA,
TIBETAN POET AND MYSTIC,” ETC., ETC., ETC.,
A. WILLIAM HEYDE
ONE OF THE BEVISOB3 OF THE TIBETAN NEW TESTAMENT, MORAVIAN MISSIONARY ON THE
TIBETAN FBONTIEE.
CALCUTTA:
PUBLISHED BY THE BENGAL SECRETARIAT BOOK DEPOT.
1902.
[Price—Indian, Ps. 32; English, £2
CALCUTTA:
HE BENGAL SECRE
PREFACE.
i.
Alex. Csoma de Koros, the pioneer student of Tibetan, in the
preface of his Tibetan-English-Dictionary, published in 1834, wrote
as follows:—
“When there shall be more interest taken for Buddhism (which
has much in common with the spirit of true Christianity) and for
diffusing Christian and European knowledge throughout the most
eastern parts of Asia, the Tibetan Dictionary may be much im-
proved, enlarged, and illustrated by the addition of Sanskrit terms.”
The result of his investigations, to speak in Csoma’s own words, was
that the literature of Tibet is entirely of Indian origin. The im-
mense volumes on different branches of science, etc., being exact
or faithful translations from Sanskrit works, taken from Bengal, Magadha,
Gangctic or Central India, Kashmir, and Nepal, commencing from the
seventh century after Christ. And that many of these works have been
translated (mostly from Tibetan) into the Mongol, Manchu, and the
Chinese languages; so that by this means the Tibetan language became
in Chinese Tartary the language of the learned as the Latin in Europe.
In the year 1889 I brought these opinions of that original investiga-
tor to the notice of Sir Alfred Croft, k.c.i.e., the then Director of Public
Instruction in Bengal, and explained to him the necessity of compiling
a Tibetan-English Dictionary on the lines indicated by Csoma de Koros
for the use of Tibetan students and particularly to assist European
scholars in the thorough exploration of the vast literature of Tibet,
which, besides indigenous works, comprises almost all the Buddhist
religious works of India, including the great collections of the Kahgyur
and the Tangyur. Shortly before this Sir Alfred Croft had received a
communication from the late Right Hon’ble Professor F. Max Muller on
the desirability of translating into English a Sanskrit-Tibetan work
on Buddhist terminology, which was looked for with interest, because
it was expected to throw light on many obscure points of Buddhist-
Sanskrit literature. The philosophical terms of that literature, many
of which were of extremely doubtful meaning, had been translated
with literal accuracy into Tibetan in early times, and it was antici-
pated that an analysis of the meaning of these terms would elucidate
that of the original Sanskrit words, of which they were the equivalent
renderings. Being impressed with the importance of the proposed work,
Sir Alfred Croft, in a memorandum addressed to Government, wrote
as follows:—
“Babu Sarat Chandra Das has brought with him four dictionaries
of the classical Tibetan; one of these being a well-known Tibetan-
Sanskrit Dictionary, compiled from a large number of named Tibetan
as well as standard Sanskrit works, and dating from the 13th century
A.D., and another being a Sanskrit-Tibetan Dictionary, which explains
the Tantrik portion of the Buddhist Scriptures. The external arrange-
ment of the dictionary will be as follows:—The Tibetan words will
be placed first in alphabetical order; next their accepted Sanskrit
equivalents; next the English rendering of the Tibetan terms; then
will follow what is to be a special and valuable feature of the new
dictionary. The meaning of each technical term is to be .illustrated
by extracts, with exact references from Sanskrit-Buddhist and Tibetan
works. Further, it is proposed that Babu Sarat Chandra Das should
include in the dictionary words of modern Tibetan which were not
known to Csoma or Jaschke. The materials which he has amassed
during his two journeys to and residence in Tibet give him excep-
tional facilities for making the work complete.”
These recommendations having received the sanction of Government
in June 1889, I was placed on special duty in connection with the
compilation of the proposed dictionary. In 1899, when the work of
compilation was brought to a close, the Hon’ble Mr. C. W. Bolton, c.s.i.,
then Chief Secretary to the Government of Bengal, entrusted the revision
of the work to the Revd. Graham Sandberg and Revd. William Heyde,
and deputed Professor Satis Chandra Acharya, m.a„, who had made Buddhist
Sanskrit and Pali works his special study, to co-operate with me. My
respectful thanks are, therefore, due to Sir Alfred Croft for the keen
interest he took in my Tibetan studies and for his kind help at the inception
of the work, and to Mr. Bolton for securing the services of the two
Tibetan scholars—the Revd. Graham Sandberg and Revd. William Heyde
—for its successful completion. I also record my obligations to Sir John
vii
Edgar, k.c.i.e., formerly Chief Secretary to the Government of Bengal; to
Dr. Emil Schlagintweit of Bavaria, and to the Hon’ble W. W. Rockhill,
Author of The Land of Lamas for encouragement, assistance, and advice
during the prosecution of my researches. Great is the debt of gratitude
which I owe to the Revd. G. Sandberg for various acts of kindness.
Without his scholarly and efficient aid this work would hardly have assumed
its present shape, as he has given a scientific finish to the work which
it was not in my power to do.
II.
In studying the origin and growth of Tibetan literature and the
landmarks in the history of that language, Jaschke, the compiler of the
second Tibetan-English Dictionary (published in 1882), noticed only two
periods of literary activity. Had that critical student of Tibetan been
in possession of works of modern literature, which dates from the
establishment of the Dalai Lama’s sovereignty over whole Tibet in the
beginning of the 18th century A.D., he would certainly have modified
his remarks on the subject. Neither he nor Csoma de Koros had any
means or opportunities of studying either the current literature of every-
day business or the refined, idiomatic literature of Tibet itself, which
is quite distinct from the Indian literature that was translated or
imported into the language. They do not seem to have ever during
the course of their study of Tibetan come across works on drama,
fiction, correspondence, etc. It is, therefore, no wonder that the compiler
of the later dictionary should assign only two periods to the history
of the literature of Tibet, entirely ignoring the third, which is indeed
not the least important of the three.
The first period, to describe it in the language of Jaschke, is
the Period of Translations, which, however, might also be entitled the
Classical Period, for the sanctity of the religious message conferred
a corresponding reputation and tradition of excellence upon the
form in which it was conveyed. This period begins in the second
half of the seventh century A.D., when Thon-mi Sambhota (the
good Bhota or Tibetan), the minister of King Srongtsan Gampo,
returned to Tibet after studying the Sanskrit language under an
eminent Brahman teacher of Magadha. “His invention of the Tibetan
alphabet gave two-fold impulse: for several centuries the wisdom of
viii
India and the ingenuity of Tibet laboured in unison and with the
greatest industry and enthusiasm at the work of translation. The
tribute due to real genius must be accorded to these early pioneers
of Tibetan grammar. They had to grapple with infinite wealth and
refinement of Sanskrit; they had to save the independence of their
own tongue, while they strove to subject it to the rule of scientific
principles, and it is most remarkable how they managed to produce
translations at once. literal and faithful to the spirit of the original.”
The Classical Period may be divided into three stages. The first
or the earliest stage terminated with the downfall of the first histor-
ical monarchy, when King Langdarma fell by the hand of an
assassin. The second stage commenced with the introduction of the
system of chronology, called the Vrihaspati cycle of 60 years, in
Tibet by an Indian Buddhist called Chandra Nath and Chilu Pandit
of Tibet in 1025 A.D. This was the age of Milaraspa and Atisa,
whose illustrious disciple, Brom-ton Gyalwai Jungnd, laid the founda-
tion of the first Buddhist Hierarchy in Tibet and established the
great monastery of Rwadcng, with a library of Sanskrit works. Jaschke’s
second period evidently corresponds with this stage, when “Tibetan
authors began to indulge in composition of their own” and wrote
on historical and legendary subjects. The third stage began with
the conquest of Tibet by the Tartar Conqueror, Chingis Khan, in
1205 A.D., when Pandit S'akya S'ri of Kashmir had returned to Tibet
after witnessing the plunder and destruction of the great Buddhist
monasteries of Odantapuri and Vikrama S'ila in Magadha, and the conquest
of Bengal and Behar by the Mahomedans under Baktyar Ghilji in
1203 A.D. In this last stage flourished the grand hierarchy of Sakya,
which obtained supreme influence over Tibet and the country, which was
then divided into 13 provinces, called Thikor Chusum, as a gift from
the immediate successors of Chingis Khan. Among the most noted
writers of the time were Sakya Pandit Kungah Gyal-tshan, Dogon
Phag-pa, the spiritual tutor of Emperor Khubli Khan, and Shongton
Lotsawa, who translated the Kavyadaria of Dandi and Kshemendra’s
Avadana Kalpalata in metrical Tibetan. With the opening of the 15th
century Buton-Riuchen Dub introduced a new era in the literature of
Tibet, and Buddhism received fresh impulse under the rule of the
Phagmodu chiefs, when Tibetan scholars took largely to the study of
ix
Chinese literature under the auspices of the Ming Emperors of China.
During this period, called the age of Da-nying (old orthography), the great
indigenous literature of Tibet arose. A host of learned Lotsawas and
scholars like Tsongkhapa, Buton, Gyalwa Ngapa, Lama Taranatha,
Desri Sangye Gyatsho, Sumpa Khampo, and others flourished. This
was the age of the Gelug-pa, or the Yellow Cap School of Buddhism,
founded by Tsongkhapa with Gahdan as its head-quarters.
The third period begins with the first quarter of the 18th century,
when Chinese suzerainty over Tibet was fully established and the
last of the Tartar kings of the dynasty of Gushi Khan was killed
by a General of the Jungar Tartars—an incident which transferred
the sovereignty of Tibet to the Dalai Lama, who was till then a mere
hierarch of the Gelug-pa Church. It is within this period that
Tibet has enjoyed unprecedented peace under the benign sway of
the boly Bodhisattvas, and its language has become the lingua
franca of Higher Asia.
Lhasa Villa, Darjeeling,
July 1902t
SARAT CHANDRA DAS.
i*

REVISORS’ PREFACE.
When in December 1899 the Chief Secretary to the Government of
Bengal handed over to us for revision the Tibetan Dictionary upon which
Sarat Chandra Das had laboured for some dozen years, we found at our
disposal a work embracing a mass of new and important collections on
the language, the value of which was marred by two prominent character-
istics—first, the material had been put together in somewhat heteroge-
neous fashion, hardly systematic enough for a dictionary; secondly, the
vast amount of original matter had been throughout greatly interlarded
with lengthy excerpts from Jaschke’s Dictionary, not always separable from
the new information, and this imparted a second-hand appearance to large
portions of the work, which was, in reality, by no means deserved.
Moreover, in this way, no attempt had been made to improve upon
Jaschke’s definitions of many of the commoner Buddhist philosophical
terms or to incorporate the later results of European scholarship in these
instances. On the other hand, one was very often gratified to find, in the
case of the more difficult philosophical terminology, that the learned
Bengali had gone to original and little-explored sources of native informa-
tion, such as Tsongkhapa’s Lam-rim Chhenmo, and, by extracts from the
same, furnished valuable and novel particulars under those heads.
Accordingly, the task which the Revisors set themselves was directed
mainly to counteracting the errors of judgment above indicated. Such a
task proved one of a more laborious character than might be at first
imagined; and the fact that the work of amendment and addition has
taken them upwards of two years of incessant toil sufficiently evidences
its difficulty.
First, has come the business of selection and excision. The religion
and philosophy of Tibetan books are properly confined to the Bon cult
and to Buddhism. There had been, however, a tendency here to draw
in all manner of Hindu thought and mythology, because one or two works
translated into Tibetan from the Sanskrit dealt with these matters. This
tendency it seemed right to curb except in those instances, not at all
infrequent, where the Vedic and Puranic Hinduism, in some measure, was
bound up with, or bore upon, or explained, Buddhist belief or popular practice.
xii
Excision has had to be meted out, further, in the case of unnecessary
repetition of otherwise properly-introduced information. Secondly, our
task has been one of substitution. Many articles have had to be freshly
written, or at least re-compiled. In place of the innumerable excerpts
from Jaschke, already referred to, we have had to examine and to treat de
novo the grammar and general usage of a largo number of the commoner
nouns, adjectives, and verbs, notably the verbs. To illustrate these
new articles, we have had to substitute for Jaschke’s examples a largo
number of original quotations from Tibetan authors as well as a certain
number of made-up sentences put together to exhibit various phrases
of ordinary employment. In other articles, also, where Sarat Chandra Das
had not thought it necessary to do more than repeat Csoma’sor Jaschke’s
illustrative sentences, wo have looked out fresh examples to replace them.
Of still greater importance was it in the case of certain doctrinal terms
and phrases of Buddhism to undertake re-definition and to connote and
assimilate modern discussion and research on the subject. Among those
terms may be noted such as ^j3j, rkyen;	rten-hbrel; tta-гса; rdul;
§’&l, bla-ma ;	'5^', gyuil-drun ;	, dc-bshin-ggegs-2)a, But while
referring to these substitutions and others of a like nature, we do
not wish to assume too much. We would rather repeat that, in the
matter of philosophical definitions also, we have been frequently surprised
and instructed by the descriptions and explanations of recondite ideas
and terms which Sarat Chandra Das has himself succeeded in collecting
from various native authorities. Such information would have sufficed if
he had not sometimes confused it by the sudden and inconsequent linking
on of Jaschke’s remarks without curtailment and without any connotation
of them to that which he had himself just set out. Thirdly, in the way of
direct addition to the original work, there have been certain moderate sup-
plementary contributions. Jaschke had dealt very fully with the Western
colloquial, and we have sought to introduce a number of the colloquial
words and phrases belonging to the Central and Eastern speech. Other
additions have been short paragraphs on the mythological pantheon of
Tibet and Mongolia, together with an attempt to give exact information
on zoological and geographical points.
It may be considered by some that there is a certain lack of reference
to known authorities in support of many of the statements set forth in
this work. However, it should be remembered that in dealing with a
xiii
language so little explored as the Tibetan (or which, indeed, in one narrow
groove—that of the Kahgyur translations from Sanskrit—has, in some sense,
been over-explored), the difficulty is to find adequate authorities for tho
real and more current uses of words and phrases. The stilted verbiage
of the Kahgyur is often mere Sanskrit idiom literally rendered into
Tibetan, but it gives no idea of the elastic style to be found in the innumer-
able indigenous productions of native Tibetan writers. Sarat Chandra
Das has held familiar intercourse with modern men of learning in Tibet
itself—the professors at Tashi-lhunpo, Daipung, Samye, Mindolling, and
other important monastic institutions. Much, therefore, has been gleaned
by him which, though absolutely reliable, cannot be given on any stated
authority, but must be accepted as information obtained at first hand and
now presented for the first time. This frank acceptance should also be
extended to much with which the Revisors have been able to supplement
the Author’s original work. Both of them have been located for lengthy
periods where Tibetan is the language of the people of the place, and have
been in constant communication with men from Lhasa and all parts
of Tibet. Under such circumstances, “authorities” cannot of course
be quoted.
In dealing with philosophical terms, and in general with the forms to
be met with both in the old classical works and in modern treatises, it
will certainly be found, however, that our examples are constantly
supported by exact references. These have been taken from writings
of all kinds. Hitherto European scholars seem to have thought of the
literature of Tibet as one consisting wholly of Sanskritic translation and as
limited to the contents of tho Kahgyur and Tangyur. The Author and
the Revisors have endeavoured, by widening the sources of their quota-
tions, to show how extensive a field is covered by mediaeval and modern
Tibetan writers. Geography, history, biography, political government,
accounts, astrology, are all represented. It may be remarked, for example,
that the official biographies of the successive Dalai Lamas alone fill some
32 volumes. Nevertheless, although these scarce memoirs are included
in Sarat Chandra Das’s library, we are sorry to point out that none of
his examples appear to have been taken therefrom.
Knowing, however, how scanty is the range of Tibetan works avail-
able to the majority of students, we have not failed to quote largely in
our examples from the Kahgyur and Tangyur collections. We may
xiv
note on this point that a suggestion has been forwarded to us that, in
quoting from the former, special references should be given to Mons.
Feer’s Textes tires du Kandjovr. But we are afraid that the scope for
quotation would be narrowed if our references to the Kahgyur were con-
fined to Mons. Feer’s very limited extracts published in lithograph form over
30 years ago. As to the index du Kandjour, which was issued in the pub-
lications of the Musde Guimet 20 years back, it is evident to every
Tibetan student that this Index was only a rechauffe of Csoma Korosi’s
much clearer and fuller analysis of the Kahgyur printed 68 years
ago in the pages of the Asiatic Researches. We fear, indeed, that reli-
ance on such works as these would rather expose us to charges of non-
acquaintance with more recent results of European investigation in the
present field. Although working in India, we may observe, however,
that we have done our best to keep pace with what European Orien-
talists have written on our subject; but assistance has been mainly derived
from the many memoirs compiled by Russian and German scholars,
and we would specially recommend to notice the collections in this
field made by Prince Ukhtomski and the very recent publications of
Dr. Albert Gruuwedel, Dr. A. Conrady, and Professor Huth. The
analyses of the Tangyur, issued by Professor Huth during the last
three or four years, are particularly noteworthy. To return, however,
to the above-mentioned suggestion, we may say that not only would
the scope be too restricted, but also there is no necessity, under
present conditions, to refer to any mere collection of extracts. Nearly
every capital city in Europe now has obtained possession of com-
plete copies of the Kahgyur volumes, and in two or three libraries
the 220 volumes of the Tangyur may be also consulted. In St.
Petersburg are three full sets of the Kahgyur and two sets of the
Tangyur; in Paris is a set of the Kahgyur; in one or other of the
great German libraries both the Tibetan encyclopoedia may be seen;
in England, while curiously enough the British Museum Library
owns only a small drawer-ful of loose Tibetan book-leaves, the
India Office Library can boast a perfect series of both Kahgyur and
Tangyur; and, lastly, in the Vatican Propaganda Library is preserved
Oratio della Penna’s incomplete collection of Kahgyur volumes.
A word as to the Sanskrit equivalents following each Tibetan term.
Sanskrit scholars will perhaps consider these equivalents rather
XV
unsystematically enumerated. They have, nevertheless, with regard to
the majority of them, this particular value:—they were selected
by native Indian scholars of mediaeval and later days in collaboration
with Tibetan lotsawas or translators, as the appropriate Sanskrit
synonyms of the respective Tibetan words. They have been taken
chiefly from one celebrated Sanskrit-Tibetan Dictionary, and supple-
mented by a well-known Calcutta pandit and professor, Satis
Chandra Acharya Vidyabhusan, who has also considerable acquain-
tance with literary Tibetan. The same learned professor has also,
in numerous instances, appended a literal English rendering of the Sanskrit
terms. These renderings have been placed within square brackets with
the initial (S' outside the brackets, and he alone is responsible for such
translations.
The system of transliteration followed is that adopted finally at the
Vienna Congress of Orientalists ; and this system is observed in the case
of all Tibetan and Sanskrit words intended to be literally transliterated
and printed in italics. However, when a Tibetan or Sanskrit proper
name occurs in Roman characters, not as a transliteration, but in the
English explanation of a word, or in any English sentence as an integral
part of such explanation or sentence, the name is spelled according to the
conventional English fashion and, in the case of Sanskrit terms or names,
as in Sir Monier Williams’s Dictionary.
A considerable number of Tibetan words at tho head of paragraphs
will be found in larger type. This indicates either that the word is the
root of all related terms, or that it is the most common word of the series
and thus ostensibly that from which the others have been derived. Two
different arbitrary signs will be found prefixed to many words. The Author,
it seems, has marked such words as he considers archaic or gone out of
present use with a swastika (-f,), and those words deemed by him to have
been imported into Tibetan from the Sanskrit, whether directly or by
derivation, he has distinguished by a double-headed dagger (^).
In conclusion, the Revisors would point out that although they have
been given, and have generally taken, the greatest freedom in correcting
or rejecting the matter set forth in this work, and for that reason
cannot justly shift responsibility for the accuracy or non-accuracy of
that which is herein written, nevertheless they have generally not reversed
xvi
the views and statements of the Author wherever these have seemed
to them reasonable or fairly tenable, and to be the result of deliberately-
formed opinion. They have felt, even when differing personally from
the Author, that this Dictionary was Sarat Chandra Das’s—not their
own.
We must not omit to mention that, by the agency of the Chief
Secretary to Government, certain brief comments on various portions of
the Dictionary were received from Professor Bendall, and we have to thank
him for his kind suggestions.
GRAHAM SANDBERG.
A. WILLIAM HEYDE.
Dasibeiing, India ;
The lit March 1902.
ALPHABETICAL PLAN OF THE TIBETAN LANGUAGE,
(yang nga).
The five vowels:
a, i, u, e, o.
The four vowel signs that are attached to the basic letter w are called gi-git,
shabkyii, deng-bu and naro:
t, u, e, o.
’S5*’i’<*)	silm-chu).
The thirty consonants:
T] • p • 4] • E'l
Aa, kha, да, fia,
ц ’ 4 ’ q ’ «I
pa, pha, ba, tna.
T QI ’
ra, la, fa, sa.
5 ’ Ж’ E ’ ?>|
ca, cha, ja, na,
tsa, tsha, dea, wa.
ha, a.
5 • я  s 
ta, tha, dd, на,
«j ’ з ’ V «1|
sha, za, ha, ya.
The Dictionary order of the Tibetan letters,
with their Indo-Romanic equivalents and their pronunciation
exemplified by English words:
к in kill, seek
P kh „ ink-horn.
g » gun, go, dog.
К’й (=w$r)„ sing, king.
3<?(=cA)in porch.
^ch(^=chh),4 church-hill.
E j „ jet, jump.
w (=n) „ singe.
lc
xviii
5 я	t th	in water (in Ireland). ,, nut-hook.	a	sh	in shone or s in leisure. n azure or s in as.
5	d	„ dice (more like th in this).		h	hour, honour.
	n	„ not, nut.	4	У	„ yard, year.
Ц	P	„ pull, page.	v	r	„ ray, rope.
4	ph	„ uphill.		I	„ last, large.
q ь,	, or w „ ball, boy, bard.		*°|?(		„ sharp.
		„ man, map.		s	„ same, soon.
*	ts	,, parts.		h	„ half, happy.
&	tsh	„ (ts aspirated).		a	„ far.
£	ds	„ guards.			
4	w	„ waft, wave.			
In all the above twenty nine letters the last letter w is inherent, therefore the
Tibetan Grammarians have included it as a basis both for vowels and consonants. The
letter * (Л) called (®*'^’) the little a is generally joined to the basic-vowel of a letter to
make its pronunciation long. When it is subjoined to the letter « the compound so
formed becomes equivalent to the Sanskrit a and is pronounced as a in tar, far, or
father. When it is subjoined to the vowel & the compound so formed resembles the
Sanskrit $ and is pronounced like i in police and so on.
The Sanskrit Alphabet and their Tibetan equivalents:
The vowels:
* uT’ ш чя 2
67,	/, i. tiy й, ry ri. Ц liy <?, ?.
о, au, ат у ah.
The consonants:
5 nit^l
Tf’"’ITc'l
ha, kha,ga,gha, na.
’W sg
tsa, tshay dsa, ds ha, na.
гг'??ли
ta,tha,da, dha,na.
5’4'S'v3il
ta, tha, da, dha, na.
xix
Ц 4i Ч Ч 41
q • fil’ q’ Л|
pa, pha,la, bha,nia.
c sri
UTV^’^I
ya, ra, la, wa.
^1
да, sa, sa, ha. k?a.
The consonant signs representing the letters and *:
(игц^ч ya-tag) and	ra-tag).
(ty-yfysix)-
The six inverted Tibetan letters representing the Sanskrit letters:
Z 3 <	4 ^1
ia, tha, da, na, , k?a.
У (Mg six).
The six aspirates, i.c., letters having *> subjoined to them,
Vf 4 4i
gha, dha, bha, dsha, dha, lha.
4|-^^'3-o,gc’^3i'X’(or	|
The compounds formed with the four vowel signs of ?, ?/, c and о called gi-ga—
angle’4, shab§-kyu—the hook^, h(jrcn-lu the ‘standing ’ stroke", and
§na-ro ‘ the horns over the nose which are joined to the
consonants including the basic vowel

ki, ku, ke^ ко.
94 9Щ 9^ go-
ci) CU) CG) co.
94 ^4 Л Jo.
Fl-B'F’-FI
c-§-6-£-|
khi) khU) khe, kho.
at] mt) ne, no.
chi) chU) chC) cho.
ni) П14 He, no.
XX
	ti, tu, te, to.		thi, thu, the, tho.
	di, du, de, do.		ni, nu, ne, no.
	pi, pu, pe, po.		phi, phu, phe, pho.
a-g-a-ai	bi, bu, be, bo.		mi, mu, me, mo.
	tsi, tsu, tse, tso.		tshi, tshu, tshe, tsho.
	dsi, dsu, dse, dso.	огзд’огэд	wi, tcu, we, wo.
	shi, shu, she, sho.		zi, zu, ze, zo.
	hi, hu, he, ho.		F, УЩ	Уо.
	ri, ru, re, ro.		li, lu, le, lo.
^44	fS	fO-		si, su, se, so.
	hi, hu, he, ho.		i, u, e, o.
(ya-tag seven).
The seven basic consonants to which the letter °* у is subjoined:
kya, khya, gya, pya, phya, bya, mya.
The four compounds which in their pronunciation resemble
the four simple letters *, a, t, ?:
Q pya is pronounced as « ea.	phya is pronounced as * cha
S Ъуа „	„	„ * ja. § mya „	„	„ Ъ na.
(ra-tag thirteen).
The thirteen basic consonants to which the letter r may be subjoined and in which
though the basic constituent is not pronounced, in Tibet proper yet the
compounds so formed have a pronunciation altogether
different from that of any of the constituents,
U • H • 4J  5 ' 5 ’ V 9' Я  Я • 4  -ч  3  $1
kra, khra, gra, tra, thra, dra, pra, phra, bra, mra, fra, sra, hra,
(ta), (tha), (da), (ta), (tha), (da), (ta), (tha), (da), (ma), (sra), (sa), hra.
xxi
The eight compounds of which the pronunciation resembles that of the Sanskrt
cerebrals в, в, в represented in Tibetan by the inverted letters <?, ₽,	:—
kra tya).	tra (ta), pra (ta).	[g khra (tha).
qj gra (da),	dra ((fa). g bra (da),	g phra (tha).
<№«9 six).
The six basic consonants to which the letter * I is subjoined :
grars’^sni
gla, bla, ria, §la, zla (da).
In the compounds the i.e,, basic are silent except in 3 which is
pronounced as d; the letters not pronounced are underlined.
The same with и subjoined :
3 • aj • g • 5 • а' a I
xO -<Э
khi, ghi, blu, rlu9 $lu, zlu (du),
-y^-q^^-q-q^^]^ (wa-гиг tdg-pa sixteen).
The sixteen letters with (ч 14) i.e. 4 which is a corner of the letter У w
subjoined to them:
т '"ГУПТ Г 3 ’Ч’УУ’-Т’-Ч
4	4	4	4	4 я я *1	я 4 я	4
kwa, khwa, gwa, cica, nwa, hca, diva, tswa, tshwa, shwa, zwa, rwa, Iwa, giva, stva, hwa,
(ra-go twelve).
The twelve basic consonants with 4 r on their head, i.e., surmounting them:
rfca, rga, rna, rja, rna, ria, rda, rna, rba, r?na, rtsa, rdsa.
(the superscribed letter being generally silent is represented by an underlined r)
xxii
QT5tfj-C|^ {la,.(jo ten).
The ten basic consonants with the letter I surmounting them:
g^’g'^’SI’gl’31
lkat Iga, Ina, lea, Ija, Ita, Ida, Ipa, Iba, lha.
the superscribed letter where silent is represented by an underlined I.
(sa-go eleven).
The eleven basic consonants with the letter s surmounting them :
ska, sga, sna, §na, sta, §da, §na, spa, sba, sma, $tsa.
the superscribed letter which is not pronounced is represented by an underlined s.
(ng on-jug five).
The five letters which, when prefixed to initial or basic letters to form a word, ar
seldom in Tibet Proper pronounced and are represented by underlined italics:
g, b, h.
(je-jilg ten).
The ten letters which when affixed to initial letters to form a
word are very softly pronounced:—
у, h, d, n, b, m, h, r, I, s.
(dsog-tshig eleven).
The eleven letters which are reduplicated (to form the preterite) when joined
with a terminal о:
go, no, do, no, bo, mo, ho, ro, lo, so, to.
xxiii
{la-don seven).
The seven postpositions signifying to or at,
sit, ru, rcty du у na, lay tu.
{№-da five).
The postpositive particles to signify possession:—
*7*> kyi, ffyi, hi, yi.
che-^.a, or je-da.
The instrumental particles:—
<7/5, kyii, gyts, his, yis.
the basic "I and its compounds with the letter b ч prefixed,
	bkah.	VI	bkan.	q^|	Muy.	qq^l	bkan.
	bkdb.		bkas.	q^|	bkar.	q^|	bkal. •
VI	bkug.	qij^l	bkitms.	VI	bskur.	VI	bkur.
VI	bkus.	q^SI	bkod.	qTp|	bkol.	qj^l	bkyigs.
q3l	bkye.	ЧЦ|	bkra.	q^l	bkrag.	q^jq^l	bkrabs.
qT|JW|	bkrams.		bkral.		bkri.	q3i	bkru.
q^|	bkrus.		bkren.	q^N|	bkre§.	qTjr^l	bkrons.
VI	bkrol.	qiJ4[	bkrag.	Vi	bskyed.	VI	bskyur.
	b$ko$.	q^|	brko.	q*l|	brku.	qjpJ|	brkyars.
qff^|	brkiun.						
xxiv
q-G^Qj'3q-c$-3|
the basic * and its compounds with the letter ч prefixed,
qscq	fecah.		fecags.		fecan%.	^Sl	bead.
qsq^|	fecab$.		bear.		fecal.	q$^|	fecas.
qloi[	fecil.	q^q^|	bcift§.	efc’l	fecin.		fecug.
qFI	bead.		fecum.	^1	fecu.	q3JI^|	booms.
q^|	feco§.	qT^!|	fecol.		felcid.		
q-$q-q^[
the basic 5 and its compounds with the letter ч prefixed,
q^qpq	fetags.	‘’Fl	fetan.	q^|	fetab.	q^l	fetins.
	bin.	‘’FI	fetus.		fetud.	q^|	fetub.
‘’Fl	fetul.	‘’FP	fetan.	q^|	feteb.		brtan.
	ferten.		festan.		festen.		fella.
^1	fellas	‘’Fl	feltar.		feltos.	q^l	feltam$.
T>!	fertun.	qjQ)|	brtul.	qjqpsq	festegs.	q^| '	festum.
q-<q-q^1
the basic i and its compounds with the letter ч prefixed,
q^4||	btsag.		btsan.	q^l	fetsah.	q^l	fetsa$.
q^|	fetsal.		feisir.	q^plj^| btsugs.		^51	fetsud*
	fetsun.	q^~wi|	fetsum$.	q£jW|	btsem§.		btso.
	fetsog.	q&’|	fetson.	1	fetsod.	4^|	fetson.
qfcq	btsons.	q^l	btso§.		fertsi.	П5Я	fertsub.
	fertse.		fest son.	qr*^i	brtsa?n§.		
XXV

the basic and its compounds wifh the letter ч prefixed,
	bgag.	444^1	bgagi-		bgad.	qqpq	bgam.
4^J|	bgegs.	4^1	bgo.		bgo$.	43^1	bgyant.
	bgyi.		bgyii.		bgyt'd-	44C4	bgran.
	bgran%.		bgrad.		bgres-		bgro.
	brgan.		brgol.	qjc^|	brgyafa.	ед	brgyid.
T'	brgyud.		brgyun.	q3l	brgye.	ед	brgyan.
	brgyal.	"SSI	brgyad.	qiN	bsgyir.	ед	bsgyur.
4|si	bsgyed.	4g4|	bigrob.	ед NO	b^grun.		bsgruns.
Ч§Я| NO	b$grum.	4|C|	btgrefi.	ед	bigron.	ед^1	b$grags.
'O	fogrub*.						
£AD OR THE STOPS.
pronounced shad in Ladak and Amdo but in Tsang and Central
pronounced: Shay	I
or	single perpendicular stroke | = Comma.
Ms double stroke J| == full stop.
four-fold stroke |[J] used at the end of a chapter or section.
point, dot separating syllables.
stroke with dots on its top j or ornamental stop.
Tibet is
i d

ABBREVIATIONS OF NAMES.
A..................Ati-yahi rnamJhar	I
A. K. .............Avadana Kalpalata.
A. R...............Asiatic Researches.
A,	S.............Asta Sahasrika В. T.	Society,
A.	C. ...........Anuruddha-Qataka В.	T. Society.
Abhi...................Abhidhammattha-sangaho.
Ar.................Arabic.
jB. grub...........Bon-gyi grub-mthah
B.	Nam...........Bon Nam shag.
B.T.8. ............Buddhist Text Society.
Bak ...............Baltistan.
Behu...............Behu-bum sfion-po	q	।
Beng...............Bengali language.
Bhar...............Bharata, dialogue, ed.	by	Dr.	A. Schiefner.
Shot...............Bhotan, province.
Bodhi..............Bodhicharyavatara, В. T. Society.
B.ch...............Bon-chos	|
Budh...............Buddhism.
Bum............................Sman-hbum	скип.
Burn. I. ............Bumouf, Introduction au Buddhism Indien.
Burn. II...........Bumouf, Lotus de la bonne loi.
C. ................Central Tibet.
Can................Сапакуа (Тза-па-ка)
СЛо-гаН............Lama Chos-bzan gsufi-hbum.
Choi-g.............Chos-rgyal b§tod-pa tiryrqjvq I
Cs.................Csoma de Kordsi’s Tibetan English Dictionary
Cunm...............Cunningham General, Ladak and the surrounding cc
Ge or C. don.......Ce§-rab $don-bu
G- gya.............Qe§-rab brgya-pa	|
C.	lam................Cam-bha-lahi lam-yig
Qer................... Qer-gyi me-lofi	|
qu. ...............qiia^}
Div. A.............,. .Divyavadana.
D.	qel................Dwan^el me-lofi
D.	Il................Dul-wa Rinpo-che, a Bon religious work.
Dran...............Dran-pa, fier g^hag
Dag...................Dag-byed gsal-wabi me-lofi	।
xxviii
Deb...............Deb-ther snon-po
Desg..............Desgodins, La Mission du Tibet	de	1855-1870.
Dh................Dharmasangraha (Max Muller).
Dham..............Dhammapado, B. Text Society’s	edition.
Do or Dom.........Mdo-man I
Dsam..............Hdsam-glin rgyas-bgad	I
Du^ye.............Dus-hkhor-gyi ye-ges-куг lehu also Du$-hgrel ye-le.
Du§-kho...........Du$-hkhor ti-кй.
Dug...............Gdug$-dkar
Dzl...............Mdo hdsan-blun an ancient collection of Legends of Buddha.
Dv................JE-vam	[
G. Bon............Rgyal-rab§ bon-gyi hbyufi-gnas
G. kah............Rgyal-po bkah-than чц* |
G. 8ndg...........Revd. Graham Sandberg, b.a., ll.b.
Gyal..............Rgyal mtshan rtsemohi gzufi$.
Gyal. 8...........Rgyal-rab$ gsal-icahi me-lon	& <5k* ।
Glr...............Rgyal-rabs, a history of the kings of Tibet quoted by Jaschke.
Gram..............Grammar or native grammatical works.
Grub..............Grub-mthah $el-gyi me-lon ^qwv^gii-ak* [
Gul...............a/WQQ'wjq Mkhas-pahi mgnl-rgyan.
Gya-cher..........Gya-cher rol-pa, Tib. version of the Lalitvistara Ed. by Foucaux.
Glu...............Rgyal-wa Tshans-dbyans rgya-mtshohi mgul-glu.
Gser-phrefi.......J*	*S^4]N	by Nagarjuna.
Gshon.............Gshon-nuhi rngul mgyur	[
Gyu...............Gyu-thog-pahi ruam-thar	|
Hey...............Revd. A. W. Heyde of the Moravian Mission.
Hind..............Hindi language.
Hook..............Sir Joseph Hooker’s Himalayan journals.
Hue...............A bbe Hue and Gabet’s Tibet.
Bbrom. ...........Bbrom-ston-pahi rnam-thar	|
Bbum. ............¥ит-скепчпо^'^\'^\
J, Zan............Dpag-bsam Ijon-bzan	।
Ja................Jachke’s Tibetan-English Dictionary.
Jig..................Bjig-rten lug^kyi b$tan-bcos	I
K. d..............Bkah-hgyur mdo
K. du.............Bkah-hgyur hdul-wa	|
K. dun............Bkah-babs bdun-ldan-gyi rnam-thar	g
H. g..............Bkah-hgyur rgyud
К. ко.............Bkah-hgyur dkon-brtsegs	I
К. my.............Bkah-hgyur myan-hdas
K.	phal.............Bkahhgyur phal-po-che
xxix
K.P...............Karup&-puudarika, В. Т. Society.
.Й7. than. or Kathan. Padma ftkah than.
Kalac. T..........Kalachakra of Taranatha.
Kh................Kham, eastern part of Tibet.
Kha...................Mkhah hgro-mahi brdah.
Khrid. ...........Klon-chen Hkhrid-yig
Kopp..............Koppen, die religion des Buddha.
Kun...............Kunawar, province under British protection.
Kye-rim...........Hjigs-byed b^kyed-rim	I
L.	V.............Lalitavistara.
Lanka.............Lagkavatara-Sutra, В. T. Society.
Lam-rim...........В у ah-chub Lam-gyi rim-pa 5^*44’
Lam. ti...........Lam-don ti-ka	I
Lat...............Latin.
Ld. ..............Ladak.
Ld. Glr...........Ladak Gyal-rab^ a history of Tibet, Ed. by Dr. E. Sehlagintweit»
Lex or Lexx.......Lexicon or Lexicons, native Tibetan dictionaries.
Lh................Lhasa.
Lh. kar...........Lha-sahi dkar-chag	।
Lha. kah..........Lha-hdre bkah-than	I
Lig...................Li-$i gur-khan	a Tibetan glossary.
Lo................Thog-mahi blo-$byon$	(Lam-rim).
Loh...............Klon-rdol gsun-hbum	16th
volume.
L. kah..............Blon-po bkah-than
Ljan$.............Ljah-glin-gi bsgruns	f
If. V. ...........Maha Vyutpatti.
M.	vrtti........Madhyamika Vritti В.	T.	Society.
M. With.............Sir. Monier William’s Sanskrit-English Dictionary.
Ma................Ma-hons lufi-b$tan	Tibetan Apocalypse.
M. gu..............Margyud
Maha, p............Mahaparinibbana-sutta, Pali	Text	Society.
Maha, v.............Mahavariiso.
Mam..........................Ma	mo bska n gso.
Med. .............Medical works of Tibet.
Mi................Mihi mtshan-nid
Mil...............Milaraspa’s mgur hbum hundred thousand songs.
Mil. nt...........Mi-la ras-pahi rnam-thar й’огмгц?Mila’s autobiography.
Min-rda...........Min-don brdah-sprod	(Dag-yig)*
Mong..............Mongolian.
Mng...................Man-hag rgyud «Ц'ммк a medical work.
XXX
Ngrin..............Mgrin-snon zla-wahi rtogs-brjod	I
Mgur. .............Ni-la ra§-pahi mgur-hbum	-цдя
Nnon...............Mnon-brjod mkhas-pahi rna-rgyan	| a Lhasa
block-print work in 80 leaves compiled by Nag Wang Jigten
Wangchug Tagpai Dorje	from
Sakya Pai?chhen’s	Tshig-gter, Tibetan translation of Amarkosa
and other lexicons.
Ntshan.............Ntshan-nid
Naro...............Na-ro chos-dritg	|	|
Nor................Nor-lhahi gzuns
Nag................Dag-yig nag-sgron
Org................Original texts.
Org. m.............Original manuscripts.
Pag.................Rtogs-bjrod dpag-sam	hkhri-tpn	Vе)
Pth................Pad-ma than-yig	|
Pur................Purrang.
lido...................Rdo-rin, sum-rtag§
Rdo-phren. ........Rdo-rjephren-wa.
Rdsa...............Sgom-chen daft rdsa-rtsig-gi	rnam-thar
Rgyan..............Rgyan-gyi bstau bcos	j
Rje-nam............Rje rin-po chehi rnam-thar
Rnam...............Rnam-bgad snin-rgyan	I
Rtsa-g.............Rtsa-rgyud #^51
Rtsa. ti...........Dbu-ma rtsa hgrel-pa @ni§~ka,	I
Rtsa-shun..........Nan-nag rgyud-kyi rtsa-wahi gshun ’Ц’ыГ|5’Вт€£’4|5сг |
Rtsi...............RtsU-kyi bstan-bcos
Rtsii..............Rtsis-gs/d pbyogs-bsgrigs	I
&..................Sanskrit terms from Tibetan-Sanskrit Lexicons of Tibet explained
by Satis Chandra Acharya, m.a.
S. del.............Gsum-hgrcl I
S, g...............Shad-gyud, a medical	work.
S. Lex.............Sanskrit lexicon.
S. phren...........Leg8-bgad gser-hphren	I
S. kar.............Bsam-yas dkar-chag AWW^'mj j
jS. lam............Sambhalai lam-yig.
S. kg..............8a-$kya legs-bfad	j
jS. 0..............Gser-hod dam-pa	|
S.P................Suvarga-prabha, В. T.	Society.
Sama...............Samadhiraya-sutra, В.	T.	Society.
Sam................Samkhya-tattva Naumudi.
Sans...............Sanskrit or Sanskrt.
xxxi
Sck. ..............Prof.	Is. J. Schmidt, Tibetisch-Deutsches Worterbuch. and
Tibetische grammatik.
Schr.................Dr.	A. Schiefner.
Schl. ..............Dr. E. Schlagintwcit, Buddhism in Tibet.
Schtr...............Schroter, editor of the first Tibetan Dictionary.
Set*................Gser-gyi Melofi,
Shad...................Sman-gyi bqad-rgyud	1
Shal...................Shal-lce.
Sikk................Sikkim.
Situ................Si-tuhi sum-rtag§	(^5'9
$5J’T5C'	.
Sman. g...............Sman-rgyud or
Sman................Bder-dge sman-b§dus chen-mo	I
Sfiag...................Snags-$kad	a vocabulary of mystic Sanskrt terms.
Snan...................Snan nag melon
Snift...............Klon-chen §nin-thig-gi theg-mchog mdsod	f
Snd. Hbk.............Rev. G. Sandberg’s Hand-book of Tibetan.
Sog.................Sog-gtam	।
Sorig...............Gso-rig eho$-hbyun	।
Spyod.   ...........Spyod-rnam !
Spyo................Spyod-hjug |
Stg...................B§tan-hgyur	collection of commentaries.
Sukh................... Sukha vati- vy uh a.
Suran...............Surangama Sfitra
Tan. d. ...............B§tan-hgyur-mdo
Tan. §nag.............В st an hgyur snags.
Ta...................Tara	Natha’s Rgya-gar cho$-hbyun, history of the rise of Buddhism.
Theg...................Theg-mchog mdsod
Thgr...................Bar-do tho§-grol chcn-mo
Thgy...................Thargyan, scientific treatises.
Tib...................For	Tibetan.
Trig..................Triglot	a collection of Buddhist terms by Prof. Minayeff.
Ts. or Tsan..........Gtsan Tsang province.
Ts. kah.............Btsun-mo	bkah-than	|
Tshig.............Tshig^-brgya-pa
V. ...............The province of 55^ Dbu^ Central Tibet.
V. C..............Vajra-chedika.
Vai. kar............. Vai-durya dkar-po
Vai. sn................or (Vui-dury §non-po).
Visuddhi. ........Visuddhimaggo В. T. Society.
W\ or W. Tib.......Western Tibet.
xxxii
Was...............Prof. W. Wassiljew, Der Buddhismus.
Wils..............Wilson’s Grammar.
Wts...............Wai-tsang thu-shi; a description of Tibet, Ed. by Klaproth.
Ya-sel............Vai-dura ya-sel	|
Yaft-ti...........Dbyans-can tikd.
Yid...............Yid-kyi mun-sel
Yig...............Rgya-bod yig-tshan	|
Yig. к............Yig-b§kur rnam-ffshag
Yon. .............Yon-gtan rndsod	1
Z. ...............Zafis-dkar
Zam...............Brdah-yi h$tan-bco$ Za-ma-tog	(Dag-yig).
and * prefixed to some words indicate them as fada rnifi) belonging to the
older orthography.
and + prefixed to some words indicate their Indian or Sanskrit origin.
* words marked with asterisks were sent by Dr. Albert Grunwedel for being incor-
portated in this Dictionary. They were collected by Dr. A. Schiefner.
GRAMMATICAL ABBREVIATIONS
abbr.	abbreviated; abbreviations.	genit.	genitive case.
abstr.	abstraction; abstract.	gram.	grammar.
aoc.	according to.	ibid.	ibidem, in the same place.
accus.	accusative case.	id.	idem, the same.
act.	active, actively.	i. <?.	id est, that is.
adj.	adjective.	imp.	imperative mood.
adv.	adverb, adverbially.	impers.	impersonal, impersonally.
arith.	arithmetic.	incorr.	incorrect, incorrectly.
b.	books.	inf.	infinitive mood.
c.	cum, with.	init.	initio, at the beginning of a longer
c.c.	construitur cum, construed with.	inst.	instead.	[article.
c.c.a.	construed with the accusative, etc.	instr.	instrumentative case.
cf.	confer, compare.	interj.	interj ection.
ch.	chapter.	interr.	interrogative, interrogatively.
cog.	cognate, related in origin.	inters.	intransitive.
col. or colloq.	colloquial, colloquially.	i.o.	instead of.
collect.	collective, collectively.	irr.	irregularly, irregular.
com.	commonly.	lang.	language.
comp.	compound, compounds.	lit.	literally, also literature.
conj.	conjunction.	long.	longitude.
contr.	contracted.	masc.	masculine gender.
corr.	correct, correctly.	med.	medical works, [longer article.
correl.	correlative, correlativcly.	med.	medio, about the middle of a
dat.	dative ease.	metaph.	metaphorical, metaphorically.
demon.	demonstrative.	met. or meton. metonymical, metonymically.	
deriv.	derivative.	myst.	mystical or mystically.
dub.	dubious.	n.	name.
E.	east.	N.E.	north-east.
e. g.	exempli gratia, for instance.	neut.	neuter gender.
eleg.	elegant, elegantly.	nij.	ni fallor, if I am not mistaken.
elswh.	elsewhere.	n.p.	noun proper.
emphat.	emphatical, emphatically.	N.W.	north-west*
erron.	erroneous, erroneously.	num.	numeral.
esp.	especially.	obs.	obsolete.
equiv.	equivalent.	opp.	as opposed to.
euph.	euphemistical, euphemistically.	orig.	for original work.
ex.	example.	orthog.	orthography.
expl.	explain, explainations.	P-	page.
extr.	extrimo, towards the end of a	para.	paragraph.
fem.	feminine gender, [longer article.	partic.	participle.
fig-	figurative, figuratively.	pass.	passive, passively.
frq.	frequently.	past.	past tense.
fut.	future tense.	perh.	perhaps.
gen.	general, generally.	pers.	person, personal.
xxxiv
pf.	perfect tense.	S.E.	south-east.
pl.	plural number.	sim.	similar in meaning, similarly.
pleon.	pleonastic, pleonastically.	sing.	singular number.
p. n.	proper name.	sh or 9	for ч or p-.
po.	poetically.	symb. num.	symbolical numeral.
pop.	popular language.	Syn. or synon.	synonymous.
poss. p.	possessive pronoun.	termin.	terminative case.
postp.	postposition.	trop.	tropically.
prep.	preposition.	trs.	transitive.
pres, pret.	present tense, preterite.	V.	vide, sec.
prob.	probably.	vb.	verb.
pron.	pronoun.	vb. a.	verb active.
prop.	properly.	vb. nt.	verb neuter.
prOY.	provincialism, provincial.	vulg.	vulgar, low expression.
q. v.	quod vide, which see.	vulgo.	in common life.
rel.	relative.	W.	west.
resp.	respectful, respectfully.	w.e.	without explanation.
sbst	substantive.		
TIBETAN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY.
И", Ka the first letter of the Tibetan
alphabet, corresponding in sound to the
Sanskrit or the English K. Of this
letter we read:	ka-ni
rtsa-wa shc$-par grays (К g. 4^4) “ the
ka is called the root.” As the first letter
it has the sense of “ the beginning ”:
^'^v^'Qka-nas dag-pa pure from thebegin-
ning. Again, it can signify “ power ” :
snan htsher-rufi nia-shti
ка-med though unpleasant to hear, I have
no power not to say it;	nia
gnafika-med powerless not to give;
hgro ka-med powerless not to go,
cannot avoid going. *| ka has almost
the same sense in	ka cis
kyafi mi-phan hchi-wa la (Lo. S5\ no re-
source avails at death. This letter seems
to have other metaphorical meanings; thus
we read :	ka shes bya-wa
hdod-pa yin (K. g. F 179) “ka, so to be
called, is desire.”
4] I: 1. when used in indicating
numbers ka signifies one or first. 2. in
modern Tibetan as an affix to many words
it denotes: the, all the, the very.
skabs-ka has the same meaning as
skabs-su, on a certain occasion; de-ka
that very; giiis-ka the two. 3. in a
large number of words we find occurring
as the second syllable. In some of these it
has been added apparently as a differenti-
ative particle; and in the colloq. we often
find it annexed to the older monosyllabic
form without explainable reason.
И] II: indeed; surely:
Slav yafi dran-du ka sofi (Pag. 4#) later
again he indeed recollected (the separa-
tion).
”) ka for; ”1'4 ka-ica a pillar.
*| 'F ka-kha 1. the A-B-C, or alphabet.
2. a feather:	bsafi-skad
la ka-kha ni sgro-ho (7f. g. Я £16) in
the secret language ka-kha signifies a
feather.
’’I F'4 ka-kha-pa a beginner of the
alphabet; a child.
ka-tho, also ”|’f5‘? ka-khahi tho, an
alphabetical register; an index.
Ka-thog lit. “on the top of ”| n. of
a celebrated Buddhist monastery in Kham
belonging to the Rnifi-ma School, the Head
Lama of which is believed always to be an
incarnation of his predecessor and holds
the title of	I The hill on
2
TO I	2
which this monastery was built is said to
have resembled the letter *| ka.
(J)eb. 4|
26) On the bank of the Di-chu (Hbri-c/nt),
near Fom-po, is the monastery called
Kathog.
*ГУП ka-dag = *Г^’У1ГЧ ka-na§ dag-pa
pure from the beginning. According to
the Ritin-ma School of Buddhism it means
slon-pa-ilid (gunyata) emptiness, or
the void ; that which is pure from the
beginning:	25'n|-5q|-^-A^^3j-§'5q’q5'^’54-
I (17#. 14) that which is not com-
pounded, being evolved of itself, is puro
from the beginning.
*	1’1* ka-sde 1. the four letters in
the first group of the Tibetan alphabet,
namely, | 2. in astronomy con-
secutive numbers:	I
(Ya-sel. 1/.5) the order of figures in the
(zodiac sign of the) crocodile is con-
secutive.
*	1’4 ka-pa the first volume of a work or
\ series of works; a volume or anything
els? marked with the letter *| ka.
*	1’5^ ka-dpey also expressed *|ka
khahi dpe, an A-B-C book; a primer.
*	|’|^* ka-phrefi. (ka-theng) = 1’5 kali the
series of consonants in the Tibetan
alphabet.
*	|’*5 ka-mcd helpless, powerless.
’^’^ka-smadsum-cu lit. “ the thirty
(letters of the Tibetan alphabet) below the
letter *|.”
*!’?« ka-rtsom an acrostic; a metrical
composition in which the initial letters
jf each line form a continuous word or
sentence.
TO I
*1’5 ka-li ordinarily written for the
Tibetan Sanskrt word 1’5 (*1 + ^5).
J 1’5	ka-phrefi the series of
letters gen. beginning with *] ka, i.et<f the
consonants of the Tibetan language:
yi-gc a-li ka-li yin “ letters are of
the им series, i.e., vowels, and of the *1
series, i.e., consonants” (Situ, 3).
I: ka-ka 1. the crow. 2.
the cry of tho crow:	I
( Vai. kar.) “ if a crow caws, wealth will be
found.”
II: excrement (nursery word);
in W. *]’*]’ka-ka Z«n-re=French faire
eaca (Jdi).
t *1'^ ka-ka-ni ^rrfWt 1. a small
coin of Ancient India (Ck.):
^| “ ka-ka-ni of the value of twenty shells
(coteries) У 2. the fourth part of a
p<ena. 3. the quarter of a mana. 4. the
seed of A6rus precatorius, used as a weight
in medicine. 5. the shell of Cyprata
nioneta, used as money.
ka-ka-ran the cucumber is
so called in Kunawar (Jd.).
t vr* srarrfK n. of a fabulous snowy
mountain situated to the north of a river
called Paint, where a medicinal plant
called Tujanaya grows (S. Lam. 36).
Ka-ki-ni 1. n. of a Buddhist
literary work. 2. n. of a female Buddhist
deity: ip’lfwrg| (D. 20)
“ (taught) the rites concerning the goddess
Kakini to the saint Mal-bye Tshan-pa.”
t TO Ka-ku-sta n. of a river
(K.d.S582).
’Т’ГГ’1
3
’1ТЧ1
Ка-ки bha-ya ЖфН 1. п.
of a plant used in medicine, Terminalia
atjuna, 2. =	dug-то nitn-
giqiti-nor the “fruit of the tree of little
poison ” (tfag.).
*	Ka-ke-ri-ya	n. of
a tree which grew on Grdhrakuta, or
the Vulture-peak Hill of Magadha
(К, ко» ”] 3).
tT4 ka-ko applied in Sikkim for
ka-ko-ta.
т’гka-ko-ta 1. cardamom,
the fruit of Cocculus Indicusy a plant with
a berry, the inner part of which consists
of seeds with a wax-like aromatic sub-
stance. 2.	Saccharum munja^
but is variously described as a fruit used
in medicine; a poisonous tree-drug; also
= the castor-oil plant.
Syn. tshan man ; ^'4zta-wa
gshon-nu;	zla-wahi bye-ma (jtfnou.).
пр ka-ca (also ka-cha) articles,
goods, effects, property, furniture:
| the king who follows
after property; *|’property
causes satisfaction.
Syn. §pyad-lag\ ^’95 yo~byad\
dnos-cha§ (Mnon.).
’4'S’i Ra-can n. of a place in Tibet
(Deb. «I 45).
ka-ci colloq. ’’it ka-rji 1. a kind
of coarse white cotton cloth largely im-
ported into Tibet from Nepal and used
for making prayer-flags. A piece of ka-ci
is generally four to six yards long and a
foot and-a-half broad. 2. a kind of muslin;
a very fine cotton cloth imported from
Benares:	for each piece
of ka-ci eight bushels of barley.
ka-ci skyem-ra§ fine cotton
cloth or muslin, so called from its resem-
blance to the superior quality of Tibetan
paper called skyems;	^^'”1’^’3^’^1
(5. kar. 179) different sorts of cotton
cloth, muslin, &c., brought from Upper
Tibet; ”Г$’ an inferior kind of ka-ci
cloth.
j np’o) ka-ci-li n. of a flower
(IT. my» ”] 20. is identical with
and ^t, a plant with an esculent root
(Arum coiocasia) cultivated for food.
’’1’1 ka-lci sometimes used for
T?4! Ka-lcog an abbr. of the names
of two celebrated translators of the Kah-
gyur :	Ka-wa Dpal-brtsegs
and	Kluhi rgyal-mtshan of
Lcog-ro»
”T* ka-cha —ka-ca.
ka-cha-ta a habitation, a hut
{SchtrY
W ka-chug so, like that, accord-
ingly;	ka-chug mdsod means
dc-ltar-bycd^ do like that, do accord-
ingly:	“if Amo
is disinclined lot (him) not do like that”
(A. 94).
ka-ta in mystic language a term
for mother (K. g. 210.
t ka-ta-ka 1. n. of a tree. ’’1’5‘”I‘
if an eye-medicine be made from
kataka and honey, all eye-diseases may be
removed (S, Lam, 38). 2. the
clearing nut-plant, Strychnos potatorum. A
seed of this plant when rubbed on the
inside of a water jar produces a precipita-
tion of the earthy particles of water,
Wl
4
mi
ka-ta-ma-ka n. of a kind of
bird (К. ко. "| 2).
Ka-ia-ya, also *1’5 Ra-tya n.
of a place in Ancient India, probably the
country of the Gcetae; according to Cs.
Scythia; n. of a district in Tibet.
i	Ra-ta-ya-na nog-can lit.
Katyayana with a hump on his shoulders ;
one of the six heretical teachers who
disputed with Buddha.
$ Ka-tahi = ka-iya ya-na
зггншм the son of Katyayani; n. of a
JMiksu (Buddhist mouk) (&ag. J).
* wfsS-g-Zi Ra-tahi Ьи-то
the goddess Um&; also the mother of the
Bhiksu Katyayana.
t Ra-tyahi bu жТсЦТи^г lit. the
son of Katya. It is said that the family
name of Katyayana was given because
the patriarch of the tribe took the
vows of an ascetic from the sage Nada
(K. d.S127).
ka-ta-ra n. of a flower
(K. d. Г» 12).
rehu mig a table
of figures made of lines crossing each
other and forming squares.
TO ka~tan = w ra§ cotton cloth
(Al/;. 2).
ka-tam-bha described as 2?Я‘
(7Г. d. 3 46#), n. of an insect.
i	ka-to-ra — tf^' (pthofi a basin,
bowl; ЖсТГГг (also	ka-to*ra) the
Tibetan form of the Hindi word katora.
t	Ra-ta-ki a generic
name for mountain; n. of a mountain
(8ch.).
Ra-fa-ki-la n. of a
city in Ancient Sind ($. Lam. 35) \ lit. a
pillar of grass.
’K’2’? Ra-ta Bo~ta Indian n. for
the town of Paro in Bhutan (Dsam.).
Ra-tu-ka n. of a fabulous city
which is described to have been fifty
yojana in circumference.
ka-io-ra v. ka-to-ra.
ka-tha*ra in Kuna war a sort of
peach (Ja.).
Ra-thi-^i a Chinese minister
who founded the monastery of Hi kican-
zse (Yig. 1/5).
ka-the v. *4’4 ka-wa.
t ZT5'^ ka-det-ru-ha (prob,
a bird nestling on khadira trees)
n. of a kind of bird (R. ко. 2).
-dam-pa Втж 1. n.
of a tree; *]Vrq‘^5q]	the ka-
damba flower; the tree Nauclea cadamba,
a tree with orange-coloured fragrant
blossoms. 2.	I
n. of a species of bird of a deep
blue colour and also that of a tree. 3. a
kind of grass.
ka-dam-pa can cloud, v.
§prin-pa (Mnon.).
птч ka-da-ka ж^ж also ka-
da-pa 1. n. of a fruit. 2. n. of a bird
(7Г. d. ч 20).
+ при ka-da-pa Ж5ТЧ n. of a fruit
(K. d. °< 202); prob. the fruit of the
tree Ficus religiosa.
ka-na-kam жнж gold; a
pedantic synonym for 4^4 gser (MnonT).

5
^1
n. of an Indian
pandit who visited Tibet (J. ZafL).
ka-na-tsa (prob,	lit.
sprouting; generic name for a tree; the
plant Abrus preeatorius;	I
the flowers of the ka-na-tsa tree (If. g.
ч 227).
ka-na-tsa-na	n. of
a tree (K. d. « 1*22) ; the plant
Commelina Bengal? nw.
w ka-na-ya n. of a kind of
weapon; a short lance attached by a string
to the arm, by w hich it can be drawn back
after having been thrown at an object;
the hands, a swFord, a lance and a large
arrow (К. g. ч 113).
Ka-ni-ka also
n. of a celebrated Turuska (Tartar) king
who ruled over Palhava, Kashmir and
Jalandhara (the provinces of the Panjab
and Kabul) in ancient times; he embraced
Buddhism and is said to have held the
last great Buddhist Council for the com-
pilation of the Mahayana Tripitaka in
the first century B.C.
Ka-gnam n. of a province of
Tibet north-east of Kong-po; ka
gnam-pa a native of Ka-gnam.
+ ka-na-ya зпцд for *|A** ka-na-
ya a kind of spear or lance. W and
are synonymous terms.
ЧуЧ’О! ka-pa-la зпггч! the skull; the
forehead. In Tib. Budh. kapala or
kapali signifies either the skull or a
drinking cup made of the human skull.
I: Kapi n. of the language that
was anciently spoken in the country of
Kapistan; n. of a country. The Bon
Rgyal-rals (a history of the kings of
Tibet), according to the Bon historians,
was asserted to have been written in Kapi,
the language of the gods, in which the
ancient Bon scriptures were mostly
written. It is also stated that the Bon
books were translated into the language
of the Persians or Tajik people, from
which again the Tibetans translated thorn
into the language of Shan Shun in
Northern Tibet.
II: 1 gum, resin (Jd.);
the resin extracted from a medicinal
plant called pig-pa (Juniper communis).
The root is gathered in autumn or
spring and being thoroughly cleansed, is
cut into pieces and beaten into pulp. The
juice is squeezed out with a clean cotton
rag, and being poured into a clean
dry earthen pot is subjected to a gentle
heat. As soon as it begins to thicken it
is stirred with a spoon till it gains the
consistency of resin. 2. the hog-plum,
Spondias magnifera ; a tree; Pentaptira
tomento^a; the mane-fig tree; Ficui
inpeet oria. Also a w’ood-apple tree.
3. n. of a yellow orpiment.
ka-pi ka-tJia n. of a medi-
cinal plant (If. y. « 51); the plant
Uucuna pruritus.
+ *|’3‘5 ka-pi-da^1^ ka-pi.
Ka-pi-na фТчн n. of a king
of Southern India who lived in Buddha’s
time and considered himself the greatest
monarch of the wrorld. His vanity was
exposed by the Great Teacher, who con-
verted him to Buddhism and ultimately
raised him to the position of an Arhat
(K.d.*35$.

G

4	4>fw n. of a
Brahmanioal sage whoso hermitage was
at the mouth of the Ganges (S. Lam.).
ka-pin-tha	n. of a
very delicious fruit (7Г. d. 20).
i nj’^ ka-pin-da-ka n. of
a kind of bird.
Ka-pn-ta n. of a place in
Ancient India where, in accordance with
the curse of a holy sage, adultery and
incest were punished with the burning of
the house in which such crimes were
committed (D^am.).
”T9S ka-pcd a gourd; a sort of
medicinal fruit (Lu*,).
ПуЧ ka-pha a tree.
Л]'Ч I: Ka-wa n. of the mother of
Bromton, tho founder of the Buddhist
hierarchy of Tibet {Hbrom. Iй 37).
Н:=сЧВ*’1'ч gzug-pa	a
pillar, column, stake, support; also tri-
dent ; 'T^ ka-ske the neck of a pillar or
column; ka-$ke$ the shaft;
ka-geig-ma a small house or temple hav-
ing but one pillar ; *4’^ ka-chen the prin-
cipal pillar, a very large pillar; 'Ч'^ ka-rten
the base of a pillar ; ka-$teg§ the
pedestal of a pillar; ’Ч’^ ka-gdan tho
base or pedestal on which л pillar stands ;
’Ч'й^ ka-spuns a colonnade, a number
of pillars; F4’«r<p1’^ a grooved pillar;
q5 ’ifwfc' w ЯТН: (lit, the town
of houses built with pillars and king-posts)
one of the thirty-six holy places of the
Buddhists ;	ka-wa bum-pa-can
one of the pillars of the great Jokhang
temple at Lhasa, with the upper part of
its capital in the shape of a water-pot;
nfq-ger^'saj ka-wa $brul-mgo-can the pillar
that had a serpent-shaped capital; *4*4’
ka-wa <pn-lo-can the pillar which
had designs of leaves of troes round its
capital;	ka-wa eefi-mgo-can
the pillar with a lion’s head on its capital.
These were tho names given to the four
principal pillars of the Jokhang temple
of Buddha at Lhasa, built by King Sron-
btsan sgam-po about 640 A.D., after
the model of the pillars in the palace of
tho Emperor T’ai-tsung, called Kyii Kin
tin, tho palace of tho golden dragon.
gnam-gyi ka-wa WffiTW the
pillar of heavon;	sa-yi ka-wa
tho pillar of oarth; й’3)’>4‘«1 me-yi-
ka-wa	the • pillar of fire;
’Ч’ч chu-yi ka-wa	the pillar
of water,—these aro tho fabulous and
metaphorical pillars mentioned in tho
astrological works of Tibet. ^RjS^q
gyu-hi ka-wa a pillar of turquoise, or
ono that is studded with turquoises
(Lha. kar. 13).
’Ч'р^’я Ka khol-ma n. of a historical
pillar in tho grand templo of Buddha
at Lhasa, inside of wdiich tho earliest
known JIS. of Tibet, called
and said to be the will of King
Sron-btsan Sgam-po, was alleged to have
been found in the middle of the eleventh
century AD.
ka-mgo the capital of a pillar.
’Ч	ka-wa-can lit. with
a pillar or pillars; a house. In the sense
of being the supports or upholders of the
school of Marpa, the Tanlrik sage of
Tibet, his four disciples were called
ka-can bshi “the four pillars of his
’r)4^’V4^n
7

school.” They received his bkak, commis-
sion, regarding Buddhism, and were also
called ’4^ “the four commissioned
ones.” The following were the four
disciples: E4|’&r^ Chos-rdor of Rnog;
Bsod-nams rgyal-mtshan\
t Mtshur-dican rdo-rje of
Tol; and «Нля-ч Mi-la ra$-pa.
ка-gcig sg )-gcig 1. a small
house with but one pillar and one door,
gen. a small prison-house. 2. A mode of
capital punishment is said to be called so
when the culprit is fastened to a pillar in
a dungeon until he dies of hunger (Ja.).
ка-hphan the ornamental silk
fringes and embroidered hangings made
in various mythical designs for decorating
the capitals of pillars.
nj q-qsc/q a strong well-finished
pillar.
’rpqrgvq'fft ка-wahi sbyar-bkcd a cor-
nice; the ornamental projections, &c.,
which surmount a pillar; the decorative
pieces which are attached to a pillar.
ka-man~ma a house with many
pillars.
’Т&Ч ka-mig the square space (of about
twelve feet) enclosed by four pillars is
called a ka-mig\ the area or enclosure
of a colonnade is measured by the ka-mig.
Tlr ka-rtse the top of a pillar.
ka-rtse	ka-yan-rfsc) the
upper part or capital of a pillar.
ka-gshu	capital of a
wooden pillar; a piece of timber in the
shape of a bow fixed on a pillar to hold
up the main beam {Lex.).
the extremity of a pillar which
projects over the capital (architrave)-
np-tjcw ka-gubs =	ka-wahi gabs
the cover of a pillar, perhaps the abacus.
пр III: a particular faculty acquired
by a mystic process in which the appetites
—hunger, thirst, &c.—are suppressed.
This is one of the six practices of the
Buddhist Tantriks who practise yoga
(meditative concentration).
np IV :	a large vein or artery
in the abdomen ; a vessel in the side of
the breast containing vital air (Я1ЧЧЩ),
supposed to be brought into action in
above mystic process.
kabita	n. of a tree,
the elephant or wood-apple, Feronia
Ekphuntum {8. Lam, 38).
Пр’^’^1 ka-bi-ta-la 1. n. of a tree
(7Г. d. « 4^)- 2. probably benzoin,
stnrax.
Ka-bu-lo, described as
n. of a Gandharra Raja—Prince
of the celestial musicians (К. my. 'И 49^).
ka-bed or 5’4 ku-tca, gourd. In
the district of Ped-та dkod in Tibet, just
north of Assam, the gourd is called w'S*
alburn:	j the gourd
fruit cures fever and diarrhoea :
burnt or baked gourd eaten with molasses
cures bloody diarrhoea (К. g. « 47).
+ nffol Ka-bel n. of a city in Ancient
Udyana, «>., in	U-rgyan yul pro-
bably the modern Kabul.
Ka-bo-ka n. of a Prince of
Ancient Kabul (S. Lam. 17).
лузга ।
8
лу&?луо| I
Пу^ГЖ Ka-ma-cha or *1’8^ Ka-mu-
tzha n. of a sacred place in Assam
where there is a stone-cut symbol of Kali,
the Hindu goddess.
ka-ma-ta the lotus (&ag.).
t ^’1" ka-ma-tai snffa a kind of
medicinal plant:
I “ if the root of ka-ma-tsi be placed
on the top of the head, sleep arises ”
(7Г. (j. « 56).
-t-	kama~ru 1. Kamariipa in
Assam. 2. alabaster (Sch.);	rdo
ka-nia-ru-pa marblo.
ka-ma-la 1. the water-
lily, lotus Nelumbium. 2. a river. 3.=
gro$ sems a consulting or reflect-
ing mind (&ag.). The word Kaniala is
variously used by the Tibetans, and the
following synonyms of it (both symbolic
and metaphoric) tire enumerated in the
work (flag.) :—
Syn. sgrahi §ne-ma soft tones ;
a branching tree ;
glafi-pohi myos-btun the teats of an ele-
phant ;	n. of a Buddha;
bden-smra-wa one who speaks the
truth;	nam-mkhah the sky;
ног-bu a gem ; 3^'§S’inVr4 snafi-byej
pa the second luminary, the moon; crgc?
La-gjafi a bull; «кдШяад bar.gyi mt shams
the middle zone or boundary:	bya
fian*pa swan; sbran-chafi beer made
cf honey ;	dicafi-pohi gsal a
lamp, that which clears the sight; «Л wm-
he a buffalo; mi-mohi gbt a woman’s
song;	bshon-pahi rta a riding
horse; yul-phran a small country;
ri-dbag§ a deer ;	lun tshag§-
pa a collected mind;	rni-po eke
precious thing ;	’jp ri-rab-kyi
ri~phran a smaller peak of the mountain
Sumeru; ^’5 $ifi-rta a chariot; p
gser-gyi kha-dog the colour of gold.
a celebrated
Buddhist philosopher of the ancient
monastery of Vikramafila in Magadha,
who introduced the Yogacarya Mahayana
School of Buddhism into Tibet, after
defeating in controversy a Chinese
hoshang who wished to convert the
Tibetans to the doctrine of the ° do-
nothing ” school during the reign of King
Khri-srofi, $de-bu btsan about
the middle of the 8th century A.D.
-JI'S) ka-ma-li a very sharp sword
(flag. 2): 4<»|«i5g^H-3I-’T»<'ei,aS,S3yfll’’'‘'l
(D. JI.) grasping in his nine hands nine
lotus-hafted razors.
4|ka-mu-la rdo-rgyad n.
of a sort of alabaster or steatite found in
Central Tibet (Ja.).
ka-tsa rked-nag rusty and
crooked :	f “ the
steel ribs of the coat of mail which are
rusty and bent ” (Jig.).
4 ПГ^-Л]	и. of a kind of
bird (7Г. ко. ”] 2.).
ka-isaJin-di (prob. 3iTfe-
dress made of a
heavenly stuff, t>., the finest kind of silk
which is used for presentation at an
interview, or when making an application
for any favour, &c.; n. of a very fine
cloth or linen made of Kacilindi (7e^.).
+	Ka-tsan-ka-la n. of a
Bhiksunl (Buddhist nun) (K. d. -*j 18).
’ifTSl’qsji

9
Ka-tsi-li-ban the Kachili
forest:
V> I on the northern bank of the river
Rohita there is the Kachili forest and a
Nepalese stronghold (Dxam. 21).
ka-rtsa-ga-la the sea
(Schtr.).
ka-rtsam a species of wild oats;
it differs from yug-po or Tibetan oats
and is considered superior to buckwheat,
but inferior to wheat,
Ka-tshal n. of a place situated
to the east of Lhasa;
the monastery known as Ka-tshal
Lha-khan of Mal-gro in Upper U (Cen-
tral Tibet).
Ч|тф 4pr&f2| Ka-tshig$ chen-po the
title of a Buddhist work on the genealogy
of the Kings of Tibet (Gyal. & 28).
described as
(Dsani.) un. of an Indian Chaitya situated
on the high hill (of Gaya Gauri).”
I: ka-ra щдк sugar:
I having taken sugar and
arsenic in equal parts, if beer made from
the root of Cobhajana be drunk, the gravel
of the bladder will be ejected;
Й4! ka-ra dkar-pnug brown sugar;
I a kind of brown
crystallized treacle and honey; *|
ka-ra tog-tog loaf sugar, sugar in
lumps;	Rgyal-mo ka-ra sugar
from Rgyal-mo Ron, situated on the con-
fines of Tibet and China; S’** *4 A bye-ma
ka-ra powdered sugar, or granulated sugar;
rocky candy (K. g.« 46).
II: tent-pole ;	ka-ra
sdig-pod a tent-pole with a grooved bulb
on top used in some countries; ’qA’^r
I or	| a tent-pole without
a grooved bulb on top.
+	ka-ran-dsa
a medicinal fruit or berry; n. of
the tree Pongamia glabra and Verbesina
scandent.	I karandsa pro-
duces natural warmth (in the stomach).
Syn.	rul-byed skyes; wgsp*
mar-gyi дай;	rtsod bycd-ma;
SB4 hjam-hbras dbyc-ica;
tshigs drug-pa; ^**’^*’|q* siie-ma lus-tcib$
(кИ.йин.).
t TA ka-ra-da n. of a bird, the cry
of which is like the sound of a drum.
It is described in Buddhist books as like
fire iu colour, and as located in the abodes
of the A sura (K d. ^15).
TAI’* ka-ra-na-jus a kind of fine
Chinese satin (Jig.).
the kinds of
satin (called) karanajus and damjus, &c.,
are distinguished by their colour and the
shape of the figures on them.
TA^ ka-ra-na-rus a kind of
Chinese satin:
aprons are mostly made of kara-
narus and ta-shin satin.
'ТГ’АГ ka-ra-nan in the mystic
language of the Dakinl of Tibet=the food
of pigs (K. g. F 27).
ka-ra-bi-ra or *]A’^ a ka-ra
wi-ra	1. a fragrant oleander,
Nerium odorum ; a species of soma; a
3

10
wii
particular magical formula or spell for
recovering a missile of mystic properties
after its discharge. [The name karavira is
also applied to the daphne plant, from the
bark of which Tibetan paper is made. The
creeper called the white karavira rubbed
with the blood of the rock-lizard and the
medicine $mutha rubbed with Bhringiraja^
when conbined, make an ointment which
cures venereal eruptions on the skin of the
penis (K. g. * 49) •] 2. a sword or scimitar.
Syn. Si'Xfc’Ss за-sor rgod*	$o-sor
bdiad ; 5*^5 rta gwd;	dpah-po
lag-pH;	me-tog
can;	brgyad gyr$; gtum-po
№ion.).
ka-ra ru-bc-ka	a
kind of bird (7Г. ко. *| 2).
ka-ra ha-ri=^*^ bu-ram
>ugar (Sman. 291).
t	ka-ra n da-гса
t TO I: ka-ran-da 1. a
sort of wild duck ;	I
karanda is tho name of a sweot-voiced
bird. 2.	also in Sans, a
basket or covered box of bamboo wicker-
work used for keeping books in; a basket
for flowers;
n. of a Buddhist work (TC. d. 275).
+	Ц:	white.
ka-ras, abbr. of Kaipkahi ra^
the Benares muslin which used to be in
great demand in Tibet. In the sacred
books of Tibet the gods are generally
dressed in fine Benares muslin.
| for imitation Benares
muslin the price per piece is two Are of
barley.
*	Ka-ri.hi bu-mo
the daughter of Katyayana ; Uma.
ka-ru 1. a wedge (Ja.). 2. white
(&ag. 3).
ka-re, probably Я да-re. The use
of the latter is very common in Eastern
Tibet. In Sikkim they say ka-te, what ?
•which P 4J-4^Л4!4 Upfeaka, in
what do you delight ? (А. У4).
Ka-la-ta in mysticism
| Ka-la-ta is described as a
man of lovely appearance (ЛГ. g. 4 216).
Ka-la-pifi-ka	a
sparrow; a singing bird with a sweet voice.
According to Lex. the Indian cuckoo.
Syn.	rgyal gsufi yan-lag;
rje$ hgro mkhan;	tflan-
paht dpe-ean;	rna-uahi bend•
$go-nahi du§ na§ $kad $mrahi
dwan (Mfion.).
t	n. of a king:
at that
time (there lived) a king named Kalaputra,
fierce and wrathful (7Г. my. 209).
4	К a-la ro-zan, lit. чгга,
the black lord of death who eats the dead;
n. of a Naga.
4	pitcher, jar; a large
waterpot.
ка-lag in W. mud; earth and
water used instead of mortar; also other
similar compounds (Ld.).
4	mehil-pa
a species of bird, probably the Bhl-hhl. •
ve>3TVTl I
11

Ka-lan-da-ka ф^ф
1. a town. 2. an individual r
I having arrived at the town of
Kalandaka :
| then appeared Zan-jin the
long-lived, son of Kalandaka (K. d. ъ.
34).
+ ТТ|'^’£Я’Л| kadan-dsa-ri-ka W^-
fbs 1. a flowering plant; also the flower
used in yajna—sacrificial fire (K. g. 5 33).
2. belonging to an animal struck
with a poisoned arrow; tobacco.
1 HJ’QJJI’ZfJ ka-lam-ka, described as
n. of a place in Ancient India
(Bsam. 14)»
+	ka-tam-ba the pot-herb
Coiwolvolus repens, Uenispermum ealumba ;
a medicinal plant:
the leaf of Kalamba when eaten
improves health (K. g. * 44)»
t каДа-ра ф<ятч 1. an aggre-
gate of many accomplishments; an
accumulation of excellent and wonderful
properties in one place or thing (Lexx.).
2. the Buddhist Utopia; the capital of
the fabulous kingdom of S'ambhala.
np ka-li an abbreviation of the word
ka-pa-li, a skull (Lexx.).
kaJl-ka 1. described as
| the fruit of the
magnolia flower-plant; a bud of that flower
(Mnon.). 2. prob. a plant bearing
a nut which is used as a febrifuge, grey
Bondne.
Ka-lin-ga or Ka-lin-
1. one of the thirty-six Buddhist
sacred places said to be situated at a
distance of 60 yojana S. E. of Gaya—also
the birth-place of Vis'wantara (Bas-ye.
39). 2. a bird, a native of an island or
maritime province of India bordering on
the Indian Ocean (7f. d. *75).
ka-le or kaleb saddle-
cloth (Ja.).
ka-fa — ft^'£ $pan-rtsi (Nag.)
a species of grass (7Г. d. ч 91);
Saeeharum spontaneum.
I: ka-^i-ka the finest Benares
muslin; cotton cloth of the finest texture
formerly manufactured in Benares;
згтрцф щф Benares muslin which
in ancient times was of great repute. It
is said that even the gods longed to wear
clothes made of this material. According
to Cs. ka-gi-ka means a kind of flax as
well as linen cloth;	| white
Benares linen ; *]	the oil of
kaqika grain, prob, linseed oil.
II: of Kashi (Benares); an
inhabitant of Benares.
ka-gi ka phra-mo fine flax;
Benares muslin.
ka-gis, abbr. of	cotton
cloth.
Ф	n- °f a plftce or
island in the Indian ocean (K. cl. \319):
one of the nine divisions of Jambu-
dvipa.
ka-sa the colloq. fonn of the
expression q*|4*<ipw bkah gsal, a definite
order or clear message. According to
Jd. kasa and kaso are mutilated forms
of bkah bstsal, meaning in Ld.
“yes, sir; very well, sir ; at your service.”
* 'ТрЗу’Л]Л ka-san ka-ra
^8к.« n. of a city of Ancient India”
(Dsam. 25).
’W«ry3‘0,l
12
Ш|
Ka-ha-na ya-па fi-
la n. of an Indian Pandit (У/Т/. №).
--Ч
1ТПИ4 Kdk-ku ti-pa n. of an
Indian Buddhist sage (7Г. dun. 52).
t	Kako-la	a secret
abode of tho Dakinl (K. g. ”| ^57).
П^Атп/ог ’ГТ* кад-ma mischief, harm,
danger (7z\r.) ; ’’I4] or or Ч4! implies some
accident or injury;
had-kyi$ lan$ fleeing from harm; *p|*?j*r
| going from a place which has
not suited one owing to bad luck or any
accident; also to ruu away from a place
from fear; adv. suddenly (Sch.).
kag-ka-wa, n. of a
species of bird living on tho Vulture-peak
Hill near Gaya (7Г. ко. ’П 2).
t njE’q kan-ka	1. crane.
2. in Tibet a bird that feeds on dead
bodies and is therefore called ^’3 dur-bya
tho bird of tho cemetery.
kan-ka-ra 1. n. of a
flower described as growing on the Vul-
ture-peak Hill of Gaya (7f. ко. ”1 4).
2. prob. the plant Alangium hexa-
pct alum.
Kan-dan-kin prop. n. of a
terrific deity, a Dakinl. When the monas-
tery of Sam-yo was built, the image of
Kan-dan-kin was placed on the first floor
of the principal temple {Gyal. S. 87).
+ прб Kan-tsha-rafiga a place
in Ancient Bengal, called Gaur in the
Indian language and Gha-brofi in the
colloq. of Tibet (S. Lam.).
'TJS kad in Ld. sometimes used instead
of the affix ”1 ka, c.g.,	gni$-kad,
tsafi-kad\ also mnam-kad (Ja.).
I: kan (see kha-na) the side or
bank:	| on the
further bank of the river Sri-chu there
being a country of brigands {A. 27).
II: also spelt 4^ $kan, to cease
absolutely from:	“ now
give up anger and passion”; cease
to tell anybody. Hero the word
kan is an emphatical prohibition (Ron.).
’П5) III: 1. the palate; in pad-
kan phlegm; lit. the plywer of the palate.
2. that seizes or takes away
by force. 3. a thorn; an illness; a
disease (Lex.). 4. n. of the pulse felt
with the middle finger called kan-ma.
Kan-ni-ka district in
the east of India (7Г. d. * 267).
(lit. the daughter of
the hunchback)	also written
’ivja’api Kar-nyahi yul, a city in Ancient
India, the capital of which was Kanya-
kubja, the modern Kanouj (K. du. S
131).
kan-ma tho middle finger.
i’Ti'S' Kan-tsi n. of a province,
and also that of a city of Buddhist fame
in Southern India (Du$-ye. 39).
+	kan-ta-ka-ri	a
wild Rubus ; n. of a plant, Solanum jaqtii-
nt; also the fruit of this plant; a drug
useful in stopping fever ; a thorny stick.

13

Syn.	jRt^ Idan-ma;
yulhkhor $kye$; $4^ stag Idan; tshe
Idan;	tshr-ma can;
ttsub-mohi reg-bya;	phyogs med-
ma; §^‘§5 §kul byed (Mfion.).
hide ; un-
tanned skin (Nag. 5).
njZT-q kab-$a shoe; leather shoes of
Hindu fashion used by the wealthier
Tibetans (Ja.).
4j’4J kam-k^~^*\ kafi-ka, Ja-
la ta-na crane.
14]*rq ’^1 kam bi-la a kind of tree
growing on the Vulture-peak Hill near
Gaya (К. ко. 3) ; prob, the plant
Crinum Amaryllacee.
+ nprzf < Kam-bo-dsa 1. a
country in the north-west of India (Vai.
tfL), written Kampo-rtse (Ja.); n. of a
fabulous city said to have contained an
area of a hundred yojana (S. Lam.).
2. modem Cambodia, anciently called
Champa.
wpr4'?4| Kam-bo-dsi-ka n. of the coun-
try, also of the people, as well as of
articles that come from it (K. du. 5 148).
kahu water-melon (ScA.).
Kahu-hi$ n. of a Chinese
minister (Yig. &£)•
"F- kar, also kar-kar, great pain; suf-
fering (Lex.); ^ ^’1%*** I aching pain
(tfag. 4).
Rpiwi kar la fa-panad zug
la fa-pa (&ag.)t irritation or pain in sick-
ness ; exacerbation.
+	5 ^ar^a~^a ог the con-
stellation of “ Cancer.” It is represented
by the frog (2^’q) in Tibet.
t 5 karke-ta^^^ ^ ЧГ&РГ,
described as	a yellow gem or
precious stone (K. d. «» 295).
C\
'W kar-$kyln loan ; in polite lan-
guage v. 3^ skyin (Jd.).
Kar-rgyal a Ndga (S. kar.).
Kar rgyud members of the
line of the Karma-pa hierarchy; also an
abbreviation of the expression Karma-
pahi-rgyudpa.
kar-chag (also written
a register ; list; index.
t	kar-ni-ka	n.
of aflower of the shape of an ear-ring (K.
g. * %); the flower of the tree Ptcrosper-
mum accrifolium and of Cassia fistula.
karna ksa-ra—*'* tsha-la
borax (Sman. 484)*
<=\
f karni-ka in mystio language=
VS dril-bu, a bell (К. g. P 27).
J kar-ma	hphrin-la$m **
ЧРЙ commission, service; action; work;
that which is produced from action;
wjvkci Karma-pa (in Nepal called
n. of a Tantrik school of Buddhism.
The head of that school in Tibet holds
the title of Rgyal-ua Karma-pa. The
followers of the school are generally
designated by the name of Karma-pa.
Karma-gri^-pa the second head
of this sect, named Paksi or JBaksit

14
mi
was invited to China by the Emperor
Kublai Khan. The third chief, called Kar-
ma Rafi-byufi rdorje, was invited to Peking
by the Emperor Temur Toakwan. The
fourth Karina Rol pahi rdorje was a
friend of tho last monarch of the Mongol
dynasty. The fifth Karina De bshin
gqegs-pa was invited to China in the reign
of the Ming Emperor Yun gio (Lon. *10).
Karina bstan §kyon tho last
of the Sde-ba Gtsafi-pa от rulers of Tsang
and tJ whom the Mongol Chief Gu-shi
Khan overthrew (Lon. * 15).
wjwqS Kar-ma ba-dsra n. of an
Indian pandit who worke4 in Tibet for
Buddhism (J. Zan.).
kar-$mug or	ka-ra-
smug-pa brown sugar or treacle (Jigj.
kar-yol (also written
meaning white ware) porcelain; china-
ware ; a china cup.
kar-lan-wa to stand up ;
to rise suddenly (Jd.).
kar-fa-pa-ni ФГЧ1ФЧ 1.
a coin in Ancient India, or a weight
of varying value; a tola or one rupee
weight of gold; the value of two Tibet sho:
। ma-пи Ina sogs ma-$a-ka,
। de-rnam$ bcu-drug kar-
$a-pa-na,	| de bslti ni джг-
sran-fio (Йад.) five menu make a mdsaka,
sixteen mdsaka make a kar-sa-pana, and
four of these make a gold sran (i.e., ha]f a
tola of gold). 2.	the
“ value of 1,600 cowries.” 3. фч 14m a coin
or weight of different values—Аят?: if
of gold, weighing sixteen masa, which are
variously calculated; if of silver, in value
equal to 16 pana of courier i.e., 1,280
cowries, commonly termed a kahan; if of
copper, it weighs 80 raktika, or the same
as of gold, about 176 graine.
kar-ftib$ (abbr. of T
dkar-yol-gyi $ub$) the cover of a
china tea-cup, generally made of iron,
brass or silver:	kar-$ub$-la
bre-bcu (Rtsii.) “for the cover of a tea-cup
made of silver (the price is) 10 bre.”
к ar- sa n. of a kind of brick-
tea ; also called Ijan-ja (green tea) or
Ija&ga pa-ri; also the tea that
comos from tho Chinese district of Jan:
^5’3^ I by the Jang route (come) both
Karsa and Bod-thing (toas), now well
known as Jang-ja (Jig. 25).
Kar-Sog, an abbr. of Kar-ma-
pa and Sog-po, followers of the Karma-
pa sect and tho Mongolians.
W Karti sgan n. of a place in
Tibet.
kalpa for bskal-pa wrw, an
age; a mythical period of time.
JTq kd-ka ЗГГЗГ a crow.
ka-khi-la (mystic) door; en-
trance (К. g. I4 28).
ka-hji—^ kwcb-tsi a shirt; a
Q
Chinese jacket (Sch.). In Chinese Kua-tzu.
t ”r№ Kd-tya bu-mo described
as	the goddess Uma,
wife of Dwan dphyug (Mnon.).
'ПУ'П kd-ta-ka fish (Sc/itr.).

15
ka-pa-ll human skull;
cup made of skull:
| (A. 121) having made the
silver pieces green, (he) put them in the
skull-cup.
+	Kd-bc-ri Mi Rd the river
Gauvery in Mysore, a river said to be half
a yojana broad and 300 yojana long. On
the banks of this river are flower gardens
(K. d. * 268).
c\p
+ kd-tsi-ka 1. wrfw^T, also as
^rRa^frr, a species of bamboo which when
bent by the wind is said to emit fire
(7Г. d. * 287). 2. a plant bearing
a red and black seed used as a weight,
Arbus precatorius; or another plant bear-
ing a pungent seed, Nigella Indica.
+ ’П-Ъп ka-ri-ka srrfwr aphorism;
T ц q
purely Sanskrt yet largely used in
Tibetan works (^а’а^Ч 7) ;=*Я’^’5^
a Sutra or Udana in verse.
4-
Ka-la-ko a country beyond
the sea into which the Indus flows and
where the finest coral grows (probably
a marine province or island in the Persian
Gulf) (K. d. к 280).
+ rq’oi’g-q^ ka-la sno-bsafi deep
blue-black colour (&?A.).
Ka-$a ^ггц 1. a city in Ancient
India which was twenty yojana in area
(S. Lam). 2. a sort of grass, Saccharum
spontaneum.
+ П] or 3 куг Oh! Ч]^ч]М,<5
kwahi grogs-po Oh friend!
TJ-U)
kica-ye an exclamation used in
calling some one, generally a subordinate.
P ksha this word in its mystic signifi-
cation is symbolic of the source of all
Dharma (matter and phenomena), and
demonstrates that they are subject to
eternal change.
J	kse-tra pa-la (Schr.)
a deity protecting the fields ; in Budh. a
guardian of the province of a Buddha’s
work.
ki numeral for thirty-one.
ki-ki a hortative utterance in
the invocation of spirits:	1
“ Hail, 0, ye gods! to-day is warm ! ”
ki-kan 1. wild leek (Sch.). 2.
described as	n. of a demi-god,
a Ndga. It is inauspicious to do any
work of merit when Kikan comes near.
ъ ki-gu a hook; the vowel sign t,
which resembles a hook in shape.
ki-rgynn a mystical invocation
signifying “Lord”:
“ 0 Lord, be appeased by this prostrate
(devotee).” It is a mystic charm to pro-
pitiate the Bon-po deity, called Oen-gsras
Mi-mgon rgyal-po (D.B.).
Иу’ч Ki-ta-ka 1. a Baksasa
or cannibal demon (K. d. ь 189). 2. a
worm or insect (Os.).
ki-ldir a shrill shout; a savage
howl.
^'4 ki-pa a volume, &o., marked with
the letter

16

ki-ma according to Sehr. a cor-
ruption of the Chinese word khin* a lyre
with seven strings. (Pilgrimage of Fa-
Hian. Calcutta* 181/8* p. 265.)
ki-tsi tickling; V IS*4 ki-tsi byed-
pa to tickle (Jd.).
ki-ra-na (mystic) a flower
(K. g. f 26).
ki-ri-kan ФЖ, a kind
of pepper, Piper chaba;
। 5)	VI (К. g. ч 210) the
roots of white arka tree and roots of white
kiri-kan (are used in medicine).
I	kin-kara ftnfK a servant
or an emissary.
twq kin-yi-ka a kind of
flower; the tree Butea Frondoea; a tree
bearing pretty flowers.
+ fyq-ti kim-pa a pretty but bitter
fruit, erroneously for fytv’q kim-pa-ka.
* wjww] kim-pa-ka a fruit, Cu-
curbit accous plant, Trfchosanthc* palmate*
also possibly Cucumis colocynthix. ^wq^SV
1	I g’*’^
I (K. d.
325) men entertain desires which are
transient and deceptive like the Kimpaka
fruit and liko fish that eat bait on a
hook.
ktm-pa-la or ^’4’4 kim-ba-
la a musical instrument; a cymbal
(Cs.).
ki-hu	a species of small
red garlic; acc. to some carrot.
kil slowly = ga-le:
crossing a mountain pass (he)
arrived slowly (B.R.).
Kila-kila fwfw 1. an
epithet of S'iva. 2. a town in Ancient
India. 3. a Raksasa King (K. g. « 623).
4. an onomatopoetic for sounds or cries
№)*
Ki-ri ta-ka	the
country of the Sapta Kosi in Nepal inha-
bited by the Kirat tribes and called
Kiianta ; n. of a district in Sub-
Himalaya (Du§-yc. 39).
kl^ahi hdab мпшшчж,
qthe loaf of the tree Achyran-
tkes atpcra used in incantations, in medi-
cine, in washing linen, and in sacrifices
(Mnon.).
’Sp’HJC’ Kxn-kaA v.	Кай daA
kin.
TJ I: ku 1. for the numeral 61.
2. (mystic) a fairy or ddkini (К. g. F,
179); 3’4 ku-pa, the 61st (volume).
TJ II: a cry, moan ; ЗЦ ku-$gra
clamour, noise; JTtl’^’SV4 a general cry;
the vociferations of many people together;
5I the noise of general conversation:
then, when they arrived at the bank of
Sog ehu, there was the sound of chattering
in a house (A. 82).
TH Au-Arw = g’§ $ku-$ku я$0й*1;
lda-hu an enigma, a riddle,
question.
ku-ku $ grogs lit.
кики ; =	by a-gag a grey
duck (IJnon.).
Ku-ku-ra-ha grjrcivra a
teacher or trainer of dogs; n. of an
Indian Buddhist sage who was also called
Kukuripa (STST^) (JT. dun. 1/5).
a puzzling
that cries
species of


Ku-kur-ta pi-da JJX-
n. of a hill in Magadha
(Dsam. 17).
Tl Ku-ke, erroneously for Gu-g<\
a part of the province of Nga-ri in Tibet.
V ku-eo	noise,
clamour; 0'4fii^-a^ew
S4T|‘’I I when an old dog barks, go else-
where without explanation (8. icy.). S’
noisy, clamorous; ySMfq'jp to
speak in a loud voice (meaning nothing);
to bawl out;	to bawl, to cry
out, to make a loud noise; S‘^’q a
great noise or tumult, an uproar.
Ki-cor, also n. of a place
in Tibet.
ka-den-ne: See ante 5 ku.
ku-ther^9^^^ mtho-rl$ rlufi
the heavenly breeze (Mnon.).
Ku-na-la 1. the inanal
or Himalayan pheasant; also, a bird with
beautiful eyes which lives in the fabu-
lous mount Sumeru. 2. the eldest son
of As'oka.
ku-ica or g’4 sku-ica (in Chinese:
kua)	a gourd; the bottle
gourd, Lagcnaria vulgaris. In the Pema-
koi district this fruit is called wa-bum,
i.e., nature’s bottle. A bottle made of a
dried gourd is also called д'ч ku-ica.
Syn.	rnam-par rgyal',	.
tdon-bu rin;	dra-ica-can;
rna zlum byed; *$^*§5 hbigs byed\
&bra$ rnehog; mdah Ipags (Milon.).
ku-icahi gzifis a float made of
long-dried gourds.
| Tj’q-Qj’ jJ'Jqj ku-ba-la те-tog
also the water-lily; also, the jujube
plant, Zizyphus jtijuba and the fruit of
that plant.
t Ku-bera	Kuvera, the
god of riches, the chief of the Noijin
known also as Naga Kuvera and
Rnamdhos kyi-bu, lire son of Vaiyravana.
According to some Tibetan writers, Kuvera
is one of the eight keepers of the horses
of Vaiqravana. [Kubera, or in later
Sanskrit Kuvera, originally tho name of
tho chief of the evil beings of darkness
bearing the epithet Vaigrarana; afterwards
the god of riches and treasures, and is
regent of the northern quarter of the
world, which is hence called Kubera-
gupta-dik. Kubera is the eon of Vi^rava
by Ida vid a, tho chief of the Yaks a and a
friend of Rudra.j (JI. IKills.).
Ku-byi ma?-he a Bon
deity who resembles tho Bodhisattva
Jampal; the god of learning and wisdom
among the Northern Buddhists (D.R.).
ku-ma-ru^^^9^^ gscr-wchog •
leaf-gold (from China brought
by way of Ceylon) ; it is described in
(Milon.):	gold ex-
ported from Lanka (Ancient Ceylon).
ж ku-mud the water-lily
• which opens at the appearance of the
moon; said to be Nymphaa csculnta;
g’8V** = 5a bush or cluster
of water-lilies.
Syn.	ut-pa-la dkar-po;
zla-icaki dri; sa-mos; sa-dgah ;
sahi gdu-gu\	$t< n hthun
dkar-po \ j’W’VP zla-icas dgah*, ^*5 sita\
sa-sgrog*, sa-§tob§*
mtshan-mo bshad (Milon.).
4

18
VII
+	ku-mud grogs	bsil-zer
or '*5 zla-hod moonbeams (ДГлшл).
+ ЗЖ5Л ku-mud dgra, v. V* ni-ma, tho
sun {Шоп.).
t W4 ku-mud can, v. ku-mud-
txhal {Шоп.).
+	ки-mud-gnen	lit.
the friend of tho water-lily ; tho moon.
J ku-mud-ldan, v. ku-mud
t shal.
ku-mud lo-ma
J a medicinal plant of the lily species
{Шоп.].
J ku-mud-tshal a cluster of water-
lilies.
TJ’E ku-dsa gvsj 1. a tree; lit. that
which grows on tho earth. 2. tho planet
Mars.
TJ4 Kuhi a devil or demon in
Chinese demonology. In Chinese Kuei.
kuhi-^in a class of evil spirits
{Grub.). In Chinese Kuei-shen, “devils
and gods.”
kuhi-tsan a Chinese work on
divination {Grub, ч 5).
T* ku-ya sediment of urine from
which Tibetan physicians diagnose
disease {Med.).
t ^w-rrz-ra giTT = S'Sn. of a
bird; an osprey {Шоп.).
Ф Щ	or 3^^
the crimson amaranth; a purple or yellow
Barter ia; the blossom of the amaranth or
Barleria.
i T^4! ku-ran-ga the deer;
also trog-chags an insect (jT. d. *
!№).
t Ku-ru a city in Ancient
India near Delhi one yojana in area; also
a province {S. Lam. 20).
: тл™ Ku-ru-kul-le gj<sgrwr a
female Buddhist deity associated with
Kuvera, the god of wealth; is goddess
of might and power; she is also called
{Vidya), The first sovereign
Dalai Lama is said to havo acquired great
power by propitiating this deity.
ku-ru-pin-da=^$ha-nc
1.	lead. 2. a fragrant grass;
Cyperus rotundas; the bud of a flower.
3. a ruby ; cinnabar.
t ^’^’5 ku-ru ban-da, v.
топ-lug, tho brood of sheep in the sub-
Himalayan conntrios {Шоп.).
ku-re or ku-re § чГкп,
Tra sport, diversion, jest, horse-
play;	to jest;	for the
purpose of amusement or fun ;
1	wefd: not liking, dis-
gusted with, amusements.
Ku-la-кй д>чТ^Т a Sr in-mo
(goblin) that lived only on lotus flowers
and lotus-honey, and resided in tho
fabulous island of Ramamo (7f. d. * 280).
f	ku~lan-ta the country
inhabited by an aboriginal race of people
{Bus-yc}.
4^4 Ku-la-la for Ku-na-la.
. TO Ku-lu-ta a place situated in
the south-east of Kashmir, now called
Nyun-ti by Tibetans, by Hindus Kulu
(8. Lam. 19).
t ku-$a 1. gm, the sacred
grass used in certain religious ceremonies
both by Brahmans and Buddhists;
Wl	19
Poa cynosuroide s, a grass with long stalks
and numerous pointed leaves:
1 the grass kufa ensures
longevity and increases the strength of
the body. 2. n. of a city (S, du, p 152).
Syn. fian-sel} sa-gna^ 4^’
bdud hdul gdan;	inchod
sbyin rgyan;	gtsan-byed^
khru^-kyi rtsa; rtsa-mchog}
rtsa-dwafl (Mnon.).
Ku-fahi gron-khyer
(grfwra) 1. Kus'ianagara, one of the
thirty-six sacred places of the Buddhists,
where Gautama ♦ Buddha is said to have
breathed his last. 2. n. of Chakravarti
Baja (Supreme Buler of the Universe);
Ku-^a chen-po	n. of a
Chakravarti Baja.
ku-fa-na n. of a flower; also
n. p.
^’<51 whence did you bring that Srin-po’s
daughter called Kusana flower (iHbrom.
121).
ku-fa-ban-dha	a
gem which is said to possess the property
of curing infectious diseases and plague.
t	dge-ica
piety, holiness.
1	also ku-sa-
il	a Buddhist sage; the title
of a Buddhist monk or priest who
has acquired spiritual knowledge and is
more devout than learned :
I Sb^QriaiV
(Yig.). Generally there are
among both Brahmans and. Buddhists
those called Pandita and Kucali. The
title of Pan-di-ta is applied to one who is
versed in intellectual science. Those who
are called Ku-fa-H have attained a high
spiritual development by abstraction from
material or intellectual enjoyments. In
some works it is called Ku-sa-li,
ku-fu a kind of lime; a kind of
fruit; an apple (Ja.); ku-fu fin an
apple tree;
q’Rlw | the fruit of Кн-fu cures griping
and acute pains in the intestines.
t A’W-sw-Zu is a corrupt form of
Ku-fa-li.
+ 1р$-ря« ku-fuhi к hams n. of a
kind of blue flower,*v.	thin.
Syn.	dus-kyi тс-tog;
bya-khyun rdo;	inc-tog §mig-
$man; те-tog ze; gsal-ldan
gsal-ua-can (Milon,).
ku-fe-fa-ya a kind
of lotus flower (K, d. ч 321/); a gene-
i-ic name for water-lily or lotus.
t	Ku-sa-ra fiHV an Indian
pandub who preached Buddhism in Tibet
(J. Zan,),
Ku-sa-li bhadra
n. of an Indian Buddhist sage (K. dun.
13),
ф	A;u-stz-ma 1. gur-
kum saffron. 2. a flower (Sman. 1/28), .
t Ku-su-li a Buddhist exorcist;
a Naljor or Buddhist yogi who carries
a small hand-drum (called damaru which
is generally made of a human skull) and a
thigh-bone trumpet in his hands, and pro-
fesses power of exorcising evil spirits,
20
STOPS'4 Ku-su-luhi spyod-patiie practice
of ths Shaman or Buddhist exorcists ;
| (Я. 26) when practising
the rites of a Kasu-lu exorcist.
З’О’4 ku-su-lu-pi is a word of Tantrik
mysticism, its proper Tibetan equivalent
being gcod-pa, the art of exorcism.
The mystic Tantrik rites of the Avadhauls,
called Avadhutipa in Tibet, exist in
India.
Tp$TgX’ Ku-sn-rdson n. of a fort and
also that of a district in Khatns
(S. kar.).
ku bsico the shrill ejaculation
8U'0f siro, &c., made at the time of sacrifice
to the earthly gods, demi-gods and spirits
by priests, &e., in Tibet:
the celestial
troops in inconceivable numbers surround-
ing them gave vent to bsico-bswo.
J	TT the cry of the Indian
cuckoo ; 3*3*’*ф’^	the cuckoo,
?>., the bird that cries 'koohoo'; aco. to
Cs. a kind of ring dove.
ku-hran sheep and goats: *p|Y
(ff. Bon.) among the
followers of Shcnrab the Bon-po of the
Bgyu and Hbras-po soots sacrifice sheep and
goats, buffaloes, (bio, mules, camels, &c.
'CT kug crooked; a hook;	0w-
kug (the kukri), a curved knife; short sabre;
teags-kug an iron hook; па-
ки g a fish-hook.
kug-kug byd-pa to bend,
curve, clinch (a nail) (Ja.).
ЗЯЭТ kug-kng altogether crooked;
kug-pa-nid crookedness (Cs.).
W kug-rtse cuckoo in W (<7a.).
TTi Kun-kti-na possibly the pro-
vince of Konkan in Western India (8.
Lam. 33).
t \]F >1^ kun-kuma saffron.
Tibetan is evidently a corruption
of the Sanskrt word.
Kun-dsa-ra a fabjilous
silver mountain situated beyond the great
sea and at a distance of 2,000 yojana to
the south of Nitna [dan, where the sun
never sets. It is full of precious stones,
such as lapis lazuli, sapphire, &e., and on
the sides of this mountain there grows a
species of tree producing a raco of men
who live only one day; they are born
at dawn, they begin to walk after day-
break, in the morning they are youths,
towards evening they grow old, and at
sunset they die (K. cl. * 276.).
Tpj kun nfr, wt, fnf<^, nt all,
entire, the whole;	1 from
all pores of the hair; all those;
all the others;	all, every
one included; 5in tho hearing of
all;	all these flowers
should bo strewn about;	seen
by everybody;	or time
without interruption; at all times; eolloq.
3^5 kun-la means “everywhere.”
Syn.	thams-cad all; $na-
tshogs various kinds; ma-lu§ without
leaving anything behind; zad-par
exhaustively;	lhag-med without
remainder:	lu$-mcd nothing left
{Mnou.),
• ЗМ5Э* ktin-dkyil, same as kun*
gyi dkyil, in the midst of all; in the middle
of all; at the centre.
21	.	№^1
kun-dkri§	non*
mofis lit. that which binds all ; misery,
moral corruption, general corruptness, sin.
З^4!]* kun-bkram (kun*tam) or
kun*tu bkram strewn about, spread
over.
3^’3 kuu-§kyc, same as 3^‘5’3 kun*tu skye
or 3^’5 kun-la-$kyc	WTfR,
grows everywhere’:
ЭД’5’3 flowers grow everywhere in summer
time.
MlS’lS kun-$kyed-byed— $nin the
heart, mind (ДГлои.).
3^4 kun*skyo-wa or 3^’5’^ч kun-tu
$kyo*ica wlu, ’ЧтЧпт, to become
penitent; to thoroughly regret:
•^V3Y5’‘Jl his mind was filled with regret
day and night.
3^’|5 kum*$kyod agitated, moved;
agitation.
3^’^’Я^’ Kun*skyob glin n. of a
monastery in Tibet.
• 3V^ kun-khebs WT4KH, any
cover; the all-encompassing cover, the sky.
3^‘Qqi: kun-khyab	nam mkhah
ЖТФПГ, that which encompasses all
things ; the void space, the sky, the four
quarters of heaven.
3^'l5q n : = Bphrog-byed he
that takes away misery; the all-porvading
enemy; the snatcher; the lord of death.
З^’4^ kuii*hkhor v.	kun*
bzan hkhor-lO) a charm in the name of the
Dhyani Buddha called Samanta Bhadra.
kun-kkyab <$pal*mo—*pw{b
nam-rnkhah the sky; n. of a goddess
(Yig. k. 16).
3^’ядяч kun-hkhyams	a wan-
derer; a beggar, a mendicant who goes
to every door for alms.
Kun-wkliytn=q tham^
cad wkhycn-pa	the All-knowing;
the Physician; an epithet of Buddha and
also of the highest order of Bodhisattva.
З^’^Й^kun*imkhycn kun-gzig$
omniscient and all-seeing, referring to the
attributes of a Buddha or Bodhisattva.
З^^'З4^ Kun-wtkhyen klofi-clun a
religious teacher of the Rnin-ma School
who founded a sect of his own called
Kun dgah lugs.
Kun-rnkhym cho$-$ku
hod-zer the Tibetan hierarch of Sa*$kya>
who, at the request of Khu-lugS) the Chief
of Horchen, first shaped the Mongolian
alphabet.
Kun*wkhycn ni-mahi
gnen	an epithet of Gautama
Buddha (Yig. k. 83).
3^’*Й^ SB4!’4)^ Kim-rnkhyen dbyig-gnen
n.. of a lama who was given the religious
title of Kun-Ynkhycn, the all-knowing.
З^Й4!4 kun-khrugs	^14
agitated ; anxious: J'«^’3,2fc’3^|34P4
the waves of the sea were agitated.
З^Й'Ч kun-hkhrul blunder; illu-
sion ; also adj. all-delusive; all-wandering.
3^2'5m kun-gyi mthah the end or ter-
mination of all (merits) : q^srq^eyg’swr
I	the end of
accumulation is expenditure ; the end of
rising is fall (K. d. 4 330).
SH’3’4)^ kun-gyi-gnas the basis or abode.
of all (miseries):
3^1 the grounds of misery are disease,
old age, and death (K. d. * 333).
З^’ЗТ’Ч kun-gyi^ rtsa-wa, the root of
everything; wisdom, divine knowledge.
This seen or unseen talent has Ргадпй

(absolute knowledge) for its basis, i.e., the
root of all things is wisdom' (prajna)
(Q. gya.).
UH^’qjvq kun-gyii bkur-wa he who is
respected by all; a learned man, v.
mkha$-pa (Mon.).
ЗИ’^’З4!^ kun-gyi$ phyag-bya$ to
whom all paid homage: IV^S^’S4! 3^
I hjig-rten kun-gyi$ phyag-byat fin, to
whom the world has bowed (7f. d. * 113).
kun-grub~%’S’S'jQ zla-wa dgu-pa,
or	$ton-zla tha-chun the month of
October (Rtsii.).
Kun-glin, same as	Kun-
bde glin, the place or grove of all happi-
ness; one of the four royal monasteries
of Lhasa, this one being situated in the
western suburbs.
WW kun-dgah чггн^, amuse-
ment; great merriment or joy.
*	W’5 Kun-dgahrgyal-
mtshan-dpabbzafipo	the name of
Saskya Pandita (^yd^).
Kun-dgah snin-po n. of a
celebrated lama of Tibet (Lofi. * 12).
Kun-dgah Nor a lake in
Mongolia (Lofi. > 21) ; probably the
Gonga-nor (Egg lake). In Mongol nor
= a lake.
WS4!4 4 kun-dgah-wa hdsin-pa — ^'
5’^ rin-po-che n. of a precious article or
gem (K. d. * 294).
Kun-dgah-bo	the per-
sonal attendant and cousin of Buddha.
•	Kun-dgah-hbar n. of the
son of Kun-dgah tnin-po, one of the
chiefs of Sa-ikya who visited India • to
study Buddhism (Lofi. *).
Kun-dgah hdsin-pa a
mountain in Uttara Kuru, the fabulous
continent of the north (K. d. ^318).
kun-dgah gshon-nu=\'^
hu-su coriander (Sman. 428).
kun-dgah ra-tm=a^'Sfll4 &Hfi-
dgah WKTH a grove; any pleasure-grove
containing groups of trees, flower beds,
artificial lakes, garden houses, shady walks,
&c., often surrounded by a wall or fence.
кйп-dgahi dican-tno an
address of courtesy for §*g5r3'^4F* ladies
of the class of Lhacham—her graeo or
ladyship :
“ at the (feet) of her charming ladyship ”
(Yig.k. 49).
kun-mgyogt чп^ПТ speed; also
as adv. speedily, at full speed.
кип-кдеЬ$-=^'*^ nam-rnkhah
qfriw the sky; that which covers all;
the all-covering.
3^44 kun-hgog that which hinders
physical or moral growth.
i:	kun-hgro,N. nam-mkhah,
the sky (Mon.).
ir: snake, v. §«1 tbrul a serpent
(M-non.).
^*5'^ kun-hgro hbad wnfpr to be
assiduous : W’5’qassi-
duous in the manner of performance.
kun-hgrofri trol=dW lam a
road, passage (Mon.),
Kun-cin$ wrfini 1. that pains,
ties or entangles all at all times. 2.
the God of Love; also for kun-tu
ant:	by
the fetters of misery the mind is always
fastened down.
^•q&|
23

Kun-bcom	1. van-
quished; suppressed, fully put down. 2
tho vanquisher or killer of all; the lord
of death. 3. n. of a son of a Brahmao of
Ujjayani (8. kg.).
кип-chub qc$-rab all-porfec-
tion ; wisdom; divine knowledge (K. d. ‘H
£6); WW he that has compre-
hended everything.
’8ft kun-wwhog-ldan or
=	(Шоп.),	the
Tantrik doctrine of Kalachakra.
kun-hjug for	I
зпм, bringing together; putting in
harmony with all.
kun-hjug pho-па the messen-
ger of harmony, that which harmonises or
makes everything agreeable, hence^’’]’^
ka-ra, sugar.
Kun-hjoms
1. Indra, the subduer of all; that by
which everything can be subdued or
controlled. 2. Yoga or tho contemplative
concentration of the mind.
kun-hjom^ mchog the chief
all-subduing (elixir);
чдечЕакайчц is an excellent preparation
of mercury, which subdues all evil spirits
and diseases.
Kun-shin~Tdranatha. (Td. 28.)
3^*5 kun-tu unto all; in all; everywhere ;
in every direction:
flowers were strewn everywhere, above
and below:	I articles
of merchandise were spread in every place,
inside and outside (the house). When
used in reference to time, kun-tu
signifies : continually or perpetually ; du$
kun-tu same as	du$ rgyun-du or
at all times, always.
kun-tu bskyed producing every
whore, all-producing, i.e., imagination :
imagination is all-
productive (Jf. d. p 86).
kun-tu hkhyamt wandering
everywhere:	in the
fearful world, i.e., in the unhappy states
of existence, he wanders about (7Г. d. *
169).
kun-tu hkhrugs signifies
convulsed ; also convulsive,
subject to agitation and shaking (Шоп.).
kun-tu ^§=3^5^94 span-
rgyan nw-tog от	(autumn flower),
lit. tho fully developed or blown; n. of
a species of daisy which blossoms in
autumn (Шоп.).
kun-tu go-tea fayf well-
known ; well-understood; celebrated.
Kun-tu dgah-war
gyur-wahi glin a fabulous continent situa-
ted 5,000 yojana beyond the Western
Ocean of (Jambudvipa) India, where there
are lions that fly in space: some of the
wild animals of that continent are said to
live a thousand years (K. d. 280).
kun-tu-hgefis-pq	he
that provides for the world, the All-
Provider; Providence.
М5Л35'4 kun-tu hgyed-pa ufiwsifH
to be diffused; that which goes in every
direction:	spiritual emana-
tions; envoys :	rays of
light went in every direction.
= 3^’5’^ 4 kun-tu rgyu-wa WTW,
1. lit. going everywhere. 2.
as met. wind ; a bird. 8. n. of a
spirit.
I	34	W&q-Sflj
kun-tu rgyas-par bycd-pa
to fully spread ; to make plen-
tiful everywhere; to make copious.
Aun-tu bsgribs eclipsed; dark-
ness	I the rays
of the sun and moon were eclipsed.
kun-tu-lcug-pi) or №,5ql’q
kun-bcug-pa to put in; to employ, engage:
$5хЧЖ5'<Чч11 Put this vessel (or pot) to all
uses.
kun-tu chags-pa зщ, srer,
fHrtf anxiety; yearning, clinging to:
I the mind remains
attached to its crooked desires.
kun-hjug-pa =	§dug-
fanal-wa misery, sufferings.
kun-tu hjng-pa $grol=w
lam-bdcn-pa, the truth about the way
to Nirvana, i.e., out of misery.
kun-tu hjug byed^^1^
kun hbyun-wa sin.
kun-tu hjug-bral Ьгйи free-
dom from sin, or я^-q hgog-pa, entire
stoppage of suffering.
Note.—The above four expressions are
used in the higher spiritual terminology
relating to Bodhisattva (К. ко. 235).
kun-tu	P dad-
gu§ dan Idan-pa faith and reverence; also
possessed of faith, respect, etc.
Syn. 5^’4 gu$-pa\ gus-ldan;
gus-par bycd\	mfion-par
Idan;	geig-tu senis; mos-
pa\ mos-ldan; dad-ldan\ SV
dad-chags-can; 55’Ч'«Ц dad-pa-can;
3V9Vq phyag-bycd-pa\ shesa bycd
(Шоп.).
kun-tu hthor	strewn
over, scattered, diffused, dispersed: й-^ц-
f4!”’I flowers were scattered over
every place.
kun-tu dor faw perfect aban-
donment:	a11 faults
should be entirely thrown out.
kun-tu bdc-wa
general happiness, prosperity; beatitude
Kun-tu hdres-pa n. of a river
in the fabulous continent of Godaniya
(K. d. * 331).
kun-tu gnn$ felfk,
stability; the all-abidmg residence, that
which remains at all times or everywhere.
5H*5‘q5c’q kun-tu brdu£-ua the burning
rays of the sun; extremely painful; all-
piercing.
W5’^Xvw§^'q kun-tu gnod-par gyur-
pa to do mischief everywhere.
kun-tu ^naf.-wa HVprlTHTU
1. the sun; n. of a Buddha. 2. all-
illumined, all-enlightened.
W555 kun-tu zpyad an usual duty,
habitual work; as a vb. to practise: VT4*
practise righteousness or reli-
gious acts at all times.
5W’5’SSq kun-tu spyod-pa free or
unbridled behaviour: described as
8V^ the Brahmapical conduct (Шоп.).
5^’5 kun-tu ?pra§ WPSXTfacf dressed
in every way; adorning the body with
precious ornaments.
?И‘5’Г**Л kun-tu $byor-ica=^^^^\^^^
giving up everything (Mnon.).
kun-tu mig-ldan (lit. with
eyes everywhere), described ae
n. of a fabulous tree on which grow glit-
tering gems; also a plant or tree in full
bloom;

25

I this (kind of tree) is
generally to be found in the lands of gods,
demi-gods, and in the continent of Uttara
Kuru (K. d. я 16).
kun-tu rmp the all-stunning,
all-obscuring ; darkness of mind ; igno-
rance:
I 0, best of friends
who guideth me in precepts, morals, re-
sources, the weapons for vanquishing the
all-obscuring enemy!
kun-tu rmp-byed-kyi
mdah the all-stupefying fascina-
tion ; n. of one of the arrows of Cupid.
Kun-tu hdsin-ma Wl<4t
holding to all or everything ; n. of a
goddess.
Kun-tu bzafi-po 1.
lit. good to all and everywhere and at all
times; n. of the first Dhyani Bodhisattva,
the equivalent of Samanta Bhadra; the
Khamuga-Sain of the Mongols. 2. in the
Rniti-ma sect, n. of the first or Adi Buddha.
Kun-tu bzan-mo
1. is a female figured in conn eetion with
the foregoing Bodhisattva. 2. a kind of
flower growing on the Sumeru Mountain
(K. my. 20).
Kun-tu gzigs he who sees
all things and everywhere by his divine
eye of knowledge; n. of a Buddha, also
that of the Bodhisattva Avalokitesvara.
kun-tu hur-hur яЧ^чг a great
noise or uproar heard everywhere; the
rattling of thunder; also the noise of wind
or hrin.
ЗИ’5’^’*4 kun-tu ho-ma=&'££ si-dsa-dsu
(Mnon.) n. of a tree with milky sap.
kun-tu hod пиетет fully en-
lightened;	sa bcu-gcig-pa the
eleventh stage of Bodhisattva perfection.
kun-tu rab-tu hkhrugs
lit. very much agitated; n. of the six des-
criptions of earthquake (K. d. * 259).
kun-tu rab-tu hgul lit.
moving and shaking very greatly; n. of
a form of earthquake.
5^’5ktin-tu rab-tu chem-chcm
lit. roaring all about; n. of a
kind of earthquake.
kun-tu rab-tu hur-hur
loud and fearful rattling or roaring; n.
of one of the six forms of earthquake in
which sound comes out of the sea and the
mountains.
kun-tu rab-tu gyo$ lit.
everywhere all shaken very much; n. of
universal earthquake in which the moun-
tains and the oceans are moved profoundly.
i: kun-tu rig
all-knowing ; omniscient; n. of a
deity.
n :=^’M fe§-rab wisdom
(K. d. 26).
kun-tu gsal	wtht,
чеггнпн, the sky; clear inside and outside ;
very clear, lucid, illuminated.
kun-tu gsun a flower mention-
ed in the Kahgyur (К. my. 20).
kun-tu gso to heal everyone or
repair everything; the healer of all.
kun-g.tum мч$Ж lit. very fierce;
dmafis-rigt n. of lowest caste in
India.
kun-btu$ n. of a religious
work which is full of extracts taken from
different sacred books (Шоп.).
SM’I4! kun-rtog, same as ^*^4 rnam*
rtog foiw, WJ, fancy, illusory
associations.
5
’IW’I” I	26	1
W4!4!** kun-brtags	ideas and
associations.
kun-brtags-pabi intshan
hid xrfbfffwHtd^’UR one of the three signs,
characteristics or laksana, v. mtshan
hij.
kun-fydan 1. support. 2.
negligence.
kun-bsten wrwrwr reliance; re-
signation ; service or adoration.
Kun mthoft-gyi rntsho a
fabulous fresh-water lake in the land of
the Lha-ma-yin or Asura, situated at the
centre of their chief city Shubhra Malika.
It is said to be five yojana on each side.
When the Lha fight with the Lha-ma-yin
the signs of victory or defeat are said to
be reflected on its surface.
kun-daft hkhon-pa quarrelling
with all:	’^’951 a
person whose lips are black quarrels
with everybody (Tan. d. 217).
kun-daft mthim-pa=-**w'&\
harmonious, concordant; agreeing
or in harmony with all.
kun-don the public weal,
general interest, cause of all.
5И’Х*Г«1 kun-dril-wa — ^'K4*fa'q f shaft-ma
bsdom-pa all taken together.
kun-gduft wrfiri,	that
afflicts all; the all-burning one; Cupid.
Kun-fylag	the
Lord of All.	the Soul of the
World; the Supreme Lord of the World.
kun-brduft 1. an oppressor ; a
tyrant:	§<<|ч$Ж£Г5Ие|5с-‘
2. In astronomical calculations the six-
teenth conjunction is called Kun-brduft.
kun-hdar the pulse that
always beats = rtsa dvu-ma n. of
the central artery.
Kun-hdrcn the Supreme Leader;
he who leads all into the way of deliver-
ance ; epithet of Buddha.
ЭДkun-nas, same as kun-las
щрн orJHHWTt from every place or direc-
tion ; round about; wholly, thoroughly :
| in every direction
it was surrounded by railings;
to wish from the bottom of the heart.
kun-nas dkrigs-pa entirely
darkened:rain-clouds
have darkened all quarters.
kun-nas skye hhww,
produced or grown everywhere (like grass).
kun-nas fckhums =
gur-gum saffron (Ajfton.).
kun-nas hgegs = чй’^'в’д*
a residence that is closed on every side, a
sanctum; residence of a queen ; a convent
(Affton.).
Syn.	bkhor-wahi khyim ; *rg\
sa-spyod-nia gnas\	sruft-ma-
can\	dag-pahi mthah-ean;
*1^ gtsaft-gnas.
kun-nas bgro commu-
nion.
kun-nas rgod^WfWS bshad-gad
to laugh out (Affton.).
Kun-nas sgohi lefru
shes-pahi indo tiКЧ <t ’ШТ
the “ Sutra on the door or entrance from
all quarters,” i.e., of free entrance
(К. ко. Г 287).
kun-nas sgrib-par byetf
WTMTRft to over-shadow all round, to
put into shade in all directions.

ktin-nas non-mofa-pa
made very miserable; pained, dis-
tressed; ^’^г^-Ямгсгй^сц entirely free
from misery (gbum. *| 239).
kun~na$ snems
very haughty; arrogant.
kun-na$ btags-pa ^ufVcf,
тетт fastened or tied up on all sides.
kun-nat btu$~pci €^sr,
collected from everywhere ; extracted or
taken from every work.
kun-nat hdud-pa WSJ
venerated by everybody от everywhere :
| to reverence in
every manner with body, speech, and
heart.
kufi-na$ Idafl-wa цгучЧЛИ,
raised from every place; set up
well; got-up:	the
enemies rose up in all directions.
kun-nat tdud-pa КЯТПТ col-
lected from every place; brought together
from every place.
*	kun~na$ $nan-wa =	A rgyal-
wa the all-illuminator (Schr.),
kun-na$ bphag^pa
sprung from everywhere.
kun-nas bris ^forfacr
perfectly painted, described, delineated,
referred to.
kun-na$ blafa taken from
every place.
д^А’ЧА^ kun-nat hbar ^niT4<fif WTftu
inflamed; ablaze :	’^itwa fire
broke out in every direction.
.IWrjK’A kun-na$ $byor~wa	to
combine; combination ;	to
compound or mix up medicines.
brtsegs-pa
built up everywhere ; piled up; erected.
kun-nas mdses illuminated ;
very beautiful:	I the
signs or charms of the moon are exquisitely
fine;
| (the gardeu) from its collection of
flowers was lovely and pleasant (Miion,).
‘	kun-nai bzan лпггргзгг
=5Wg’i?'« dpal-gyi lo-ma n. of a tree the
leaves of which are sweet.
Syn. Ч’я’якл lo-ma mftar-, <S’»«’A« lo-ma
bzafi (Mnou.).
kun-nas l^zod-pa all-forgiv-
ing ; very patient (A’’, d. * 68).
kun-nas yons-su b$kor-
wa entirely besieged, shut up entirely,
surrounded on all sides.
kun-na$ yyefts
vftfwM thoroughly ; very excited :
| 'the mind agitated (not
being fixed on any subject).
kun-snaft кЬаг-ка^'&’Ъ^
ni-mahi hod-zer all-illuminating rays; the
rays of the sun (JZTfon.).
kun-spafa иЙсЦП?!’; bya
btafl all-abstracted :
gjwq | one who has left off all the concerns
of this world; he who has renounced all
worldly matters, acts and concerns; an
epithet of Buddha.
kun-spafa chen~po
the all-renouncer ; an ascetic ; a hermit:
Ж’ yr ЦА’<Й’чн’ 8^’ ^^’45’W’
before the feet of the Arch Renouncer who
in one life has attained to Buddhahood.
5K8S kun-spyad 1.	ЯЯЧ
that which is to be practised at all times.
2. customary or habitual work ; habit.
ЭТ5’СЗГЧ1
28
^•^51
kun-$pyo<J fian-pa
a black or fallen Brahman ; bad. habits ,
vicious acts or professions.
kun-^pyod imtshu^~ma=
Sjqpvtf grogt-ma a sweetheart, mistress
(Mnon.),
kun-phan bdud-rtsi
duan-po=^4 zla-wa the moon (Yig.
k. 16).
кип-bor all-renouncer:
) he cast off relations,
wealth, properties, realm and all (K. d.
« 333).
kun-bye# rgyal-po 1. g’gY
$fio sman $pafi-rtsi a medicinal vege-
table growing in the grass in Tibet. 2. in
the terminology of the Nying-ma sect,
the (mind) is called kun-bytd rgyalpo,
the chief agent, the prince of all
doings.
kun-hbyufi^ffifa*	all-
growing; misery; sin.
3V1T* kun-sbyor libertinism (see
kun-t u-ru).
kun-mo^ dri-bzafi
bshon-pa-can^b'fyb dri-shim-po sweet
perfume.
Syn.	hdod-pahi-dri; $na-
tshim-byed\ fiad-bz<tn ;	rin-du
khyab\	legs-par thul (JUnon.).
kun-rmofis нпш error; the all-
blundering (Л. K. 7$).
kun-hdsin W( the all-con-
taining ; that which holds everything in
itself.
kun-rdsob b den-pa
conditional or dependent truth ; acc. to
JFas. subjective truth.
= sems-nid WTW
basis ; the mind (Mnon.);
WT<d^Pi’snH=^Pr consciousness of
self; literally the primary cause of all
things, the basis of all; the soul, spirit:
“g*hi is a philosophical term for
vijnana, soul, which is considered to be the
basis of virtue, sin, worldly or spiritual
existence, &o.”
kun-za
flower of the plant called Spyi-shur, which
gives blue tint to water (4Wcw.).
kun-gzig%	who sees
all; the All-seeing One ; that is cognizant
of all (Zotf. *Z5).
M Kun-faifl tho all-good;
epithet of Buddha; a Bon sage and
teacher.
hkhor-lo a metri-
cal arrangement in several squares
resembling a chess-board and sometimes
forming an acrostic.
Knn-bzafi glift n. of a plaoe of
pilgrimage in Tibet (Deb. *1 1$).
Kun-^zan rnam-gsum the
three good ones ; the Supreme Deity of
the Bon religion in Tibet who is explain-
ed as having throe manifestations: (1)
the imper-
sonal God or Supreme Being, Ф'Зрг^слг
5^'41, who from eternity has been free and
all-perfect; (2)	I the personal
God	I as manifest in
the form of a sentient being (like Shenrab);
(3)	the deity represented
in symbol, «>., form;
representations in painting,
figures in relief or casts.
sa-gshi H«TFTT
the all-enduring; a figurative name for
. the earth.

29

Kun-chos gtsan-wa a Bud-
dhist sect with a few monasteries border-
ing on Yunnan.
*И^Я Kun-rig all-knowing; n.
of a god; a learned man.
Syn. i$kha$-pa; kun-$e$;
kun-gyi bkur-wa (2£fion.).
kun-la мйд to every one, to all;
to everywhere.
kun-la bkra-$i$ dwaft-
ldan-ma she who gives blessings to all:
V^<q-5)	a name of the god-
dess Um&, the wife of Mahes'wara (ifnon.).
kun-la khyab-byed ser-po
«TtChHl ghi-wafi (Sman. 107) a
bright yellow pigment prepared from the
urine or bile of a cow, or vomited in the
shape of scidulae by that animal; bezoar
stone.
ЗИ’вгя^Я kun-la hjug efficient; able to
enter into anything: ^Я’4’^	4	'4'
‘ЧЯI the intellect being cultured becomes
efficient in composing.
kun-la bde happiness to all.
kun-la phan useful or good to
all.
kun-la hphrodbeneficial; agree-
able to all:	“ cow
butter being the best of butter is agreeable
to all.”
^«rq?*rq kun-la btse$-pa injuring all,
all-hurting, hurtful, obnoxious.
^Я kun-la reg	meddling,
meddlesome, touching everything.
kun-las^^W kun-nas нй<г.
from every place or thing; from all; than
all.
kun-las btus-pa hhjh,
selected or compiled from every book; n.
of a book.
kun $es-pa all-knowing;
knowing all, omniscient.
kun ges-pahi ^o-gam-pa
a religious man who, being under moral
discipline, has reduced his desires and
requirements ; lit. “ an all-knowing tax-
gatherer.”
^4-q\q kun b^ad-pa ^ПЗПеГ well
explained; preaching all the religions,
one that preaches everywhere.
kun-sems to be conscious
or cognizant of all things; to think at all
times.
kun-slon	a gene-
ral rising; rising from every direction or
place ;=	sems-bskyed
conception; idea ; the notion of a thing; a
thought; 5^5^	the mind
which gives rise to thoughts of sins or
merits, virtue or vice.
kun-slofi ehen-po comprises the
three *я*г^к;йк^ chags-sdafi-rmofis, lust,
anger and ignorance.
^*Я^5 kun-gsod all-killing, that
which kills everybody or thing; the lord
of death.
^’Я^ч kun-gsal=W*^ nam-mkhah 1.
the sky; that is fully clear, illuminated.
2. ni-ma^ the sun, the all-olearer.
да kun-ta : from where ? one
from an unknown place; also interroga-
tively, come from where? It is used in
mystic language (К g. F 26).
uvn kun-tu-ru the union of the
two sexes, copulation (used only in mystic
language) (K. g. ^^16).
t	kun-thi-ra yf=4X n. of a
bird: ^^^"<’’5’’^’Si5'^'^,5's.’4 454|4¥<’
wfwerMfrwJ'VX (K- g. « 58).

30

Tpj’5 kun-da vh 1. mistake, blunder,
illusion (Z#r.). 2.	5^ ^he
blue jessamine, Jasminum multiflorum or
pubescens.
Syn. 4’|chu-зкуез; W’VS4 dgun-
zla tha-chufl $kyes*	bdab mohi
qidsod (Hfion.).
kun-da byafi-8cm$~*№‘§
dnul-cku quicksilver (Sman. 79).
kun-du-ru 'ф* sweet-
smolling tree; a kind of incense; the resin
of Boswellia thurijcra; gum olibanum (JZ
Ж).
Syn. %kyoft-bye$-pa\ 3'^'5 mu-
kun-da; Z^kun-du (Afnon.).
kun-du-la=fy'Sskim-bu a
(ДГЯол.).
kun-do fi wnj onion.
’F4 кит-pa crooked; shrivelled ;
kum-pa-nid contraction; kum-
kum very contracted.
51№ kum-po cringing; one in
tracted posture; 3»г25ч kum-por
ingly; contractedly.
-F? kum-bha gpw = 3*4
gm. an earthen jar; a vessel for water.
kum-bi-ra gwh n. of a
srin-po (demi-god or demon).
kur-ti to hasten;
kur-ti lafi§-hgro to start or go off on any
business; (in colloq. language) to start on
an errand or mission early in the morning
without having even a cup of tea.
Kul-kar, also ЧРГТ’Р kul-dkar,
n. of a place in Tsang; a kind of shield
manufactured in Kul-kar-.
cat
a con-
cring-
bum-pa
the shield manufactured at
Kul-kar is of superior quality (on account
of its superior metal);
as to the Kul-dkar shield it costs five sho
for the best.
Л) ke numeral for 91; ke-pa the 91st
(volume).
Фч ke-ka in the dialect of JJphan-yul
for 54 $kya-ka, a magpie.
Кс-кй-pi-no a coun-
try west of Jambudvipa of romantic
scenery, said to be filled with gardens,
dales, fountains, cascades, ete., and inter-
sected with streams, and inhabited by a
race of very handsome men who cat red
rice (K. d. *179).
ke-kihi’$gra the cry of the
peacock (Schtr.).
kc-kc-r’’-
white precious stone.
ke-rgyuft a
deity called Qen-sra$
(P. 2?.).
ke-ta-ka from 1. a gem
which has the property of purifying water;
its Tibetan name is ^*’§5 or $^’3% the
purifier. 2. a great mountain situated
north of the great forest plain beyond the
north bank of the river Sita. Its peaks
are described as very grand in appearance.
It contains mines of gold and silver, and
round its peaks are four fabulous lakes
which at all seasons remain filled with
lotuses and lilies. The ruler of this
country in ancient times was Vaigravana^
whose army consisted of amazons of
great beauty and valour (5. Zam.).
or cVH a
charm of the Bon
mi mgon tgyal-po*.

31

Ke-ta-ra a mountain, probably
Kedara (^<R) ; part of the Himalaya
№).
t ^t5 Ke-tu 1. a fabulous planet in
Brahmaincal as well as in Tibetan astro-
logy. In Tibet the name Ke-tu is gene-
rally applied to comets, called also
(lit. the long smoke-tailed). 2. a fiery
meteor ; a shooting star; the descending
node. 3. n. of a demon.
Ke-nehi-bu n. of a sage of
the time of Gautama the Buddha (K.
du. 54).
^95 Ke-byed IQrtika, the god of
- war (Sehtr.).
Ke-rtse-гса n. of a Bon teacher:
ЗЦ-Ервгт)’(Deb. 6) the Bonpo
priests invited Ke-rtse.
Ke-tsheg$ a Naga; the quar-
ter where it resides during a certain astro-
logical period is considered inauspicious.
Kehu 1. a tribe in Tibet (Vai, kar.
160). 2.	in classical Tibetan a
kind of garlic. 3. a cavern, den, hollow
place (C^.).
Jfebu-rtse, also ke-rtse, a
jacket made in the Chinese fashion; in
Chinese кгса-tzu.
Kehu-t shaft (in Chinese K’u-
ts'ang, “a treasury; a store-house”) n.
of a sacred rock-cavern.
'ife* Kehu-ri n. of a female deity of
fearful mien.
KebuJi the Tibetan, and Mon-
golian name for Corea. In Chinese Kaoli.
kebu-k ^’43'j customary seal
(Л.).
4fe’5«i kehu-ga-ya (from kasayd)
celestial robes; robes worn by the gods
(2Г. my. *| 7).
>f|’4 ke-ya wickedness:
the root of wickedness -
of a bad heart (г.е., envy) having sprung
forth (J. Zaft.).
+ ^х’П Be-yu-ra-ka 1. a
kind of grass used in ancient times in
making garments for a Bhiksu (K. du.
ч 388). 2. n. of a Gandharva.
Ke-ru 1. n. of a place and
monastery in the district of Hon in
Yar-lung (J. Zaft. 217).	2. 5^’** sran-
ma a species of peas:
1 after casting
water in oblation, he conducted (him)
inside the house and served him with a
cupful of pea-soup (Deb. у 35).
Ke-rc, v. 3’^ kye-ri.
4)’^ Ke-la	! n. of a
tribal clan (lrig.).
ke-da-ka=fj'% $ga-$kya ginger
(Swan. 267).
+	kai-la-^a ^5*
gacZi’§^l	the king of mountains
?>., Kailasa in the Himalayas.
jffe-Zan,prob. corruption of
follower of Tsongkhapa (Hue, vol. II).
Ke-le n. of a fabulous place or
country :	the country of
cannibals, Ke-le (D. B.).
пг-ч ke-fa hair; mane;
letters which are surmounted with

32	’ifal
double e* sign called hgrefi-bu or o’* sign
called naro. Signs for long accentuation
are also called ke-$a.
*^'-*j*^ ke-fa-ra mane (Schr.).
i ’Н’И Ke-^u-ka a plant, perhaps
Arum colocasia* with edible roots; also
v.	Kift-(pt-ka (Hbum.
77).
Ke-sa-ra 1. tho hair;
the mane of the lion. 2. the hairy fila-
ment of the lotus; a celestial flower;
saffron.
keg=^'&S bar-chad danger;
accident, v. П kag.
Keg-ma=kag-ma {Lex.),
Kefi-ru$ skeleton.
J’Wt Ken-pi-ka an evergreen
tree, /.<?., of the colour of the parrot
(&ag. 3). This is evidently a corruption
of
-iM Ker-ko a cymbal; a musical
instrument:
(carrying with him) a hand-drum, a
cymbal, a pipe (flute) (K, g. 5 £).
ker-gyi§ suddenly (Sch.\
Ker-ica to raise; to lift up;
er| to point the fingers towards
heaven.
ker-lafa suddenly stood
up:	asuddenly standing erect
and still (like a tree ”) (Nag, 3),
ker leb $gur metaph. for
horse, sheep and yak:
j the tax (in kind, ?>.,
one in a hundred) on horse and yak
from among the three kinds of cattle
(Rtsii.).
Kel-mag possibly indicates
the Kalmuk Tartars.
Kai-ta-ka n. of a mytholo-
gical demon.
Kai ne-ya a rishi or sage;
also patronymic of Havana (K d. pl£6).
Kai-la-^a
Ri-wo да fa-can the hugo snowy mountain
on the north shore of the Manasarowara
lake called Gang Ti-se by the Tibetans
and Kailasa by the Indians.
I: ко num. 121; Чр ко-pa the
volume marked with the letter ко, or the
121st volume.
II: 3 an expletive meaning:
same, the same, very; as in hdi-ko,
the same; as *4'^ hdi-ni, this very:
“these same classifications”;
dc-ni that very.
Ш: all, whole; quite, entirely,
altogether (Schtr,),
Ч’П ко-гса 1. hide, leather—that
derived from yaks, buffaloes and horses as
distinguished from pag§-pa the skins of
sheep, goats, foxes, &c. 2. colloq. for
ko-gru a hide-boat.
’Чйч] ko-khugo, leather purse; a little
leathern money-bag.
ko-khrol (ko-thoT) a sieve made of
hide-strips or strings to clean peas, barley
grain, &c., of gravel, &c.:
। (Jitsii.) for a hide-sieve for sift-
ing peas and barley (i.e., price for).
^'3 ko-gru (ко-du) a hide-boat a boat
made of the entire hide of a yak; a skin
coracle.
ko-btum hide-packing. This is
said to be a criminal punishment in
’’Mf	зз	।
Central Tibet, varying in severity, e.g.,
when the culprit’s hands are
cut off, the stumps sewed up in leather
and the poor wretch thrown as a beggar
upon public charity, &o. (Jd.).
ko-thag strap ; thong,
ко-thud a kind of tea, probably so
called on account of being sold packed
iu hide cases; an inferior tea:
(Rtsii. 74) “to the cost of
pressed brick-tea.”
ko-thums packed up in hide;
a leather
package containing 30 ounces of gold:
having sto-
len a bag containing gold, (we) concealed it
in a marmot’s (Bq a marmot) hole.
фяччр! ko-hthag§ a small instrument of
leather to weave lace with (Cs.).
ko-g.dany pronounced kom-gdan,
skin-rug or seat; a piece of leather put
under the saddle (Sch.):
for each tanned skin-rug or
leather folding used for cushions (three
tanka) (Rtsii.).
ko-mdah an arrow bound with
hide:	the hide arrow used in
the north (of Tibet).
ko-ldin a vessel or basin made of
hide to keep or cleanse oil or lime-wash:
(Rtsii.) for each
hide vessel for holding sa-rtsi (such and
such a price).
ko-lpags hide; also tanned skin;
4^^ hide or leather mate-
rial or stuff included in the fourteen
materials prescribed for clothing to be
used by Buddhist monks.
ko-lpags
Iham-wkhan	worker in hide and
leather; a shoe-maker.
Ito-ipyin (fio-pin) glue:
for each stick or cake of glue
(Rtsii.).
Jff Йелг ko-phofis guitar (gen. made of
thiu belly-skin of a cow) (Ld.); it is
tuned in three-fourths (Jd.).
ko-phor a cup made of leather
and painted to look like a wooden cup;
ko-gshon a basin made of hide.
ko-wa, tnkhan a tanner; the
steersman of a hide boat.
ko-wa mned-mkhan a tanner.
Ko-wa brag
n. of a district in Upper Tibet:
then he visited Ko-wa brag
in Stod-lun (Lha. kah. 23).
ko-bub$ au entire skin:
an entire skin of
a sheep holds three khar-nag measure of
good butter (Rtsii. 74).
ko-hbugs an awl; a three-sided
needle for sewing leather (Sch.).
4*5 ko-hbo itch scab; ^4*5^\^ scabby.
In Sikkim a measure for rice or barley
made of hide.
ko-§brag§ a hide filled with
butter ; the whole package is so called.
ko-tshal pieces of leather or hide:
for each skin
of butter and honey, &c., with hide
wrapping (Rtsii.).
ko-rlon gtums packed in a
fresh skin:
like a man packed in a fresh skin, or any-
thing packed or fastened with raw hide
which becomes shrivelled when the skin
dries and illness is induced.
c
^1
34
ко-rul a rotten hide.
ко-la a grub which breeds in hides ;
a kind of hide-moth;
| the Kola moth, something
like a species of vermin in flesh (ВЛчУ.).
ko-$am-pa (Lex.) one dressed in
skin or having a skin for his under-
clothing, v. kom-po.
^У7!] Ko-ka a place in Bengal where
in ancient times many Tantrik adepts
lived ($. Lain.).
j ’fpryStn] Ko-ka-li-ka	a
Bhiksu of tho Buddha’s time who sided
with Devadatta (K. d. •*) 2^7).
Ko-kio. wild mountainous country
cast of Bengal in the Chakma and Hamsa-
vati countries winch are east and south-
east of Haribhadra (Manipur) (S. Lam.).
Ko-ki-h	the Indian
cuckoo, in books described as a bird that
sings sweetly (K. du. p 99).
ko-ki laksa n. of a tree
(Mnon.).
Ko-ko (variously spelt ko-
sko, ko§-ko ^Кко$-$ко} 1. the
chin; also occasionally the throat or the
neck: ^'^^*4=^'q‘^N-q to raise
the chin (&ag.) [see
chinless,or one with a small chin:
with a slightly perceptible
chin;	a chin like
that of a pig; pig-faced (no chin) ube-
neath the chin.”	fag or
the lower part of the chin. 2. a
Tibetan of mixed breed, ?>., born of a
Chinese father and a Tibetan mother.
Ko-ko than-ma a country
in cr near Ceylon (•-/«*)•
Кокуа	pure (Ze.rz.).
^35 Ko-krad (ko-teh) 1. ^'§,8Ч'35
lham-gyi akrad the worn out leather of old
shoes and boots; 2. also a leather-
shoe {Jd.).
neck:
ko-sko —	mgrin-pa
hdeg§ raise the nock {Nag. J).
Ko Jia	yul-shig gi-mifi
n. of a place in Tibet (Fit/.).
ko-non-ts", also	к o-n al-
ts or	ko-lon-t#** the kernel of
the pine-apple (Cs.); more particularly the
edible seed of the Acosrt-pine growing in
tho valley of the Sutlej ; it is also called
ёкап-пан-ts? in Kunawar (Ja.).
ko-tan=- B4! khrag blood in
mystic language (K. g. 216).
ТГ5Я-И ko-tam-pa ^ч|,9|‘йс; n. of a
mountain (K. dun. 17).
ko-tam-pahi-ra$
one of tho 41 materials of clothing permis-
sible to Buddhist mendicants ; a kind of
graps formerly used in making clothes
(K. du. ч 388).
ko-tam-bkag same as above.
ko-tra-pa нт^, in vulg.
Nepalese Kodu, a kind of millet largely
used in Sikkim for making murica beer; it
is mentioned in K. d. * 333. A species
of grain eaten by the poor; Paspatum
scrobiculatum.
ko-trog-can ^’34’54 mi krog
krog applied to a thoughtless, childish
man (K. d. ^362).
Л]’£| ко-tha	a kind of leprosy
’ifaail
35
I
ko-thal cinders, ashes;
S^’q ko-thal-du byas pa to be reduced to
ashes :	ko-thal hthor-гсаг
gyur-pa scattered about ashes.
ko-dd-la or ^rt^TW a
tree growing in the mountain Called
Kokila Parvata (K. d. £74).
фк’3 ko-paft-tse a sort of tea
(Sehtr.)\ usually called Capinze (Schtr.).
Ко-Ы-da-ra	the
tree of paradise on which grows the Pari-
jdta flower; also a tree tho flower of which
is pretty and of sweet scent, probably
Bauhinia variegata (К. my. 20);
an abode of the gods
(2Г. du.\310).
Ko-bo prop. n. of a country
(Vai. kar.).
’’iW Ko-brag-pa prop, a sect of Tan-
trik Buddhists; also its founder:
(J. Zaft.)
Bsod-nams rgyal-mtshan of Ko-brag
brought Vibhuti Chandra from Bal-po
(Nepal) to Ding-ri and later on founded
the monastery of Ko-brag in Upper My an.
ко-ma a bird (Pai. sH.).
4’3 ko-tse ja brgyad-pa the
Chinese name for the brick-tea used by
the common people of Tibet. It is called
ja brgyad-pa, the eighth or the inferior
quality of tea (5. kar. 80).
4'W< ko-icag$ is meant to express
the voice of a raven (Ja.).
Ko-ranjo	prop, a
country, said to be in the fabulous
Western Continent of Godaniya (K. d.
331).
+ ^’4 Ko-raba the descen-
dants of Kuru; their party; n. of a
country in the east (K. cl. 267).
4 ко-re or ko-ra cup for drink-
ing ;	(pn-kor wooden cup which
every Tibetan carries with him in the
pocket of his great coat next to his bosom;
gcl-kor a drinking glass.
ko-lahi hclab—^^ ^ ^ glafi-
pohipi-pi Un plantain leaf (Mfion.).
I: ko-lon annoyance; dissatis-
faction ; the jealousy of demi-gods or of
Кода, &c.:	I “pray
do not out of dissatisfaction be jealous of
me.” In saying grace at meal time tho
Gods are exhorted by the lamas not to be
spiteful, jealous or angry, &c.:
। the
Lord (Atis'a) not being actuated by any
spite did not express any dissatisfaction,
&c. (Л. 58).
Ф^’ II : is a dubious word (Schtr.);
ko-lon-wa to hate, envy; but in a
passage in ЛА7., where the connection
admits of no doubt, ko-lon mdsad-pa must
be taken = disdain (Id.). In Amdo ’fj’fo*
ko-lon~dispute, fight.
c( ^o-^a-ld fjw mythical river
oast of Jambudvipa (K. d. ч 267).
4 луфц Kq
-qi-ld a certain king
of birds (К. my. *q 18).
Kondi-nya	the son
of Upayamati; in Tib.	n. of a
Muni or sage; n. of a grammarian; a
patronymic of the poet Jayadeva.

36
^1
Ko-qam-Ы, also written
Kohu-$atn-bi	the city of
Howers; n. of an ancient city situated
on the Gauges in tho lower part of the
Doab, in tho vicinity of Kurrah; acc. to
Nag. 3 Vatsapattana.
i Ko-gi-ka, also written ^^’4
Ko-hu-^i-ka	1. an epithet of
Indra ; n. of a drug. 2. n. of the Vatiea
Robusta; n. of a teacher; an owl; a
patronymic of Vis’vamitra, who was the
grandson of Kus'ika; n. of a river, river
Kosi (К. (I. я 267).
Syn. na-gu-l";	ч §brul
kha$ $dig$-pa;	dran-sroft
mdsod (Nag.).
Ko
-sa-thi-la chen-po
n. of a Qrdvaka attendant of
the Buddha (К. my. 4 4%8).
Ko-8a-la	n. of
a part of Ancient Oudh which in the Bud-
dha’s time was ruled by King Prasonajit.
I: kog-pa 1. a cover; ^4'^4
kog-^og the paper-cover of a letter; an
envelope (Yig. k. 2):
5^ the cover or envelope (of a letter)
should be neat and clean. ja-kog a
hide case in which tea is packed is usually
called ja-ko; W’fpq mar-kog a skin of
butter :	1 (& ieg.)
“like a stone in water or package of
butter.” ^'^4 $un-kog shell, rind; B'^'^4
phyi-yi-kog exterior shell; bark. 2. the
name ^4 4 kog-pa is applied to an old
man after the age of 85 (Rtsa shaft.).
ifjqj-q II; 1. vb., to splinter off, to
chip; ^4«1**4 to rise suddenly and run
away (eTa.).	2.	kog-pa gu-ua to
peel, pare off.
kog-tse зтТчГ a net: acc. to
(flag.)	’ “a net
or snare to catoh birds or wild animals.”
I: кой, also кой-кой, concave;
excavated; crooked; bent; warped.
’ffv sa кой-кой undulating ground;
кой-pa-nid concavity.
’fyr II: Q Koft-po, also $кой-
1. cup; crucible. 2. the country
of ravines, n. of a province of Tibet
lying to the south-east of Lhasa and
cast of Tso-thang.	Кой-gsum
fsuivi the three divisions of Koft-yul\ also
n. of a kingdom in Ancient India which
was ruled by King SusarmS. ^’45 Koft-
$ked a kind of sash or waist-band of fine
wool manufactured in Кой-ро;
koft-induft a kind of spear manufactured
in Koft-po (Jig. 32); ’ffvgr koft-рай planks
brought from Koft-po (S. kar. 179);
koft-tprcl an ape from Koft-po; the name
of an individual who made a donation to
aid in repairing the monastery of Samye.
kon-bzo a kind of armour or weapon
manufactured in Koft-po.
*^‘3^ koft-kuu зкТзгчг n. p. (Schr.).
^0 koft-khru (koft-thu) a kind of
yellow Tatin :	’44’4^4 (S. kar.
180) a piece or roll of yellow satin for a
gown.
Koft-jo, in Chinese Kuug-chu, a
princess; the Tibetan name of the daugh-
ter of Emperor Tai-tsung, who was married
to King Sroft-tsan Sgam-po,
Koft-jo, from China; the Chinese
spouse Kon-jo (Zotf. я 5).
37
’fc-g KoMu a small cup-shaped
brass or copper oil-burner ; mchod-
kon an offering bowl, a cup for offering
pure water to any divinity ; W-
kofi ink-stand, generally for black ink;
rptshal-кой ink-stand for red ink
or vermilion;	blug%-koft casting
mould, crucible;	g&er-koft a gold
cup or oil-burner placed before Tibetan
deities; 9 bye-koft bowl of sand.
кой-то a cave; a ditch.
Kod boiled:	’Vqsrq’g’
ja de koj-na$ ka-ra bram-po
1йа Ьугй-ра$ Jo-wo dgyes (Л. 95) the tea
having been boiled (prepared) and given
with five lumps of sugar, the Jo-wo was
gratified.
коп-pa, also called
коп-pa gab-skye$, the name of a plant that
grows in solitary places, generally in the
clefts of rooks. This medicine, kon-pa
gab-$kye$, is used in Tibet for stopping
hemorrhage.
kob-kob, same as kab-kob,
the noise or sound produced from the
stretching of hides.
кот-pa to tan (skin).
kom-gdan a seat made of tan-
ned skin.
kom-po skin which has been made
soft and pliable by tanning; leather.
Кот-рй кой-jo the
princess Kom, the youngest daughter of
Wen Chung, tho fifth Emperor of the
Tang dynasty. She was married to King
Me Agtshom (J. ZaH.).
T4!
kor, same as $kor. 1. is used
as а ^’5^ or auxiliary particle used in
the manner of an affix, as in
stod-kor, which signifies a cloth that
surrounds or covers the upper part of one’s
body; hence §tod-le a kind of half
jacket worn by children and also by lama
dancers; klad-kor the circular dot
put over the head of certain letters to
signify the letter * ma. 2. anything that
has been cut out by the hand or a lathe,
such as <рй-ког a wooden cup;
rdsa-kor an earthen cup or vessel turned
out. 3. n. of a place;	’^’<1 Kor-ni-ru-
pa n. of a great lama who was a native
of the place called Kor. (Deb. 4 11).
kor also occurs in ^’^4 than-kor,
fa nen-kor,	ho J-kor,	paj-kor,
gdub-kor, &c.
kor-kor coiled:
5^1 “a string was wound round the
(exorcist’s) dagger (Уаг.§й. 82).
kor-bzo lit. of round make; a
kind of shield of round shape (Rtsii.).
a colloq. form of
kol-wahi lam—^^^ lam-йап-
pa, a bad road (Мйоп.).
kol-за, v. hgolsa or
gol-sa,
ko$-ko the chin. This
word is also applied to the throat and
even to the wind-pipe.
Kya-la (also called jp) petty;
n. of a petty state in Tibet, the chief town
of which is	(lit. the lion-face),
where the Tsang-po, it is said, enters a
rocky chasm in the mountains.

38	||
Kya-an n. of a large fort in
Tibet {Dsam. 32).
ОТ kyag or OT’OT kyag-kyag 1.
throwing obstacles in the way of another’s
work out of spite. 2. thick; run into
clots; OT'q'V\ kyag-pa nit} thickness (Cs.).
OT’OT kyag-kyog or kyog-
kyog «ГЖ curved; crooked; not straight.
ОТ’ I: kyafi, also OT’OT kyafi-kyaft or
kyaft-po, 1. straight; right; very
straight (Cs.). 2. slender as a stick
W-
ОТ’ II:	X. and; and also;
though; although; too; yet more; used
instead of ОТ’ daft enclitically after tho
letters TSIn composition the word
ОТ’ is placed between the subject and
the predicate, for example :—
he was beautiful and his
mind was also good. In the sense of
“ though ” M follows the first or contrast-
ed vorb :—“though
his faco was handsome yet his body was
crooked.”	I this being
handsome also sheds lustre. 2. since,
since that; then, therefore ; likewise;
whereas.
kyan-kyon indolent, lazy, idle
(Л1.).
куаг-ро, also OT’OT kyar-kyar,
flat, not globular (Cs.).
OT’OT kyar-kyor still feeble as a
convalescent after disease (Ja.).
ОТ I: kyaly resp. <^4’OT shal-kyal, a
joke; also a comic or jocular look : ^Ц’^Т
(A. 113) once having a
jocular smile on his face.
от II: also OT’OT sometimes
written as MH* tkyal-rkyal, long and flat,
not globular. Described in (Nag.)
like straw, hollow
and devoid of meaning; worthless.
ОТЧ kyal-ka WT4 joke, jest,
tricks: OTT’OT'^4! kyalJcahl tshig
rt&ed-mohi tshig playful word.
OT’q kyal-pa vain, idle talk, nonsense.
OT’5^ kyal’kyal poor; ill-condi-
tioned.
kyi 1. This syllable is primarily an
inflecting affix attached to nouns, adj.,
participles, фе., indicating tho genitive
case. This affix takes the form Э only
after the final letters 5, ч, or and is
varied to § whero tho word to which it
is attached ends in either \ от *i, and
to whero the preceding final is or
or simply to if the final happens to
bo a vowel. Ex.: ^5’5 of Tibet, Tibetan;
чя’З of the way; ОТ’5) of the north;
at tho time of going. Sometimes, more-
over, it is elided altogether, as in ^5'45
Tibetan language. 2. It is annexed to
vorbal roots (with tho same variations of
form) after the manner of a continuative
particle and imparting the gemndial sense,
but by some modern writers used as a
finite verb. Gerundially it generally im-
plies an antithesis which may be ex-
pressed in English by “ though ” followed
by “yet”:
^5 though the girl called to him, yet
he went on the straight way without turn-
ing his head. As affix to a finite verb it
is frequent in the writings of Padma
Jungnag and Milaraspa, and is also used
in the C. colloquial. Attached to the
verbal root it may also carry the sense of
TSFI
39
“as much as,” “asfaras” :
as far as he remembered
this road, he followed the ox. 3. 5 con-
necting the auxiliary verb with the verbal
root forms a much-used present tense :
I am lying down. But here the
final vowel does not often take the simple
t (*)> e*9*> is seeing; still we have
in books is eating food. [W.!?.—
The use with the instrumental form
will come under that article.]
№ kyi-gJofi the elbow.
§ U Kyi-Ice n. of a medicinal plant,
Gentiana decumbens. The white species of
this plant called	kyi-lce dkar-po
is in repute for biliousness. The blue
called	kyi-lce $non-po heals swell-
ing in the throat or glands (Med.).
kyi-bun a chill; a feeling of
cold (ScA.).
kyi-lin chu-rta §non-po=
dnid-chu quicksilver (Smdn. 118).
kyi-hud	VT ^TVT
1. inter]., the sound of weeping, lamenta-
tion ; an expression of grief, sorrow or loss;
Alas I Ah I	kyi-hud zer-tca VTVT
expressing deep sorrow or lamenta-
tion. 2. one of the eight cold hells of the
Buddhist purgatory.
Э*т^ kyig-rtse unburnt brick
(Sch.).
Kyift n. of a people living in the
east of Asia (Yig. 8).
к yin ser-rlufi a violent
NO
wind with hail: acc. to Jd. also Q'^kya-sa,
onomatopoetio word; a blowing wind.
куш a verbal termination used
alternatively with gym and Sfa gin and
after a vowel; gin denoting a partic.
pres, like the English ‘ing’:
proceed on your way singing! With
yod or R^»| hdug it forms a periphrastical
present tense:	§mon-lam
hdebs-kyin yod he is praying (just now)
(Jd.). Most probably the common present
form in kyi, gi, &c., is an excised form of
this use, e.g.)	is coming; is
looking.
kyir, also kyir-kyir, round;
circular; a disk ; a round thing;
kyir-wa-nid roundness.
5^ kyis by, with; the sign of the
instrumental case, used after the letters
5, a, or *i, and generally indicating the
personal subject of the action. It is called
the	byed-pa pohi ggra (the term of
the doer). Gerundially kyis is annexed
to a verbal root to render clauses which in
English would be introduced with “by,”
“from,” &C., C.g.,
from the sword having pierced the liver,
he was slain. Of course the prep. “ from ”
might be omitted here. Again our “because”
is often an appropriate opening to clauses
terminated in &c.:
the demon coming, he turned aside ;
or, because the demon came, he, &c.
kyu a hook;	Icags-
kyu iron hook; an angle; a fishing hook;
shab§-kyu (i.e., the foot-hook) a
mark fixed at the foot of a letter to
signify the vowel and written as^
kyur-kyur twittering; the cry
of a small bird :	byihu
coga kytir-kyur sgrog the swallow twitters.
40
^11
куе the vocative sign; О!
Holla! 5 kye is called д bbcd-paty,
$gra or interjection—the word of invoca-
tion or calling: 3*5^1 0 great King 1
3'X^’S’qS’^ 0 lotus-gem (Chenraisi).
Э’® Kye-kye, also written 3 for
abbreviation ; conveys the same meaning
as 3*
3*^1 Kye-rdo-rje % n. of a terrific
Tantrik deity.
kye-ga n. for the magpie.
Kye-phafi-pa n. of an idol of
the Nying-ma sect, consisting, like most
of the popular idols in Tibet, of an
enchanted stick or log decked with rags,
but much dreaded and said to be identical
with Pe-Jkar Gyalpo (Jd.).
Э’Я kye-ma тт (interj.) Alas! An
expression of surprise with sorrow, also of
misery; 3’*’*’®* kye-ma-maJa wvtbut
oh! an interjection expressive of desire
for compassion or fatigue: 3’^’я’вгщз'В?
kye-ma ma-la glaft-po hdi alas this
elephant! (Л. K. 1-36).
kye-re or ke-re, also 3^ к yer,
upright, erect; 3^q kye-re-wa or 3’^5
kye-re-nid the act of standing erect.
(mterj.)vft,vi Alas !
Woe! Ah! What misery! An expression
of grief or pain; 3’V kye-ho What oh!
Holla!	1 kye-ho and kwa-ye
are exclamatory words.
rj-q
kyo-wa a pointed iron-hook;
a large pin to pierce with.
kyo-rafi, v. 3’3 kyc-wa.
kyog, also ЗЧ’З4! ЗЖ, crooked,
bent, winding, curved:	|
having turned his head (sideways),
lam-kyog a winding or surpentine road; a
zig-zag.
Kyog-po згяг crooked; З4)'^
Луо/7-^ог crookedly, not straight:
(Pag, 1S3) the
wild animals that conceal themselves
bending their necks ran away.
I: к у ой or 33’33 kyoft-kyofi 1.
hollow; cavity; the hollow of a dish or
tray; cognate to кой. 2. obstinate;
unmanageable (Jd.).	3. hard, as in
$’33’Q, hard water; evidently a colloq.
form of $’3^’3.
3^11: or 33’3 куой-bu a small shovel,
scraper; 3C'T’ куой-kha quarrel (Sch.).
3« к у от flexible but without elas-
ticity ; flabby, loose, lax.
kyom-pa soft and tough ;
kyom-pa-nid pliancy; toughness.
3^ kyom-kyom of irregular
shape, not rectilinear (Ja.).
kyor qt 35’3^ kyor-kyor weak,
feeble, unfortified (C&.).
HpI kyol or З'Ч’ЗЯ kyolJiyol^fa kyor.
Щ Kra (ta) for	kra-tysugs
established a Dhannas'&la (Л. 61).
TJ’kra-ma far-sa n. of a kind
of precious stone : “ ^з/л^лч’
q-fljw I (Rtsii. 4'1) a house
built of ruby made lofty with a dome of
krama garsa.
33 krag	brag, signifying
rock.
3е* I
41
Ml
иге kraft-fa (tang-fte) standing ;
й'ч or	an upright posture;
2(5’4 kraft-sdod-pa to stand.
Kraft-naft (tang-nang) a gallery
round a house; a covered passage; evi-
dently an incorrect form of 5}^’^.
D^‘4 kraft-wa (tang-wa), prob, wrongly
written for	to make straight.
•55’^ krad-hkhor (td-khor) a ring
used in the exercise of archery as a butt
for arrows; a mark; a target.
35'^ krad-rgyun ((ё-дуйп) a piece of
long narrow leather to mend shoes with;
acc. to Cs. a long narrow piece of leather
to fasten the sole to the upper leather of a
shoe or boot.
krad-pa (£ё-ра) a shoe; a cover-
ing for the feet of the lower classes
of people; a leathern half-boot ; 35'^
kratf-lhan a patch for shoe.
kran-ma (tan-ma), colloq. for
sran-ma, peas.
Цфтр krab-krab (tab-tal)==*№*
dancing or stamping of the feet :
(his) legs and arms moved as
in dancing. According to &ag, 2P*2p
is equivalent to $4’^4, flat.
kram (tarn) cabbage ; дя'яеа sweet
or fresh cabbage; 3^’5^ kram $kyur oab-
bage-piokle; cabbage soaked in vinegar.
Kri-ka-rti-ka n. of a
monastery in ancient Behar which was also
known by the names of Samudra Gupta
and Kusumapuri (Л. 60),
e\
+	kri-ka la-sa w*rni a
small lizard.^ There is an account of this
animal being once offered as a burnt sacri-
fice to the gods (7Г. d. * 214).
t ifi! Kri-kri fjfffsfi, n. of a Bud-
dhist king of Benares who is said to have
patronized Buddha Kas'yapa. In the
Chinese versiou of the Vimala-kirti-nir-
des'a sutra, he is called Krpin, the kind
and merciful.
c\
HP kri-kha (ti-kha) the magpie; the
white-breasted magpie; colloq. called kya-
ka in Tibet.
Kri-wa shahi-gdon n. of a
place in Tibet (J. Zaft.).
kri-mi (ti-mi) = ^^bya-gag 1. the
grey duck (Mnon.). 2. a worm.
kriya fkm;	the
ritualistic part of Sambhawa mysticism:
(Л. 74)
the krya man-tra having been performed
by the six-armed deity.
Kri-qoft-ba-ro n. of an indi-
vidual who did some service to Atis'a
during his journey to Tibet through Nepal
(Л. 142).
krig-krig {tig-tig) —to
beat or press with the hand or feet; to
make the sound tig-tig,
krig-gi (tig~gi) straight:
the iron arrow when
quite straight being good (I). It.).
krig-cags med-pa
^•5рга5’4’**Л55Я ^5'4 I not customary .
or purposelessly; for nothing :
Mongol tribes
without adhering to custom would always
be making prayers (D. fel.10).
7

42

’Тртгр’
krin-kan (tifi-kan) a weapon
like the spear; a forked spear:
| (to the cost of) a
spear and lance with saw-like teeth
(Rtsii.).
kriti-bag-sgyo (tifi-pag-gyo)
glue or paste made of flour.
krin-nad (tin-не9) the colic.
Tjp-’i5 Krisna n. of sculptor ; an
image-maker during Atis’a’s time about
1000 A.D. (A, 121).
Kris-na-sa-ra	the
spotted antelope (Jd.); a kind of black
antelope which is said to possess the heart
of a Bodhisattva. The skin of this animal
is used by Hindus and Buddhists alike
to sit upon; the Tibetan lamas attach
much sanctity to this antelope and its
skin.
TJ’TJ kru-kru (tu-tu) (JF.) wind-pipe
>o xo
(Jd.).
+	krv -kru tris (tu-tu ii)
so
a kind of yellow chintz resembling
satin of great value, formerly highly
prized in India and Tibet. It is called
kru-ra (tu-ra) =	dman$-
rigs the vulgar, or the lowest class of peo-
ple in the mystical language (K, g. J4 28).
TJC’TJK’IIKrun-kruft sgra-can (tufig-
Mlg-da-can) n. of a country (filled with the
cry of storks or cranes) said to have been
visited by the Buddha (K. du. F302).
Krun-than the chief Chinese
so
minister who was resident in Tibet when
Abbe Hue visited Lhasa ; an official of
his class (Yig. k. 38). Probably an error
for Chung fang, a title borne by certain
high officials in China.
krum-pa (tum-pa) broken in the
edge or side or nibbled, but not entirely
broken to pieces.
Krums (turn) meat; in polite
language it is called	(sol-turn),
the meat that is offered to a respected
person.
Kre-nag (te-nag) n. of a place
in Kham.
the forehead ; also
dpral-pa, the
n. of a place in
krag-nag (te-nag) the spout of a
kettle (Sch.),
Т]’Ц kre-pa (te-pa)
a colloq. spelling for
forehead.
Kre-bo (te-o)
Kham.
ySvi kro dha-na яЙ’иИ'Г—
a fierce woman ; an amazon (Mfion.).
Wl krog-krog (tog-tog) a kind of
sound produced by the grinding of hard or
brittle objects together: ifa’ifa'VOS “tog-
tog is a sound” (fiag.); tog-tog is an ono-
matopoetic word meaning a grating sound.
kron (/ow) erect; standing:
5^1 the body erectly stood.
kron-kron (tong-tong) stand-
ing; posing still and erect:
| (A. 27)
“ while the two pupils were looking on, the
deity was able to appear erect as if in
life.” When used of persons, it means
also standing on one’s knees; kneeling
in an upright position (Ja.).
^•Г|
43
351
k>ofi-rtse (tong-tse) n. of a kind
of round writing anciently used in China:
I the
characters of that time were circular letters
called Tofig-tse. The word krofi-rtse
seems to bo a corruption of the Chinese
tang-clbien^ copper cash. Tibetans say
sj-wq “ a hundred cash.”
те kron-kron (ton-ton) in 7F. hang-
ing; dangling.
gj kla-rtsi musk :	this is an
incorrect spelling of the word a’J' gla-tsi.
sra kl-klo ’gst, ahr, ^nW
1. a barbarian:	1 kyi-hud
gla-glo dudhgroklu (Zam. 2) “ Alas, the
Mlecoha, the beasts, and the Ntiga !” 2.
any Musalman of India, a Hwi-hwi or
Hwi-tse in China. 3. a nation without
laws ; a barbarous, uncivilized race.
Я’ЙТ» kla-klo-kha=*^ zafis copper
(Jftfon.).
kla-klo rnam$ the bar-
barians (Schr.).
Я’йП’Р kla-klohi kha a Musal-
man’s mouth; = P‘^ kha-che “ a wide mouth-
man,” ?>., a Musalman of Kashmir.
kla-klohi chos (Schr.)
“religion on the lips.”
kla-klohi tig-ta several bitter
roots growing in the sub-Himalayan
regions; one is also called ^’3'54l’5 Gen-
tiana cheretta (Мйоп.).
kla-klohi §po§=Atf*\'Q garlic
(Шоп.).
kla-klohi hphel wmbr,
Spremfa n. of a Turuska (Tartar) King;
lit. growth of the Yavana or the HUcccha;
«S’h’l kla-kluhi bye-brag tWf a
tribe of Turuska ; a Tartar.
klag-cor	gfk
clamour, noise:	q loss noisy:
“having made a row
about.”
2FP klag-pa 1. WWFT study, reading;
a teaching profes-
sor, a teacher:	।
“has completed his vow of study” (A. K.
30), v. sfa'q klog-pa to read, peruse;
klags ufecT, is pret. of Й^Ч 2.
^ГсГГС to incarnate :
waiting for or expectant of one’s advent
or incarnation; in Asta.	“one
who finds fault with”; ЯЧ1^’^,ВЧ1^=
not incarnated or obtained an incar-
nated state:	'Ч’ЯЯ^’^^Л I
“ there cannot be transmigration from one
to another state of emptiness.” (This is
in reference to the eighteen states of
Siinyata.)
ЯЯ^ klags, v. ЙЯ klog.
SIS klad	j
1. “the word klad means above or up-
ward” (Nag.) ;	revolving
round overhead (A. 155). 2.
head; brain ; it is also written as g|5’q
Я5same as a dot or cypher placed
on the top or head of a letter to denote
the abbreviation of the letter я ma, which
is commonly used in writing and occa-
sionally in printing. 3. first; Я\^ from
the first:
as to lion’s cubs, their claws
are prominent from the first.
ЯУ2 klad rgya membrane covering the
brain ; pia mater;	the bloody
marrowin tho bones (Schr.); klad sgo
the fontanel in the infant cranium (Schr.).
Wl
44

35'$^’ klad chufi the cerebellum; 35
klad gshuft the spinal marrow; 35’^^
klad gzer painful pricking sensation in the
brain; 35'tlcw or 515'5 the thin covering
of the brain.
35'3* klad-tho the top length of a
Tibetan tent, Лс., the distance between
its two poles.
35 klad-don lit. signifies the meaning
of the text or the original work, but is
gon. used as a term for the Sanskrit
names or expressions whirh head almost
all the religious books of Tibet. The
work M.fton. makes 35 synonymous with
35'5** the amplification of the original
text.
35’4 klad-pa what is uppermost ;
35'^ klad-ma wife priority, beginning,
top.
3\q*44)*w’q klad-pa hgem§-pa lit. whose
brains have become confounded ; to stun;
to surprise; to confound; to overthrow
in argument.
35'q^ klad-bzo the making of the outer
side of anything:
qvS| klad bzo sbug then §kab$ daft bstun-bar
bya this outer covering and the flannel
within must be made to fit in their size
(Yig. 22).
31V3 klan-ka censure, blame;
35Л] $«rq klan-ka mi htshol-wa one not
seeking brawls: ^5’ч*§5’^^‘г*'*гз^'лТ
casting imputations against
another is called klan-ka htshol-wa; У5’
q	fit'mn’35^also fomenting a dis-
pute is called klan-ka ; 35^4 = 35'
j	one who seeks brawls;
35t5'« or 3VWq or 35№^w^ or
to censure, blame.
klan-pa 1. revenge; wrong aveng-
ed ; to wreak vengeance for: В‘Кч|'9)*г$ч|*
q’^'jpgYq-^rqN-^-qrX^ 9) the crow
revenges itself upon the owl by what is
called flesh-revenge.
SYS klan-bya part to be mended
or to be patched.
ЗрТЧ klam-pa a thick blanket;
also a pagri or turban used by Tibetans
when travelling: з*^м'ч**М ^55'^’^’^’
du. qj 121) klani the term for a
long piece of cloth which is tied round the
head.
a7’’2’ klal-uw^Q^xw tegyifa-pa or
g*q^c^*q b$nafi$-pa	yawning;
to yawn.
sp* kla$ <srw, w copious, abundant;
an equivalent of "w yaj, beyond, apart,
as in	mthah kla§ or w
“w (ярря). In this case 3^ may be taken
to mean a without,’ and is an equivalent
of the Sanskrit w.
klift-ma or gfspr, the
margin of a river or lake.
3] I: klu n. of a kind of flower
(7Г. my. 20).
Й] II: WRT, aw,	1. the
NO
Indian Nagay that is, a demi-god having the
human head and the body of a serpent,
which is generally supposed to live in
fountains, rivers, and lakes. The Lu are
also believed to be the guardian of great
treasures under-ground; they are able to
cause rain and certain maladies, and
become dangerous when angry. 2. a
serpent or any snake in general.
kun-tu dgah-
wahi zlo$-gar the drama of Nagananda;
^Alhr W a?’	5'। a
dramatic treatise by ‘ Harsadeva
(Ya-sel. 230).
Д’Г5^’ klu-khaft the residence of the Lu
or serpent gods. An imaginary palace
supposed to exist at tho bottom of the sea
or of some lake where the Naga reside :
(Jig-) saw
the palace of the Lu and their grove with
delight.
Ш’Ща^сГа kht-gjan nag-po ba-ru
= the crab which is called by
the Tibetans “bull-homed black Lu”
(Sman. Z44)*
* З’Э*1 klu-rgyal ?ПЛТГ5Т (Schr.).
’25’^5’3^ Sht-rgyal dkar-po dufi-
skyoft	n. of a certain
Naga Raja or a serpent demi-god called
the White Protector of Conch Shells: Д’З'Ч*
the Lu
ruler called white S'ankhapala and S’an-
khadhara Bahu Papi, the deity with many
arms, and others (Rtsii. M)-
5|’j«r*w«w klu-rgyal mthah-yas
infinite; the king of the snakes described
in Hindu mythology (fijncm.); one of the
eight klu-chen, great Lu.
klu-rgyal rigs-lna tho five
classes among the Naga Raja qt Lu kings
residing in tho fabulous world of the snakes.
Д'|А Klu-$grub (Lu-dub) ntvtwt the
expounder of the Madhyamika school of
Buddhist philosophy.
jj'^'A^ klu-ehen brgyad the eight chiefs
of the Lu or Naga are	;
^ 25 HW;
qv« to;	WTTO; «r^cRt;
klu hjog-po the class of
Lu or Naga called Taksaka.
S’San klu-thebs the coming forth of the
Lu in summer from their retreats. This
time is fixed in Tibetan almanacs for wor-
shipping them:	'O
db yar-sa §teA-du klu hofi-ica la klu-tkeb§
zer the coming upwards of the Lu from
their retreats in summer is called Д’San
klu-thebs.
ЯГ^| klu-ldog the retiring of the Lu
to their abodes in the nether regions
is called klu-ldog^ which time is
generally calculated by the Tibetan astro-
logers to fall in December.
3T»wV§5 klu mthar byed ХЧЖП the
chief patriarch of the Naga*, also NJAPd*,
which is a name of the Garuda bird.
c^q’^l 9| йа 1, n. of au indolent poison.
2. n. of a very venomous snake (Smaft.
350).
Я klu dug-can poisonous snakes.
klu-gdon hjoms-byed—^'
5’84’4 rgyal-pa &nug-po lit. that which
destroys poison or kids Lu demons = Д’^
musk (Smau. 333),
Д A^’^’t klu-bdudrdor-je n.of a medici-
nal plant which is believed to have the
property of healing all sorts of diseases
caused by Lu or malignant spirits.
klu-mdud prob. Codouopsis ovata
(Ja.) also	kluhi gnod-pa cures all
kinds of arthritis and rheumatism (W.).
klu-sdirs NTTOTjj the peaks or
flanks of a mountain where snakes reside.
ЙИ5 klu-nad <nuxPT, ginftil the disease
caused by the Lu or leprosy.
46

P”i
klu-gjia$ •тпГчЕН the abode of
the Lu.
*Щ'^5 klu-bod	one of the
disciples of Nagarjuna {Schr.).
*Я’5^ klu-Ьуай HTTRtftr an epithet of
N^gSrjuna and also that of one of his
disciples.
q klu-dwafi-gi rgyaLpo a
Buddha ruling over the Lu, usually depict-
ed with 4 attendant Bodhisattea {Grub,
109),
Klu-hbum n. of a section of tho
Sgomdft division of the monastery of
Dpal-ldan НЬга$-$риЯ§ (Dai-
pungnear Lhasa):
।	I tho Gomang
sections of Daipung Monastery are the
Hordong, Sam-lo aud Lubum ; n. of a
treatise on a hundred thousand Naga,
д’чдя'Щ'г? klu-hbiun khra-bo 1. n. of a
religious work among the Bon-po, 2. 0'^
khra-bo moans “ mottled.” There are also
ц 'Щ klii-hbum dkar-po,
klu-hbum nag-po, Klu-hbum, originally a
hooded snake, cobra di capcllo ; tho mytho-
logical sense, however, is only understood
in Tibet, where every child knows and
believes in Lu or Nagas, &e., cobras being
unknown.
kla-me$	| {Deb, 4o) n.
of a lama of Tibet.
Д’М klu-mo a female serpent; also a
serpent demoness.
klu-mo mu-tig nu-sho-
can n. of medicinal plant used for wounds
or sores. Its flowers are of garnet colour;
when they are plucked there oozes out a
milkish sap which is said to possess
healing power {Sman, 350),
SJclu-унап n. of a medicine.
klu-gzttgs the body or likeness
of a snake; also a Lu in tho body of a
snake; anything with the body or in
the guise of a snake.
5)5'^ kluhi §kad the language of the
Naga; according to some Tibetan authors
this is the Nagari language of India which
they identify with the Prakrit. Accord-
ing to tho earliest historians of Tibet
4S kluhi shad, г>., the Naga bhtisa, was
the language of the Chinese: g'<Y4*<r2|’W
Rgya-nag-pa klu-la§ chad-pa$,
I the Chinese having originated
from tho sorpent demi-gods, speak the
Naga krta, tho language of tho Lu, Д'1’!’
3’5 nd да krta is distinguished from the
Sanskrit language which is called Deva
bhasd, tho language of tho gods. Naga-
krta means corrupt language and Sans-
krta moans refined language.
kluhi grofi-khyer nTipHlft, Hin-
der! the mythological city of the Naga
in the nether world ruled by King S'esa.
kluhi hjig-rten nrwfa the
nether world or region inhabited by the
Lu or Naga,
Kluhi dug-bcom n. of a fabu-
lous sea which lies beyond a great sandy
desert. The Lu chieftain Stob$~ldan {Bala-
ta n) resides there and excites dissensions
among living beings {K, d, 335),
Jcluhi gdefi§-ka the hood or
neck of a Naga or of a serpent.
* Kluhi-§de {Schr,) n. of the
celebrated Buddhist sage who answered
the interrogations of King Menander
(of Milinda Pannha); one of the eighty
Buddhist saints of the northern school.
kluhi gnod-pa or kluhi
$kyon, plague; a disease of unknown origin;
^'9=4° I
47
Г (
maladies supposed to be originated from
the malignity of the serpent demi-gods.
*	Д?kluhi byafi-chub *rrjr^rfv
(&ЛгГ).
2j5’g4 kluhi §brul a class of very
venomous snakes.
kluhi yi-ge	acc. to Cs.
the Chinese character; aco. to some authors
the Nagari character.
*	5!$’«й|*г^ klui bfe§-gnen ^nrfirsr
(Schr.) n. of a Buddhist saint.
ltfu-yi §kad ^пгнтчт the language
of the Naga*.
I it is said that (he) under-
stood (it) when related in the Sanskrit or
in the language of the Naga.
hlu-yi hkhri-$ifi=%'&*$^
n. of a leafy creeping plant (fifnon.).
klu-yi	lit. the snake’s
tongue; n. of a plant used in medicine.
Syn. g$fio-$afi$ hkhri-qin;
tfw-sans mthah-ya§;
mthah-ya§ rtsa; ч ba-glafi bsrun;
WS’* те-tog phra-mo (Mfion.).
klu-yi	the earth
(ДМои.).
klu-qln	lit. the snake-
tree ; the tree of golden bark.
Syn. 5*'*^ Ьит-сащ	§kye$-bu
mtho;	lhahi hdab;	lhahi
1сид-та;	sefi-ge skrod;
kluhi те-tog;	ge-sarmat-po; JT|**
klu-skye§ (Mfion.).
The names of some species of trees
called ndga rrksa are the following:—
tshad-ldan hdab- та;
те-tog rtse; sa-srufi;	kluhi
rptshan;	sog-le sgrib;
$un-pa dri-shim; rtsa-wa mafi;
^’54 sahi dsam-bu-ka	the plant
Flacourtia spadia (Mnon.).
gqed gsum the names of
three medicines, viz.,	sdig-srin,
shal-nag and SM*4 byan-nag (Sman.
450).
oj£’ klun a valley; river; O^’ clui-klufi
a river in general; ^40^* nags-klufi
a river passing through wooded tracts; the
name 3F’ klufi is seldom applied to small
streams or rivulets.
klun-rgyun a stream, current;
like the flow of a river.
Щ^’^Ч sgog a kind of garlic
growing wild on the margins of rivers in
Tibet:	| wild
garlic cures leprous sores and dries up the
fluids in swellings (fifed.).
klun-rta (in V4 nag-rtsis the
art of divination) = §^’5’ rlufi-rta.
klun-phyug§ cattle living in the
lower table-lands of Tibet. This term is
also applied to the yaks which are kept
in the lower plains of Tibet:
q kliin-phyugs so-gni§ yan-
gyi ko-u*a rer “for (i.e., the price of) each
hide of cattle of two teeth,” (f.a., above
two years old) (Rtsii.).
дк/wrq klufi hbab-pa the rushing of a
hill torrent; the flowing of a river.
klun-ma a river.
klufi-tshag a yak of the valley;
ri-t$hag a hill yak—a yak belonging
to the higher elevations and hill-tops of
Tibet (Rtsii.).
Klufi-fod n. of a place in the
uplands of (Digufi) situated to the
north-east of Lhasa (Lofi. * 12).
48
1^1	4
klitfi-fos a kind of plant growing
on the margins of rivers in Tibet, and
said to be efficacious when applied to sores:
kluft-sgog garlic of the valley.
I: &Zh#s this term is applied
'O
to the astrological results arrived at by
computing one’s age in reference to that
of one’s parents by consulting their
horoscopes. It occurs in the Vaiduvya
Karpo in expressions such as^’J)*^,
pha-klufi$9 ma-klufi$,
П: cultivated lands; a field:
klufis-su $kye grow on cultivated
soil:	Dkar-mdafis-kyi
Jclufis tshan-ma all fields belonging to
Qkar-hdafa,
+ ерт Klub-pa, pf. JWQ fclubs-pa,
1. to cover the body with ornaments
to put on luxuriously (Ck.) :
gser leb rta tpfi dag-las legs grub-pahi sefi-
khebsrab hbrifi tha-ma gsiun-dii klubs
2. to set up (a tenant). 3. n. of a tribe
in Tibet (Vai, kar, 160),
Klii$ bod ятптжц, Kaga-hvaya9
one of the 28 Buddhist sages mentioned
in the ЛЛ V.
Kitts byafi-chab итптгР?, Naga
Bodht\ one of the chief disciples of Nagar-
juna. His essence is supposed to have
been embodied in the late Kusho Seng-
chen of Tashi-lhiinpo.
a« klas a rack for clothes, clothes-
horse.
w klog-pa to read, imp. OT^’*^4!
klogs-gig also	do read, pf.
jpprq klags-pa or bklags, fut. ДЯ klag
I
or чдч] bklog, ^OT’^’S fyklag-par-bya ОТ'W
§S klog-par-byed is reading;
klog-par by cd-pa the act of reading, the
causing to bo read; Ilfa’S klog-bya any-
thing to be read;	klog-tu hjug-
pa to begin or cause one to read; ОТ’ч£*
klog-pa po or OT'*f^ klog-mkhan a reader ;
ЭТklog-grea a reading school, a school
for reading;	dpe-cha sogs
klog-pa reading books, &c. klog-
lidon to read aloud; OT'S^ klog-fyyafi
f*nrr well-read, accomplished in reading,
a scholar ; W<rwjc/5ii,rq klog-pa yafi klog-pa
to read again.
Klog-thob n. of a Bodhisattva
(К, ко, *50),
klofi I: or ОТ’ч klofi-pa wpHt
extent; mass, bulk, body; depth, abyss.
Also a wave or any undulating thing :
q with opening or reverting
folds or coils as in a conch shell.
II: this word either alone or
in combination with yafi$ is generally
used to express the idea of vastness, in-
finitude or immensity. It also signifies
“space” as a definite expanse, being in
a measure synonymous with 55A** dbyifis:
Xtrjjdgk’UK*! the immensity or profound-
ness of Dharma;	v*iwg the
expanse of matter or infinitude of pheno-
mena;	the depth or ampli-
tude of the mind :
I this spiritual being of
Dorje chang dev elopes in the wide bound-
less sphere of the gods into that jewel of
the heavens which comprises the five illu-
sive bodies of Dorje Naljor (Naro. 1),
III: centre or middle ;
dbus or dkyil as in dbah klofi or
aci
49
та
гЪа-klofi the eddy or whirlpool caused
by 3 rba or dbah, the waves;
dbah-lthfi of q*F^’ rba-kloft is also used to
signify rba-rlabs, a wave, billow.
klofakhor a whirlpool or eddy
(JWon.).
+ ‘Jj'r IV:	kloft-du gyur-pa
has the meaning of	under
one’s subjection or power; is equivalent
to	fully comprehended; over-
powered. It is also used to signify per-
fection in mystic arts, as Jaschke renders
it “a soaring into mystic perfection.”
The work explains it in the fol-
lowing manner :
ЧЧI “ it is also applied (to mean) what-
ever has arrived at complete perfection or
become concentrated into one.”
Зк’Ц Klofachen n. of a celebrated
lama of Tibet who was also called
klon-sde a division of the Buddhist
writings of the	class, the
introduction of which is attributed to
Lo-tsava Vaira-tsana. ^5*	*4 ’
“in this country of Tibet (in books)
known as the great Man-nag rdsog$-
pa, there are the Sems section, the
section, and the Man-fag section ”
(Deb. o| 3).
klofi-ma dkyel 1, of great capa-
city. 2. the cavity of the abdomen.
Jwq klofa-pa cjfea, same as
dkrugs-pa.
rag n of a piaco |n Tibet;
tlle ^еггУ EJoforag
Ж4 klon-pa to mend, to patch shoes,
&c ; afrqa cobbler, mender of shoes.
P ksa in mystic language the term
signifies an evil spirit.
ksaya, pronounced in Tibetan as
phthisis piilmonalis; but accord-
ing to the Tibetan pathology grw^ifq
denotes a bilious disease, prob, black jaun-
dice (Jd.). The symptoms of the disease
ksa-ya, as described in the medical works
of Tibet, are as follows: *jg«*q*^*®rgic
’Й’а^чраьчрпг^- “the bile hav-
ing permeated the body, itching is set
up, the skin becomes greenish-black in
colour, the hair and the eyebrows fall off,
loss of strength, shrivelled flesh, and black
spots on the nails, will be produced ”
(Med.).
№ ksa-su-та a kind of precious
stone resembling crystal; it is very rare
in Tibet:
as to Ksasura, that
crystal and the genuine gtan-zil stone do
not occur in Tibet except singly (Yig.).
STTq dkag-wa constipation; obs-
tructed bowels.
Dkan I: wng, acc. to Rag.
the palate, the roof of the mouth; VH
the upper part of the palate ; «VK
the lower part of the palate; cleft
palate ;	A	the palatal
letters; Sw!^’q]?4J	an abscess
in the palate; S’W^i'S any disease of the
palate.
STH: is sometimes used in the place
of gyen, steep or up hill; S’W’T4’5
8
VF4
ST’FJ’W Dkah-thubJ-yi
the residence of an ascetic; a hermitage.
VP’34'V dkah-thub-dgra=VVP'W
I (Ht. the ascetic’s enemy) a name
of the god of love (Mfion.).
VP’34’^ dkah-lhub-can=^^W non-
mofi$-pa	one who undergoes
asceticism; a hermit; one who having
renounced the worldly life has retired to
solitude; an epithet of the Hindu deity
Mabe s'vara.
Syn. bpafi-$po$; й'^ $pu-can; V’
5jK3 drihi-sra%'po; AgvK’WA hbyun-pohi
ral-pa (Mnon.).
VP’34'?Vq dkah-thub spyod-pa the
practices of an ascetic or hermit; V’?4
dransron a rishi (Mnon.); VP’S4®1'4?’4 to
embrace the life of an anchorite; VP’S4’
=	saffron (&nan. 351) ; VIя'
5A4]««i	one whose asceticism or
penitence is either visible or exemplary.
VP*a4’S’w Dkah-zlog tya-nui n. of a
snowy mountain; it is generally applied
to	lli-Ьо да fa-can (Mfion.).
VP’I4!’* Dkah-zlog-ma n. of the God-
dess Gau-ri (Mnon.).
S^’WV&'Qdkah-las che-wa very difficult;
VP’W^VA free from difficulty; easy.
5T. I: dkar in compounds=VP'4
dkar-po white; grey.
VP II: sincere; VP’^’S* not con-
fessing one’s guilt; notexonerated; not
making a clean breast of anything,
VP’8 dkar-skya	light grey:
Vя’? ЧТ^ pale; white.
VP’P^ dkar-khafi a lighted house; also
a store room (& kar. 66, 178).
574	50
dkan gzar-po a steep declivity; precipice
iftag. 5).
Dkah, VP’4 dkah-wa or VP’®
dkah-bo	1. hard, difficult; used
as adj. VP’4 hard to understand; *A’§’
SV4 very hard or difficult» 2. pains,
exertions, sufferings ; VP 4 *Уа 4
gain without pain or exertion;
VP’4 without hardship or difficulty;
difficult of access; 3 A’VP 4 tgrub
dkah-wa hard to accomplish or to perfect;
fig* to propitiate; 4I*VVP'4 hard to ex-
press or describe	difficult to find;
5'VP’4 hard work, or hard to do; VP’4^S
difficulty ; VP’§S’4 ЗЗЛ4ПГФ one
who accomplishes a difficult or hard task.
dkah-hgrel lit. difficul-
ties explained; a commentary; explana-
tion of difficulties (Jd.):	VP’4’*2K
waja'A meanings of terms which are
difficult to understand are explained in a
commentary (fiag. 5).
VP’4§ dkah-bcu дате ten ascetical
hardships; a Buddhist scholar who has
acquired such great proficiency in sacred
literature as to be able to interpret the
meanings of a term in ten different ways.
VP‘3q t: dkah-thub <пщгг; also
ufk, fk*, asceticism, also penance;
an ascetic, one who is able to stand hard-
ships or privations : S^’S4’^'^’^’4’^’ I
«Гм’«г^чрдзсуГА’v | 5АЧ-ц-ц-«зЦ-й^А’^ |
“that an ascetic’s
body should be fat, that a pretty woman
should sleep by herself, and that a hero
should be without wound-scars—these
three are things the mind does not credit”
VP'S4 и: a name for the first month of
the Tibetan calendar (Rtsii.).
Wl
51

dkar-khun — ^'^' window, a
sky-light; a hole in the wall of a house
for the entrance of light.
dar-khyug anything streaked
or ornamented with diverse colours.
dkar-khrigs (kar-thig) white;
shining; bright; glittering; brilliant.
dkar-gcti 1. a kind of white clay;
porcelain clay. 2. same as me-rdo
flint:	| white-
clay is useful to expel worms and for the
poison of evil spirits.
dkar-rgya rose-coloured; pale
pink.
dkar-rgyan white ornament; the
butter used in painting offerings made of
barley flour or rice to the gods:
cakes that are painted white and red
with (coloured) butter (Rt&ti.).
dkar-bcud-gsum tho triple
white elixir, £.e., the cream from the milk
of the female yak, ewe, and cow :
“Khanda is the mix-
ed milk of the female yak, ewe and cow.”
L an index;
register. 2. whitish; grey. 3. morally
good; standing on the side of virtue;
sincere; candid.
dkar-dtab-chab~	or
glittering white rays.
•	Dkar-chuft lha-khaft n. of a
monastery in Tibet (/. Zrzfi.).
a true friend;
one who has come over to one’s side out
of sincere good will; a friendly relation.
Dkar-$tin cha-fam n. of a
place in Kham near Ri-zco-che. (Lon. *
29).
dkar-thag. the string of a bow:
5^	i (Rtsii)
dkar-dro milk and curd:
VJvX’Si it will make milk and
curd of equal value with the above
(Jig. 30).
5^’^ Dkar-ldan 4т<^ lit. the fair
one ; the Goddess Gauri, the wife of S'iva.
dkar-po, also dkar-mo
’Qsfb	чК IJVr,
1. white; pure; fair; a qualification,
talent, enlightenment; (sometimes) wise.
2. silver; dub grass; a learned man;
purity:	f^PH-
| “ complete enlightenment is a stage
of insight.” It is one of the stages of
perfection of the Ilina у ana School.
dkar-po chig-thub a kind
of medicinal plant; also, its root, which is
used to kill worms ;	|
it draws out poisonous matter and sub-
dues worms which infest one.
dkar-po rnams-par
hchar-pa	(&Лг.).
dkar-po hbar (Sc/ir.)
white lustre.
Dkar-po sbab-rgyab
n. of a medicinal stone (called “ white
frog’s back”) (M-non.).
dkar-pohi bskal-pa
the enlightened age or Kdlpa.
dkar-phigs used in colloq. for
dkar-phibs.
dkar-phibs a tower or dome
built on pillars or on the roof of a house
for commanding a view, generally in the
Chinese style:
in the great domed tower is the tall pillar
with a lion’s mouth.
Wl
52
531
dkar-phyogs	the light
half of a month; the period from the new
to the full moon; the innocent side in two
contending parties ;	the gods
who belong to the side of virtue ; W!l*‘
dkar-phreft n. of the mythical capital of
the Asura {Pag. 30).
Vjvq dkar-ua ZRff white, v.
ЭДП whiteness:	|
“through sincerity in the doctrine”; “by
piety ” {Pag. 30).
VlvftgS’q dkar-mi byed-pa to plead
innocence, frag, explains it as ’X’er^i’^rcr
to show by signs or by
oath that be is not guilty.
dkar-min wftm,	not
white; black; dark; chaos; bent; crooked.
Dkar-min-bu the son of
Dkar-min; the offspring of chaos:	an
epithet of the son of Brahma.
V’P’d dkar-me—^cho$ me sacred fire;
especially lamps lighted before deities:
Vivd	। the kind (of cloth) fit
for wicks of lamps (lighted before the
images of saints and deities) {Rtsii.).
Dkar-med-ma
{Шот) a name of the queen of the Yaksa.
51*’^ dkar-mo 1. mutton; a sheep when
slaughtered;
a shoulder of mutton from the right side
of a slaughtered sheep {RUii.);
Й	mutton of sheep slaughtered
by the hand (as distinguished from the
meat of a dead sheep) {Jig. 9). 2. wvn-
fwff,	an epithet of the goddess
Durga. 3. white rice.
dkar-dmar light red or whitish
red.
dkar-rtsi, also spelt 5”!^ dkar-tse
1. lime; white-wash; white-paint. 2. a
kind of coarse cotton cloth; lint:
lint arrests decay-
ing disease in the flesh and bone {S.
kar. 3). 3. '5^r,	white muslin.
dkar-tsis or	astrology:
the sys-
tem of reckoning introduced in Tibet
from India is called dkar-rtsi^ {D. $el. 8).
Vivfrvq dkar rtser-wa very white or
fair :	| a young
maiden of very fair complexion on horse-
back {A. 135).
dkar-hdsin the female breast;
teats.
Syn.	hdod-pahi myo$-bum;
lan-tshohi ndshan-ma]
fro-ma hdsin;	log$-$kye$ {Шоп.),
dkar-mdsod a dispensary.
fire-fly
{Шоп.).
dkar-yol procelain {fiag. 5).
dkar-gyen is explained as
a trial or investigation under
law.
dkar-safi§ pure white; also vqv
iK’frq or	very white.
dkar-sen-He-ua —	v.
5*pwi.
dkar-sob yaft-wahi hod-
can— alabaster {Sman. 353).
dkar-gsal fair ; white; light.
dkar-g$um the three white
things, viz., curd, milk and butter
{А. 143).
+	{Lex.) the
side of one’s body: Vjtf
I dku
is towards the small ribs just above the
VT9I	53	I
hip, whether on the right or left of
the body; 53^ or 53,<M't5*q to carry
a thing at one’s side (Zam.); 53,£^'A to
open the side; 53’1 a heavy feeling in
the'side, as a symptom of pregnancy;
53’55 dku-nad apparently a disease of the
kidneys (Ja.); 53’8* dku-zlum round and
plump buttocks; the cavity of the abdo-
men (Jd.); 5^’5^’5’53^|5,?5ч1* I for
example a bell resting on its side (&ag.).
53**) dku-mne a rug to sit upon;
a seat.
dku-lto contrivance, stratagem;
craft; trick, especially if under some pre-
text one person induces another to do a
thing that proves hurtful to him (Jd.);
53'^§5’q* using a stratagem.
щч remaining;
in excess.
dku-wa stench; putrid smell:
53’ЧЛХ*^ Л4’44* Dku-wa signifies any-
thing that is not of agreeable smell; V*’
the smell of that which is
putrid is called dku-tca. 53’4*$*’q‘S the five
kinds of dku-wa, i.e., objects with bad
strong smell, are the following:—SpT4
garlic ; onion ; Chinese garlic;
1*1 the hill or Tibetan garlic ; and 3^’35
asafoetida. The use of these five are for-
bidden to the Buddhist Bhiksu (K. d. ч
115).
dkon 5^5*q	1. adj. rare,
scarce; hard to acquire:
*9’5^51 this year rain and grain are
scarce; ^*^'^5**’^5’5’5^]5’q’£^q|l just now
Tibetan tea is very rare; Я^Ц|’^5’5'5^|5’Х
exceedingly rare in the world; ^4^5’5
| it is of a quality rarely to be
met with in the world; (§W4'*^'3^V
to see a person like you is nothing
particularly rare;	with
a prattler religion is scarce (Jd.). 5^15’q^5
rarity; 5’fa‘Xx' valuable property; riches;
rare things. 2. sbst., a rarity. There are
said to be seven dkon or rarities.
5^es&4| dkon-mchog tst any precious
object; anything very excellent or best of
its kind. The oldest forms of this word
are—5^]55’^41 or 5^]5	5^’*Йч| means
5^[5,Л,«йй|, the chief of rarities, the rarest
being or object, the Supreme Being: 1V
W Vfa’4’
“in general in this world a precious jewel
difficult to procure is a rarity; that which is
much rarer still than any rarity is dkon-
chog.” A precious gem of the rarest kind is
useful only for worldly purposes; but
Buddha, his church, and creed, are of use
to all living beings, both here and here-
after, for increasing and ensuring then-
happiness. Apart from Buddhism, the
Tibetans appear to have possessed the
conception of the Supreme Deity in the
term Dkon-mchog. This term, 5^5’*^l, is
used in Tibetan writings for each member
of the Buddhist triad—Buddha, Dharma,
and Sangha—separately, as also for the
three collectively; in the latter case often
with gsum annexed. Mr. W. W. Rockhill
has condemned the use of this word
by Christian missionaries to signify
“ God.” But Jaschke has elaborated
on the subject as follows:—“Buddhism
has always sought the highest good
not in anything material, but in the
moral sphere, looking with indiffer-
ence, and indeed with contempt, on
everything merely relating to matter.
It is not, however, moral perfection, or
5^’«lS«4|	54	Vfrsi&r’W
the happiness attained thereby, which
is understood by the ‘ most precious
thing,’ but the mediator or mediators who
procure that happiness for mankind, viz.,
Buddha (the originator of the doctrine),
the doctrinal scriptures and the corporate
body of priests, called dkon-mchog
gsum. Now, although this triad cannot,
by any means, be placed on a level with the
Christian doctrine of a triune God, yet it
will be •easily understood how the innate
desire of man to adore and worship some-
thing supernatural, together with the
hierarchical tendency of the teaching class,
have afterwards contributed to convert
the acknowledgment of human activity
for the benefit of others (for such it was
undoubtedly on the part of the founder
himself and his earlier followers) into a
devout, and by degrees idolatrous, adora-
tion of these three agents, especially as
Buddha’s religious doctrine did not at
all satisfy the deeper wants of the human
mind, and its author himself did not
know anything of a God standing apart
and above this world. For, ^whatever in
Buddhism is found of beings to whom
divine attributes are assigned, has either
been transferred from the Indian and
other mythologies, and had, accordingly,
been current among the people before the
introduction of Buddhism, or is the result
of philosophical speculation that has re-
mained more or less foreign to the people
at large. As, then, the original and
etymological signification of the word is no
longer current, and as to every Tibetan
4 Dkon-mchogy suggests the idea of some
supernatural power, the existence of which
he feels in his heart, and the nature and
properties of which he attributes more or
less to the three agents mentioned above,
we are fully entitled to assign to the word
Dkon-mchog also the signification of God,
though the sublime conception which the
Bible connects with the word, viz., that of
a personal absolute Omnipotent Being,
will only with the spread of the Christian
religion be gradually introduced and
established.”
*
dkon-mchog kun-bdu$fae
three gems, t.e., Buddha, Dharma and
Saygha collectively:
lama is the essence
of all the Buddhas of tho three ages massed
together;
tho image represents
the church; the scriptures represent the
heart, (>., the Dharma; and the holy relics
(symbolical of the spirit of Buddha) com-
plete the three goms.
the service or worship
of the Dkon-mchog.
Dkon-mchog hbyuft-
gna$ a name of the first of the nine
stages of Samadhi or	the medita-
tions of a Bodhisattva.
a Sanskrit work
on the names and attributes of Buddha,
in one hundred chapters, out of which
forty-nine chapters were translated into
Tibetan ; of these forty-nine only six are
now extant in Tibet. The entire work
was translated into Chinese by Jnana
Gupta, A.D. 589-618.
dkon-mchog ‘ gsum ftKW
the three Ratna or Precious Ones. The
Buddhist triad are—(1) San$-rgyas dkon-
mchog Buddha most rare; (2) Dharma,
called Dam-cho$ dkon-mchog, the holy Doc-
trine most rare; (3) Dgc-hdun dkon-mchog
55
.•чгч
body of priests most rare» Colloq. the
phrase is frequently used as an exclama-
tion quite in the sense of our “God
knows !”
dkon-mchog gsum-
gyi hbans {Schr.) lit. a servant of
the three gems, &>., a devout Buddhist;
n. of an individual.
dkon-gner a priest who
is in charge of a Buddhist chapel or
temple and performs the daily services
to the deities contained in it. The §ku
gner is also called Am-chod:
the priests
and image-steward and others who con-
tinually officiate get the customary allow-
ances (jR/sti.).
Yfa*2» dkon-po от rare, scarce;
dear, precious.
*	dkon-bu a wreath;
’T’ffiVS a flower wreath.
dkor—Z^ dkor is resp.
for X*, substance, wealth, riches, property:
the property of the church or
that of a monastic congregation ;
foundation, endowment of a monastery;
«1*5^ additional or occasional gifts for
the support of a religious institution;
<5*4* landed endowments of a monastery
or religious institution.
dkor-bdag lit. the owner of
property. It generally signifies the spirit
or demi-god who is supposed to be the
custodian of the images of all Buddhist
deities, scriptures, symbols; in short, of all
ohurch and sacerdotal properties. In this
sense the demon called Pehar rgyal-po of
Sam-ye is a Dkor-bdag -or custodian of
religious property.
S^’X^ dkor-nor church property or
general wealth:
I (2). 11.) you possess accumulated
wealth and church-property.
5^*4 dkor-pa a treasurer (Cs.); one in
charge of the endowments and properties
of a temple or monastery.
5^’3 dkor-bla от	a lama who
appropriates sacred property to himself
(ЛГ. Г. 66).
dkor-ma-hbags not misappro-
priating the treasures, stores, etc.,, of the
church:	| do
not take wine for drink nor embezzle the
property of the priesthood {Kathafi. 115).
dkor-mdsod is a general name
for wealth or property and hence is
frequently used to signify
treasury; treasure-chest {Nag. 5).
Dkor-rdsogs n. of a monastery
in Southern Ladak, situated 16,000 feet
above the sea level.
+ 5^3^ dkor-zas—^wspendthrift
(fag. 5).
dkor-rigs ftvr, w different
properties belonging to a monastery.
dkol-pa struck by cala-
mity ; afflicted; one in suffering.
*	dko^thag—^'^ 1.
suffering, affliction. 2.
exciting disgust.
dkyar any appliance for crossing
snow or glaciers. Stocking boots (Sch.).
The dkyar used by the Tibetans and the
Sharpa Bhutias of Nepal in crossing
glaciers is a light circular disk of wood
about a foot in diameter, with four holes
through which strings are passed to fasten
56

it to the knee. In climbing up and walk-
ing down the snowy sides of mountains,
these boards are attached to the soles of
the felt boots and are of great assistance to
the traveller, preventing tho feet from sink-
ing in the soft snow.
Vh dkyil 59^ or нзд the mid-
dle, centre; W bottom, base ;
kyil-na$ from the middle or centre; from
amidst; from the bottom; the mid-
dle one; the central one;
од, with wide base; spacious
interior; comprehensive understanding;
also quick comprehension.
dkyil-dkrufis	4WT,
4fwt a cross-legged posture:
sitting in a cross-legged
posture for mystic meditation.
5^ dkyil-hkhor чбсЪт,
1. circle; circumference; globe; disk:
the disk of the face
; the full or whole face. 2. espe-
cially used as the equivalent of the
Sanskrit Mandala, the magic diagrams or
figures formed of grain or other materials
which aro “offered” to deities in Tantrik
Buddhist rites. In Tantrik rites diagrams
representing supposed mansions of cer-
tain celestial Bodhisattva and called
are traced on the ground or on paper.
The respective places assigned to the
different minor deities are painted in
different colours in the design, and the
central place in the diagram is occupied
by the tutelary deity himself, to whom the
rest are subordinate. 3. region, sphere;
surroundings; suburb. According to the
Buddhist cosmogony there are
the sphere of earth,	the
sphere of water, the ocean,
rlafi-gi-dkyil-bkhor the atmosphere,
the sphere of fire ; each forming a
stratum over the other. The upper stratum,
that which is beyond the atmosphere,
is called the sphere of fire or light.
dkyil-hkhor gru-ishi-pa
a quadrangle; square; a certain mysti-
cal figure ; diagram or model. The ex-
pression	means
the gods who constitute the assembly
in the Vimdna or	t>., superb
mansion represented.
is a description of the
eight mansions of eight imaginary Bud-
dhas (7Г. <Z. 1 72). Whoever utters the
names of these Buddhas or hears the
aphorisms about them is liberated from
dangers caused by evil spirits, snakes, &c.
By remembering and repeating them, even
brigands, not to speak of kings, are said
to be able to make the weapons of their
enemies ineffectual against themselves.
dkyil-hkhor-can	any-
thing that has a circular and mystical
figure on it; also any Tantrik deity
placed to be worshipped on the plane of
his fancied celestial mansion traced on the
ground.
Dkyil-hkhor-ldift n. of the
grand central temple of Buddha at Jjhasa,
popularly known as Kinkhording.
dkyil-hkhor ffsum
three cycles (of offerings): (1)
V the cycle of offerings
for the Bon gods sprung out naturally
in course of time; (2)
the celestial mansion
for contemplation formed in the sky (to
imagine an aerial castle); (3)
the mansions of gods
52-51	57
designed on the ground for placing the
offerings to them (B. Nam.).
dkyu rta or dkyu*icahi rta
a race-horse.
dkyu-pa in Ladak: to lose
colour by washing; perhaps more correctly
S44
<Jkyu-toa = ^4 1. to run a
race; 53*w’53** dkyiisar dkyus=^\'*^
|^|*i running a race ;	galloping:
5^‘5’5’^’*гч’^1*гч|	“for example
running a race on horseback.” 2. to wring
out; to filter (Sch.). 3. to caper about
(Jd.) ; 53'95’5 dkyu-byahurta a race-horse.
53**1 dfcyu-sa a race-course; the race
ground (Cs.).
*	dkyud-pa=^S^ to forget;
। an affectionate
letter to prevent one being forgotten or a
letter which love will not forget (Yig.
k. 37).
dkyu$ мгггпт 1. length; length-
wise. 2. untruth; also adj. untrue;
spurious (Ja.). 3. bold, insolent (Sch.).
In lexicons it is synonymous with the term
45^’ gshufi, meaning “lengthwise.” In
weaving, the threads that are stretched
lengthwise are called 53^'44l dkyus-thag
(the woof) and those that pass them
crosswise are called spun-thag:
^^43^'B’45'^55'X'W 5^’^'Й’Х’^’^1
53*гч*^’*Х5ГЧ1Ж*1 (S.kar. 134) upon
that stood the throne constructed of stone,
having a lotus cushion, in breadth two
cubits and a span, in length three running
fathoms.
53*1*5”]^ dkyu$-dkar a porcelain cup of
inferior quality; a common porcelain cup.
53*1’5 dkyus-ja common or inferior tea.
Tea served to the public or to the congre-
gation of monks in a monastery or in a
religious seiwice.
53*1'^ dkyus-ma чщв common, vulgar,
inferior ; й*53*гя mi-dkyus ma an ordi-
nary man; one who is neither an official
nor a religious man (Nag 3) : 53*1 м«г
(Rtsii.) “indigo of inferior
quality is valued at so much per
or lb.” 53*гч^м dkyu§-btag§ a scarf of
ordinary quality; ®*rg^ dkytis-bur treacle
of inferior quality : 53**’S^‘^‘£4Fr^
dkyus-bur sgar tshiigs rer “ coarse treacle
for each thick lump ” (Rtsii.).
dkyutbnw—^fy^Q mgyogs-pa
quickly, swiftly.
53*r<*5 dkyu§-tshad the dimensions of
anything when measured lengthwise.
53 dkyu§-riti—^^
spacious; large; long.
+ 5T’ dkycl=Js^ klofi the compass,
extent, bulk of anything: ^’«pS’53'4
the compass of the heavens: g’^5’53^
the stretch of sea : 53«г^=53«г*’ч
spacious; of wide capacity (Nag. 5).
53*гч‘^> dkyel-po-che acc. to Sch. is the
Universe; defined as рч'^ч*гч tho wide
house( Lex.)-
x*' еч
^yor-hbyin зж capable of
being thrown down ; impelled or driven
on; also capable of being felled down.
dkram-ko hthug-
pa—^%*г^’ч spyi-brtol che-wa 1.
transgression. 2. adj. very impudent;
impertinent.
9
541
58
54 I
’^*3 Bkras-ljofi§, abbr. of
(Tashi jong)> u. of a district under Llnui-
grub Rdsofi in Tibet.
ex
dki*i (ti) «ГЗЯ anything to wrap
with ; a tie ; FsSi a cloth to tie round
the face or cover the mouth; muffler;
vb., wrapping or winding up with paper;
paper-wrapping; an envelope (Yig. k. 2).
I: dkri-wa (ti-гса) in old
Tibetan, to conduct one’s pupil from one
xtago of learning to another stage ; pf.
53^ vb. a. (of. ^Я’ч) in modern Tibetan,
to wind; to wrap round about; 53'«r3 dkri-
ra-po=5Ij ‘ sv§5'	ono who wrap s up;
to fold up clothes, etc.
C\
II: 53dkri $neg$-pa
Ita-bu a snare, anything to entangle with;
vb., to ensnare.
ex
5^ dkrig (tig) personally :
is same as
^5’3^ net having come personally, can-
not reply or say decidedly.
ex
SW* I: dkrigs ft’SR, ЯНЧ: a term
tor a thousand billions. The term 53
5H ^‘3 or 53^’^ svrfbsn: or httwt
is used for a still larger number,
ex
II: = чЗад dense; thickly-
gathered :	$prin-dkrig$ (flag. 5) : =
gathering or condensing of clouds;
alsovb. darkened, obscured, dim, diffused:
3’S)(Л. K. ii. 47) the
flashing of his teeth bewildered them ;
dkrigs-par hgyur-par grown
dim; 53^КФ>’|5’Ф> dkrig$-par byed-pa to
obscure.
53 dkris-gyur (ti^gyur) sur-
rounded, encircled, encompassed :
dpal~gyi$ dkris-gyur	en-
circled with glory,
ex
dkri^pa	1. to sur-
round, encircle, ensnare. 2. =
to lie round ; to wind up (Жоп.):
kun-na§dkri§ quite
ensnared in avarice (Jd-).
53dkri$-phrag n. of a large
number (Nag. 5).
^’q dkru-гса (tu-wa)=\'^ dri-ma
xD
abomination, pollution; also dirt, filth
(Lexx.).
5W4 dkrug-pa (tug-pa)=^'Q glofi-
ica to disturb, to put in motion; the
act of troubling, agitating, churning; to
turn ; to turn a lathe.
5ip|*rq dkrugs-ра = 45pw«i	b$rub$-pa
^jfker stirred up, agitated,
troubled, ruffled, disturbed, confused;
churned; turned (as in a lathe); confound-
ed : 5£)’<r53<IlN dpe-clia dkrugs the leaves of
a book are confused or mixed up together;
Чфмщbag-chagt-kyi§ dkrugz
fiahi sem$ a mind troubled with passion;
rliifi-gis dkrug§-pahi ehti
water agitated by tho wind.
5iprprcrq dkrag^pa-po a confounder: «Ц*
the
man who causes confusion afar off and
nigh is called tug-pa^po.
5jq|N'^4] dkrugs-yig
a kind of character used in Tibet
which is puzzling.
dkrum-pa (tum-pa) brittle;
defined in Lexx. as
breaking in the manner a porcelain vessel
does.
I
59
^5’^1
•Ь 4к)-е (te)	the
glans-penis.
S?=T ^dkrog-pa (tog-pa) = dkrug-
pa 1. to churn; to agitate,mingle, trouble,
&c.:	sho dkrog-pa churning curds
(for butter). 2. to rouse, scare up; to
wag, e.g., the tail (Jd.). Also =
dkrogs-pa, ’*< ho-та dkrogs-pa to
chum milk; acc. to Nag. is equivalent to
£<4* q $nog$-pa.
dkrogs-§kye$ (lit. anything pro-
duced from churning) butter (Mnon.).
dkrog^-pa-po =
dkrogs-раг byed-mkhan one who churns.
ядяргя dkrogs-ma, v. srab^-ma,
the churning rod; also said to = whey
(Mnon.).
?Hs dkron-b^kycd	(tong-ke)
of instantaneous birth; instanta-
neous perception. Acc. to	Lex. in
meditating on a certain deity, the act
of perceiving him to be a reality instan-
taneously is called S? ^§5 dkrofi bskyed.
dkrolAV^', pf. and fut. of
hknol*.	dkrol-wa-po is defined as
“ one who causes music to sound or be
sounded.”
I: bkag in	bkag Ians
the lid or cover of a trunk; the sides of a
Tibetan leather-trunk. Defined in Rtsii.
as	both the
flat pieces of leather which are at the back
and front on the right and left of a trunk.
ЕЛ]5!] II:	; pf. of
obstructed, opposed; also prohibition,
obstruction, hindrance.
bkag-skor med-pa=я*^’^’
without delay, as in sending any-
thing ; also without let or hinderance;
cFrpi]’qqj<Tpr	not permissible and per-
missible, not fit and fit, unbecoming and
becoming.
q bkag-cha byed-pa to forbid;
to put a hinderance (SV?A.).
tprpi’lfa bkog sdom prohibition; pro-
hibiting one from passing by a road or
from entering any garden or place.
bkag-то kheg§-pa not to be
observant; to transgress, to trespass.
bkan acc. to Rdo. J+6, pf. of
5^е.-д dgan-wa ’jfbr, filled to the brim; full
to the brim as in the case of a water pot;
snod-bkan-ua a vessel filled up ;
a bow with an arrow ready to
shoot;	wish fulfilled. Acc.
to Ja. pf. of to fill, make full; and
used in TF. instead of яч|адг<|.
bkad 1. set or placed in order;
arrangement:	same as
| адЦГ^ОТЯ’^’Я^Я’
3’1^’ я^ ’	ак’огик’члрг qnpv 3*. -I
mgo-spuhi rim-paham gral-lahan, thags-
kyi snal-ma phar hgrohi du^-kyi spun hgro-
tca de dan, btags tshar wahi snam-buhi
spun-gyi rj<§ hbur-hbur yod-palii min la
у an thags-kyi bkadzer (Nag.) the order or
row (of plaits) in the hair of the head,
the cross wise thread in the web of a cloth,
also the ridge in the cross-wise texture of
a blanket, are called the bkad of weaving.
bkad-nas. having described;
represented in any manner.
44]^ bkad-sa,	(^ag.)
1. the place where barley, corn, &c., are
parched; a bake-house, kitchen, cook’s
shop (Cs.). 2. acc. to Nag. +
one’s own home or residence.

60

3.	open hall or shed erected on festive
occasions (Ja.).
bkan-pa 1. to up-root or turn
up anything by applying a stick at its
foot or root. 2. to bend:
(ТСл#.) the body bent backwards: «W|’<r
чц to stretch the arm bending it up-
wards to pull anything. 3.
5'q^N’q’/4,uJE4,4’q^5^ counting up and then
backwards is called yang-bkan (S. del). It
is also applied to counting from right to left
(Vai. kar.). 4. to put; to press; to apply
Ja.):	f0 press one’s foot
.igaiust a wall. 5. to hold fast; to extend
(Cs.).
q^q’q bkab-pa, pf. of 4n|q^1q==q^q
ччт, to cover; to spread over.
bkab a cover; a shelter.
Syn. khebs ; gyogs ; byibs
(Шоп.).
bkam-pa pincers or nippers :
qnprq-qjq’q f0 hold ОГ cut with pincers.
bkah I : (Vai. kar. 60) n. of a
tribe in Tibet.
чтуг II:	(А. К. XXVI), wnn,
primarily means simply “word” or
“speech”; but being the honorific form it
usually implies an order or command.
When used of a sacred personage it means
his advice or precepts as wrell as his autho-
ritative words, e.g.,	the lama’s
injunction ;	q^4 the king’s com-
mand;	the order of the chief.
Ш : also signifies, especially, the
enunciations and pronouncements which
have issued from the Buddha. They are
said to be of three kinds; so «iwjsr Jq^4
has three divisions :—
(1)	shal-nas gsufis-pa pre-
cepts delivered by the Buddha personally.
(2)	those conveyed through
the attendant Bodhisattva and §'гйъ'ака>
such as Subhuti, S'ariputra, &c., under
inspiration from Buddha or by his
sanction expressed or implied or re-
vealed in such works as	lhahi
Ijon-fifi the celestial tree;	Г^-
bo ehe mdo the great drum sutra.
The precepts under this head are sub-
divided into—(1)	the personal
blessings (of the Buddha), also the bless-
ings received from his enchanted image;
(2)	the blessings derived from
his teaehings ; (3)	tho bless-
ings of the spirit. This last again is sub-
divided into the following:—(1)
4^'jn s^q§qsrq the blessings of a contem-
plative heart as in the work called
^*5 $e$-rab snifi-po; (2)	3”’
the grace of the spirit, as in
the Mantras uttered
by Noijin and other goblins; (3)
ччthe blessings inherent
in a truthful spirit or mind.
(3)	rje§-8u, gnafi-wa anything
reproduced from memory by the successors
of the Buddha under inspiration from
him at the Buddhist convocation
(J. Zaft.).
Syn. lufi;	fies-par bstan-
pa;	ne-war b$tan-pa;
gdam§~pa;	rje$-su b$tan-pa;
rje$-sii gnafi-wa; ^’qv^q’q Не-war
gnafi-pa; bkah-luH (Шоп.),
ч^ч’ч^ч bkah-bkod pa to publish, pro-
claim ; also publication, proclamation.
q’lp’qjfl bkah-bkyon according to fiag.
implies blaming; a verbal blow, repri-
mand, rebuke (given by a superior) (Ja.).
q^rqipi bkah bkrol (ka-tol) leave of
absence.
61
з^ч^’й^'ц bkah-skor тефра=4^'^’
without delay.
«FTfVpei bkah-khol, чргй-цЗ'сгцч very im-
portantorder (Yig. 4):	the
most important will of King Sron-btsan
sgam-po. This document having been dis-
covered within one of the great pillars of
Kinkhording temple in Lhasa is generally
known by the name
ц*|Ч’чр5Ч bkah-hkhor, divided into nafi-
hkor domestic servants; bran-gyog ser-
vants, menials; phyi-hkhor attendants ;
цФЧ,чр5К,д^’ч]'Чч| those who wait for orders,
attendants;	official clerks; also
private secretaries and personal assistants
of a high official; attendants in general.
bkafr-khyab a decree, manifesto,
edict; a general order.
ц^Ч’^л^ bkafy khrims a law, command-
ment;	strict justice; severe
punishment:	by the
cruel order of the king (Jd.).
q’lp’gjwq bkah, khrims-pa a lawyer; a
magistrate.
bkah gro§ (ka-doi) a conference,
consultation ; ^ч-^’g^
makes consultation; gives advice or coun-
sel; gives instructions; ч^ч*	to
give advice (Ja.).
Ц’ТЧ’^М'Ч %ka gro^-pa (ka-doi-pa) a coun-
sellor ; senator.
с^Ч’сйгч bkah bgro-wa debating;
considering; taking measures for:
qy	deliberating care-
fully with the ten confidential ministers.
ч^Ч'ч^’С) bkah hgrol-ica to dismiss;
dissolve a meeting or a conference.
ц*]Ч*£^ bkah-glegs— phyag-bris
or -^4} bkah-gog a letter; an autograph:
| “ great many thanks
for the gracious letter with enclosures sent
by the Donner according to the good
customs ” (Yig. k, 12).
bkah-hgyur is generally takon
as a synonym for 44the instructionsand
precepts of Buddha,” and means literally
4‘that which has become a command.”
This term is in fact the title of the great
collection of the religious Buddhist
writings (mostly, but not all, translated
from Sanskrit into Tibetan) known as the
Kahgyur. The Kahgyur is divided
into seven series of books containing
several hundred treatises, and consists pro-
perly of 108 volumes, though editions in
100,102, and 104 volumes are also current.
bkah-rgya bcug-pa issuing
of an official order; also the accumulation
of gold, silver, and grain in a Government
treasury.
q^4’g’^ bkah rgya-ma
in Hind. Pat'a-wana 1. public order,
permit, missive, communication, &c. 2.
цп|Ч,2’«,^’«Л|Ч’чрк’сГ’5^ (Lex.) in mysticism
a secret precept; occult communication
which is made only to the trusted few.
i:	bkah-rgyud succession or
descent of the dogmatic principles of
Buddha. The principal school of Tantrik
Lamaism originating from Naro Pap-chen
of Magadha and alleged by Milaraspa to
have been introduced by7 Mar-pa Lo-tsava
in Tibet in the beginning of the 11th cen-
tury A.D. Its different sects or branches
are the following :—^’ч^чKarma
Bkah-гдуиф	Dge-ldan Bkah-
rgyud , ^i^’q’crqv^ Dwags-po Bkah тдуиф
Bbri-gun Bkah-гдуиф
Bbrug-pa Bkah-гдуиф
62
11:	'^5 bkah-yi rgyud, t.e.,
the line or thread of the word, lc., the
oral tradition of tho word of Buddha
which is supposed to have been delivered
through a continued chain of teachers and
disciples apart from the written scriptures.
(lit. the illuminator
of the doctrine of Kahgyud School) a
general designation of the chief lamas of
the Bkah-rgyud-pa sect (Th/. к. в7\
V $kab-rgyud rnam-rgyal
the Bkah rgyud* Chief Lama whom tho
Mongol Chief Gushi Khan dethroned
after overthrowing the power of Sde-pa
Gtsafl-pa the ruler of Tsang and tf in
1643 A.D. (Lofi. 13).
^ЯЧ’|Р bkah-sgyur admonition and
reprehension ; ^Я^'^'Я3^’4 to issue an
order ; to admonish ;	to translate
the words of Buddha, &e.
bkah-sgyur btafi-wa to in-
struct a subordinate in a rough pointed
manner, cautioning him against his faults ;
to counsel against wrong practices.
ляя’^я'4 bkah ^grog-pa to publish an
order; to proclaim or read an order or
edict.
bkah bsgo	1. exhorta-
tion to the deity. When any one falls ill
either naturally or from the supposed
malignity of an evil spirit, he goes to
a lama or a Tantrik priest and begs of
him for a bkah b$go—permission to invoke
the deity. The lama touches the patient’s
head with the consecrated sceptre called
Dorje (I'tijra), with the sacred dagger
called the phurbu, a string of beads,
an image of a Buddha or a deity or a
holy book, and repeating some charms
exhorts the deity to be propitious to
the patient. Those who do not actually
suffer from any kind of illness also ask
for such protective religious measures.
2. commandment ; precept (Jd.).
bkah b§gos is pf. of аяч’чУ bkah
b$go, a sentence passed.
ля^’^Я^ bkah mfiags-pa^^'^w&jy
to send verbal message; to give a reply.
bkah-bcuy also	bkah beu-
pa, one who has observed the ten command-
ments of Buddha. The title of Bkah-bcu
is given to a Buddhist monk-scholar who
has passed all preliminary examinations
for a religious degree. There are two
classes of ^Я4’^—those of glefi-bsrc$ and
gsan-phu \ а ^Яяч§ of Tashilhunpo monas-
tery is called Bkah-chen on account of
his superior prestige in religious study
and practice.
ля^’Я^Я4 bkah gcog-pa to act against
an order; to disregard an express order
or command :	’**5 the order
of (one’s father must not be disregarded)
^/.).
ля^'л^м bkah-bco$ an abbreviation of
ляя^^’^'л^-л?^ or the two great collec-
tions of Buddhist writings.
ля^’^яч bkah-chem$ — ^'&sw resp. for
a great man’s last will; a royal
testament or will: ляя’^ям'Я’^’^’^^Я^’
I in the work called Bkah-chems ka-
khol-ma, etc. (J. Zafi.).
+ ля^’^5 bkah mchid=^^ai\ or Я^ц*
$Я^ a command in reply reap., but also
word от speech of a superior person.
The term likewise signifies a conference,
debate, &c. :	what
conversation did he hold? ля^*55*гсг
'^’Я^®4 “pray, let the nectar of
pious conversation be uttered I”

63

A’n'V^ bkah-han 1, obedient; dutiful;
submissive; observant of command. 2.
one’s tutelary deity is also called his bkah-
nany because he carries out his protege’s
behest;	service; doing
service (Жж).
A^^ap bkah nan-pa to obey; be
obedient;	to disobey;
an observer of orders or precepts.
bkah gnan the cruel commander;
acc. to Zcz. btsan-pahi sa bdag, “the
mighty lord of the soil,” is said to be a
pre-Buddhist deity (Jd.).
A*p'oj3^q bkah gnan-pa 1. severe retri-
bution from guardian deities for defects in
worshipping them ; also the injury they
do their devotees for impropriety in their
conduct or language. 2. damnation into
which both a teacher and his pupil fall
for disclosure of secrets of their doctrine
without authority.
a’tj'v^ a^ bkah-gnan brjid a weighty
command or injunction.
+ a>t]Va^	=	ч 1. a
proclaimed order : g^'Ag^^ A is also
colloq. called	bkar-btags. 2.
one versed in drawing omens;
an astrologer	(Л/. K. 61).
АД]Ч*^Д|^ bkah-rtag$ mark seal; precept;
maxim (Cs.):	(Yig. k. 27).
A^4’|5 bkah-stod a subaltern; agent
(Sch.)
а^ч*ча bkah-thafi— A^’^ bkah-1 an order;
edict (Jd.); written order ; command ;
commandment; precept (Cs.).
а^ч-дя bkah-tham— S5TS* phyag-dam
or dam-phrug, seal; chief seal :
чя	received the
letter containing the chief seal of the
Grand Lama and enclosing a scarf with
charmed knots (Yig. k. 75).
qnyvyjfcTAAq bkah drag-pa phab-pa to
command sharply, hastily or severely
(Sch.); to issue an ultimatum.
bkah-drin) resp. for drin
a favour, kindness, grace, boon:
through the kindness of the
lama.
A^XV^	bkah-dr in-can— &WA
byam$-pa dan Idan-pa kind; gracious;
benevolent (Mnon.).
bkah-drin-che very gracious;
(you arc) very kind; the usual phrase for
our “ thank you,” in acknowledgment of
a kindness or favour—common in letters,
&c.
bkah-drin-che shus-pa to
say it is an act of great kindness; to
acknowledge kindness; to thank.
bkah-drin rjes-su dran-
pa to remember a benefit or kindness
received.
bkah-drin snin-dpyafis to
bear in mind or remember the kindness
obtained of another person.
bkah-drin mdsad-pa to
bestow a favour; to show kindness.
bkah-drin gsnm-ldan pos-
sessed of or making use of the three graces
or courtesies, viz.: (1) ^npA^A'A teaching
of the sciences; (2)	explaining
the aphorisms and the Tantra \ (3)
blessing and ordaining.
A’ti'V^ajWa bkah-drin gsol-wa to thank ;
to be grateful for favours.
a^^a bkah-drufi a secretary of state.
а^ч*д]5^ hkah-gdams an advice; coun-
sel ; instruction from a high official.
A^rnfiWA Bkah-gdams-pa 1. an
adviser (Sch.). 2, the reformed Buddhist
I el

school of Tibet founded by
the chief disciple of Atisha. It
was divided into two stages:
or q»rp'	tho earlier school from
Bromst on to Tsongkha-pa, and л^гд^адг
«]wq or the modern school, said to be
identical with that now called Gelug-pa,
dating from Tsongkha-pa downwards.
Tho earlier Bkah-gdants-pa were distin-
guished for their elaborate ritual and for
their power of propitiating deities. The
members of the later Bkah-gdam-pa have
been remarkable for scholarship and
linguistic erudition.
fykah-gdams pho-brafi the
palace where tho Grand Lama of Tashi-
lhun-po resides.
fykah-mdah a contraction for
bkah-blon-dafi mdah-dpo)^
minister and general (Yig. k. 5£).
bkah-hdu§ cho$-kyi
rgya-mtsho a kind of ritualistic obser-
vance of the lldsogs-chen sect of the
Rnin-ma Buddhist School in which a parti-
cular deity with his followers is depicted.
л*]яч^чргл bkafy hdogs-pa to make into
law; to proclaim ; a proclamation (Jd.).
л»т|чя\^ bkah-hdom$ — ^'^\^(x
instruction; order.
bka-$dod, also written as
one waiting for orders; an attendant
on a superior; an aide-de-camp; one’s
guardian deity is also called by this
epithet:	(A. IS)
“he who has propitiated the lord of
death to serve him as his attendant
spirit.”
bkah bsdu-wa collection of the
doctrine (Jd.); synopsis of the scriptures
at the grand Buddhist convocations; also
the convocations where the precepts of
Buddha were promulged.
л^г^рс/ч ftkah gnafi-tra, vb., to order,
command, grant, permit; an order; per-
mission :
I beg you wall give her as a consort to
our King of Tibet (Jd.).
Л’ЦЧ'чр^ Bkah-gnam^*]'1^ a district in
the east of Kong-bu ; also n. of a district
of Ngari Khorsum in Western Tibet.
л^Ч'^цц bkah-pkeb$ a groat man’s order,
л^ч'^ bkah-phrin (ka-tiri) a message.
fykah-hphrin letter of command:
to write or issue a letter
containing instructions.
Л’цч'ллч i: bkah-babs an injunction; a
direction.
л^ч'ллл л: bkah-bab$ the fulfilment of
a commission ; also the lama or saint who i*
commissioned with some high duty. When
a lama at the command of his spiritual
instructor fulfils what was entrusted to
him, he is said to bo a bkah-babs.
сгт|ч*од^’ц^ bkah-babs bditn n. of a his-
torical work on later Indian Buddhism
by Lama Taranatha.
л’пч'чздл^ babs-bshi the four
eommissioned ones (see л^ч^ллэд).
Л’тр’ця bkah-bani — л^Ч’-З^ order; dip-
loma: Л’гр/ля ^л^иЦфЛ’^л	the object
of sending the autograph letter (Rtsti.).
лт]Ч,д^ bkah-bri^ resp. л^Ч’^ bkah-qog,
a letter; a written authority, generally in
autograph :
| it is very gracious
of you to favour me with your autograph
and enclosure presented by the hand of
the Don nyer (Yig. k. 1J).
I
65

qwpv^qr bkah-dicati==%\Q a minister
{Mnon.).
q^44qq’q bkah-hbab-pa the going forth
of an order or edict {Sehr.).
bkah-hbum the hundred thou-
sand precepts; n. of a religious work.
q*]4’g’q^’q bkah-blo bde-wa=^^Q
bkah-blo go-wa;	{Rag.) 1. at-
tentive ; executing an instruction or order
with attention; one who is cheerful at
heart owing to his attention to
2. one who easily understands what he is
ordered to do; one who appreciates his
superior’s instruction. 3. speaking
well; eloquent; q”]4’§f«tq^q bkah-blo
mi-bde-wa,	one whose expression
or delivery is not good.
bkah-blon or	bkah-yi
blon-po, the name given to the four Cabinet
Ministers who assist the Gyal-tshab or
Regent in the administration of the Govern-
ment of Tibet during the minority of the
Grand Lama of Lhasa. The four Kalbn
must be laymen and are often military
officers. Popularly they are styled Shape
(<¥1^):	bkah-blon gzims-
gag the residence of a bkah-blon.
^’^^^bkah-blon driift-hkhor the
official staff of a Kaldn.
«vrp'g^q^ bka-bkni-bshi (particularly) the
four ministers whom the 4th Mauchu
Emperor K’ien-lung (in Tibetan called
Lha-skyon Protected of Heaven) appointed
to conduct the state affairs of Tibet. They
were	Ku n-dgah-bshi No-yon,
Tshe-rin dican-rgyal of Gyan
Ron, Thon-pa, and Rtee-drun
of Po-ta-la. These four governed the
country for twenty-seven years from the
year of the iron-sheep {Lon. 16).
т ^я^ч^ bkah-blon-gsum the three
ministers who conducted the Government
of Tibet from the year of the fire-horse to
the middle of the year of the earth-ape.
Their names were :—q^^'^ q’q bkah-
blon Lum-pa-ica, ^я’д^Ч^ч bkah-blon
Na-phod-pa of Ron-bu, and ^wfVgjVi^’q
bkah-blon Sbyar-ra-wa.
ч^я’я	spiritual or
intellectual heir-loom. This -is a philo-
sophical term of the Rnin-ma School,
meaning the descent of the bkah (Bud-
dha’s word) in an unbroken succes-
sion or without being kept concealed
for a period. One who has received such
a succession, or any scripture that has
come down to him in such a manner.
q’lfwSw bkah-тай thim-pa to con-
tain many precepts or commands; one on
whom there are instructions or commis-
sions to perform.
bkah gtsan-ma one whose
morals are pure; one who has preserved
his vows.
qWjrgbrq bkah-stsol-ica, pf. steal, to speak;
to say (where an honoured person is the
spokesman); according to circumstances,
to command, ask, beg, relate, answer,
&c., especially in ancient literature, in
which it is almost invariably used of
Buddha and of kings speaking.
bkah-tshog^^^^ bkah-lan or
a reply in the way of instruction :
“ pray favour me with replies on internal
affairs (uninterruptedly) like the flow of
the river of gold ” {Yig. k. 15.)
Ф]яч£^ bkah-hdsin letter of authority
or commission from Government (issued to
one who is on the move or who is to
io
cI71rq^-gY4l
66
qipiq|
exercise some kind of power over the
people) to afford facilities for travelling or
tor carrying out a mission: $
commission was issued to despatch hither
a man who would frame settled laws and
shew energy.
bkah-bshin byed-pa to do
according to order; doing; ordered: ч^ч*
to be obedient; a faithful servant.
bkah. rab-hbyam$-pa a doc-
tor of divinity among the monastic
scholars of Tibet; one who has acquired
the highest proficiency in the Buddhist
sacred literature and is of pure morale.
«Hvwq bkah-rams-pa one who has
passed the highest examination in Bud-
dhist met aphysics ; one who has reached
the highest of the 13 classes in the
l^tshan-nid grva-tshan, tho metaphysical
bchdol in the great monastic establish-
ments of Tibet.
crqvQr^’q bkah-la rtsi-wa to give heed
to or attend to an instruction or precept;
to listen to any advice.
bkah-lnn an order; a precept:
^q-^q-q f0 command or give orders;
to issue an injunction.
А’Чч НЦ bkah-tog—4ffa\ gr^a-log (ta-log)
one who has given up his religious vows;
a Buddhist monk turned out of his
monastery for misconduct. In Kham$
he is called bkah-tog- in Middle Tibet
ta-lryp
а^ч'-^щ bkah*$ag the court or council-
house of tha four кilon or ministers of
Lhasa:
!] when the
warrant officer registers the document at
the court of kalon he should also verify it
at the Account Office (Rtsii.).
А^Ч'-^д] b\ah-$og any writing of autho-
rity from a superior; decree; diploma ;
passportofficial paper or letter; «луч’-ХТ
ёЧ*	rdsun-ma a fabricated autho-
rity; spurious writing or deed;
bkah-qog rim $kyel to circulate a pass-
port or an official order; serial letters sent
one after another.
а^Ч'^цо! bkah-gsal = ч»»|ч-аЦ order; official
message: q^4-*|w4*-agv«<Y4 to send a
message or express order one after
another.
а’Г)5*^-25bkahi-rfia-wo-che proclamation
by the beat of drum (Yig. k. 18).
bkahi cod-pan an instruction
or precept to be received with perfect
obedience; to value or honour an order;
a command carried out with the same
respect as that with which a man carries
his own head-dress.
bkahi mdun-blon reap. SH2*
blon-po minister:
my humble self bearing the title of
state minister together with the circle of
attendants, both lay and clerical officials, •
are in good health (Yig. k. 6).
bkar or ч’Ч’ч’Ц according .to’
the law; to legalize; to make it into law
(Cs.); to proclaim, publish (Je.); ql’K
to publish; publication:
q^ for 4^'5.
*	1. bkar-ica pf. of vb. V]VA
to separate, put. aside, select,
banish:	banished from his '
place. 2. to ask any question captiously ;
to make a peevish enquiry.
ЧТ]ОГЗ bkal-wa, pf. of ‘ч^гч, but in
IF. is the primary form of the verb
meaning 1. to load *y to burden; put a load
on (Cs.):	to load wool: P^-q’rpcq

67

to. load a beast of burden, &c.: 0^ А’гргч
to levy a tax. 2. pf. of ^‘4 to spin;
spun; twisted (Naff. 5).
	bkal-thags a kind of
stuff made of coarse goat-hair about nine
inches in width:	'$pr
q^ I ra spu nag-lna re la bkal-thags byas-par
with every five pounds of goat’s hair to
weave one blanket (Rtsii.).
t>kas, contraction	instr,
of «Т.
bka$-pa=§*'P 1. crack, split,
cleft. 2. pf. of ^^'4
qij-q bku-tca 1. elixir, quintessence
(Os.); ‘medicinal extract. 2. with
pf. q^rq to make extract of a drug by
drawing out the juice (Lex.); w’qj
melted butter; ^j’qxg^q to extract tho
spirit of; ч bku phytifi spirit extracted
((7$.);	to extract medicine
by infusion.
q^’4 bkug-pa pf. of
drawn or pulled forward;
summons (Yig. 7).
q'Qfrp bkmn-pa, pf. of but
pres, in W. and according to Lex. fut.
bkum, pf. q^wq, to kill, to destroy;
to cut off the edge ; fix a
boundary to.
^’1 bkur-sti nfw, HWh iter, uft-
honour, respect, homage; mark of
honour; respectful reception (by asking
one to sit on a seat of honour);
bkur-sti mchod-ра to distinguish (a per-
son) by marks of respect (Zam.); ^q’orq^v
ran-la Ьккг-sti hbyun-dtis when
honour is shewn to (one’s self) yourself
(Jd.);	bkur-§tis dregs sense of
honour;. self-respect:
। ?ш’ cJien.po rnamsJa bkur-stis
dregs-pa yod great men have the seuse
of dignity.
Syn.. ^5*q mchod-pa ;	5 rim-gro ;
bsnen-bkur ;	ri-mor Lyas;
shabs-tog;	shaLs-hLrin;
4j^*q bkur-ica; ^qv<i|^ ne-trar gnas;
ne-war spyod\ rjed-pa (Mnon.).
I; bkiu'~ica = ti&\4 1. to pay
homage or reverence; to esteem. Ж’ЗД’
q^vqS’gerq	TTSfT literally ° the
king honoured of many ” was the name
of the first king of the world according
to the Buddhist legendary account. 2. to
carry; to fetch; to convey in TY being also
pf. of^’4;	to carry upward.
to slander; to blashpheme ;
not to accept as true or correct (Lig. F 4 .
qjvq’v^q bkur-tcar byed-pa the act of
respecting; to do honour; frq. to make
reverence, to salute.
bkur-tshig — ^S^'^] bstod-pahi-
tshig words or expressions of honour,
some of which are:—b$nag§-
ho§; qg*prq’q|5 bsnag§-pa brjod-
mckod-tshig\ «tfwg,
mtho-war-bya\ stod-pa $mra\ ^,£HS
che-brjod}	mchog-gyur; ^'^phul-
Lynn; &\^rmad-byun;	legs-brjod;
legs-smra; «qBwrq^q gzens-bstod-pa ;
(pn-tu-bzafi, (Mnon.).
qj^‘XN bkur hos worthy of respect;
respectable.
'tfpq'q bkog-pa. pf. of я^-q.
q^C’q t>kon-icay pf. of ‘tfjk’q. When
«flfq bkoft is joined with В to form the
compound word 3**^ it means $4^’4
threat, menace.

68

bskos to appoint; to
raise to the throne.
q^’4 $ko4-pa, v. ^V4 Ч'ЗП,
=*JTfl 1. sbst. Л* gral or §4'4 arrangement;
order or arrangement; method of
Arranging; applied to mind, as in Swr*r
the meaning is meditation, wfa,
wrftH. 2. vb.= to build, arrange, plan,
&c.
of boundless or
infinite design; the universe; n. of a great
Bodhisattva.
Vcod-pahi gtug-gtor—
4q‘arg<4 q the prince of learning; science.
4^X»w bkod-hdom$ =45fjv?Y4 bkod-
ston-pa (Yig. k. 23).
bkod-blta (colloq. «йрг?» bkob-lta)
the plan of an undertaking; design ; plot.
3^5’^ bkod-ldan=zla-wa
bcu-pcig-pa or	dgun-zla hbrin-
po the eleventh month of the Tibetan year,
sometimes corresponding with January
(Ktsii.).
q’fa-q bkon-pa, pf. of *j£y4 hgon-pa.
^05 bkor-hdre seems to be a kind
of goblin (Ja.).
bkol-spyod n. of a torment;
torture from being boiled in water or oil:
byol-son bkol-spyod-
kyi sdug-bsnal the sufferings of the damned
through the torture of being boiled,
bkol-wa occasionally pf. of ^4*4
hkhol-wa, to boil; usually indicates Q[^4*4 to
bind to sendee ; to employ;
snod-spyad bkol-iva a boiling vessel; Я^Я’
gyog-tu bko-wa to take into ser-
vice; ^’§’4^4’4 to set aside; to keep out.
bkyal-wa 1. to talk nonsense
(Ja.). 2. mt|*r*4'4 to rave in speech; to talk
nonsense : язч’«Н’ад| wnr, пРяяЯчПЧ, v.
34*я.
bkyig-pa in the colloq. of
Tsang—^0Я’4 ikhyig-pa to tie (by a
rope); 4$я^ = 4$W4 bound, tied,
fastened (JDkm.).
qj-q bkye-wa, pf. and fut! of *35’4,
but in IF. is used as the only form of
tho verb=to send, despatch; to cause to
come forth: ^’43 pho-па bkye despatch-
ed an envoy: *5’4$ ho# $kye sent forth
rays: §4*443 sprul-pa bkye caused a form
to emanate: ^’35'43 $ton-nto bkye made
an exhibition of.
bkyed-pa, pf. to bend back;
recline (vb. nt.).
ЧЗУ4 Ьky on-pa = 5е*’4 rdufi-гса to beat
(Ja.); 4’Г|Я*4з^4 resp. to chastise with
words, to scold (Ja«). Schtr. mentions
43^*434'4 chiding.
qij’q bkra-wa (ta-ica) cog. to
f^,	variegated; beautiful,
blooming (of complexion); glossy, well-
fed (of animals); 4j’^ яттВн a great
painting ; 43’4V4Z^’4	a painter;
4j’4$’4’3r^ with variegated figures; paint-
ings : 42),4$’К5’5ччГ^	a radiant
or illuminated zone or halo: 42)’«к fwfw,
variegated; with shades of colour.
bkra-wahi $kad-hbyin n. of
the bird called Garghongata; 9’Я^’?А'Я'^’
Й4* I (Jdnon.).
' hkra-byed^R'^ri-mo~mkhun
a painter (Mnon.).
bkra fin #mar parti-coloured;
on a red ground.
q^|
69

bkra-lam^ne=glaring;
in glare;
^4’3^ the beauty or effect produced by
variegated colour^ as in a painting; the
illumination of colours as set forth in a
rainbow; hence splendour.
ZTT]’5^J bkar-fa H^T,	wt-
prosperity; blessing; good luck:
g00d fortune to my
people ! may they .prosper !
holy-water; consecrated water or con-
secrating water; 43’^K§’W auspicious
bed; nuptial bed (Os.); qg’^’S’^r words
of blessing; benediction; ^3’^’1
bkra-qis-kyi gso sbyofi, H^r auspi-
cious fasting; зз’^гдьчй^а bkra-qissruti-
wahi go-cha instruments used for insuring
luck; sacrificial ceremony by which
blessings are to be drawn down (Jd.);
propitious ; lucky;
good omens; lucky signs; ЧЗ’З^’^ЧС
bkra-qis-pahi rtag§ lucky configurations or
semblances; happy omens ;	н^гг
n. of a goddess; the goddess of glory
(Ja.);	misfortune; calamity ;
calamity; adj. wretched;
unlucky.
^З^'д^ Bkra-fis glin n. of a place in
Kham§ (Lon. * 25).
чд'’q «X bkra-fis brgyad-pahi
mdo n. of a short sutra in K. d. * 76
which contains the names of eight Bud-
dhas. Whoever recites it and meditates
on the perfections acquired by the
Buddhas escapes from the dangers of evil
spirits and demons. Such a devotee can
easily have admission into the courts of
kings and address the highest authorities
without let or hinderance. Remembrance
of this effusion is believed to be a safe-
guard against bad dreams and also
mishaps or accidents in war, and in
repelling offensive weapons.
чз’^’^яс bkra-giz ^go-man n. of a
monastery in Amdo.
43bkra-gis-can n. of an
incense (Mnon.).
43Bkra-gis chos-rdson the
summer seat of the Government of Bhutan
where the Dharma Raja resides. It is
ordinarily called Tassisudon on English
maps.
43’^^'qXV^ bkra-giz brjod-pa
auspicious expression; a benediction.
33bkra-gis rtags-brgyad the
eight auspicious signs or emblems, vin.:—
(1)	эття the precious or
jewelled umbrella; (2)	Яфз
the golden fish; (3)
gw the pot of treasures; (4)
W the-excellent lotus; (5)
the white conch-shell with
whorls turning to the right; (6) 5W
3*9$ the auspicious mark repre-
sented by a curled noose emblematical of
love; (7)	the chief
standard of victory, m?., the emblem of
royalty; (8) fl^vg^vS	the
golden wheel.
rtags-can possessed
of auspicious marks:
a glossy hand
possessing auspicious lines will cause one
to obtain both a son and wealth (K. d.
217).
qj-S^K/ bkra^is
dun-dkar gya^-hkhyil	a conch-
shell with its whorls turning to the right
instead of to the left (Mnon.).
Syn. dun-mchog\ |’«rg’q §kye-ua
lna-pa\ дч’З’ядч’а tgyal-po hkhyu-wa
(Milon.).
bkra-fa Idan
auspicious; lucky.
bkra-ci$-pahi rdsas
^ЧГ, яжтдг,	lucky articles.
Bkra-fa-pahi yi-ge n. of a
kind of (mystic) writing which is consi-
dered auspicious.
bkra-<p$-par gyur-cig
may you enjoy prosperity.
bkra-<p§ byed-ma—^\'&'^''&
u. of a goddess (7C. g.\ 11%).
Bkra-<p$ blama 1. Tashi
Lama, the name by which the Panchhen
Lama of Tashilhun-po is known in India
and Europe. 2. a lama priest who
oificiates at a marriage ceremony in
Sikkim:
jitfj'q gQl-ajc.-1 [he Tashi lama will touch
with tho auspicious offerings (for the gods)
the head of the bride.
Bkra-$is-rtse (TaJii-tse) n. of a
village in the district of Stod-lufi in Tibet.
Bkra-<ps-b$tsegs (Tashi'seg-
pa) u. of a brother of King Sky id-Ide
Rimahi mgony who settled down in ШаЬ
ris in Western Tibet (Zofi. * 5).
bkra-$i$ btseg^pahi
indo u. of a work the reading of which
produced auspicious occurrences.
the eight lucky articles
are—(1)	mirror; (2) medicinal
concretion from the brains of elephant;
(3) Ц curd; (4) Di/i-gfass ; (5)
the wood-apple; (6)
a right-whorled couch-shell; (7)	li-khri
vermillion; (8)	white mustard.
bkra-qis rdsogs-pa
completion of an auspicious work
or event.
70	q^|
q^^-Zr Bkra -fij lhun-po (Tashi-
Ihunpo) the seat of the Panchhen Rin-po-
che, the second Lama in Tibet, ordinarily
called Tashi Lama, ranking noxt to the
Dalai Lama of Lhasa. The grand monas-
tery of this name adjoining the town of
Shiga-tso in Tsang harbours 4,880 monks,
presided over by the Tashi Lama.
q^ bkrag (tag)	Acrf
Ihoft-lhofi mdafi§ yod-pa 1. dazzling
brightness; lustre; *55^ mdafi§ also
glitter (of jewels). 2.
beautiful appearance ; high colour (of the
face, skin) ;	pure gloss of the
skin ; <ир|*& very bright (Jd.).
q>Tjq|’q bkrag-pa=^\p\fair or
fine complexion.
Syn. mdafa-can; htshev-
u?a (Mnon.).
члдо] bkrag-med=*i^or *5«гЙ5
dull appearance; bad complexion (Itffion.).
q’Tjq’q bkrab-pa (tab-pa) pf.
to choose or select from among many;
mchog-tu bkrab exquisite choice
(Lex.).
bkram-pa (tam-pa), pf.
a form of ‘Ч]*'4	to
spread over, scatter.
Syn. 55**4 dgram-pa; brdal-pa
also gtor-wa; hthord-pa ;
gtsug$-pa (Mnon.).
qiprq bkral-wa (tal-wa) 1. pf. of
^5*4*4 (Os.)	[
elucidation (of the meanings of the terms
in the Sutra and the Tantra). 2. to
appoint:	to engage щ business.
q^ bkras in the passage
; qjN here means rolled or
. varnished in variegated colours.

71

bkra^-pa (te-pa) an abbreviation
of	according to Sch* also pf. of
the verb чд'Л;	for
an auspicious scarf for presentation on the
occasion of a visit or some ceremony or
festivity.
bkra$-lun(Te-lang) n. of a valley
in Tibet (Deb. 44)*
Bkra$-lhun (Tei-lhun) a
contraction of	(Tashi-lhun-po) ;
also a heap or mountain of glory or auspi-
cious objects.
C\
CJTj'ZJ bkri-ica (ti-wd) 1. pf. of
to conduct according to order, e.</., one
after another. 2. for	to wrap.
3. to draw; to try; to acquire; to search
for.
bkrid-dran (Mang) — ^'i^^
the black discipliner of the unsub-
dued; the black and horrible (assumed)
appearance of Manju Ghosa Bodhisattva to
lead the sinner into the path, of righteous-
ness and virtue:	the
dreaded (Bon) deity who leads or drags
the subdued straight onward (7). /?.).
bkri$ an abbreviation of
bkra-ps.
bkris-pa (ti-pd), pf. of w
q-QTcnj^rq thar-pa-la fykris-pa conducted to
emancipation or Nirvana.
ПЦ bkru (Ju), fut.of 0^ khrus,v.
чо	43	~	43
bkru-zin	bkrn bpd-
gyi $nod ЧГ=( washing bowl; to wash
a vessel, plate, &c.:	bkru-bya,
clothes, etc.r to be washed.
РТ}Ч]’Ц bkrug-pa (tug-pa) probably an
ЧЭ
incorrect reading of SOT'q-
fykru$-pa, pf. of khrus.
Bkre (teh) n. of a place in Khams,
which is also called	Bkre-nag
tshan.
Bkre-hor (te-hor) n. of a section of
the Sgo-man department of the monastic
school of Dapung.
* qrpfq bkren-pa (ten-pa), 1.
poor, indigent, hungry;
42ft a country where resources are
scanty (Lex.). 2. miserly, stingy.
qjft’Q bkren-po —55^’4 a beggar; desti-
tute person.
Syn. ^‘^5 nor-med; hphons-pa
(Mnon.).
4^*^ bkres-skom, contraction of <r
hungry and thirsty :
this tobacco does not allay
in any way either hunger or thirst: 4Tj^r
leading from hunger
and thirst to satiety (Jd.):
। the cow’s milk removes
hunger and thirst and hard breathing.”
qjjsr^ bkres-nas being hungry.
*	bkres-pa (teh-pa) to be
hungry; also hunger. In. C. res£. for
“hunger”; 4^«Ч4’ч to have ravenous
appetite (Sch.); g'4^’4 tho appetite
or feeling of hunger; honorific term :
on arriving .at the top of a barren
mountain, he felt hungry and was sup-
plied with food (Deb. 7).
4,	bkrofis-pa resp. term for
killed; dead.
q^oj’q bkrol-wa (tot) pf. of hgrol-u-a
vb. trs. to untie, to loosen; also in W. is the
only form in use :	mdud-pa
bkrol-ica the knot untied.
*11
72

bpns-pa bkrol-wa set free from bondage;
gorqj«rq Jdiral bkrol-ica remitted revenue
or rent ; 5^**чгчцчгч dgon$-pa bkrol-ica
forgiven, pardoned, &c.
bkro§ (toi) — ^*^ to choose; to
select; imp. bkro$-fig {Situ, 105).
чцрргч fyklags-pa pf. of to have
read; done reading:	wishes to
read or sing.
Я| rka or chuhi-rka or	a
gutter; a small channel on the roof of
a houso or at the edge of the roof
for carrying off the rain	small
furrow conveying water from a conduit
to trees or plants; furrow between the
beds of a garden; hence even flower-bed.
chuhi lha khafi n. of a
monastery near Sam-ye.
Яр rkan I: 1. marrow, pith. 2.
deseent, extraction, origin:
। “for example,
the mule on which the Goddess Paldan
Lhamo rides is called rkan gsum, on
account of a so-called three-fold origin ”
(its father is an ass, mother a mare
but in itself it is neither of them, but
a mule !).
Яр’ II: 1. stuff;	it is of
good stuff:	it is not of good
stuff. 2. bundle; a collection : ST
a bundle of grass:	a tuft of hair:
a skein of yarn.
яр’ч rkan-pa resp. хт^, фз
1. foot, leg, hind leg of a quadruped:
q^'^c	not throwing the
foot {Шоп.). 2. lower part, lower end,
e.f/., of a letter:	having a foot, so
the nine letters are called that extend
below the line wrrr% etc. {Jd.). 3. a
metrical line, verse. 4. base founda-
tion :	rdsu-hphrul-gyi rkan-
pa bshi the four feet (stages) of
performing miracles.
Syn. shabs\ ryyu-byed\
§5 hgro-byed\	bgrod-byed*
rgyuy-byed {Mnon.).
kafi-kyog bandy-legged. (Jd.)
rkafi-kri {kang-ti) a piece of cloth
to wrap round the legs {Sch.).
rkan-bkod чт^ГГН tho manner
of walking ; ^‘q’qj’qS’^ rkan-pa bkru-
wafri sa	tho place for washing
tho feet.
^•qj-я RkanJJcra-ma = ^'&%^ bom of
tho hill-rat; a name of Agastya Muni
(ДГпоп.).
rkafi-$kye$ n. for the Sudra caste
(of India) which originated from the foot
(of Brahma) {Mnon.).
^’й Rkan khra {Kaug-tha) n. of a king
of Ancient India : З’Я^З’З^^’^’ЙЛ^'^
| “ like the
Indian Kings, Rkan Khra, and Rab snail
and others, their lineage on the mother’s
side was also from apes, etc.” {J. Zan.).
rkan khrab {kang-thab) iron shoes
worn along with the coat of mail; that
part of armour worn like boots from the
foot to the knees; greaves.
rkaft-khri {kang-thi — ^'^^) foot-
stool {Mnon.).
rkaft-hkhum (probably) having
a foot contracted by disease {Lex.).
rkan-hkhor bandy-legged {Sch.).
rkaft-go$ =	gos-lhain
Tibetan boots made of felt or of
coarse serge.

73

г кап-mg о	the fore part
of the foot.
Syn. rkan-rtse (Шоп.).
rkaft-mgyog§ swift-footed : *3'
mlhu-rtsal rmad-du byuft-wa rkan-mgyogs
rlun-dan mnam-pa gcig %pyan-draft$
invited (brought) one who was swift-
footed like tho wind and possessed of
miraculous powers:	the
secret blessing of swift-foot edness: *5*
(K. dun. 73) having
acquired the grace of swift-footedness.
*1^5 rkafi-hgro (kang-do) t^r one
who travels on foot; a vassal or subject
paying his duty by serving as a messenger
or porter (Cs.).
rkaft-hgro§ also rkaft-bro§
1. walking on foot. 2. domestic cattle;
breeding cattle.
rkaft-gdin a trumpet made of the
human thigh-bone used in temples; also in
travelling to keep off evil-spirits.
tkaft-rgyu a foot-soldier, v.
: infantry acc. to Cs.
rkaft-brgya or = a centi-
pede:	“the name
of the worm which has a hundred feet
and arms ” (Шоп.).
rkaft brgyad-pa a fabulous lion
having eight feet. An imaginary lion
of Buddhist design with eight legs,
generally found in sculpture and in
Tibetan mythological pictures.
fljVKA rkaft-ftar the leg (Attfow.).
rkaft-gcig-pa	one-
footed, met. a tree; the fabulous countries
of the JhtSaft and Tsti-ta, the people of
which are said to walk on one foot.
rkaft-rje§	footstep,
foot-mark; a dog; “foot-follower.”
rkan gnis-pa mankind;
^’3 the chief of bipeds; an epithet of
Buddha or	(Шоп.):
| Sans-rgyas (Buddha) is
the chief of the human kind.
rkaft gtub a foot ornament;
a foot-bangle.
rkaft-rten	a foot-stool;
trestle; a raised ground or stone step on
which, at the time of alighting from any
conveyance, the foot is placed.
rkan-stegs or
foot-stool.
Syn. rkan-rten; V'B rkan-khri*
zla-wa g.cig-pa*)	shabs-
steb§ (Шоп.).
^‘§^’3 rkan-$teft-bu =	the
star of the golden flight or a name
of a fixed star (Шоп.).
rkan-sten-bu =	9^ the star
of higher flight (Шоп.).
rkaft-than 1. on foot. 2. = ^’
a foot soldier (Шоп.).
rkaft-t haft-pa a pedestrian;
qc' § 45'4’4 one travelling on foot; to walk;
to go on foot.
rkan-mthil	the sole of
the foot; foot-sole.
rkan-hthun	metaph. for a
tree, ?>., that which drinks or draws
nourishment through its feet, or roots:
the red tree;
the devil’s tree.
rkan drug-pa or	the
six-footed, met. for the bee.
n
I
74

rkan-drug-lske$=vrsfi2^ the
mango tree.
rkan-gdub эдч: foot-ring;
bangle-like ornament worn on the foot.
rkan-hdrcn also	c.g.,
drawn by the foot; shame; disgrace.
rkan-ldan shoes ; that contains or
holds the feet; also metaph. for a road,
way, passage;	*
the lion’a-tail tree {Mnon.).
*5'^ rkan-snam coarse woollen leg-
gings manufactured in Tibet.
jp-qjw rkn-pa btkyafis the legs
stretched; ^qvqgsiN contracted legs;
= to rove, wander; to disperse,
separate:
opr^-cjq^ ( banished from their country, by
force of Karma they wandered forth and
came to tho country of Tibet.
rkan-pa hthen-po цт<Я
lamo.
rkan-pa gwm-ldan — tpvfa'
he who is possessed of
three legs or three regions; Vishpu; an
epithet of Vais'ravaua.
Syn.	’5 Byan-phycg$ bdag-
po;	rgyal-pohi rgyal^
дцые/е^ dpal-gtrr дмп-bdag',
gter-gyi bdag;	mihi chos-ldan;
слгцЗц’З nal-bsos-po;	hod-yan§
tsha-bo; й’Зч’ЛЩ E-lahi brgud\
^’q nor-sbyin hdrcn-pa\	gnod~
$byin-rgyal\	nor-gyi §dag; SOT
dbyig-gi char-hbcb§; 9^’5^'gk
byan-phyogs-^kyofi (Mnon.).
^'^.’f^^rkan-pahi $tabs-§gyur dan-
cing at the cadence of a song (dgnon.).
tka^-pahi hdtt-byed
the movements <jf the feet which aro
described as Vl’Mfa dal-hgro§\
bul-hgros;	IcJohi hgro§;
hgyin-hgro§;	§geg~hgros ; X'TqS^Sfa
rolpahi hgros ;	brjid-pahi hgro%;
gom-<pig§\ ^%wgom-$tab§\
gom-rlabs,	дот-pa yafi§}
дот-pa hkhyor\	tan тпе/юп hgro;
3^5 myur-hgro] *й}*|*г*5 mgyogs-hgro;
^’*5 rab-hgro ; ^1’4 rgyug-pa (Jgfion.).
q5 ’ £ ’ q	rkan-pah i	rt sa-wa=| ’ q
rtin-pa the heel (Mnon.).
rkafi-pahi wdshon-cha
can = 0W’ 9 poultry; a fowl (of which the
weapon is in its feet).
rkan-phyin felt for covering tho
legs.
*}E/4qi rkafi-bol upper part of the foot
(Jd.).
rkarl bral footless; help-
less; involved.
^•qqH rkan hbam a disease in
the foot; swelling in the foot; also
gout.
rkan-hlro$ or v.
rkdn-$ba$ (lit. hidden feetjzx^
a snake (Mnon.).
^e.-^ joj Rkan-ma rkan-chig n. of the
part of the nether world where the Naga
demi-gods reside.
JfW rkafi-tnar pith; marrow:
Awq|gwr»i^’qv55l
by rubbing in any kind of marrow,
contracted limbs may be smoothened
(i.c., straightened).
Syn. indans*, R’4’35 khn-wa-byed
(Mnon.).
Bkafi-тгд	(W^4R) n.
of the founder of Nyaya philosophical
sect in ancient India.
T'WI
rkin-dmag infantry; a foot-
soldier.
Syn. rkan-than	rkan-pa§
tgyu; wgw	ran sfobs-kyis bgrod;
Jffl.’-qvq rkan far-wa;	lus-kyis
bthab;	lu§-kyis rgol* гя^’<*^’«Х’А
mtshon-chas htsho-ica;	dpun-bu
chun (Шоп.).
fl^T rkafi-rtsa, resp. shabs rtsa,
general name for shoes in Tsang. In
Tibet the sole of a shoe is generally made
of a kind of durable grass, hence the name
flj^’S rkan rtsa, foot-grass, signifies a
shoe.
rkan rise the fore part of
the foot.
rkan-tshiigs — ^^^ or ^-q-
to have a firm footing ; to take
root.
^q-ггёЧ rkan mdser iron nails or spikes
fastened to the boot-sole for climbing.
rkan-mdse §=the
As'oka tree, Jonesia asoka Roxburgh
(Шоп.).
fl^'A^ rkan-bshi,	four-footed;
quadruped; a beast; also a chair or any-
thing that stands on four legs;
q^q= lit. possessed of cattle;
a herdsman (Шоп.).
flj«v«K kan-yan agile; quick in going
or walking.
kan-rin i: long shanks.
ii: v.	the crane; acc.
to some the grey species of duck (Шоп.).
rkan-lam foot-path; a passage
where a man can only pass but not ride.
гкап-$аг-ра~^'\Щ a foot-
soldier (Шоп.).
rZw $in treadle of a loom.
75
ктап-gu foot-sore.
«5-§an rkran-$ubs socks; stocking.
кап-sor toe.
rkan 1. sometimes used in the place
of	2. flfl нщ the palatewhich
is an obsolete form:	rkan-
rnthahi rnil end of tho palate or “gums
at the end of the palate” : 5’fl’V
^'1*^•wi^ar'4 “the six letters t, th, d, n,
r, 1, arise from the tip of the tongue and
the front palate.”
flfl’S4! rkan-phug the cavity of the palate:
these
four letters come out from partly the
cavity of the palate and partly the tip of
the tongue.	the roof or centre
of the palate:	^‘^I'SSHflfl*
I these seven letters are pronounced
from the centre of the tongue and the
middle of the palate.
flfl'W rkan-mar the butter which is
mixed with barley-flour to make a paste
for the food of children and infants; bar-
ley paste made with water or milk is apt
to choke infants, so the Tibetan mothers
mix in butter (Deb. Я 10).
rkarn-pa or of passion-
ate desire. The latter form is
generally used; it signifies «Л5
longing;	greed; passionate:
А bkur-sti dan rned-pa
la brkam-pa a longing for honours and
gain: p’«rQrq^WA§* becomes eager for
cakes.
rku-ica	pf. fut.
or Aj-qq-g, imp. 5^, to steal, rob; pres.
flfAV§5 steals, robs; brku-bya an
article to be stolen;	brku-byahi
rdsas things that may be stolen; also stolen
<|-qvq^c-q|
76
*.q»
property. The six kinds of theft acc. to
Buddhism are—(1)	hjab-bu^
rku-u'(( to steal or take away quietly
another’s property; (2)	rgyt^-rku-
ira to rob a thing knowing all about it
beforehand ; (3)	mthu$-rkn-wa to
rob violently one’s property; (4) B** SVX’
to rob a thing promising to
return it; (5)	to steal by con-
cealment; (6)	to rob a
thing by slandering another person
(K. d. « 5}.
jqvqgu-q rku-icar fyjrafi-wa
to count as stealing.
гкн-sanf a mind to steal,
or thievish mind.
rkur bcug-pa
jeq^sfqj^q rku-thab$-8u gnas-pa
arffoi:, the ten kinds of stealing according
to Tibetan authors, viz,:—mthu$
rku-tra to rob by means of incantations;
spqNsgyu thabs-kyi$ rkit-wa to rob
"by producing magical illusions; 4JVWj q
hhrid-jxiS rku-ica to rob one by using
threat*;	s gtam-pa$ rku-ica to rob
by speech (by lying);	to
rob one by soft words;	to
rob by saying that ho will return the thing
afterwards;	q to steal by
conjuring;	stealing by
misapproprittion or breach of trust;
RwEiKj-q cheating by gentle persuasion;
q stealing by (imposing upon
another in tho name of) religion (Lofi.
ч 15),
J’S rku-bya^ same as C4 to keep
secret, hide.
tkun-sgyig thief’s pouch; a sort
of smell wallet.
- rkuu-can a thief.
>•
^•q^w rkun-bcom plunder; highway
robbery.
rkun-thabs-su blan-zca to
take away by thievish means.
5^’^ rkun-uor stolen goods.
гкин-рОу fem. rkun-nio
a thief, a robber.
Syn. W|'4 jag-pa;	gyo^may
yan-lag flan; вчкч ar-pa;
hjab-bu-pa;	chom-rkun; WV1
gshan-dufi;	irdshani$-kyi
byed-po; ^4T5’^ hog-tu-rgyu ; chom-po
(Mflon,),
.j^-efa-q^q rkun-po§ Ь$до-гса—^'^'*Л'
rkun-роъ nan byed-pa the harm done
by a thief.
rkun-dpon the head of a gang
of wandering marauders.
JV* rkun-ma one who steals; a thief;
also applies occasionally to theft.
5^F*< rkun-rdsa§ stolen goods or things.
Syn. rkun-nor\ Ikog-nor.)
stolen property (ДГйои.).
rkt>n-$run& guard; a watchman;
to watch for thieves:
rkun^ma srun-rgyuhi ched-du khyi-gto$
feeding dogs to guard against thieves.
rkub чтз vulgar word for the
anus, backside, posterior; colloq. or
zkub^kyod-par to move or
shake one’s hinder parts, a mode of
nautch girl’s dance in India.
tkub-rgyag a chair to sit upon.
Jqrkub-ttegs a sitting bench; a
portable rest used by coolies.
jq*^ rkub-tshoi buttocks (Cs.).
77
rke-wa—^S^ rid-pa %kem-
pa) lean; meagre (Cs.):	rke-
war hgyur-war to grow lean, thin.
rked-pa, also *^S’4 ^ifs, the
waist, more particularly that part where
the girdle is worn; also the loins; also
defined as	the ends or notches
of the bow which hold the string or to
which the string is attached.
Syn.	$ke-rags yul; Ч’ч’я
bar-nia; lu$-phra {Mnon.).
rked-rgyun an ornament (chain)
hanging from waist.
rked-hchu the buttocks.
rked-mdud anything twisted
at the middle; knotted-waist; n. of a
biscuit {Jig}.
rked-nad can-tna, v. gV^Vdr94^’
a woman who has her monthly
courses (Mnon.).
^•q^c/q rked-pa g yon-pa stiff, unyield-
ing waist:	the
husband of the woman with a stiff waist
will die (ЛГ. d. Я 217}.
rked-pa, rgyur-wa (metaph.) to
become a slave (female):	4‘q’ЯЗ'
a woman whose waist has
become bent like a bow becomes a maid
servant (K. d. ^217).
rked-pa chag (lit. broken waist)
to fail in a great undertaking:
«ЧО&’^'ПЯ if a fox (tries to) leap
over a place where lions jump, he breaks
his waist, i.e,, dies in the attempt.
rked-pa phr a a slender waist.
rked-hbra§=*'ъn. of a fruit
used in fever (ДГлсш.).
3 V?* rked-sbom one with a large or
broad waist; a corpulent person.
Syn.	Ido-wa che-wa; Я’^’^
gsus-poche;	lto-ldir-wa;
&si(§-rdse§ can;	lto-гса hphyan-wa;
Sjyq'laj-cj grod-pa chen-po;	grod-
pa §bom-po (Mnon,).
rke<i-med~ma a pretty woman ;
=ду^у«ХЯ, a woman with slender
waist (ДГйсж).
+ rked-$o rked-pa the waist:
Sde-mig chufi-
fiu sna-man-po§ ska hi rketj-so hkhor-wa {A.
133) many little keys of different kinds
surrounded his waist.
rko-wa, pf. brkos, imp. W
ЗЯ rkos-gig 1. to dig, dig out; to hoe
2. to engrave; turn up ; till.
^'§5rko-byed i: 1. = ®*Я a hog; also
that which digs; a mattock, shovel.
2. an arrow.
ii: v. byi-wa that burrow’s; a
rat (Mfion.).
Я**4 rko-ma a kind of small hoe for
digging earth; n. of a bird called ^J’54
ko-ma (Vai. §n.),
rko%-mkhan qt лХ*4’*4^ or
a digger ; one who hoes.
rkog-ma incorrectly for з(Я54
lkog-ma.
X^’4 rkofi-pa=**\^ za-rkon
ringworm; itch ((%).,
rkofi-po hbras chen n. of a
skin disease with large: eruptions; also
eruptions {Ya-sel. 28),
rkod-pa engraving; =^’4 rko-
ica, to dig or to engrave (fis.).	.
78

* rkon-pa net; a fowler’s net:
S' 4|R- tfi- Xv V 5V4gh|4'q4	ч^я'Э-> I
(flag.) to sot up a snare to catch birds is
called rkouya hdtug^a.
Syn. J bya-tgya; bya-rkou
(Шоп.).
brkam-chagti passionate;
also greedy.
qjN	rkun-ma brkit$
char-wa stolon :	brkus-tc bor-ica
to abandon or throw away a thing after
stealing it.
brko-$pyod a gouge; an instru-
ment to scoop out (Sch.); an instrument to
engrave;	brko-byahi sa ploughed
land; Ьгко^а ’ITH dug out;
brko$-phor a mould for making
clay images:	*
I in tho time of the Lhatho-
thori dynasty there fell on tho top of tho
palaeo a book called Span §kon phyag-rgya
and a mould for clay miniature images
and brought tho commencement of the
holy doctrine.
brko$-ma sculpture; anything
that has been engraved upon.
jqp ткуад^а, also g^ $kyag-pa,
dung; ordure; excrement:
rkyag-})a Ыоп-гса to cause purging, v. g^
skyag.
I: гЛуап <=г<, пзга Equus kyang^
or tho wild ass of Tibet and Higher Asia.
It is found everywhere in Tibet in large
droves, and is distinct from the wild ass
of Sindh and Persia. a male kyang;
a female kyang;	an adult
kyang; an old kyang (Cs.).
JI; or rkyan-pa, also
rkyan-tkyan.	яя,	each;
single ; simple; alone:	I alone
cannot: мгцч dressed only in cotton
cloth:	will Your
Honour go thus alone ?	drink-
ing water only, nakedbody;
only one; same as i.e., a free,
unemployed man, generally one that
carries no burden;	yi-ge rkyaA-
pa a letter that forms by itself a syllabic,
or one that is not briegs-pa (mounted) and
without any other consonant or any vowel
sign superscribed;	said to bo
1, 10, 100, and the further multiples of
10;	a word that has no affix
denoting case, &c., also a name without
any titles added to it.
Syn. re-re; *$*19 geig-bu;
8rab-pa\ geer-bu.
Rkyan chit n. of a lake in the south
of Ladak, in tho neighbourhood of which
there arc many wild asses.
rkyan-thag
a rOpe yiaf is lowered from the
top of a mountain or from the roof of a
lofty house (Yig.).
5^'4 1. rkyan-pa prose ; writing.
2.	rkyan-wa = ^’Ч ткуоп-гса чкгрсн
extended; spread.
rkyan-hphyes	an im-
mensely largo number.
rkyan-ma n. of an artery often
referred to in mystic meditation. It is
one of the three arteries denominated
Srog-rtsa rin-po, and is asserted to run
towards tho left side.
$**54 rkyan-phyag salutation by pros-
trating one’s self on the ground with the
hands and feet stretched out (A. 48).

79
rkyan 1. a brass vessel like a tea-
pot, with a spout; in W. “o-kyan” a milk-
pot. 2. pot-belly ; paunch (Seh.) ;
a vessel for water ; a vessel for wine
(Ji)-
SV5 rkyan-bu =	hgrim-shal
a'kind of vessel made of brass or silver
or gold of the shape of a wine glass.
три rkyal-ka—1^ vain talk; rkyal-
ka byed-pa to play a practical joke on ; to
make game of.
rkyal-pa	a sack or
leather bag, frq. is poetical term for the
body or tho five aggregates, i.e.y
j4’q “the body is a bag of
unclean thiugs” (Jd.).
rkyal-wa to swim; J14’
£5*4 rkyal-rsted-pa to amuse one’s self
by swimming (Ja.); colloq. u khyal-gyab
khan ” a swimmer.
5^’3 rkyal-biv small bag; pouch;
colloq. kyal-bu. a bag of goat skin ;
g*$4 ; a bag for flour $’J4 water bag or
Hindi inoshuk ; W$4 butter bag.
rkyal bycd-pa	the act
of swimming or bathing. In the mystic
language of the Brahmakayika deva $ч*
Й5 rkyal-bycd or J4*Q signifies
misery;	or	means
sins; J4’4‘4V^ denotes
the exhaustion of misery, the cessation
of misery or its <tfp]’4 fMJfa; $4’4'V4'£)5
signifies ^Ч'^'^гч, i^-, to meditate on the
exhaustion of misery signifies чя or the
way to Nirvana. These are the terms
believed to bo used in the language of the
celestial beings who dwell in the heaven
called ^4’VI* Ажшз (К. ко. 4 236).
rkycn I: In Buddhist science this
important term oxpresses any co-oper-
ating influence which serves to shape and
bring about an event as distinguished
from J ryyu, its direct and obvious cause.
In plain language, rgyii is the primary
cause of anything, but rgyu is frequently
controlled and modified by a co-ordinate
influence known as rkycn. As a medical
term, according to Jaschke, rkycn is
differentiated from rgyu in that it indi-
cates the pathological or secondary cause
of disease, while the latter word denotes its
primary or anthropological cause. How-
ever, while assigning to rkycn the primary
meaning of “cause” and “occasion” in
the qualified sense of being contributory
only to that which comes to pass, we have
to note the apparently contradictory
signification—effect, occurrence, incident,
event. So we meet with 5*^’4 rkyen-
tian-pa unfortunate accident;
he has perished by an evil incident;
Xthe adversities arising
in this life;	an event dis-
agreeable to one’s own self; blo-
bur rkycn a sudden accident ;
rkycn dc-la bricn-na§ owing to that
circumstance ; ^5‘чЗ‘^’Ч*Ч|Ч’5 med-pahi
rkyen-la blias-tc or brten-te consider-
ing the case of not being, not having ;
thus	stands also for a
cause of disease and of death ; 4^4'j^
bgol-rkycn any circumstance от event
adverse to the success of an action, any
obstacle, anything opposed or hostile to
the existence of another thing :
mthun-rkycn a happy, favourable circum-
stance ; furtherance ; assistance ; supply;
mthun-rkycn bycd-pa to assist
in; to help to ;	ndhun-rkycn
hdsom-pa altogether successful.
80

II: ясцц, чттч In Buddhist
metaphysics there are four kinds of
rkyen, viz., (1) rgyuhi ткеп
relation of causality ; (2)
ma-thag pahi гкуеп БНЯпК STOFU relation
of posteriority; (3) fydag-rkyen wft-
nfasrajq relation of subordination or
conditionality; (4)	dmigs-rkycn
relation of dependence (as for
instance the relation of parts to the whole
and vice versa) :
ЯВЯ^’^’!К^Я’Ч'^§Ь'
ЯВЯ*’
Я^’§5‘А. Besides the above four there are
two other subdivisions of гкуещ viz.,
<зит<т wi and
Я7ЧЧ (Рой. 16).
III: misfortune; ill-luck; calamity:
$^ЭЯ’4 rkyen glog-pa to avert a misfortune:
*?^ЯКс* rkycn thcg$-pa to endure misfor-
tune:	rkytn thub-pa to be equal to
tho occassion, cope with calamity.
rkyen-gyi^ postp. with gen. by
reason of ; on account of ; by ;
therefore; accordingly.
5^Я^Я’?Я*’ rktn-g.cig
5^ an epithet for a Pratyeka Buddha
(JWon.).
rkyen-chags hbyun-wa to
die or to be abolished (2). qel. 11).
rkyen-stogs	also the
contemplation of a Pratyeka Buddha
and ordinary saint; a class of Buddhist
devotees who meditate on T.kyen, the
co-operative cause.
rkyen-thub — c&\ q patience ; for-
bearance (Mnon.).
rkyen-pa ЧЧ barley.
41	$ rkyen-rtsi = Jft tkyen-
$man	a medicine that is
administered for determining the co-
operative cause of a disease.
rkyoft-wa, pf. fut.
or	to stretch, extend, stretch
forth (one’s hand to a person) ; put out
(the tongue); spread; distend (the wings,
a curtain) :	shab$~gni$
brkyoft bskum ono leg stretched out, the
other drawn in.
Syn. fyrkyafaca; 4JW brkyafa-
pa\ jjwq rkyafa-pa\ Jwi rkyofi$-pu*,
Ь§нат-1са (Мйоп.).
rkyoft-tse in }fr. lamp; candle
(Jd.).
brkyafi-tpft 1. literally “tho
extending-wood,” an instrument of torture
in Tibet; a wooden frame on which the
extended arms and legs of the delinquent
are fastened down, whilst burning pitch
or sealing wax is dropped on his naked
breast, which procedure is called
§yq or qjf^’orq^ q or placing or
stretching one on a cross (Jd.). 2. in New
Testament translation adopted to signify
“ cross.”
qjc.4 brkyafis Ттягя prostrated (by
fatigue) ; stretched out;
*rr«r for tho purpose of stretching.
Ikttg rm a wager: 4^5’5^ “to
gain a wager in dice-playing, &c.”
P*T4 lkugs-ра I. dimb; mute;
p'^qj^-qvgyq kha Ikugs-par byed-pa to put-
to silence; §Я^’4’* a dumb woman (Cs.).
2. sre dull, stupid (Sch.). The fol-
lowing examples may belong to either.
1. or 2.	Ikug&par $kyes bom
idiotic or.mute:
SHI
81
*11
। if one is born a deaf-
mute, one’s consciousness (soul) not being
suited to work, one cannot act religiously.
Syn. g smra-bcad;	fiag-gi$
dbul;	flag mi(dan\ ц sem§
bem-po; ^*354^ tshignams ;	tshig
mi-psal;	bem-po Itar Ikug; Q’
mi-tmra (Idnon^).
§|4| Ikog I:=4'3) pha-gi yonder. In
the passage
he said “from here look to yonder hill-
side”:	Ikog-giri^na=4'4^'^ the
corner of the bill there.
II: secrecy; Зр’гЗг^’я a wife kept
secretly in Tibet. Where polyandry pre-
vails any of the brothers who is not satis-
fied with the common spouse takes to
himself a wife called Kok-gi chung-ma—a
concubine ((?$.).
^4|’« Ikog-ma, vulg.	og-hjo(
1. gullet, oesophagus. 2. wind-pipe. 3.
the throat;	Ikog-mahi lha-gon
the larynx (&?A.); also written
Ikog-dk ar the ferret-badger
(Helictis monticola).
Ikog-gynr, v.	lkog-na-ma
(]$non.);	(kog-gya byat made
secret.
Ikog-ghi a secret hummed song:
a song
sung so that others may not hear it is
called Kog-lu (fiag.).
Ikog-chad secret punishment.
Ikog-chos byed-pa to apply
one’s self to religious studies secretly.
Ikog-rnan a reward given secretly;
a bribe.
Spl’S bkog-tu confidentially, secretly;
or ^’|’5‘?vq secret; hidden;
out of sight (Ja.);	$in-tu (kog-
gyur very secret; most confidential.
Ikog-tu brkus stolen ; removed
secretly; ЗрЧ’§Ж‘ч to converse secretly;
a secret doctrine; to worship
secretly ; ^pq’9’q4‘4 1° speak confidentially.
ЯрЧ‘*^5 lkog-mdud—Ъкы^ the larynx.
Ikog-hdun is described as mean-
ing У*secret conversation or
deliberating, so that others may not under-
stand it.
lkog-na-ma that which is not
evident.
Syn. Ikog-gyur; *£5j’*J*’Styq mfion-
sum min-pa (Mfion.).
lkog-nor = *\3\'Г*4 rktm-rdas, lit.
secret articles; stolen property (Iffo/o).
Sfa’S	or 53*1’%
dkrug-qifi, byed-pa misunderstanding ;
difference (between two parties).
n Ikog zan-za-ica to take usurious
interest in secret (Sch.); $4
watch; to witness from a lurking-place.
opq’wrq lkog-za§ za-гса to take food
secretly.
Lkog-la brafi hbyar-
gyi rgyal khamt the name of a kingdom
of the Asura (demons) where people have
no neck, their chins being joined to the
breast.
Ikog-^al W dew-lap (of oxen);
(код^а^сап — ^^	in
general (M.^on^.
$3'^1 Ikog-sog craw (of birds) (Cs.).
Ikob fat, heavy, plump (Sch.).
Ikol-mdud-^ larynx.
5J| ska ; this word is thus explained
“ ska
12
82
351
3^1
shows the complete knowledge of the
aggregation of all dharma or phenomena”
(K. d. 114). This explanation also
occurs in tho aphorism on the interroga-
tion of tho Naga-raja Samudra (K. d. Я
175), also in (Hbum. Я W):
“ $ka is the sym-
bol of the law of Buddha (Buddhism) as
it explains mystically that all things are
not dependant; they are sup-
portless, t>., have no real existence.”
§ka-cig for 45'^4 a moment.
§ka-cog or	ka-lcog the
names of two grammarians jointly written
for abbreviation, Ska standing for 4’4’
5<w and Oog for
Cog-ro klu-yi rgyal-mtshan.
$ka-ica thick (of fluids, cf.
§la-ua); $ka-$lad consistence; density
(Ja.}.
§ka-rag$ ^«г:ч,
nfw; ==$4^’3 also $|’*4«, in resp. lan-
guage; g’*4^ a girdle : 4’*4*V£^c>-q to put
on a girdle.	(Sch.) a girdle
with a clasp;
VTX ornamental chain worn by Tibetan
women on the waist.
Ц’ЗДргвде/ЕряSka-rag sbzan-po ma; <qXS’
n. of
a princess of the
Noijin demi-gods (Mfion.).
№ $kag=^ kag or *|4&# wifar 1.
n. of one of the 27 constellations, A$lc$d;
an evil star. 2. mischief; bad luck; evil;
the name of the goddess Bhogavati; a
fox 5’44 lo-^kag an unlucky or bad
year Д’4Я zla-$kag an evil or unlucky
month 4% 44 Jiag-skag a bad day ; ^«’44
dui^kag evil hour; inauspicious time.
Syn.	gdefa-can lha-то; ч
tea (Rtsi. and Mnon.).
44*^« $кад-тЫ$ astrology which treats
of the planets and of bad omens, &c.
44’<4*4l*’ $kag-la$ $kyc§
a comet; born under the constellation
of A$le§d.
Syn. «54’^5’*5 mjug-phod-can; 4$4S5’
gtsug-phud-can;	$brul-can ; 3f 4^’4
$kra-gfii$-pa (Mnon.).
4 §kan-wa=^Q, 4^‘Я^ 1. satisfac-
tion (677/.). 2. a kind of expiatory
sacrifice to make amends for a duty not
performed (Ja.).
$kafi-$a sods cut out (Sch.).
skadl: (keh) НВП, ТГЯТ 1. voice,
cry, sound. Though 45 and 3 are gene-
rally used as synonymous words, yet the
majority of tho grammarians of Tibet
apply the former to all manner of sounds
and the latter to the sounds uttered by
animate things only. 2. 45 is equivalent
of in some expressions such as
*4’4% which mean “ thus ho said,” “ speak-
ing those words,” &c., and in ^‘45, ^’4%
&o., maybe traced similar significations:
45*$’4¥‘**VI what is your pleasure ? what
did you say, sir? 1V4the
(words) spoken what speech are they?
what do they mean? (Ja.) *4*45’4 “in
these words” is used before a literally
quoted speech and 445after it. ^'45 also
often occurs after statements meaning “ it
is said” or “it is rumoured.” Other
phrases are : 4*45’«’§5 don’t do that or so;
45’9’^ to give an account, to relate. 3.
language : ^5’45 the Tibetan language;
$*4**45 the Indian language; 4^’45*^
83
45’^1
451
in the provincial dialect; speaking
human language;	hbrug-^kad
Idtr zer the voice of thunder rattles;
a voice like the cry of an
elephant;	to utter
painful or lamentable cries; ^’^*45
to send forth cries for pity; 45'§'5SC^
the root of a word.
II: ladder =^4 $ka§-ka (Jd.).
45’^<4<4 ^kad-hgag or Ч^’^’З skad hdser-
po hoarseness of the voice ((7s.).
45’5^ skad-rgyal, metaph. a donkey
(Sman. 2).
45’ч|^‘ч §kad-b§gur-pa=4Vq|^' W one
who has changed his language.
45'S'^ §kad-sgra che (ke’ da-che) the vul-
gar expression for “fame”:
he is just now very famous.
45'^ §kad-fiar rough language : 4S’tv
on account
of their speaking rough speech the name
of that place was called fia-ra than
(Fig. 65). •
45‘^ §kad-can having a voice; sound-
ing.
45’^ tkad-cig ^лг,	one
moment; au instant. 45’^1 ’^=
4S’^Tq is described as
g5’«, ‘one fifth part of the time required
for the sound of the snapping of the
fingers.”
fkad-cig boom, n. rtwq.
skad-cighdoj-ldan, v.
WRf a pigeon (Mnon.).
$kad-cig-pa or 45’^4’*
^PriT,	instanteneous; also ephe-
meral, momentary; also lightning.
4Sskad-cig-dbugz lit. that takes
breath only for a moment=5”, an otter
(Mnon.).
45'^1^5 $kad-cig hdod sudden
flash; flash of lightning.
§kad-cig glog-hod—^
lightning (Mnon.).
45‘* skad-cha qrqi,
news, report, discourse, conversation, topic;
Ч^ажч to converse; to have a chat.
skad-gnis-pa lit. that has two
kinds of voices, i.e.^ a parrot.
Syn.	lce-gni§-pa\
hkhyog-pohi mthii-can;	tshig-
hjam-ldan;	hjani-ljan hdab-
Idan (Mnon.).
4S’^^’9 ’5qCk q $kad-gni§ smra-uahi
dwan-po one learned in science; one who
has mastered (at least) two languages
(Fig. k. k8).
45'*Hq skad mnen-pa	of a
gentle voice; soft voiced.
4Vq?^	§ка<1-Ь$пап=ф\'* an echo
(returned by a rock) (Mnon.).
45’^’q|p’q §kad-snan b$gyur-ua to sing
or whistle in a quavering, warbling man-
ner, of birds, flute-players, &c. (Jd.):
45 a singing or playing of this kind.
45’^'q §kad snan-pa qftfw, one
with a sweet voice; spoken of the
cuckoo.
45’skad-snam-ma the princess of
the Noijin demi-gods; cf.
(Щоп.).
45'§vq %kad = to call
to a person (Schtr.).

84
45’W4* №4 wdhun-par with one
voice; with one accord.
45'^5 skad~dod=^S'^ an equivalent
term in another language; the original
from which another is translated : 45’X5*
whether there are any original
texts: 45Л5’^5 it is without the original
text {Situ. 110).
45‘9’ql5**’ skad-kyi gdafis the character
or tone of the voice:	45**15^’
I щсгслг^-qrII
{Mdshan.) when the tone of one’s voice
is that of a goose or dragon it betokens
the possession of wealth. Л voice like
that of an ass or ox indicates great
troubles.
$kad-gdafis dmah-wa
fwK low sinking voice ; poor voice.
45’*45 $kad-hdon БГга bawling out;
loud voice.
45'4 tkad-pa i: = ^'S'4N shes bya-wat
called ; named {A. 120).
45'q и: 1. vh. to say, tell, relate:
^5X‘45q* that a land (of bliss)
exists I heard people say. 2. interpreter;
language master ; teacher {Jd.)
45’4'^ skad-pa-che qt 45^^ $kad-po-che
celebrated; famed.
45’^*^ $kad-po che	rumour.
45’^ Skad-hbyin	singing of a
bird.
45'S w2|«| skad $byafi$-pg cultivate your
voice; improve the voice by exercise.
45*ft'«|<w skad ini-gsal one whose
language is not intelligible; a barbarian.
45’^ skad-rifi.	a voice heard
at a distance; a high pitched voice.
W
$kad-rigs hen-po bshi the
four great divisions of language—(1)
§5*45 Sanskrit, the language of the gods;
(2) 5-4}*^	*5'45 Pifdtsl, the language of
the meat-eating people; (3)
rafi-fyshin she^-pa pra-kr-ta the Prdkrta or
the natural language of the people; (4)
wcryrjjЛ*’*Ч'И Лра bhram-fa corrupt
language {T. K.).
45'skad Jugs = 45’5ч]м	§kud-rig$
dialect.
45’^ $kadJog clamour; screaming.
a celestial courtezan {Alfion.).
skan-tc, JK., instead of 4q ka-wa.
hgor-po delay: *3^*1’
q*rw’^Y44*4*r*‘^V$c/I {Rdsa. 28) the
swift not hurrying, the lingerers not
finishing.
$kab$ ТПС 1. time, oppor-
tunity, occasion, circumstance:
4*w opportunity of seeing: 4q*,:15’q skab$
rned-pa to find an opportunity: 4q^
or4q**’4q^ now and then; sometimes.
4^’$ or 4*w with genit.=at the time of,
on the occasion of, during, while, when:
^’’T4q*r$ in a moment; instantly: 4^’^
$kabs der	thereafter: 4W*4*
now ; here ; in this case; in this place:
4WX once for a time; each time; W4«w
interval; inter-lapse of time. 2. sphere^
state, situation:	fit for;
adapted; suited to the occasion. 3. 4^^
also means lehu, chapter, and is
synonymous with *4*	&c.,
signifying section : 4ад ч3 tkafy bcu, the
ten sections of the doctrine ; also he that
has observed them {Jd.).	4. mode,
85	^-Ц|
method, way, manner, so the word seems
to be used in Vai$no :
| Idum-btihi skabs la-phug daft
&kye$ lugs hdra-tcar the manner (nature)
of the plants being similar to that of
a raddish as to growth (Ja.).
4W4fy*rq %kabs gnis-pa	the
second chapter.
4q**^ skabs-don	for the sake
of leisure; also circumstance.
§kabs hdi-la	at
this opportunity; at this time ; on this
subject.
Чч**3 ^ skabs phye-na wwnf fWPt to
make opportunity.
4q*r^\q skabs hbyed-pa чкяч; leisure.
$рс«гад*гч skabs-la babs-pa when
the time came; opportunity arrived.
skabs-gsum blttn-ua — ^'
the drink of the gods ; ambrosia ;
| pray send kind letters
like the flow of the drink of the gods over
the heads of the good {Yig. k. 78).
skab$-gsum-gnas~
the residence of the gods; the heaven.
a skabs gsum-pa i:
a god; a common name for gods possessed
of the knowledge of their past and future
births and also of those of others.
qwqjgwq и : a name of the celestial
musician; ^'ЗГ*!4^ lhahi glu-mkhan (Mnon.).
skabs-gsum-dwafi a name of
Indra;	Brgya-byin or
{Шоп.).
skabs-gsum mtshon-cha
thunderbolt of Indra.
Skam I: 4*q n. of a tribe in Tibet
(Vai. kar. 160).
II: a pair of tongs; pincers; an
instrument for seizing anything.
Syn. ^'§5 hdsin-byed*, bzufi-
byed {Won.).
skam-pa dry; 4*’^ skam
rlon lit. dry and wet; all articles (furni-
ture, chattels, clothes, utensils, &c.) and
food, drink, etc., being included in the term.
4* is often used as equivalent to 4* S the
dry land, hence a plain or *мрг«г§ч*гс|
skam-la slebs-pa\tQ get ashore ; Ч* *4* jour-
ney by land, 4**^ dry food, 4*'**1 dry
meat, 4*’4* skam-skom the dry or stuffed
carcass of an animal;
4W^‘5‘4*’^* 1 the dried carcasses of
beasts and game and of all (others)
{D. R.).
skam-glog a flash of summer
lightning :	’apfc-jw
i “ on a great flash Of light-
ning coming forth, all his attendants
became very much frightened ” {A.
17).
4**л* skam-chas all goods except live-
stock.
4^*44	огЗЯ’Г* com or
barley flour to make gruel.
Ч^'ЗЯ skam-thug gruel made of barley-
flour, dry meat and raddish.
4«'^ skam-dras neat and clean
{Jig. 30).
4*rq*q skam-pag dry, flour of barley.
4*’ч skam-po	dry dried.
4*’4*]*< skam-phogs allowances or wages
of an officer or inferior servaut in
barley-flour, tea or coin, etc., but not
86
cooked food;	according
to Government order ; dry allowance
(/. Zan.).
skam-la$ $kye~u:a pro-
duced or born on land.
dry or meaningless
words; hollow expressions meaning
nothing:	“one
versod in talking nonsense, as if only
for his mouth’s sake” (or “as if on
account of his mouth’") (£«?.).
$kam$-pa=.w^ bleak and barren
place (Д0?ол.).
skar-wa I: pf. 4^ , imp. 4\ to
hang up ; to weigh; 4\ ч^Г
weight; 4V^S measure; scale; 4^'q $kar-wa
for 4V% 4^and points on a steel-
yard for weight or measure : 4VS five
points on tho steel-yard weighing two
annas of silver: 4^*4^ (one $£#>*) is equal
to ten hon, which is a little less than
an Indian anna.
tkar-ma wtfa:,	НШ,
a star ; a fixed star; constellation :
^ §5, ^’§5, ^5’4a™'H435 ( Vai. kar.)
the stars that arc liberated and that soar
on high and roam are twenty-eight in
number:	$kar-ma-can with stars or
figures of stars on anything, a shawl, &c.
Ч^'Й^’ $kar-khun ЧТНЮТ, 7RTW, «TRI
a holo or small opening for the admission
of light in a house; a window; same as
аЧ«Ч v.	Ч^й*'5)'?^ a plank or
board for a window; shutters ; Ч^’Й^Л*
’зн^ЗГсПЧН lattice window; a grated
window.
4Vpfc.^ skar-khofl$ the sphere of a
lunar mansion; a constellation together
with the minor stars which are included
yrithin its sphere.
4^1
Ч^5^ tkar-nikhan an astrologer.
Ч^’ЭТ §kar-lcag a rigorous enquiry ; a
flogging (Ja.).
Ч^’Ф skar-chu 1: literally star-water;
bathing when the star Agastya (Ri-byi)
appears in October, when, according to
Tibetan astrologers, water becomes pure
and wholesome.
4^’4 n: generally applied to dew
which is said to come from the stars :
§kar-tagtafi che (Jd.) to enquire rigorously;
to restrict; to bind down ; to flog.
Ч^'я5ч skar-mdab a shooting star; jfv34
$gron-ma a lamp; 5^’^ WT a meteor :
Ч^^’ч or татш the falling or
shooting of a meteor.
tkar-mdahi gdofl-fiam
§na or ’swprrfl one having either
his face or nose glowing as a meteor; a
demon ; a meteor-mouthed arrow ; n. of a
fire-arm anciently used in India. One of
the ancestors of Gautama Buddha, directly
descended from Mahasammata, the first
elected king of tho world.
4^ 'STS $kar-4pya4=z 4^'£^ skar-ttsi$
astrology; 4vST\’q=an astrologer
(HJnon.).
4^‘S^ skar-phran or 4^’^ a little
star.
4^51 Skar-hprefi 1. n. of a fabulous
city situated at the foot of Rirab (Sumeru)
mountain said to be the residence of the
Asura King, Kaptha-Mali. 2. the squares
in a chart of the constellations in
which tho figures representing the stars
are written. 3. the angular distance
between two stars or planets (Ci.).
II : (C$.) 1. a penning of
cattle; assortment ; separation; to pen;
to fold; to separate, v.
87
§kar-ma stod-phur З^ПХТ
supposed to be Leonis. This star is
believed to be the most steady among the
stars and is therefore called the sure-star
or fixed-star ; also called the crown-star.
Syn. brtan-pa;	rkan
bu; ^*^'^'5 §nan-ldan gin-rta;
| «4 §lugs~bzan skye§;	gzah-yi rten;
^Ц^Щгдуи~$каг tog; *ff’5«rg gan-rgyal-
bu ;	gser-hphur (Mnon.).
^’5Г£Ч]skar-ma rtsag-rtsig, also
a twinkling star; painting on a
canopy or on a ceiling in starry design;
^*4^ those constellations through which
the moon passes in her revolution round
the heaven ;	the constellation under
which one is born;	a propitious
constellation ; the constellation under
which one prospers or which brings
fortune and good luck to one.
§kar~ma htshe	the
injury caused by a malignant star.
skar-mahi dpyod	an
examination or observation of the stars.
§kar-mig-bu “ son of Star-eye
or Skar-тгд” the eagle. A certain hermit
called Skar-mig found three eggs. These
he gave to a woman in distress, saying
that if she broke them after seven days
they would bring her happiness. Out of
impatient curiosity she broke two on the
third and the sixth day. These turned
into lightning and the dawn. The third
she broke on the seventh day, when there
sprung forth a full-fledged eagle which
turning round asked what she wanted of
him. In reply she wished him to kill the
Lu demons; and this he accordingly did.
Thenceforth the eagle came to be known
as the son of Skar-mig (Mfion.).
skar-hdsin star-catching; making
sure of a propitious constellation, e.g.,
for an intended journey (Jd.).
’*5 skar-hod sftfrnw the light emit-
ted by a star; name of a kind of flower.
$kar~yum works or treatises on
the stars ;	sacred works on
stars and planets.
skal-pa	luck, chance,
fortune—particularly when propitious.
§kal-nan	wretched; un-
lucky ; unfortunate.
$kal-can-ma, also called
§kaLldan-ma 1.	n. of a goddess ;
a blessed lady. 2. =3’4’W4 §pu-la hbab-
pa n. of a disease in which the hairs are
affected.
§kal-ldan UVFTH happy;
blessed; also n. of one of the 28 ancient
sages mentioned in Buddhist works.
Skal-ldan qin-rta	n.
of a king of the solar race who is said to
have brought the river Ganges to Jambu-
dvipa (India) from heaven ; one of the
ancestors of the Buddha S'akya-muni :
“favour me with letters uninterruptedly
like the course of the river Bhagirathi
(Ganges)” (Yig- k- 17).
$kal-ldan qifi-rtahi bu-mo
v. Gaft-ga, the daughter of
Bhagiratha, the river Ganges (Mfion.).
skal-pa-can ИтОгч the for-
tunate :	are
very fortunate.
$kal-pa-chez=.^f^n^4
very fortunate, lucky; also powerful and
rich.
88

$kal-pay mnam-pa uniformly
fortunate or always lucky;
fortunate : $	'QV|m mi daft skal-
pa mnam-par §kye$ НЩЧМ ннптнгттадФПГ
born with fortune equal to that of a human
being.
$р|чгч№ skal-pa fyzang-po good
fortune; яргсгМ’4 bad luck, unfortunate;
the matrimonial share of
tho present life; the connubial fate for
which a person is predestined ;
religious good luck; also the merit of the
pious; very lucky; Ч*4 unfortu-
nate.
q skal-pa yod-pa fortunate ; Ч4’
cr^ q extra luck.
w skaljiphar enlarged fortune;
lucky or of increased luck.
lkal~wa=z* cha НТЛ 1. portion;
share;	the apportioned
share of hereditary wealth ; inheritance;
share or portion of food ; ration;
personal share:	without
being deprived of any of his portion. 2.
the portion of good or bad fortune that
falls to a man’s lot as a consequence of
his former actions ; lot, fate, destiny.
skal-wa chad-pa suppressed
fortune; unhappy.
Sfrw skal-bzafi xjhit I. prosperous; of
good fortune. 2. a plant— Chrysanthemum
coronarium.
$kal-rin the valuation of one’s
share of property; the price of one’s share
in any concern (Jig.).
ska§ or ^*4’^ skas-ka, also called 4м’
<Гч|:	ftr, a stair; a flight of steps;
^4 order of steps; ^*r*3J* the two
side-pieces of a staircase or ladder (Cs.)
to place a ladder ; ицг'гздвгч ш-
to come down a ladder;
to climb up a ladder.
$kas-$kor khra-ma the lattice,
rail or fencing by the sides of stairs.
skas-gdafi-Ьщ abbr. of
a flight of long steps in a ladder:
5^’4‘ I to
bring him (here) a seven-step ladder was
necessary (Л. 91).
$ka$-tshafi signifies a flight of
steps (Jig-).
$kas-lcb the steps of a ladder or
stair; the planks of a ladder.
sku ^ТЦ, ГТД, resp. for
body. 1. iku may be prefixed to the
names of parts of the body and even of
anything belonging to a person, thus
imparting to them the character of res-
pectful terms. As honorific particle it can
also be prefixed to nouns in general:
the person or body of a great man ; g
goods, stores or property of a inau of
rank ; also the religious robe of a lama.
Jl’gM $ku-skye$ a present (given to or re-
ceived from a respected personage);
virtue, happiness; g'wq image, statue;
the wrapper used by a lama or a
great man; the cloak used by the
lamas when attending a religious service;
the inner lower garment of a man
of rank. Even buildings (monasteries,
&c.) are honoured .by this respectful
expression:	to white-wash
a house, &c.;	rko$-$ku au engraved
image; tapestry; a figure worked
upon satin with silk; an image of
clay ; a woven image; a stone
image; a molten image; a
painted image;	a Basso Relievo

89

image;	blugs-sku a cast image;
4^’g &ser-§ku a. golden image. 2. g or
g*$ §ku-yi may be also used honorifically as
a poss. meaning “his,” “her,” “yours,”
&c. 3. It is further employed to express
the reflective verb Idtyed-gan la skit
hdeg “why are you beating yourself ?”
g‘g«i §ku-skal portion or share of a
respected person.
g*^ $kit-skem the lean slender body of
a respectable person.
^^thu-khamt a great man's person;
also the state of health.
g’^'^fq^ $ku-gam fio-bcar a personal
interview; to approach or come before a
great man personally.
g'qn|3]*r<M]N sku-bgegs chags disease
caused by evil spirits.
О S'4’2* $ku-lna rgyal-po the five divine
Buddhas symbolical of the five highest
moral virtues inculcated in Buddhism.
g'^ $ku-rgyu the matter or substance
whereof an image is made.
g'^S §ku-rgyud a scion, descendant, of
a noble family.
g*W $ku-bcar personal attendant of a
greatman; gen. the attendant monks of
the Dalai Lama (8. kar. 181); also same as
g’«^'4 as in g’W^p^’q $ku-bcar mkhan-
po, the domestic priest of the Dalai Lama
who is also called g’5^V*|4№L
g’qsvSS $ku-bcar-mo the raiment worn
next to the skin (Yig.).
g*w tku-ckas
the chattels and other possessions of
any high class person.
g’^	robes; dress worn
by great men or by lamas.
g’^5 $ku-mched brothers and sisters:
gar
я| “those who are born the
sons of kings are ‘kum-che,’ and the
pupils of one lama are ‘kum-che’ (Lofi. *
£). g‘^5 the three spiritual sons of
Bromston— (1)	(2) ^’g’q’^4’
gwrqq^ (3) ^q-q’qfty^;
{Lon. ? £) ; these
three were called the spiritual sons of
Bromston.
g’*fys sku^rnned^=. Ito-ras or
handkerchief (Yig. k. 55).
g'4!^ sku-gner	keeper of
images in a temple or monastery.
Syn.	lha-gner; ^v^-q lhahi
hteho-гса (Mfiou.).
g’4^ §ku-brnan i: a reflected image, v.
g,Q5 or	likeness (Mnon.).
g'^ ii: = g*^ the health or flesh of a
respectable person (Milon.).
g’^ $ku-rten an image of Buddha
or of a saint. It is a contraction of the
three words: $ku, gsufis, thug-rten the holy
image, i.e., of a Buddha or saint; the
sacred books or volumes containing reli-
gious precepts; and the chatty a (mchorten),
the symbol of the resting of the thugs or
heart.
g’4gw	birth (of
a great man).
sku-thog=g’^‘ lifetime; age;
generation; g,?^'g’^=g,?I’r^’* or g’H’
g'V* former generation; also ancestor
or predecessor; g'Wt^^g suc-
ceeding generation; g’’tf<4’*rZ’ many gene-
rations :
^’^•^q^’^’q S)^j the three incarnate beings
of Tibet (i.e., the Dalai Lama, Panchen
Lama an& Tirana th Lama) having come
in many re-births are greatly blessed.
13
nc’ql
90

gV‘q sku drufi-pa a page; an attendant
of a great man; a private secretary to a
high official.
g’^c. $ku-gdufi relics, remains; also
lineage, descendants.
g’*^ sku-hdra (kunfa) чртят, srfafa*?,
4<fvr imago; statue of Buddha or any
sainted persons.
Syn. ft^sku-brnan; g’^B^ sku-gztigs;
gzug$^brnan	$lar-gzug$;
inchod-bya;	ne-war hjal;
fadra-war ^shefis;	hdra-
bbag\ de4ta\ de-hdra; de-
mtshufis ; 5$ dpe; mnam;	iptshufa;
dehi gshi-hdsin\	rab-ta
hdra \	pra-phab bshin\
legt-par	lder-bzo\
SjVSp’w slar-grib-ma\	$lar-bya$
fpt/шн;	tffios-po wdshufa}
hdra-wa\ g'3 lta-bu\ ner-tsha^\
fieS’$naft (Mfion.).
%%MQ$ku [dem-pa to ho unwell, ill;
ill-health.
Syn.	nad-kyi$ blab; ^№4q
nad phog-pa\ ^’4 na-wa ;	na-tsha
hbyuft-wa; [W^’Q kham$ ma-bde-wa;
s hdu-гса hkhrugs-pa\	ne-
war gduft-wa ;	nam§ ma-bde-wa;
дЧЖтчйго htshal-wa\ ^'^^nun-pa (Шоп,).
g’^ skit-па a respectable person’s ago.
8’5^ $ku-bub a monkey of the langur
class found near Bathang.
g**S« Sku-hbum “a hundred thousand
images,” commonly pronounced Kum-
bum. The name of the birth place of
Tsongkhapa in Amdo, situated to the east
of lake Kokonor ; also the name of huge
monastery built on the spot. Village and
monastery both derive their names from
a poplar tree, the leaves of which are said
to boar miraculous impressions of a hun-
dred thousand images of Buddha on them.
Hue and W. W. Rockhill have given
elaborate accounts of Kumbum monastery:
’ Щ4-3)- g’^' $4 3| • J- Й
(Loft. 17) ho (King Mi-gicaft Phola Thaiji)
erected the gilt dome of the monastery
of Chambaling above Kum-bum in Amdo.
g’JIS $i'u-§mad tho part of tho body
below tho navel; g’^VJIS the upper and
lower parts of tho body.
g’^ sku-tsha a brother’s son; a nephew;
called tsha-ico in colloquial language.
Q^lku-tshab a representative; deputy.
g’*’?S $ku	during
tho time of his predecessors.
g’a^ sku-mtshal, rosp. for	the
blood (of a great man’s) body.
sku-shabt lit. “your honour’s
feet,” is tho correct form of the colloq.
expression g'-^S meaning your
honour, your lordship, your worship. It
is generally pronounced as ku-sho.
g’W	gzem shawl wrap-
per worn by lamas (Yig. k. 55).
g’^*^ sku-gzug$ bde= ^5’4 health;
also healthy.
Syn. khamf bde;	ner-
htshe med;	hbyufi-bshi $nom$;
bro mi-htshal (l$fton.).
$ku-yi bab$ daft bstun
according as his health permits; according
to the state of one’s health.
g'S)-r^<q iku-yi zo-mdog, reap, of 4^'3’
pwN lu$-kyi-khain$ health:
। just now your
health is good like the condition of the
gold in the Dsam-bu river.
91
tku-rags ike-rag^ also 4’
Mj*i $ka-rags, a sash (Yig. k. 55.).
g*^' $ku-riA the period of a life—one’s
own or another’s.
g*^ sku-rim, resp. for rim-hgro,
reverence, respect, and thence the common
word for any set service in a temple and in
general for a ceremonial act of worship,
and particularly in the special sense of a
solemn sacrificial ceremony.
indicates the allowance
granted by the Government of Lhasa for
Kurim in tho different monasteries of
Tibet.
$ku-ru a water-wheel without a
rim; such are the water-wheels of all
the mills in the Himalaya (Jd.).
I’SF tku-ru-kha asterisks; marks
generally of the figure of a cross, +
also x. The latter is common in books
as an abbreviation like “ditto,” to save
the repeated writing at full length of the
same sentence or word or expression.
Some authors spell this word as 3’^f4-
jku-lus srrR, resp. for the
body.
sku-qa ЬЬуог-ро=^ж%ч^
corpulent; also corpulence; the ori-
ginal name of Bbrom Rgyal-icahi hbyun
gnas (Шит.).
sku-gyegs-pa dying; death.
Sku-ggen-ggen Rab the great
teacher of the Bon:
“ Uotf-zcr dpal was my
father, I Sku ggen of Yag gs/ier am called
Jlbrom” (JJbrom. Г 22).
$ku-sras brgyad, the eight
spiritual sons of Bon-po S'en-rab are the
following(1) Mu-chos; (2)
ч Sol-dr tiff tliaA-po; (3)	Gto-bu
bum-safa-, (4)	Dptjad-bu khri-fin;
(5) Lufi-hdren; (6) Bryyud
kdren; (7)	Koft-tsha dkar-po ;
(8)	Koft-Ma hphitl-bu chttH.
$ku gsun-thugs, resp. for
body, speech, thought, which
constitute the three spheres of a man’s
doings or sufferings; works in words and
thoughts.
g’^spj §ku-gsum Тчзгга the three
personal exsistences of a Buddha, viz.,
^*l*g V’ifara spiritual existence ;
qVg цчТНГФЩ celestial existence,
and g^’q^’g	bodily existence;
also miraculously emanated existence.
g,flq^ sku-gseft rest and gentle exercise
(of a great man) when convalescent: qw
when gout was indica-
ted in the form of swelling of the body and
slight improvement approached, it being
the time of convalescence, he went out
(Ya-sel. 11).
g-«ujc^ $ku-bsrufi$ or g'qsjwq §ku-
bsTufis-pa ^T=RT,	attendant;
waiter; body-guard.
skugs — Sfi wager; the stake in a
game received by the winner. g^N**!’
signifies	that is,
anything placed in pawn:
I (D. Л.) if the wager is lost he
will be plunged into an ocean of grief.
$kiifi-ica=to conceal in
a secret place (Nag.), pf. чд*^ Ь$кийз, fut.
чдь* b$kun. 1. to hide in the ground ; to
bury; to inter:
I have found hidden treasures and
concealed wealth (nor.). 2.
(А. N 53-55) to fasten down; to tie, to

92

tie on all sides (a corpse in a doubled up
or twisted position before it is burnt).
skufasa lurking place; biding
place.
$kud or g\q	чптпм
1 thread, yarn, wire:	to cut
the thread, i.e., the tie of marriage; to
divorce.	the thread to sew
a dress with ; Wg5 cotton thread, yarn;
wgs woollen thread ;	gold wire;
S^'gS silver wire ; gS'^ yellow thread ;
5^’gS silk thread; ^’gS coloured thread;
the frayed ends of a scam ; g\9*r
an embroiderer; one that makes up a
picture with threads of different colours;
gS’=z	needle-work on
cloth; g\qspinning thread. 2.
vb« pf. fut. qg, imp. g^, to smear; to
besmear; to daub : ^e4'g5'q=	to be
smeared with oil: sf’^’J"gVq to paint a
door: lK3’g\q to anoint; to apply an
ointment; gV^w or
threads twisted together.
gS’q5ag $kud-pahi	dar-
gyi srin-bu silk-worm (Mnon.).
tkiid-po=J chun-niahi
spun zla 1. wife’s brother; brother-
in-law. 2. father-in-law (Jd.). 3.
in Sikkim a husband’s younger brother
is also called skud-po.
Fi $kun-bu is described as
smyug-ma-la btag^pahi $nod a
wicker-work basket; but a basket or vessel
made of bamboo is called ^'3 or
(^ag.).
tkub W4H very low (Zez.).
skum-pa, pf. ng»^,fut. imp.
g34^, to contract; also to be drawn up; to be
paralysed: «^’«urgwq to draw in the
limbs.
^5 skur-pa	slander; false
witness; blasphemy; abuse: gva^qq'q same
as g^'qq^q ^ to throw abuse, cast aspersion
and to bear false witness; to speak im-
piously of holy things :
qv^V^'q,^q”,q to blaspheme by view-
ing as untrue the three most precious
Ones.
I: $kur-wa or g^'8*rq to slander,
mock, ridicule.
II := q a bestowing,
giving, sending; also vb. a. to bestow,
give, send; v^-qgvq to furnish
with power; to empower or instal;
g^'=J to send intelligence; if g^ probably
decorating one with the peacock’s feather
(as in China).
g^ q'a^w'q skur-ма hdebs-pa to hold as
not existing what exists; to belittle.
g^M skul-mkhan in JF. overseer
(Jd.).
g*r^ skul-rgyu to render service; to
exact service:
the son-in-law (elect), though he is not a
slave by birth, must render service for three
years (to the parents of tho bride).
4рГЦ skul-гса, pf. 4g% qg^‘q^’S, to
excite; to exhort, admonish, enjoin: ft*
to exhort a man to do a
thing; to appoint: ft^'W^q-qgq-^ im-
posed some work on a person:
4gq*^ being induced by his words:
the (departed)
soul urged on by its former deeds and
sins:	though I tried to
bring round the gods and evil spirits
by sacrifices:	arousing
strongly (the actors) with flutes and other
instruments, sgq'q and more frequently
qg^74 exhortation; admonition. qg«r«r
93
Ri
also	and	to
expostulate with, rebuke; incite.
$kul-byed, v.
skul-tshig a word in the horta-
tive or imperative mood.
$ke ^4, resp. neck; throat: «Ifr
q ai^4| with one throat; unanimously :
4]XvP=^’<J|54-q aud	to cut one’s
throat; to behead:to seize by the
throat; to worry (Sch.):	to tie
round the neck (an amulet); neck-
lace (Schr.); ornament for the neck; a
necklace:	the coral neck-
lace of a woman of Kham*.
ike-$toft cavity of the throat (7й.),
defined in Med, as
^5'^ the cavity as far down as below the
larynx.
ske-tse or *5^ vf^HiT, Sinapis
ramosa, black mustard; mustard seeds
(Jd ):	it removes
evil spirits and cures swellings and
carbuncles (Med,).
Ske-tshafi n.of an old monastery
situated in the mountains behind the
monastery of Sera (Deb, 13),
a sash; an ornament like a sash worn
round the waist.
skeg n. of a constellation:
$keg-la $kye$	born in the
constellation of Aflesa, [The man born
in the constellation of A^lesS is unfortu-
nate, inasmuch as his birth is followed by
the death of himself, his mother or father.]
$keg-isho$ paint, rouge (for the
face) (Sch,).
Skefi-lufi$ n. of a place in
Tibet (Deb. «I H)<
$kyed-dkar same as
white sash.
$ked-hjig§ =	da-dr и
hjom$ n. of a medicinal drug (Mnon,).
sked-pa=^\^ the waist:
$ku skyed or $ked-$kabs
the hind parts below the waist;
waist-band. sked-so the waists :
^M^S^A34^^ the length of
hair reaching down even to the waist
(Dbroni. ? 35).
^V34 $ked-ma, v. pomegranate
(MAon,),
Ч34’^ $kem-nad consumption.
Ця-Ч ькет-ра=^'ц	adj.
vb. pf. lifter, fut. or
ЧЧ’^'З, imp. Ч3^ ikoms, pres. 4W
1. to make dry, lean meagre; to dry up.
2. also as adj. 4^’q skam-po dry; dried
up; meagre.
^кет-ра^^'ф^'Ф^ lean, thin
body (Mnon.).
Skem-byed n. of a demon that
causes drought;	n. of a
trouble (in the body of a person) caused
by an evil spirit.
Ч34 S'VST'’24 $kem-byed dkar-po the resin
of the 8dl tree, which is burnt as an
incense; same as	white incense
gum (Sman. bJ7.)
"s^SS*34 Skem-byed-ma n. of a goddess.
Skem-byed рт-2«==^'^ГчГе’
an epithet of Kumara,
the younger son of Mahadeva (Mfion.).
$kem$-pa	v. M
very thin, lean.
skems-pahi $breb$-pa з?Гфж
tho hunger of emaciating disease.
VolCT^ |	94
^1
sker is sometimes written as ker.
sker lebggur pony, sheep,
and yak ; collectively cattle.
sko-$ko the chin.
$|’Л $ко-гса, pf. fut. «^Tor A^f'A^'s,
to select; also to appoint, nominate, com-
mission, charge; WSj’Sf’A to appoint a
person to work:	avs* |
(K. du. *4 362) should appoint a ge-long
(Buddhist monk) to arrange for lodg-
ing; jwvqjw raised to the throne;
without mandate; unbidden;
destined; appointed to the work,
t.e., destined (to be a man) in consequence
of his works; ^5’appointed by
my destiny; fate (Ja.).
sko-tse a mixture of the leaves
of various kinds of leeks pounded aud
formed into balls and dried ; when used,
a small portion is broken off, fried in
butter, and then added to the food. This
spice forms a lucrative article of commerce
and is exported from Ladak to Kashmir
and from Lhasa to India (Jd.).
or ^4’4 a hard cover-
ing ; rind; bark ; a shell:	$kog$can
adj., having a cover or shell (Cs.).
skofi, v. kon.
$kofi-ica ’jrtr, pf. a^ bfkafa,
fut. imp. Sfc*, to fulfil; also sbst.
^’A’ijjk’, to fulfil a hope: F'Sfc’A to fill up
what is open; to make up a deficiency: 5*T
qS’p* j[k dge-wahi kha-skoft to fulfil perfectly
the laws of virtue, or P’A^ also
signify an appendix; supplement:
will be described in the
appendix below:	to do a
certain ceremony fully according to your
vow;	the ceremony to satisfy
one’s guardian deity by supplementing
what was wanting and making amends
for the same:	is an offering or
forma for a deficiency: A^^X” offering
of some representation of eelestial man-
sions, made of coloured threads, to one’s
guardian deities; a^a*^ offering to the
gods and guardian deities.
may your
hope he fulfilled.
ЯУ* =	1. sbst. v.
2. vb. pf. and fut. A$fa to dress; to clothe
another person.
4A«’O5*3ka5'X^ (&ag.) signifies tho com-
ing occasion of doing some difficult work.
I: shorn fuATUT, thirst; resp.
shal-tkom, A^c/A ^’jj’^A’q tormented
by thirst;	food and drink:
take milk (lit. “white”)
and tea for thirst:	$kom~du
chafi-gsot take wine for thirst (Kathafi.
115).
П: the dry land (Jd.).
$kom-tkyur sour beer; sour
fermented liquor.
^'55 ^кот-dador thirst; Л’ЯфГ
one who is very thirsty:
APT цпггйад: (give) drink to the
thirsty ; a§«ca*r^5=$’^5 wishing for
drink ; F’Sfcw mouth drying; thirsty:
i the thirsty will be
freed from their thirst.
$kom-na$ thirsty; imp.
become thirsty;
fwfuH thirsty.
skom-pathe flesh of a calf that
died or was killed as soon as it was born,

95

even before it could suck milk from its
mother’s teat (Sman.).
$kom$-pa thirsty.
Syn.	btun-wa hdod;
chuhdo4\ kha-$kom( Mnon.).
skor 1. class, order; appertain-
ing to; subject; circle; body—a term often
used to signify a retinue, a set of atten-
dants, persons of one class ;	class
of official staff ; also court (Yig. k. 37);
class of husband; that which
concerns a husband ;	class of
women, about women ; ^5'^X*q of that
order; with respect to that; also of that
subject ;	on the subject of
litigation ;	the paraphernalia of
worship; circuit, tour :
I “the Resident
Amban of Tibet (started) from Lhasa on
a military tour, &o.” 2. anything round,
a circle; eye-ball. In JF. SV
hoop of bamboo (Schtr.) ;	the
(circumference) of a man’s head ;
the top of a house. 3. section, division,
e.g., of a book, similar to chapter. 4.
repetition ;	to repeat (Schtr.). 5.
religious circumambulation, v. Sfc*4-
Syn. $de-tshan, rigs, gras,
4^ don (Mfion.).
$kor-mkhan one who goes round;
sft'Q one who turns a lathe; one who cir-
cumambulates or walks round a sacred
object.
^'^skor-bgo,	(Yai.
kar.) classes in 'astrology. There are eight
heads or sections according to Indian
astrology; according to Tibetan astrology
there are fifteen heads of astrology,
such as about kings, ministers, priests,
sages, mystics, queens, &c. ; also about
birth, growth, maidens, old persons, ill-
ness, husbandry, houses, service, &c.;
| about profit in trade;
aygvq	| profit from the com-
pounding of medicines and drugs ;
| interest accruing
from the laying out of silver (money).
$kor-rgyug$ turning the enemy;
getting into his rear (Jd.).
3(Х,ад| skor-thag the cord of a lathe.
3{X’^ skor-thaft price or rate; also
interest on anything in kind; in grain
given as loan.
^X'^4! skor-thig a pair of compasses;
МХ*^4! a sling.
SjX’^ skor-pa or or a turner;
also one who goes on his rounds.
^X’^ skor-wa, vb., pf., &c., fut. ч?Х,
1. to fill with ; to surround, encircle,
enclose, besiege; to come again and again;
to revolve:	। (^. jf.)
the town that was encircled (filled) with
houses : 3|Х’ч^	the
three men of those who were surrounding
them:	I the Chief of the
Ya-rt$e mountains is surrounded by
rugged rocks:	the
Ti-rtse (Tise) mountain is surrounded by
glaciers:	5*^’jq'q’W^’^^X the Kyura
Rgyalpo mountain is surrounded by water
(Z>. U). 2. to traverse; ride round a thing.
Also metaphorically in the religious sense:
to preach, to propound the
doctrine of Buddhism : ^”’9
to make mystic offerings (i.e., the symbo-
lical offerings representing one’s accumu-
lated merits) to the Tantrik deities, and
to observe the ceremonies thereof. 3. 3{X’q
or	the reverential cere-
mony of circumambulation which consists
in walking round a holy object with

96
Sil
one’s right side towards it. This is also
called c/io$-skor	Buddhist
circumambulation. The Buddhist priests
of Tibet perform this in contradistinction
to or the ceremony of the Lon, who
reverences a sacred object by walking
round it keeping it to his left. The Bon
ceremony is also called	walking
round a holy object keeping it to the left
as a specification of reli-
gious duties, to make salutation and cir-
cumambulations. ’qX tho inner path-
way for circumambulating a holy place
or shrine ; *$(X the outer passage for the
above object ; the middle pathway
for the same ; t}kor-bye$ one "who
goes round or makes a circle or traverse.
Other usages of this verb are :—
or	to befool, delude, deceive a
person ; kha skor-wa to make one
alter one’s sentiments; to divert one from
a plan, &c. $kor in *’4^53*4^ signifies
if all were taken into account; the cir-
cumstances or things available (Л. 1&2).
Syn. ярбХ’ч hkhor-ica;	yafi-
yaft hoft-wa (Mfion,).
skor-tsher on this occasion :
Svgs’q | on this (present) occasion
prosperity arose.
4ХХ4	in courses; in
rotation, one coming after another and
again going back.
$kar-lam a roundabout way;
the way or passage round any sacred
place, temple or town for pilgrims to
circumambulate it; the pathway round
about a monastery used for holy proces-
sions.
q $kor-log-pa a wrong turn : i[X’
to walk round an object in the
wrong way, keeping it to his left.
$kor-$ifi a turner’s lathe or tool.
$kol-wa=*^ pf. and fut. q^,
to boil (vb., act., cf. я^-q):	one who
boils tea.
$ko$-pa, v. 4 е1 sko-tca.
skya 1. crop ; the produce of
a year, «>., S’3M plenteous crop:
5’4’ j‘ jN’q’gE.* I this year the crop has been
abundant : S’® 3 I this year the
crop has been unsuccessful (lit. “ a loser ”).
2. a paddle ; also ladle. 3. wall or parti-
tion, usually 4. plain, without dis-
tinguishing colour, but see jfq below : 3*
*1* a plain unpaiuted box: 3^* a blank
book:	a plain hat without riband.
8’qql skya-bag greyish colour; iron-grey
colour (Jig.).
S'T skya-ka—%'^ magpie; in Ld.
n. of a bird (Cs.) .*
Syn. bya khra-wo; *^'3’^'3Ч’Э
mgron-gyi hphrin^kycl bya;
ipfion~fe$-can (Mfion.).
5’3 §kya skya pale-white; grey colour.
5’jq q $kya rgyab-pa to row ; to ladle.
$kya-chen a superior kind of plain
scarf (for presentation) (S. kar. 179).
skya-nil zinc.
3*4’^ $kya-tha-le of plain white colour.
3'3S tkya-thud a kind of plain cheese
made of pounded dried milk with butter
but not with sugar.
3’35 ^4 skya-thud-leb a kind of cheese-
cake made of dried milk and butter.
3’3* skya-thum a kind of cake or biscuit
made without sugar or treacle.
skya thom-me-wa glaring white:
at all times one of
g,qi
3’^ §kya-nar 4t«f^,	1. n. of a
flower, Bignonia graveolens. 2. brown;
buff.
5’^‘H§kya-nar khra-bo, also
ftn чт^г, n. of a flower; д’^’чз]’^
41W another species of Bigno-
nia graveolens.
g'^’S’S Skya-nar-gyi Ъи чте^гнч n.
of a city in ancient India, Rataliputra,
now supposed to bo Patna.
g’^’^’w Skya-nar ldan-ma чт^гчн!,
also 4TWT4<?t n. of a river in Ancient
India; acc. to Bhavabhuti’s description
the river flowed by	or modern
Narwar in Malwa нг^гч	This
latter name of the river occurs in Bhava-
bhuti’s Malatimadhava, written early in
the 8th century.
U’P $kya-wa 1: 1. vb. pf. чдц b$kya§f
fut. ^3 bskya, to carry; convey to a place
(a quantity of stones, wood, water, &c.).
2,to change place.
g’q ikya-wa II: also skya-ico чп?к,
grey or whitish grey; pale-white;
$*g a secular personage ; one clothed in no
particular colour; a layman, from the grey
colour of the coarse serge which is gene-
rally worn by the lay people of Tibet: g’
when (he was still) a layman, £.<?.,
had not entered the sacred order (Л. 126):
(Л. 126) from the time I was a
layman; if’3light blue, g^’g light green;
Swg light red; SK*g 4tf43( tawny; light
yellow; g g rice; barley without anything
to eat it with ; insipid miserable food;
4^5 whiteness; faintness; ^’g$ Sfc’ ^rfw-
ИПК the city of Kapila;	4rfw-
4T^[ the residence of Kapila;
the hermitage of Kapila.
3’4^ skya-ica hdsin-==wy\4 mnan-pa or
a rower (МЯсш.).
97
g’S	$kya- ico=V4V	iN44* p-	pale
whitish yellow.
g’S’l §куа-гсо $pyi vulgar people; the
common worldly men.
g*« §kya-ma hard and rough soil for
cultivation:	g*«	(J/y.)
as to soil, two kinds, the alluvial or soft
and the hard or gravelly.
g^YP Skya-ma na-kha n. of a vast
grassy plain or common belonging to the
Government of Lhasa in U (Central
Tibet).
gT Skya-rtsa dry grass.
3’J“ skya-rtse a layman at the top (of
a row):	the front
left hand row of seats should have a lay-
man heading it (Jig.).
3’^n skya-ris outline, sketch, draw-
ing of the outlines of a picture, which is
generally done with charcoal in Tibet:
then outlines of this
kind are necessary (Л. 108.).
3'^’ Skya-refi, also called g’«S3 ^44;,
n. of the lake from which (the Yang-tse
kiang) the River of the Golden Sauds
takes its rise.
g'^^’5’^ skya-refis mi-bo	the
several stages or divisions of the dawn
which are—сПЧФТЧМ the copper-
red dawu; дЛ^г*^ эг1чт the white
dawn (the earth);	the golden or
yellow dawn; g’^Y’^vq
the first appearance of the dawn ; g’^*r
rrtarw the appearance of the
middle or the yellow dawn;
сГГЧТ^Ц the last (stage of the) dawn.
д’«Ц skya-lan also g 5 in C. morning;
twilight; dawn.
g’°ta $£ya-&5=3'w^ a rudder.
3’^ Skya-scfi n. of a tree (Ja.);
translation of the name Pa у du.
и

98
skya-sefi-gi Ьи чпз^ the sons
of Pai?<Ju; g-^-4|-gg3^4-V^’3^ tho
names of Karpa, the oldest of tho 1’apdava—
«•8Ц-Ч вче^-^ч « ^rrsi,
гтчтачч, «<W§vg, Y^'S4!4
: ЧГЗ'4 ЙК’ч^цч'йе.' names of Yu-
dhisthira—ffifeK, S*rg4'g« ч^ттзтуч, *Ц’
vpgq-e^, **>'§'9 яд ’5Щ wsrran^,
^'3’V^, ^'8«:	the names of
Bhima-sona—qj«fiT<T; Д “1 |;4»rs^ Klu-yi
stobs-hlan,	Tfhogs-las skyes \чч-
§=.'3ja ЧЧ5ТЗЧ,	§vg4 $'
**4’ grid sgrub-kyi win, the names of
Arjuna—9'*«'5!, pHW^K', ^4'9'*,
^Z^Sfun-po-med, «^vg'srgs, AggAVB.
ч^-цvn Ej( g Bre-ta, gho,	:
йе.- the names of As'viniku-
maras Sahadeva—Skyes Г *7" skyes,
SJVS’TS” Lhaii-eig-skyes,	1
ц«ч g'^'Sjg-gS ^wS-»k' the names
>f the wife of the five Papdava—
wjtf-g-fy gjau-ц qT^raf; Mj»r« Ri-skyes-ma,
«№, д\я Skyid-ma, «SW”,
**’T§V§« Rigbyed $ky<s, W’le/
g’^ skya-*r white and yellow, :>.,
the laity and the clergy, the latter being
distinguished from tho former by their
yellow dress.
g<^ skya-sloms occurs in tho pas-
sage
% JRtsii.).	*
3'^* skya-lham leather boots put on
by laymen.
skyag-pa I: same as ^’g^ 1.
human excrement; also any kind of ordure.
2. bad man, the dreg or scum of society ;
secretion from the eyes;
to ease nature.
Syn. 4’^ dri-chcn ; Ъгип (inn);
я mi-gtsafi-ma (Iflfion.).
рт1
^Ч)’Ц П: 1. = ^Ч 2. pf. fut.
чдч), imp. jp) to spend, lay out, expend :
expenditure or items of expenditure:
gЯT skyag-tho list or account of expenses.
3. in JF. 3*4’5*’$ to slaughter, to murder
3*4’5 §kyag-po n. of a place in Tibet:
the marshy plain of g*4’5.
skyafi VW; SWg*’?’S reddish
brown.
+scT; sky an	or g4!'^ ^4
plaster ; also pavement; clay-flour; mud-
flour; g^’§S’<i=<¥rcr§V ч to pave; to
plaster; according to Seh, to rub, polish.
skyafis ashamed; in shame:
5^’$^ being ashamed (Л. ЛГ.).
skyabs цуч protection, defence;
help, assistance:	protec-
tion for the place and for the occasion:
$a^-gnj'4]5^2'gcw permanent and ever-
lasting protection which according to
tho Buddhists can only be obtained from
taking refuge in the three holies:—(1)
Buddha who is the teacher is called J«w
or the Refuge Master; (2) Dharma
or the sacred doctrine called	the
real protection; (3) Sangha, tho priest-
hood called gW|jq'q^ the friend for
gaining protection. Refuge in these throe
completely liberates же from the miseries
of tho world and secui^s the state of omnis-
cience for the devotee:
the three formula or expressions for
seeking refuge in the three holies ; (1) Я)*’
। “ I come
for refuge to Buddha who is the chief of
the two-footed”; (2)
“J come for refuge to
Dharma which separates from desires ”;
(3)	“I come

99
for refuge to the priesthood, the chief of
all assemblies.”
gw$tffa skyabs-mgon helper; protector;
deliverer. The Kyapt-gon is the popular
term for the Dalai Lama in Lhasa and
for the Panchen Lama in Shigatse
and throughout Tsang. It is also applied
to other incarnate lamas by courtesy.
gqN'wfjYSFl skyab§-mgon sbug original
or real protector; a complementary title
of the Dalai Lama:
according to the spirit of the
letter of command of the Protector.
skyabs-mgou rtse-god lit.
the Protector (residing on the) top (of
Potala and the court) below:
“offer, without fail annually, as
before, the new year’s homage to the
Grand Lama and his Court.”
gwjfa $kyabs-sgron	both pro-
tector and enlightener.
•	§kyabs-bcol,
§kyab§ beol-sa the place of
refuge: gW^orN'S^Y^T । ex-
cept the three precious ones there is no-
place of refuge.
gw%<q §kyabs-hjiig=^'&fi a blessing;
favour; taken under protectiou:
blessing attained in accoid-
ance with one’s mental prayer (Yig.
k. 25}.
дц^'я^*д’ч §kyabs-hjug §hu-ica to ask
benediction from the higher class of
incarnate lamas for protection against
disease, evil spirits, and other enemies, and
also for a safe journey to heaven without
falling into hell, &c.
gw^N skyabs-gnas the place of
refuge, shelter; also of persons, helper.
додчрргд*^ $kyab$~gna§ rgya-chen =
the great object of worship or
adoration (Mtfon.).
gW4 $kyab§-pa~w^ bskyabs шдхц
protection; saved (Zam.).
S §kyab$-bya the person who seeks
refuge.
gw§5	skyab§-byed	pro-
tection, defence (Mnon.).
gq^’gY^ §kyabs byed-pa to protect, help,
save.
skyabs-hos щчзш worthy of
protection; also gwo]^ the three
protectors, i.e.^ Buddha, Dharma and
Sangha.
gqsrg’Mj'P skyabs-su hgro-wa or gw
^5*4 skyabs hgro-wa щпнгня to seek
refuge ; a going unto or repairing to for
protection.	or faznupuw has been
defined in the Bodhicharyavatara as fol-
lows :—। “ I
take refuge in the three gems.” In the
same work has been substituted for it
and it is found in the list of seven-fold
highest modes of worship.
дчк^ю skyab-sem§ gw$4?'w^wng51
the idea of seeking refuge.
Skyar-phu a place in Tibet
{Deb. 45).
1^=4 skyar-gog naked (in the
dialect of Purang).
skyar-bcag to bring into
recollection, to bring back into memory
anything that has been forgotten.
skyar-po snipe; wood-cock
(Sch.).
skyar-wa=%W	5*.
again and again.
Syn. д^’чч’ЗЦ skyar-wahi tshig; gv^^q
skyor-tshig;	zlos-tshig; W
Fl
100
F’4I
X^*4 gnis-g,sum zlos-pa\ zlot-gtam
(Шоп.).
skyar-rbab (Cs.)	a kind
of dropsy; a greyish rheumatic swelling.
ъкуаг-то a kind of water fowl;
according to Sch. a heron. The flesh of
this fowl is antidote for a poison adminis-
tered in Mongolia mixed with horse
flesh (Sman gshnii). $’g4 duck (Cs., Sch.);
bittern, but the of the is a
kind of goose.
jveta skyar-leb the sheldrake.
skyal swimming.
g^’l4 skyal-kha leaping; a boat.
$kyal-gyi$ sgrot	cross-
ing over by swimming.
skyal-chtn — У^ na-pa fish; a
fisherman (Mnon.).
skya$ a changing of abode or
residence ; g^'^'Ej death :
the great change of place that uplifts, e>.,
death ;	to change one’s dwelling
place; (cf. g‘4)	to die; vb.
skya$-pa, pf. 43*1, fut. 43 or 45'44-3, to
transfer, and hence to depart this life.
skyas-ma 1. v. 2. fern
(in Sikkim).
skyi 1. interest on loan; B'V' wealth
accrued from interest, t.e., money-lending;
according to some borrowed wealth. 2.
the outward side of a skin or hide (ft.).
5 VP skyi dkar=^'^'f>yr\^ tho white
fatty side of a skin (Aiy.):
acc. to Cs., dressed leather; tanned leather,
sometimes hide: 85’’|*зГч"1’’Л*|1 parch-
meat.
Skyi-khun a place in Tibet
(Deb. q 34).
Skyi-mkhar Iha-khaft n. of a
monastery in Tsang (Deb. *4 12).
g’gj* skyi-sgam a box, chest or trunk
lined outside with dressed hide.
skyi-b$tu>n$ anything packed
or tied round with dressed hide; a skin or
hide to pack with: 5Д*'£”В'Ч8ЯЧ'* dkroA-
rtse skyi bstuins-ma.
B’^ Skyi-nag or В В’^4 ikyi-tkyi па-да
n. of a pasture laud in province Tsang.
tkyi-lpags chamois wash-leather
(Sch.).
Ц skyi-ica I: a medicinal plant
(Med.); acc. to Jd. potato.
^’3II; vb. pf. 45 bskyis, fut. 4j ftskyi,
imp. 3^ skyi§, to borrow, especially money
or goods (cf. 4|44’4 and Bv4 skyin-pa).
B'S*’ tkyi-buft cloud:
q	thereupon the phantom
King Kong-tso departed with tho clouds
(D. /?.).
B’S^ skyi-bun prob, an itching of the
skin (Jd.).
Вtkyi-gyha^'&^Q fear; dread
(Mfion.) :	skyi gyah-ica to shiver,
tremble with fear (ft.); to be struck with
panic.
B'4! skyi $a outward and inward side
of a hide (Jd.); according to Sch. the
anus.
I4!’4 tgyig-pa or g4!*’’4 skyig$-pa also
B4!*^ ikyigt-bii vulgo. i-khug fv4Tb
hicough; yex; also a sob: Я$4*
“COUghing by
those who eat the berry (gyer-ma)” ($ag.);
g4]^’S*4j"qTq4 skyig^-bu brtseg-par to keep
on sobbing.
ВСТ«М
101

F’F2’ skyin-khab in Hindi Kiftkab^
embroidery inlaid with gold and silk
manufactured both in India and China.
B*’^ skycfi ser eagle; vulture (Zz.).
^5^1 ikyifis occurs in the passage
44|V«W'U<E. gMrtflfa,1S4r4|-j^’ (Z>. JJ.).
|stc' Skyid-grofi n.ofa well-known
town in Southern Tib., near sources of the
Ganduk on Nepal border, commonly called
Kirong :	w |
having come to meditate on the mountains
of Kirong between Tibet and Nepal
да).
BVSI skyid ght song of joy; a merry
song.
skyid mgo beginning of happi-
ness.
fy\$Skyid-clni “the river of happiness,”
n. of northern tributary of the great Yeru
Tsangpo or Brahmaputra River, on which
tributary Lhasa is situated.
55’3^ §kyid-hes comfortable:
g 5'1*1 *q fied-rnam§ skyid chcs-pa we have
been comfortable (-4. 229).
55’чсто skyid-thab§ comforts ; mode of
comfortable living : 5’^
wjfy’q Ъч-de bde-thabs skyid-thab$ hjam-
thabs kho-na-la the son only sought for
opportunities of happiness and comfort.
BW' skyid-dar a silk scarf presented to
the bride at the time of marriage as a token
of prosperity.
Skyid-lde m-ina-mgon n.
of a King of Tibet:
I this Kyi-de Sima-gon
came into Ngari and seized the kingdom
(Zorf.).
skyid-sdug good and ill-luck,
happiness and misery; one’s general
circumstances:	whatever
circumstances may happen :
pleasure and pain intermingled.
$k у id-pa or gV2* skyd-po sbst.
^r, ’ёи happiness; adj.
happy :	§kyid-po hdod-
na gcig-por §dod if you wish to be happy,
live alone, be a celibate (Zo. 27).
= §kyi ston-ne
always happy ; uninterrupted happiness:
BV^’^S’4 $kyid zin-zin byed-pa to be
continuously happy.
Skyid-fod the district including
the tracts in the lower valley of the river
Kyi; the central district of 5^ от V, the
province of which Lhasa is the chief city.
§kyi-lhan signifies
$kyi-po-la hgro-icar, to be prosperous;
happy (Zo.).
$kyin the Tibetan ibex, Capra
sakeen:
khyehu clnin-$kyin-gyi ral-ka-can
gser-gyi ral-gri thogs-pa gcig (D. H.)
a little boy who had the horns of an ibex
holding a golden sword. In Ladak the
female ibex is differentiated as
+$kyin-gor or B^^ $kyin-
mgo a lizard (Z^.); also called *1^’
snow-frog.
skyin-thafi^^'^ ser-wa hail
and sleet (SM.).
§kyin-pa 1. sbst. a loan ; money
borrowed irrespective of interest;
ч5'В^ч loan producing interest :
fia-la hdi tftyin-du htshal grant me
this as a loan; B^‘q’|S’q skyin-pa sprod-
pa or B^ q q sky in-pa hyal-wa to pay
back or return a loan ; nor-skyin a

102
S’Wf
loan of money or goods ; ^’g^ gos-$kyiu
a loan of clothes ; g^’q'^’q $kyin-p>a len-
pa to take on credit. 2. vb. pf. чд^*
bskyin to borrow.
д^ч §kyin-po chiefly colloq. resp. ’’jV
g^ kar-skyin a loan ;a thing borrowed;
money advanced without interest (Ja.).
д^’й skyin-mi acc. to Schr. a debtor.
g^’^q skyin-tshab a debt; anything paid
os equivalent of thing taken on loan. In
C. signifies same as the pledge for
loan.
skyibs a place giving shelter
(either in a rock, under a tree, roof or
cavern) : ЭТ
^•^•gw^'q’gAKqS’Xfl i ^org’gA^ be-
cause birds dwell in the hollow of an over-
hanging rock, such rock known as §kyib$
is termed “bird-shelter” for the reason
that it affords protection (flag.):
I rag-skyibs a sheltering place under an
overhanging roek or a projecting roof:
q^4-gAN bkah-skyibs a covered terrace or
small portico before a house : *vgq char-
skyib shelter from rain.
skyim dressed leather painted
red or in other colours, japanned or var-
nished leather.
W skyil-krun (kit-tun) tho posture
of sitting cross-legged serenely without
moving the limbs ; g^’^SVA skyil-krufi
byed-pa to take a particular kind of
posture practised by ascetics in medi-
tation; g^Zr^Sp^-q skyil-mo kruft-gi
hdug-pa or bshugs-pa to sit in a
cross-legged posture ; ^wv^gorg^* sems-
dpahi sk$ il-krufi the mental concentration,
or the posture of sitting perfectly still, of a
Bodhisattva ;	rdo-rje skyil-kruA
the posture of sitting perfectly
still without moving the body ; the un-
changeable posture of sitting cross-legged;
rdsogs-pahi skyil-krufi, the
posturo of perfection, i.en of a Buddha.
§kyil-wti, pf. чд bskyil-pa or
cjgoi5 bskyil-to, fut. qgoTAVg fakyil-war bya
or bskyil 1. to pen up, shut up; to dam up
a river ; ф’д«Г4 chu $kyil-ica to bank up
water ;	chu rclsiA-du skyil-wa
to collect water iu a pond ;
chu rjift-bm* skyil-wa to collect water for
a pond. When tho water collects itself
into a pool or tank it is called
chu hkhyil-tca:
чд^ zag-med bdud-rtsihi btufi-wa intsho-
Ltar bskyil the exhaust less drink of
ambrosia stands collected like a sea.
[2. to bend, esp. the legs when sitting on
the ground after Oriental fashion ; also
to bend in another’s leg by a kick from
behind ; to bend the bow (Ja.)].
S'4 3^ skyil-mokruft=^^'t^ posture
of sitting; it is same as ^'В'д^'З^’ rdo-rje
skyil-krufi (Mnon.).
skyu-gafi 1. acc. to Sch. a
gulp; draught. 2. dough made of flour
with tea: д
(fiag.) at the time of eating pap of barley
flour the dough becomes ‘formed like a
hollow bowl and the name of the rounded
buttery lump is kyu-gang :
g’fljA’Al^’5 on a journey
when eating barley flour mixed with butter
and boiled tea the dough so made (Zo.).
Skyu-ra-sgaft one of the six
\o
districts of Kham* designated under
the name of The six Sgafi are the
103
1^1
following:—(1)	Skyu-ra Sgaft, (2)
W8j*’ Rab-Sgan, (3)	Spo-hbqr
SgaA, (4) 5Wf»W8]X’ Dmar-Khams Sgan,
(5) *j|b- Tsha-Sgan, (6) дагХгць- Zal-mo
Sgan.
I: $kyu-ru a kind of medicinal
fruit called g*’-^ §kyer-fun.
П: §kyu-ru in Sikk. and д^’Й
skyur-mo in Lhasa, signify a sour liquid or
vinegar (Ja.).
$kyu-ru-ra	1.
n.^of a sour fruit said to cure the
diseases of phlegm, bile and blood. 2.
Jd. in liis Diet, says: “ In later times the
word seems to have been used also for the
olive, and §kyu-ru $ifty the olive tree, which
in Sikkim is called kha %kyur-pohi fin У
Syn. 5^9*1 rgyal-hbras; ^’§5 shi-byed ;
bead lfta-pa*,	lan-Uio
brtan-byed;	na-tshod-gnas\
dpal-ldan ;	bcud-gnas \ ma-ma
(Шоп.).
3*^54 skyu-riim^^S*^*^' tshod-mahi
min (Nag.) 1. n. of a kind of table vege-
table. 2. condiment; sauce; pickle (Os.).
According to others, at least in JK, only
the resp. word for §p>ag$: (Jd.) 3'^’
gvq to prepare sauce, &c.;	sauce
made of vinegar for meat;
sauce made of vegetable or pot-herbs.
B4!’4 skyug-jxi, pf. g’]” ikrugt 1.
20
to vomit, eject, e.y., blood;
skyug-tc hjug-pa to cause to vomit;
skyug-pa dren-pa to excite vomit-
ing; M‘34!*1 fian-skyug$ vomit (it is the
food of certain demons, and being boiled
in it is one of the punishments of hell)
(Ja.).' 2. to lose colour; to stain.
g^srq skyug ne§-pa that can-
not be taken or eaten.
skyug-ldad rumination; chewing
the cud; acc. to Sch. eructation:
to chew the cud as cattle.
skyug bro-u’a (kyug-to-wa) or
nausea (Шоп.); also what is
repulsive to taste or sight or smell; causing
nausea;	the disease of nausea;
from disgust (to eat anything) ;
3^ '9 $kyug-bro in C. shameful; impure
with regard to religion (Ja.).
an emetic; a
medicine causing to vomit.
skyug log-pa (Sch.) to feel
disgust, v. skyug bro-ua.
skyugs-po —	gsal-wa
1. clear; 2. n. of a bird the bill of which
is of coral colour.
Syn.	byu-ruhi mchu-can;
yul-ftan hbod\	graft-reg
pho-ha (IJfton.).
skyuft-гса, pf. A|^'q b$kyuft$-pa,
fut. чде/ bskyuft, imp. дзд skaufts, to dimi-
nish or reduce; b§kum-pa or also
hbri-wa,	nuft-du btan-wa ; g^
skyufts reduced; subdued: чдк.^1 b§ky lifts
(Д. “he was
seated on his cushion after his pride was
subdued.” Acc. to Jd. in 0. §kyun-ica, to
leave behind; to lay aside, e.g.y a task.
ikyud-pa to forget, resp.
thugs brjed $or-wa forget-
fulness; acc. to Jd. to leave off: чд^’ч
b^kyad-pa (Zam. 10). Acc. to Sch. to
communicate; to swallow.
104
I: skyur-ica, vb. pf. and fut.
bskyur to throw, to cast; to leave
off; Sq rgyab-tu skyur
to east behind;	riUu skyur-tca,
to throw at a distance: ^vq^-^rsipver
IhuMzed nam-rnkhah-la fyskyur-nas
having flung his mendicant’s platter
towards the sky; ^«rgvq e.hu-la skyur-tca,
to throw into the water. g^ skyur also
implies btafi, to mix; throw; pour out;
to throw away ; throw down a stone, a
corpse, &e.: c^Q|	fylag
chafi hthufi-rgyu skyur ^shag^pa yin I have
left off drinking beer. ^Vq,3^’q lud-pa
skyur-ica to eject a phlegm ; to throw off a
rider; to give up, abandon a work; to
forsake a friend ; to abort (-4. 155.).
|Vci skyur-p>a bleached; bleach-
ing:	like the moon bleached, or
white like the moon. skyur-po
acid; sour.
skyur-khu 1. a sour soup ; sour
juice. 2. ^’g* ran-skyur vinegar (in
Sikkim “ skyur-ru” in Lahoul “skyur-
ino”).
g^^’ skyur-gon, aho skyur-dad,
same as g*’^ skyur-fion. g^ skyur signi-
fies “thrown” and gon over; hence
one over-powered by wine ; a drunkard:
ч one who is over-
powered by wine delights in women :
a tipsy man is con-
temptible:	if a
layman is intoxicated with beer, drunken
noisiness arises (Rdsa. 11).
дч’Ея skyur-nom or g^’55 skyur-dad=^
necessity (by habit) to drink;
passion for drinking.
gvs^ skyur^an powerful ; spirited.
!”i
skyur-hjug-pa to leaven to
turn sour; to take a sour taste;
kha-skyur-po or	kha-ga skyur-po
olive (Ju.).
skyurJum a condiment;
sauce ;	a sour vegetable curry.
II:	adj. sour, acid;
more frequently 3V^ skyur-po also
skyur-mo. Also sbst. sourness.
3v§5,ql^ Skyur-byed д$ит=^2№%**№
hbras-Ъи gsum the three sour medicinal
fruits; also called
kun daft mthun-])tthi skyur-byed gsum “the
three wyrobolan which agree with all” and
are:—(1) ^”5 a-ru, (2) 4’5 ba-ru, (3) 3'5
skyu-ru [Sman. &Л7).
3^‘я skyur-ma abortion; in JF. chu-
skyur, Я^’З* &yaft skyur, capital punish-
ment in Tibet, when the delinquent, with
a weight fastened to his neck, is thrown
from a reek into a river {Jd.).
gvtf skyur-mo leaf of the Eld plant;
Elettaria cardamomum, v. й (Muon.).
$fywr-rtef==^c‘’,T$5‘4 tpn-ka pad-
tha a kind of lemon {Mnon.).
rskyur-гЫ chufi	the
smaller species of orange.
skyur-rtsi chen-po	n.
of a kind of lemon.
Syn. so-rtsi*,	lcgs-hdsin\
rab-gnas me-tog;	| snin-rje;
gso-dgah-byed-,	rnam-
par-mdses (Mnon.).
rag-chufi
giii 11. of a plant (Mnon.).
§kyus, acc. to Sch.	sky us
thog-pa altogether: З^З’ЗРГ4 skyus-su
klog-pa to pronounce jointly, viz., two
consonants without a vowel between
them {Jd.)~
105
ii
v-35 and $kyc-wa.
3’53 $#yM?0W=B’^ '3^ skye-bo kun wr
all beings. This word is sometimes writ-
ten as 3'5 skye-rgu. 55 dgu “nine,” in
the word 3*53 Skye-dgu signifies many: 3'
53*M%*’4 skye-dgu marun-wa or |’53‘^’^'
skye dgu-та rufi-wahi bsam-pa
can wicked and vicious animals or sensate
beings (7Г du. Я ^53).
B*53^*4V4'4 skye-dguM bdag-po = ^^'^'^
zkar-ma ynar-ma	1. n. of the
fourth constellation {Mnon.). 2. the
god Brahma of the Hindus {Mnon.).
1’53^’4541'3$ Skye-dgu-hi bdag-mo, H^T-
the step-mother and first gover-
ness of Buddha ; also a name of the
goddess Paldan Lhamo.
3*^5 skye-hgro—^'Q hgro-wa зтлд
beings or moving beings; also 3'^ skye-bo
human being {Mnon.).
g-q^	skye-hgro yon^-kyi
mdog-gsat—^^ honey {Sman. 73).
B‘^ $kye-rgas, contraction of 3’4’5^’W
$kye-wa dart rga-was, by birth and old age,
i.e.y death»
B’? $kye-sgo 1. entrance to rebirth,
viz., to one of the six regions of birth:
gcod-pa to prevent birth,
to lock it up 2. face: g*^*«t4prq skye-
sgo leg§-pa a handsome face; 3*F^’q skye-
$go s han-pa an ugly face; also
kha-§go skye-hbra§ leg$-pa is said
for having a handsome exterior.
3’M skye-fian,	lit. “a bad
man,” but also a dwarf.
skye-mched 1 :=544-4 wtohw the
sources and places of origin of the senses.
Of these there are four:—(1)	wv
икгд'я!^ nam mkhah mthah ya§ $kye-
me bed	a world as infi-
nite as the sky; (2)
rnam-fe$ mthah ya§ skye~mched бппнтпггг-
ЦсРТ a world as formless as consciousness ;
(3) $’^4-й\ч5'3*5^5 ci-yati med-pahi skye-
rnchcd Mfaww a world as unlimited
as void; (4)	A’*^'g’^5hdu-
ges-med hdu-qes-med mifi §kye-mched Н4Ч-
a world where there is
neither consciousness пот unconsciousness.
3’^5 n: the inner and outward organs
of sense.
3'^5’^’4^ skye-mchcd mu-bshi is said to
mean	n. of the world.
3skye-hehi med-pa without birth
or death; eternal.
B'SftN skye-gna§ 1. birth-place; station
or locality of a plant; also = ^’54^‘
the female generative organ. 2. oil fa the
state or sphere of birth or rebirth; 5«r$4’?|’
3'4 byol-sofi-gi skye-wa the being born as
an animal; 3’4’4^ $kye-wa, bshi or B ’4!^*
4^ skye-gna§ bshi the four states or ways
of being born.
g ^^'s^ksrq §kye-gna§ mtshufi§-pa = *^'
§4’ miH-srin brother and sister {Mnon.).
^’4 I: skye-wa pf. skyes to be born:
E/orcj‘gsrq fta-la bu skyes-pa yin I have
given birth to a son, or to me a son has
been born. wargN mnal skyes or wer^r
g’4 mnad-na§ skye-wa	viviparous;
bom of the womb. B sgoft $kye$ or
c/wg‘4 $go	skye-wa	born
out of an egg or oviparous; ^5’M*’3**
§kye$	moisture-sprung;
born out of heat and humidity; Г*гд^
rdsu$-skye§ <31(41 apparitional; born
in a supernatural way like the gods who,
15
106

!'=>i
it is said, spring out from lotus flowers;
also tho inhabitants of the infernal re-
gions; souls in that state of existence
between death and rebirth which is called
wX Ъаг-do; pho-skyc$ a male; a
man; also ono who has done a manly
work; Srgsi mo-^kyes a woman; female:
5’*jskye-ga-nahchi-wahi §dug-
btfial the evils of birth—old ago, sickness
and death.
II:	§kyc-u'a ^rrfir 1. the being
born ; tho birth; also re-birth ; д’Ч’ыУ’Ч $kyc-
wa mtho-wa high birth; of high birth;
uoblcman; male;	skye-ica dmah-
wa or $kyc-dmah or 3 skye-dman
of low birth; ignoble; also a woman:
mi-lui thob-kyafi ^kie-ira
ditian born a human being, it is true, but
only a fomalo. 3^’5*Ц §kyc$-dman, in collo-
quial kyer-mfln, a vulgar word for wife or
woman: ft' “skyr-mcn” my woman or
wifo:	mir $kye-<ca bshm-pa to
take or assume rebirth, existence, life.
III:	1. to become; to begin to
exist; to arise:
?ii morbus ullus nascatur, natus quoquesed fur
(Jd.),	khe-hu khros-pahi
sem$-skyes-te the youth—thoughts of wrath
arising (in him). 2. to grow (nasci): ^’4*чд*
g‘4 valleys where com grows:
ru rngo-la §kye a horn is growing on
the head. 3.	^4,
growing up, or grow up; thriving. 4.
to grow (cresccrc) ; cher or
cher-por §kye-ica to grow up; to grow tall:
ras-kyan lus-kyi tshad-
du skyc§-so the garment also grew to the
measure in proportion to the growth of
the body, i.e.,	rtul-phod-par
§kye$-so, he grew up a valiant man; became
a valiant man; to bud, germinate, sprout;
in W. to accelerate tho germinating of
the seed by maceration.
IV:	1. v. 3’*]^ skye-gna$ in a
concrete sense the reborn individual:
3’3*4 yum-gyi $kye-wa yin she is the
rebirth of the mother. 2. the arising,
etc 3. tho growing, etc.
3’4’J*i $kye-ica ryal=fyw $kye-pa a
person.
§’4$kye-wa rgyun-pcod to stop
tho continuance of birth—to interrupt
it.
Syn. 3*1*^ brag-$pra$; gab mifi
(Jf/Я.).
3’4-g-Q tkye-ica
dufi-dkar gya$-hkhyil <(44U^d>igta conch-
shell with its coil reverting to tho right
instead of to the left (ДГЯоа.).
§*4'g $kye-wa tfla wwr former
birth; anterior birth; |*4,g,w,K'p §kye-wa
$fia-mahi re-kha tho lines or marks in
the hand or head which are supposed to
represent tho symbols of ono’s acts in a
former life.
$kye-wa ipthun-pa is defined as
rig$-ru$ geig-
parikye icahni nin-ycig $kye-wa “the being
bom of ono and tho same lineage or the
being bom on one day.”
ц-q q skye-wa dafi hjig-pa birth
and death, or passing away; frequently*
of thoughts, passions, &c. (the person as
well as the thing in the accusative).
3 skyc-гса dran-pa
remembrance of a former birth.

107

skye-wa bdun seven periods of
life.
skye-wa hdi-la in this my
present period of life.
3*?^ skye-ldan =	sems-can
animated beings (4fffon.).
skye-ldum a plantain (in Zayul)
(Snd. Hbk.y
д’Ц'Й®< skye-wa	hkhrig-pa
to copulate.
Syn.	dgah-mgitr spyod;
gS chagsspyod;	hdod-log spyod;
«рЕ?ц*д|^г|Х dwan-po gnis sbyor;
log-gyew ; ’l^’SS g& rfi-spyod; й^ЕЛгд\
mi-tshans spyod (4fzion.).
skye-wa phyi-ma^^'fy9* tshe
phyi-ma future birth or existence.
skye-wa phra-mo — 0^^^ an
animalculee; also a small grain (Д(Яо».).
g’q’«|^ skye-wa gshan 5i5jrpfK a future
or previous birth.
З'Ч'Ячр skye-wa rig-pa inherited intel-
ligence : p«%r4W«5^gEk,q’gas'^,<W’§,q’^’q
khams thams-cad hbyun-wa Inar $e$-pas skye-
wa rig-pa that all the elements from
which we spring are known to be five is
hereditary knowledge.
skye-wahi cha-can	a dog.
Syn.	rdo-rjehi mjng-ma;
seft-gehi rigs;	grong-gi
gean-gzan (Mfion.).
skye-wahi lanz-ster—** ma
mother (Жло/г.).
skye-wa s mtho—^'Ц skyes-pa
of high birth; man.
skye-was hthob
or inheritance; heritage.
H skye-bo 1. a general name for all
living creatures: »V«r?fapr«r|’4 mi la-sogs-
pa skye-bo man and other living beings.
2. people; mankind; Rsprwrg’tf hphrnl
beas skye-bo infatuated men •,
Skye-bo mkhas-pa gshan rnams other
intellectual people;
skye-bo mafi-pohi yid-du hofi-wa beloved
by many; ^'VTg’^ mi-nag skye-bo lay-
men (on account of the dimness of their
religious knowledge);	so-so skye-
bo ЦЩрт the lower clergy, common
monks, but also simple laymen if they
are not quite without religious know-
ledge; not of saintly origin; not an
incarnate Lama;	skye-bo
tham§-chad la phan-yon	useful
to all ; of public utility.
Syn. §’*5 skye-hgro.
g’SJ’qj^’q skye-bo bkres-pa huugry per-
son:	skye-bo bkres-pa
the people residing in that country (or
continent) are (always) hungry (7f. d.
14^).
g-25-^-q skye-bo Han-pa a charla-
tan ; a knave :	q 5Ц g’S’
skye-bo Han daii hgrogs-pa-yis,
skye-bo dam-pa rlag-par byed by friendship
with a bad man a holy man is spoiled
{Can,).
skye-bo dam-pa a good
or holy man; an incarnate being.
skye-bo gnas-pa итч a
place of habitation.
skye-bo phal-po-chehi
phan-pa 4M9i|4I3 fecHj of good or
use to the general public.

108
j’5 §kye-bo tshan-po-che a large
number of men; a crowd; tshan-po
implying a large number.
I'5’0)5-sta] $kye-bo gso-thig n. of a
treatise on ethics by Nagarjuna (Тан d.
^176).
g-55 <i]5« ikiju-liohi fftam «J-HK,
popular talk; rumour.
skye-bohi tshog assem-
bly ; a crowd.
g’5Q’^oj^’^ ъкус-bohi tshog-can^zffi13^'
m $mad-htshoft mahi gtso-mo queen of
tho harlots (Al ft on.).
g’5^-qgvw $kye-bo$ Ь$киг-та, v.
m’opf-Й smad-htshon inahi gtso-mo
(Ad ft on.).
g'^^yQ skyc-bo$ dwen-pa a solitary
man.
g-^q^jr^’q §kye-mcd btsansa zin-pa
attained to an exalted state of existence
from which there is no rebirth.
g’ifc** $kye-rmofts=$^'Q skye-bu
rmoft^-pa a stupid man; one who is sunk
in pleasures or sordid acts.
g’* skye-tshc vrfererr mustard; g’^‘
skyc-tshchi hbru Klftran mustard
grain.
B'flJ ikye-zla (keh-da) the month or the
particular phase of the moon in which
one is born (Ya-sel. 11).
$kye-rag$y v. for §ke-ragsy
girdle. The term in Adil. book, skye-
rags-kyi ra§ hdiy seems an inversion of the
intended order of the words.
5’3* skye-pft =	§doft rkaft ^bod
a tree with a huge trunk.
851
g-^'З*^’ $kye-ser-gyi rluft the cold
north wind called $kyeft-ser rluft in Adil.:
by aft §kye-$er-. gyi rluft-po ma, rgyab-na
Iho-ru tsaii-dan-gyi-nags mi-hgul if the
north wind does not blow, the sandal
trees in the south do not move.
$kye-srid sa-bon^z* father
(Mfton.).
34 iky eg^ keg qt kag misfortune.
B4!” $kyeg$ 1. n. of a bird;
chu-skyegt coot; water-hen (&Л.); ^’g*|M
ri-$kycgs a large singing bird (Cs.); algo
according to Sch. grouse; heath cock. 2.
rgya-skyegs shell-lac (Jd.).
|cq ikyeft-wa or g*N'q skyefts-pa
to be ashamed; shame; bashfulness:
kha $kyeft-wa or (^rg*'n shal Jcycft-
tea to bo unable to reply out of shame.
$kyeft-ser rluft, v. g'^'3’5*
ikye-ser-gyi rluft.
gEjrq»)^ tkyefti-pa med =
shameless (Mfton.).
$kycd and g §kye 1. growth; pro-
gress; increase: ^’g1^ ishe-skyed longe-
vity or increase of life:	lu$ skyed
growth of the body:	dwaftJhaft
$kyed growth of wealth and power:
stob$-skyed increase of strengthi*r<r
gS nus-pa skyed increase of efficacy or
ability:	skyedche-war bgyur-
wa to grow much :
gshan-gyi zla §kyed-pa$ dchi shag-skyed
che his daily growth was greater than the
growth of others in a month (Jd.):
$-S)*r1|c/g54^ yur-wahi chit-yis shift $kyed
109
B^l
hdra just as the water of the irrigation
canals makes growth in the fields ; J 5*
§kyed-kyis htsho-wa to nurse up;
skyed- у oft shall make progress. 2.
interest; profit; gain: 5^'|5 dnul-skyed
profit in silver or money; ^*§5 fabru-skyed
interest of corn loan ; gV^*4!^*4 skyed-du
giafi-wa to lay out or to give on interest
(Os.) : ^5’^*55*^5 nad-la skyed med (this)
is of no use for that disease (Ja.).
BsT skyed-sgo, not improbably
rgyal-sgo, principal door (Ja.).
|5’^ sky cd-can i : yielding interest or
profit (Os.).
g5'^ ii • skycd-can, v. ^Л^’З^'Э 5^’^
tsan-dan §brul-gyi §nin-po, the sandal wood
called ‘snake’s heart’ (ДГйон.).
|5*^ ^kyed-cig ^Vg5'$R] у ar-skyed cig
let it grow up, thrive.
Is’4 I: $kyed-pa vb. pf. 455 bskyed,
act. to skyc-wa^ to procreate, gene-
rate, and, sometimes, to bring forth ; give
birth to :	$a khrag
lu§ hdi, bskyed-pahi pha daft ma the
parents who generated this body of blood
and flesh:
&ans-rgya% thams-cad bskyed-pahi yab dan
yum the father and mother who have
begotten all the Buddhas: §5'§5 skyed-
byed tree.
<5-4 11:1. to produce, form, cause;
and metaph. to generate (opposite to ^5’4V
§5*4 m?d-par byed-pa to destroy, annihi-
late), e.g., diseases, fear, roots of virtue,
merit:	the accumula-
tion of merits or the seed or germ of virtue.
Fig. *9^’3 hbras-bu retribution: tf 4’qg5’
4^,	§pro-wa bskyed-
pas, de hiplia-ma-y an spro-wa cufi-zad skycs-
nas joy having arisen (in him), his parents
B^i
also were caused a little joy :
’qj5‘X thams-cad-kyis brtson-hgrus
bskycd-do they all created zeal; took great
pains : 3*r4W«rqg5*^ ces bsam-pa b sky cd-
na$ thus were thoughts generated (Ja).
2. §5*4 skyed-pa or |5*4 skyed-po sinfiim,
father.
g5*^<( $kyed-hphel 45'4^-a5-Rrq-%g5’
цвНг’Зк’ yod-pa$ med-la bu-lon $kyed-hphel
thon (the rich one) who has* should give
loan on interest to one who has not
(Jtathaft. ’H 115).
|5Ԥ5 skyed-byed applies to father or
earth; also to a tree ; g5'§5’4 skyed byed-
pa blowing : ^^5’^*^'55 ji srid rlun-
ni skyed byed-pa HKrf: as the wind
blows (Л. K. 2-7).
g5*« $&yeJ-wa = g5'§5**< skycd-byed ma
mother ; also ^ПГГ shadow; shade.
g5’^4 skyed-tshal
the so-called Tibetan park; artificial grove;
also |5’3fa’^«i skyed-mo s tshal.
g5’^w skyed-rim	the kind of
Tantrik meditation in which one has to
imagine himself to be a god with a view
ultimately to be changed into a god:
rdsogt-rim, fPTOW, in which
according to the Tantrik process one has
to pass through five stages of development
before attaining the Bodhisatva rank.
$kyen ъч&ь thorn.
s7vt/(?w-j9a=«54|^'4 mgyogs-pa
(Йад.) 1. quick, swift : ^’g^*q khro-la
skyen-pa or sdan skyen-pa swift to
wrath : §5*|<q byed ^kyen-pa, 2. rash,
hasty, precipitate. 3. nimble; dexterous:
R^-g^q hphoft skyen-pa dexterous in
shooting; a skilful archer.
skyen-la colloq. C. “upwards”
{Snd. Hbk. 94).
110
skyem-pa,Y<wp. to be thirsty; gw
skyem§ 1. thirst. 2. drink, beverage,
especially beer; also	shal-$kyems or
shal-skoms;	$kyems hdren-
pa to offer or set before an honoured person
something to drink ;	$kyems
bahe^pa to accept of it; to take it ; Jw
orsjXfarwgv4 $kyem$-la gsol-ra$ byed-pa to
be permitted to drink beer in company;
cpjflrpTgw gqegs-skyems a carousal on tho
departure of an honoured person ; drink-
offerings to a lama on his departure {Mil.
I4 12a) ;	gser-$kycm$ an offering
of beer or wino to tho gods for tho good
success of an enterprise, a journey, oto.,
also for recovery from illness :
gser $kyem$-pa “ the offerer of golden
drink ”; a Tuntrik priest who offers tho
drink to the gods; among the religious
dancers of Tibet the priost who offers wine
to tho gods for invocation is called Gser-
skyem§-pa.
g»r§V* §kycm-byed-ma the God-
doss Is'vari.
В«'4ч §kyem-$og a kind of superior
paper manufactured in tho town of
Skyems in tho district of Dicag$-po\ this
paper is of largo size, generally measuring
two feet by six feet in size.
Skyctns n. of a place in VKV5
Upper Dbag$-po.
| $kycms-chan beer; $kyem§-
ehu drinkable water; drinking water.
Skyems-stofi rdsoft the fort of
8kyems.-$ton ; |W’t}4pr$*’ §kyems-$prag$
lan the place where the finest Daphne paper
called skyems-gog is manufactured.
§kyem$-tshug cup; dish {Sch.)\
gwfo $kyem$-sin small beer-cup {Jd.).
$kyem$-bzafl pleasant beverage,
such as good wine or savoury tea.
$kyem$-gsol resp. beverage,
drink:	mandara-
tcahi glu ya-rab$ §kyem§ gsol (the lady)
Mandarava sang and offered drink to the
superior (personages).
§ $kyer-Skya = *>sr «X4!’	3
reddish brown {fiag.).
B3^ $kycr-$kyev solitary; perfectly
solitary:	skyer-skyer
mi dan hgul-hgul khyi lonely without men;
where not even a dog stirs about.
B3'F skycr-kha a kind of dye; colour;
yellow’ dye; a light yellow
colour.
B3^ Skyer-chu n. of a river of 9'5
{Pa-rd) in Bhutan.
skycr-pa tho barberry; applied to
the plant and its wood from which a yellow
dye is extracted; tho flower of this plant is
said to be euro for diarrhoea, its fruit draws
out bilious matters and its yellow bark is
useful in dropsy, etc.; gvpj skycr-khanfa
a confection of skyer-pa useful in
eye diseases.
Syn. Н’Ц’^Ч’5 khu-ica ser-po ; du§-
skyes;	ginser;	gi-la-drii
{Шоп.).
g^,JW skycr-dman^^'S^ skyes-dman
a woman. The former is a corruption of
the latter and, sounded kyermen, is on о of
the most familiar terms in tho colloquial
for “wife ” or “ woman.”
skyer-gift	n>
of a treo, Flacourtia eataphracta.
Ill
gorq
§kyel-gyur Ffprfn removal of
articles, furniture, etc. (to another place):
§kyel ehe-гса wfinr, Wptfti frequent
removal or changing.
gei’S^* ikyel than to accompany or to
escort one from the place of starting to a
distance on the way:
Lka btsun-pas thag rin-por
§kyel thun mdsadnas Lah tshun-pa having
accompanied the party to a long distance
(Л. 129) \	skyel-thuft byed-pa or
ggegs-skyel byed-pa to accom-
pany one to a short distance (generally
with some wine for his refreshment). g«r
skyel-dar, acc. to Lex. also in colloq.,
presentation scarf of the departing person
to those that had accompanied him for a
short distance.
S^-4 I: $kуel-wa pf. and fut.
b sky al, imp. ty^skyol 1. to carry, take
away: ^*ч5*Х’догп qi-wahi ro skyel-tca to
take away the body of tho dead (Cs.) :
*rg®r3*| do not bring wood :	bring!
gor3fc' take away! 2. to send, e.y., clothes,
to somebody. 3. to risk, to stake (one’s
life ran-srog). 4. to use, to employ :
baglan las byed-pa la sky al
use an ox for work ;	to de-
vote one’s whole life to work,	in
idleness;	gtor-ma glad $kycl-
wa to cast away as a ransom in the tor ma
sacrifice; Р’д'Ч’Ч kha §kyel-wa to kiss (Ja.);
4lXVq'Bai'q gnod-pa sky el-ка to do harm;
to hurt; inflict an injury; to play one a
trick; ^ч’дсч mnah §kyel-ica to swear;
take an oath ; if*BQr л 1° skyel-гса to rely;
depend upon; repose confidence.
II: pf. and fut. чд«1 bskyel, imp.
g«i §kyol L to conduct ; accompany;
resp.	gdan-skyel-ка;
skyol-la fog conduct him hither; л^д'3*
bsu-bskyal going to meet and to accom-
pany ;	fflegs skyal-byed-pa
resp. to accompany an honoured person on
departing ; to see him off.
д'Ч’я skyel-ma	an escort;
convoy: goi’W^S skyel-mar yod he is a
guide (to me): д $kyel-ma shu grant
us safe conduct,	dmag
dan bcas pahi skyel-ma a military escort;
gQrXajsrg^'q §kyel-rog$ byed-pa to escort or
accompany one to a place.
gsr’l §kyel-mi an escort: ^'^♦гд'згй'^г
Lhasa
nas sky el mi dgos rigs sfiar-rgyun Itar mi-
dpon nas gton-wa bcas bgyis the Mi-dpon
should arrange for the escort (sky el-mi) Qi
those formerly entitled to that privilege
from Lhasa.
I: skyes 1. v. ska. 2. v. gS
skyed. 3. д'ч skye-гса.
|ЯП: also $kya$-ma or jf*’
« skyo$-ma, khyos-ma, resp.
gnati-§kye§	<TF^ a present;
news, tidings;	hbyon-skyes=J№x
д phebs-skyes a present given to or received
from somebody on his arrival or going
away ; skes-chan a present of beer:
skyes chen a present sent with a letter,
etc. (flag.) ; §ke§-khur present of
cakes; §kes-lan a present made in
return (Cfe.).
III:	birth or
growth; growing or grown ; rafi§-
kyes self-grown; ^’g^ shifi-skyes bom in
a grove; lhan-kyes or
bom together;	pho-skyes male;
mo-skyes female ; £^’g^ §ftags-skye§ of
enchanted growth; born out of charms :
^g^’^^'g^V’
gsrpsjl	112
j shifi-$kye$
lhan-ehigskyes daft §ftag$-skyes-kyi mkhah-
hgrohi tshog$-kyi§ bu-la ma-bshin-du fyrtse-
war dgofts na$ dft os-grub kun stsal-shift bgegs
кин пе-гсаг shi-icahi fykah-drin ipdsod, as
the assemblage of khadoma fairies, who
have been born in groves and born simul-
taneously and are of magie birth, are medi-
tating lovingly as a mother towards a son,
may the grace bo granted of all manner
of perfect knowledge being bestowed and
of all demons being speedily soothed!
§kye$-§gra can = goat (Milon.).
$kye$-fie$	certain of
being bom or reborn.
skyct-chen a present with or as an
enclosure to a letter, explained in fiag.
as	that which is sent as
a support to a letter.
$kye$-chen figrub-gnas a
hermitage of holy persons.
g^a^wq $kye$-chen dam-pa a holy
incarnate person:
Bsod-nam$ rgya-mtsho sogs §kye§-ehen dam-
pa brgya-phrag mafi-po la gus-hdud daft d'id-
hbul rgya-cher mdse-do “ So-nam Gya-ts’o
and others made salutations and offerings
in full form to many hundred holy incar-
nate ones” (Zotf. *14)-
$kye$-mchog ш or 4WTH 3^4
an incarnate personage; a MalMma*. g*r
§kye§-mchog bshi, ^'g’W’wpN’q*
the names of four great
learned lamas of China, tho four incarnate
ones:—(1)	Ua-phu-qi, (2)
Wcnwaft, (3)	Cihi kyuft, (4)
Khufitsi (Confucius) (Grub. ч /).
$kye$-ldan = й $ mi-^pyi
mankind (Mnon.).
g^^t- §kes-sdofi,	skyes-la $dofl
in Sikkim the banana^ plantain; from
Hindi ke-la and a plant: la is dropt
in conversation, hence ke-la and goto#
are abbreviated into “А-е-яЫ.” In tho
districts of Upper Tib. and IF. ke-doft
signifies a layman.
$kyes-nag=*l'%ЧЯ in C. widower
(Jd.). g*^ $kye$-nag stands for
§kye$-bu nag-po (lit. black person) a
layman = mi-nag : 9	in the
country dialect of the lay people.
I:	skyes-pa 1. man; male
person. 2.= ^^ the year-crop;
produce. 3.	adult; full grown.
Ex. of 1. g’rcr^’gV^S skyes-pa daft bud-
med men and women ;
rgyal-po man; geig-po $kges-pa yin tho
king alone is a man (Jd.); g^’q’^qr
tkye-pa hdra-wahi bud-med,
a woman resembling a man,
(>., possessing masculine appearance and
virtues.
Syn. skye$-bupho; д^’Ц’д^ skyes-
pa tgyal;	§kye-wa§ mtho; й'414’
^^5 khn-wahi bdag-nid; skyoft-
byed; hzan-pho ; g'g*J Ina-syes;
mi-pho;	lift-ga-can (Mnon.).
II:	pf. of 8куе-гса=^^‘^
also	growth or grown up.
III:	= *||W<| hbrun$-pa born.
g^'q’^’w skyes-pa dar-ma full ;
manhood.
$kye$-pa hbru$
phyufi-wa according to some: an eunuch,
one who is made so artificially.
Syn. hog-med;	dwafc-
ponams-pa; ЦЯ’р'Ч khyimkhol;
btsun-mohi khol-po;	bud-med
113	§<«гччрц|
dgah bral\	ral-gu-can\ ’Й’Г’Ц*’
hkhrig tni-ntis; *34*53*’ч hbras dbyufi-ua;
3%yr<i nug-rum-pa; Лч*ч5’*гЗ|* bcos-pahi
ma-niH (Mnon.).
*1**'%V tkye$-pahi rgyu-$kar 5РЯ-
(Schf.) the particular star or constel-
lation under which one is born.
B«T' sb/^-sjwr the measure used by
creditors in receiving back the loan of
grain, etc.:
Iha-spor dan lha$sran gsum bshi $kye$-§por
che “ a large kye-phor contains 3 or 4 ounces
in measure or weight.”
%куе$-гса rgyal=%*w skyes-pa
or a man or male person (Mnon.\
5«г«Ц $kye$-phan-=.3^ a damsel,
maiden.
skyes-bu 5^4 man, esp. a holy
man; person; B^’S*4!^’ skyes-bu gan whoso-
ever; human (3Ied.); one: J*rg*®i4]’<r4$vtr
§kyes-bu lag-pa brkyan-wa tsam-gyi§
as quick as one stretches out his hand (J«.);
jM’Q’Vrq $kycs-bu dam-pa a saint;
dad-ldan $kyes-bu the believing;
the faithful. According to some Tibetan
grammarians skyes-bu applies both
to men and women:
jpnjw3*r«ig4|R skyes-bu дай-zag
dad-pa-can, gan-shig lha rnam$ mchod
byed-pa, Ston-pahi bkah bshin byed-pa-stc,
de ni Safa-rgyas-rnarn$-kyis b$nag$ (K. du,
Г 96) that human being who is faithful,
and who worships the gods (saints) and
acts according to the commands of the
Teachey is praised by the Buddhas.
$kyet-bu $kye mchog jw-
the chief among men.
B^'S’S skycs-bu khu-mchog srWTH
the leader of men.
skye$-bu can S^wqS’B^’S
dan bca^-pahi $kye$-bn a horseman; one
on horseback.
Syn. 5*4 ria-pa*,	rta-la gshon-
pa (Шоп.).
$kyes-bu mchog SWl’flH a
superior person; lama; also Visnu:
§kyes-bu chen-po	a great
man or saint; an epithet of Buddha.
skye$-bu — glu-fift
n. of a tree supposed to grow in the land
of the Naga (Жоп.).
$kye$-bu nag-po, same as й**гу
n. of a kind of flower (Sman. M7).
$kyes-bu pho—^'^ $kye$-pa a
man or male person.
В R’5’^* $kye§-bu hbrift=B*T<1W R
8kye$-bu bar-wa or	$kye$-bu
dbus-ma	the second person;
personal pronoun in grammar.
ikycs-buhi hkhrugs-pa
wfwnr pride, self-respect.
$kye8-buhi nos УИГГ, 4^4
manliness; manly self-respect or confi-
dence.
skyes-ma 1. fem. of skyes-pa, a
female; she that has been born. 2.
abride. 3. skyes-ma fem in Sikkim.
B«***4fl] skyes-ma ihag as soon as born;
newly bom.
В^’л’ч^ ч skyes-ma thag-pa a new-born
infant.
Syn.	btsas-ma thag-pa} V
sho thuii-wa*,	gshib-hihuti;
hjib-hthuft*,	hkhyud-hthuti}
ho-mahi mgrin-pa-can (Jtfnon.):
10
SI
114

§kycs-dman in the vulg. lan-
guage a woman ; = ^’« or SV^S {Mnon.).
skyts-rdsons cultivation; a
farm.
дз skyes-gzugs	gold;
birth; form or horn-shape; staturo; figure
(gold).
SjN’Wi tky'$-rab$ «ЦсГФ a series of
alleged births of an individual, or legendary
history of these, and especially accounts of
the different births of Buddha.
$kyes-so cog ancestors:
shyes tdiad thamt-cad^
tfia-rabs-kyi pha dan
wt-po yan-me$ la-sog§-pa $kye$-so~chog
kyan rim-par $i ste da-ita ni mifi-gi lhag
tsam-du gyur father, grandfather, great-
grandfather, &c., ancestors of the former
generations having successively died, now
nothing remains but their names.
§kyo or g’G skyo-wa, rr, VTVT,
W, н’чл, grief; sorrow; grieving;
mourning.
5A35 §kyo-hgyed weariness dispersed:
the inhabitants of the land of bliss
relieved of weariness accept all your
precepts {Lam-rim.).
$куо-пс$=§ыч'1£ц	tkyo-ica
to repent; repentance {Jdhon.).
+ g-Jftpi
tkyo-nogt quarrel;
hkhrug-lon {Lex.), esp. f
reviving of old feuds and dissensions.
Ц’Ч skyo-wa 1. g^3‘?5’q snar-gyirisod-,
pa old quarrels and feuds. 2. repentance;
sorrow:	j sons $kyo-
wa btkyed-la ri-khro hgrim he wanders од
mountain ranges to induce repentance
{Lo.).
skyo-bran servant; slave:
q £’чр,8|,л|Ччг25 a slave for life.
^’<^1 I: $kyo-ma 1. quarrel; litigation.
2. thin gruel, gruel of rice and tea, thin
paste of wheat or oatmeal:
tkyo-ma-tca
sh(s-pahi rgya-rnthso nub Ba-lafi-tpyod-
kyi gliit hdat na§ yod the ocean called
Skyoma-wa lies beyond the continent of
Godaniya {K. d. 2J4).
II: v. khrim-pa 1. ono
convicted. 2. спрг, ^ЧчТЧ penitence;
smaller transgression:	tkyo-ma
tna fysan
one who was once convicted before on the
occasion of a former dispute.
skyo-ma can adj. slanderous {Cs.);
tkyo-ma by cd-pa a slandering
{Cs.).
2’^5	mtho-ritkyi
gnat the heaven, where there is no peni-
tence.
Syn.	dal-hd sin gnat~l>zafi,
bde-hgro,	bdc-lden,
mtho-rit rgyal-srid,	skab$~gsum
gnat,	tien-gi hjig-rtcn,
★grub-pahi gnat, ^‘^5 hchi-mcd,
nam-mkhahi khylm,	sum-rtsen,
lha-yi gron,	lha-yi hjig-rtcn,
lha-yi yul, a semi-divine being
possessed of supernatural powers {^on.).
%te№tkyo med-khyab
n. of Visnu's bow {Mnon.).
skyo-tshag a light broth made
of barley-flour with the addition of a little
butter {A. 155):
(^) aT4 tho-rafa-kyi dus-su skyo-tshag
iser-ma {rlufi) mi skyc-tca early in the
8ЧГ¥11
115
morning (ье., at dawn) by taking barley
gruel, wind is not engendered (A. 155).
§&yo-ras tsho-tshogs n. of a
kind of chintz (8. kar. 179).
§kyo-rogs a consoler; one who
consoles a person during grief: S'^’g*
X^ww^'s^ the mother cannot be the
consoler of her daughter’s grief, f.e., one
cannot be of service to another in certain
cases of sorrow.
g’4^ §k go-gas to be sad; sorrowful:
ran la nes-
hbynn dan sk go-gas sad-sud §kye$ he felt
(slight) repentance and sorrow.
дяад sk go-sans to console in his grief
or sorrow or repentance.
дяслг*^\ sky о-sans nid freedom from
fatigue.
дяслг^м sky о-sans gnas a pleasure
garden.
§kyog-nag iron spoon or scoop.
sb/o$fs 1. a spoon or ladle; also
shovel. Wooden spoons for wine measure
used in Tibet are called |ч^ skyogs. There
are three kinds of spoons used in Tibet
for measuring liquids, salt, &c.—those
which are mounted with copper are the
largest; those lined with silver are of
middle size; those of the smallest size
are tipped with gold and called gser-skyogs,
golden spoons- ^‘дч^ me-$kyogs coal
shovel;	the copper
spoon with which to measure the allowance
in salt and oil for servants, etc.; З’Вч*’ s/w-
skyogs melting spoon or crucible. 2.
drinking cup; bowl; goblet; Ч^’Вч^ gser-
skyogs S^‘^4^ dnul-skyogs, etc., gold cup,
silver cup, and wooden cup are now called,
4^’S gzar-bu*, wgbpj shal-skyogs lip-cup;
resp. eating or drinking-cup; the
rein of a bridle; also name of tribe in
Tibet (Fat. kar.).
Вч^*^’ц8 skyogs Ito-hbu a snail in JF.
(Ja.).
§kyogs-pa I.- to turn:
Вч^’4 mgrin-pa §kyogs-pa to turn the
neck, i.c., look round, back; also to turn
away, aside. 2. one who uses or manu-
factures the coal-shovel or stone scoop, etc.
Вч^’4 §kyogs-pa З^АЧ^’4 skyon hdogs-
pa; <T4^TrRrf<T to find fault with.
g4^'**S skyogs-nted not curved;
without any curvature or crookedness.
skyon Idan-ina n. of a goddess;
she who protects.
skyon-tca ut, шн, pf. чдкя
bskyons, fut. Ъзкуащ imp. sgkq bskyons
or 4g^‘-^4 bskyon^-gig^ to guard; to keep;
to defend; to save; preserve (the life, the
body); to support; to take care of (poor
people)	drin bzan-pos skyon-
ка to support by benefits, favours: w
thabs-kyis skyon-гса to protect by
various means; to attend to:
$[*’5 lhug§-dam-ghyi skyon-wa to protect
by the moral force of meditation: ^4'
lag-len-gyi by exercise:	q
igyalsr id skyon-tca to rule; govern a king-
dom:	chos bshin-tu bskyon-
wa to protect by justice or justly:
chos-skyon Ч’йя protector, defender of
religion, is used for a certain individual
deity or for a class of exorcists in some of
the monasteries of Tibet. Under this
head there are certain powerful deities
who have taken on themselves the duty
of defending Buddhism, against its
m не
enemies. When co-erced they can even
make their appearance in the person of the
invoker. The	Gna$-chun
chos-skyon living near Lhasa is a deity of
this class who is generally consulted both
by the State and the people of Tibet as an
oracle:	bjig-rten skyon
guardian of the world. There are four of
these, identical with the	Rgyal-
ehen the four great spirit kings:—
VBXTJJ Apvjk’ Yul-hkhor skyon) the
protector of the country or kingdom;
(чич|*тдч'$ JJphags skyes-bu); f4i£-
ЧТ^ (§^ ^ qic.' Spyan mi-bzan);	($**
Snani thos-sra$). 5^5^ skyon-dal
assistance (in the colloquial of Br.) ; gk’
5^ skyon-dal byed-pa to help;
sky on-ma, same as	brtan-ma, the God-
dess of tho Earth;	tgy^srid
skyon	a defender of the realm;
same as	a defender or
protector of the subject or of people: gk’
skyon-byed чт^ж one who supports or
protects.
Skyon byed-ma, v.
(ДГяои.).
skyod-pa pf. and fut. bskyod
’чПягч,	gyo-wa or яд*гч
hgul-wa to move (trans, vb.); also to
go, pass on: 5^*,’ttwr4rgV^ if the wind
moves the branches.	Mi-skyod-pa or
mi-gyo-wa	the unmoved;
he whose mind is not agitated; n. of the
second Dhyani Buddha. In 7F*. skyod-pa
is the general respectful term for: to go;
to walk.	bskyod-hdod is same as
hgro-hdod desirous to go or about to
go:	“ пап-du skyod” step in (if
you please); “tan-po kyot” tread firmly!
bskyod skabs-la at the time of
going or coming.
g^l
ifS	gru-skya oar
(Mnon.).
skyon, ^’q net-pa <14, Wf, W4^T,
чап(я, WW4,	<rf^j
also ТЯЧ r nog-pa 1. a fault, defect:
$kon gah-yaH med it has no
fault whatever. The two words skyon
and ^4’0 nes-pa are sometimes used together
as^'jfa ne$-$kyon, but defects in inanimate
things are expressed by the word skyon
and never by the words nes or nef-
tkyon ; slight defects in honoured persons
are expressed by the words dge-
skyon, which also signifies faults or sins
in holy persons, that is, g^ skyon (fault)
in 5<| dge or dge-hdun (clergy):
q skyon ci yod ftkhrul-pa la,
what harm is there in erriugP rni-
skyon no harm;	skyon-med no
harm, no matter;	skyon
yon gan yan min he is without any
imperfection or perfection;
skyon-du mthon-tca to consider as a loss,
also to find fault with. 2. bodily defect,
fault, as lameness, derangement, disorder
in the mixture of the humours. 3.
spiritual defect, sin, vicious quality; £Y
rdsun-du smra-tcahi skyon the sin
of lying; gY3M’R’4* skyon-gyi ma-gos not
defiled by sin :	far skyon che but
that is very bad (of you). 3^‘§S’q skyon
byed-pa to commit a fault; skyon
Span-wa to leave off a fault or quit it;
й atmi-la skyon hbebs-pa
hdogs-pa to charge one with a crime; to
criminate;	g$han-gyi
skyon glcft brjod-pa to name the faults
of others, to speak ill of them; to slander;
to blame, criticise; gYS^’F'^V4 skyon-
span kha she med-pa to do any work with
application and at the same time without
117

W! i
any fault or mischief to any body ; gY*
not perceive a fault or
defect.
5Yg skyon-skye	con-
ducive of sin ; sin-producing.
skyon-nag thorny; mis-
chievous.
JpY*Y skyon-can^fyi^'Wn-Q skyon-dafi
bcas-pa or skyon-ldan згг%ЖТ,
faulty, defective, incorrect, sinful;
guilty.
skyon bco-brgad tho eighteen
defects are the following:—(1) 9 gflj-q mi-
sdug-pa ugliness; (2)	mgo skra
nan-pa bad or bristling hair; (3)
dpral-wachun-wa small or narrow forehead;
(4) **Kg mgo ser-skya brown hair ; (5)
migser-ica yellow eyes; (6)
smin-rntshams ma-hbyar-wa the
eye-brows disjoined ; (7) §na leb-pa
flat nose ; (8) so Ito-wa bottle-teeth;
(9) ч dig-pa stammering ; (10)
mig zlum-pa round eyes ; (11) ^ГфЧ’Ч mig
chufawa small eyes ; (12) sgur-wa
crooked or bent body ; (13)	Ito-bo
che-wa large or pot-belly; (14)
$4'4 dpufapa rje fair thufawa small
shoulders ; (15) spu-сап hairy body;
(16)	q the arms and legs
with the feet not proportionate; (17)
ч tshigs sbonv-pa large or swollen joints;
(18) F^’orV* Лн'Ч^ч bad foetid smell
coming out of the body and the mouth.
skyon brjod-pa^^^'^ $mad-
pahi tshig to slander or speak ill of others;
also slander (Mnon.).
skyon-du hgrafawa 4jgwr
to reckon as or into sin or defect.
skyon-nas smra-wa
to ascribe a fault.
skyon gnad med-pa without
the least fault or blemish.
sky on-pa, pf. чду bskyon, to put
astride upon a thing (causative form of
Ч^‘ч shon-pd) ; ^’^’5’or^-q mi-shig rta-la
sky on-pa to cause a man to mount ; to
ride on horseback; to fix something on a
stick ; ^|,qw^ er£pycf to impale a man
(Jd.):	bon-bur skyon-te having
caused him to ride a donkey (Pag. 61).
skyon-med rtog ТИктяд free
from disease; thinking or taking as fault-
less.
5pY^5‘*|^ skyon-med gnas WRrei
remaining, living, or dwelling, in a state of
innocence or faultlessness : ^’^5'4V4j4|u‘q
med-sky on par bshug$-pa яггн: residing
without fault.
PpY^4 skyon-tshig slander; also scandal.
gpY*^ skyon-hdsin fpYET^'^’4 to find
fault with.
skyon-^es = *^’4 a learned man;
a critic.
Syn. kun-rig; kun-qes',
kun-kyis-bkur-wa. (Mnon.)
gy-^’Ч skyon $е$-ра=ф\Ц sman-раЪЧ
a physician (Mnon.).
|^4’4 skyon sel-wa to remove a sin ;
amend or correct a fault.
F4 skyob-pa grfa, xw, pf.
fut. чу3, imp. $чм or	to
protect; to defend, preserve, eave ;. fre-
quently яВчргч’огдч’Ч bjigs-pa la skyob-
pa, to protect from fear or danger or
destruction : чдчч’ч the protecting power;
the preserving cause :
чЛ*!	be that
gives protection to another is called q

118
SI
sk yob-pa :	skyob$ %by in-pa the
giver of refuge or shelter.
skyob-ston = дчч'ц §kyob-pa-po
or дч^'ч skyobs-pa srj^t a protector.
skyobs help, assistance; seldom
for 3^*1 skyab§\ дч*гя skyobs-ma and 5H*
$rog-skyobs in colloq., preservation of
life; escape; also he that saves another’s
life ; a helper (Ja.); imp. of дч’Ч $kyob-pa
protect from all
tho dangers.
$kyob-byed 4TWU, TTSt,
one who protects; a name of Balabhadra.
$kyom-pa, pf. 4gw bskyom^ fut.
чд* b^kyom, imp. 3** $kyoms to pour;
to pour out, agitate, stir up; according to
Lex. to give ; defined as
chn snod chu-
$kyog§-kyi$ blans-te zafa-nan-du blug^-pa
lia-bu^ taking from water-pots and water-
bowls and pouring into kettles (Nag.).
Seldom used in colloquial language ;
3* 4 to stir the water ; to shake a
vessel.
sky or, same as khyor, the
hollow of the hand filled :	ehu-skyor
a handful of water (Ja.).
skyoiy	hkhgog-paham
gner-wa bent, contracted or crooked:
$an$-skyor=§na hkhyog-pa (his) nose
was bent (A. 106).
*	skyor-skyor again
again ; repeatedly.
skyor-wa, vb. pf. and fut. чдя
btkyar 1. to hold up, to prop; to paste..
2. to repeat; to recite by heart: 4|^’^
ч$е. Ъ^куагЛе .btan it was repeatedly sent:
and
Ззрдя’ч tshig $kyor-wa to repeat a word,
like tho reciting of the Л/anf, e.e.,
от ma-ni pad-те hum :
an old,siek,
or drunken person walks being supported
by another: ^v^,e,3qt’q?'q‘Q,'3^'q to prop a
thing that is falling or tumbling down : Ф’
|X‘4 chu skyor-ica the pouring of water with
some force as if through a pipe or the
mouth of a kettle; the sprinkling of water
from a pot or vessel or a scoop ;
to back; to help morally or religiously or
otherwise one who is in difficulty, engaged
in war or litigation, &c.: 3. enclosure;
fence (Ja.).
3^’3^ $kyor-$byan§ repetition from
memory :	having
retained in his minds, ho repeated it.
^kyor-tshig^ v. gvq (Шоп.).
§kyor-mo-lun n. of a village
with a monastery situated to the west of
Lhasa containing estate of the 8habs-pad
Sre$ chun-pa
skyot-wa sometimes for
sky cl-ica.
$Ayos-pa = 3**’4 wasted ;'
spoiled; degenerated.
sky os-ma, v. g* $kye§, ,^'Я
skyos-ma a present made to a friend or
an acquaintance at the time of his going
to a distant place, or removal to some place
of residence.
skra (ta), resp. the hair of the
head : g ’V’F’S skra dan к ha-spa the hair
of the head and the beard:
skra-bsgrit-wa plaited-hair or curled hair:
Я’ЭТ’ЧЦ skra nag-geig a single, .tuft of
119

hair:
jfS’^ skra-ni hjam rtsnb sbom phra snoms-
ser mdans-can snum Ions spyod-che (he
whose) hair is neither soft nor rough nor
thick nor fine hut uniform and smooth,
and yellowish and glossy, becomes wealthy
and prosperous (Mtxhan.). 3'X’^ §kra
do-ker the hair dressed and plaited
together on the crown of the head; JfX*
$kra do-ker can	one with
long flowing locks; д’З^^^’^’д skra
yyen-dn hgrcn-wa Ita-bn whose hairs stand
upwards as bristles; SfSfa	with
loose or carelessly wrorn hair; О’
a skein of silk or cotton attached
to the flowing locks of Tibetan women;
skra la-glan-gi spu hdra-wa
hair like that of ahull; g
locks of hail* of women; g*^’ thin hair
(Schtr.); to comb hair ; д’^^'ч the
shaving of one’s hair ;	a
barber; also napkin;	^rt well
braided hair ; also a braid or fillet of hair,
Syn. skra-tshogs; Sj^’g slar-skyc;
byed-wa-can;	тпдо-skyes;
3 ingo-§pn; g’^’gN spyi-bo skyes; *1^4’95
gtsng-phud; мгч ral-pa;	thor-
tshugs;	me-tog-can;	hkhyil-
tca; mgo-nal; Xdo-ker;
4^5ral-pahi gden§; 35’35 zur-phud; XK'Xnj
thor-cog; 53’5 dwu-lo; Ican-lo (Mnon.).
skra-mkhan^^’1^'9^ §kra hdreg-
inkhan a barber (Mnon.).
skra-can	the
mane (as of a lion); hairy.
$kra-can gnas TTUK lady’s
bed-chamber.
д’^я skra can-та a kind of hairy
worm; also = 35'^5 woman (Mnom). ’
§kra-can gsod a name
of Hari, who killed the demon Keci.
skra дт§-ра=^or
a comet (Itlnon.).
3’^5 skra-mdtid hair knot; acc. to Jd.
the bow of ribands at the end of the long
plaits of hair of the women in Ladak.
g’^r* skra Мге$-та=^'*№фг^'Н
a celestial courtezan (Mnon.).
g’^^ skra-gnas n. of a species of
sensitive plant.
дхадч skra-hbal ?ra = g’^|*4 skra rkog-
pa or gч skra tog-pa	(shaving
the head clean); to pull out the hair:
some sent
forth cries of anguish, some pulled out tho
hair of their head (Jlbrom, 113).
skra-nied mgo “a head without
hair ”; £5 dsa-ti «nf*r nutmeg; also Jar-
yninum grandiflornm (Sman. /М.)>
g'^ skra-tsal false hair; a peruke.
g’-S skra-rtsa clotted hair.
skra-tshogs, v. g skra (Mfion,).
§kra-mtshams	the
arrangement of the hair.
+	skra-zins = ^’	vanity,
pride; adj. vain, very proud.
g*W‘ §kra-bzan a secret or mystic word
(Ulin. J).
jfw’* §kra
n. of a Yaksa goddess (Шоп,).
skrahi khyon-nam
byis-pahl lam hair parting.
g^’gorq skrahi rgyal-po^9^ [dun-po
a grove; a garden; n. of a
vegetable.
Skrahi byi-dor -v. 3’^5 skra-sa$
(IJfton.).
aw ।
120
I” i
$krahi rtse-mohi mthah or
•3)'au	the hair-end.
g-^’4 skra li-u-a or	tkrahi
rnam-gyur curly hair; to dress the
hair.
jfS $£rfl-fo=SV*^'3'5| bud-med kyi-ikra
woman’s hair {№non.).
skra-shad hair separator;
a comb.
Syn.	so-man,	tkrahi byi-
dor hair cleaner (ДГлся.).
m4!	khrag-po or
sra-wa hard.
$krag-pa {tag-pa) to be terrified,
frightened, afraid of something. This
word is nearly always combined with яйрг
4 hjig§-pa as in	hjig$$krag-pa, to
be panic-struck.
J4§S'^ §krag byed-ma^fy&'^&fti ni
mahi btsun-mo the wife of the sun (4fnon.).
^^’4 $kran-wa (tan-wa) <3Wnr, ; pf.
§kran$ to swell; skranssofi it is
swollen:	^^-^чч^Ч^^Ч'^'
swollen from being suddenly struck
with a stick or a stone or a sword.
5jc/^ $krafi$-hbur an abscess not yet
open (5cA.);	ikrans-hbur
hjom$, v. 4,{f^4' ba-§pru fin, n. of a
medicinal tree which removes tumours or
abscess (4fnon.).
skran-kyi spyan-ki, 5
$man-thar-nu n. of a medicine {Sman.
126).
дмгп skrans-po a swelling; tumour
(&Л.).
$kran {ten) Ihan-^kren 1.
tumour or any fleshy excrescence in the
abdomen; a concretion under the skin or
in the bowels, womb, &c. {Cs.); a swelling
of the glands {Sch.). ^45 skran-nad is
described as a consequence of suppressed
wind {Ja.); rdo-skran 4V|fl two sorts
of steatite.
$krab-pa {tab-pa) to beat tho
ground with one’s feet; to stamp, tread; to
dance; also bro $krab-pa :
yesterday’s dancing was excellent.
$|4’Ч §kras-ka a ladder, v. 4K4 $kas-
ka.
{te-ka) ladder, which generally
consists of the notched trunk of a tree {Jd.);
a single ladder, i.e., a ladder with
one pole; rdo $kra$ {do-te) a flight
of stone steps ; rgya-skra$ a regular
staircase, as in European houses ; sj’gx
probably a flight of steps at the corner
of a building.
^’4 $kri-ica {ti-гса) to conduct; to
send (Cs.): g’^4 йл-р’<7=Ус‘‘^Ч thon-shig
let him send:	I
asked to send him to Tibet {A. 101).
+ skru-wa, pf. «ЦМ bftkrus, fut. 4g
h$kru, to wait {Sch.) ; to cut ; лгч’д za$-la
$kru to cut meat ; g skru, ^4’дц*4 fin
kru$-pa to cut wood or a tree: 4g*q
bskru-ica, ^*^’5Яя*4?,д,4,^м always being
smitten by pleasures {Pag. 1-35).
MS’4 $krud-pa {tud-pa) =
>0
to make another run away by
devices.
^^’4 skrun-pa (tun-pa) = |5*4 ^kyed-pa
to produce ; 4J^4 bskrun-pa, 4^*4 ^kyed-
pa «пн, ftfirH, grown up: 4gygA‘5’
$4 growing crop.
skrum {turn) meat; applied to
the° food of the respected; generally
gsol-tkrum is used in colloquial
language.

121

skrcg (leg) to beat (the drum).
dama-rn hkhrol^wahi don
signifies the beatirg of a skull-drum
(•$«£•) 
^'q $krog-pa to churn; stir (with a
rod): К’аг^ГЧ ho-та §krog-pa to churn
milk (&ag.).
§krod-pa (to-pa)	^Ц-
Tsrrfcff to expel, drive out, eject:
g.na$ nas-$krod to expel from a place :
phyir-skrod to drive out:
hgegs-$krod to eject an evil spirit.
q^’q bska-tca = ^’4, astringent;
also thick.
ч^ч’*^ Ь$кап mdos a slight frame-
work made of sticks and coloured threads
as an offering to the gods in cases of sick-
ness:	Iho-
yi-phyogs-su bskan-mdos dan bsrufi hkhor
bshag place Rskan-mdo$ and amulets on
the south side (Jig.).
гцр’^4 bskan-rdsa$ a sacrificial cere-
mony (Sehl. 360).
ч^-ч^ b§kan-gso
^’ЧЧ^’^^’Ч to make copious religious ser-
vices to the tutelar deities, angels, and the
guardian spirits of the ten quarters
(Qil. 9).
4^ b$kan$ 1.	full to the
brim, 2. 3«Ч<Г5*гчч^, э«*гч‘ч|3*гч пате-
ра gso§-pa fill to the brim (Situ. 74).
q^W b$kam “ ччя'ЭЛ'^В&’ч bskam-byahi
dfo§-po "(Situ. 77).
bskam§ past, dried, burnt: 44^’
by the fire (at the end of the
age) the lakes dried up (Nag. 9).
q^’q bskalp>a a fabulous period
of time; the various ages of tho world,
each of which has been presided over by
its own human Buddha respectively : чч^’ч*
bskal-pa chen-po the great Kalpa; 4V
44^ bar-bskal the intervening от middle
Kalpa; чч*гчз^-Щ bskal-pa bzafi-po
the happy or glorious period in which the
Buddhas appear ; 44^’4'^'q bskal-pa fian-
pa the evil Kalpa, in which no Buddhas
appear (<7a.).
чч'Ч'Ч'Чзч bskal-pa bzan = ч^\^ад трщ
virtuous; also virtue (Mnon.).
чч^’Ч’-?^ bskal-pa j^ = ^*4 rt sis-pa an
accountant (Mnon.).
44^’5) bskal-me — ^i'wcft the fire which
will destroy the world at the end of the
present Kalpa (Nag. 9).
чЧ'Ч'Чзе. bskal-bzan	n. of a
religious work.
q^ bsku=^\'4 byug-pa, fut. 4^n bskus
rubbed (Nag, 9).
q^£3IW4ms	mi-mt/iun-
tear §bas-pa concealed; hidden (Nag. 10.).
q^^l bskuni, pf. of g*<’.
bskum-mkhyid the distance or
measure between the thumb and the top
of the forefinger draw n in; about one-
half of the measure of a span:
I (Rtsii.) its
breadth was one finger (i.e., one inch),
and length eight spans and one bskum-
mkhyid.
4g*rg bskum-khru about a cubit
measure with the fingers drawn in a fist.
4g*r«A^ bskum-hdom a measure of dis-
tance by stretching apart the two arms
(with “ fisted hands ”); a little less than a
fathom’s measure.
°F b$kur, sbst. sending, granting;
^чч’ч^ to bless; to grant benediction;
<^•4^ (pag. 9).
17

122

qg*l v.	b$kul-brdah signal
to call one to his business; signal to call
workmen to their respective duties.
qg^’^q bskul-gshufi,
one who gets Government works excuted:
pf. of b§ku ftiK
anointed; stained or poisoned (Nag. 9).
bskon, pf.	go$ b§kon-to
to be dressed (Situ.
b§kor surrounded: qpvjj^qJjX
surrounded by followers, admirers and
attendants.
6^05=4^5 bkod, pf.
\Situ. 7 fa.
qgq'^S b^kyan-du med = 5ЧЧГ§’**5
numberless ; immeasurable (Zam. 10 s.
qgtN bskyans urf^fH protected; cherish-
ed ; nursed.
«15ЧЦ bskyabs protected; sjfa'qgq**
protected, saved life (Situ.
7'i).
+ qjw b$kyam§=^W : ^ft-qg^N $)lod
mi-bsk yarns the vessel has not dried.
$ water dried up (Situ. 7 fa.
bskyarz^flfi^' or и^'и’А’ again;
again and again (Zam. 10\
qg^'sT b$kyar-bzo repairing; mend-
ing of.
b$kyu}' cast ouf > exhiled ; driven
xo
away.
fakyur-du bcug-pa to causo
any one to east or fling anything away.
^5*^5 btkyed-hdod growth or
growing; wish to grow.
«’BV bskyed-pa, ^xrrf^H, зррт,
1.	a production, generation, formation»
2.	jftwqjV4 sewis bskyed-
pa	to form one’s mind; to have
a conception of; also technically means
purification of the heart as in
qg^’q-qg-K bskyed-pa bgyi-ho
to have a conception of.
qgS’Xn bskyed-vim ^qfvr^H the gra-
dual development of ideas; powers of An
occult nature.
bskyod-na$ = $po$-nas.
b$kyod-pa
moved, agitated;	5’q ma bskyod-pa
unagitated.
qgX’q^q^ b$kyod-pa yan-ma ^njan^<n
moving again and again, at paroxysm.
q|5*^’q bskyod med-pa, 9]^ grans
n. of an immensely great
number.
h^krad and phyir-b$krad=-
^q^ phyir-fyon turn out, expel (Situ.
7^) : q^^'qgS turn out a ghost or devil.
*3^ b§krus, pf. of Sf’4, wqjpj food cut
up (Situ. 9).
^Awn=qg5 bskyed 1. *^’^4
man-du btafi-wa to multiply. 2. qv^q^fpv4
par-du bkod-pa to print, set up in print
(Nag. 9.): VT^'^yq dge-tca bskruna, 25’
WW fo 4c>y b$krun-pa.
р
[Ч kha I: the second letter of the
Tibetan alphabet, being the aspirate of
ka. In sound it resembles the second
consonant of the Sanskrit alphabet. 1.
On registers it indicates the second, or
number two. It is attached, often option-
ally, as an additional syllable to many
words, especially in the colloquial:
dgon-kha the price; cha-kha a thing.
2. It implies khag, a part: FF)*^
kha-gnit-su=khag-gnis-su into
two parts (divisions): F*F kha-gaft one
part. The sixth part of a tafi-ka (Tib. coin)
is called kha. 3. Origin, source, &c.:
gser-gyi hbyuft-
khufis the source of gold, gold-mine:
tshica-kha salt-pit:	tswa-kha pas-
ture-land, a place where pastures abound.
4. Time:	nihchar-kha-ru
dus-gdab (Situ. 21) calculate time from the
moment of sunrise; hgro-khar at
the time of going; at the time when he was
ready to start : Йmo hchi-
khar cho$-la hdun-pa she at the time of
dying became religious, &c. (Pag. 27):
byon-khar when he came; at the
moment of arrival: ’fc’p yoft-kha at the
time of coming;	sa dan-po
thob-kha-ma=w^4fo'ww\ sa dan-po thob-
ma-thag as soon as he attained to the first
stage, <>., one moment before the attain-
ment:	yun rin-gi kha
yun rin-gi $go nas by little
and little; gradually (Jd.); in the
hope of;	just on the oppor-
tunity; “in the nick of time.”
[4 II: 1. the front side:	face,
mouth; also the surface or upper side. F
is the ordinary word for “ mouth,” while
4^’ is the commoner term for “face.”
Again, to express the surface as well as the
front of any inanimate thing, F is the
usual form:	icicles on the
face of the cliff;
§kyil-kruft mdsad-nas chu-khar byon (Pag.
117) sitting in a cross-legged posture he
moved on the surface of the water;
ho-thug kha-la hod-zer-
gyi ri-mo mthon saw reflection of rays on
the surface of milk-broth (Pag. 113). 2.
НТЧТ language; conversation; word:
the king having
become powerless at (his) wife’s word
(Pag. 32).
Syn. §mra-icahi sgo; *’§5 za-
byed;	gsnn-u'ar-byed;	shat;
gtam-gyi hbyun-gna$*
rjod-byed*,	gdon;	bdud-
rtsihi rten; ^5 §kad; ytam (IJnon.).
|4 III: a breadth or a square of cloth,
&c.
In its several inflected forms F is
often used as if it were a postposition
governing the accusative case. These
forms are M kha-na, F5 kha-гщ and F*
khari and take the meaning of “on,” “ at,”
F3Q)'c’I	124	|”'0|
“beside,” &c.:	on the fire;	on
the chair;	ah round.
F’’’jpi’4 Мя к у el-1 ra	to kiss.
Р’Щ4’« kha krab-pa {kha tab-pa) to smack
or cluck with the mouth.
P’5Fq^*Ej fcha dkar-po =	§nan-
wagsall. bright:	ц bkra-p§-pa. 2.
auspicious; of happy omen ; agreeable ;
pleasant looking; frST;4$c',,¥Il kha-dkar
gt innag outside white, inside black, />.,
plausible.
P’SS kha-dkri (kha-ti) neck-cloth, some-
times worn as a protection against cold ; a
kind of raw silk stuff of narrow breadth
manufactured in Assam and largely im-
ported into Tibet, where it is used as neck-
tie and handkerchief: f Slj*4W^*4f‘Kv
^9 kha-dkri bcas hdra-ica kha-rer hbru
(Rtsii.) for each breadth (of cloth), which
is equal to a kha-tt\ price in barley grain.
kha-lkug dumb; also of indis-
tinct speech :	the
spleen of a goat removes the dumbness of
children.
kha-skad	oral account;
tradition ; narrative ; colloquial language.
kha-skon	a mouthful;
completion ; appendix of a book:
kha-$kon-u'a 1. to fill up a void; to make
up a deficiency. 2. to fill up the mouth
with water, to rinse it.
F’ifc’4 kha skor-wa = 9’4 stu-wa or
F’4^k 4 kha b$kor-wa to speak cunningly;
to circumvent by speech.
kha skyut-pan 1. sour; of an
acid taste. 2. olive; olive tree (in Sikkim)
(Jd.).
kha-skyens shame-facedness: $’^*4’
ojcq-ElК^,4,М’|<г|слг^,
’^4^5If a man is about
to give his garment to another man, and
that other man having held out his hand,
it is not given to him, he is ashamed—
that is termed kha-§kyefi§.
Ff kha-kha I: apart, separately: F’F*
if (you) sit apart there will
be no quarrel.
Ff II: or kha-kha-mo bitter
mouth; bitter taste.
kha-kheb* a veil; a cover:
g’ qf •	мгрЛ grba-pa rer kha-
khebs ra§ kha-rc (at every offering) there is
a square of cloth apiece as a face cover-
ing to each monk.
kha-khor= tha-hkhor border,
edge; also the circumference.
FW kha-khyag ^ §^4 kha-theg
Lyed-pa contradiction; denying one’s
liability.
ГВЯ’4 kha-khyag-pa^ same as
kha-theg byed-pa, to deny having under-
taken to do a thing; denying one’s
liability.
kha-khyer 1. kin-kan ;
$tegs-bu any shelf or box on which birds
perch; also an altar; a raised seat.
2.	mthah-skor-kha the surround-
ing line or circumference of anything;
the surrounding edge of a cloth, &c.
F’H Kha-khra (kha-tha),N. SfF'H Blokha-
khra or Lo kha-brag\ also n. for
certain wild tribes of the border land of
Tibet, namely the Aka and Mishmi tribes
of eastern Tibet and Assam (Ya-seL 38).
Р'ЙЯ kha-khram (kha-lham) defined as
prSj'4)tSj ^-4-fj^q cunning talk, deceitful
language.
ррт kha-khram-pa = 4|4
gyorgyu fyad-mkhan one who speaks
cunningly so as to cheat.
125
rw
Р'Н'Ч I : kha-khral (kha-the) res-
pect, regard ; lit. tribute in language or
in words.
Р’ЕЭ'Ч II: capitation tax or poll tax.
P’^SX kha-hkhor the circumference of
the mouth (Ck.) ; Гkha hkhor-wa to
surround.
kha hkhyig-pa to bind an aui-
mal’s mouth; to gag; to strangle.
P'R$*w kha-hkhyoms to be agitated
outwardly:	rlun
chen-po des rgya-mtshohi kha hkhyoms the
surface of the sea was troubled by that
great wind (zt. 16*).
P‘4*2* kha-ga-po difficult (&?7/.).
kha-ga-ma or p’^'^ kha-gan-ma
the square rug that is spread over a great
man's cushion or seat.
P'4!^ kha-gan a quadrate, square; one
sixth of the Tibetan coin called tanka,
which is equivalent to one anna in India:
prsp/q kha gan-ica adj. square.
P^VF’g’4 kha-gaft-dgar-smra-ica to
talk at random; to speak at pleasure
(thoughtlessly).
kha-gab cover, lid. (Sch.).
P'3^kha gycn-phyogs with
the face upwards (in expectation); expec-
tantly, eagerly.
P‘3F* kha-grafts (kha-dan) enumeration.
P*5 kha-gru (kha-du) or mthah-gru
the comor limit or sphere of a place, also
of tho mouth. The width of the mouth of
a vessel or pot, also the opening of the
mouth.	kha-
gru yaft$-<pft dkar-hbol rtsa-med mchog that
being broad in space, of white and soft
appearance, and without grass, is best
P’gjt; Kha-glin,	mthah-
hkhob yul-gi min n. of a border country.
Р Щ^’Я kha glin-sgra is defined as
the noise of the foe which
arises in a battle-field (Mfton ).
P‘^ajq khahgog-pa mute; one who can-
not or does not speak; gagged (Миon,).
р'Ч^'л kha hgyur-wa to change one’s
words or promises.
p'aSj^ q kha hgrig-pa (kha-dig) — ^'^^'^
kha hcham-pa of the same opinion or
disposition.
kha-hgril (kha-dil) the selvedge or
loose tufts of thread on either edge of a
cloth:	the
fringes of the tout being made with blue
cotton.
P'^5 kha-rgod ill or rough language;
also a slanderer (Sch.).
P'Sft kha-rgan privilege of old age (Jd.}.
P 4^ kha-rgyan	the betel-leaf
which the Indians chew; literally the
beautifier of the mouth.
Р’5*гл kha-rgyal-wa to win a dispute :
bdud rigs-kyi sems-
can kha-rgyal the animate beings of the
demon kind won the controversy.
P'J23! kha-rgyug idle talk ; unfounded
assertion (Ja.).
P’^S kha-rgyud, resp. ^’^5 shal-rgyud,
same as gtam-rgyud, oral tradition;
also certain mystical doctrine not allowed
to bo written down.
P’F^ kha-sgor the shoulder bone.
P’g^'3 kha sgyur-wa P’®’g^’4 kha-lo
sgyur-гса to govern; to rein the mouth
(of a horse); to lead, guide, influence other
persons.
P’F1! kha-sgrog (kha-dog) p*
In this passage P'tH kha-
126

sgrog means shutting or binding up the
straps of a trunk or leather box.
P'^ifa kha-b$gos advice.
P’g’Q kha lna-pa=^*^ sefi-ge the lion
(Mnon.).
P’g'fl kha $na-wa or F’g^'4 kha sfias-pa
to antieipato or say something before-
hand ; to speak out inconsiderately.
P'^] kha-cig or p’4^ kha-gcig 1.
la-la, a certain person ; P’-*pi kha$as
also	hgah-re,	hgah-shig.
2.	some (J. Zan.) :	kha cig-
tn phur-§grar	“or as some call
it a flying word”; P’W^ kha-cig na-re
someone said.
P*^ kha-cul or Pkha-cur Kashmir;
a Kashmirian.
kha-gcan clever talking, cf. P'SJ^'Q
kha §byan-po eloquent; dexterous in
conversation.
kha-bcud^^'^ cu-gan n. of a
medicinal substance (Sman. 1^9).
P,q]^5 kha-gcod cover; in Ld. cork.
Р’яХч kha-beolidle talk, prattle (Sch.).
F’«| I : kha-chag defect in the blade
(of a knife or an axe), but F ‘Jf’Mi kha-
rhag $na-ral= to get the mouth damaged
and nose torn ; Р’УЧ'Зkha thug-po son the
edge (of a knife, &c.) has become blunt;
P’Mqflfc kha log-son tho blade has become
turned, re., bad ; Р'^'^Я kha mi-hdug tho
sharpness is wanting; §3'F grihi-kha or
grihi so (in Khainsi) the blade of a
knife.
F**4! II: abuse ; ill language (Jd).
F'*5 kha-chad, shal-chad agree-
ment, covenant; a truce; P*^ kha-chad~
*5’4^ chad-don special object or reason
(Mnon).
F'^ kha-char= abbreviation of P’3,
Enow and rain.
P'Se.^ kha-chin$ the taming or appeas-
ing of wild beasts, &c., by witchcraft.
РЛ kha-chu (^г*ч shal-chab) зттзт,
spittle; also used colloq. for F'4$*$
kha-uahi chu snow-water.
P'^'^l kha chu-phug n. of a place on
the uplands of Kha-chu (Lon. *1 32).
Kha-che a native of Kashmir;
a Mahomcdan; a person that has the
command over much; principal or impor-
tant things (p kha-ehM.ca rnant$);
n. of a mask in the religious plays of Tibet.
F ^ g*J kha-che $kye$,	kha-che
mchog, v. gitr-gum (Mfon), or
saffron, the produce of Kashmir.
p’а'яЩ’р* kha-che hgron-khan, p’l’rp^
kha-che za-khan an inn kept by a Mussul-
man at Lhasa or in Peking; р'£**Хч| Ma-
che mchog чтя tho chief article, ?>.,
saffron, which the Tibetans obtain from
Kashmir; p*^'-q'p'« kha-che ^a-kha-ma a
kind of yellow flower resembling saffron
which imported from Kashmir is largely
grown in Tibet; p’^’-q'p’«*aXkha-che
faiha-ш spor rcr hlru the cost of a spor
of Kashmir ^a-kha-nw flower is a bru or
barley flour (Rtsii).
FFlJW kha-chcmt, resp. shal-
cheins, last will, testament: pwA&l’4 kha-
che ins hjog-pa to make a will; p'^w
kha-chcm$ rlun-la b^kur eent (his)
last mil to tho winds (Bchu).
Р’Хэд kha-chos hypocrisy; religion in
talk only.
рллч kha-hchal idle talk, prattle;
talk as in a delirium: p’Wg^ (he)
prattles.
Г1|
127

kha-hcham— F kha-mthun.
pwq kha heham-pa—F&QftQ kha-mthun-
pa or F’S4!*4 kha thug-pa to agree upon;
F’wrgfljq kha-hcham khrugs^^'%^^
residing together as husband and
wife; to live harmoniously (Д/лоа.).
kha hche-wa, same as F’^’q kha
thal-wa, to promise ; speaking sweet words
meaning nothing or evil.
kha-hjam gtin-khag — ^'^^'
kha-hjam gfin-nag F
soft and polite in language but
evil at heart.
F'4^’q kha-hjal-ica to measure.
F'q^’q kha hjug-pa to interfere; to
meddle with; meddlesome.
|4’^ kha-rje	the chief of the
clouds; cloud-god. Acc. to Cs. great lord,
mighty personage; good luck, good for-
tune; ace. to <7d. fortune, good, wealth.
F’t’IS’^4! kha-rje khyu-mchog^^S'W®
bsod-nams ТрШ merit, moral virtue (Шоп.).
F’t’^	bsod-nams
can possessed of moral merit; virtuous
(Шоп.).
F'O kha-rje che very powerful ; also
high moral merit:
^4^’F’Iif we brother and sister were
not here, would you have been powerful
to-day? (A. 18).
F’W’q kha nan-pa or F’*4’^’4 kha-la nan-
pa to obey; F’H2* kha nan -po obedient.
F’S^ kha-nun sparing of words; laconic
(Sch.) : F'3^q|'qI^’ kha-nun lag-tsan, F’w’^’
is one who does not
speak many words and who does not act
the thief.
F’^J kha-nog, v. F’^fa kha-nog.
F'^3* kha-m/ham~4N™№ skad-mnam
of equal, ?>., same words or opinion:
if (you) eat together
(you) should agree in speech.
Fl^ kha-rnin old or second-hand articles.
F’rifk^ kha-brhons,
sems-la med-pahi kha-la mdses-po bad at
heart, but very polite in expression
(Nag. 10).
F’ifw kha-snoms of same height; also
of level surface: WF'*V^Twq they
were equal in height;
Bq^ bsil-ri kha-snom§-pahi khon§-skyibs-na
in a sheltered corner or cleft of cool moun-
tains of level surface (Ya-sel. 35.).
F5 kha-ta or F'g kha-tta good advice ;
lesson ; F'S'SS*4 kha-ta byed-pa от
hjog-pa to give advice;
not to give advice to a bad man (Jig.).
kha tam-да, F*% kha-lwa, v. F’
yr*] kha-tbam-ga,^ club or staff with a skull
at the top, the weapon of S'iva, also carried
by ascetics; a trident ; F'B,ql kha tam-ga a
Tantrik club or staff with a skull at the
top, v. F ,qI kha-twam да, trident ; the
Tantrik staff with three skulls piled one
above another at the top, the lowest one
resting on a pot. This was originally
introduced into Tibet by Padma Sambhava.
F'B4! kha-tig bitter; bitter taste, v. F’q i •
kha-wa.
F’?'^ kha-to gin is said to be same
as	gsal-gin, a pointed stake used
for the execution of criminals (Ja.).
F’fa kha-ton or F44^ kha-hdon
a reading or reciting from memory
with a loud voice;	reading
or saying by heart; F’K^'4 kha ton-du

128

$es-pa to know by heart ;	kha-
ton byaft-wa qfkfsicTT (цщ^ат) a
clear recitation of prayer or hymns. Also
explained as
<*Aqv§\q to recite religious tracts from
memory, without having recourse to
books:	“by looking
at scientific works to commit to memory”
(Л. 8).
kha gtad-pa, same as FlfS’4 kha
$prad-pa or *’E|S’q ra-sprad-pa 1. to bring
together personally; to confront: ^5
qvj^fr^hgro ma-nus-par rta ran
kha-gtad hdon pas (17y.) not being able
to go, (he) let the horse go towards you.
2. to turn one’s face.
kha-gtam, resp.	shal-gtam,
oral tradition.
|4’q]fjqj*rq kha gtug$-pa — F'W^’^s\4 kha
la ho gtng^-pa or	kha-la ho byed-
pa to kiss.
frap>c/q kha gton-wa to injure; to abuse ;
to call names.
kha-btag$ anything that is put on
the face, t>., presented or placed before
a person for his acceptance; hence that
ubiquitous article of Tibetan social inter-
course, the presentation or salutation scarf.
These scarves are of various descriptions.
Tho longest and the best ones are presented
to the great lamas, high officials, and to
other personages; they carry respect ac-
cording to their quality, colour and length.
There are different sorts of Г4 kha-
btags (silk presentation scarves)—
kha-btags-la phyi-
mdtod, nan-mdsod, nm-bde-ma, q^q5<4”
bsod-btags, tshe-lha-mo or
•Xwpsrjr&qq 3$^ a Ina-sbags
brgyad-sbags, bcu-sbags, sog§ sna-tehogs
yod.
kha-^tan a soft thin rug that is
spread on a cushion; a cover for a cushion
or couch.
f4kha $ten-du above ; besides; on ;
upon ; at; towards :	de hi kha-
§tefi-du shtigs he sat upon it {Pag, 64*)
kha-§ton not yet having eaten any-
thing ; lit. empty mouth.
p’jfowgq-q kha-§tom$ rgyab-pa is de-
fined as
q wq, to revile one another for no purpose.
kha tbam-ga,	lha-yi
phyag mishan, v. kha-tam-ga.
Г’ чч kha-thal=$F\'W thug-lhal or 34]’
thug rtsatn rice or barley particles.
p wq kha thal-tca^F’&Q kha hche-tca to
promise (C*.).
kha-thi a kind of satin in variega-
ted colours.
Г^З4! kha-thug to the brim= Ч^Л’З4] gdon-
thug : Р’ЗЯ kha-thug §коп-гса\.о fill to
the brim ; f4 kha-nan the inside brim
Р’З4!'4 kha thug-pa to meet in a contest,
in concert with.
kha-thog top or surface; upon a
thing=#4T’ thog-kha on tho roof, on the
upper flat.
kha-thor pustules in the mouth
(Sell,),
Р’^З^ kha-mthun, v. kha-cham,
F'*4s^'q kha-rnihim-pa=zF^№ kha-lhug-
pa agreeing ujxm, unanimous ; also
together with: 3’9*
in concert with the men of the palace
they petitioned (Pag, 275).
Р'ччп kha-hthab 1. regulating of stores
by equalizing their quantities :
01 ya-byed §og§ man nun hdra
hdra by 'd-pa la,

129

SS41 rnift-pahi chad dan gsar ^prod-la hthab
byed-pa (Rtsti.). 2. p’Wq kha hthab-pa=
gynl sprod pa or vaq ачя <i dmag
hthab-pa to fight; to give battle {M.fton}.
kha-hthen btan-wa=^W^
Ion btan-wa to send a reply, to reply ; F’
^*4 kha hihen-pa (to pull the mouth) to
stop a beast of draught.
рчХкч kha-hthor-pa=so-sor
hbral-tca, gyes-pa to scatter, to sepa-
rate one from another; also disordered,
confused, confusion:	a book,
the leaves of which have become mixed
up together;	at the
place there were a few scattered ones
only {A. 23);
among the beasts there are two
classes: those that live secluded and those
that are scattered (in abodes of men
and gods).
FVI kha-dag swept clean, cleared up,
entirely gone:	nor
phyugs. thams-cad kha-dag soft his wealth
and cattle have all disappeared.
F’44! kha-dig or F’?4! kha-ldlg to stam-
mer ; Р’^’Г’ТЧ kha-ldig-mkhan a stam-
merer.
F’VI’^ hha dug-can
poisonous mouth; having poison in the
mouth.
F'^4 kha dum-pa being in concert
with; having agreed.
F’V1’® kha-dul-po (soft mouth) manage-
able ; tractable.
РЛ4! kha-dog or F'^Vl kha-mdog — *^4
mdafti colour:	the
hair became blue-black; Р’ХчЛчЭТМ kha-
dog-gi gzugs	kha-dog
mthun-pa of one uniform colour:
dge-§loft cho$-
gos gsum kha-dog mthun-par gspl-pa he
wears the three garments of a monk of
uniform colour. F*4ql’|^’4 kha-dog tgyur
wa to change colour; F’the colour
changes (Ja.).
F’44rV’F‘® kha-dog $каг-ро=\*№\ dag-
byedor rtsba ku-fa the cleanser, puri-
fier ; also a name for the dub grass {Mfton.).
F’^4|*e^4| kha-dog ftan-pa of dis-
agreeable or bad color.
kha-chen-po metaph. =
gser gold (Mnoft.).
рЧч’О kha-dog Ita-bu or F'Vr%’4 kha-
dog hdra-wa dog lta-Ъи in colour ; like its
colour.
F’X4!’!?’^4!’’ kha-dog $na-tshog$ variety
of colours; of different hues:
kha-dog sna-tshog mu-tig rab
yin-no an excellent pearl is of a variety of
colours {Loft. 5 2.).
F’M4* kka-dog-pa small hole or narrow
hole.
F’X/q’wvuwti kha-dog mt hah ya^pa
variegated colours.
Р’Ч4! W4 kha-dog gsum-pa explained as
ftft ba-glaft rmig-pahi mift
a name for the tree called the ox-hoof
{Mfton.).
F’Sfl kha-drag mighty, haughty;
FV)’q loquacious, talkative.
F\*‘ kha-draft just before; straight on.
F’X kha-dro in Kham* and Amdo signi-
fies	bkra -fi$ auspicious, of good
omen or appearance.
F’X’® kha dro-fy>=F'^№ kha hphro$-po
agreeable, amiable, of pleasant company.
kha gdaft$-pa ftrajnnr,
yawning; opening the mouth; gaping;
widening the mouth :	kha~gdafi$
na$ having opened the mouth widely.
is
130	p X4! I
Г’ ’*Чв| kha~mdog, v. P'X’I kha-dog.
F‘^5* kha-hdar one who speaks too fast
or too loud.
Г kha-hdig cork, bung, stopple.
Fkha gcig-
tu mthun-pa agreeing in an account.
F'^A^ kha-hdcm, v. kha-ton.
F’^XvSV4 kha-hdon byed-pa to reoite or
mutter a charm or mantra.
FA kha-rda muttering, whispering : F‘
to mutter or speak auspiciously.
F к had}? da conversation, talk, pro-
phecy, prediction; it also signifies cHjV4’
qjfgj fyad-pa bzafi-po good explanation or
utterance :
“may the doctrine (of Buddha) prosper”
such was his righteous utterance (A.
146).
F’^*5 kha ^rdah — ^\^ skad-cha verbal
utterance:
§S although he had beheld tho
girl's eyes, he acted as if he had not seen
her and gave no spoken sign.
kha-sdams = F'$ kha-ta or
gdams-kha advice.
kha §dom-pa=zF'W\^n kha mnan-
pa to silence ; to gag or stop the speech.
i F?’4! kha-da-ga wit tho scimitar
or sabre of the Hindus.
kha-na ma-tho-wa, lit. FA*w
Ууч kha na§ ma thon-pa, not confessed, *>.,
not come out of the mouth; ,чгте also
a metaphysical term defined as
a name for sin and moral corruption.
There are two kinds, viz., (1) M^y^F*
bshin-gyi kha-na ma-tho-ica sins
which are committed naturally and semi-
consciously; (2)	bcas-pahi
kha na ma tho-wa sins of overt violation
of law or religion.
Householders and monksin general,
in keeping theso sins and failings conceal-
ed, because they do not issue forth from
the mouth, such are styled kha-na-ma-tho~
tea. FA**	kha-na ma tho-tea mi
mnah-u-a	the sinless;
kha na ma tho-wa med-pa without
sin or moral corruption; FA'*1'^’4!^ kha-
na-ma thohi gtam = V
sinful or blasphemous speech.
FA4!'^ kha iiag-pa=t&4'W% mun-pa
nag-po darkness ; also of gloomy appear-
ance ; morose; wicked (jlftfon.).
FA*’ kha-nah yesterday morning. But
FA*’^’4^ kha-nah-du blta§	to
look inwardly:
tho knowledge gained by intro-
spection, which is carefully to examine
how much of good or evil and virtue or
vice exists in one’s own heart, causes rejec-
tion (of evil) and acceptance (of good).
FAS kha nad mouth disease.
F'^ kha nar-can oblong.
F kha-nas orally; by word of mouth;
FAQ'S'S4! a cuckoo; also to cry or call like
the cuckoo; FA^*'* kha-nas zer-tea to
speak colloquially.
F’^* kha-nih last year.
of cotton cloth, etc.; that having two
colours (Rtsii.).
F’^fakha-nog orF*?4)kha-nog clamourous;
asking often and often for a thing, etc.:
the three may be classed together, (namely)
defilement, importunity, and being strick-
en by lightning (Rtsii.).
I
131
p*q|
р*3[кХ<с kha-nor son he has erred in
conversation.
Р’я^'ч kha mnan-pa = F'lfa'Q kha §dom-
pa to obstruct the speech; also to coerce,
to silence.
Р’ч kha-pa the volume marked with
the letter p kha, i.e., the 2nd volume. Any-
thing (hook or article) marked with the
letter P kha.
P*Q kha-po sometimes=P kha speech,
e.g.y p'Q^q’S mild speech and polished
language.
P‘E?^ kha-po-che^F kha rgyag-pa or
P'^'q kha mah-po talking much:
4rtsi-ge sreg-gor zer-wahi kha
pho-chc a shrew called Rtsi-ge sreg-for,
who was very talkative (Rdsa. 31).
P’gJ^M	khal-pag§ lip.
P’3 kha-spu hair of the face; whiskers.
P’V kha-pho boasting: Р’Ч'й kha-pho-
chc one who boasts much; also boasting
much.
p‘йч| kha-phog verbal reproof.
P’4^ kha-phor нтхчт a cup; a
saucer.
P’B kha-phyi the outer edge.
P*Bvq kha phyin-pa=$\W$*№ gros
mthun-pa unanimity in a conference;
unanimous vote.
P’B^'g kha-phyir #л=И’Х^ р’|ч1*г<1 pha-
rol-tu kha phyogs-pa examining by appear-
ances ; also to look outside (Mnon.): P'^v
kha-phyir bltas kyi gc§-pa know-
ing or judging things by their external
appearance.
P’^ kha-phyi s napkin.
P’3‘4 kha phyc-wa=?'$4'4 kha rgya$-pa
$facr, 1. to bloom or blossom; also
well developed, full blown. 2. = ря$\ц
kha hbycd-pa to yawn.
p*g4p< ЛЛа-рЛуо^§=р,^‘ч5‘5<’|^ kha Ha-
te ahi phyog§ the direction of one’s sight.
радк.’Р kha-hphah-wa—	to
divulge; spread ill rumours (Jd.).
P*^ kha-hphyur swi a solid mea-
sure for grain like bre or hbo.
p'«S|5*q kha hphrod-po, v. P’X’^ kha dro-bo.
|4’q I: kha-wa fintr bitter ; P’$4 kha-
tig from P’4 and bitter, i.e., of
very bitter taste : Х р л ro kha-wa bitter
taste; P'*^ kha-mfiar bitter and sweet;
Р’Й kha-mo bitter: л^’р’Й chan kha-mo
beer that is very strong or of bitter taste.
рГЧ II: =«|^ gafis snow: p*
4	kha-ica duh It ar gsal the snow
(was) unsullied as shells; P’^'J kha-wa
skye xhv, WI snow-born or ocean-
god; PЛАа-<7См = Р'ч5,^,^'ч snowball;
P‘«^ kha-char snow and rain; p*w’« kha-
ma char sleet; Kha-wa-can
Tibet, the suowy country:	3’^ the
country of snow, or snowy country; *
^p’q100 years (after)
my time the snowy lakes of Tibet becoming
dry; Р’Ч'з?4] a swallow, prob, snow-
swallow. p*q5’^i kha-icahi rtul
lumps of snow: рч5%я kha-
wahiphye-ma	snow dust; flakos
of snow; also camphor, PX4q kha*
hbab or Р’Ч’^чч kha-ica hbab snow-fall,
avalanche;	having the name of
snow; p’«ft’X5 f^nrfh glare from the
snow, snowy lustre.
p*q vnvq JJha-гса Jkar-po n. of an im-
portant religious institution in Khams.
P’A’^4 kha-wa ri-pa=^^r4 Gah^
ljoh^-pa a Tibetan; one residing in the
snowy mountains (Yig* k. 6).
132
I: kha-bad the architectural
ornament of a Tibetan house formed by
the projecting ends of the beams which
support the roof.
II: tho humidity of the air
caused by snow (Ja.).
P^’SS kha^war byed^^w** reg-bzafi
of soft or pleasant touch {lifnon.).
P’S kha-bu or P’S4’4 kha bub-pa being
turned downwards:
I have fallen headlong into the abyss
of sin {Pag. 185).
P’5* kha-byan	with
the faeo downwards; learned, wise.
P'3'q kha bye-wa in bloom.
P*9^ kha-brag {kha-tag) forked rocks ;
any forked object; also as adj. S’P’Effl Lo-
kha-brag, tho mountainous wild country
N. E. of Bhutan inhabited by wild tribes.
P S0* kha-bral (kha-tai)	divorce,
separation, especially of lovers or husband
and wife.
P’S4*’ kha-dwah eloquent: рук’Хч] kha-
dican-chog able to speak powerfully, elo-
quent {Nag. 11).
P'S?41) kha-$brag literally tho mouth-
split: Ф’РАЭ4! chu kha-dbrag a river which
is divided or branched out; ***Р55Л a
road which is branched into several paths;
3**^1 -qj-pthe branch of a tree which
divides into several parts; ЙЧ’^’РЛЭТ PW-
7>a kha-dbrag a hoof which is bifurcated
or split.
p’w* Kha hbar-ma	n. of
a goddess {Rtsii.). In tho Hindu pan-
theon Jvalamukhi (she with a burning or
glowing mouth) is worshipped as the
goddess of cholera.
1”’^ I
Р’яд’А kha-hbu-гса, the opening of the
buds of flowers.
P'^'5^q kha-hbub-tu nal-ica to lie
with one’s face downwards.
p'*q*rq kha-hbu^-pa
unblown flower, buds.
P’*9\4 kha hbyed-pa—F^'Q kha-phye-
wa to open a cover or pasted letter or packed
article ; is also used of books.
Р’^’Л kha hbri-tca {kha-$i-wa) to make
loss, to diminish; to detract from (in
quality).
P’g* kha-sbyan eloquence; P'|*’£ kha
sbyafi-po eloquent.
P’5^ kha-tbyar or pgvq kha sbyar-wa
the mouth of a vessel or box closed or shut
up:	z^-chen
kha-^byar rin-chen sil-nias bkafl a covered
copper vessel filled with precious things,
etc. {G kah. 77).
* P’jk kha-tbyor ^thig-le
n. pr. {Schr. Ta. 2, 275).
P’S* kha tbyor	any-
thing that is left after eating or has boon
touched by the mouth but not eaten;
P’jk q to kiss.
kha-sbyor bdun-ldan t’
w Rdo-rje hehan, the Tantrik Buddha
Vajradhara UWfion.).
ря’Ч^ kha ma-hcham = F^'*^ kha mi-
nd him discordant; р’«Н*я kha mi-hcham
does not agree or live in harmony.
ря’З’Ч kha nia-phye-ica	an
opening bud; one of the twenty-one hells
in which sinners are punished, being bound
with ropes.
P*’9 kha-ma bye чГтч a store or
repository {Lex.).
F'yk I
133	I
khami-$es-pa not knowing the
language.
F3^ kha-mur bit (of a bridle).
F^S kha-med silent; cannot reply: ад
lab-па kha-med^ bton-na
rgyu med if asked there is no reply; if ran-
sacked, nothing to produce (from one’s
pocket); F^S’gTS(the common
saying is) “the dumb does not speak,
the tongueless stammers.”
F^ kha-то enchantment; irresistible
influence.
kha-dmar lit. “red mouth”; a
demon or pref a ; a ghostly apparition.
This word is used in astrology and the
medical works of Tibet to signify an affirm-
ative prediction, good or bad. When
such a prediction is realized it is called
p kha-dmar phogy when otherwise it
is called FS^'T'7! kha-dmar tog.
FT* kha-rtsaft=F'4^ kha зай yester-
day forenoon : F^’^’S*41 the boy that
was here yesterday forenoon (Л.) ; also
the day before yesterday; FVM**4p4*y*
kar*san gzah ni-ma last Sunday (Jd.).
F?S kha-rtsod disputation.
F* kha-tsha bitter and acrid; hot in
the mouth; pungent like pepper; acc. to
Jd. (a) a very acrid sort of radish; (b)
aphthae thrush, a disease of the mouth
incident to horses, cows, sheep, &c.; (<?) F
kha-tsha rifi-fie-wa daily warm
food.
F^ kha-tshar 1. fringes, such as the
threads at the end of a web or cloth or
rug, scarf or sash. 2. minor ingredients
in a medicinal mixture :
having made one drug the principal
ingredient, on adding thereto another drug
in less quantity, it is called adding the
kha-tshar.
F£q kha-tshub snow-storm.
F* kha-tsho boasting : F*kha
tsho fin-tu che-wa a great swaggerer (Ja.).
F^S kha-tshod the weighing: F^S‘q?’
kha-tshody btta-phyir tshig-
gi lan smras-pa (A. 6) considering one’s
expression with a view to reply to it.
gan-hdra lab-yon
tshod Ita-ica.)
F^ kha-tshon=f*'*3*4 kha-hgrig, F4**
kha-hcham qt F*'^ kha-mthnn unanimous,
of one voice or opinion. Generally used
with 4^54 meaning 1. as in
w YWF^ WS (A. J), all unanimously
and firmly agreed upon; lit. F3^ kha-tshon
colour; hence to be all of one colour in the
face, ?>., to be	of	the	same	opinion. 2.
thag gcod-pa a final decision or
resolution :	(A.
15) they all resolved	to	forsake their
kingdoms ;	mthah
geig-tu kha-tshon chotj dkah it is difficult
to arrive at a final decision. 3. surface
or width (Jd.).
F*^ kha-mtshul muzzle; mouth;
the lower part of the human face.
F*^**rq kha htshan't-pa=ffiQ smod-pa
to slander; to curse (Mnon.).
kha-htshog abuse : F^4!’^’2* kha-
htehog chen-po a great abuser, a reviler.
F^ kha-hdsin shifts the ouckoo.
F^<Y§S'4 kha-hdsin bye<$-pa to receive
in a friendly spirit; to be kind; to assist
(Jd.); also to govern; f*4<K’*wF4
134
sent or commissioned for governing
(Dsam. 25).
’W4 kha-hdsin gsum are the fol-
lowing three:	sug-smel	{чдг small
cardamom, Convolvulus turpetthum\ $^‘5*
gur-gum saffron; and Э'З’Зч pi-pi-lln long
pepper (Sman. 1/50).
р kha hdsum-pa to shut the mouth.
P’^ kha-shan of inferior quality
or of low position: p^'qwi^qgq the mis-
fortune of being of low birth (Ja.).
PԤ^ kha-shur water-hen (Sch.).
P’3 kha-she mouth and mind: p’^’ft’
ы^елгч kha-she ml mchufa-pa hypocrisy;
hypocrite ; P ^5’q kha-she med-pa un-
feigned ; sincere.
P’^ kha-shefi breadth, expanse, e.g., of
the heavens.
P’^ kha-shen~kha-hb shan~pa modest
in speech; also not able to speak well.
P’^ kha-she$ food, victuals (Cs.).
kha zam, р &'яя kha-che zam
a kind of chintz from Kashmir; also a
kind of cloth or silk stuff in variegated
colours : чтя* bal zam chintz from Nepal.
P’**J kha-za$ food, either in general or
some particular article of food : P’W’«C
kha-zas la brkam-par gyur
he longed for food; p’w<qfc*w kha-zas
gtshaft-ma clean food, or clean in (taking
food). In Sikk. khabze sweet cakes, etc.
Р’^я’ч kha sum-pa- to close tho mouth
or any opening.
J P’^ kha-zur от P’U^ kha-sur the
date fruit.
p’lvq kha zer-ica loquacious.
р’чр^ kha-gzar spoon or ladle.
P’q^ kha-gzi or Р'Я^ kha-gze in IF.
rake in gardening; in Spiti a carrier’s
load; kha ze-pa a coolie (Jal)..
P'W’	tshig-gi
gtafi-rag good speech ; one who speaks
pleasantly (lAnon.).
p5’^ khahi-nin the day before
yesterday.
P’^ej kha-hog lit. face downward; down-
cast ; P’X^j’g’qj^-q kha hog-tu bcug-pa or
$5'4 chud-pa to subjugate one, or to
enforce obedience upon; p’^’5*4g*r^*4
kha hog-tu bltas-te <p-wa to die falling down
head-long, i.e., with the face downward.
fTW kha ya lit. being one’s partner
or match as to speaking, but in general
partner, assistant; p’^'95’q kha-ya byed-
pa to assist : pSl’wx^’jq I am not his
match, not able to compete with him;
with regard to things, I am not equal to
the task (Ja.).
p’^l kha-ytg	the letter Р, a
label ; a letter or writing on the cover
of any parcel or letter; an inscription.
p'^ kha-yel the spout (of a kettle or
any other vessel): g^qS-p’gv^q’p^’QF
drawing with his lips at the
spout which hangs down outside the vessel
(A. 23).
P’^FJJ kha-yog a false charge (Jd): «’V
qcvp’tSjspgA ma ne-pahikha-yog byun(C.) he
was unjustly accused (Jd.); Jy
unfounded accusations arise such as those
coming by word of mouth and by impli-
cation, though one is guiltless.
р’ч]$ч( kha-gyel wide mouth:
the shape of
Sumeru resembled that of a vessel placed
with its wide mouth upwards (i.e., like a
pyramid on a point) (Ya-sel. 35).
p’^pfapi kha-gyogs—F'frw kha-kheb$.
cover of a vessel .or basket (G. kah* 77).

135

kha-ra in W. for T* ka-ra, sugar
(Jd.) ; trough; manger (Sch.).
P'^H Kha-rag n. of a place in Tibet.
F’Mjn. of a celebrated lama of the
Kadampa School of Buddhism.
F’^ kha-ra$ neck-cloth; a towel.
kha-ri or F’5 kha-ru, v. F®*’^ khal-ri.
F’5’^ kha-ru	black salt
used medicinally (Mfton.):	f^?-
CT a kind of salt (procured by boiling
earth impregnated with saline particles);
a particular kind of salt of fetid odour
(used medicinally as a tonic aperient).
It is black in colour and is prepared by
fusing fossil salt with a small proportion
of emblic myrobalan^ the product being
muriate of soda with small quantities of
muriate of lime, sulphur and oxide of
iron (2Л Wills.}. Kha-ru tshwa-yi§ drod
skyed $bo$-pa dan sgeg dan hgyin khrog bad
rluft hjoms-par byre# flatulence, accom-
panied with belching, rumblings, phlegm,
and wind, is overcome by the medicinal
salt.
Syn. ru-tsa ka ; smin-tshba ;
Ы-tani fto {Mfton.}.
kha-re	kha
$kyaft$-pa or fto tsha-wa to be ashamed.
Г’Л'Ч’ч kha reg-pa to touch anything by
the lips; to put one’s mouth to a thing in
order to eat or drink it.
F*X kha-ro taste in the mouth.
F’X^I kha-rog-=P'^$H kha-btsum silent,
without reply : ^‘WJi’A’frr^’F’Xqf there-
fore remain silent with untingling ear !
F’X^ifv^ kha-rog sdod-cig be silent; do
not speak. F’^l’4 is also freq. F’X^x^fq
to remain silent.
F’Xqfq kha rog-pa a kind of
drug, prob, sulphate of copper.
р kha-rlans ггпч vapour from tho
mouth.
p’fli’d’W kha-la me-hbar n. of the King
of the Yi-dag or Prefa.
F'**r^|’q kha-la reg-pa^metaph. zas
to eat; do eat {K. g. £S).
F’^'^’X^VT4 kha-la sla-te don-la dkah
easily spoken but difficult in meaning.
F’®4 kha-lan mouth requital; thanks-
giving ; reply, especially angry reply;
also requital for food received (еТй.):
when disordered with evil
thoughts, the food of faith is my reply
(JA7.).
kha-las byuft sprung forth from
the mouth.
Kha-lin-pa n. of a place in
Tibet.
kha-le, v. E'** khya-le.
F‘“l4 kha-leb cover, lid.
kha-lo 1. = kha-phyogi
towards the mouth. 2. prow of the ship
(Schr.); according to others the helm
3. acc. to Cs. and Jd. the glans-
penis.
kha-lo sgyur-pa or sgyur-wa
3^, u^rr, HTKfa, ; F’®’g^‘”F^
kha-lo sgyur-mkhan one who steers ; also
a governor, a driver, a charioteer. See
especially in narrative of early life of the
Buddha in Dulwa.
F’tf’q kha lo-pa=F'&\^ kha phyogs-pa
UTcfa, ФВ1Т; F’^’g^’W kha phyogs
sgynr-mkhan one who leads or guides;
also a shadow.
kha-log-pa to reply; to contra-
dict :	phyi-la hgro-na
tshur kha log-pa walking out he returned
hither.
Ml
136
kha-qa the spotted deer (<7й.); elk
(Sch.). In Sikk. the common deer of the
Duars is called p‘4« Р’Л^‘ГВЧ kha-<;a-yi
ja-khug a tea bag made of deer-skin.
Р'ЧЧ^ kha-^ags jest ; joke in IK.
(Jd.).
P'-q** kha-$as (sounded “kha-she”) some;
colloq. in C.
Р’ЗЧ”’^ kha-qugs-can or p’45’«q kha
shed-can eloquent ; р'-^Ч4 kha-^ugs
med-pa on€ who has nothing much to say,
same as ЧУ*’414	4 ^kaj-cha lab-tgyu
med-pa.
рЛл kha-^ob in colloq. lies ; obscene
talk; idle talk.
РЛ* kha-$or breach of promise : РЛ^’
kha-qor soft the mouth has run away,
denoting inconsiderate talk (Jd.).
РЛ^'А kha-gol-wa	rinsing the
mouth; sipping water and ejecting it.
IP’-q Khasya n. of a mountainous
country in the north-east of India (Ta.);
the Khasya Hills in Assam.
Р’ЧЧЧ4 kha-gfag§~F'fSkha-rtsod using
rough language; controversy, discussion,
dispute; with rgyag-pa to dispute :
Я Р’Ч^Ч^ 54 5 pointing his fin gers
he goes to dispute (Rdsa. 17).
Р’Ч-qS kha-b^ad talk, gossip.
[Ч^Ч] Kha-sag ^Л4Л’а1;’ n.
of a wild country on the border of Tibet
(Ya-sel. 38).
kha-saiiy v. PT^ kha-rtsaA.
PkhasaAs explained as
j|vq,p,aiiY,2i’«H|S to speak one’s mind; to
tell honestly what has occurred in the
mind.
P’^a kha-sub a bribe : P kha-stlb
byin-pa to offer a bribe.
F*l
P’$ Khasi n. of a wild hill tribe of
India (of the Khasya Hille) (Dsam.).
P‘S^ kha-sift 1. the day before yester-
day. 2. also — several weeks ago; some-
time back.
P’^ kha-sur, v. P'B^ kha-zur.
P’S( kha-so 1. abbreviation of I4 kha>
mouth, and^ «о, teeth. 2. the edge, border
of a thing : рЗГ'Ч^мс/?’ kha-so la bphafi-fio
=	flung to the border (Pag.
187) : Г^’З’Р B^WW^‘5* rdsifis-kyt
kha-khycr las hjah li byas-=- S'
ifdhah la $an-rgyab
lined the border of the ship with iron
plates (Л. 18).
Р*5рг^Ъ kha-sral chuA-Au что deaf.
Р’^ч kha-slob~Fft kha-ton learning by
heart; primer used by children in W.
ГЧ^Ч kha-gsag, v. Р’^ЧЧ kha-bsag.
I4’4^ kha-gsar new, fresh.
Г'4!^ kha-gsal or W
message; clear language;
language: p-iV<i|w«i kha
obscure; not in clear terms or language.
fnf&kha-gso made full by adding some-
thing more to it:	^’P‘4^’ filling
with the best thing and nectar in oblation
(Rtsii.).
P‘*W4 kha	kha gsag ajwra
talkative.
kha bsre-wa to associate with
one another, viz., in drinking and smok-
ing together.
kha-bjan-du turned upwards:
I4kha b$lafi-pa to lie with the face
uppermost.
kha-b$lu$ to tempt by false hopes
and promises; to deceive by sweet words.
. P VI khq-hrag forked mouth or point;
the bifurcated mouth or end of anything
gsal-kha a
intelligible
mi-gsal-ua

137
[ЛЕ'Ч |
5
made of iron or wood:	T'^'F’
nub-ua fift-gcig rtse-mo kha-hrag daft
in the west a tree with forked top, &c.
F'^4! kha-lhag remnant of a meal.
khwa a raven :	khwa-
skad fes-pafyi rig-pa	the’ science
of drawing omens from the caw of a raven.
khwa^krodnus-pa—^^5'^\^^
bya-khwa dej ihub-pa	Iable
to scare a raven—used as attribute of Bud-
dha ; as long as a boy cannot drive away a
magpie he is not considered ready (by his
age) to get religious instructions.
5’5 khwa-ta the Tibetan magpie : 5’5^’
khica-tahi ga-yis gdon-nad sel-гсаг byed,
khba-tahi $gro-yis $g rib-fin. byed the flesh
of the magpie removes diseases caused by
evil spirits; the feather of the magpie
prevents the patient seeing apparitions,
ghosts, &c.; spotted magpie or
khicatakhra-u'a fuller name for the magpie.
4 khwa-	dpya-tcarent or tax
in kind:	cho$ bshin-du
khbaham dpya-hbul paid rent or tax
according to religious law.
Fl I: khag 1. means, resource;
F4! khag-med—*№'&\ without means.
рт| П: a task, charge, business, duty,
responsibility; of importance: F^'B^ khag-
ЛЛмг=^’Н^ hgan-khur to take charge of
a thing or person, to be responsible for
anything, to be surety for anyone; F4!’
*&vq khag hkhur-ica to assume charge of;
ра|’Чч|<ч’ц khag hgel-wa to place in charge;
q khagtheg-pa orF4]^’4 khagrgyag-
pa to guarantee; become responsible:
derhtsho-гса yon-ivakhag-
iheg I warrant you will get something to
eat there. F4!’44! khag-theg or Г*Г|ЭТ khag-

khyag in G. acc. to Jd, = bail; F4’^ khag-
chen important.
III: that which is divided off; a
class, part, division, section (of a book or
place) ; ^’F4! bcu-khag the tenth part;
tithe: р4Г41^1*г'ч’гИkhay gni$-laphog-sofl,
I have hurt myself in two places. ^M’F4!
yul-khag a province, district; g^’F4! vgyal-
khag kingdom; S^’F4! dpon-khag princi-
pality; Vfa'F4! dgon-khag monastic estate
or authority. V^F4!^^’^У4]^4!
the different divisional chiefs
should make religious offerings (service)
for one night (Loti. 4 17) ;
§kyab$ hgro sems skyed-
kyi khag kho-mo cag-rnams we who belong
to the class in whom the inclination (for
religion) and to seek refuge has arisen
(A. 19).
Fl’Sf khag-po difficult, hard; colloq,
° kd-le khag-po.” w л| ^'s^F4^this
work is very hard ;	the way
is difficult; F4!2*’^*’ difficulties arose ; F4!’
q’^’q khag-po chc-wa to suffer from want.
2. acc. to Jd. bad, spoiled, rotten : WF4*
5 the butter has become rancid (Ja.).
рК’Ч Лг/штьра = F^’B*4 khan-khyim HTH,
ЗД^ТТ,	Ч9ППРГ
house, residence, home; a building; ^'F^
§ien-khafi, ^’F* hog-khat^ q^’F^ bar-khafi
upper story, lower story or ground floor,
middle story;	gshun-khan means
also the principal or central room. A
khaft-pa is the opposite to $4’4 phug-pa, a
cavern. q^'F^ bzo-khan workshop; «K’F*
bafi-khan store-house, store-room; if’F^ ^go-
khan entrance, vestibule; SfvF* skor-khafi
or more properly skor-lam, passage
running round a building or temple ;
F^ fog-khan paper house or a house where
19

138
Г51
paper is kept or manufactured. In W\
the scooping form or mould used in the
manufacture of paper is so called.
p* tshas khaft flower bed (garden) (Jiz.). In
Buddhism khaft signifies naft, inside,
ml, the heart:	khaA
myag^gih phyir Jidsag-pa
inwardly being corrupt, the pus issues or
drops from him;	khaft
mourning house; also tho body ; Г’^’Я khaft-
gla house rent;	a small house;
a house or room reserved for decrepit
parents; khan chufi-pa an occupant
of such;	yaft-khaft chuft-pa such
a person of tho second degree (if, during
his life, his son enters into the same right)
(Ja.); khaA chen a large house;
q khan chen-pa	one taking
his abode in a great house or mansion
(Budh.) ; old, weak persons belonging to
Gautama’s family.
Syn. «iMvr** g.na*-kJiaft \ gnas-
gshi',	hptg-pahi gnas;
hdug-sa*,	hdug-gnas; khyim\
рч khab; 5^'^	5^4^ r/<m-
g.na$; §f	gab-can;	phib$-
hog (Itfnon.).
khaft-gner	ajVWps the
steward of a house; the house-keeper; the
person in whose charge a house is kept.
khan-stefi	the upper
roof or terrace of a house,
khan-thog or	khan-pahi
thog $т<5 the roof or cover of a
house; the top flat of a house.
khan-pa bkra-ica
a painted house.
khaft-pa btsan-po a consecrated
house where theives or robbers cannot
have access.
khaft-pa ЪгШдь-ра ят’гг
a masonry building; also a storeyed house.
khafi-pa gyo the roof of a
house :	to cover a house, to roof
it;	khah-pa ral-shift grum-
pa or bdruw-pa a delapi-
dated house; a ruined edifice.
khati-pahi naA
theinsido of a house; a room; an apart-
ment.
Khaft-bu m of a fabulous country;
a little house, cottage.
khaA-mig a room; a cell.
khaA-rtsa the foundation of a
house.
khaA-brtseg^ grei'fK upper
house or a storied room, v.
khan-pa brtsegs-pa.
khaA-shabs floor; flooring of a
room.
khaA-shiA=khaft-pa
dan shin-kha house and the cultivated fields
attached to it. •
(ч^-цэе, khaA-fezan	residence ;
mansion. In Budh, (^4^)» «Ww,
^Ьииктн monument.
khan-bzo-wa wWfa mason;
architect.
khans-pa~*^'4 ranf-pa 1.
delay. 2. distance.
khad=l. «Я thag or tshar near.
2. litter barrow. 3.	like, as FS'
§w kliad-snam$t v.	hkhod §nam$9
equal, even ; de-nia khad=^'W4 de-
ma thag not distantly; instantly; as soon
as ; without delay:	4bugi
chad-ma khad-dn as soon as. the breathing
ceases;	bn ^kyes-ma khad-^ig
139
1^1
a child born just now;	bphur-la
khad about to fly; *5’^5 hgro-la khad
about to go; Ihuft-la khad near to
fall;	sleb$-la khad as soon as (he)
arrived;	hchi-la khad^h^u about
to die:	nub-la khad-pahi tshe
when the evening drew near;
dbugs chad-la khad-pahi du§ when
the ceasing of the breath approaches ; ^<T
zin-la khad yod-pa la as we were
j’ust about to seize him; khad-du as
far as:	khad-du as far as
the heel (Ja.).
PS’Jm khad-kyi^*^'^ dal-bu$ or^’3”
rim-gyis slowly, by degrees;
khad-kyis khad-kyi$ xtmi wh: by de-
grees ; in slow motion.
FS’4 khad-pa the same as
hkhod-pa to stick fast; to be seized,
stopped, impeded, v.	bkhad-pa.
FS’WgKq khad-par gyur-pa to be stop-
ped or hindered;	khad-par byed-
pa to stop, hinder.
F*i khan wraftxr bit; small piece (G$.).
t FYS khan-da confection; a
medicinal s^rup; treacle or molasses
partially dried;	delakhanda
bcos-pa the candy made of it (Ja.).
F¥4 khan-pa also khen-pa, worm-
wood. (Schtr.); to add (aritli.) (Vai. kar.).
khan-man modest in Lh (Ja.).
pq I: khab—'X'^ pho-braft w?
resp. of khaft-khyim) a great man’s
residence; a castle ; court; residence of a
prince;	Rgyal-pohi khab ttwtx
metropolis; the capital of Magadha in
Buddha’s time; the modern town of Raj-
gir in Behar:	Rgyal-
pohi khab-kyi mi-rnam$ the courtiers; the
people of Rajagrha. 2. wife, spouse; F^’
khab chen-ma the first wife (who is
high in rank):	de-lakhab
ho§-pa ma rned-nas as there was not found
a wife worthy of him;
А'йкМ hdi-ynis fiahikhab-tu byufi-гса rmi$-
80 I dreamt that these two would become
my wives (Jd.); pq^'q^’q khab-tu bshe$-pa
to take for a wife (Schtr.); ^‘R’pq'q chtifi*
mar khab-pa to marry; to take one for his
wife.
^qq^'fl khab btsun-ma a married lady;
pq-qfef’»i khab hdsin-ma^BF'Q^'ft khyim
bdag-mo ’ZVQsft housewife; tho lady of the
house.
|ЧЦ II: tHI a needle :	khab-^pu
a bristle; a needle like hair F«rg khdb-
phra a small, fine needle ; f’S'g* khab-$bom
a large needle; pq*^ khab-mig the eye
of a needle;	khab-mig-tu
skud-pa hjug-pato thread a needle;
kha-rtse	ЧТТЦ the point of a
needle.
pqA4 khab-ral also	rtse-ma
khab-ral	needle-case.
pq khab-le in IF. difficult (Ja.).
pq’^X khab-len-rdo ^^<4? load-stone;
the metal that attracts a needle : pq*^*
Ф’the load-stone
draws out arrow-heads and removes
diseases of the brains, bones and veins.
pq*^ khab-loft wWiPff the magnet;
lit. the needle-lifter.
khabs n. of a disease (Ja.).
рл kham 1. colour. 2. a bit; a small
piece of anything. 3. the point of a
reed pen. 4. appetite (Ja.).
I
140
рЯ’рЗЦ kham-kham,	ser-kham
kham or pale yellow:
тяХ/q nidog ser kham-kham smug-
mahi mdog the colour was pale-yellow,
t>., the colour of a dry bamboo.
kham-khum uneven, explained,
as	“in ridges, like a
puckered skin.”
kham-gaft or	kham-geig
a bit; W|W*|S<| a mouthful of food:
3 Л	’^5 the measure
of food in each piece that can be put in tho
mouth at once when eating; kham-
chufi a morsel.
kham-star abbreviation of
kham-bu-dafi star-ga, t>., peach and
walnut.
knam-ldog faded colour, same as
kham-log, want of appetite; nausea,
aversion, dislike (Ja.).
рач’ч kham-pa 1. fox coloured ; sorrel;
brownish; fK’*r*><4 kham-nag dark brown:
ral-pa kham-nag dark brown
locks or mane. 2. porcelain-clay; china
clay. 3. Tenacetum tomentosum, a very
aromatic plant growing on the high moun-
tains of Tibet. 4. a native of Kha ms in
Eastern Tibet.
* p»r25K kham-phor тпта a cup
or saucer made of (burnt) clay ; a cup made
of dough, usod in sacrifice as lamps (Ji.).
kham-hphromi-bcad-pa h®-
refers to Buddha hav-
ing enjoined that a monk must not eat a
fruit or cake, ete., leaving any of it. He
should not take more than what he can or
should eat.
kham-bu apricot; peach; in Sikk.
^5 kham-buhi rtsi-gu the stone of an
apricot (Ji.): ясА’Хя’рэгд Jffiah-ris kham-
bu dried apricot imported from Ngari:
tho peach dries
tho yellow humour of the body and pro-
motes the growth of hair on the head
(J/*?i.); kham-Uhig the stone of an
apricot or peach; ’№<’3д]the cost of a
coral of the sizo of the stone of a large
apricot.
kham-gyag 1. lit. the Boz grun-
Aliens or уаЛ-bull of Khams^ which is
of a brown colour : jf
jk spu-khahi rpdog ter-kham yod-pa
la kham-gyag zer tho colour of the hair (of
an animal) when pale yellow is called F^’
*|uwl kham-gyag. 2. cherries, morels (Ja.).
kham ran-pa
a horse’s bit that fits well.
Fw’* kham-sa clay for making pottery.
ря-чс/ kham-safc=ww: chab-safi,
gein-pa, etc., resp. evacuation ; purging ;
making water.
F*’«K kham-ser of a slightly pale-yellow;
colour resembling tho colour of dried bam-
boo, v. рю'гю kham-kham.
I: khams= dafis-ga appe-
tite.
pJW II: чтд the health, condition,
physical constitution of the body; also root;
a constituent or essential part; that which
constitutes the nature of a thing. Used
colloq. as in kusho, khye'-kyi kham^ta-sam ?
“Sir, how are you ?” (Snd. Hlk?):
kham$* shes-pa
Spyir rafi-bthin nam tio-bo la hjug-pahi don-
can yin-te rlun-gi khams she$-pahi khams
de ni rlttfi rafl-gi no-bo yin.
141
|
III: the six elements, earth, air,
fire, water, the heavenly ether, and nam-
shes or the physical substance of the mind.
For the last two, arterial blood and semi-
nal fluid are sometimes substituted. Also
there are the eighteen elements aco. to
the Buddhists, namely, the five organs of
sense, together with man as (mind); the six
faculties or senses dependent on these and
also the six ideas produced by these
six faculties. Any one of the five proper-
ties or qualities of the elements observed
by the organs of sense, viz., sound, tangi-
bility, colour, flavour and smell, is also so
called.
khams Ъео-brgyad-kyi mig sog$ rten dicafi-
pohi khams drug daft mig-gi rnam-par $e9-pa
sogs $r ten-pa rnam-par $es~pahi khams daft
gzugs-khams sogs dmigs-pa yul-gi khams-
drug daft ico-brggad-do m&y be rendered.
The eighteen khams or Dhatu
acc. to the Buddhists are:—
I	.—The organs themselves:	m*g
eye ; V4 гпа-гса ear; sna-ica nose;
Ice tongue; lus body; and yid the
mind.
II	.—gwgs bodily form; Й sgra
sound; 4 dri smell; X ro taste; X«| reg
touch ; ehosy attributes.
III	.—The	rnam-par $e$-pa
Vijnana or consciousness produced by the
organs of sense, &c. The Vijnana of
mig, of $‘4 rna-wa, of ${*4 доа-w, of g Zee,
of lus and of ^5 yid, i.e., eye, ear, nose,
tongue, body, and mind.
IV: empire; realm; territory;
domain: зргряя yul-khams political terri-
tory; empire, in a geographical sense (Ja.);
rgyal-khams kingdom:
rgyal-wahi khams the province or sphere
of the Buddhas, also of their spiritual in-
fluence :	rgyal-khams hgrini-
pa to roam over the kingdoms, the countries
(Ja.):	empire; also the earth.
paw V:	world: pww khams-
gsum йчГш, the sensual world,
viz:—(1) ^Twrg or	(я^-ц5-|чл«1
Jldod-pahi khams) the phenomenal world;
(2) ^44T?J;	gzugs-kyi khams
the world of astral forms; (3)
gzugs-med khams the spiritual
world, />., the world of formless spirits.
VI: n. of the easternmost dis-
tricts of Tibet, embracing some dozen
semi-independent petty states, about half
of which own allegiance to Lhasa, and the
rest give joint allegiance to both China
and Lhasa. Khams and §gan are
the two lower regions of Tibet; these
constitute what is called ^5’*^ Lod-chen or
Greater Tibet.
khams brtas-pa or
khams-brtas byed-pa one who draws
omens:	theg-pa
gsum-gyi khams-brtas byed-pa (J. Zan.).
рячkhams chen-po—^^'§ dnul-chu
mercury; quicksilver (Mfton.).
khams dbafts-pa=F*w^4
khams bde-iea good health. When glass is
pure	dri-та med-pa and clean
it is called	qel-khams dicafts-pa.
A clear cloudless sky Vе	is said
to be Nam-khams dicafts-pa}
sems sgrib-pa med-pa the mind when it is
free from defilement or sin.
I
142
I**!.
ккатз-Ь<1е=^\ч nag meg.pa
free from disease; health.
Syn.	$ku-gzugs bde;
ner-htshe med; ne shos-tfwen; <q^’
**5 дооЯ-med; ‘^S $nun-med; nad-
bu-med\ ^^'^'$^hbyuft-fahi$nom§* q*^’
A&i Iro nii-htshal (Шоп).
pw^'ViiS khcnn$-faie dri-$med> g,£J’5c/
§mra-ica daft rje^eu hbrel-wa
to inquire of one’s health if ho is well or
happy (a complementary expression used
on the occasion of meeting) (ДГЯбш.).
khamt bde-гса or	gzugs
fab-wa good health; healthy constitution;
the happy state both of the body and tho
mind:	Rje-btsun
gyi khams-bde lags-sam is your reverence
well?	khyed khams fab-ham
aro you well ? (Ja.)
khams ldog-pa=FW^\4 khamt
log-pa want of appetite; aversion, dislike;
pwa kham$-rmya nausea; falling sick
(Cs.).
khams sna-tshogs
mkhyen-pahi $tob$	the
power of knowing the constitution of
all sorts of bodies.
Kham§ mi-nag n. of one of tho
petty principalities in Kham$.
khams mi-hdra-wa,
hjig-rten gyi kham$ mt hdra-wa
different or dissimilar worlds.
khams-tshan this term is
applied to the quarters in a monastery
reserved for the accommodation of the
monks of a particular section of people or
of some special community or those coming
from one particular locality.
fWW kham$-sa$ rest; health; comfort
(Sch.); recreation; recovery; restoration
of health.
khamssu gtogs-pa
trfan included in the constitution.
r»WS^ Шж$-$/лп==р*М‘§'ах kham$-kyi
sla-fia a cooking pan made in Kham$.
pw*§ khams-tle better kind of coarse
serge of the pattern coming from Yar-
kand; blanket manufactured in Khamj'
imug sic khams sle
faas rnam-pa re each piece of blanket
costs, &c.
pw<r)q* kham§-gsum	the three
worlds—heaven, earth and the nether
world.
Kham$-gsum hkhor*
lo§ dsgyur-wa э?г1^т<’Ч'Ж a name of the
KMachakra system (Шоп),
khams-gxum zafa-
khaft-glin n. of the temple in the grand
monastery of Sam-ye (Bsam-ya$) built by
one of the queens of King Khrt згой Iden
btsan (Loft. 3 8).
kham$-gsum$-la ma-
cho gs-pa	is not passionately
fond of or attached to the three worlds.
pwsjWtK khams gsos-par to repair
broken health.
Is* Khar n. of a city in W. (8.
Lam).
khar-bkrol чрцт (Schr. ;
Lebensh. 93).
khar-гкуащ n. F^kha гкуай.
khar-gon steatite; soap stone;
probably dkar-gon (Sch.).
Khar chen-bzah the Princess
of Khar-chen, one of the queens of King
Khri-zroft Idyu, bisan (Lofi. 8).
P^'5’5 Khar Ta-ta n.«of a city or seaport
on the mouth of the Indus, Tata (& Lam).
143
1^1
Khar-pa 1. n. of a demon of
Ригли w India who was killed by Krishna.
2. a compound of copper and zine; bell
metal.
khar-wa mgar a maker
of bell-metal.
P^T* khar-Ttsan—P^'^ khar-san col.
yesterday forenoon.
Jpvg4 khar-dsu-ra Wl;
$ift-gi hbra$-bu the date fruit.
J khar-sa pa-ni or kha-
tar pa-na he that moves in the sky;
gliding through the air; a name of Aval-
okites'vara Bodhisattva; Vishnu.
khar-gsel fa'jjST the trident
carried by mendicants of the
Tantrik School.
khal 1. primarily a load or burden
in general: ртфкчЛЛл/ khyer-wa to carry
a burden;	khal-gyi stefi-la on the
top of the baggage; р*гя$)«гм khal hgel-ica
to load;	khal hbog^-pa to take off
the burden, to unload; WP% a sheep
load; ч^*ч5’рм a coolie load. 2. a set
weight or measure, said to equal 301b,
used for dry goods, corn, salt, tea, &c.
In Tibet 1 khal = 2	bre\ hence
in Sikkim and W\ per^&q “khe-chik” has
come to mean 20 or a score of anything ;
я^чгрх bdegt-khal a weighing score ;
the weight of 20 points on the steel-yard
oalled rgya-ma. 3. a caravan.
F^’F Khal-kha the native name of
Mongolia Proper, the country of Jenghis-
khan, the Tartar Conqueror B’TP’P'wy
Khal-kha khu-ral bla-braA, lit. “the
sacred enclosure of Khal-kha”; the name
applied to Urga in Northern Mongolia,
1^1
where the incarnation of the Taranath
Lama resides. The latter is sometimes
styled рср^чй'^’ч Khal-kha Rje-btsun
dam-pa, the venerable holy one of Khal-kha.
P«r jifa khal-khol stunned; insensible
(Ja.).
^'$4 khal-cag the best sort of wool for
manufacturing shawls coming from the
northern solitudes of Tibet.
khal-tjes = t&'^ do$-rgydb or
5 khal-ma r(a,	plan sogt-kyi ryes
those who conduct a caravan or follow the
train of packed animals, such as pony, yaks,
oxen, &c.; relay of packed animals :
khams sogs thag-
rin-pahi do$-rgya bkhal-rje$ the relay of
beasts of burden when proceeding on a
long journey to Khanin, fyc.
pwkhal-pa 1. wether; castrated ram.
2. sow-thistle, Sonchas.
khal-ban jug or pitcher to hold
wino for 20 persons or a quantity measur-
ing 20 g bre:	'^|M jugs
of ale each sufficient for 20 of the vulgar
folk of whatever class.
рч* khal-ma any draught animal or
beast of burden:	to
drive beasts of burden to the pasture; often
contracted into khal: й’рч’ч^м’^’Д the
wages of both carriers and beasts of
burden.
Р'Ч'^ khal-ri^P^'S khal-ru or P'% kha-
ri or P'5 kha-ru a measure of about 20
bushels.
F^ khas for PЯм kha-уц instr, of p
kha.
kha^khyag^P^^ khat-ihegi
or P4’i^ khag-theg$ to be witness; to give
evidence.
ш
Pl
р*г& kha$-che = fW%m khat-blafa pro-
mise.
рн&'Л kha$ che-гса яГн^гт to promise;
undertake:	khas che-wahi
dge-$lofi	a Buddhist monk who
has taken the vows.
Syn. P*r£ khas-chc;	phyogs
bzufi;	fle$-par mnan-bya$;
?N yofi-dag-thos;	hdag-gir
bya$;	so-sor mnan; 4|WV< gyar
dam;	dam kha$ blaft$-war
hos-par;	dam-bcah; рм’ЗЦ khat-lcn
(tfnon.).
khas-brjod— SJ’SS^4 glu-Jbyafa
song; singing (ДГяон.).
pur^qr;^' kha-nan &caft-chuft = **W
mi nam chuft a humble man.
ргдад kha$-blafis = FW^ khas Jen Ч&П,
^jhb,	<згчтгн promise; consent,
approval; knowledge; acceptance.
p*r<W4 kha$ shan-pa humble.
рн’^’^’й* kha-lan rgan-khur responsi-
bility.
P<V^‘« kha$ len-pa or p'^’4 kha lafi-
wa <sxnntfi< 1. to promise; to stand bail
or security. 2. to presume; to arrogate;
to accept, adopt with the mouth; to ac-
knowledge, admit (Ja.).
ft к hi numcrioal figure 32.
Khi-Ы dsa-la	n. of
a city in the neighbourhood of the fabulous
S'ambhala.
khihu khyin or khi-chufi)
a small cutting-knife.
kha numerical figure 62; also for fl4*
khu-wa (humour or juice or sap), as in
khu khrag sogs	humour,
blood, &c.
khu-gu uncle (Cs.).
13*4 |
O4! khu-khrag tho mixture of
the semen with the uterine blood by which
process, according to Indian physiology,
the foetus is formed (Med.).
й'5 khu-tu a hut, cottage, constructed
of branches of trees (Ja.).
Khu-thu-chi the title of a Mongo-
lian nobleman: ^Н'йЗ'В’З’Х^-ам’Хч Sog-pohi
khu-thu-chihi cha$ thob obtained the robe of
a Mongolian Chief.
S*5«tkhu-rdul~	Л/ш-rna water-spray:
the water in all
its particles issued fresh from the clouds
(А. 149) :
nam-ipkhabi khams mi-dans-par
byed-pa smug-pa dan rdu[ sogs the firma-
ment of tho sky was obscured by mists
and fogs. In medical works the seminal
fluid of the male is called H khu and of
females yi rdul.
ВЧ Khu-nu the districts of Kunawar
and Bissahar on the Upper Sutlej, border-
ing Tibet and inhabited in the northern
part by Tibetans:	grapes from
Kunawar.
khu-rna, v. khu-rdul.
H 25 Rhu-po n. of a place and also of a
Lama of that place (Deb.).
|5’П khu-wa=$'Q shu-wa; th,
1. fluid, liquid:
^ q^-q^ q5’B-q ihu^bzad bkrus-pahi khu-
a: a the liquid (water) which has washed
a mendicant’s bowl;	khrus-khu
dish-wash; swill (Ja.);	hbras-khu
rice-soup (Cs.); rice-water (Schtr?);
$in-khu the sap of trees; S"B rtsa-khu the
sap of plants (Cs.); **TB $a-khu broth;
gravy; WR mar-khu melted butter. 2.
semen virile.
Н’З |
145

.Syn. g^zla-wa; ^'^thig-le; sa-
Ъоп\	stob$-ldan;	dtcan-
por hgro\	byafi-scms dkar-po;
улга dbafa-nia;' ^'^'q khams dkar-po
(Mfion,),
khu-wa kun-ldan = gfЯ’
§po$-dkar fid the S&1 tree, the dried sap of
which fa used as incense.
Syn.	sha-lahi pfl, sra-
rtsi pn,	§po§-dkar qift,
vnchod-^byiu $po$ (Mnon,),
R,£3'^ khu-wa Idan, v. thar-nu,
S’^'§5 khu-гса byed—tfS&K marrow; to
make a soup of; also to make an infusion
or decoction of: JftV’-Т^’Э’
(Mnon.),
khu-ica hbyin-pa, |*гч^ч|,й’
to emit semen.
й'Ч'^’ч khu-wa ser-po—^'^ $yer-tca n.
of a plant from which a kind of yellow
dye is made in Tibet (Mfioni).
khu-wahi bdag-md= |
$kye$-pa 5^4 meton. for a male person.
khu-xcahi hphow^fa the dis-
charge of the semen.
Й’д5’khu-uaht dwafi-po 4TT<-
ХЯ a kind of mercurial medicine.
khu-wahi $lob-ma Ij4i-fira=
lha-ma-yin the class of demi-
gods on Mount Sumeru who fight with
the Lha (Mfion.).
Khu-be n. of a place to the west
of Lhasa.
0-S khu-wo wb uncle on the father’s
side, t.e., pha-spun, father’s brother,
uncle ; R’5^ khxt-dbon also khxi-tshan,
.uncle and nephew:
father’s brother is called A-khuor Khu-Ъо.
15’^ khu-byug	cuckoo.
Syn.	dpyid-kyi pho-na\
nags na dgah-ica;	ч hdab-
mahi thig-pa;	xxa-tshod gnas; «top
mig-mdses;	5’^ hdod-pahi tala;
gshan-gyis gsos\ fiag-
snan ; dwan-snan ;	gshan-
la sems;	hdod-pahipho-na;
g’q^g,^ §kad-la Ifia-pahi dbyans\
sbran-rtsihi sgra (Mnoxi,),
В	khu-byug gwgs-zla — ^'^'u
zla-tva bshi-pa the fourth month of the
Tibetan year corresponding with the
month of May (.SWl).
H’S4)^4! i: khu-byug-mig eyes like those
of the cuckoo; red eyes.
и : = угЯ-Ло hksa
n. of a tree (Мйоп.),
khu-byug-rtsa n. of a medicinal
herb.
Н’^АЛи-шяуpurse, money-bag; colloq.
for ’« khug-ma (Jd,),
R’^ khu-tshur	the clenched
hands; fist.
khu-tshur gyis htsho=^^
чМч gser bzo-ica a goldsmith ; one who
makes his livelihood by the use of his fist,
i.e,, hand-craft (Mnon,),
khu-tshur bcins-pa to clench
the fist; also to hold with the fist
(Mnon,),
*Rkhu-tshur bcifis fist;
closed hand (Schr,; Kalac, T. 131).
khu-tshur snwn-pa^^&^^'Q
khu-tshur rgyab-pa to stnke with the fist
or the half-closed fist (Sch,),
Khu-hod bzah n. of tho mother
of Bromgton, the founder of tho Lamaic
hierarchy of Tibet.
20
146
15^1
B’B khu-yu hornless; having no horns;
also a corruption of tho word khu-byug in
colloq. Tibetan.
B*^ khu-ra, snumJchur cakes or
pastry fried in oil or butter {K. du. 327).
О khu-lu 1. the short soft hair of
the yak, also pashm wool in general. 2.
In Lh. venereal disease; syphilis {Jd.).
B'^ Khu-le 1. n. of a place in Tibet:
KhuJe rnam-rgyal tho Lama
Namgyal of Khu-le ; R
Habo Gang-ri, a part of Khule. 2. In the
Dzang-lun tho word is used to denote
tho pan in an ordinary pair of scales on
which tho weights are placed.
1^ khug or B^N khngs 1. a comer or
nook; a creek, bay, gulf, inlet; O4)
khug crook in a river: B^'5 khug-tu, in tho
inner recess of a cavity. 2. imp. of
hgug-pa	drawn or attracted by;
gycn-du khug called upward, i.e.,
to good luck or fortune; khug-thub
earned, acquired.
B4!’^ khug-khyog solitude; solitary
place; a place with few men.
khug-rta, B*T5 khug-ta or в^ВЯ’
$ dli-khug-ta	the swal-
low, Cuculuz melanoleueus, a kind of swallow
(Os.):	tho lungs of й4!'?
khug-rta suppress pulmonary diseases
{Med.).
Syn. char-$tod*, chufi-nufi*,
c spriu-la §lofi;	sprin-hdegs;
bzan-mo ;	thub-pahi-bu;
едга-здгор§; char-dgah {Mnon.).
№[%khug-$na or khug-fna, fnvn,
яргзп fog, mist, haze (during a calm,
especially in spring time) : mentioned also
as u^'qis]лр	“ one of the
eight varieties of causal concatenation.’*
ВТ41: khug-pa turning like a zig-zag;
also bending like a thread that is trimmed;
oWB^P lam khug-pa the twist of a road;
g'VB4!’4 skud khug-pa entwining of a
thread ;	4 dus khug-pa returning
to mundane existence at tho expiration of
each term of life.
fisp n: to find, got, earn, draw: X*'
nor khugs-pa han srid it is even
possible that cash may bo replenished; ^5*
B4!^'4 &nid khugs-pa to get asleep:
B4]^ srafi gsuni khugs it drew, i.e., weighed
three ounces (Jd.):	khug-pa
hco-brgyad “ the eighteen turns/* i.e.,
returns to life in tho present kalpa.
*R4Tq^Pr$’ Khug-pa Ihas-rtsi^'^'0^'
Rta-nag ljgo$ Lo-isa-wa (Sohr.).
khug-ma also pouch ;
little bag; small sack; g'B4! rgya-khug
Chineso bags made of leather; ^'B4)
ske-khug ncck-bag; a bag with charmed
objects or important letters hanging
at the neck; a courier bag; gf’B4]
glo-khug bag carried at one’s side;
dnul-khug pouch for silver, a purse; ^’B^J
bul-khug a pouch containing soda; d’jflpr
meJcags khug-ma tinder-pouch with
flint; 5'R4! nuJchug sucking bag for
babies ; ^ B4! rtsamJchug a bag of barley
flour; tswa-khug a salt bag;
shibJchug little bag for flour; Ч^'В4!
gyan-khug pouch containing auspicious
articles to draw good luck.
RT*’4 Khugs-pa m of a dynasty
originated at a place called Khugs-pa:
Vl is the n. of a historical work containing
accounts of the succession, dynasty, etc., of
kings narrated by Khugs-pa Thug$-rje
ohenpo {Yig. 9).
147
Fl
15е khu fl I: hole, pit, hollow, cavity,
originally used, only of dark holes and
cavities: R*‘^* khun-nal	that
sleeps in a lair or hole; a snake; ^‘R^ $na-
khun nostril; ^'R^ chab-khufi. a sink;
R^ mchan-khuft armpit: armhole ; ^K^’R^
gtor-khun a sink; a gutter; ^’R^ mdah-
khun loop-hole; a hole made by an arrow;
S’R^ by-ikhun mouse-hole; ЭЯВ^ brag-
khufl a cleft in a rock; bso-khun
peep-hole; 5*r^ hi-khufi or ^’R^ mig-khun,
^R^ te-khuti, are used of any hole in
walls, clothes, &c., caused by natural or
artificial causes.
II : = $Г’Ч rtsa-ica root: ^-rez^e?
dehi khun
nahan Bod-kyi sems-can dan Safis-rgyas-
kyi bstan-pa from that root the living be-
ings of Tibet and the religion of Buddha
spread out, &c. (Л. 128).
R^'V1!^ khuft-drogs soot of an oven or
chimney (Sc/г.).
R^’4 khun-p/a or R^’4 khun-po a large
hole.
R^’5 khun-bu=^ khun a small hole
(Cs.); spu-hi khun-bu the passage
of perspiration; hair-hole or cavity.
R^’Q’^ khufi-bu can full of cavities or
holes.
C\
Khun-tsi or R^'S^ Khun phuhu
tsi Confucius, the first law-giver of China
and founder of Confucianism.
[^^44 khufls origin, source: R^'g12*
khuns-skyel the act of making over the
charge of any office or store in a faithful
manner without anything missing, making
use in full of that bought over as a loan,
&c.:	choskhun dag-pas фхм and
uninterpolated religious work; also pure
1551
religion : ^5'qRwVT4 tgyud-pa khufis dag-
pa of pure origin or lineage. The word
RWV*p khuns dag-pa is also applied to
articles of the best make and quality from
well-known centres of trade:
hdir yod
rmons-mi-rnams nas khuns-skyel thub-pahi
snun-shu hbul the benighted people of that
place petitioned stating the real state (of
affairs).	khuns-thub pure and real,
original; R^’^5 khuns-me# or R«Rq
khuns-fian-p/a having no good origin, f.c.,
mean, inferior: ^*tre^ gtam-khufls histori-
cal or traditional source; record; document:
gtam khnfi s-canyin the source
of that speech is divine,
If asked
what is the nature of meditation, it is the
secret source of being able to abandon
imaginative thoughts (rnam-ttog) together
with their seed (Lam. ti., 1/3).
R^V* khuns-ma^^$'*№'^\ 4 dnos-nas
yod-pa original and really existing or
V4’4 §pus dag-po, of excellent quality, same
aS
some of pure descent had reasons
arising from genuine grounds.
khufis-btsun well-founded;
genuine; of undefiled origin: Ч^^е/^е;
as described in what-
ever Bon texts that have a genuine origin.
RS khud coat-lap or any makeshift
cloth; wrapper: M^’S'RS’^’V^’R^ go^-kyi
khud-du dril te khur carried wrapped in the
flap of his coat; R5'^ khud-du aside, apart;
secretly;	khud-du hjog-pa to
put; lay aside: RS‘^5”’4khud-du byas-pa
to have shown one’s authority over a
thing which belongs to many.
13^)51
148

khud-pa pocket, pouch {Sch.):
rdsa$ or	skyel-rdsofis any-
thing sent; a dowry; an article presented.
R5'* khud-ma side ; edge (Cs.).
R\3 khud-ze for BS,QrqPS khud-la gzad
hold forth the lap of your coat!
khun-ti or khyen-ti is stated
to be used in Pur. for he or she (Ja.).
|3khun-pa эгзгн the uttering of
any inarticulate sound; cooing; moaning;
the rattling of wheels; rumbling of the
bowels ; to grunt (Jd.) ;. to groan {Sch.).
15^'5 Khum-bu n. of a place in the
confines of Tibet and Nepal {S. kar. 77).
й«(”) khum{$) crooked (Jd.).
khum$-lag= §kyes-lag, XV
don b§gyur-yiu diminished;
changed:	if your faith
be diminished (Л. 85).
15^ khur or khur-po НП burden;
load for men :	the father’s
burden having fallen on the son {Pag. 23):
^4] one that lives by carrying
loads (Ja.):	khur-fin wooden pole
over the neck from the ends of which loads
are carried; a milkmaid’s yoke-pole is
called RV^ khur-hdsiu: В^'В^’З khur-
khur-po he who carries the bodily existence
is Pun-gala; a corporeal being; B^’3*1’^4
khur-gyis dub-pa	one worn out by
carrying loads; В^’З^’Х^’4 khur-gyi§ non-
pa one drooping under a burden or load, also
pressed down by responsibilities and suffer-
ings :	were
pressed down by the weight of many
miseries; R*‘S| khur-gla	the wage
for carrying a load :	khur-rnan. id.
khur Ici-ica heavy load or respon-
sibility :	being old,
heavy burdens and death wore them out
{Lam-rim. 7k).
Rvq^q khur-brnan-pa^^'Q &yar-wa
TO (from vrfk) to borrow; to take loan of.
khur-thag=fi^khur-
yofis hdren-thag or hphyah-thag tho
rope used in suspending loads from the
ends of a yoke-like pole; rope to carry
loads.
hdegs-byed giving over
a charge or responsibility or load.
R^,{i khur hdren-pa НтТтж one who
carries or draws a load; one who takes
charge of.
Rvq’ khur-pa and R^’^ khur-mi a
load-carrier; a coolie.
R*’*Sp4’4 khur hphrog-pa НПТП the
depriving of one’s charge; the robbing of
one’s load.
B^’q khur-ica, v. RV&< khur-Miot.
khur-bor-гса wnp|'d*l К he wrho
has laid down the burden, charge or res-
ponsibility. In Buddhism RVWv4 khur-
bor-wa orB^‘5’^’4 khur-po bor-wa, one who
has laid down the five aggregates {skan-
dha), i.e., he who will not have again to
take corporeal existence; one of the perfec-
tions of a S'ravaka.
Rvg^rq khur blah-pa to take over
charge:	hbrel bfad kyi
khur blafi$-pas having undertaken the
task of expounding {Situ. 2).
В*’я*(*9 khur-mah{$) or RV*K’q khur-
mafi-pa, RV&s khur-tshod fnfax,
dandelion, or the ? ba-glah lee) ox-
tongue (as it is called in Tibet), used as a
pot-herb and medicinal plant, a kind of
149
I
I5°i I
edible herb:	dandelion
is -useful in fever and brown phlegm.
Syn. R^A khttr-tshad ba-glafi
{се (Шоп,).
khur-tshos or	mkhur-tshos
; ЗПТ^Г the cheek, the ruddy part of
the face below the eyes.
Sy n. 0^’4 khur-гса.
|§vA'q khur-bzod-pa нпмн one who
is able to carry a load, who has patience
to carry a burden or responsibility.
khur-la nii-hjigs-=wtf$ sa-
yshi the earth (Шоп.).
R*A khur-len the charge of :
the resi-
dent officer in the Jong about this date
of the month and year took over charge
of the Jong (district).
khur-bsam che-ica one having
a sense of responsibility : §5’FA1KRv
general instruction for
the necessity of a sense of responsibilities
in an office.
№ khul 1. jurisdiction ; province ;
domain; district:	Gshis-rtse-khul
within the jurisdiction or province of Shi-
ga-tse:	Lha-sahi khul all the places
belonging to or within the town jurisdiction
of Lhasa: ^R^a^ dehi khul la hdug
is subject to him (Jd.). 2. also manner,
state, or circumstance:
if you do not know, act the manner of
knowing:	if (you) have
(it not), act as if you had:
I have been doing a little
business in buying and reselling from
one party to another. 3. a ravine (in
JTunaioar). 4. the soft down of furs (Sch.).
5. R<W khul-wial small basket for wool.
6.	very soft wool of Tibetan goat which
grows next to skin, and also called R‘R
khu-lu or AW# lal-hjam : R^’g'^ khul
Sgye-mo made of the softest goat-hair or
yak-hair : R^’B^ khul~phyifi felt made of
the softest wool of goat or yak.
Syn.	mfiah-shabs; w* A mfiah-
hog (Шоп.).
R^’* khul-та the bottom or tho side of
a thing (Cs.).
R^’lr khul-rise — У-за ha-can or A 5 <jn-
tu to a great measure, lit. from the bot-
tom to the top; hence entirely, greatly
(Yig- Ц).
R^’I'S khul-rtsid an abbreviation of the
words R’$ khu-lu and 15 rtsid.
khe numeral ninety-two (92).
P’B khe-khye or khe-ma 1. profit,
gain ;	khe-spogs ditto ;
khe tshon byed-pa to trade; to traffic; to
bargain ;	gain ; advan-
tage obtained by experience. 2. tetter;
herpes; ringworm (eruption on the skin)
(Sch,).
j*A Khe-gad n. of a place, the birth-
place of	4 Lo-tsa-wa Bkhor-
lo grags-pa (Lofi. -3 30).
JLhe gan-risen. of a monastery
in China erected by the Chinese Minister
Ka-thi-shee (Yig.).
q khe sgrub-pa to make profit, to
gain :	q khe brgyab-pa to make a
good bargain (Sch.).
khe-can with profit; profitable.
khe-nen profit and loss; risk; also
good and evil, i.e.y yag and ne§.
^’4 klte-pa in Amdo =	4 tshofi-pa
tradesman ; dealer; one who makes profit
|	150	Ч [
by selling or in business;	t$hoft-
hdn§ к he-pa trader; middleman.
Khe brag-mdo n. of a place in
Kong-po, whore tho eighth incarnate Kar-
тара Lama was horn.
khe-тсф unprofitable.
khe-ru hgro-wa to fall in price.
Klie-le mon n. of a place in
Mongolia (Yig.).
w^’Zi khe-$leb$ chen-po very profita-
ble yielding good income.
<4^34 Khe-gsnm n. of a place in Tibet
(8. Aar.).
kheg$, v. I4 kha.
jfcapra i: khegs-pa to obstruct; close:
(tho medicine) will
certainly obstruct the passage of tho womb.
п: = ^'ч tj тип-pa spyi a general
name for darkness, gloom or obscurity
(Шоп.).
khefa-gtam boastful words or
language.
Syn.	dregs-tsig; «/К fia-ro
(Шоп.).
khefis-ldan	bu-mo
dar-ma a youthful maiden (Шоп.).
khefi§-pa VWT, 1. pride,
haughtiness, arrogance. 2. pf. of
hkhefi§-pa to fill; become replete with,
3. puffed up, haughty, arrogant:
khefis-pa-can	one who
boasts; braggadacio.
Syn. refi$-pa\ X4!”’4 dregs-pa;
fia-rgyal (Шоп.).
khen-hdra a kind of cotton
cloth.
F>¥4 khen-pa 1. wormwood (Schtr.).
2. to lean; to repose on (erroneously for
d|^-q bkhan-pa) (Sch.).
kheb$ *p4T a cover, lid,
coverlet: apqr an enclosure round the sacri-
ficial ground ;	kheb$-kyi dra-tca
srra a not (generally of iron) to cover any-
thing ; pafi-khebs a cover for the
lap; apron ; napkin ; 5f F4** sga-khebs a
cover for the saddle ;	cog-rtse
khebs a tablo cloth;	ehar-khebs a
rain cloak:	thod-khebs& cap;hood;
gdufi-khebs a certain beam or
board abovo tho capital of a pillar ; 4V’
^44 gdofi-khebs, veil; cloth to cover the
face ;	mdun-khebs in W.
apron.
khebs-hgab-pa to place a cover-
ing (over a thing); to cover.
pwwq khebs san-гса to tako the cover-
ing off.
gyogs-pa cover-
ed, veiled; khebt-ma covering (Cs.).
khem, v. 0* khyem.
kher-rkyan alone; solitary:
there was only one man, a
solitary man.
kher rgyag-pa to defraud;
to usurp (Soli?).
psrlf Khel-sgo n. of a district, also
that of a mountain:	Khcl-
sgo ri-la sdog rgyu-khyod.
khel-ua 1. to load upon;=яр«гч
hkhcl-wa (Ja.). 2. rely upon; depend on;
gf'j^rq bio khyel-wa, sftv'Q bio e/ies-wa to
have confidence in ;	brten khei>-
ua to be sure; to be certain; to be certain
of anything; absolutely certain :
Sfc’«J5^Q| de-riil yofi, brtan-khel-yin (his)
coming to-day is absolutely certain.
iM^ii
151

kites-nin the day before yes-
terday (Sch.).
khes-pa 1. to hit (tho right
thing) :	gnad-la khcs-pa to
strike the vital parts; to hit mortally»
2. one who makes profit or bargain by
selling; a petty dealer, trader.
kho I: numeral 122.
p kho II: the usual word for the pers.
pron., 3rd pers., meaning he, she, or it.
Although not an honorific term, it occurs
in many authors in referring to both com-
mon personages and respected persons, es-
pecially in Milarapa and even in much
earlier works where kho often refers to kings
and lamas. However ffc’ khofi is the
proper honorific term of the 3rd pers. pron.
In certain districts and in some popular
writings Я mo is used instead of kho for
“ she,” but it is considered a vulgar and
illiterate usage. Tho plural takes «*4 or
e. P*4! kho-сад, they, them; also
kho-tshO) commoner in W. In C.
kho-rang is the popular form for “he ” or
“ she,” $c.
kho-ti tea-kettle, prob. Chinese
(./«.).
kho-thag gcod-pa to
acquiesce in ; hope for; be resigned to:
(Pag. 45) hearing the account of her
son having usurped the kingdom, JJphrcfi-
can acquiesced in it. The word sems
often precedes this phrase.
Kho-mthin lha-khan n. of a
monastery in Lhobrag, South Tibet»
[6’3) kho-na 1. only, solely, exclusive-
ly. 2. just, exactly, the very:
sdigpa kho-na sin only; dge-гса kho-
na piety alone:	^kad-cig kho-na
only for a moment;	hdod kho-
na s brcl-wa to be separated even from desire:
as he intended
only the welfare of beings:
(Pag. 134) it will be the fault only
of one’s own doing:	that
is just what has been wished for by the
king (Ja.)'.	]П8^ as before:
the very same (man) :
just like a worm :	by the
very same process:	dc-kho-na the
state of being that; true state; real state;
truth ; reality; opposed to what is illusory
or fallacious; essential nature; the real
nature of the human soul as being one and
the same with the supreme spirit pervading
the universe; (in philosophy) truth, reality,
a true principle.
Syn. 5^ $a-§tag;	hbah-shig
(Milon.).
[6’4	kho-сад or khon
is ho they.
Kho-po a tribal name in Tibet:
«Гч	Rag-le la kho-po daft kho
dbra gnis, the Rag-le tribe is divided
into two—pq Kho-po and	Kho-dbra.
kho-wo I ; myself ;
kho-гсо cag=*\* we :
bdi-la kho-wos fio-mtshar gyur this pro-
duced admiration in me :
ifq’^q for this system my enthusiasm
increased. In	the term
kho-гсо would seem to mean “himself”—
the soul of man himself.
Kho-bom the early Tibetan name
for Khatmandu, the capital of Nepal, In
East Tibet Khatmandu is still called
Yam-bu.

152

р^Л//с-ма=р^ khom knapsack; wallet
p£'31 kho-mo I; wo (feminine)»
kho-gyu the thrashing process,
which is done by driving a number of
oxen fastened together round a pole that
stands in the middle of the thrashing
floor.
pA i: kho-ra is evidently a corruption
of kho-rafi,	mi kho-ra ran-
gi of the man himself (flag.).
и : (Ck.) also *p£v^ khor-sa circum-
ference; circumjacent space.
pS’Vpfc’’^ kho-ra khor-унд 1. space;
also fence; any surrounding wall (Ja.);
also a ditch filled with water or moat round
a city or a fort. 2. kun-na$ нн’ЯгГ:
from everywhere, from all directions ;
р^р^’$Я’5 kho-ra khor yug-tn in a circle;
in circumference (frequently in measuring)
also roundabout, all round, c.^., to en-
compass : p^ЛК5 in the whole circuit,
roundabout (Jd.) :
extending over half a yojana or two miles
all round.
pA kho-rc 1. in Khams an expression of
displeasure or anger towards a man : w
Кчщя-годе Oh friend! is the opposite of
pA kho-rc. 2 one of the early kings of
Tibet, son of King Lde-cug mgon.
kho-la che-u'a 1. a large space
(Sc7h). 2. dough made of rtsam-pa
(barley flour) and beer.
P’QI4] kho-lag^^^ sku-his limbs, the
entire body :	kho-lag yans-pa
fully developed body or prominent limbs ;
his
person being well-developed, was large and
glowed with grace and brightness ; g'^*
q-erp-^nj anything that is large all
over is called kho-lag che-ica. Also a gene-
rally well-developed shape is called kho-
lag che-wa.
kho-lag rdsogs^Q^’^'Q
tsho dar-ка youthfulness; full youth
(ДГЙап.).
р5ч] khog, freq, for pfc‘4 khoft-pa 1. the
interior, inside. 2. for khogs or
hkhogs. 3. also for	hgegs-pa;
<pfo| qa-khog the carcass of an animal for
moat : p^j	khog
hdsud khog-pa ph у cd dan lhu-gzug$ sogs
(Jig.) the entire body and one half of the
carcass and the parts of tho animal (slain).
pfa] khog-gcofi. chronic disease in
the stomach or internal parts of tho body.
pfr|4S khog-chud for pfc‘^45 khofi-du-
chud.
khog-pa 1. inside; the stomach:
ц1е digestion of food in the
stomach. 2 the trunk of tho body, con-
taining the heart, lungs, liver, &c. :
p^l rus $bal gyi khog tho interior of
the body of a tortoise.
khog-ma also rdsa-khog
pot; earthen vessel generally used in Tibet
for cooking rice, meat, broth, &c. ; ^’p^l
rdo-khog a stone vessel or pot used in
Kham* for cooking purposes; p^)'^ khog-
chen large earthen or stone vessels for
cooking the food of a large number.
pfaj-ujMi khog-yafa or pfapr^'q khog-pa
che-wa capacious or large interior (Ya-sel.
4S) : p^l^’ khog-$in the core of a tree;
heart-wood.
pw]*4pi]5H khog-$uy& a groan ; a sigh.
khogt-pa 1. imp. of
kgg-opa,	stop
pfc-|	153
that goat from eating the flowers. 2. to
cough (Ja.).
pfc I: khofi an honorific equivalent of
P kha, he, she:	kkofi-gi thugs-
la in his thoughts;	khoft-
gi $ku-mdun-du in his presence ;
rgyal-po khofi-rafi yin dgofis-
nas tho king supposing that he himself
was meant. Plural ffe'* khoH-tsho they,
them.
ph’q khon-pa the interior of anything;
the inside; also as adv. in the forms khon-
du, khoft-na, inside, within; also postp.
khon-nay into, within ; khofi-nas out of.
Certain phrases occur:	to be
anxious, to bear in mind, be impressed;
to repeat from memory;
to collect in the mind; to impress on the
memory; to learn (by heart);
not to appreciate (Jlbum. 239 to 2J/9) ; ffc’
not that it was not understood
or appreciated (Hbum. 239 to 2J/9):
khoft-nas $nift phufi-гса liar as if
their hearts had burst out;
khofi-nas sdafi-wa wfa to be angry
or indignant;	khofi-nas pyyuft—
nah-na$ phyufi, was taken out;
khon-pahi drod-la phan it
helps the internal heat, i.e., digestion.
khofi-hkhrug uneasiness; sorrow;
anxiety.
j’fc jg khoft-khro (kofi-tho) or khofi
khro-wa the state of becoming
angry; passion; also inward wrath, malice;
ffc’gkhon-khro-can ъфЬ bitter; angry ;
malicious:
g	even all the good that
was done, by one angry outburst may be
destroyed ;	khon-khro §poft-wa to
put away or subdue anger; jfc’g’rq khon-
khro za-wa to conceive anger, take dislike;
to be indignant;	khofi-
khrohi rnam hgyur med-pa free from the
state of passion or anger {Pag. 130.).
khon-gaft full inside ; solid.
Syn. tskod-yod\ khog-chud
(Шоп.).
khoft-§mn 1. the secret heart; the
intention or design. 2. pith; core;
the pith or inner wood of a tree (ДГ&ш.).
+ khofl-snom==^\yid-shum-
pa of even temper.
jfc’W khon-mar butter used in making
cake-like offerings to the gods.
-q khon-$man ser-po the yellow
medicine from the intestines, i.e., bile or
gall (Sman. 66).
khon-tsil suet.
hkhon-hdsin = ]&d$ khofi-kkro
anger; vindictiveness (ДГЯоп.).
khofi-sen secret holes iu rocks.
khoft-gseb the hollow (of a tree);
the inner recess:
in ancient times the wife of
Gautama the sage, Shol-med-ma by name,
being very pretty and fascinating, was
concealed in the hollow of a tree (Шоп.).
khofis the middle; the innermost;
pwg or in the midst: khonssu
htshud-pa to go into the midst; to under-
stand; byed-sgo che phra zom-lu$ med-pahi
khons hgros yon-wa the more and less im-
portant works, not leaving out the simpler
ones, should be well studied. Ндго-гса rigs
drug rtsis pahi skabs-su klu-ni dud-hgrohi
khons-su hdus when reckoning the six kinds
of animated beings, include the Naga
among the beasts; V
Ser-ling, Zang-ling,
21

154
etc., are included in the continent of
Dzam-ling:	(this) is
contained, t.c., included in, that (Jd.):
bsil-ri kha snam$-
vahi khofts-skyibs na in the protected
cleft of tho cool mountain whore the snow
is levelled (Ya-sel. 35).
рЦ^ГЧ
khon$-pa Wl 1» highly
injurious; violent ; cruel ; rough. 2.
adv. crooked:	khoft$ cha-hdug
it is bent, curved, warped.
khofts-ril crippled. (Jd.).
khod=&* fto$ 1. the external
appearance ; outward look ; surface : |p<*’
«*’p5‘ sa khod-snom$-pa land of even sur-
face; plains : ’Shoven and regular
teeth:	las-ka la khod-
snoms-po gyi$ in doing a work (business)
bo of even temper:
shal-tca daft tshon fyaft-rgyu-la
khod-snoms-po gyi$ in plastering and in
painting make the surface even:
mi maft-pohi bzah
btuft-la khod $hom$-po gyis in giving
food and drink to many people make the
distribution uniform:	,c^’p^'$W24 Srab
hthug khod-snoms-po fine and thick levelled
into one. 2. v. ^5'4 hkhod-pa and
h god-pa.
an average number (Ya-
sel. 35).
I: khon	sbst. anger;
grudge; resentment; enmity: fakhon
hdsin-pa or fa’^E^ khon-du fads in-pa
to feel rancour, hatred ; fa’«SV<i
khon bzod-pa forbear, endure, forgive;
fa*?!4!’?khon gug-te sdad-pa lit. to sit
waiting out of vindictiveness to take
revenge upon; fa’4Q4 khon-hbar in TP.
gting ; the burning of anger or hatred in
the soul (Ja.);	getting
more and more spiteful.
II: a technical term in Tibet
and Chinese astrology applying to one of
the eight mystical signs or parkha Qi
divination; fa'« one whose lot is cast in
this division.
pq khob fat; heavy; clumsy (&Л.).
fa’jgq khob-khrob the sound caused by
the tapping of one thing upon another.
ря khom wallet; leather trunk; felt or
hide bag: qptoprfai* gzigs-khoms a groat
man’s trunk: ря'чЧз] khom-hbog a bag
usually made of leather for carrying
apparel and other articles on a journey.
рл’ч khom-pa 1. to have leisure,
time to do a thing. 2. to be enabled
to do a thing by the absence of ex-
ternal impediments (Schtr.): fartrfa khom-
pa min I have no time; I cannot do it now;
tfod mi khom no leisure to stay ;
fta khom I am versed in ; $’fa mi
khom not practised; ft’farcrq mi khom-pa
btgyad	: the eight obstacles to
happiness caused by the rebirth in places or
situations unfavourable to one’s conversion
to Buddhism. Such re-births aro>—
л sems-can dmyal-wa	as
hell beings; dud-hgro as beasts,
reptiles, flies, etc.; $’54* yi-dbags я<т
ghosts ;	lha tshe-rift-po
the gods who enjoy very long life; w
Rfar$ rpthah hkhob-mi	the bor-
der (wild) people;	dwan-po ma-
tshan-wa	those who are defective
in the faculties of the mind or of the body;
log-par На-каТФЧКфЪ following
fake or heretical doctrines or theories;
de-bshin g$eg-pa
rnams ma byuft-wa dVRdM	the
155
place- where the Tathagata hasmot (yet)
made his appearance.
khor-mo yug incessantly;
continually (&Л.), v. khor-yug.
khor-mor §pyod-pa continual
and uninterrupted suffering (in the hell) :
35’л^‘Р*1 when born in hell, being sub-
jected to torments in the miseries of heat
and cold, the performance of religion is
impracticable.
khor-zug an obsolete form of
(ЯЧ’ЯН khor-yug, also ne-hkhor trfk-
khor-yug 1. ne-hkor;
kun-nas	the horizon;
the outmost limit; tho outer line or cir-
cumference ; "fa5 at all times, day
aud night. 2.
kept them, without sleep at all times, day
and: night (Yig) :	khor-yug
chen-po	acc. to the Buddhists,
the. out er wall of the world ; the greater
horizon from the top of Sumeru.
• khor-sa=- pл kho-ra.
px khol or f&i’S khol-bu abridgment;
epitome ; pXkhol-du phyun-wa
abridged (Os.).
khol-mchu the mouth of a
bellows.
khol-du^^'1^ zur-du in a cor-
ner; marginally.
1^01’4 khol-pa boiled (Os.); boiling;
bubbling (Sc/г.).
pbj’A	gyog~po a
servant; khol-bran a slave;
^^^^khol-por rjes-su bzuh-ica to take; to
hire for a servant:	hjig-rten
1.
sri&pahi khol the world is a servant
of the evolving principle. par# khol-mo
a maid-servant; a female slave;
khol-po sgog-skyahi khur-po-can
name of kind of vegetable medicine applied
to wounds and sores, &c. (Sman. 350).
khol-bu a bit; a small piece.
p*TA khol-ma = skar-khun
a window; a hole in the wall or roof of
a house to serve the purpose of a window
or sky-light ; acc. to Sch. an outlet
for the smoke in a roof. 2. anything
boiled:	j&rw ja daft chu
sogs bskol-pahi khol-ma tea or water
that has been boiled:	dmyal-
icahi khro-chu khol-ma the boiling or mol-
ten matter of hell:	ho-thug
khol-ma boiling gruel.
рч’Й: khol-mo 1. лрЧ'Ц’Й gyog-mo
maid servant. 2. a coarse sort of blanket
usually given to slaves in C. (Schtr.). 3.
mowed corn; a swath (Ja.), 4. among
tho herdsmen called Dog-pa, a bellows
made of an entire goat skin.
khos-rgyud, mis-spelt for
a slave family or mean extraction:
mag-pa lo-gsum
khos rgyud min-kyaft skul-rgyud yin though
the son-in-law (elect) is not a slave (by
birth) yet he should bo made to servo (the
bride’s parents) for three years.
p^r khos imp. of ga§-pa to split:
dgra-bohi mgo khos fig
split the head of the enemy.
B’V? khya-hi-tse the running hand-
writing of the Chinese.
khya-le or F'^kha-lc as much as
fills the hollow of the hand; handful,e.g.,
of water (Cs.).
156
05'^1
ШТ5* I
ОТ4 I: khy ад-ра, seldom 0^*4
khyag$-pa 1. frozen. 2. tho frost; ice ;
go] khyag thog-khar on the ice ; ^BT
hkhyag-pahi Bod-yul, Tibet, the
country of frost ; В'Т^'Ц^khyag-la
$byar so^j it has stuck fast by freezing :
ВТв’^Г^ khyag-shu ko-ko ace. to Jd. in
Tsang, mud caused by a thaw; snow-
water ; ВЧЖ^ khyag sran-can hardened
by frost;	’3* khyag-rum or 04‘Xw khyag-
rom ico ; pieces of ice ; floating blocks of
ice.
В’ГЧ II: to undertake ; to be surety
for:	bdi kkyod-khur
khyag-gam mi kkyag can you undertake
to do this or not :	B4! §Vq to
stand as security for a loan, etc.
khyad 1. difference, distinction :
^’45^gaft btan-na khyed-med it is
no matter which you give me; **5^’3 V4'
S^'BS’^5 fia daH p hr ad-pa dan khyad-med
it is quite the same as if they came to
myself;	sems-la khyed-byufi
a difference of opinion arose (Jd.). 2.
something excellent; superior; 05<i
greatly exalted; чГ05 b^o-khyad an excel-
lent work of art; чд«иг«й*05*®к b$grub$-
pahi khyad-yofi there will be some ad-
vantage in accomplishing it; 05’^ khyad-
nor tho principal or chief wealth ; 05’X5
khy ad-don the principal sense or reason;
advantage. 3. is added to an adj. to
express the notion derivable from any
quality:	thick; X**05’ thickness;
wci wide; ^^'05 width; accus-
tomed ; ^W|j5 a habit or custom.
05’05 khyad-khyud) said to be 3^’5'
n. of a number (Ya-sel. 57).
05’^n khyad-chos superior or excellent
doctrine; a good religious discourse, hence
those who possess special qualification for
miracles are called 4WW*05
“in sublimity superior to others.”
05’^ khуad-da = 05*4V^ khyad-par-du
or bye-brag-tu especially, particular-
ly ; also superior and excellent;
khyad-du gsad-pa to contradict; also to do
the contrary (out of pride or vanity); to
despise: v j<r5^«’5W*4-B5-^^5 fa-rgyal
dtcaft-gis dmah-la khyad-du gsad from
pride he speaks ironically to the lowly.
B5’q^ khyad-par=khyad-dn 1. difference,
distinction:	/ta dan
khyod dni$ khyad-par che between you
and I there is a great difference; ^’5^’
de daft khyad-par ma
mchis-pahi rten an image not differing
from this ;	^’05*^min-gi khyad-par
yin it is (only) a difference of name.
2. sort, kind : ^9^’9^’05*hbras-buhi
khyad-par kun all sorts of fruit ;
B5’4V^ ri-dbags-kyi khyad-par shig a par-
ticular kind of game; ^'3’05*^ yul-gyi
khyed-par a particular place or province.
05’W«fl]5’<i khyad-par bkod-pa,
rgyal-pohi pho-braft an edifice of
special design ; palace of superb make.
05*qv3 khyad-par-gyi hclM-wa
that which binds particularly, i.en
worldliness.
B5'qv^ khyad-par-can special; specially
good; superior, excellent, capital: B5‘qv*5‘
khyad-par can-gyi mdsad-pa dhis
the two special achievements or exploits
(Yig.):	bla-ma khy ad-par-
can cig an excellent spiritual teacher.
05’^*^ khyad-par-du^ adv. particularly,
chiefly, especially: 05*<к*5яич]*г«1 khyad-
par-du hphags-pa particularly eminent,
noble; 05*^^*Mv§5 khyad-par-du sod-
par bycd he scorns, despises, ridicules,
vilifies.
157

БЧ’Ч|
BVq*’*R* khyad-par £«a$:=5A*$q’ga^q‘
the Bodhi or Piped tree {Mnou.).
|3S'4^'5’w Khyad-par lo-ma excellent
leaf; (Ътш n. of an individual {А. Д.).
khyad tshar-can^^^^’Ho
mtshar-can wonderful; curious; strange.
SS'4!^ khyad-gshi the superior basis. A
superior basis is alone possessed of
khyad-chos, i.e., virtues which cannot be
found elsewhere. The god Brahma is
called	K/iyad-gshi tshans-pa,
the god of excellent basis, for Brahm&
is possessed of superior moral merits,
resplendence, and longevity,
khyab-pa=tp'4 rgyas-pa srrfxFI,
5ГГЯ, ’Жчг 1. to fill, penetrate; also to
embrace, estimate, comprise: ядя’ч*ясг
сягдч’Р hbruin-pa maH-pos khyab-pa full
of, or quite covered with, pustules; яд «г
mkhris-pas khyab-pa filled, impreg-
nated with bile;
unnumbered
immeasurable kalpas ago; beyond what
the mind is able to estimate. In grammar:
capable of being joined to any word, inclu-
sive of all; a khyab-che-wa comprehen-
sive ; everywhere and nowhere; to be met
everywhere; used also in the way of
censure (Ja.). ^^^’^-gq-q-Sj-^q^’
the wisdom of Buddha
encompasses the bounds of heaven;
the
domain of knowledge is commensurate
with the very extremity of the heavens.
2. gq‘^’4 khyab soil-tea all-sufficing; all-
covering.
QA’* khab-cha=^'^ bya-wa duty, gene-
ral business (of a man); work: lugs zuH-gi
khyab-cha Ihos med-du mcis am executing
without relaxation the general duties of
both parts of life {i.e., the spiritual and
temporal) {Yig. Ш.).
Khyab-hjug fw the All-per-
vading One, i.e., Vishnu. His several
names are:—S^’qS ^qqq ^’^^-^ Dgah-tcahi
duan-po	the Lord of Pleasures,
Govinda;	Thig-le drug-
pa hgro-tcahi tog;
guhi lto-can sred med-bu;
Gyo-med glaH-rdsi skra-can gsod the
immovable Gopala—the killer of Kes’i;
9’S}’^q| q’^q«,’25’q^ Mi-yi theg-pa dpah-bo
brgyud,	Re-dwaH dpal-
gyi behus rntshan	the
sign S'rivatsa on the breast of Vishnu;
qVwS’^-q’KqrVK’l^ Padmahi lte-гса hog
duaH skyes;	Dpal-gyi
lag-pa gytiH drtiH can;
Dbyig-gi lto-гса nabs-so §kyes; §k’A’Aj’A’
^qorg’q^q] Sbyor-tca brgya-pa dpal-gyi bdag;
*g4)’q*qyq'9y^ Bjttg-pa bcu-pa mihu thuH
TTH«T the dwarf; he of the ten incarna-
tions; 3[я’$|5$яGom gsum
gnau dafl §tob§-ldan b$lu; ярч’^А’^агяаЦ’
Mkhah Idin rgyal-Tntshan hkhor-lo
phyag ;	Zla-zcahi sniH-po
pad-dkar	mig	the lotus-eyed;
Vishnu;	Mahdsag daH ni
nca gshu-can;
tshogs gzugs can khyu-witshog Ito. WA’qj’
q*^’q5Dgah-wa brgya-pa rnthon~pohi
lha;	Sbyin-skyes dgra-
bo gos-ser-can;	Me-tog
lto-гса mkhar-tcahi dgra;
Mi-yi sen-ge Khyab hjug-go
Vishnu or Nrisimba.
gq’^^q'^t’q Khyab-hjug rkaft-pa — river
Ganges.

158
Вв'яБч1’В* khyab-hjug ^Aycs=^'M'3a,'S’
^А'ц t san-dan $brul-gyi §пгп-ро
the fragrant sandal wood tree. Snakes
generally coil round its branches; images
made of it fetch very high prices.
Khyab-hjug dgah-ma—^P'
khyab-hjug chufi-nia
Vishnu’s lover or wife.
ВА'%ч)‘$а-*< khyab-hjug chuft-ma
fwr Visnu's wife. Her different names
are:—ч^’згз^ Padnia-can, WW?t; 9V
Bphrog-bycd yum, SW# Dpal-mo, Bq
<Ч4Г5ЧЧKhyab-hjug dgah-ma.
B4'*VTVPr4^’4lV‘ khyab-hjuy drcg^-pahi
§man-eheu aconite (6’?шп. 97).
SA'^VT4)^ Khyab-hjug gna§ a
place of pilgrimage in Gaya, the temple
where there is a footprint of Vishpu.
ВАЧ^-чр^'ч khyab-hjug gnon-pa=^
§pan-gyau lit. tho ornament of grass or
S’^’?4! tfon-gyi те-tog, an autumnal flower
(^Taon.).
IJA’Agm’A^’A Khyab-hjug bshou-pa the
golden eagle on which Vishpu rides: @A’
*5)’^* tho different names
of Garuda, the conveyor of Vishpu—g’^r
i’5 Skya-ren§ пи-bo the younger brother
of the dawn;	Hod srufi§ §kye$
^ni^q ;	Mkhah hgrofi dwaft
phyug, 2T*W§5 Klu-inthar bycd WTFW;
Qscr-gyi hdab can КRdo-
rjchi rnchu, я^А'лчрГ$А’<| JJdab-chag^ sen-ge
$3’^*3 hlto hgro-za, ^aa^a’^ Re-dban fin-
rta,	Rnam dul-§kye$, ^'fo^Skar
niig-bu,	Dug-hjoms Idan,
bdul-$kyc§,	Hdab-chag§ rgyal-
po, я^а'^а* Mkhah-ldin (Mfion.).
|jq’A^n]'a|5A Khyab-hjug gzer or B^VT^
khyab-hjug nad, also ^’5*^ Ra-hu le ne,
BW|
epilepsy, which is supposed to be tent or
caused by the planets or the Hindu
deity Vishpu.
B4'4!^ khyab-gdal spread out slowly
and uniformly in all directions; to absorb
all, as does Qunyata; voidity : |угЗ(’^г«ГЯлУ
^«^•(Ч-ША-|зч-ч]5Ч’§-дч^а|-ч^-^ (fag.).
BA'A^q khyab-bdag fHl tho all-per-
vading lord.
Bq qX5 khyab-hdod wishing everything.
B^V* kkyab-brdal-^F^ khyab-gdal
all absorbing; all-encompassing:
^пай-wa dkar-pohikhyab-
fyrdal du-sptd widely diffused like the
sunlight.
BA'aa'aSJ a khyab-par hgro-tca to move,
covering everything in the way.
дч’ЧА’чТ^'ч khyab-par hdsin-pa frefa:
to envelope.
khyab-byed^^ ru-rta 1. n. of
a vegetable drug. 2. met. the eye.
3. met. the sun.
gw khyam§ 1. yard, courtyard;
gallery (Cs.);=^'^ sraft-ga the hall of a
house; impluvium; (khyains is termed sgo-
ra in a poor house). 2. open; uncovered
place in the upper stories of a house where
people sit for airing or to enjoy light, air
and sun.
^4I yul-hhor hdi-na skyes-
bu ji-§ned yod-pa tham§-cad hkhor-gi khyatns
sa hdu$-$ig bring to the courtyard all the
people as many as there are in this country
to be my followers (K. d. 210 to *
BW’?S khyams-stod upper courtyard;
B^’35 khyamwmad the lower courtyard.
159
6'Sf
Bi
B<q khyam$-pa, khyctr-wa ог‘0*гч
khyal-pa, v. hkhyam^-pa, &c.
B**’’' khyams-ra open space before
a house or on the roof of a house used for
airing, walking, or sitting ; also play-
ground.
C\
khyi, in Tsang pronounced as kyi
or kih,	hound,
dog; 0’^ khyi-mo a bitch;
the dog will bite;	khyi
bos-nas ma-brdun “after calling a dog,
do not beat him” is a Tibetan common
saying to oxplain that it is not proper
to beat or insult an invited person even
if he be a bad person. Acc. to Sch.
khyi-rkan gnis a bastard dog, a
our; prob, an inferior breed is meant. 0*
khyi-yi lee-yi$ rma
rnams hdrubs-par byed the tongue of the
dog causes wounds to heal;
khyi-yi rlig-pas bu ro hbyin the testes
of a dog draw out the dead child (from tho
womb) ;	khyi-yi
klad-pas hgrib mig-la phau the brains of a
dog are useful for the cataract of the eye;
dog’s blood removes
leprosy : B’^4a dog’s
flesh dries up water, tu?., heals dropsy;
khyi-yi spu gshob
Ihog skrans gnon the burnt hair of a
dog absorbs swollen ulcers ; B*^ 3^’
khyi-yi drun-gyis gdou
hjom skrans-pa shi the excrement of the
dog subdues evil spirits in one’s body
and soothes swellings;
khyi-thug ehn-yis kha-yi rul-rdol
geod the urine of a dog is a cure for ulcers
in the gums (Sman.) \	khyi-yi
spyod-pa the habits of the dog des-
cribed by Ufasuraksa are as follows: w
^*>5’4 тай-du zad-pa voraciousness,
cuft-zad chog contentment with a small
quantity,	legs-par gnid-log
always sleeping,	rnyur-xcar sad
easily wakeful, dpal-la intrepidity,
$nin-ne faithfulness, brtan-pa
firmness.	khyi-ndl rgyug-lhoft is
a common saying, to cause a sleeping dog
to get up by poking him with a stick, t>.,
to rouse to action one who is silent.
Syn.	'* rdo-rjehi mjug-ma;
gso-byed ; яХ/WK hdod-dwaft;
Xojn seft-gehi rig§;	skye-icahi
eha-can ;	rdsi gsaft-wa ;
groft-gi gean-gzan ; -*j'0 ^a-khyi (Mnon.).
C\
B’SF Khyi-kluft n. of a place and
valley in Tibet.
khyi dkar
duft-gi thag-pa-ean n. of a vegetable pos-
sessing medicinal properties for healing
wounds and sores (Sman. 350).
0’45 khyi-skad the barking of a dog.
B’F^ khyi-khan dog kennel.
0*3 i: khyi-gu in 7F., bud (of leaves
and branches, not of blossoms); the eye
(of a plant).
0’3 и: a puppy; a dog.
cs
ITO Kyi-kyo n. of a place, also of a
fabulous country to the east of Asia, prob.
Kamsohatka (J. Zaft.).
B'^’E Khyi-$ton.jo-ye n. of a Buddhist
teacher of Tibet.
B’S* khyi-dam lit. dog’s seal; a mark
burnt in; stigma.
0’V1 khyi-dug the poison of hydro-
phobia (Sch.).
0**^5*q khyi mdud-pa pairing of dogs.
B’w€^ kyi-pal jor in JF., Blvtum
virgaiamt
ieo
$'^khyi-pul a dog kennel; dog-house
(Ja.)
g'g^ khyi-spyan (khib-juug) a jackal.
g*g khyi-bru a vicious, biting dog
(Sch.)"
khyi-ra-pa = rfion-pa,
1. a huntsman; one who kills
wild animals by chasing them with dogs,
&c. 2. Ktraia a tribo iu
Nepal who live by hunting.
B’S^ khyi-sbrafi a flea; lit. dog’s fly.
*В‘Й khyi-mo bitch or female dog:
“ the woman
having transmigrated into a red bitch”
(Mil.).
B’tfc khyi-myoft a rabid dog ; also
canine madness; hydrophobia.
B’^A khyi-tshah a dog-house.
khyi-htshed tho baker
or seller of parched rice, millet, &c.
C\
*15^ khyihu-ka the remainder
of anything cut or chopped off.
B^’B^ khyihuhi-khyihu, g S4! khyi-
pjiniffory-khigu, puppy; pup: Bl5’B^’
52^44*^4’^ khyi-hu-hi-khyihu dbyun-tcahi
tshul-du	in the man-
ner of a puppy being brought forth.
g'^ khyi-ra chasing, hunting, espe-
cially of a single huntsman, not of a
party; in JF. khyi-ra la ca-fe, to go hunt-
ing: g’^'awpr^ khyi-ra la chag§-can one
who is fond of huntiog; sportsman.
©\
В-ч-чН khyi-la tra-ri^fa'^ seH Idan
the tree Acacia catechu; also Terra
japonica.
B’^ khyi-gig	a flea.
khyi-gtn a tree-drug which cures
diseases of the lungs and the eye. It
also expectorative (Med.).
khyiw-rgyab-pa the bite of a
dog: B*^^4'^ khyiso tab-fe the dog will
bite—Ladak dialect.
I34] khyig, v. 43^ hkhyig-pa.
e\
ISS khyid breadth of tho hand with
the thumb extended to form a span.
C\
khyim 1. rosp. khab WPTR
a home, residence, dwelling-place:
khyim-na at home; ty^khyim-du at home,
in tho house;	khyim-bdag riu-
po-che	the ideal householder (of
tho Buddhists). 2. vrfa the signs of
zodiac;	khyim-bcu-gnis
the twelve signs of the zodiac; or
gw§4p^ 4 khyim-gyi hkhor-lo the zodiac ;
^4, W lug the ram;	g|^ glan the bull;
ftVb hkhrig-pa (husband and wife
in union) the twins; w, kar-ka-
ia the crab; far, sen-ge the lion ;
4R7T, 9’bu-mo the virgin ;	4е* sraA
the balance ;	$dig-pa the scor-
pion; ^3 gshu (or bow) tho archer;
ehu-srin the sea-monster (capri-
corn) ; gw, bum-pa water-pot; water-
bearer ; and Ъ Ha fish. Besides these
there are mentioned twenty-four minor
signs of the zodiac such as зтни,
mihu than the dwarf ; 'srqgw,	ne-
tcahi bum-pa, ЧК4)* hbrin-gar, &c., which
raise the list of the signs to thirty-six
(K. g. SI29). Acc. to Jd. there is more-
over a division into twenty-seven lower
mansions much in use, v. ^’4* rgyu-
$kar. 3. double hours ; the time of two
hours; the time of the passing of a sign
of the zodiac through the meridian (Ja.).
В’Ф I
161

4.	halo or circle round the sun or moon
(<7s.). 5. symbolic numeral 21 (Ji.).
B^’B”khyim-stcyes tzw domesticated;
indigenous.
В^'3Ц’4 khyim skyon-wa to have a
household; to gain a livelihood (Jiz.); to
stick to home and look after it.
B*’^	skyes-
pa hbrus-phyitn-wa an eunuch; also
a domestic slave; one belonging or related
to a family.
Вя’3	khyim-gyi kun-dgah ra-
skyed-tshal a grove or garden
attached to a house (M?w.).
khyim-gyi gtor-za
chuhi bya-gag a grey species of duck
(Jfnon.).
B^'S’S4!'^ khyim-дуг dag-ra, фкк dans-
ra	yard, courtyard. The Vf*
dag-ra of a temple or tomb is called
hkhor-sa or ne-hkhor.
В^З’^’З khyim-gyi nor-bu (lit. the gem
of the house)§gron-med or
§5 mtshan-mohi §nan byed and
hbar-wahi ral-pa a lamp, light (Mnon.).
khyim-gyi gyab§ НТЙ veran-
dah or portico.
B^’3J'N‘^*< khyim-gyi sa tsis household;
house-keeping; farming.
B*’5 khyim-na a whale; a fish of the
size of a house ; a mythological fish (&7г.).
В*’У«й'Ч^ khyim-ne-wahi rin-po-che
the perfect ideal of a lay subject
of a king and second only to the B^W
khyim-bdag rin-po che.
В^’чл khyim-thab or B^44N khyim-
thabs husband; frequently also wife; B*’
khyimthab-la slon-wa to give in
marriage ; to give away a woman for a
wife; B^’44^ khyim thab-mo wife; house-
wife ((7s.) ; B* wvfHWT a
devoted wife:	let you
and me be married.
Syn. ВЧГЧ khyo-gug\ bzan-tsho,
bzah-tshan (Mnon.).
B^S^’B^ ^ khyim dan khyim-na house
to house; each in his house.
B«’^ khyim-du nal—^w&WQ bya-mchil-
pa the swallow (тИлоп.).
B^VI khyim-bdag	a house-
holder ; a master of the house; husband;
owner of a house; a citizen. Very freq, in
the older writings
V3!	the house-holder
class is like a great Sala tree.
khyim-bdag drag-tptl can
a rough uncultured householder.
khyim-bdag dpal-§byin,
n. of a householder who was devo-
ted to Buddha (К. ко. * J55).
khyim-bdag-mo	a
house-wife; also a female householder.
Syn.	brtul shugs-ma;
khyim hdsin-ma;	khab-hdsin-ma;
rigs §kyon-ma;	rigs-kyi-
ma; В*ГЛ5ДГЯ khyim-bdag-ma (Mnon.).
khyim-ldan, v. rtsan§-pa a
lizard (Mnon.).
khyim-nas byun-wa — ^'^
theg-chcn byan-chnb lion-
gin-gi lo-ma a leaf of the Bodhi-tree
(ЛГ. d.
khyini-gna^
bram-zehi rig§-bshi-yi gcig la-
khyim gnas	acc. to Brahma^ical
religion, the worldly life, a house-holder’s
life (Ydsel.) 55).
22
162
B^i
дя'ч khyim-pa layman; married man :
g»rqr2£4pr«j’|Vq khyim-pahi phyogs-su
ibyin-pa to give away to a layman :
phyis khyim-pahi tshul
can-gyi rnal-hbyor-pa a devout man or yogi
who lives outwardly in tho manner of a
layman.
0*rq^5’q‘^ khyim-pahi spod-pa can ho
who betakes to the life of yogi;
54! gshon-nu gdun-drug an epithet of
Kumara Shadanana (Mnon.) :
do not revert to the life of a
layman (Mnon.).
g*i'q ^ q5khyim-pa riag-pahi dpyad
the science of discerning tho fit
place for tho residence (of a householder).
gwqvoi^q khyim-par gnas-pa 77^,
4W one that abides in his house; ono
living in his house; a worldly man; ho who
lives as a layman.
0^’34 khyim-phub living in divided
families (7Г. d. я 75).
0^’3 khyim-bya (khyim-cha) grajs, fWH
domestic fowl ; eock; hen; poultry.
Syn.	’ЯЗЯ'$5 zan^-kyi gtsug-phud;
5	mya-nan-nied;	znn-gl
rags sgrogs*, iho-ran§ skad;
^5 mishan-mo skad;	bde-leg^chn;
yons-zlnm mig; 5Ф’§5 dgah-
byed; ^№§\hphel-byed;	nor-
buhi mgr in-can;	hod-kyisde; 2’зкд’
sna-гсаг sgra-sgrogs;	zans-zi-
can; q^N’q5'4|^4]'^5 pags-pahi gistig phud;
mishan-mo rig;
rkan-pahi mishan-cha can (filfion.).
'<3 khyim-bya mishal-lu a very
large species of fowl which is also called
If 5The bile of this bird is believed
to be a cure for poison.
0*<’5$’§5’q khyim-byahi %pyod-pa the
four habits of the cook acc. to Masuraksi
§1
are the following:—iho-rans
Idan dan crowing before dawn ;
hihab-pa dan-ldan always fighting;
gnen-la kha-zas snom§-par
bycd dividing food equally with his friond;
mola rab-gnon ne-icar
spyod always keeping tho hen under
control and chucking her.
0*r^ khyini-tshan a family; a house-
hold.
(дяяХад khyim-mihes a neighbour; 0***
яХяkhyim-mishc^ du^-pa btan-
fabrel nearness of residence; neighbour-
hood so near that the smoke from tho fire-
place of ono house mixes up with that of
another; 0^’^N’q khyim-mishe§-pa a male
neighbour;	khyim-mtshes-ma a
fomalo neighbour.
§^’^4 khyim-shag a zodiacal day.
0Я Д khyim-zla a zodiacal month.
gsrq ^c/q khyim-la hon-гса, gion-
tea to got married, to be given in mar-
riage on tho female part (/a.).
jjjrer^-q khyim-la s hen-pa a lover of
home ; ono attached to his homo ; home-
sick.
khyim-sun hbyin-pa 3^r-
vituperating or blaming the secular
state or a domestic abode.
0*гй khyim-so	homesick.
khyim so-sor bsgo-wa gi^r-
ono who creates dissensions in
a family.
khyim-gsar-ma^Qy** bag-ma
or	lag-hdsin-ma^ also
Ihan-cig §pyod-ma a bride ; wife (Mnon.).
1^, kyu flock ; herd: ЧЧЛ’В khyu
a flock of sheep; rtahi khyu a herd
of horses; {pwg-gi khyu a herd of
cattle; 5^‘B byahi khyu or i$hog§ a
163
flock of birds.	khyu gsags-pa to
collect or gather in flocks (Sch,);
khyu skyons~wa to keep; tend a flock
or herd; company; band; gang; troop:
mi-khyu a company of men (Os.);
S’«’B bu-mo-khyu a bevy of girls;
dmag-khyu a troop of soldiers.
khyu-nas hbud-pa to exclude from the flock
or company;	khyu sna hdren-pa
to go before; to take the lead of a troop or
of a flock; Bya ser-po khyu-rc hgrogs
man-po yellow birds; many companions
in each flock (A, 34).
khyu-mchog
1. chief; king; the bull; Vishnu.
2.	zla-wa gsum-pa the third
month of the Tibetan year generally
corresponding with April.
Syn.	dpyid-tha chun
nag-pa; §bran-zla; myos-
byed;	dri-shini ldan\ «Ksp5* yid-
srab§;	hdod-hdus}	min-
bzugs;	hbrug-zla\	zla-wa
gsum-pa, the third month of the Tib. year
{Rtsii.),
khyu-mchog bgrod-pa=S’
bya-mchil pa a kind of swal-
low (l^non.).
khyu-mchog rgyal-mtshan
=	dwaan-phyag chen-po
n. of Mahadeva (Mnon).
khyu-mchog can = $^ffiQ zla-
wa brgyad-pa or	§ton-zla hbrin-po
the eighth month of the Tibetan year
corresponding with November (Rtsii.).
ц-я^-я^’ч khyu-mcog mtshan-pa 1.
^4!^ one with the marks or signs of a
bull or ono who carries the bull ensign.
2. n. of a drug called (the plant
Jastica genderussd), which is used for
purifying the blood.
B’jpi khyu Ito-wa with a belly
resembling that of a bull.
0*^’4 khyu hdus-pa collected in
a herd or flock; also heap, multitude; an
aggregate.
khyu-ldan, v. tsha-wa len
Гч^, the tamarisk (M.non.).
khyu-byug erroneously used for
so
R’g4] khu-byug, n. of a large bird of sweet
note, which, according to the Tibetans,
migrates in summer to cooler regions and
in cold ’weather returns to the warmer
zones. In Jd. В’ЗЧ’^О probably signifies
the note of the black Indian cuckoo.
IS4! khyug, v. hkhyug-pa,
so
ЭТ'З4! khytig-hhijug Й’5Г*\ОТ|5Л1'§5
glog-gi hod khyug-khyug byed a zig-zag
flash of lightning.
B4!’^ khyug tsam = ^'i^ tig-tsam or $4*
or SJA’&i srib-tsam a little; a little
while.
Б* I: khyun herd, multitude.
SO
IB* II: (Sch. also khyun-mo) the garuda
SO
bird, mythical chief of the feathered race;
the golden eagle: B*’!4] khyun-skyug a
kind of gem said to have been brought
from the Sumcru mountain by Garuda
and vomited by him:
ч1яя*ч5’яМд) khyuA-skyug dug sogs nad kun
hjoms-pahi mchog, the khyun-skyug (the
eagle’s vomit) is the chief remedy against
the effects of poisonous drugs: В^’Ч’^’
khyud-gi sen-mos klu nad
hjoms the toe of an eagle is used as an
antidote for leprosy.
*$] <£• khyun phrug $kyug-pahi bdw} rtsi-
chag pahi kha-chu the watery substance
vomited by locusts; a mystical expression
(ПНЯ, 4).
0C'W
164

i: khyun $fion-skye$ 1.
тщггта the first-born of heaven; the one
that was born before garuda; an epithet
of Aruna, the charioteer of the sun. 2. ==
3’^’ skya-ren dawn. 3.	khyun
$og-can the early morning which advances
with the wings of an eagle ; a name of
Vaj тара щ Bodh isattva.
ii :	ni-mahi kha lo-pa
the charioteer of the sun (Мпон.).
khyufi-thur ean = ^*^ go-cha or
go-khrab coat of mail (Mnon.).
B^ khyufi-sder claws of an eagle
(Med.; Cs.); (Garutja-claw) the n.of amedi-
cinal root:	khyufi-$dcr dkar-
mo tho white species of this vegetable drug,
so called on account of its resemblance to
the claw of an eagle:	khyuA-
$der smug-po the dark brown species of the
root, in appearance like the claws of an
eagle. Both these roots are used to
neutralize snake poison, &e.
B^*^ khyun-po many collected or assem-
bled together.
(BOSS'S khyun-dpyad a small round
basket of reed (Cs.).
Khyuft-rtse dgonpa monas-
tery5 in the valley of Panam in Tsang.
|$еА<ч khyun-ril is said to be a largo?
cylindrical basket, the same as kun-dum
in Ld.y v. ^'4 rkon-pa.
khyud-pa xrfvjeR to worship,
adore.
BS* khyud-mo 1. rta-cha$ the
>o
equipments of a horse. 2. rim of vessel
(Sch.),
khyur-po=^l'Q ril-po or ^*3
sgan-po entire; full.
BvSV” khyur mid-pa to swallow;
to eat the food without chewing, in the
manner of birds, snakes and fish: BK^5*
khyur mid-du sofi-ste suffering
himself to bo swallowed.
khyu$ wall side (in Tsang) ? (Jd.).
khye-pa яит wide.
khye-Ьоу 3’* bu-tsha children.
B'« khye-ma n. of a disease (Jled.;
Ja.).
Bs 1 : khyed n. of a tribe in Tibet
(Vai. kar. 150).
BS П: pers. pron. thou, you ; is the
ordinary resp. form of jjv* khyed-cag,
plur. of Й5 khyed) is generally used in
addressing lamas, but seldom in addressing
superiors, such as parents, uncles, and
brothers; is used to those senior in age, and
sometimes contemptuously. khyed-ran
is common colloquially for khyed;
you or you all:
dge-tshul khyed gnis you two
novice monks;	it will
be as you (all) think.
B^ khyen-te in Purang he; she
+	= khebs cover.
khem a shovel:
to shovel away; to cast out with a
shovel;	khyem-gyi hddb-ma the
blade of a shovel (Jd.):	khyem-
gyi-yu-wa the handle of a shovel (Cs,);
gru-khyem> $'Й* chu-khyem oar; in
TF. §Ч]М’й* Icags khyem iron spade; й*Й*
ЙЯ1
165
ем
me-khyem fire-shovel; гса-khyem а
scoop; khyern-bu a spoon (C-s.).
khyehu also НТ<1<=СФ, finj 1. a
boy; an infant child. 2. a youth, esp.
in Dzang-lun.
ЙУГ» khyehu
gsar-du kha hbus-pa the tender shoots
of leaves (ДГЯо«.).
khyehu mthon-pa,	khyehu
bye-wa the delivery of a child; child-birth.
In Kahgyur and Tangyur	khyehu
rntsas-pa=^^^ bu skyes-pa the birth of a
male child.
Svje khyer-rkyan one who is
specially authorised or responsible to make
payment or receive deposits in money or
in kind in a Jong ordistrict:
уой-sgos che phrahi rigs
Rdson-sdod khyer-rkyan nas b$du-wa all
proceeds (collections) large or small should
be collected by the officer resident in the
Jong (Rtsii.).
khyel bshug^-pa n. of a posture
in yoga\ a mode of sitting:
hdug-§taft§ kyi mift or TT?4!’^’^4)’4 rtsog-
tsog pur hdug-pa (Mnon.).
[5 khyo or [J’3 khyo-bo a husband; j5’
khyo byed-pa to act as a husband; also
to take a wife: khyod-ftahi khyo mi byed-
na if you do not marry me (Jd.).
khyo-ga husband; also emphatically
man, as ^’S’^'T^’jJ’4]’^ §kyes-bu fia
Hor-pa khyo-ga yin, I, a Tartar, am a man
(as distinguished from effeminate people).
Й’ТЗ khyo-ga-po a hero.
khyo hdam-ma-=.^* bag-ma
a bride.
5’5 khyo-pho husband: 5S'§’5’5 ^’Vl'
^’9 khyod-kyi khyo-pho de che-shig Ita-bu
what like is your husband (Snin.).
Вkhyo-raed-pa, чпш,	a
widow.
5’^ khyo-re to stand erect, upright
(Yig. 51).
S’*?4! khyo-^ug husband and
wife; a married couple; same as w#
bzah-tsho or чяч'й bzah-mi (Lig. F J).
J’^4!'4]^ khyo-sug gna$ ггпгс the place
where a married couple pass their honey-
moon.
B4!'^ khyog-thon (abbr. of S’4! khyo-
ga and Ifc thoti) in IF. a young man;
a youth (Jd.).
B4!'2* khyog-po crooked; curved; bent
(0s.); also cunning (Ja.).
J4]*? khyogt, Зад’ри phebs-byams
1.	a sedan chair, palankeen; also a
scaffold (Cs.). 2. litter, bier (Jd.).
*54!^ khyogs a swing (Schr.;
Kdlac. T. 146).
g4!*^ khyogs-pa~^'Q theg-pa a vehicle
or conveyance.
skyoft, or khon-rca,
in colloq. VfB* nin-khyon, one day’s
entertainment.
^hyod Регз* Pron-> 2nd pers., thou,
you—is the ordinary form of address
to inferiors or to equals: gvl khyod-kyi
your, thine; gS'*4]'4) khyod cag-gi your, of
you all: gS’^ khyod-tsho or gv^^ khyod-
rnams you, ye: gS’^ khyod-гай thou,
you, yourself—very common in the celloq.
of C. in place of the simple khyod.
SS’^4!4 khyod-tpigs a pair; pair-
ing, v. B’ (J4! khyo-qug.
В3! I
166
HI
khyon, wiuci, гйл the measure
or dimensions, area, extent, size; width;
circumference; height: this term can be
applied to things material or immaterial;
fe$-byahi khyon-kun the whole
extent of learning or knowledge;
the extent of the void space or sky.
S^'lj'q khyon-sgril altogether; all taken
together:	$don-ra$
khyon-sgril go$ snams cotton cloth for wicks
all together (Rtsii.).
khyon-che-wa fwW, broad;
very widely spread.
B^’?^ khyon-^dom all together; sum
total; contents; acc. to Cs. narrow extent.
khyon-nas thoroughly;
^Я’^ an out-and-out sinner;
not at all (Jd.).
kyom-khyom oblique; awry;
irregularly shaped.
13^ I: to move totteringly; to stum-
ble ; be dizzy; defined in a native author аз
“ mov-
ing as if one went with a hungry belly and
without strength”;
qjkq’jj* to walk as an old or drunken
person;	tshad-pas na-na§
kha khyor speaking irregularly as in a
feverish delirium; ^'Я’^'Й^'4 fin-gisnod
khyor-wa bobbing as a wooden vessel.
II: as much as fills the hollow
of the hand; В^’А'Я^ khyor-wo gan a
handful (of anything); khyor-wa
do two handsful.
khyol-wa, v.	hkhyol-wa, to
be brought or carried or	khyos-ma.
|5 I: khra (tha) 1. a cheat. 2. a
kind of hawk or falcon; sparrow-hawk used
for hunting:	khra-
yi zgo-nag sa-bon hdsag-pa bsrun the egg
of the hawk is curative of the disease of
involuntary discharge of the semen ; 0’^*
the feathers from a hawk’s
tail remove female diseases; Д'^’д^’З^’Э^’
^Я'*§’яЗЯ^ khra-yi brun-gyis skrans-pa
rnag-tu hgiigs tho excrcmont of tho hawk
prevents accumulation of pus in a boil;
НЙ«Т«|рч-^<1§е.-ця-ч]^^4А a hawk’s eyo
overcomes all demons that produce
apoplexy.
Syn.	hdab-chags dan~ma;
ri-bofi-za; S’H bya-khra\ Я^ 4 &У°-
и-а'(Ц[поп.).
II: n. of a tribo in Tibet (Vat.
kar. 160).
III:	1. a lie, falsehood; also
a liar. 2. n. of a Naga Raja (snake king).
|5 IV: or Йkhra-ma (tha-ma) a letter;
B4‘H tkyes-khra a letter with a present.
НЙ khra-khra (tha-tha) = ff% khra~wo-
party-colour (Nag. 10).
ЙВkhra khro-can (tha-tho-ean)
defined as	a passionate
or wrathful individual.
H’Sj khra-rgyu variegated colour: g**
ЧЯ'^5	snum fag iked
lha$ la dkar-po khra rgyu dgo§ fin.
khra-brgyan variegating an
ornament (amulot or bracelet, &c.) with
precious stones.
Н’ВЯ’Н khra-sgrigs (tha-dig)
^q]^’q khra-rim bshin sgrig^-pa arranging
in variegated colours with rows of tur-
quoise, corals, pearls, &c.
0*^'5 Iflvra-vna-ke-ru n. of a place
near Ron in Tibet.
0’25'J	167	041
й*ч khra-pa a falconer.
khra-bo (tha-o) fMr, ЗПШ, Я^Г,
згзх: 1. many coloured, with one
predominating colour as in chintz; party-
coloured, as in the case of cattle and
wild animals, such as a tiger or leopard,
and in birds. In dkar-khra, the
white (dkar) is supposed to predominate.
In dmar-khra, red predominates. In
the common saying
stag-gi khra-bo ph у i-la yod, nii-yi
khra-bo nan-la yod, the tiger is party-
coloured externally, but man is so inter-
nally—the meaning, of course, is that
it is difficult to know a man even by
the traits of his mind. 2. Acc. to
Jd. a distinction is to be drawn
between khra-wo and khra-гса, the first
signifying only two-coloured or piebald,
and the second party or many-coloured.
We have not found this distinction our-
selves. The significations of the various
compounds of Й khra have all a reference
to the peculiar effect produced on the eye
by the blending of two or more colours
together, especially when seen from a
distance ; so khra cem-me is said of a
rainbow, tinted meteor, etc.; рта khra
lam-пге or 0khra lham-me of a similar
phenomenon ; 0khra chem-chcm of
a flight of birds: Щ’^'^’йkhra cham-
se khra chem-me or khra chem-se in C.
chem khra $prin-fie in Ld.
Such compounds have also assumed the
character of an adverb, as in 0’^Л khra-
me-re, together; altogether.
khra-ma 1. a register, index. 2.
a judicial decree. 3. a kind of grain, *9
hbru	4. acc. to Vai.
mgyogs-nas a kind of barley grain,
growing and ripening rapidly within 60
days, v. 4^’0* gyo-khram.
khra-niagni$ sgrom in jewel-
lery or lacquer work when there is a
variegating with two colours.
0’** khra-niar a kind of biscuit made
in twisted cross ribs and painted red.
These are given only to Government
officials at state dinners in Tibet.
0’3" khra-rfsc a kind of biscuit or pastry
made in the shape of a grating.
0'^ khra-zur a species of eagle (Sch.).
0’3 khra-zla (tha-da)=^'d\tyr4 zla-ica
gnis-pa or	dpyid-zla hbnn-po the
second Tibetan month corresponding with
March (Rtsii.).
0’^ khra-rin a striped long scarf.
This is also called	bkra-fis
khra-rin, the auspicious long striped
scarf which is generally attached to flag
poles:—lhag-par pho-brafi rtse-na$ khra-
rin dan dar-phan dun dan rol-mo sogs §bro,
moreover they exhibited from the top of
the palace long scarves and pendant silk
and played on trumpets and cymbals, &c.
khra qig-qig in dazzling
array (J. Zan.).
khra-sems fcs n. of a bird
(2Г. ко. 3).
khrag (thag) sku-nitshal, resp.
blood: ^‘0^
pan-khrag blood of child-bed. ^‘04 shan-
khrag or vulgarly ^’0Я dsan-khrag
signifies blood of the menses;
gshuft-khrag healthy and nourishing blood
(Cs.)', ^0*4 nad-kltrag bad or diseased
blood. In Sikkim khrag is pronounced
khyak. 0*4’^5 khrag-gcod n. of a medi-
cinal herb which stops bleeding (Л/ed.):
168
04]-q^l|
I
to stop bleeding;
cessation of bleeding:	in
IF. I feel my blood throbbing, e.g., from
ascending a steep hill.	flowing
of the blood, generally applied to men-
struation ; B4!’*4!'4 clotted blood; gore (Ck.).
Syn. rma-skycs;	fur
hgyvr~bycd\	ga-yi sa-bcm;
8^ rntshan-bsnun $kye$\ ’Bqql^ khyab-
gnas\ mi-lhun\ lus^kycs*, Si’
WRqq'q rnia-las hbab-pa {Шоп.).
ВЯМ* ккгад-зкепц tpaft-rtsi n. of a
vegetable medicine very useful in stopping
bleeding (Swan. 86).
04|-R4] khrag-khrig {thag-thig) f^pt
also 1. one hundred thousand
million, or an indefinitely large number
(Ce.); this number has twelve figures;
gq'gq|'^'q khrag-khrig chen-po
this has thirteen figures, cf. dkrigs*
pa. 2. in vulgar language В’Гй1’! khrag-
khrig is expressed as В'Ч’В'^ khra-gi
khri-gi and means moving and oscillating
about:	de-na$
rdsih§ chen-po khrag-khrig team yan med-
par then (in) a large ship which did not
even roll.
ЕЯ' В ЧГ^С/Ч khrag-khrig §nan-wa=B4!'
ynig-rgyu a mirage; an optical illusion
{Mnon.).
B^I'B4) khrag khrug {thag-thug) all in
disorder; promiscuous state; like a troop of
fighting men, or like the loose leaves of a
book when out of order {Zam.).
khrag-hkhrugs agitation; flut-
ter ; orgasm of the blood {Sch.).
khrag-khrog {thag-thog), v. ВТ
khrag-khrug.
йч|Лйч1^ khrag-ge khrug-ge {thag-ge
thug-ge) when two men do not agree with
each oher, there is said to be thag-ge
thug-ge among them—a falling-out, dis-
agreement.
BT^ khrag-rgyun	the run-
ning of the blood in the veins; circulation.
BT**!^’? khrag chag$-rta a blood bred
horse, i.e., a real horse, opposed to a
metaphysical ono {Mil.).
BTq3^ khrag-hthuft 1. a class of terri-
fying deities of the Bon and Tantrik
Schools. 2. gV' skyu-ru-ra
Myrobalaum emblica {Sman. 30b).
ВТ *3^*5 khrag hthufi-hbu the worm
that drinks blood.
khrag-hthuti erin-bu a leech
{Шоп.).
BT?4 khrag-ldah wnr tiger;
tpft-dniar ram gqer n. of
a red tree; tho red pine called ; a
species of mahogony {Шоп.).
BT^'* khrag-ldan ma described as SV
^V3’*^ V3JV4 a woman at her monthly
period {Mnon.).
дч]'EKj-q khrag-por skye-гса a botanical
term applied to the leaves of plants
(Vai. sH.).
04] 4qq khrag-hbab—tf^'b chu-bo si-ta
a name of the river Sita {Шоп.).
BT^ khrag-ro clotted blood.
BT^q khrag-lift a clot of blood.
khrag-^as che-wa plethoric
{Med.; Ja.).
ВЯЛ* khrag-$or hemorrhage; bloody-
flux {Med.; Jd.).
ВТ44!4 khrag-bqal flooding after child-
birth ; profuse mensturation: 3 ^Y^V4^’qc/
04]’€Hjq’4]T^ it stops the flooding
and internal spasms in the blood discharge
of a healthy woman: MJ rag=^khrag.
169
й-ад ।
khrafl. (thang)> v. *04 rnkhran.
0S’q hrad-pa (the-pa) stretched out:
BS'^’^S’4 khrad-por §dod-pa to sit with
the legs stretched out (Ja.).
khrab (thab) чйгаптате: shield;
buckler; coat of mail. The coat of mail
used in Tibet and Bhutan is generally made
of iron rings or thin disks resembling the
scales of a fish netted together. Two kinds
of khrab are known in Tibet; one is called
вч’$4’Э||дц, which is made of iron rings or
scales;	that made of thin plates
or iron foils. There are accounts of coats
of mail made of silver and gold for the use
of kings. The common quilted cloth
armour used in Mongolia and China is
called 04’W0q, In Mongolia it is called
dasa.
04’04 khrab-khrab (thab-thab) a
weeper; one that sheds tears on every
occasion (&Л.).
04,*f43i khrab-mkhan one who makes or
wears armour.
04’khrab-can scaled; scaly ; wearing
a coat of mail.
khrab-byafi gu scales or iron foils
used in a coat of mail (Rtsii.).
04 55*^ ^4 khab-byin lu§ kheb a coat of
mail for covering the whole body (Rtsii.).
khram (tham)^ g* phra-ma a false
word; wrfe a cunning man.
khram-kha (tham-kha) 1.
S’S^STB^'f’^4|’0’0 Iha-hdre bye-brag-gi
khro-wahi kha-dog khra-khra (tha-tha)
spotted and “party-coloured appearance of
the wrathful demi-gods the Lhan-de
(Nag.). 2. chart used in witchcraft or
necromancy:	lha hdrchi rtsis-
kyi min, B*’F’*T44N khram-kha la bab§ is
explained:
жчthe signor mark of
one’s ruin having been incident on the chart
(of fate). 3. cross marks or lines cut into
a piece of wood so as to cross one another
as an ornament:	khram-khahi-qin
a club-like implement, carved with lines,
representing the attributes of a god and
containing squares with mystic figures in
them which serve as a means to make
attempts of witchcraft to injure a person
ineffectual; WB* nag-khram a notch
№)
B*'B* khram-khrum fragments; baked
fragments: ^4]’«гск’4^4’<^*а	\
05Г0я’4|Елг^,ч^рч (raw) brick containing
prints or engravings thereon when burnt
are said to be baked fragments.
0*’^ khram-ldan зття a tiger.
khram-pa (tham-pa) = ^'^ vjr,
1. a liar; a swindler;
artful person: ST 4^’§5’44'0*'4 byed-pahi
for seducing or deceiving:	khram
sems-can lying; mendacious (Cs.). 2.
lively, brisk, quick, like boys, kids, &e.
(the contrary of gfa’4 glen-pa. slow,
indolent, apathetic): khram-pa che in JF. a
wish of god-speed addressed to oue going
on a journey, such as Good success I May
all go well! 3. modest; attentive to the
wishes of others (Ja.). 0**4'4JT5 gcod lit.
means to get out of mishaps caused by the
evil machinations of enemies; to make
the evil-charms of enemies ineffectual.
0*Ԥ5 khram-byed., v. gyo-can or
**§5 phra-ma byed\	Ice gnis-pa
double-tongued or double-dealer (Mfion.).
0**^4’ khram-ginpr 0**’§’0*’^4' khrims-
kyi khram-qin a board on which the body
23
170

of a culprit is stretched to flog him on tho
back (7Cay.).
khral (that)	1. tax;
tribute; duty; forced service. 2. punish-
ment ; chastisement for sins; visitations:
gry-qwprq khral bkal-wa to levy taxes :
Й'Ч dnul-khral tax to be paid in money:
hbru-khral tribute paid in corn:
til-фпаг khral tax to be paid in red
sesamum.
Syn. 53	£5^ sdud-pa\ ч]^’й'4
gyar-khraly	qo-garn;	khral-
rigs (Mnon.).
khral rgyug-pa to perform forced
sendee (Rtsii.).
q khral-hjal-wa or	khral
skor-ua to pay taxes or customs duty.
Syn.	khral hbttl-wa; 53
dpya hjal-гга; й^‘§5’^ hhral sprod-pa
(Mnon.).
khral sdtt-wa to collect taxes; pf.
khral-bsdus, pf. дчгч;« khral-
b§dus fshar, fut.	khral-b$du tcar-
by a.
khral-gsir levying of a new
tax: £^***5 ur•йкчг^ч|*25-
by levying fresh taxes to oppress tho
tenants.
ртй^ khral-khrug	n. of a very
large number (Ya-sd.).
fprg'4 khral-khrulis defined as
applied to any broken
things, such as furniture or utensils.
I: khri (tin), g’B*l khri-khrag, Й’З^
khri-gratis for number:	ten
thousand; a myriad:	khri bye-tea
ton millions.
c\
[£) II:	seat, chair, throne,
couch; also frame, sawing jack, trestle;
J’B an European chair; khrihu
1. a bedstead or stool; a small
chair or table; §,<4'qK*q khri-la bsko-wa
to raise to the throno; to place on
the chair; §,QJ*q^5’q khri-la hkhod-pa
to preside; to occupy the chair;
sen-ge khri throne; a chair borno (in
relief) by a carved lion for rulers and
incarnate lamas; gser-khri golden
scat or chair; seat for royalty;
§fias-khri a contrivance to serve the
purpose of a pillow; chos-khri a
professoral chair; pulpit; reading desk;
table for books; schooltablo; nal-khri
resp.	gzims-khri bedstead. 2.
tho upper pedestal of a
chaltya or Buddhist votive tomb.
Syn. 3*rg nal-khri-9 tgyun-khri\
hdug-khri.
khri rkan сан a seat fur-
nished with legs; a bedstead.
§ p khri-kha^fi1*’f4 khrihi kha or
khrihi $ten on the chair:	khri kha-
on the chair or seat (A. 57),
khri-cheu a great chair; a title of
the abbot of Galdan monastery.
* I	Khri-chen tfag-
dwan ipchog-ldan 55’^554C> ^^1 Drin-
can fiag-dwan inchog-ldan (Schr, 17 A).
♦	Khri-chen fiag-dwat
$iian-grag$ n. pr. (Schr,).
*	‘	Khri-chen Blo-
bzafi bstan-pahi	bio*
bzaii in-ma hi shab§ (Schr.).
fl'5^ khri-snan n. of a Buddhist
physician of Lhasa;
^ 3*5^ the son of the celebrated physi-
cian named Dun-gi thor-can.(Yu thog-pa)
(Gyn. 33).
khri snan sa-le skin of the
black antelope; a devotee sitting
§Ч|'ЙЧ||	!71
on it remembers the vows as well the
duties of a Bodhisattva ;
spreading a skin of black antelope
for a seat (Л. 11.).
ichri §tan chen-po
a large conch or bed ;	khri-stan
mthon-po	a high couch or bed
(forbidden to the devout).
khri-gdiigs the sun.
*	khri-ldan sen-gehi mdsod
(Schr.; Ta. 2, Ц).
khri-phycd dan gnis two
thousand and half ; ni-khri twenty
thousand.
khri-hphan the height of a chair;
a high chair (Gs.); also the official rank.
bison-khan a prison; jail
(IQnon.) ; also R’^ khri-mun a prison;
dungeon.
RV> khri-hur	n- of a bird
(Ya-sel. 7).
0’^’4 khri le-wa fear, in G. (Ja.).
i: khri-qift or R^ khrihu a chair.
R’^' и: (thi-s'ing) a creeping
plant; a creeper.
Khri-sroft Ide-btsan the
celeberated King of Tibet who formally
introduced Buddhist monarchism into
Tibet, erected the great monastery of
Sam-ye, and caused numerous Buddhist
sacred books to be translated into Tibetan.
khrihi rkan-pa chos-pa чт<^-
a bed furnished with legs or sup-
ports ; fig. to discipline the mind so that
religion may take hold of it.
khrihi rkan-rtcn sfaur^i the
legs of a chair.
ЙчГЙч1 khrig-khrig (thig-thig) 1.
proper, suitable; not less nor more : R4!’
Khrig-khrig bsgrtgs-son it has
suited well; it fits exactly. 2. quivering,
as of the body with cold, or chattering of
the teeth. 3. v. R^’Rq khrib-khrib.
Сч
khrigs (thig)	gral khrigs-
pa 1. arranged in proper order or row with-
out deviation from the right course or line:
khrigs chags-sn bkod-pa
seated or arranged in proper order where
men, women, the old and the young,
the great and the low, all are put in their
respective order; 2. also in reference to a
priest conducting a religious service, his
demeanour when he does not look this
side or that side but is intent on his
duties and ceremonial observances; he is
then said to be	khrigs
chags-su bkod-pa.
kharigs-se plentiful, abundant;
thorough ;	khrigs-se gan quite
well ;	khrigs-se byed-pa to
treat; to entertain plentifully (Sch.).
I: khrid (thi) instruction, tutelage;
yon-tan khrid-pa instruction,
teaching ; RS’^i^4 khrid hdebs-pa to
give instruction ; to instruct:
khri$-pa§ chog I am willing to give
instruction ; you may have lessons with
me (Jd.). khrid zab-po thorough
instruction; Sj§lu-khrid instruction
to an evil purpose; seduction;
khrid b gad-pa to give instruction; to
make admonitory speeches.
C\
HS II: or 3^ row; order; serial
order or arrangement :
in the same manner there
are four stages in the way to saintly
perfection (Lam-rim, fr).
051
172

1^5 И! : pf. of
khrid-phrug (thi-thug) scholar ;
pupil (Jd.).
khrib-khrib (thib-thib) ^^’3
n. of a large numbor (Ya-sel.).
C\
khrims (thim), тлям, ^TU,
law or right in general ; the laws of a
state ; any particular law. There are two
kinds of laws—
khrim-la chos-khrims dan rgyal-khrhns
gnis god state law and spiritual or reli-
gious law. The proverb says:
Э’ЯЗ*'3s	Kyyal-
khrbns gxcr-gyi gnah ftf, chos-khrbns dar-
дуг mdiid-pa lta-Ъи yin the state law is a
golden yoke, but the religious law is like a
silken knot:	'З'Ч^’^^Т'В^'^ for
laws they pass decrees, statutes :	‘or
khrbns-la gnas-pa to be subject to
law :
holy personages and the incarnate
race are also subject to law.
Syn. for laws of state:—Ч4!” lugs ;
hjig-rten khrinis-,	yuZ-.
chos; Д*** khrbn$;	khrims-htg$
(Mnon.).
khrims-khan court or place of
justice.
Syn.	q khrims-rnahi khan-pa ;
sgra-ldan can\ DwJ'vq khrim&Jcyi
ra-wa ;Vrg4T*’ dril-sgrog-sa, (Mnon.).
khrbns-kyi kha lo-pa,
Blon-po a minister; a legal officer (ДЬ7оп.),
khrbns bsgrags-pa, v. 0^4*
bkah-btags, a proclamation or prcu
claimed order.
khrims-gcod^^^^^S nes-pti
gcod to inflict punishment (Mnon.).
gw4e«i|N khrims-hjagi =
khrbns kyi don bshin ace. to the meaning
or spirit of the law (Nag.).
4 khrbns
la §kyal-tca to deliver up to justice.
|5^ khrii (I hi), v. khrii.
|5^ к hr is (thi), pK‘^’1*’’4 khrii hjogs-
pa peace, v. hjug$-pa.
khru (thu) fi’« khru-ma one-
fourth of a hdom or fathom; a cubit;
rtsc-khru or the measure of eighteen
inches, from tho elbow to the extremity
of the middle finger:	khru-gan
rtsam	about the measure of 15
inches from the elbow to tho fisted middle
finger is called bskum-khru, qt cubit
measure ; (9’WP к hr и hjal-tca to measure
with a cubit measure (Cs.).
H’=J khru-wa (thu-wa), sometimes for
45*4°hkhru-wa, to wash.
ч»
Й'Ч]з^ khru-gzar a kind of stew-pan
(SM.).
khru-slog or	khru-rlog
tilling the ground; ace. to Seh. a pit
filled with corn :	khru-$log-pa dig-
ging ; breaking up the soil; gardening.
khrufi-khrun (thung-thung)
so "Э
яте crane, grus cinerea; also the stork:
khrun-khrun rus-pas
chu-hgags sol the bones of the crane remove
the stoppage of urine. When milk mixed
with water is given to a crane it will drink
the milk, leaving the water in the basin.
The reason of this, according to K. d.\ 110,
is that as soon as the bill of the crane
touches the milk it turns into curds, which
are eaten up, leaving the water in the
basin.
03j I	173	I
Syn.	mgrin-pa rab-rift; й*Г
mig $man mjug-ma; ДУ* krun-ca
(Mnon.).
|gc/|5c/4Ew khrun-khrufi hjoms—^^
8)’g	dbafi-phyug-gi bit
ckufi-ba gshon-nu gdon-drug a name of
Kumarathe second son of Is'vara (Mnon,).
IS54 khrtuj pa, Q*t|554 lus khrud-pa to
wash; cleanse out dirt or filth from the
body (Rag.).
p^ khrun (than) ufhrnu height;
X0	.
length; extension (Cs.):	khrun
phafi srid height and breadth (equal).
kh rn m-kh rum	(thu m- th am)
40	40
(Sch.) :	9S’q khrum-khrum byed-pa or
khrum-khrum brdun-tca to
pound in a mortar.
RWJ khrums (thum)	n. of a
40
constellation: ^^5 khrums-$tod the name
of the 24th constellation,
Syn. bya-mchu;	# ?ihi Iha-
mo; W’*1 gna§-ma;	Ьа-ghn rkan
(Mnon.).
^’?S’3yq khrums-stod-kyi na-ica 4Tx£-
the full moon of the month
of 4^, July.
khrnm$-$mad the name of the
25th constellation,	; acc. to
Hindu astronomy the 26th lunar mansion,
figured by a conch, and comprehending two
stars, of which one is Andromeda.
Syn. zehu ; ^'Ч'яЭс, ^brul-hchin (Mnon.),
£*<^'3 khrum-zla (thum da), v. 3'q’q3S’q
zla-ba brgyad-pa ^йнт^, the eighth
month of the Tibetan year.
Syn.	hbugs-pa ; Sbya-mchu ;
nor-ldun;	khyu-mchog can;
q qik. ^'£Uc/ ba-lan rkafi-bzan; *w sprin-
bzan; ^’4 len-pa; byahi zla-wa;
§ton-zla hbrin-po (Mnon.),
khrul (thul),	khrul gton-
wa to let fall; to drop (several things at
intervals) ;	mchi-ma khrul
bshcd to shed tears : 3’^ zla-khrul in W.
iutercalary month (Jd.),
khrul-po in C. 1. cheerful;
40
merry. 2. fornicator (Jd.).
khrul-ma 1. in W. crooked
40
crank, handle (Jd). 2. a whore. 3. P'
ger* khu-wa khrul-ma rice-water or water
in which millet is washed.
khrus (thus)	WTUcT, яй
bath; washing ; ablution.
khru§-kyi btul-shugs
can = dran-srofi a Rsi or sage who
observes the vow of ablution :
khru$ byed-pahi Itun-byed
faults committed while bath-
ing :	having
bathed put on clean clothes and take
milk, curds and butter (Lon, ^\32).
Syn. kun-tu rgyu;	dkah-
thub-can;	fiag b§dams-pa;
4 dge-war slofi-ica ;	non-mons thul;
^qc. q*^<4 dban-po thul;	§mra-ba cad-
pa;	gtan-bar gna§-pa;
95'4 tshan-par spyod-pa;	*],q rig-
byed klog-pa (Mnon.),
& ST kkru§-kyi rtsa, $'-*] ku-ga the
grass Ku-ga (Mnon.).
khrus-kyi rdsin
к hr us rgyab-sahi rdsin a bathing tank.
g*T0 khru§-khu water for bathing (Jd.),
g$rpq'q|^’q khrus-khah brtsegs-pa the
making of a bath or bathing place.
I
174
[
B’T’W khrus-mkhan	one who
bathes ; he that has bathed.
khru-chal	washing
materials, soda, soap, etc.
khrus-chu bathing water; water
consecrated by a deity being washed in it.
khru$-dar scraf or good linen
towel for the toilet; scarf of silk used in
washing the images of deities (Rtsii.).
Syn. bum-dar\
sor khru$ btags-ri (IjUon.)^
khru$-$der basin; washing bowl.
khrtts-pa ((hu$-pa)	qfKSeHb
чга washed; also washing.
Syn. 5^'5 khru$-bya;	fikhrud; {9'4
khni-wa (Mnon.).
khrus-buni	washing pot
or jug.
khru^-ma khrud-ma washings
of rice or any other millet; also the rem-
nant of water in which rice, &c., is boiled.
khru$-rdsa$ articles of washing or
to wash with such as soap, ete.
Syn. Idag-chal; khrus-rtsi*,
VT§5 dag-Lyed (MHon.).
khrus-gshofl	bathing
tub; basin used for a bath.
Щ’ЗД khrus-ras	a towel; a
bathing towel.
khruz-gfcr bathing water. Ace.
to Jd. this word (in La dak) relates to a
certain medical procedure or method of
curing.
ргдШ khru$-gsol-wa resp. for E^'§5’4
khru§-bycd-pa, i.e., when applied to bathing
places used by divine beings and great
men:	g*r§V°’ lha-mi khaft-pa
sogs la khrus byea-pa “gods or men taking
a bath in their abodes and so forth/’ to
administer a bath to another, especially
as a religious ceremony, consisting in
sprinkling with water.
khre (the) millet:
4$*r§5,	w§5 millet,
being both heavy and chilling, causes
'wounds to swell, but bones which have
been dislocated or fractured it causes to
unite. khre-rgod wild millet;
wild Й stops diarrhoea
and removes the poison.
§'£ khre-tse Chinese vermicelli (Jd.).
khreg^-pa (theg-pa), v.
mkhrcg§-pa.
khrem-gner, v. chu-gncr
(Mnon.).
khrd-po shameful.
-*4
khrems-pa (them-pa) 1. irriga-
tion; also to water gardens and cultiva-
tions ; to sprinkle water. 2. n. of a book:
byan-khog
khrem^-kyi lufirin-chcn hod hphro-ica
(Sorig. 81).
khrcl (thel) resp. 3^’0^ thugs-
khrcli. fqqija kind of millet. 2. 44^41
shame; diffidence ; bashfulness ; modesty.
3. piety acc. to Ja., especially in IF
4. in C. disgust; aversion.
0^'45 khrel-gad a scornful laughter.
В°г^ khrel-can possessed of shame;
4^ khrel-can bashful (Cs.); also earnest,
conscientious.
khrel-lto$ pusilanimous ; shame-
faced.
khrel-gdoil (lit. a face capa-
ble of shame) a bashful face.
khrel-hdod-can in W. ready
to shame others.
fKtft khrel-ldan, v.	fio-tsha $es-
pa qroMfari modest.
0” I
175

Н'ТЦ to be ashamed; to provoke shame:
gq-ц&\khrel-wadan no-tsha-wa me$
he has no shame or modesty.
khrel-mcd-pa^ ^'^y^khrel-med-
та immodest, shameless.
jgai khrel-yod modesty ; chas-
tity ; decency ; 0^’*Ч5 4 l-yod-pa to be
chaste:	khrel yod-par byed-
pa to behave chastely, with modesty.
khre§ or (the) 0*r3 khres-po, (the-po)
a load, burden:	mikhres chun-
can a man with a small load (A, 10),
g^-q-^q^c.-^N kre§-po dehi nan-nas from
within that package: Я9*
gshun-don-gyi bsans $in khres phed
half a bundle (or load) of fire-wood for
the use of government (Rtsiii),
Syn. khur-pa*	khur hdren-
pa;	tgyab-kyis theg-pa; ft*’
ЗГ*ч khur stsa-pa (Mnoui),
khres-khrc§ (the-thc) unable
to sit erect; falling down :
mi-gag khres-
khre$ na-wa gzigs nas sman-pa la cis phau
dris-pas (A, 44) seeing a man very ill
so as to be unable to sit erect, he asked the
physician what would be of use.
khra (tho) a kind of bronzo, of
about samo quality and worth as bell-
metal	hkhar-u-u), but inferior to
li. The kind of bronze called khro-nag or
dark bronze is also called Ichags к hr о on
account of the predominance of iron in
the compound. The kind called fTST1
khro-dkar, white bronze, has more zine and
•ЗД’рГ zans-khro has more of copper in
it than iron. The dark-bronze is largely
manufactured in China; the white-bronze
is much prized by the Tibetans. Huge
bronze caldrons used in the great monas-
teries of Tibet for boiling tea are made of
the white bronze; tshog§-khro large
bronzo caldrons used in cooking tea, &c.,
for the use of the congregation in the mon-
asteries of Tibet:
khro-nag gzcr-srin dan dug-nad
hjoins dark bronze dissipates worm-spasms
and poisonous complaints.
0’5^ khro-rgyan ornaments made of
bronze,	khrohi khug-til bronze
pot to boil tea.
щЧ khro-chu 1. liquid or melted
bronze; acc. to some author melted iron
before it is cast. 2. n. for 5^’$ dnul-chu
quicksilver; (a mystic) term (Min,),
khro-chu §dom-pa to fill up
joints, grooves, &c., with melted bronze; to
solder.
0	hjoms-pa to suppress anger
or wrath:
ganshig b$grim$-te khro hjoms-pa,
de-ni hdi-din gshan-du bde (Spyod.) he
who can subdue his anger will be happy
here and hereafter.
йЧ*^ khro-nams-^t&'^ls rnam-brjid or
rfiam-hjigs or	rnom-brjid
to sit in an angry mood (Mnon.),
khro-gner	wrinkles
on tho face and forehead expressive of
wrath, indignation, anger; also indignant.
khro-gner-can she whose
face is wrinkled with anger; also frown-
ing.
*	khro-gner can-ma (Schr,
36 Ci).
g^v^ci khro-gftcr med-pa
free from frowning or anger.
Й’Я
й<11
й 4^	khro-gner gzi-brjid
ldan-pa} -q’V1! $u-daj n. of a medicinal root
[Sman. 102).
0q khro-pa in JF. for 0 khro.
д q khro-gt um-po furious with rage.
й-q khro-wa^ (tho-wa) 4£‘« brtse-wa
тру, wfcrr sbst. anger, wrath ; also
adj. angry, wrathful:	khon-khro-
wa smouldering wrath:	khro-wa
bzod-pa subduing or abstaining from
anger: 0 4 '4^'4
khro-wa b^od-pa nc$ bcom-pa $ltir-yaft
$kye-war mi-hgyur-ro anger having been
subdued and inwardly suppressed, it
will not grow again (It. d. * 68) : 0‘4^‘
-9|	§ tin chief remedy for
the poison of anger в forbearance (7Г. d.
* 68) :	53\4W*’«5’
if tho wrathful mind be onee
subdued it is tantamount to subduing all
the enemies ono has.	or 0'4^*
to be or to grow angry (Cs.) ;
though angry, to be as if not
angry ; 0	’4*rg’4 angry looks ;
to look back with anger (Mnon.).
Й'Ця Ithro-wa-пш жЬ?*тт n. of a
goddess.
khro-wo itho-wo) ^tvt, an
angry spirit; a god or Bodhisattva in his
assumed wrathful mood or manifestation.
*	khro-WO
khamt-gsum rnam-rgyal tprul-tyad ЖПТ-
(Schr.; Ta. 2, 276).
0'S^q khro-wo chen-po	an
appellation of MahSkala, the Lord of
Death—the terrific god or guardian of
Buddhism.
*0‘^^я^ khra-wo rta-mgrin ЖТ^-
(Schr. 71 C.).
* 0'^5 ^4^'5 i khro-wo $tob$-po-che
(Schr. 73 B.).
♦ p ^4^\£ ч0<Ц'4 khro-wo bdud-rt$i
hkhyil-pa ЖПтг«гнг<гй (Schr.; Ta. 2, 103).
*0’^'ЯЧ5’5’4 khro-wo hdod-rgyal
(Schr. 72 A.).
* 0’25	khro-wo rdo-rje sa-hog
(Schr. 7k B,).
*	khro-wo dbyug-pa sfion-
po nWw (Schr.; Ta. 2, 161).
*0'2$9 q^’4 khro-wo mi-gyo-pa WTWT^T
(Schr. 58 C.).
*	khro-wo ^ne-wa btseg^-
pi (Schr. 58 Л.).
khro-ico gtsng-tor
hkhor-bsgyur	(Schr.).
khro-wo gshan-gyiz
mi-thub-pa (Schr. 71 A.).
*p’25’qj^aj'gaj^5 'khro-wa ggin-rje-gged
(Schr. 71 B.).
0 §5 khro-byed Vtw,	frightful.
0'§V* khro byed-nia 1. a name
of the goddess Paldan Lhamo. 2.
ojgsrXi bud-med gtum-mo	a fearful
woman (Mnon.).
0 'Й4]	mig-gi
тпат-hgyur or ^4фйч| §dafi-mig an expres-
sion of the eye; angry eyes (Mnon.).
0 Й khro-пю a female terrific deity or
spirit.
0'Й^ khro-mon prison (Sch.).
khrog (thog) in 0^'454 4 khrog
brgyab-pa to drink hastily; to gulp down :
0<q £4 4*ShT0«q	khrog chiifi-pa
yis khrag-gor-gcod-pahi-mchog. Thog-
chung is beht for stopping bleeding.
04'041
177
й*'5||
khrog-khrog (thog-thog) 1.
one who speaks irrelevantly and is not
steady in his acts or words. Described as
q’i^-q’p’^’^	c^'q’
acc. to Jd. in JF. the sound caused
by something falling heavily on the
ground.
Й*Г4** khrog-chun an herb with leaves
resembling a saw in shape.
M4!’ khrog-po botanical term, used
of leaves standing round the stem scattered
or alternately.
khrog-sman the raw unpre-
pared substance of a medicine (Sch.): ЯУ
B^l sman-khrog is defined as
sman-ma brduns-pa §na-tshog$-la, the
unpulverized ingredients of a medicine.
khroft-fie (thong-he} upright,
straight, erect (Jd.).
khrofi-po close-fisted, stingy
(JS.).
R5’ khrod (thod) crowd, assemblage,
mass, multitude ; mi-khrod a troop;
crowd of men ; ^’B5 ri-khrod a range of
mountain peaks; Г05 rtsa-khrod a heap,
stack, rick (of hay); V^’B^ nag§-khrod a
dense forest; $<YB5 mun-khrod thick dark-
ness ; dur-khrod a cemetery ; B5'^
in the crowd; ^'B5=also a hermit.
khron (thon) claw: B^
khron kyis тко-icahi sdc the class of galli-
naceous birds (S.g.; Jd.).
khron-pa (thon-pa), ^4, 3rrfa,
well; spring : B^’S khron-
pahi chu well-water; also called
don-chu; B^'S khron-Ъщ a little well:
§\q^vq khron-pahi shih-po B^w
^’4 hron-pa$ run-ica	water in a
well that has been made fit (by the priest-
hood) for drink.
B^’9 khron-bu 1. a medicinal root; a
vegetable purgative. 2	’***‘cjvje/
kJiron-bus hjam-por $byon-byed
grogs-kyi mchog thron-bu acts as a gentle
purgative.
R« khrom (thorn) a market place; a
bazar; crowd of people ; multitude of per-
sons ; B*1’^ khrom-chcn a great crowd;
tshogs-pahi khrom-rnams the
assembled crowd; pho-khrom mul-
titude of men; J^'B^ rgydl-Khrom a
royal gathering: acc. to Cs. B^yq khrom-
chen-po, chief market-placo, also principal
street: b^’^X q khrom-$kor-wa to wander
about the market; to ramble through as if
in a market;	gsan-snags
khrom-du klog secret spells (magic
formulas) are read in the market.
khrom-skor-ma harlot;
strumpet; street woman (Cs.).
B*1'^4]‘^5 khrom-thog chod a person well
dressed, well equipped, and possessed of
personal accomplishments; one above the
crowd ; above his fellows.
Khrom-pa 1. n. of a province
in Tibet; B^’qq khrom-po-pa, an inhabi-
tant of Khrom (Thom). 2. a market
vendor.
^*5^ khrom-dpon officer who is charged
with the supervision of a market.
khrom-me * sparkling ; glittering:
zil p-akhrom-pie sparkling dew
24
178
di’np. js^'V^ ^’I^S'4’4 Mrow dmar nag
hkhyil-wa a motloy crowd; a throng, black
and rod intermingled.
khroni-tshogs (thom-tsho) tho
gathering of buyers and sellers, &c., in a
market :	$a-khrom the section of the
market where meat is sold; meat market;
VTg* dpe-khrom book market; УД* rta-
khrom the section where ponies and horses
are sold.
khroms, v. *5^'4 hgrcm-pa.
khrol (thol), v. hkhrol-wa and
яЗргд hgrol-ica 1. a sound (Ja.). 2.
ЧртеТте loosening ; unfastening ; that
which is unfastened.
by wgo-
khrol is meant the separating of meat from
tire bones by tho sheep’s head having
been boiled well. ^’Д*1 пай khrol the con-
tents of a slaughtered animal, including
the stomach, entrails, lungs, liver, spleen,
&c. The expression
гай-gi пай-khrol phyi-la-ston-pa means
“ one’s own blunders exposed to outward
show” :	khrol-gyis son (the
ring) slid sounding (across tho azure
floor).
khrol-khrol (thol-thol) — ^^
khrol-po bright, shining;
khrol-khrol	mig
khrol-k khrol-k Ita-wa to stare at.
Д^Л^ khrol-doh is said to denote a large
hand-bell.
Ж khrol-cha release (as of monks
from a religious service or of sohool-boys
from class work; ace. to Sch, the act of
forgiving ; pardon.
j. khrol-po (thol-po) 1. cheerful,
merry; sparkling, glittering, dazzling.
2. fornicator.
ц. j sparkling : ^’Д'Ч’З hod
khrol-po brightness (on water when the
sun shines upon it). 2. acc. to Jd. in IF.
distinct; intelligible.
Д'Ч’я khrol-ma, nas-tehags a seive
for cleansing and sifting barley, grain, etc.
khrol-mo in IF. brittle, fragile;
opposite to mnon-poy tough.
khrol tshogs a siovo (Cs.);
fags t shags iron sieve.
д*гЙ khrol-log—ДЯ’ЁН khrog-khrog in
W. of. hkhrol-ica. ; also 1. kettle.
2. a sound.
|^5ГЦ khros-pa	thugs khros-
pa те, enraged; wrath-seeming;
appearance of wrath :
phyag-na rdo-rje gin-tu khro$-pahi
tshul bstau-])a Chagna Dorje in a very
wrathful form manifested himself :
khro^-pahi gar dance in wrathful mood.
khros-ma (thoi-ma) or Д’* khro-ma
the wrathful female deity or Rudrdnl;
such female divinities as outwardly show
themselves to be of terrific and frightful
aspect.
khros-tshig angry words.
Syn. rnan-hphyar or	sun-
hbyin (Mnon.).
mkhan an affix which, annexed to
substantives and verbal roots, answers in
oolloq. very much the same purposes as the
Hindustani appendix tea la;	sa-
mkhan one who has to do with the soil;
lam-mkhan one who knows the
way, a guide;	fih-inkhan a

179

worker in wood, carpenter, joiner, &c.
Affixed to a verbal root, signifies he who
perforins an action, whether only just
now or habitually;	yon-mkhan
oomer;	hgro-mkhan the goer;
one who moves; bri-mkhan the
writer, one who has written it; «q*«^ an-
mkhan (in Sikkim) one who speaks false-
hoods, a liar; $e$-mkhan he who
knows;	b$tan-mkhan the shower,
explainer ; *44^*4^ hdvgs-mkhan one who
is binding, fastening; also with an objec-
tive case,	fiahi bu-mo hdotf-
mkhan, such as are desiring my daughter;
bsad-mkhan the man who is killed
or who kills; a murderer. In colloq. lan-
guage mkhan seems to have entirely dis-
placed the termination ч pa, signifying in
general the agent:	gdun-
ma kh у er-mkhan gyi mi the men carrying
the beam. Contrary to its original signi-
fication, it is even used to form the relative:
the sheep which was killed.
’^5 mkhan-rgyud-=^
Bli-chen dan mkhan-pohi rgyud the lineal
spiritual descendants of Bla-chen and
Mkhan-po, those through whom the vows
formulated by them are handed down
(ВД-
I: mkhan-pa ferns of two
species. The one growing in Tibet is
called WV’F mkhan-dkar, or the white
fern; the other species belonging to the
Cis-Himalaya is called mkhan-nag,
black fern: mkhan-pa is deemed useful in
healing fresh eut wounds; it is also applied
to swellings.
зцруц II: incense ; frankincense :
the
various kinds of incense in which the scent
of such as khan-pa, Bain, etc., predomi-
nates (Rtsii.).
mkhan-po,	a
professor employed to teach; the head of a
monastery. In Tibet the head of a parti-
cular college attached to a monastery,
high priests who give vows to the junior
or inferior lamas, and professors of sacred
literature, are called mkhan-po; also learn-
ed men, who as such are endowed with the
mkhan-rgyud or spiritual gifts or
descended heritage from their spiritual
ancestors, are called mkhan-po. Again,
learned men such as are sent to China as
representatives of the Grand Hierarch ате
also styled mkhan-po. Besides these, those
who serve the Grand Lama as his domestic
chaplains, teachers or advisers, such as
Sku-bcar Mkhan-po Khau-po, who
sits in company of the Grand Lama;
gzim-dpon mkhan-po the chamber-
lain khan-po;	mchod-dpon
mkhan-po the domestic chaplain; ^W^qy
*f^’q gsol-dpon-mkhan-po the steward in
charge of the Grand Lama’s tea and food;
*1 mkhan-sde phyi-ka outside khan-
po—those that enjoy this distinction but
partially. Other designations of this kind
are	§ Mkhan-po la rnam-pa
bshiste:—(1)
<Rq’^5 mkhan-po chos-kyis sdud-la zan-zin-
gi$ та-yin pahan-yod the professor who
conveys to his pupil instruction, not wealth;
(2)	zafi-zin-
gis sdud-la, cho§-kyis та-yin pahan yod the
professor who gives riches but not religi-
ous instructions; (3) ^’qgv^q^q’
^q‘wprsjvq‘^5 mkhan-po chos-kyis sdud-
cin zan-ziil-gis sdud-pa у an yod the professor
who gives both wealth and religious instruc-
tion to his pupil; (4) ^yq^^-jq^Y
180

Sl^l
й mkhan-po cho^-kyis
kyafi mi-sditd-chfn zan-zin-gis kyan mi sdud-
pa yod the professor who neither imparts
in traction nor wealth.
W9 mkhan-bu pupil, scholar (Jd.).
mkhan-mo mistress, intructress
(CsJ.
mkhan-rab$ the succession of
khan-po or abbots in a great monastery.
mkhan-rim$ the respective
prospects of being elected abbot as depend-
ing on the different ranks of the expectant
candidates; the order of the succession of
abbots.
mkhan-^ob for
mkhau-po dan §lob-ma the professor and
his pupil; also (according to some)
mkhan-po dan $lob-dpon the pro-
fessor and the teacher:
bla-ma mkhan-slob-kyi bkah the words or
commands of the lama, abbot and teachers.
mkhah щ the heaven ; the sky;
generally nam-mkhah.
mkhah-klofi, ^I5q mkhah-
khyab,	mkhah-dbyin§ the whole
rompass or extent of the heavens (C*.\
wjq mkhah-skyc$ heaven-born; a
name for the year Fire-tiger of the
Tibetan calendar (Mnon.),
mkhah-khyab	that
which encompasses space or the sky:
•jq-^’^’ч^ mkhah-khyab tin-m hdJn Wth^t-
ГЧ131	the all-comprehending (all
; b<orbingl meditation; n. of a Samadhi.
mkhah khyim-can
lie whose abode is in the sky; the sun.
♦jfoprX mkhah-mkhah ro
[Schr; Kalac. T. 46).
я^ч	mkhah-gos	can clouds
(MM).
ярч'чЗ} mkhah-hgro (kha-rfo) lit. “the
sky-goer ” ; a god; a bird; arrow.
Syn.	lha-rnams; ч^глчщ hdab
ch ays ; 5 by a; mdah ; bya-khyun ;
da-ki-ni\ gtso-mo (Mfion.).
яртч^’л mkhah-hgro—ma a class, mainly
of female sprites, akin to our witches, but
not necessarily ugly or deformed. There
are two kinds of khadoma :—those still in the
world and those that have passed out of the
world or are about to pass away from it.
Of the latter or those called
ye-fes kyi mkhah hgro-ma> goddessoss of
wisdom, they are five kinds, viz., Buddha
Ddkini, Vajra Ddkim, llatna Ddkini, Pad-
ma Dakitfl, and Karma Ddkinl. Of these
Rdor-je Phag-mo, Sen ydon-ma, &c., have
each a hundred thousand dakinl followers.
They are said to bo possessed of superna-
tural powers and resemble fairies in their
attributes. Among the worldly Ddkini
there are two classes, those belonging to
the pantheon of the Brahmaps and those
devoted to the cause of Buddhism. In
Tibet we read of	Tshe-rifi mched-
Ina, the five long-lived sisters:
Bsian-ma bcu-gni§ the twelve nymph
siders who undertook to guard Buddhism,
&c.
Syn.	hgro-zcahi sgron-me; §5’
чя£ srid-pahi $gron-me, the lamp of the
world, the light of the universe (ДГЯоп.).
я^ч*ч5’|ч mkhah-hgro skyes
born of those that move in the sky.
mkhah-hbro brcla-yig
^ччЗрч^БЦ a form of
Deva nagari character used by the Rnin-ma
sect in their mystical writings.
ярч’чЗглщс/Аl^khak-hgro gsan-гса
ye-$es n. of a deified lady, who was, in her

181

former existence, the wife of a king called
(Ratna Dasa)	She is adored
in Tibet as the goddess of mystical
learning.
Щ rnkhah-hgrohi rgyal-po=
bya-gtsug phud-
can the golden bird (eagle) with a crest:
4’IP‘
the crest of this bird is in colour
resplendent as lapis lazuli, and its wings
are said to be chequered all over.
w^q-q^q^qq-^q j: rnkhah-hgrohi daan-
phyug ^7T, sftHvrfbl the lord of
the sky.
^q-q^q^qq-^ n: = fzra ; gq^vq khyab-
hjttgNishipi (Mnon.).
mkhah-rnnam like the heavens;
infinite:	mkhah rnnam-pa a
name of Buddha (Mnon.).
rnkhah-rten the firmament;
sky supporting ; a sort of ornament.
rnkhah-ldin	met. the
eagle, the bird that soars on high.
rnkhah-ldin dkar-po
TS a general name for the
swan species (Mnon.).
Npq-^q-joi»^ rnkhah-ldin ryyal-mtshan, •
gq'ЧЧ khyab-hjug	Visnu (Mnon.).
^q-^q- ^qq • q rnkhah-ldifi d wan-po = g
khyun the king of birds (Yig. k. 29).
«jqq^q-qp^-q rnkhah-ldin (tfog-ра, v. w
mar-gad	n. of a green gem
(Mnon.).
rnkhah-spyod
^1^4,	!• that which has attained
to the sky, a gandharva (celestial musi-
cian). 2. celestial enjoyment; residing in
heaven:	«pq’g^^^’W’^-qq-q^-q’wpq-
rnkhah-spyod du las ma-§pafi$par
bgrod-pa rnkhah-spyod kyi dfios-grub the
blessing of entering into a heavenly exis-
tence without losing one’s present form:
^Ԥ5gone to the state of beati-
tude, i.e., to heaven.
«pq-g^-q mkhah spyod-pa	n. of
Avalokitesvara Bodhisattva.
«pq*gYVK‘# rnkhah-spyod dwan-mo an
epithet of the goddess Dorje Phag-mo
and of the abbess of the Yamdok Samding
monastery: t^qN’q^'
before the precious lotus feet of
the venerable one who has attained the
heavens (Yig. k. 20).
^q-^gqj mkhah-dbyug	lit. sky-
sticks ; a bedstead.
rnkhah-mig	(Schr.;
Kal e. T.48).
ыр-q	mkhah-yisne-ma =	rgyal-
rntshtn the sacred ensign (Mnon.).
^q-X«rq rnkhah rol-pa divine musician ;
that plays or moves merrily in the sky.
^q-or^ 1. rnkhah-la rgyu	that
moves in tho sky. 2. S bya a bird
(Mnon.): «pq-or^-q rnkha-la rgyu-u'a to
wander or move in the sky : flf^ar^’qq'S)'
the Preta that moves in the sky:
^q’q|-ajq-q rnkhah-la Idin-wa to soar in the
air. 3. ether, as the fifth element 4.
symbolical numbers; cypher, naught.
wpq-q^E.' rnkhah-gsan-=Y&'*^*\ mo-mtshan
the female sex (Mnon.).
rnkhahi gos -can ^TcR^i cover
or dress of the sky ; the night;
rnkhahi rgyal-rntshan	the sky-
ensign; Nf^-qqprq rnkhahi pag§-pa = faG
space; xhe void sphere ; the skin or cover
of the sky, i.e.) darkness, gloom ; q
rnkhahi gem of heaven ; the suu, moon,
star.
^q-^-q rnkhahi zil-ba — iog (Шоп.).

182
фЧ'51 |
mkhar	a castle, a
nobleman’s seat or mansion ; manor house;
freq, a citadel; fort:	mkhar-dpon
governor of a castle; commander of a
fortress.
Mkhar-kha n. of a place
situated, to the north of Gyan-tse in
Tsang; the birthplace of Grub-chcn Gtsafi.
$myon He-rti-ka, oue of the celebrated
Buddhist Tantrik saints of Tsang.
mkhar rgyahi-khal contains
7G8 Dbus sho=J>±0 mgyur-sho.
«pvt mkhar-rna	a drum;
(according to some) a minstrel.
YP Mkhar-chcn brag-dkar
n. of 0110 of the
37 sacred places of the Bon <G.
Bon. 3$).
Mkhar-chcn rdson n. of a
fort near Tengri Nor.
wpva^-q^ Mkhar-chcn bzih ^'4'^4’
one of the
wives of Padma Sambhava {Lon. я 8).
mkhar-nag-gi khal on
the Tibetan steel-yard	mkhar-nag
gan of gold weights 38 sho of Dbu§ plus
8 $kar of gold.
mkhar-nal that sleeps on space ;
a general name for gods and birds.
Mkhar-rta, n. of a place on the
confines of Tibet and Nepal (5. kar. 77).
Mkhar-ltag an abbreviation of
Mkar-rtsc dan Ltag-rtsc
rdson, the forts of Mkhar-rtsc &n&Ltag-rtse.
Mkhar-thog n. of Tibet.
mkhar-rdo (№)	n. of a
medicine; a metalic substance in large
grains; a sort of pyrites.
mkhar-sder* w, a plate or
dish made of boll-metal.
apvq mkhar-ica I:	bell-
mctal.
II: (also яр^-q hkhar-ua) in
B. and C. staff, stick:	mkhar-
gsil a staff of the Buddhist mendicant
priests, the upper part of which is hung
with jingling rings (Jd.):	phyag-
mkhar resp. for *pvq mkhar-wa.
w^vq^gj mkhar-bahi dgra, sfarfc
enemy of Kan£a an epithet of Ftinu
(Mnon.).
Mkhar-rtsc n. of a Rdsofi, or
fort in Phan-yul in Tibet.
Mkhar-zam Lha-khan
rdson n. of a fort and town in Tibet.
mkhar-bzo-tra зшзгтк,
a maker of articles of bell-metal.
'qjc. mkhar-ruhi spor gan one
$por of Mkhar-ru measure is equal to one
silver sran.
mkhar^srun	the guard
or garrison of a fortress (C?.)<
mkhar-gsil metal cymbal.
mkhal-mdog kidney-coloured;
dark red (Cs.).
mkhal-mahi
nad disease of the kidneys.
rnkhal-wa I: the kidneys:
mkhel-ma дай yin tsha-gran mis pa
unthun dan. rnkhal-nad Igan-wa rked-pahi
nad-la phan the kidney (of cattle, etc.
taken as food) equalizes the temperature,
and is beneficial in kidney disease and
also for ailments of the bladder and groin.
II: gaid to be kind of fruit
of two species used in kidney disease.
I
183

mkhas-gritb	mkha$-
pa dan grub-pa} a Buddhist scholar who
being learned has attained perfection.
*^^q’| Mkhas-grub rjc=^'^^
Q^yqarqaq Mkhas-grub Dge-legs dpal-bzan
one of the chief disciples of Tson-khapa.
mkhas-mchog a profound
scholar; eminent among the learned.
*ip$rq^ mkhas-brtan 4R steady and
wise; of reliable knowledge «p^’q'q’lyq
mkhas-po brten-f)a.
mkhas-pa nfccf,
f^TPL
4^, ys, wise,
learned, sagacious: g^q^p^’q sman-pa
vnkha$-pa skilful physician:
cho$-la mkhas-pa versed in religion:
^’«•gk’q’or^f^’q efficient in managing
pupils.
Syn. 95’4 bya-wa; rig-ldan;
rnam-gsal; ^’q’^ rig-pa-can;
blo-ldan ; skyon-fes;	yon-
ian-ges; grafis-can; mdsan§-
pa; ^’СЛГ’,М snan-fiag-mkhan;
fas-rab-can;	dam-pa; ^j’q^yqrq
rig-pahi dpah-po; 3fq’^ go-wa-can;
кгт-rig; brtan-po; $w^*rq sem§
ge$-pa; thos-ldan;	spyod-ldan;
ii*<'q*y^ rnam-par-dbans;	rin-
du mthon-ica; HJ^^’q’Mq’q	grags-pa	thob-pa;
дщч’ЧЯ’аГ gsal-wahi sgo;	dus-yig-
can; kun-$a$; cyq^qq’q dran-pahi
dwan-po; §fw blo-bzan; blo-gro$;
5^ mig-ldan; ^’J^'q^'q kun-gyis bkur-wa.
(Mfion.)
wpurqmkha^-pa-can ГНПЧ wise;
learned; skilful; experienced ; prudent;
shrewd.
K^srqnnkhas~pa Ita-bu
like a dexterous man; appearing skilful.
«f4^ q-g5’q mkhas-pa smad-pa 4?^4 of
inferior attainments.
w^-q-q^’^ mkhas-pa bshiu byed shew-
ing as one skilful, but not really so.
mkha$-pahi mgul rgyan
n. of a
commentary on Tibetan grammar called
mkhas-pahi mgul-rgyan by
Si-tic Chos-kyi hbyun-gnas.
mkha$-pahi dgah-ston
jorqS ’$«’$4)” ’
n. of a commentary on Tibetan orthogra-
phy (Sum-rtag) by Blo-gros rgyal-po Qi
Zur-mkhar.
rnkha^-pahi гдуапЪ'^Ц'лф*^
n. of a grammatical wrork by
Karma Rab-rgya§ of Ho-phug.
mkhas-pahi rafi-bshin
can	possessed of the nature
of the learned; naturally wise or skilful.
mkhas-pahi rigs
of the learned class:
mkhas-pahi rig§ las skyes born of the race
of Daksa,
jfwrq^’gjirq mkhas-par rlom-pa
mkhas-rlom^) ufecRPT, conceited
person; a pedant.
mkha$-pa$ dregs pedantic:
q^’X4!^’4’^ among the
cultured there is much pedantry in learn-
ing.
ирч'ч mkhas-po or *if*rq .mkhas-pa a
learned man;	stion-gyi
rnkhas-po rnams learned men of former
times.
rnkhas-blun wise and foolish;
wisdom and folly.
bud-med
blo-ldan ma a noble, learned woman
(ДИо;п).

184

mkhas-btsun learned and righ-
teous;	mkhafajtsun fain
learned; conscientious and good.
mkhas-god	most
skilful or dexterous.
W4 mkhun-pa (Sch.)} v. khun*
pa.
nMur-wa the chocks:
a little fleshiness in
the chocks forebodes wealth (JZZ.):
mkhur-tshos, v. 0^’^ khur-hhos,
chocks:	her
very ruddy cheeks glow like the rising sun.
ач^’Л w.kho-wa necessary; desirable ;
also vb. to want:	J don’t want
it.	mkho-tcahi yo-byad indis-
pensable things; necessary articles;
Не-war mkho-wa or ner-mkho
requisites, wants, desiderata; most neces-
sary things:	according as was
wanted before; as heretofore.
rykho-byed, colloq. kho-du\
necessary things; what may be needed:
khyo-la kho-ehe yb-pc rik di dir nyo nia
chok the kind which you wanted cannot
be bought here.
rnkho$-phah acc. to Nag.
signifies a fancy for a thing; a liking
for; also to wish, want something.
rnkhyid-gan the measure with
the fist made with thumb extended, about
six inches:	(its) length
when folded is one mkhyid {Yig. k.).
mkhyud-pa, v. i: hkhyud-
40
pa to keep, to hold, to retain;
dpe mkhy ud-pa,	dpe rnkhyud-ean
unwillingness to lend books (Cs.);
dpe-mkhyud byed-pa to be unwilling to
lend books.
rukh у ud-spy ad 1. a sort of bag
or vessel for carrying medicine. 2. sorcery,
witchcraft (Sch.):	Л a little
instruction or various subjects like the
alms-bag of the saint Phadam-pa (which
contained different medicines).
*0SV-’4 mkhyud $py(id-pa = ^^ ^man-pa
a medicine man; a physician (ДГло/л).
v. rnkhycn-pa. I
В 4 rje faun-gyis
thugs inkhyen-gyi fags-pa lags-sam Has
your reverence seen by your prophetic
sight ? §ku-mkhycn form of abject
entreaty: I appeal to your honour’s wis-
dom;	to your honour’s sacred
words;	to your honour’s heart;
you know full well; you will
understand :	О Lama, thou
knowest all!	of your wis-
dom permit to be done !
wkhycn-wkhan very learned:
profound like
tho ocean in every (department of) religion.
wikhycn-rgya-can possessed of
much understanding; very learned:
ye-mkhycn — *&i*fy*\ ntfion mkhycn pos-
sessed of prophetic knowledge; fore-know-
ledge;	thiigs-mkhycn knowledge
of a higher kind; prophetic sight.
mkhycn-pa resp. for ^*4
rig-pa,	go-tea 1. to know; also
knowledge; '#fy%4thams-cadmk/iyen-
pa all-knowing. 2 rnam-fes
= ^•5^ rnam-mkhyen fbr, such terms
though applicable to Buddha are now
applied to the Grand Lamas of Tibet out
of courtesy or for the purpose of flattering

185

them:	whose know-
ledge has no hound (Lam-rim.) ;
superior wisdom;	‘<й’ЗцФЯ attain-
ments ; accomplishments of a high order;
perceived, found out, dis-
covered; л«яч’5<1|чк«фуч*1 perceived the
sentiments to be pure.
mkhyen-dpyod yafa-pa
wide and critical knowledge; wide discri-
minating wisdom.
mkhyen-spyan yans-pa
(with) broad views and wisdom; wide
prophetic vision or sight.
mkhyen-brtse omniscient mercy.
mkh yen-gzigs supernatural
perception; attributes of a high incarnate
lama or a Bodhisattva,
mkhyen-rab the wise; also
$c$-rab wisdom.
mkhyen-fin-fiatn—^^
mkhyen-nam did you understand it ?
mkhyen psum:—pshi-fe$,
жгад, or	the knowledge of the
subject; basic knowledge: wr-SjR lam-fes
knowledge of the way (to Nirvana); know-
ing the way.	rnam-mkhyen = ^^'
rnam-par fes faurn cognition
of all things.
mkhrafi-pa (thang-pa) acc. to Jd.
is the fourth stage of the development of
the foetus.
ткЬгап-ро=$^'Ц hran-pa or
sra-war hgyur-ua a robust, hard and
sound constitution: 4«r3**3|5’*‘4’e|’*43*;Z* in
the great strength of his body there is
sound health (Nag). The soundness of one’s
constitution is ascertained by examining
the urine deposited in a bottle; when it
is natural the physician declares
nikhran-hdiig, or colloquially
hran-gin hdug, it (the constitution) is
sound, &o.
mkhran-wa (t han-ica) y or *0=^
mkhrafi§ also	khran hard; solid; com-
pact;	’^5 sra-mkhran-can
hgyur med firm; hearty; sound; of a
robust constitution (Jd.).
c\
mkhrig-ma (thig-ma) the wrist
of the hand (Jd.); the part of the hand
which (in women) is adorned with bangles.
It is also called ’*«/4 nor-bu chin-ica,
the part where jewels are bound.
c\
mkhrigs-pa (thig-pa) some-
times for mkhrig-ma.
mkhri§-nad bilious disease,
ex
'	mkhris-pa (thi-pa) fbw 1. the
vesicle of the gall; the gall-bladder, as part
of the intestines. 2. generally the bile
itself; the bilious fluid: «§*г<г^£чргч|*г<г
^ЧГ'Ч’Ь^ mkhris-pa $na-tshogs
b$dus-pa rma (fan dug mkhrii mig-la phan a
mixture of the biles of different auimals is
useful for sores; and the bile of poisonous
animals is useful for eye-disease: «g*rq$'
the four animal biles that are
used in medicine:—(1)	dom-mkhri$
bear’s bile; (2)	ri-bon mkhris-pa
hare’s bile; (3)	hphyi-wafai
mkhri^-pa marmot’s bile; (4) 3’^0M na-
mkhris fish bile (Sinan. 175).
rnkhris-pa~can splenetic; a
short-tempered person.
mkhris-ma acc. to =
hkhri§.
mkhris-tshad bilious fever; 3V
«3*1 gra^-mkhris a feverish chill.
«§«Л«« mkhri§-ritn$ applied to a fever
in which the liver is conjested.
as

186
ofwi’q |
tfJJuVs-fas e7/c, й’огл|д*ГЧЧ’^’
one in whose constitution the
bilious diseases predominate.
inkhregs-pa (thcg-pd) SiBtx,
hard; that cannot be broken; cannot
be divided ; also fearless; and acc. to Jd.
rngo mhhregs-ean obstinate,
stiffnecked, stubborn.
Syn. 5'4 sra-ica; mi-$fg$',
mi-hjig\ $’B5 wi-phyed (Mnon.).
hkhan-ica,	senis
mi-dgah-ua lta-hu 1. to hurt at heart or
offend, also to irritate. 2. vindictiveness:
gS-raj	npv^qq khyod la hkhan-
tshig cig-kyan hdug-pas (Hbrom. 51) you
use all manner of vindictive words. 3.
bickering, quarrelling; many quar-
rels:	dpon slob re hkhan-
hbynn there arose mutual differences bet-
ween masters and scholars.
re hkhan byed-pri to make mischief (Jf/7.).
Црр’Ц hkhad-pa, especially in IF.
1. to sit; to sit firm: f^q-ej^q
to sit on the back of a camel. 2. to
remain sitting ; to stick fast; to be stopped;
kept back (Jd); ^qa^ajorq to got
entangled with the foot so as to fall:
the door sticks.
hkham-pa — ^^'^ brgyal-tca to
sink or fall down senseless; to faint away;
to swoon. 2. to take into one’s mouth
(&//.).
hkhar-=.^4 sfien-pa or м]«'ч
«hags-jui desire; passion; attachment
hkhar-sgon white pebbles
called dhar gon in medical works:
&yas-gyon
ynis-su hkhar-sgoft dan sran-ma on both his
right and left there were white pebbles and
peas.
I: 1. hkhar-wa a walking
stick, staff, clutcheon: &’-^‘Spr^'q,#Tj*rq-
met (a man) who carried a
stick of chu-qin (water-tree) (Л. 131). 2.
bell-metal:
tho nist (sulphate) of bronze, or of
gong-metal, removes eye disease, ^vq i8
a compound of boll-mctal with copper, &c.;
^vq$'$ hkhar-icahi chu molten, liquid
bronze;	hkhar-tcahi ine-lon a
metallic mirror.
Qpvq II. vb. to adhere to; to stick to.
hkhar-rfaot J'£ rgya-rna 1. gong
used in Tibet and China to call people
to their work or lamas to religious service.
2. a drum of bcll-metal, large bell-metal
disk, producing when struck loud sound
like that of a bell.
hkhar-gshofi dish of boll-metal.
hkhar~zans a metallic kettle.
hkhar-gsil tho staff carried by
mendicant priests having a chait у a fixed on
its top ond, from which hang down sixteen
rings:	(A.
23) they all grasped beautiful mendi-
cant’s staves.
hkhar-gsil-gyi-mdo (K. d.
<4. J$5) a tractate on tho merit accruing
from the use of the mendicant’s staff.
Qfni hkhal when spinning the thread
stretched across is called hkhal, and that
lengthwise is called sgrhn; sometimes
this word is spolt as hkhel (Dag-yig.).
Q.p^I’4 hkhal-wa 1. to spin:*
lai hkhel-wa to-spin wool. 2 in W. to
send; to forward things.
I
187

hkhii-hkhrig or ярс/ч
hkhaft-wa denotes certain passions that
disturb the tranquility of the mind, such
as malignity and covetousness; acc. to Cfc.
to emulate, contemn, hate; also to long
for; acc. to Sch. pride (Jd.).
*	hkhu-tca я^*ч hgran-pa=
to vie with, contend; also wrath-
fully rebelling :	she sdan-du-
han	don-la
rgyun-du gnod-pahi sems he han-pa the real
signification is always to harbour thoughts
of doing mischief. Acc. to Jd. to offend,
insult, injure; also injury.
яд-А^-адгтА hkhu-wahi bsam-pa^^^
log-lta	a false creed ; heresy
(M«on.).
hkhun-pa 1. groan; a deep
sigh, from suffering or disease. 2. on
account of fullness of the stomach, beasts
such as cows and buffaloes make this hollow
sound at the time of chewing the cud: ящ*
g-pc/crjSK^ hkhun-sgra khan-pa khens he
filled the house with groanings:
i4-q]uw]-n^x)^ $(ian wahi dgra-la gyag Itar
hkhun he groans (or grunts) like a yak
against a fierce enemy (Jd.).
hkhum-pa, pf. khams (cf.
4 skum-pd\ 3^'4 thos-pa to comprehend;
to shrink ;	yan-lag hkhums-
pa to be contracted of the limbs ;
rkan-lag hkhums-pa contracted
hands and feet :
yur-ra raft-bshin hkhznn by cd yin the ditch
will get narrower of itself (Ja.).
hkums-pa 1. shrunk,
shriveled, contracted ; fig. reduced ;
restricted; deprived of power: gf'^wq bio
hkhums-pa a contracted mind; an easily
frightened heart; one who is much afraid
of (Af/j.) : acc. to Sch. to practise; to
impress on the mind.
hkhur-du thogs-te taking
up in order to carry; taking on one’s back;
lag-par khur-byes in W.
to hold in one’s hand (Jd.) ; ^«гвгяцч'А
sems-la hkhttr-wa to bear in mind ; ядя'чч)
hkhur-thag girth or rope; strap for
carrying.
W’A hkhur-ica sbst. pastry; vb.
to carry, as in R^RVtrq khur hkhur-ica-
one who carries a burden; hkhur-
byed, я^^’Ч hkhur bshin-pa carrying:
s^aj’qvQRVA mi-theg-par hkhur-wa to carry
very heavy loads; to carry what one is not
able to carry. Khur-gog^ bring it 1 Khur-
song, take it away!
hklmr-tshos, v. khur-tshos.
hkhnr-ra=^'*$^ smun-hkhur
bread or pastry baked with or in oil
(flag.).
W’A hkhul-wa acc. to Nag. to
subdue; to subject one by argument and
language to service ; acc. to Cs. to be
uneasy about; Д®гяцзга khral hkhul-zva
acc. to Jd. perh. to force a tax, a rate, on
a person.
hkhegs-pa^ pf. of яч|ч|^ hgegs^
to hinder, stop, shut off, debar:
ji-ltar bkag run-та hkhegs-
pas although they prohibited, in whatever
way, he was not stopped :
net-skyon hkhegs-pa-po one who has stopped
evils and dangers :	hkheqs-byed
one who stops. ’
188	®fa|
hkhens-pa, pf. khefi^ to
be replete ; to be full:	was
filled with blood;	blo-gros
ma khefis-te his mind not being satiated
(Л.).
Q^q’CI hkheb-ра, pf. kheb§, to cover;
to spread over;	yons-su khebs-
te being covered all over;
kha tham^cad khebs-te being covered over
the whole face; to overshadow (Jd.).
oj^Tl'q hkhcl-wa, hgd-ica, pf.
khcl,	q y(iefi hkhel^ra, to put on ; to
pack on; to load : ^’‘Sfaj-^orq bcu thogkhcl-
tea when tho ten storeys shall have been
put on (erected).
qp’q hkho-wa (cog. to mkho-
tea) to wish; to want; to think useful, ser-
viceable, necessary; to have occasion for:
it will be of use; he will be able
to make use of it : ap-wft’wp will it bo
useful or not, or in W. hkho-ee med,
I do not want it; I do not like it. ^«£5
fit for use; useful (Jd.).
I: hkhogs-pa very infirm
from old age; decrepit; decayed. Gen.
signifies rgan or	rgyas-hkhogs
worn out by age:	tfio-khog, sfya-
khog complexion blue or pale from old age.
II: VT4,
migration; wandering; fig. worldly
existence.
III : = g^’q gio hgog-pa
to cough (Mnon.).
hkhon-wa (cf. sfc-q $gon-wa) to
draw in one’s limbs; to sit in a cowering
position; to squat; to hide one’s self; V*’
dpah hkhofi-ica to be discouraged,
disheartened (Jd.).
4ps hkhod, fut. of	khod
1. surface; superficies ;	$ahi
hkhod snom-pa to remove inequalities of
tho surface; to level; to plane;
hkhod §nom$-pa levelled; made even; plain;
frequently	bar-gyi khod-snoms
gaps were filled up, t>., distinctions of rank,
wealth, &c., were done away with. 2. a
mill stone; «гяр^ya-hkhod the upper stone;
ma-hkhod tho nether stone (Ja.).
hkhod-pa=J^4 sdod-pa to sit
down; to sit; also to live, to dwell; to be
set down; to bo put : rgyal srid-la hkhod-
pa raised to the throne; ^‘^’^’q settled
at a place ; apr^j^’q seated in rank or
order;	stefi-tu hkhod-pa placed
above ; K^xj^’q placed under.
Ufa I: J$khon n. of an ancient family
in Tibet :	Sa^kya hkhon-
gyi rigs, Sa-$kya (hierarchs) belonged to
the race of Hkhon (&ag.).
Qjfa II:=W4 she-hkhon malice;
dispute; war; spite (fiag.); hkhon-
na§ from the state of dispute or war;
hkhon-ned-par honestly, without
evil intentions ; also without quarrel or
dispute;	hkhon sugs-pa to be
spiteful or quarrelsome.
*pVq hkhon-pa, also hkhon-yod-
pa to bear a grudge or ill-will against a
person; to be dissatisfied with a thing; also
to be malicious, spiteful.
hkhon-po discord; dissension
(Jd.).
Cf5q5l|
189

hkhol^	bya-icahi
hkholt the sphere of one’s doing or work
(Zaur); also = jyrci khyab-pa. Acc. to Jd.
to be startled, agitated, alarmed.
hkhobs^ag not fitting to a
place ; become larger or smaller:
hkhyag$-nas hkhdb^ag
cher-chcr son being frozen it does not fit,
it having grown larger (Асф.).
+	hkhob-ua — ^^ fan-pa bad;
wicked; low; barbarous; rough; rude; w
ярч wdhah hkhob border; also border coun-
try ; yan-hkhob distant border land.
I: hkhor an attendant who is
inferior to a friend in rank and superior to
a servant : <^’3’^Ая^лГЗс;У‘’ even if he
be allowed to be among the attendants.
^II: 1. for hkhor-lo a wheel;
Д’яря me-hkhor the fire-wheel ; chu-
hkhor a mill or wheel turned by water;
gf/ярХ Rlun-hkhor wheel turned by wind;
qqj-qpSX lag-hkhor a wheel turned by the
hand; a millstone. 2. circle; circumfer-
ence ; the persons or objects encircling; that
which surrounds (a certain point or place):
g'qIte-u'a dan dehi hkhor-
rnams the navel and the circumjacent
parts ;	de khor-la thereabouts.
ne-hkhor retinue, attendants; also
waiters :	hkhor daft bcas-pa
(qqfXTTK) with the attendants or suite;
hkhor dgra-bcom-pas sur-
rounded by the retinue of Arhats:
hkhor-du b$dus-po gathered
round as his retinue; also frequently the
train of thoughts, reminiscences, &c.,
which the soul, when passing into a new
body, cannot take along with it (Ja.).
hkhor wfcT (Schr.; Kdlac. T. 22).
hkhor kun-tu grays, Hq-
resounding in every
company.
hkhor-kha,	zla-ua
dan shag hkhor-гса la return or each rota-
tion (of a month, day, or year):
пшп-wahi
rigs la hkhor-khahi lhag hkhyil yon-gi hdug-
pa those articles which are found in excess
at the termination of the period should
be sent round (Rtsii.).
hkhor-mkhan one who turns
a wheel; a wheel that is turned; those who
come and go with somebody.
hkhor-gyi dkyil-hkhir
the circle of attendants.
hkhor-gyi skc-wa, qfrsrq
dependants.
hkhor-gyi sk>bo
(Schr.; Kalac. T. 21).
qffc'B’Rgwj hkhor-gyi hkhyams court-
yard ; an open space near a temple or a
residential hou^e where people assemble
to witness a spectacle; also the passage
round a temple or monastery for devotees
to walk round for religious merit.
Rftfvg'hkhor-gyi gtso-bo the chief of
the attendants or followers.
hkhor-geig one attendant ;
hkhor-rnam§ domestics ; house-
hold servants ; ®lo-hkhor a cycle of
years : йгяря'^’фм lo-hkhor bcu-gnis or
drug-bcu a cycle of twelve or sixty
years.
яря’^ hkhor-пап faqR the first of the
seven musical notes.
hkhor-to n. of a tribe in Tibet
(Vai. kar. 190).
Gpf\-q|
190

fjgohi them-
pa	steps at tho threshold or at the
entrance of a house.
qffchkhor-du b$du§ to enlist; to
recruit; to take as one’s followers. 3^4^'
A Bodhi-
sattva taking animated beings as his fol-
lowers works for their good; or a Bodhi-
sattvaAi^Nin^ brought animated beings into
his followers, does work for the cause of
men : ApVA^WA^<q hkhor-hdus-pa hdug
all the attendants had collected together.
Apvq hkhor-pa or Ap№3 hkhor-po male
attendant.
* Apfr;'«W| Й	hkhor phag-mo (Schr.,
5J Л.)
hkhor-wa I: to turn round; to
circumambulate, to walk all round; also
to elapse, to be completed. 2. to be
formed, perfected: (ЭТ‘^'Apfc’Athe frost
has formed ;	dew has arisen.
R^VA II: the world ; rotatory exis-
tence; the round of transmigration within
the six classes of beings: Aj^-q-erg-^prgM
hkhor-wa la skyo-fas skyes to repent at
having come into transmigratory existence.
Syn. w’Rnj та-rig*,	тппон-chags}
srid-pa ; hjig-rten ; ^’5(5 yan-
srid;	gshi hdsin-pa;
gtsug-lag dan-po\	thun-mon chos\
^•qgei’Agc’O)^ §dug-bsnal hbyun-nas ; Ap<q
hkhor-tea (Mnon,).
Rpfc'q'RpvSfc hkhor-wa hkhor-mor to
transmigrate in the world (Pag. 291).
Rpfc*q R&q hkhor-wa hjig	сПГРГН
the breaker or destroyer of transmigratory
existence; the name of a former Tatha-
gata.
*	-Sytf hkhor-wa dan-ldan
chcn-po	(Schr.; Kalac T. l^o).
hkhor-wa doMprug=Aw
д^А^^А^'А’аГ^the pass-
ing of all animals to be followers of the
thousand past Buddhas.
RpVqWjjar^ hkhor-wa la$ §grot-
mkhan oue who has been liberated from
transmigratory existence ; also one who
liberates another from that state.
R^’qR'gw hkhor-wahi khyim=^tt&
9^' btsun -mohipho-bran the residence of a
queen (Mnon.).
AjSX’qR 55 hkhor-wahi dgra	the
enemy of the world, Mara.
r^vpr hkhor-wahi rgya-ndsko the
ocean of worldly existence :
the Vikalpana
(the wrong impression); thrown into the
ocean of worldly business (Grub. S7G).
RpVAR'RJR'q hkhor-wahi hchin-wa the en-
tanglements or ties of tho world: ApVAR’
RjqqVjEj	the strong
fastenings to this world arc the cause of
the suffering in hell of all animated
nature (К. * 1Ц\
A{^R’qR^5’q^ hkhor-wahi $dttg-btfxal the
miseries of the worldly existence.
aj^var g « hkhor-wahi
hdod-lha dgah-rab dban-phyvg
Cupid, the god of Love (Mfion.).
а^а’а^’а^л hkhor-wahi tyson-ra the
prison-hcuse of worldly existence,
Rpfc’AR’W hkhor-wahi lam	-tho
path of transmigratory existence.
RftfR’AR’Rpfc hkhor-war hkhor to come in
and go out of this world very often.
Aj£vqvAp?4‘q’q hkhor-war hkhor-wa-po
one who transmigrates.
R^vq^ AQ^ hkhor-war hkhyams
wandering purposelessly in this world/

191
’’Sj |
hkhor-та tshags without
interruption.
hkhor man-can	gin
ka-dam-pa «14*4 the tree Cadamba
(Mnon.).
\hkhor-med, chad-mcd unin-
terrupted : «П|Ч	bkah drin hkhor-
mcd uninterrupted mercy (У{^. 42) ♦
RpX’^ij hkhor-shag the date of return;
the term or period for which leave is
granted to monks or soldiers at the expira-
tion of which they are bound to return
to duty.
hkhor-zug, v. ‘Ч^Х’^*| hkhor-у и g.
hkhor-yug, the horizon;
the wall surrounding a city or fort; ram-
part: ^^'44’5 hkhor-yug-tu or
hkhor-mo yug-tu within the limits of the
horizon; everywhere; at all times.
*hkhor-yug (Schr.; Kalac.
T. 12).
uffr/quA hkhor-gyah latch.
hkhor-gyog ufbnr,
attendants and servants, companions and
domestics:	mdun-hkhor waiting
servant; valet de chambrc, ^’^X nah-
hkhor household servants; domestics:
*j*X gtso-hkhor master and servant: 5^'
*j^X dpon-hkhor the chief and his servant;
^’^X $ton-hkhor the teacher and his
pupils; 5^'*j*X druft-hkhor a secretary or
clerk; phyi-hkhor servants outside
the domestics.
*	hkhor ral-gcig-ma (Schr.
53 B.).
hkhor-legs-pa good atten-
dants.
<грХ’^ I: hkhor-lo and other weapons
of war included in the following list of
weapons or	mtshon cha:—
gyul-du hdsin-pa-) tho-vca\ ^'^Srdtin-
bycd] hdsom-byed} dbytig-pa-,
leags-bcins; dbyig-pa; w
hphan-mdun} gan-lafi\
gsor-mdun; tsa-kra	hkhor-lo
(Mnon.).
II: 1.
an orb, circle, disk; a wheel:
§ ’дц,- J	ЧТГЗЖ
the symbol of entering into the great
circle. 2. the round of life; orb or state
of existence;	srid-pahi hkhor-
lo the chart or cycle of existence:
lha clan mi rnams-kyi
hkhor-lo bshi the four states of existence
of gods and men:—(1)
mthun-pahi yul-du gna$-pa
residence in a place where there is agree-
ment or which is agreeable; (2)
$kye$-bu dam-pa la brten-pa Hcfpw-
’sru to take refuge with or shelter under
good men; (3)	bdag
ned-kyi yan-dag-pahi won-lam Ч1Ж:
srfwTH perfect determination of one’s self;
(4)	sfion yan-bsod-nam§
byas-pa sw moral merit acquired
in a former existence: «фбХ’йгз^ (1) hkhor-lo
can one who is possessed of a disk;
(2) gpi shrill a snake (Mnon.); (3) v.
bya nnr-wa	(Mnon.).
hkhor-lo b§gyur,
hkhor-lo^gyur	an Universal
Emperor.
Syn.	ma-lu§ rgyal-po ;
rgyal-кип hdud*	lhag-pahi
dican-phyng;	sa-kuh dicoll;
yan-dag rgyal-po; *4^ ^ mi-yi lha;
gnam^kos (ЩИон.).
Rpvafa-gvjprg-q^-S hkhor-lo$ tgyur
rgyal-gyi ty sun-mo the wife of the
"Universal Emperor.
Syn.	nri-yi lha-то-
bud-med rin-chen;	gnam b$ko§-
ma;	Lhag-pahi dwan-phyug
ma;	hjig-rten btsun-mo.
{Mnon.)
hkhor-lo hjom$, v.
di-dru hjom§	vegetable medicine
lor ringworm.
Mkhor-lo dan Idafipahi-
ri	n. of a fabulous mountain
situated beyond tho great ocean whore the
horizon touches the earth. At its centre it
has an impenetrable golden hill called
Vajra nabhi parvata. It is filled with fruit
trees in consequence of which thoro aro
innumerable species of monkey living
there (7f. d. 282).
*rpr| hkhor-lo dan
hkhor-lo chen-po lhahi те-tog (7Г. d. & 368)
n. of a celestial flower; idem
5^’3 tsa-kra dan tsa-kra chen-po. (7f. d.
156.)
hkhor-lo dri-med
n. of flower.
hkhor-lo дх1оп~чъ\ Ц phag-pa,
^Ж, ЖЖТ a pig; ono with a circular
muzzle.
hkhor-lo hdab-brgya ^ж-
КПЧЯ n. of a flower.
Rj^R-afR^ hkhor-lo hdra=\^'^\ don-ga.
Syn.	rgyal-pohi fin;
sor-ma gshi-pa; Йгэгцзч lo-ma bzan
{Mnon.).
R^R-HfR^q hkhor-lo hdra-ica
жТжж: like a circle; resembling a wheel.
Rp^R’iS’^wq hkhor-lo $doma-pa
n. of Buddhist Tantrik deity.
192
в.р5*.'3('5Ч=.'|р hkhor-lo фсап-tgyur
ч ^в| n. of a Bou teacher (G. Bon. 1).
hkhor-lo hLyed-pa
one who can penetrate into tho designs or
machinations of others.
hkhor-lo rtsihs-$ton the
fabulous washing wTheol wdiich is possessed
of one thousand radiating spokes: g«r
<*i q^-g’4pR'5	in the presence
of the king w as the golden w’heel with one
thousand radiating ribs; £ачАЛ,«г<мг|(Л*
’^TR^-q'Qi on each spoke, wdiere it
touched tho felloe, there was placed a
dainty dish;
from the wheel was brought before him
whatovorho wished;
that which he did not like turned
away from him {Л. 2).
hkhor-lo gyo n. of a
flow’er.
Rfev^R'^c/ hkhor-lohi rkafl round foot;
elephant; R^'Qglan-po (Mfion.).
hkhor-lohi rngon-])o tho lord
or chief of all:	wrr r^r’
before the feet of Kalyanamilra
who is the paramount lord possessing the
grace of the noble, wise, and good, whose
kindness is unequalled.
4p?R-26R-w§^ hkhor-lohi mgrin as met.=
rna-mon tho camel. {Mnon.)
RpSv^RWR hkhor-lohi mt hah	Hifa
the circumference of a circle.
Rpfc-aiR'^rq’^ hkhor-lohi rnam-pa can,
described as ^’5)	a scent
called “ tiger’s-claw's.”
яра^аЯ^'ч^ hkhor-lohi yan-lag=^‘^
fan-pa tpyihi min ЖЖТ^,	a general
term for the goose species {Mnon.).
^p5cq-q ।
193
e.^|
I; hkkor-lohl lug = g'^«r? pu-
$el tse amber.
Syn. S'** bya-za$;	ha-yi hkhor-
pa ;	lu$~nan mig (Mnon.).
ii	gdags an umbrella.
Syn. ehar-tfcyob', tsha-wa
§grib ; ^S’5^ tshad-ikyob (Mnon.).
hkhor-lo$ hgro-wa,
§‘9Я $ift-rta $pyi-daft bye-brag wheeled;
carriage or vehicle (Mnon.).
hkhor-lo$ sgyur, v. K«|’W
reg-bzafi (Mnon.).
hkhor-lo§ hisho, v. rdsa-
mkhan, a potter; one who lives by turning
the (potter’s) wheel (Mfton.).
RpSK’M hkhor-sa ч<(ч<И-ч^1ФТ the path
for circumambulation round a sacred build-
ing or other object; the positions of
attendant demi-gods of a principal deity
round his mansion.
khor-hgsum man, horse and
cow:	V^’S'4, alight-
ing from his horse, he presented the three
objects, viz., a servant, a horse, and a cow
to him (A. 7).
hkhor-gsum rnam-par
dag-pa the alms-giver, alms-giving, and
the receiver of alms, when those three are
of pure motives.
hkhol-wa, pf. «йрч bkhol, imp. рч
khol 1. to make a person a slave; to bind
as a servant; to cause to serve one.
bran-khol or ^'2i khol-po a slave; bkol-
tpyod-kyi sdug-bsftal the miseries of servi-
tude ; gshan-dag-gi^ dwan-med-par ikol-wa
to be enslaved by others, without ability
to help oneself. 2. acc. to Cs. to save; to
spare; to enjoy with moderation. 3. ace.
to Sch. to become insensible; to be asleep;
to get benumbed in reference to the limbs.
In Med. 4. to boil (with pf. рч khol):
to make one boil; place for
boiling (Jd.).
Rjtfurjq-q hkholihub-pa explained in raft-
gis b$go-wahi nag la nan-cin las gaft b$kul-wa
ihams-ead ^grub-par by cd, sems kyaft hgytir-
ica-med nd bran gyog-tu hkhol-thub-pa yin,
de-ltar ma-byuft-na bran gyog-tu gyur-kyaft
hkhol mi thub-pa red (&ag.) extracting
voluntary service, i.e., if a servant
obediently gives effect to the wishes of
his master, otherwise, although the servant
maybe in his service, he has not rendered
service.
яр&гя hkhor-та a female attendant
(CS.).
яр^гЙ hkhol-пю maid-servant.
hkho$ or ’H hkhos-ka worth,
value, importance ; also necessity:
hkho$-can important; mighty; of great
influence; hkho$-nwd uninfluential;
hkhos-su phab-pa to draw as a
blister or poultice;
dnos-podgah tshaft eig yod kyaft
tnod-kyi hkhos-kaham (A. 1J/2) although
there have existed some articles pretty
complete, there was necessity for a vessel
to receive (deserve) them;
hkho$-ka ehun-tva of less necessity;
яр«г$с.ч hkhos ckuft-wa=W’^^^^ las-
bya-war	ehuft-ba	less	active	or	less
energetic (Mfton.).
яркч|^ hkho$	ho$	babs,
don daft	bstun	suited	to	one’s
intention or object; fitness; suitability.
hkho$-dpag	according to the
measure of one’s ability.
26
I	194
hkhos-sii pheb$-pa
qVT4 logs-su bshag-pa to put in opposition.
hkhyags-pa xfU, ftH, firfsTK
vb. intrans. 1. to freeze either into ice or
hard ; to coagulate, crystaliso:
the water will be freezing;
tho soda has congealed on the salt-lake,
lu Sikkim khyek or MeA*=ioe. 2. to feel
cold, become numbed:	hkhyags-
hbyufi they felt cold (ДГЯо-а.).
hkyag$-rum or ядчцгзд hkhyags
ram au ice-slip; also ice in blocks.
ЯВЛ’0 hkhyam-kyi a stray dog.
I: hkhyams-pa fig. to rove,
wander:
being completely deluded by
desire, they rove tho world as a wheel
(2Г. d. * 380}:	hkhor-гсаг
hkhyamt-2>a dan or	lac-dor
hkhyam§-pa to rove (in the world or in tho
interval between death and regeneration)
for no purpose.
II:	don-med-
du hgro-ica Hfare-wru, ^5,
fw<; pf.	hkhy amt-par gyur 1.
to ramble about; to wander purposelessly;
to wander in a strange country. At
certain seasons many monks wander about
Tibet, Mongolia and China, ride Hue.
frww,	n«w«(ywrcf rnam-par
hkhyams-pa, to wander about continually;
to move about unceasingly:
hkhyam-du hjug-pa to cause to ramble or
rove about; to become strayed, lost;
wandering; vagrant; erroneous; erring;
$’R|5$rq chu hkhyam-pa inundation; flood.
hkhyams-po 1. erroneous; a
vagabond. 2. n. of a disease.
hkhyar-ica to err, to go
astray, to deviate from the right path: ft’
^B^ mi-hkhyar erring or blundering man;
В‘ЯВ^ khyi hkhyac a stray dog;
yi-ge hkhyar-tca-po ono who makes
mistakes in writing (a letter, &c.);
Rjjvsrqjqj do not err in conversation,
ono should bo afraid of
making mistakes, of going astray;
dpe hkhyar-po a defective simile (Ja.).
ОДЧ’Ч hkhyal-u'a—^*-^'^ hchal-ica
irrelevant: £Л]'с*в'*га speaking unconnec-
tedly.
hkhyal-tshig irrelevant speech;
speaking nonsense:
if one speak mis-
leading words which cause the youthful
not to go straight, it infringes the law (or
justice).
e\
hkhyi-ua, acc. to Sch. ^B^’4
hkhyil-ica.
c\
*4 hkhyig-pa, to bind; to
take prisoner.	also in (Л, to
strangle; suffocate; *4thag-pas
hkhyig~pa-i)o one who binds with a rope.
Syn. hchin-ica*, $dom;
hdogtj ffdags; о&гц bcifi-wa*
bkyig-pa.
hkhyigt-pa, pf. bkyigt,
bound.
C\
*	hkyid-pa^=hbyin-pa
to draw out; strain; also to roll, revolve:
mig-hkhyid-pa to turn orroll one’s
eyes:
hkhor-гсаг hkhyid-pahi rgyuhigtso-
bo ni ji-ltar §»afi-tcahi dnot-po hdi dag la
the chief of the causes of revolving in the
195
world lies in how one appears outwardly
(Lam. ti, 36).
e\
hkhyim~par=%°^*W chu hkhor-
tea to whirl (as of water) (Mnon.).
e\
0^5151'4 hkhyim$-pa qfwi,
described as ni-ma dan zla-wa sogs la hod
sgor-sgor-du hkhyims-pa, to be encircled
with a halo, like the sun and moon;
hog-hkhyim$ nimbus; halo:
W’KYRjyrc hjah-hod hkhyims a rainbow
encircling (him) :	na-bun or
smug-pa khyims	dud-pa
hkhyims fog, mist, or smoke enveloped
him (Ja.).
C\
hkhyir-wa to turn round:
4 dbu-la gdtigs bskor-wahi
hkhyir-pa (fiag.) to turn a parasol round
in a circle over the head.
e\
hkhyil-wa	vb.
intrans. to wind ; to twist; to whirl round;
§kra hair (Mnon.):
ehu-ran fug$-kyi§ hkhyil-wa water of itself
whirls round, i.e., turns into a whirlpool;
duft-dkar gyas-
bkhyil gyon-hkhyil a white shell wound to
the right or wound to the left; |pr*j^rq
sbrul hkhyil-wa to coil up like a snake; to
being wound in the manner of a snake :
chu chen-po hkhyil hdug
much water has accumulated surrounding a
place or inside a place forming itself
in a whirlpool;	V’ hod-du
bkhyil-shifi as if wreathed with light; У
na gscr mig hkhyil-wa yod
the fish was revolving its golden eyes:
mi man-po de-ru hkhyil-
war gyur-te there many people having
cjjowded together or assembled together:
although
there was no swirl in the waters they dug
deeply into the ground.
Syn.	hkhor-гса} hjug-pa
(Milon.).
hkhyil-wa brgya злптт one
hundred coils:	hkhyil-sdan
anything that is possessed of coils; wound
together.
hkhyil-ba ean = *\$*\ rna-rgyan
an earring.
Syn.	rna-ba mdses-byed}
^0^ rna-war hkhyil}	§nan-rgyan
4ffahiT (Mnon.).
*0^ hkhyis-pa* v. hkhyid-pa. to
evolve.
hkhyu-wa or hkhyuspia —
о
№< kyog-po 1. bent; not straight (Nag ).
2. pf. hkhyus run aavay.
Syn. yo-ica-, bros-pa (Mfion.).
hkhyug-pa pf. /34] khytig
to run, move swiftly; said to imply
^myur-wahi-don^hs meaning of rapidity;
hkhyug-po runner. sf<T404Tq glog-
hkhyug-pa rapid motion of lightning:
glog liar hkhyug-pa to run or
move rapidly like the flash of lightning:
hkhyug-po hkhyu-pa to run away
swiftly :	hkhyug-tsam in or about
a moment or in a flash : g’*|g<i]’&rawq sku
hkhyug-tsam phebs-payem honour has come
for a rapid visit:
khyed-ran de-rin hkhyug-tsam phebs rogs
will you come here to-day just for a trice :
hkhyug-tsam gzigs see for
aboiit an instant:	sems hkhyug the
mind travels quickly. khra khyug-
pa to gleam; to twinkle’ with light; to
shine in various colours :
(Lam. ti. 35.) the mind moves
^1
196

(restless) with suffering ; АЗЧЛ’’ glit-
tering in yellow lustre; to glitter ; to
shine (of the rainbow).
454’^4 hkhyug-yig running hand;
current handwriting.
hkhyug-$ar-can in JF. hasty;
hurrying ; careloss.
hkhyud-hihuft^^^^'4 skyes-
ma t hag-pa as soon as born (ДГлон.).
hkhyud na$ Idoft-wahi
та ntn	one that becomes
an hermaphrodite after being embraced.
I: hkhyud-pa	Wlfe-
1. to embrace; embraced :
mgul-nas hkhyud-pa to clasp round the
neck; to hug ; to encompass by spanning.
2. to glide in or into (as serpents) :
q mftal-du hkhyug-pa entering of
the soul into new conception. 3. to be
able :	lan-war mi hkhyud
unable to rise (from bod). The word is
also illustrated as
rtsig-pa la rten nas hgro-wa lta-buy to
move supporting himself on a wall, &c.
П: =qBql'q hkhrig-pa
sexual embrace (4f>?on.).
W2* hkhyur-wa or *5* hkhyur, fut.
><5
of tekyw\ to be separated ; divorced
(Cs.): to stop ; to put an end to. Acc. to
Ja., to be deserted: ^vq*r^*^rq^
being separated, be was, so to speak,
bereft.
eS^ hkhyus, v. *5’4 hkhyu-wa.
hkhyeft-wa to be filled up, v.
^q hgen$-pa.
hkhyed-pa 1. to be sufficient, to
suffice, to be enough; to hold out ; colloq.
this is enough:	there is not
enough. 2. in C. to gain (a law suit);
to be acquitted (Ja.). 3.	phyir
khyed-pa to bow without uncovering one’s
head, as a less humble way of saluting
(Ja.).
hkhyer-wa to carry
away, to take away ; sometimes, to bring:
chu-yii hkhyer carried away by
water ;	le-los hkhyer to be over-
come, carried away by idleness.
Ide-mig khyer tako the key ;
khye.r-qog bring;	khyer soft carry
off, take away; akin to the le-аи and
le-jao of Hindustani.
hkhyer-so 1. bearing ;
appearance; demeanour; neatness. 2.
colloq. advantage; superiority ; pleasant-
ness.
hkhyel-wa Ld. to hit, to
strike.
hkhyog-hkhyog bent,
crooked {Nag.).
4S4'Q? 1 hkhyog-hgro=4\**'%\'Q gzah
Spen-pa the planet Saturn or g&9-
snon ; he in blue robe {Mfton.). 2. =
hbab-ehu a stream ; waterfall {Mfton.);
sbrul hkhyog-hgro the snake
because it creeps in a bent course {Mnon.).
*54’^ hkhyog-can or	hkhyog-
hkhyog tortuous.
q54*^’q hkhyog ston-pa to fly into a
passion (&?Л.).
*i§44 hkhyog-pa, pf. $4 khyag, imp.
54 khyog 1. to lift; lift up. 2. to
carry; tob ring :	gsol-ja khyog
bring in the tea ((?.).
197

hkhyog-po or ЙЙЧ’З khyog-po
crooked; bent:	khyog-pohi ri-mo
a crooked figure; a curve, flourish, crescent,
&c. :	has phar hkhog-
ishun-hkhyog the fish writhing hither and
thither.
hkhyog-pahi sa-bon
crooked seeds.
‘ФТЗ hkhyog-po—^’25’$Ц’Ч draft-po min-
pa	•nr,	not
upright; not straight, /.e., crooked.
*5*1'25$’hkhyog-pohi mthu-can the
bent-bill; a toucan.
*5*1’25$^ hkhyog-pohi	po-son
cha, chaft-rtsi a kind of churn or mixer
to make wine with.
Syn. 4*'S**^ goft-bu can ;	gser-
gyi lag*,	dbugs-hbyin qift\
сЛай-р'й;	lag-pahi tshofi-
das; 5^’§5 myot-byed.
hkhyog-pohi tshig—^^’^^h^
tshig-gi gt aft-rag rough language ; not
straightforward {Mfton.).
hkhyog-dpyaft a lath or pole for
carrying burdens {Sch.).
q5zTS'4 hkhyog-gral—1^^ draft-lam
straight road {Mfton.}.
*5^1 w hkhyog-hbar	blaze
or flame {Шоп.).
hkhyog-med—^'^ draft-po or if*’
ч .sroft-pa straight {Mfton.).
*3*T<W|S hkhyog-bqad a crooked, out-of-
the-way construction or explanation.
hkhyogs or [J4)** hkhyogs, ях
a palanquin ; sedan chair ; litter.
hkhyoft-wa or hkhyons J*’
лд**	skyoft-wa daft $kyoft§-
pahi don-daft mtshufts to observe:
nin-hkhyotif, ч	я
dgon-pa la sbyin-bdag-gis ni-magcig-
gi bsnen-bkur shu-гса 1. to observe a day’s
religious service in a monastery. 2. acc.
to Jd. and Ramsay khyong in Ladak
signifies to bring.
^[3^*^ hkhyom-pa <тя^г, fluid hence
fig. giddy or giddiness; also to reel; to be
giddy:	$si hkhyom hkhyom
tgyug dizzy with intoxication:	'Xfapr
<Jw’5*’*J*’^*’*5*] yaft fift sog# hkhyog daft
hkhy or-shift hkhyog the trees being moved
(by the wind) were bent {Nag.) ; so the
words	hkhyom and *5*1 hkhyog are some-
what similar to each other.	khyoin-
khyom do-гса in C. to reel, stagger : **‘$T
chan-gi hkhyom-pa hdug he is
staggering under the influence of beer;
mtsho-hkhyom dizziness ; vertigo :
lug-glad mgo-hkhor
hkhyom-pa gso the brain of a sheep (taken
as food) cures reeling or dizziness of the
head {Med.).
hkhyor-ua to be un-
steady ; to miss, fail; not to hit {Cs.); to
reel, stagger, from intoxication; to warp
(of wood or wooden vessels) :
in walking his steps reeled {Rdsa.).
hkhyol-pa, pf. *5*4 hkhyol, cf.
skyel-wa, to be carried; to be brought;
to arrive at, come to, reach :
qprlfc on reaching the end, it was left
(unfinished).
hkhyos-pa — ^ч ч hphyo$-pa
{Sch.).
hkhyo$-ma, same as
$kya$-ma, a present, gift.

198

hkhra*ica (tha-wa), vb», pf.
probably qg^ hkhras^ to lean to; to
incline towards ((?$.).
яд’*: hkhra-sa a support to lean against;
a prop; tho back (of a chair): яд’^^*яд^
hkhra-sar /jkhra$=^^45Vq rten-la brten-
pa firm in support (i^a^.).
hkhrafa (than) <sTC: hard ; яд^-q
hkhrans-wa, Ъкгап-гса adj. hard.
hkhrad-pa (thad-pa), in colloq.
Tib. to expel; turn out:	bg> g$
hkhrad byed to expel the devil (from
one's body).
hkhrab-pa {thab-pa\ ЧЧ;
pf. чдр bkrahox $кгаЪ-ра, 1. to strike;
to beat (in regular strokes, as in swimming
and rowing); to thrust, stamp, tread
heavily; g^gqqJro hkhrab-pa to daneo in
that manner. 2. towinnow; tofan. 3.
to blink, twinkle, wink with the eyes. 4.
to jest; to joke; to crack jokes. 5. to
leap, jump (Sch)*, jump for joy (Schr.).
G. to scoop out; to bail out (Sch.). 7. to
fight; to combat in C. and ТГ. (Ja.).
hkhral-hkhrul (thal-thut) —
g^rar^*1^ khral-le khrul-le (tha-le thn-le)
confused; dazed; confounded; also as adv.
Ц * Зя ’
also applied to one who is confused in
his ideas and speaks unconnected ly and
ravingly, and being unable to sit moves up
and down and cannot even preserve his
own goods.
hkhras (the) =	seni$-
chags $dod-pa hopeful; also attached.
e\
hkhri (thi) reduction; discount.
hkhri-rkafi \pr, said to be=J'’’
rgyal-mtshan, the Buddhist flag of
victory.
я§’||4 hkhri-sgrub payment of stipulated
revenue or dues : д*гяя’5’йЦ'ХИ]« khral-ham
bu-lon soggy ^•(arqq^'Q’^’Qg’q ran-gi
wigo-ta bab$-p)a-m hkhri-tca liabilities on
account of rent or debt, &c.
^[5’4 hkhri-гса, pf. я^ hkhri$y ef. ЯД’
Ц dkri-wa cognate. 1. to wind; compress;
entangle ; hold fast: jyrqq'^g-q khyim
tkab-kyihkhri-гса conjugal embrace; яд^с.
hkhri-gin or hkhril-gin a creeper ; a
creeping plant: g^Agq^’^^’qg-q to be
tied by taxes and entangled in debt. 2.=
soprq сЛлде-ря mostly as a sbst. thrall ;
attachment, but as vb. also:
ran don-gyi hkhrisya to be attached to
one’s interest or advantage;	bu-
med-kyi to wife and children: яд’Ч’^
shen-pa-
dan hbrel-thag chad fondness; attachment,
^'ядад shen-hkhris passionate attachment.
hkhri-hbab assessment of
revenue or S'‘^’^^’Ч^'З’яд'Ячч rtsa-chu
gin gsum-gyi hkhri-hbaby levy for the
three—grass, water, wood (to be supplied
to privileged travellers or officials)
(Rtsii.).
/^Лп-ргй=яд,ч’^ hkhril-gin
Mafa a creeping
plant.
Syn. w*|5'MTq yal-gahi ral-pa.
яд’-^я’яХ^hkhri-gin mehog-ldan,
qjac/cj'^q|-5| &E. n. of a kind of tree.
Syn. pri-yan ku;	't^bud-
med min-can;	$na-tshog§ $de; яде;
hbyun-pohi me~tog*f	sa-fa
hyag-htshadl (1£пон.}.

199

hkhri-^in thog$-med ^’5^’
a name for the Sal tree.
Syn.	sa-lahi lfon-pa;
$a-fahi fin;	sra-risi fin ^.4 ЗГГ,
(ДГлоп.).
* Ф|’Ч hkhrig-pa 1. fH^T (Sohr.).
2. &ni$ mystic number signifying
“two” (Rtsii.). 3. vb. to cohere; to stick
together, become thick, intermingled:
<Tfi5T£^q| gnam-hkhrig the sky is thick:
hod-zer dan hjah-hod
hkhrig-pa beams of light and rainbow hues
intermingled:	hkhrig gyur-pa^
^K/|$4|'^v<<§4pr4 to become adherent
being intimately mixed up with the saffron
of mercy. 4/coitus; sexual intercourse:
<lg«|q-g5"4 to perform such.
^kad— Д'ВЧ'^Ч1 hkhrig-tshig amorous speech;
obscene language; Rp^l'scR hkhrig-thab§
amorous dalliance;
hkhrig hdod-ma	a voluptuous
woman. 5. finFTTrfa the twins in the
Zodiac.
Syn. of No. 4.	dwan-po
gni$-$byor	groft-pahi cho$;
nt-sufa; lag-b$dam$; *X5'q‘95 hdod-
pa spyod;	fyos-pa;	* fe-§byor;
mi tshans spyod; gsan-spyod;
ne-reg; S4!4	rmofts; gk’4
sbyor-wa; kun-tbyor; g’4‘gs $kye-wa
spyod; S^'^^'lfcdgah mgur-spyod; V»|V«r
X«( dgah-гса rol; R05’4 hkhyud-pa;
chagt-spyod; R^V^SS hdod-fog spyod;
log-gyem (ilfton.).
hkhrig-pa daft Idan-
par smra-wa н^*ГГНТЧ< speaking of
copulation or of sexual union.
Rg^’R’Rc^-q hkhrig-ра hbyin-pa to talk
smut.
ЧЙЧ^15 hkhrig-pa sbed	n. for
the crow (Mnon.).
RflR|	hkhrig-pahi cho§ rten-pa
to be given up to voluptuousness.
hkhrig-pahi bsam-gtan
Wd} or	bud-med hdod-ldan
ma a voluptuous or licentious woman
(Mnon.).
hkhrig-sbadv.
hkhrig-pa sbed.
c\
hkhrig-та or *B*l*r« hkhrigs-
ma9 lag-pahi	the wrist
(of the hand).
R|§ 4|K4 hkhrig§-pa collected or assembled
together, of sprin (clouds).
hkhrig-pa (thid-pa) pf.
fi5 khridy pf. *51 bkri nqfn, to lead; to
conduct; bring to a place; especially used
in connection with animals and children,
also of leading an army:	bu-
tsha hkhrid by и ft led out their children.
c\
hkhrims (thim),	hjig§
skrag (Nag.) terror, panic, fear:
hbrcd-na§ hkhrims (Lex.; Jd.).
C\
hkhril-ua {thil-гоа) ^й’4 hkhri-
ica to wind, coil round (of serpents) ;
draw close; embrace closely; to clasp
round; ^RWK^hkhril-mkhan an embracer;
hkhril-ldan a plant furnished with
tendrils or claspers; kha hkhril-wa
in W. to speak imperfectly like children ;
to lisp, to stammer.
hkhril-ldem fig. very hand-
some and young; ^Й^ hkhril union.
Idem waving; moving.
hkhril-$ift*=$'3\^ hkhri-gift a
climbing plant, a creeper.
Ф«|
200

hkhri# (thi) K*?tq near,
neighbouring bank, shore, coast; also
postp. *jg**’S and close to; very near;
against: sbrel zla-wa med-pa rnan^-kyaft
srid-$kyoftdehi hkhrt$-8u min-pa zla yod ma
gtogs ran-nid gcig-por gshuft-ta§ mi byed
one should not singly (venture) to do
Government work unless assisted by a
colleague under the king (D. qel. 1%).
Syn. *2]* hgram\ risar\ V4 druft
(Mfton.).
khhri* hdsin, ra-gan^
brass.
$khru-u:a (thu-wa) = *H5'4
чэ
hkhrud-pa	to wash; to bathe:
*0^’4*|’q hkhrur hjug-pa Mnrfa
causing to be washed.
hkhru-ка gcod-pa
stoppage of looseness or diarrhoea.
hkhru-gshi 1. diarrhoea. 2.
hkhru-ibywft> *3’^5 khru-nad^ *3’3*1
hkhru-skyug	fa HIT diarrhoea with
vomiting.
hkhrug (Schr.; Kahc.
T. 12^.
*0*1 hkhrug-go^^'* go-cha or ^'04
go-hhrab war -dress; coat of mail (Mnon.).
*0*Г£Гч hhhrug-lfta-pa tho drumming to
battle; stated (Mfton.) to mean also
-qgc/q5 g'^5 the clamour which arises
on the battle-field.
cqgqfq I: hkhrug-pa (thug-pa) ^ЧГГН,
so
fbnu, Kwrg, hi?	fht,
1. vb. pf. *0*КЧ hkhrugs-pa, cf.
5ЭТ 4 dkrug-pa, 53J*T«i bkrug-pa to be in
commotion ; commotion ; to be disturbed;
to be panic-stricken:	*0	*§* ч
hkhrug-par mi-hgyur-wa и wrfh will not
become angry; get disordered:
*0*T5’q5*l rtsa thamt-cad hkhrug-tu bcug it
made all his veins disordered (blood to
boil). 2. to be angry; also to quarrel,
fight, contend: ^*^*'*0*1^ dc-gnis
bkhrug-na$ tho two quarrelling. Also as
sbst. fight, disruption, row: *§*)’ЧЛ*
hkhrug-pa $or disorder arose; quarrel took
place. *0 ч to show fight; to take up
arms; to rebel: *H*rq’95,q^’Vr$ in times of
war: 5**1 *0*1 dmag-hkhrug^^^'^^hthab-
hkhrug war. й*0*|*гч Mi hkhrug-pa a
name of Buddha, who does not become
agitated or ruffled at heart.
hkhrug-pah i sa-gsh i = ’3’ ‘gy и I-gyi
sa-gshi or 5»w|,q)*1^ фпау-gi, sa-gshi
battle-field (4fnon.).
*0*1'5^ hkhrug-dpon = \^^ , dmag
dpon general; commanding in war.
*0*1’^ hkhrug-loft=%t&№ $kyo-ftog$
1. contest, strife. 2.	gyul-tprod
pa or 5**1 'WQ dmag-hthab-pa (Mfton.).
hkhrugs (thug) defined as
quaking, trembling, shak-
ing (Mfton.): *0 hkhrugs-mkhan in
JF. having small cracks, flaws, of
potter's ware (Jd.): *0*|^’Q hkhrttg$-pa=
^’3 $dan-ua also	khon-nas
ldaft-гса g»f4<T, Wlq, Trfw<r was
stirred up, agitated, confused, also rage,
anger; greatly angry; passionate. *0*|*’^5
hkhrugt-tshad fever caused by overwork
and fatigue.
*0*)*’^ hkhrug-lon <t^r war, fight:
*0*1'^* hkhrug-lai work of dispute;
quarrel.
hkhruft-wa (thuft-ica) or *0*4г<1
-4
hkhruft$-pa resp. for tkye-wa згга,
201
1. to be bom: g'*04’4 sku-hkhruA-
wa= g'4^wv4 §ku bltams-pa to be born; also
the birth of a great man, prince or lama :
(ikhriin§-rab$~%4'4W §kyes-rabs
^nw birth stories or legends connected
with one’s birth. 2. to arise; come from:
ч5’^*| words as they may
just arise in the mind of yourself;
WW tin-ne-hdsin hkhrun$-pa§
meditation arising:	$nin-
rje thugs-la hkhrun$-pa compassion arose
in his mind. 3. to come up, shoot,
sprout, grow (of seeds and plants) (Ja.).
hkhruns-rabs gsol
hdeb§ reverence shown to a great lama
or saint by enumerating the names of his
supposed successive embodiments.
hkhrud-pa (thud-pa) ши, pf.
>o
*|5*< hkhrify fut. чд bkru, to wash; to
cleanse; to bathe; to wash off: 54V*’
*PS'4^’§5 dri-та hkhrud-par byed the
dirt of clothes should bo washed out:
nad-la in ill-
ness, by giving purgatives, one may be
cleansed:	cause to be washed.
№
hkhrud-ma the washings of plates
and dishes after dinner, which are given to
pigs, dogs, &c.
hkhrun-chod (thun-chod)=
don dag thag-chod finally decid-
ing or determining any matter (J. Zaft.:
dmag-dan kha-mchu
lta-Ъи thag-chod to decide upon a war or
a law suit.
hkhrun mtho-wa—wzctifa
x3
phah mtho-wa of high rank.
+	khrun-rin\—^^'^Q dkyus-
su rin-wa lengthwise; in length.
: hkhrul (thul) or *Н^‘Ч hkrul-pa
fWJ, 1. sbst. mistake; frenzy;
madness; error; illusion; also adj. mistaken;
deranged; deluded:	mis-
takes are not profitable; *5’4’413^’4 hgro-
wa hkhrul-pa the deluded beings (of this
world); *^’4 hkhrul-wa to be mistaken;
to be deceived:	’*^*j ran-
snan hkhrul-par hdug I have mistaken ; it
was a deception of the senses;
snan hkhrul-hain hkhrul-snan
illusion; delusion :	hkhrul-snan
can delusive; erring: as a syn. of ^*’4 nor-
wa:	'^’4 hhyod-cag hkhrul-
p>ahi hjig-sten pa ye deluded children of
the world! 2. to be insane, deranged,
byn. of	smo§-pa hkhrul-so occa-
sion for making mistake; wrong way; peril.
II: (thul) in the words
mig-hkhrul is a little different from *3*4
hphvul; it applies to moral or intellectual
mistakes as distinct from external blun-
ders. In the same manner it differs
from the word ^’4 nor-wa or nor
hkhrul. ^*’4 пог-гса applies to external or
phenomenal blunders:
if the inner heart does not err,
one’s doings in the outside world will also
not be wrong; ignorance:
та-rig hkhrul-wahi
dwafi-gi$ hkhor-war hkhyams by the influ-
ence of unrighteous errors (we) wander in
the cycles of existence.
hkhrul-hkhor machine;
contrivance; artifice. Acc. to Cs. this is
same as *5jer*jfc hphrul-hkhor.
* *g4’*jfc hkhrul-hkhor (Schr.;
Kalac. T. 12 a.).
*j5«r*f6k,j|« hkhrl-hkor-mkhyim, v. 4?*j’
l4^ btson-khan, a prison-house (Mfton.).
27
202
hkhrul-hkhor mkhan a
juggler.
Jlkhrul-dgah	(wrongly for
hphrul-dgah)	<ияпг TW:
n. of a celestial mansion.
hkhrul-snan, v. я^Г^я’А hkhrul
wahi $nan-wa, illusive vision or exhibition.
Syn. ядч’чч hkhrul-wahi sem$; Ч$г
^я*«|«\ hkhrul-pahi yid (Mnon.).
я^ч’^'54 hkhrul byed-ma SS^S’^V54^
a woman that decoys others.
R5GT&5 hkhrul-med, v. nor-med or
hchug-med, unmistakeably; without
mistake.
*5'^’1 hkhrul-shig,	чч'д-«чя-
ч|е.’зч] §ton-nid rtog$-pahi bla-ma ham gah-
zag a lama or any person who meditates on
the theory of emptiness (i.e., tho voidity of
all nature).
Я{5ч *чХ hkhrul-gshi cause or basis of
error; fundamental mistake. It is usually
illustrated thus : If one mistakes a fine
rope for a snake, the rope is the basis or
cause of mistake, and я^ч^ hkhrul-^es
is the idoa or notion of a snake convoyed to
the mind by the sight of the торе: чч]сг
thag-pa mthon-na$
$brul-hjin-gyi $es-pa skyes-pa ni hkhrul-^es
yin-te, de-bshin-du bdag-cag та-rig hkhor-
wahi sem$-ean rnams mi-bden-pa bden-par
bzun,mi-rtag-pa la rtag-pa bzuft, $dug-b$nal~
wa la bde-war bzun-ste hkhrul-was hkhor-
wa hdi yin in the same manner we
animated beings, deluded by Avidyd,
mistake falsehood for truth, the transient
for the permanent, misery for happiness;
hence this transmigratory existence.
hkhrul-ya$ (3)^) a very large
number.
ящч]ч hkhreg$=^Q era-и а	very
stiff or hard.
hkhrcn-pa (then-pa)	then-
pa desire; passion; to wish; to long for:
1.	za$-§kom hkhran-pa to wish
for food and drink. 2. to look upon with,
envy; jealousy (Jd.).
яр‘A hkhro-wa pf. khro§ to be angry.
яр*Ч’Д hkhrol-wa ((hol-wa), pf and fut.
Sifa dkrol, imp. X4 khrol 1. to cause to
sound; to make a noise; play: rol-ma
hkhrol-wa to play on a musical instrument;
dril-Ъи hkhrol-wa to ring a bell. 2. vb.
intrans. to sound; resound: F'WSifa the
avalanche resounded; ^Чк.’ядч|*5|г rgya-lon
khrog-gin a rumbling in the bowels
(Medd); ifqp4| §bo-hkhrog in the belly :
ядд|*(дч) hkhrog-khrog roaring; rushing;
buzzing (Jd.).
я0в1^ hkhrogs dislocated:
the old woman yet
wishes to walk, though her knee has been
dislocated (Rdsa. 17.).
I : да is the third letter of the
Tibetan alphabet corresponding with
Sanskrit if. It is pronounced as soft к
when alone or when placed without a prefix
at the beginning of a word or syllable.
When used as a final letter it sounds
as к or is often barely pronounced. If a
prefix precede or if it carry a surmount-
ing letter, it sounds as a hard g. When
used to represent a numerical figure it
signifies tbe third, i.e., the ordinal HI,
and as such is generally used in marking
volumes of books, &o. да is sometimes
used as an affixed particle of a word to
complete it, as in W4] yal-ga, the branch
of a tree.
Ilf in mystical language signifies
born of a goat; also a he-goat :
bsan skad-la ra-$kye§ yin {K. g. f4,
28).
4] III: I. in mystic Buddhism да
means the hidden entity or the essence of
Buddha :
that which is styled да being
the hidden essence of the Tathagata, it
may be said that all sensate beings
have the nature of Buddha (JT. my.
207). 2.	as to да it
moves and it is also motionless :
“the cause is да, the real
nature or origin of sound” (Bbrom. 88).
Again we read definitions of this sort: 4’$’
“that which belongs
to no place anywhere is да” {Hbrom. 88).
W ga-khral (ga-thal) tax, duty (on
cattle, butter, &c.) (Ja.).
да-да a title of honour in W.
4|’4|’cd^J да-да tshil tickling :
to tickle:
II in ancient time
sixteen monks tickled one monk and from
the excessive laugtber he involuntarily sent
forth, the mystic wind passing upwards
inside him, his end came ” {K. du.
г, 228).
Ga-ge-mo I. n. of a certain
place in Tibet. 2. chege-mo, such a
one; such a thing; such and such (Cs.).
4|'^ Ga-gon 1. one of the two
merchants whom Buddha met imme-
diately after his six years’ asceticism under
the Bodhi tree. 2.	Ga-gon-gyi
rgyal-po the king of a country in
Southern India. 3. a melon (acc. Cs.,
Lex., cucumber; others; barley) {Jd.).
C\
ga-hgrig {ga-dig) a saddle;
SfiH Sga-sgrig equipment of a riding horse.
ga-cen or ga-chen some
or a good many; good deal (Jd).
4]ga-chad involuntarily; without
cause, e.g., to weep {Med., Ja.).

204
да chad-pa fatigued; very
tired; StW’PY4, WW4 giving np
in despair; being quite exhausted (2).
«HS ga-snod WMifsy cummin seed,
Nigella Indica.
±	^TTHT or	£7^-
tahi$de tshan a kind of Indian handwriting,
evidently referring to the Gatha or Kaithi
character, in which the original idagadhi
used to be written. The Tibetan Ч да is
ordinarily pronounced as 7f, hence
ka-ta, or kaithi.
tTS ga-da a club; a mace.
4’^ да-dur an astringent medicinal
root:	it removes remit-
tent fever, diseases of the lungs and of the
bowels.
gwa-dor also
go-dor the tender growthof fresh horn in
the three animals, rhinoceros, stag, and
antelope: gwa-dor gsum-gyi$ rnag dan chu-
v r skem tho three да dor dry up pus and
yellowish discharges:	tho
growth of a new branch on a stag’s horn
Ч]'Ч« ga-hdras	gan-hdra§
(colloq. “gdnde”) how? of what kind?
what sort ?
ga-na (ka-nd) gan-na
where? 4ga-na-wa and geifi-na-
wet, the same as a sbst., the whereabouts of
a person, his place of residence :	v
he went here where tho king
was.
ga-na med (in IT.) absolutely ;
at all events:	it must be
T91
sent by all means:	I I
shall give it back at all events (Ja.L
+	Ga-na pa-ti тгччТа SpV
Lha-chen Tshogs-fydag-gi min
the name of the great God, called the
Lord of the Multitude (Snag.).
Ga-ica ta-wa ri-ni
rsTnfvfa	small cardamom]. Also
the n. of a flower (K. kon. % 4).
да-bur 1: 1. n. of several
plants, probably Gentiana cherayta^
Curcuma y Zerumbetf &o. 2. f	is
a kind of stone like	(jtfin. 4).
II: tfk, camphor ;
$el да-bur crystal-like camphor;
man да-bur camphor resembling yak’s lard
in appearance; да-bur tsha-wa tgyas-pa
thog-hbab gcod camphor, where the fever
has increased, cures by lowering its height;
rnin-shin shan-pahi tsha-wa rtsa-nad gcod it
also cures long-standing fever and disease
of the fundament; да-bur ti-lo$ glo-rim$
tshad-pa sei the kind of camphor called
Tilo cures inflamation of the lungs and
fever.
Syn. p'qS’j’w kha-icahi phye-ma ;
hod-dkar-can ; nu^-ldau; «КЗ?*’®
§prin-gyi snin-po	zla-wahi thal-;
wa ; X5’<|’W rohi-ge-sar ;	qifi-gi
$n'n-po (JUnon.).
да-bur nag-po defined as «w|’
g^-ij-q-q^qi^-qq-qarq phag-brun те-la bsregs-
pahi thal-ica. 1. the ashes of the burnt
dung of pigs. 2. a secret name (№in. 4).
да-bur hdsin-pa
meton. zla-wa the moon.
ga-bra {ga-tah) n. of a medicine;
a twig; also the fresh shoot on a tree:
та
205	Ч|Л|
ga-bra rlun-tshad rims-nad sel-icar byed
(this medicine) removes the epidemic fevers
and the heat induced by rlun (wind).
t 9a~mn from ^he Sans. ЧЧ go;in
mystical language go or go away !
(к g. F 27).
да-mo byi-la n. of a species
of wild cat: Я	the ga-
me byi-la catches little birds by lying in
wait (Rdsa.).
qj’&i ga4sam=£'fa ji-tsam how
much; how many ; how long; interr, and
correl., as much as, e.g., as much as you
like.
ga-btson (in TF.) an irruption
of the skin (Ja.).
ga-tshod how much; colloq. “ rin
di ka tso” what is the price; how much ?
In Sikkim gong-di ka-dzd-mo ? (Snd. Hbk.).
’Г'Н'5 ga-dsan-ta a precious
stone used in curing infectious fevers and
other diseases, also to relieve one from the
influence of malignant spirits.
4|’(^ ga-sha = ga-gshah or Я’4! </a-fa,
more properly the last word, /.<?., ga-^a
signifies	bshad-gad a laughter, jest,
joko:	they jest and play:
he is nof jn good humour,
or in good spirits, to-day (Ja.) ; also
“to-day there is no fun.”
ga-zug (in Jfr.) how, interr,
and correl (Ja.).
Ч]’Ч|^ ga-gzi squinting (in IF.).
gahu an amulet ; a brooch
containing charms (v. Я* </«w).
Syn. p'3^ kha-sbyur (Mfion.).
kha-sbyar charm box the
lids of a which are joined edge to edge:
О Mi-wang (0 king), thy residence
is very solitary and so beautiful, as if the
heaven and the earth kiss each other there,
like the lids of an amulet (Hbrom. 89).
4J5-0) gahu-le account book; list (of
cases, also of cash and balance); also a short
note kept on the margin:	iogs-su
in a separate place that is not in the body
of a book, but on the foot or margin or
corner, i.e.) 35’zur-du, of a book or note-
book :
’^«1 since the date
of the month, etc., of taking over charge
of the Rdson (District office) as many
criminal eases as may be, and the receipts
large and small all bound together should
be kept in the registration book (Rtsii.;
G. Sndg.).
4-
Ga-ya gau-rihi
mdo a Sutra delivered by the Buddha on
the mountain of Gaya Gauri.
ga-yig чзч the letter ч g.
f	(/«-’•« kha-
tan du lahi rtsa-wa	excel-
lent rice; the root of a kind of plant:
-by taking
a confection made of equal quantities
of the root of Garka Tandula rta-dri,
sesame, barley and treacle, one becomes
youthful (K. g. * 45).
4]’^ ga-riy for dgah-ri^ 4’^ ga~
sha (in JF.) dejected :	I am in
low spirits (Ja.).
4^1
206
^51
ga-ru in colloquial 4^ gafi-du
whither ; which way; to which place;
where ?
1	=S^ khyuft
the fabulous chief of the feathered race,
ga-re 1. in Lhasa very com.
colloq. form for “what,” sounded bare. 2.
where, whence:	9a~
re hdi-hdra a-kyaft ran-drag byun whence
comes this oppression, over-powering
(Rdsa.10).
4’K Ga-ro «(’’M s?v4^'44 n. of
a place in India; the Garo hills (()sam. 28).
4|’Q1 ga-la 1. Э’Т whither:
огчЙ дк л Эи нипти Эи
W3 with the palms of the hands joined
he bowed in tho direction where the Vic-
torious Ono was.	ji-la for what;
owing to what:	to what does this
serve ? of what use is this ?
where are (you or they) going ?
1	ga-la go-U-ka
n.ofan insect which subsists, it is said,
by inhaling the air only (7f. d. *
4’$ ga-le iph slowly, softly,
gently. To a departing guest one says :
oj etsta “ ka-le pcyp ” go gently. To the host
you answer:	‘‘ка-le sAw” stay
quietly, remain in peace ! ga-le fog
come slowly or gently :
it is a common
saying (in Tibet) that by walking slowly
and slowly the ass can travel all round
China.
4’^4 ga-log (in JF.) squinting.
I: ga-$a laughter:	gad-
mo bgad,	да-far bcug to cause
laughter.
ДГ4Г1Р’| ga-$a-$grog loud laughter;
ga-$a sgrog-cin glu-gar rol-mo hbul loudly
laughing they danced, sang, and made
music {A. 11).
*T]’^II: n. of a place in Upper Tibet
(A. 20).
III:	v. gasha	a
raiment used by Tantrik priests.
IV:	a string of beads; a necklace;
a string of human skulls or bone-bits worn
by Tantrik Lamas :
blood drops from her mouth, a
string of human heads hangs down from
her neck, to thee be my praise who hast
subdued the intolerable pride and arrogance
of tho host of demons (Choi-g.).
4’4^ ga-$ar 1. defined in these
passages;	phyog^-geig dpun-
pa la;	phyog^-geig
mtehan-hog la\	gshu-d
geig да- kar far gyon-pa (A. 135). Girth
or rope hung across tho breast and the
shoulder in order to draw or carry any-
thing ; also a dog harness; a shoulder-belt
worn as a badge of dignity by constables
and tho like officers. 2. §gom-thag,
the cord worn round the shoulder and the
waist at the time of meditation.
-^=4rq да-far dan gfam-thab^-kyi
mdses-pa (Z>. Л.) Looking nice (on account)
of (his) ga-far and petticoat.
4]’^ ^a-ja$=P’4|M kha-fa$ some;
part; a few, com. in colloq.
ga-ged 1. prob. 4^5 gan-ged
uncertain ; not definitely known. 2. an
approximate but uncertain direction,
region or quarter :	it is at a
4'^1
207
Т1
certain place; it is somewhere:
without explaining
minutely (i.e., the particulars), he pro-
ceeded instantly somewhere (Л. 135).
4|’^ ga-<;el glass beads; glass pearls
(Sch.).
4] Ga n. of a Dakini, a goddess (K. g.
Г, 179).
4]’q gtca-pa the white mark or patch
И
on the forehead of the kyan (the wild ass
of Tibet).
gag 1. silver in bars, ingots,
small pieces, &c., uncoined (in IK).
2. wad; wadding (for loading muskets)
(Jd.).
4J4|’4	lhog-pa qt *44’^4
gag-lhog is a swelling in the throat; a
quinsy: nad mi dan dud-hgrohi ske-dan
mgr in-pa-la §kran-nas rnag thon-te drag-
yod is a malady of men and animals in
which the neck and throat become swollen,
but matter issuing forth, it is eased;
death occurs from obstruction.
Wyfspyir gag-lhog-cc^ min so-sor
bgad-kyan no-wo gnan-nad du-gcig rim$-nad-
kyi gra§ though the disease in general is
differently expressed by the names gag
and Ihog, its real nature is but one among
pestilential diseases and it belongs to the
class of (ftxH-^x) fatal fevers.
gag-tshe^#^ bya-gag a water
fowl {Cs.).
gags obstructed.
чр-чцс- I: gan-ga-chuA a kind of
flower which resembles a chorten (chaitya)
in shape, growing in the sandy crevices of
rocks in Tibet. It is used as an antidote
against poison and also diarrhoea, *1^’
gyah-gseb bye-mahi log %-la
skye	ga chufi-
gan-ga chun-gis dug dan tsha-hkhrti gcod.
Qanga the river
Ganges ;	Gan-gdhi Lha-mo ’T^T-
the goddess of the river Gaqga. Its
different names are :—Yan-
lag brgyan-ldan^ ^’ilyaq ]lchi-mcd chab,
Nam-mkhahi chu-bo,
Drag-pohi thod,	Dsa-uuhi bu-mo
(згттж^),	Rgyun-gsum-pa, ^43*’
^5 Lam-gsum hgro, gjq’^fr^qq Glan-chen
kha-hbab (*it^ft),	Hjigs-sde ma,
Khyab-hjug rkan-pa,
Chu-byin-ma,	Skalddan fin-
rtahi bu-mo (HnrWft),	Lha-yi chu-bo
{Mnon.).
i: gan-ga hdsin an epi-
thet of S’iva. He who holds Gaq-ga on
his head, i.c., from whose head the Ganges
flows:
mtho-ris-kyi
gnas tham§-cad b^kal-pahi me§ bsrcg§-pahi
skabs-su Lha-mo Gan-ga lhuft~nas byun-wa-
na nam-mkhah la ral-pa bkyans-na§ ral-pahi
sten-du bzun-wa§-80 when all the celes-
tial regions were burnt by the fire of the
Kalpa, Gaqga as goddess appeared on
this earth having fallen from heaven.
Her locks were spread out in the sky and
held up aloft by S'iva (for which he is
called Gangadhara, the holder of Ganga)
{Mnon.),
ii:	rgya-mtsho chen-
po the great ooean which holds the entire
discharge of Gaqga {Mnon.).
4|f gan what, which.
*1^’8)gafi-gi-du§ when; at which time.

208

gan-gi-phyir ччгггь for
which; for the sake or reason of which,
gaA-nid whichever; what-
ever.
gaA-hthad—	g^A-hgrigs
what (you) like; also what suits you ?
even
if any accident happened to life there,
to us no hardship occurring, we can do
whatever suits us, so one Txo-wo expressed
himself (Hbrom. 136).
^’V4 gan-dag 3i^r some; Ч]^ЛЧ1АВ’'
gaA-dag-gi phyir	for whom or
what; for the sake of whom or what.
gaA-dag-nid whichever.
gan-dag-hdir snfar,
those two who are here; all those here;
whoever present.
g<&-du дгч, where ? where.
iqc^RE.* gan-diihan at whatever
time; wherever; seldom; where.
gan dran-dran-du b^ad.
brdsun fyad-pa to speak at
random; to say what occurs in the mind;
to speak falsehood.
gaA-hdra znprt how, like what:
gaA-hdra mihoA what have you
seen ?
gaA-na^tt where?
gaA-rnam$-kyi ifar of what;
pertaining to what ?
gan-nigo (in C.) bowl of
a tobacco-pipe; gan-mjug mouth-
piece or tip of it.
gan-por in a lump, mass.
1:	khens-pa ^5
to fill; to make full; filled up; also
piled up: 0]^-qW4^*rci gan-icaham brisegs-
pa piled up or made full. <
Syn. tshan-can; khefis;
byur-bu} phyur-bu (Mnon.).
Ш1:	JW finished; comple-
ted;	lun-chu$ gaA-wa a valley,
filled with water:	“tho moon as
full fish in the fullness of the crescent.
gaA-wa med-pa	in-
complete.
* wZj gan-ica bzaA-po	(Schr,;
Ta. 2, 1ST) completely happy or gentle;
also n. of a serpent demon.
* q gaA-wahi zla-wa (Schr.;
Bulk 18^8, 298); lit. the full moon; n. of
a Bodhisattava.
gan-bu wft, wft fresh shoots
of leaves; a pod or sheath; also cluster of
buds. Acc. to Sch. flower bud:
hbru gaA-bu-can grains which have husks
such as wheat, sesamum, &c.: ^’^’3'4^’
enveloping himself in a veil of
rays; wrapping himself in a sheath of
light.
^’§5 gan-byed гщ ^rctfir whatever he
does, has been doing, is doing.
gan-mo$ <ггит 1. various;
different sorts. 2.	gan-hdod
whatever is wished for.
gaA-tsam a small quantity; not a
considerable quantity.
gan-isug-yin = yan-nas-
yin or	gan-na $dod mkhan-
yin;	khyed gaA-tsug-
yin gar-hgro dri-pa$ he asked whence are
you; whither are you going (A. 131).
ддп-Мд which.

209
SC'SSI
п^-qgyq дай-she bstan-pa 4 <зч^х(:
which has been explained, shewn.
I: (^®r**| shat-zag) tobacco-
pipe, not the hukka, but a long straight
sort, similar to the European smoking
pipe, generally made of metal.
gan-zag II: 1. 3^, 3^,
1 ijwfa	that which
becomes full and then undergoes decay
(Sam.) ; an animated being; a corporeal
being that is subject to decay and
destruction. 2 man, as an intellectual
being; a person:	gaA-
zag gshan-gyi$ brda sprad-pa$ another
person describing it to you (opposite to
what we know by our own perception and
observation), hence a philosophical term
for “ self ” :
learned or lettered men; men of science,
especially in relation to religion:
men who postpone
religion, not troubling themselves about
it:	the prince of
tho reverend (band of) persons, i.e,y
Buddha: ^*|’§’^’3'ЯС’'Я4Т1 inferior heretical
people:	gan-zag phal-pa or ч
tha-malrpa) common or vulgar people
(J«.).
дай-zag bshi the four kinds of
human beings or higher beings are—(1)
QTW.;	mun-
khrod na$ пшп-khrod du hgro-wa that go
on from darkness to darkness; (2) «flfh:
4<TW.;	nmn-khrod na$
$пай-гсаг hgro-wa that go from darkness
unto light; (3)
nas mun-khrod du
hgro-ica that go again from light into
darkness; (4)
§пай-гса\ па§ ъпай-war hgro-гса.
that advance from light to a greater en-
lightenment. The term gan-zag
has sixteen different synonyms:—SV4
bdag* 3*| sroy; §w^8tms-ean; g'4 skye-
ua; gso-ira; g^'S skyes-bu ; ped'
bdag;	pptas §kyc$; ЧТЯД,
man;	byed-pa-po\
byed-du hjug-pa-po} tshor-гса-ро;
4’4 ps-pa-po; sdfc/q’Sj nithon-u’a-po; za-
wa-po\	ъ1ой-и:а-ро (Mnon.). The«e
are all applied to signify an animate
being. There are two kinds of *|*’**I,
ordinary and extraordinary; the ordinary
*]с/.эд| literally means that which is
subject to decay, from *|^ дай> what, and
zagt decay. Tho Buddhist meaning is as
follows:— (1)
^’q^’q^'q^’-sq гай-rgyud plig-pa поп-пюй§
kyis дай shin yon-tan dan dge-tcahi rigs gsog
mi-thub-par zag hgro-wassems-can phal-wahi
дай-zag one’s own nature being filled (*!*’
дай) with sin he cannot acquire and retain
virtue, which **J zag leaks out or decays,
therefore an ordinary living being is called
дай-zag \ (2)
WNE4*rgN'«r|K/<3*i| ran-rgyud dge-гса dan
bzaft-pohi yon-tan thams-cad-kyis дай-shin
non-mons-kyi skyon thams-cad zag hgro-was
8айь-тдуа$ дай-zag Buddha is *]*’3q
because his nature is full of all virtues or
merits and sin has been thrown out of it
or has altogether been destroyed; (3)
gE.’q^^^’q^-g^q’^-
g^'g’^q^’gE.-q^W^q^’^^q^’^'c^q-q^^q'
Л’ q- ^r;- oj-q- <4*	*T $4]’	4]E? jq
when one’s own nature retains whatever
virtue it possessed undeteriorated and
whatever faults there was in it have been
thrown out from exertion, one has entered
28
I
210

either the Nah А у ana or Hina у ana path.
Persons in such a stage, whatever doertine or
theory they may hold for salvation, belong
indeed of the Mahay Ana. In gafi-zag
of tho ordinary kind his vorjr nature is 4**
gafi, i.e., filled with deeds (Z<z$), sin,
suffering, and misery; moreover, all virtue
and talents having become exhausted, t.c.,
**1 zag, his animated being becomes what is
called Pudgal. In tho strict sense of tho
word, a Buddha is also a Pudgala, though
of tho extraordinary kind, ho on the con-
trary being full of virtues and talents and all
defects, sins, &c,, being exhausted in him.
Tho following are the twenty gafi-
zag (Pudgala) of the Qravaka School:—(1)
rgyun-du shugs-pa ono
having entered the regular course performs
Samadhi (deep meditation); (2)
AS]q dollar Ihogs-
na srid-pa lav bdun-pa after having thus
spiritually cultured the mind he has to pass
into seven births in tho world ; (3)
rigs-nas rigs-su
skye-wa after the second stage, his birth is
ensured in his own state, m., if he is a god
he is reborn as a god, if man hois reborn as
a man, but he never goes to any lower stage
of birth ; (4)	lan-
gcig phyir hofi-ica (as such) lie has only
once to come to this world for doing good;
(5)	bar-chad geig-pa
he has only one interruption before full
fruition; (6) nprmrfff; В*'**phyir ini-
hofi -iva he will not come again to this
existence ; (7) wfxf^rf
bar-ma-dor yons-su mya-
Han las hdah-ica he will attain to Nirvana
not from this life but from the interme-
diate state or Bardo ; (8)
mfion-par hdu-Ъуефра dafi bcas-pas
yofis-su mya-fian las bdah-wa he escapes
from misery save that a vestige of the
Skandha still remains; (9)
5mfion-du hdu-byed par med-
par yofis-su mya-fian las hdah-wa he attains
to Nirvana, the Skandha being utterly
destroyed, i.e., without the least vestige
remaining ; (10)	gofi-du
hpho-ica he will in his spiritual progress
reach up to the Akanistha heavens; (11)
чггцнт^;	lus-kyi mfion
sum-du byed-pa he will obtain the body of
supreme intelligence or knowledge; (12)
dadpahi rjes-su
hbrafi-wa ho will here have completely
subdued tho senses or passions; (13) W-
chos-kyi rjes-su
hbrafi-wa all his intellectual and moral
faculties become so as to bo directed
effectually to all good works; (14) <fc-
ЯТК;	Ihofi-ivas thob-pa having
heretical	views or having insight
into religion ; (15) wzrpnpff;
q^$<4’q dus-kyi rnam-par grol-wa getting
salvation in time ; (16)
getting salvation not in
proper time; (17)
«я	$ чг q gnis-kahi cha-las rnam-par grol-
wa getting salvation in time as well as
without ref erenee to time; (18)
f^nqV;	skyet-
nas yofis-su mya-fian las hdah-wa entering
into the state of Nirvana immediately after
one’s birth; (19)
ges-rab kyis rnam-par grol-wa fully
delivered by means of absolute or transe-
cendental knowledge; (20)	I
delivered by means of faith.
дргч gafi-ya a very large figure o?
number (Ya-sel. i>£).
211

чр-'^l
в]с.-ик.’ gafi-yaft	whosoever;
whatever ; any one.
gaft-la grs( where ; in whom.
qp’JSi gaft-lo an empty pod, freed
from the kernels (in JK) (Ja.).
gaft-gar ^'^’«ч’ччя’ч anything
that occurs (in the mind); what is
thought; a thought.
gaft-su dag	whichever
of those.
1. glacier; glacier-ice.
2. snow (usually kha). 3. the sclerotic
of the eye (&*Л.).
gaftt-rgyud a chain of snowy
mountains.
*т]елг^ дан s-can	1. one of the
native names of Tibet. 2. abounding in
snow; snowy; full of glaciers: Gafts-can-las
bbyun-wahi chu the water issuing from a
glacier: Gafts-can-gyi $kad the language of
Tibet.
Gafts-can mkhas-
pahi gisug-rgyan a complementary name of
Tsongkha-pa, the great Buddhist reformer
of Tibet whose religious name was
wgjflprq Byyal-ica Bto-bzaft grags-pa; his
other names were :—tRje rin-po
che;	Bje Tsoft-kha-pa;
Gafi$-can cin-rta;	Car Tsoft-kha-pa;
wrsiSfa-g-a ffjam mgon blama.
Gaft-can mgon-po or (P’W
Spyan-ras gzigs the patron saint of
Tibet, Avalokites'vara, also styled :—
^•5^25 Hjig-rten mgon-po;
Thug$-rje chen-po;	Hgro-wahi
mgon-po.
д]ьлг-5У Gafa-can rgyal-po King of
Tibet; and in books occasionally applied
to the Dalai Lamas of Lhasa.
Gaft$-can rgyal-pohi
isti-gnas as also	cho$-hkhor
dpal-gyi Lha-sa used to designate Lhasa,
the capital of Tibet (Yig. k. 31).
д]елг^-^-ц gafts-can chen-po sometimes
applied to mountainous region covered
with eternal snow extending from Ladak
to the Kailas range. Also the name of a
fabulous mountainous region the chief peak
of which is said to be about 1,500 miles
round and filled with Yaks a, Raksa and
other demi-gods.
Gaft$-chen any great range of
snowy mountains or a great glacier; n.
of a village at the south-western foot of
theKanchenjunga mountain.
(Kanchenjunga in Sikkim) lit. the five
great repositories of snow.
Gaft$-chen Cho§-rgyal
the Grand Lama of Tibet; also the name
of a guardian deity of Buddhism in
Tibet; a name of Yama, the Lord of
Death, who is worshipped in Tibet under
the name of Dam-chen Cho§-rgyal.
Gans-ljofts yul=-^S Rod
Tibet.
Syn.	gafts-can shift;
gaft§ ri ra-wahi skor-tcahi
shift-khams;	gaft§-can sa-
lhahi §)nan-ljoft§ (Mnon. and Yig. k.).
gafts-hbab avalanche; it snows.
sjwgpi gaft§-sbal, also called
dkyil-hkhor *T|VT, the snow lizard with
circular marks on its skin resembling
the common Indian lizard (Lex.); a frog
of fabulous origin: the male frog is said
to live on the top of the snowy mountains
and the female frog in the abyss of the deep
gorge below the mountain; when the sun
passes over tho tropic of cancer (karkata or
crab), tho male frog descends to the foot of
tho mountain and the femalo frog ascends
there to meet him midway. Before
*rprtfT||
212
VY* |
meeting each other tho male frog remains
more powerful; but after they have united,
the female becomes the stronger of the
two (timan.).
i; gan^-ri frnOlft snowy
mountain or snow-mountains—a com-
mon designation for many of tho great
ranges in Tibet ;	gafis-ni-$u the
twenty principal mountains of Tibet:—(1)
Thufilha, (2) Ь Ti-sc ^Iiaila^a), (3)
Jlah-rykhar, (4) Bu-le, (5)
д7аг-эдо, (6) Pho-la, (7) «рЯ’Я Hfrkhah-
r , '8j £ Jo-mo kha-rag, (9) Rdo-
i lOj Gan-bzafi, (11) fr’J* Rtse-
T'lum, 12) Laphyi, (13) ЗЛс? Tshe-rift,
(14) §na-nam, <J5) 5’8 Te-$gro, (16)
JJod-dc gufi-rgyal, (17) WKty'W
*5 Yar-lha gam-po, Ц8) Gsal-rje, (19)
На-bo gafa-bzati, (20)
p^a.ri a lahi-gan§ (Kathafi. %
1I:	f it-dag dkar-po n.
of a vegetable drug (ДГЛон.,.
gans-^rag = *|wgS gan§-hphred
along or across tho glacier.
gafis-srul an avalanche; a slip
m the snowy side of a mountain ; a snow-
'’ip-
q]K.5Tj|q] gans-thig n. of a stone or
mineral substance resembling stone; it
is said to be a cure for fever that is
produced from the liver.
Gan§-pa ge-hu tho name
of a celebrated lama and philosopher of
the Kadampa School of Tibet.
=4Vg’* gaii-ji-ra lit. posessed of trea-
sure or rndcod-ldan; an ornamental
pinnacle on a temple, house or chorten
constructed after the proscribed model
given in Buddhist hooks. This is a
Sanskrt word though sometimes Tibctau-
ized, being written as	hgan-hji-ro.
gad as in gscr-gad 1. pure,
genuine, unalloyed. 2. a rock.
C\
a rock cavern; a
place of shelter under the cloft or nook of
a rock:
kept tho bars of silver in tho nook of a
rocky hill.
TCP gad-kha W- wide, broad;
breadth; with breadth.
gad-mo, TTW a laughing;
laughter:	gad-mo dgod
utters a laugh; *|VM’«W|Vgcz ga$-mo-bgad
byufi I have laughed ;	gad-mo
bgad-sofi ho has laughed.	gad-mo
rgod to laugh;	g^* gad-mo $or-
byufi laughter sprang forth;
gad-mo gor-sofi idem;	gad-
mot hdeb$-pa to laugh at a person ;
hjig rten-pahi gad-mo laughtor of
worldly-minded people :	this
is to mo an object of laughtor; it is ridicu-
lous to me (Ja.).	gad-rgyan^-ean
Й bsdig$-pahi gad-mo
(^Ш Ла Ла) loud laughter;
$dig-pahi gad-mo (fvP? hila) coquettish
laugh;	dgyes-pahi-gad-mo (T%
he-he) laugh of merriment or rejoicing;
zil-gyi$ gnon-pahi gyad-
mo vt a laughter of triumph;
khro-icohi bshad-pa brgyad the eight
laughs of indignation and wrath, &c.
gad-kgyal the walls of conglo-
merate rock through which mountain-
torrents have cut their way.

213
Wl
rjad-snigs dust; refuses; swept-
out: phyays-mas yad-sniy^ phyagt sweep
with a broom the dust, refuse, etc.
cqS V gad-dar sweeping, cleansing;
gad-dar-byed-pa cleansing;
sweeping well a place; keeping it clean.
Syn. phyag-dar; byi-dor*, ЯУ
5^ ga&clar\	gtsan-war-byed *,
ДЧСЛ4 rdul-hphafa (ДМоп.).
Gad-mdah-la n. of a moun-
tain ; the lowlands at the foot of a Gad.
gad mdal-la tshun this side
of the mountain called Gad-dala.
Я5’4 i: gad-pa or Я5‘*^ gad-mkhan
a sweeper; a cleanser; ЗЯ‘^’§5*^, Я5*
the class (of menial
servants) requiring wages (such as)
sweepers, dusters and water carriers.
Я5’Я^'^ any place or object well dusted
or cleansed.
Я5‘ч n: 1. a precipitous cliff of
conglomerate such as often walls in the
mountain rivers: 2. wide crack in a con-
glomerate rock.
Я5’ЗЯ gad-phug a cavern or cleft in a
conglomerate rock: ЯЗ^’Я^’^Я'
ЗЯ’^Я’ё’^ЗЯ^ gshttfi-gis stag-dkar-gyi gad
phug-tu shag-Ina bshug§ meanwhile they
halted for five days in the rocky cavern of
Stag-dkar.
gan=rtsar near:	А^'Я^
ded‘dpon dehi gan-du son-ste dris-
pa going near to the chief of the
merchants (caravan), he asked. Я^ gan
(=Яя gam in C.) signifying nearness,
proximity; is used in such connection as
Я^ to, towards, up to: «^‘Я^’ЛЯ come
up to me;	be went unto the
king ;	he wont towards the
house;	he came from the
king; ХЯ'^Ж^ in ТГ. close by the
brook;	c^ur gan-du in W. hard
by the water; ^’Я^ rir gan-pa one
living close to a mountain or hill.
дам-kyal or Я3» дап-гкуаЦ
ЧсИ supine; lying on the back with the
face upward: Я^’З^ЛЭ'4’4 to lie in that
position: Я^’З4'^З'4'4 to fall on the back.
hgan-rgya,
vulg. Я^’5 gam-rgya, a written contract ;
an agreement (Cs.).
Я¥5* gan-dar, a silk handkerchief
offered as a present in exchanging compli-
ments on meeting (Sch.).
gan-dha bha-dra a
kiud of drug used in liver derangement.
J Я^Л’^'йЯ^ gan-dha rihi sfiags тгетч!-
ЯпИ a Buddhist mantra or charm which
has the power of enabling one to move in
space.
gan-dho-la,
the temple of fragrance; hall of worship
built after the model of a chatty a
with many doors. It is generally attached
to a great monastery. In Tibetan it is
called Х’Я^'!4^ Dri gtzan-khan, the name
being applied to the particular chapel
where the image of Buddha is placed.
The great temple of Buddha at Gaya was
called Maha gandhola Caitya. Phyi gan-
dho-la nafi-du lha-khan byas-pa its inside
was a god’s house or chapel and the outside
a gandhola.
gan-dhi a mineral sub-
stance used as a cure for leprosy.

214
Ч|£Г&| ।
+ gan-tahi-tog or	gan-thi
par-na a medicinal plant.
t V? gan-ti a piece of thick
plank measuring about G feet by 12 inches
either of white sandal wood or of deodar,
which when struck with a hammer or
another piece of thick hard wood, produces
a kind of ringing sound which is heard
from a great distance. It is used on
special occasions to summon the monks of
a monastery to attend any special religious
service, &c.
gan-gyog or gan-ti the-
hu vft? the rod or hammer with
which the ghanti (wooden gong) is struck
or beaten.
J ganda-pa si (mystic) avarice;
greed for gain (K. g. p £6).
gan-di	iu books the
gong or bell to call monks to monastic
services.
gan-mdsod= 5 bafi-mdso#
store-room, storo-houso.
gab-khufi, defined as
pns-mohi rgyab-kyi ^gyid-khufi,
the cavities behind tho knee bones.
gab-igra a belch (in W.)
(Ja.).
4 gab-pa to hide; to conceal one’s
self:
Rgyal-wahi hbyuft-gnas hdi yon-
tan tham^-cad gab-nas mi ston-par gdah-
teas» This Rgyal-wahi hbyuft-gna$ having
concealed all his talents does not exhibit
them (Jlbrom. I4 2).
Syn. «ta’o yib-pa\ $Ьаз-ра; *|Ччргч
gyog$-pa; «VaiKvcvg’q mi mfion-par by a*
ica (Jgnofli).
gab-phyiin n. of a religious
treatise on the occult doctrine of Bud-
dhism.
чр’Я gab-tse^ ZJ]^’S‘ gab-rtse or
gab-tshe a plan or table of points
for computing the figures of divination in
magical computations. In this connec-
tion,	sa-la gna$ pahi
sa-bdag-gi rtsi$ refers to calculating tho
identity and deeds of mischief done by a
local “god of tho soil.” Again Wjpr
refers to astrological
calculations worked with the gab-tse.
is a mystio chart used for
bodily prognostics ;	one for the
speech;	one for the heart;
In the general term gab-tse
are included many particular significations,
that for the soil, that for the sky, that for
the intermediate space, etc.
gab-tshad slow, insiduous
fever; according to Sch. a hectic, con-
sumptive fever.
ЦрГсоЧ] gab-tshig	riddle;
also mystical words or expressions used in
magic to stupify one’s enemies without
killing them. Also the 1G ornamental
mystical allusions employed to excite
laughter in a play, etc., and to convey
hidden meanings in an assembly, ete. The
names of these are as follows:—
kun-tu tshogs pahi gab-tshig*
de-bshin-du
$lu byed-kyi rim-pa daft bral-wahi gab-tshig;
WflfcrQ’flp’Sq rab-bcom-gyi gab-tshig;
mthzin gzug$-kyi gab-tshig;
215
4*1
rtsub-mohi gab-tshig;
«jq-Xa] grafa-kyi gab-tshig \
rab btags-kyi gab-tshig-,
min-du hdus-pahi gab-tshig; |q*q5’fl|q^ff|
§grib-pahi gab-tshig; *3^<й’|рч]«гЗд| mthun-
jpaA? sgrahi gab-tshig; йелг<|5’ч]л*ЗЦ rmons-
pahi gab-tshig;	yon$
phrog§-kyi gab-tshig;	gcig
b$grib$-kyi gab-tshig; ^Vr’T4B4’re^’4lrr^4l
gni$-ka tegrib$-pahi gab-tshig;
*^’^4 yofi$ hdre$-kyi gab-tshig,
<q«T$«| gab-yig 1. in the medicinal works
of Tibet the names of certain drugs and
medicines are written in words which are
not ordinarily understood, having secret
meanings assigned to them. 2. in figura-
tive language, meanings of names and
words which are not ordinarily understood.
Such are called gab-miti, i.e., secret
names.
^4’*? gab-sa $ba$-sa or yib-sa
hiding-place ; place of concealment :
came bringing much gold with us, but we
were without a hiding-place or a place to
go to (Л. 120).
Ч|Я gam near, v. gan.
Syn. gam-yo; drun; ne-
hkhor {HJAon.).
gam-gum a number,
grafa-g.nas {Ya-sel. 57).
gam-span? panels or little
boards beneath the cornice of a roof, often
filled np with paintings (Ja.).
Ф 9 gam-bu-ra, erf^TT in W. a
citron; lemon (Ja.).
gam-hbrog a dairy in the
neighbourhood of one’s residence. Gam*
hbrog rgyaA hgrog bzaft-wa rtsa-yi dge
Near and distant dairy farms become
thriving through the abundance of pas-
tures {Jig.).
gam-hdsin abbr. of
ganrgya daft hdsin, a receipt, acknowledg-
ment ; the letter of transfer, exchange, &c.,
for buying and selling or transaction of
money business, &c.:
q^q-^q^xg^’^ gam-hdsin byed-pa hdod
sbyargyi bkod-pa go-brdah hphrod fie$
certainly, the receipt and the deed of
agreement should be satisfactorily ex-
plained (B/sii ).
+ gam-yo («ргч]^ч| gam-gyog) —
ne-hkhor attendant.
4]^ gahu fl’jz 1. a little box or case;
when containing a talisman or amulet, it
is worn suspended round the neck.
I:	gar or «jvg gar-bro итч, игг,
UK dance; acting in a dramatic play;
gesticulation ;	gar-icas tbkor
surrounded by dancing girls or actors ;
gar-byed-pa to dance;
rtsed-mo byed-pa to sing; to
dance and play; gar-zas the food
given to performers; gar hkhrab-mkhan gyi
zas-la for the food of those who perform
dancing ;	gar-la dgah-гса
<TT^fsw very fond of dancing; як’вгч?
gar-la blta	attending a dance;
witnessing a performance.
gar-gyi liad-mo danc-
ing entertainment or amusement.
^’5 gar-gyi dwaA-po =
grub-chen or	inal-bbyor-pa
4N
216

cJitn-po fig. a yogi or ascetic engaged in
meditation : §р*Я
sku-inchog gar-gyi dicafi-po mdse$ brjij
tiomj-pifi your holiness the lord of the
dancers (peacock), equal in beauty and
splendour (Fig. k. 28).
Я^§’Я^’^ gar-gyi #$о-&о=ЗГЯ*,9'*Т,^г’
gju-gar-gyi i&khan-po or Я^’^ gtso-bo
teacher or director of a dance or danc-
ing performance (Alfion.).
III : or Я’5 gci-rtiy or Я5^ даМщ
whither; where; gar-yafi anywhere:
fljvujc’g’q gar-yaft $kye-wa growing any-
where: Я^<ил ц gar-yaft mi hgro-wa to
go nowhere. Я*’й5 gar-mc$ in IF. at
all events; by all moans; Яga-na-mc#
or gar-bab at random; haphazard
(SeA.).
Я^’ЯМ gar-mkhan or bro-mkhan
5fW dancer 1. a dancer, performer, e.g.y
oven a Buddha or any saint dances when
displaying miracles. 2. name of a god,
acc. to Sch. S'iva (Ja.).
gar-inkhau-ma — 1^^ gar-ma
г^, dancing girl. Tho thirteen
modulations of voice or musical notes:
(1) Я^'* gar-ma ; (2)
rol-rtsed-ma пт^п;; (3)	« dal-ma ;
(4) 5^** myur-ma ; (5)	bar-ma
’TWH; (6) ^Я’КЯ tshig-rdeg (7) 3'4**
bya-icahi-du^ WH; (8)	bya-wahi
tshad Ч5ЧН ; (9) 5‘54 ta-tea (<nq) reality;
(10) o-gha (wfa) flow ; (11) gha-ni
compact;	(12) la-ya (^ru)
absorption; adherence ; (13) zd-mya
(w) equality.
flp-qwi gar-cham the frantic dance of the
lamas of Tibet which is chiefly observed
by the Rnifi-ma schools of Tibet. It is of
two kinds	phur-pahi rtsa hcham
the dance of tho enchanted club, and ^§4'
hkhrub-hcham the dance of the lamas
at the time of offering sacrifice.
gar-^tabi dancing gesture or
motion.
Я*’* gar-pa a dancer; also a
dance. ,
II:	the encampment of an army;
a camp.
Я^'З4 gar-rgyab encampment; Я*’2Ч‘Ч
gar-rgyab-pa to encamp; also for Я^’З4
gaft-rgyab,	rdo-mdab sog$
gar-rgyab fling at him stone or arrow, etc.,
whatever (you can) (ДЬгот. f4 6’).
+ я^’^Я 0бгг-с?<7=Яс/^Я gan-shig, which
one; whichever one.
Gar gdofi-btsau the
famous general of King Sron-fysan sgarn-
pO) who visited the capital of China and
induced Emperor Taitsung to give one of
the princesses imperial in marraigo to his
sovereign, about 630 A.D.
gar-rdeb
chus-khyer gar-rdeb-sog$-la lands, fields,
houses, &c., that have been devastated
by a river by the over-flowing of its
banks, &e. (Rtsii,).
4M4I gar-nag name of a medicine.
I:	gar-po in colloq. language
the word dkar-po is pronouned as
Я^'5 gar-po and also written as such.
It is usual to pronounce <$kar-po as
Я^ ц gar-po in the vulgar language
(Grub, ч 2).
217
II:	also '’JvS gar-mo^ thick;
dense; condensed; not fluid.
1. gar-wa чцч bska-wa
astringent. 2. strong; qvac; gar-chaft
strong beer (Ja.).
Gar btsan hphags-pa name
of a monastery and also of a deity in
Tibet {Jig. 3.).
t gar-dsa or bi gar-dsa, лм,
n. of a tree or kind of wood
pn {К. ко. % 3).
TO gar-sha the native name of the
district called La-hul or La-hol by the
Hindus (Ja.).
gar-log acc. to the Tibetans
rapacious mountain tribes belonging to
the far north-east of Tibet.	4*
’^5 those
styled in the Tibetan tongue Gar-log are
described in the Li-s'i Gur-khang as
Turushka. The	Gar log were a
different people from the Mgo-log.
Р$’Зрг2п*Ц Gar-log gi rgyal-p>o la ska-lus
btan-was cho^-phyir srog-kyan btoft-icahi
rgyal-po yin. In Atis'a’s biography it is
mentioned that the King of the Gar-log
iu the first part of the 11th century,
A.D., came from the Indian side and made
the King of Tibet a captive when he was
there on a visit to Purang. Probably
they were the earliest Mohamedan
invaders of Kashmir.
gar-$a the muscles of tho thumb
(.W.) (Ja.).
+ I: gal—W nan pressing;
gal-gyi$ pressingly, urgently.
П: importance «рг^’Ч^’ч gal-du
h(ktfi-pa to consider of importance; to
esteem.
Syn. gnad', mdo (M.fion.').
4J4I III: 1. constraint; compulsion:
fta-la gal-juft in С. “I have been compelled’’
(Ja.). 2. trap; snare: in colloq.
gal hdsug-pa to set a snare (Ja.).
IV: v. *p‘Q|’a( gan la-la.
gal-hgag=important;
д]^ цч|п|-йч very important.
gal-chuft unimportant; insignifi-
cant ; undervalued; slighted.
fljorl q gal-che-wa very important:
of the two, this
life and the future, the latter is of greater
importance:	4
it is of greater importance to acquire
accomplishments than to go roving about
without purpose :	q important
moral precepts.
Syn.	gna<l-che-wa; rtsa-
che-iia; M ’^’4 khag-chc-wa]	gtso-
che-ica {Affton.).
чрг^ gal-te conj. if; in case of;
implies a conditional possibility. It is
placed as the first word in a conditional
sentence while na, its complement, stands
after the verb at the end; together they
signify “ if У 4^’5, however, is sometimes
omitted, still meaning “ if.” In colloq.
expression gal-te is seldom used;
but “ gal-shi” is a common substitute:
if you wish to enjoy all happiness, you
must entirely leave off all desire:
29
qjcy'SlX |
218
q)-^|
qg-q, q	if you wish at all
times to live in friendship (with the three
Holies), you should avoid the three
dangers, viz. of looking at your loving
wife, thinking of profit, and of confiding
in an envoy.
gal-mdo^-^gal-hgag or
W^4!21! gnad-hgag 1. really, essentially of
importance. 2. n. of a disease (J/Ы.).
gal-po probably same as Я*4 gal.
the important, indispens-
able master of the house (family).
sprq gai-ua to force, to press some
thing on a person:	indoor con-
finement is forced on men (Ja.).
gal-war byed-pa «QfWVq
brtson btan-wa	to be assiduous.
gal-fyzuft (Jit. got hold of the
important thing),	renunciation.
gal-ro in ГГ. refuse; rnbbi>h.
ga$, v. адргч hga$-pa.
gi I. numeral for 33, v. affix instead
of 5 kyi after and for signification
v. 5 kyi.
gi-gtt the vowel sign04 for i.
f^=5|3^ gi-gu-fa,
having a white speck in the eye;
wall-eyed (of horses) (/ScA.).
gi-lji-big or ko-tsi-Ыд
tanued skin of a kind of deer obtained
from Mongolia and China (Jig-)-
Gu-ne-ru n. of an Indian
yog ini or female aseetie (K. dun. 38).
Ч|-(ЦЕ- gi-wan and also gi-haft
W,	a yellow
pigment, an anthelminthic medicine;
n. of a concretion in the
entrails of some animals, used for
medicine. Aee. to the medical works
of Tibet this concretion is formed in the
liver of certain animals and seldom in
men, and it resembles in appearance and
size the boiled yolk of a hen’s egg.
There are also smaller ones. Лее. to some
lexicographers this concretion is formed in
two or three strata or folds. The best
quality of gi-ican is that which is
obtained from an elephant, and those
obtained from the ox called gorocanZ
are of second quality. A kind of
gi-ican is also obtained from minerals
and clay, and is of reddish-yellow colour.
All these are supposed to bo possessed
of wonderful healing power.
(7Г. g. 308).
Gi-wan mixed wdth honey, if applied to
both the eyes as a medieino, will give
one such a clear vision, enabling one to
see all the treasures which are in tho
earth.
GYri bkan-dha n. of a
mountainous country: Gi-ri bhan-dhahi
yul-gyi nithahi ri khon§-su kla-klohi rigs
mi-hdra-wa beu yod-par rgya-gar-pa dag-la
grag^in it being known to tho Indians
that in the mountains skirting the country
of Giribandha there are ten different
La-lo tribes (Dsatn.).
gi-lifi a strong-bodied horse
(Sch.).
gi-lin a fabulous animal.

219
та
as an accom-
Gt-fan rgya n. of a tribe in
Tibet.
gin probably a little
drum, or the beating of it
paniment in dancing (<7Й.).
gim ЛЧ
gra$-shig n. of a soft
(К. my.
gir-mo, Ld., the Indian rupee;
in G. it is called gor-mo or
s gor-mo,
gi$ instead of kyis after a final
«I or
$gra-§nan-gyi
musical tone.
gu 1. numerical for 63 = ^ hu. 2.
sign of diminutives, e.g., 0*g khyi-gu a
puppy ; little dog. 3. extension; extent;
room; space;	gna§ sa gu-dog,
З^’З'Хз М-ра gu-dog, Vl lam gu-dog,
gu-dog-po narrow-minded;
a narrow place, valley or road ; ’[’‘wq
gu-yan$-pa spacious; roomy; wide ; g,(*iA<r
Ч gu yan$-pa hdug there is much room
here.
qjWq ди	dog§-po
med-pa spacious; capacious: sra’g’uiMrq
sa-cha gu yans-pa a spacious, wido place:
sdod-sa gu yifa-pa a
commodious residence:	sems
gu-yans-pa a broad, generous heart.
9’94 gu-gu^a enamelled plates,
cups, &c.; generally enamels on copper.
f 9’9^ g^-gul or gug-gui, ^чн,
^4^4, a costly incense, one kind of
which is white, another black. It is used
in medicine and its smell drives away evil
spirits.
Syn. bum-mkhan; ^‘^9* hdre-
hjigs\ ^^'^nal-mo hdra (Mnon.).
i ЗЗ^5^ gu-gul-pn
Amyris galloca the plant from which the
incense is obtained.
qj-qj Gu-ge n. of a province in the
West of Tibet. Also n of a section and
school in the Sera monastery. The people
of the province of 3'^1 Gu-ge are called
ч]’ч)'ч Go-ge-pa.
TFi Git-fan also called Go-tan^ the
elder grandson of	Khany
who invited Sakya Papdita to Mongolia
in order to introduce Buddhism there.
gu-ti in IF. deaf (Jd.).
c\
19’^’5 Gu-na mi-tra a
Buddhist monk about whom mention is
made in the Phar-phyin section of the
sacred books of Tibet.
9'1^ gu-zul (for	ral-gu zul-
ma) hair-pendants of precious stones of
women in Tibet:
taking off her hair-ornaments, she offered
them (A.	102.).
9’^ gn-yar in IF. slowly ; gently;
without noise (Sch.).
9’^ gu-yii quick-silver.
чуКЙ] Gu-yog 1.	byahi
rgyal-po shigyi. of a king of birds (К. my.
18). 2. n. of the second son of Jengis
Khan, who ruled over Eastern Mongolia.
t 99 gu-ru spiritual teacher; a
teacher ; father-confessor; Щ’я Ъ1а-та^ apr
Vfy $lob-dpon. Often in Milarapa.
I
220
3F'I
Gu-ru ndshan-lprgyad the
oight manifestations of tho Great
Teacher; also the eight names of Padma
Sambhava.
gu-rug 1. in Ld. a colt or foal
of an ass (Jd.). 2. n. of a celebrated lama
who was tutor to Log Ce§-rab.
ди-1ай n. of a deity propitiated
by mothers (in Tibet) for the well-being
of their children. According to some this
deity blesses mothers with children.
4J-W- ди-Ий 1. pure gold picked out
from a mine. 2. also spelt 3’8^’
gold embroidered cloth or silk: 3’Я5/’Г^*1*
having presented a reli-
gious garment of embroidered silk (to
him).
gu-le in W. for Я gaJe slowly;
softly; gently.
Gu-$ri said to be a corrupt
form of the Chinese title of Kaufiri,
as hick is conferred on Buddhist monks and
religious men, but it is evidently tho
corruption of the Sanskrit title of gau-
the lord of religion or guna-fri:
in Tibetan	yon-tau-dpal, tho
blessed, learned or talented one. In
Mongolian Kau-qri signifies a Pandit or a
learned man.
З’^^Г^ Gu^ri sog-po Gus'ri the Mon-
golian, in Tib. called 3*5 'Sirj'Ji
Gu-sri bstan-hdJnehog-rgyal, the D sung a-
rian Chief, who conquered Tibet and esta-
blished the supremacy of the Dalai Lama
in 1643 A.D. over all Tibet; also an
(Eleuth Mongolian who belonged to Gus’ri’s
banners.
TS gusu occurs in (Vai. kar.) a
garment, dress (Jd.).
gug-gu, bgan an oblation
cup:	(MH>n
b^an-ni Hor-gyi Ий la§ lod this name
is now applied to enamelled cups made in
China (Jig.).
t ЗТЗ'4 v. 3’3^ gtt-guh
’Ц gug-pa 1. 35*q dud-pa,
3«Tj-q dad-pa^ дид-ра ’ялг-итг bent as in
reverence, to bend in salutation : 3Tq^
gug-bca$ with humility, humbleness,
modesty. 2. In IV. to rub or scratch
gently ; to tickle.
ЗТЗ4! gug-gug bend low:
ЗТЗ^И^З^ЗТ^ mgoJut gag-gug gsum-
gyis phyag-bya$ he saluted thrico, bending
low his head and body.
ЗЯЛ4 gag-gc-wa bent; bent down-
wards (of leaves) (Vai. §й.)> v. 3Tq
gug-pa.
gug-sran weight of gold
according to tho standard formerly used
in tho province of 3'^1 Gu-ge, a Sran or
ounce of 3**1 Gu-ge :
having presented gold of tho weight of
300 ounces (of Gu-ge) (Л. 79).
I: вий an imperial title, belong-
ing to the second class of nobility in China;
it is second only to tho distinction of
Wang or Princo, and is very much prized
in Tibet. The recipient wears a ruby
button and three plumes of the peacock.
4JS- II: ftfrPX variously applied (1)
to a species of leopard-cat found in
Tibet.
’F’l
221
•which is smaller than the Himalayan leo-
pard, and (2) to the broad-headed tiger of
Central Asia, kharakula of the Mongols,
which lives in the forests of the Amur
and of North-Western China. The flesh
of latter is used in paralysis, and also as
an antidote against evil spirits.
HI: the middle ; central; also
generally the meridian; noon; midday;
as well as, less frequently, midnight ;
3^ nin-gun midday; noon; mid-
night.
З^'Ч gun-la in the middle : ^5'5'3^
stod-kyi gun-паз thou taken er come
ont of the middle of Upper Tibet.
3^3 gun-du byed-pa to divide
through middle ; to dissect anatomically;
dwyar-ggi gun-la in tho middle
of summer ;	nam-gyi gun-la at
the midnight hour; the middle watch of
night.
Gufi-rgyal n. of one of the
early kings of Tibet (Yig.).
3^’^ gun-ja midday tea ; also the reli-
gious service conducted in a Buddhist
monastery at midday when tea is served to
the congregated monks.
3*'4f^i gun-gni$ the two middle times,
midday and midnight.
Gufi-than lit. central plain,
n. of a part of Ngari Khorsum; n. of a
monastery in Ngari.
district of Grungthang in
western Tsang, the birth-place of Nag-
tsho Lo-tsa-ua Tshul-khrims rgyal-wa,
who brought Atis'a to Tibet.
Gun-than Bjam-dbyans
n. of an incarnate Lama of Amdo, who
th
became the high priest of Tashi Gomafi
monastery of Amdo and erected a lofty
chorten-temple 360 feet high; and founded
a monastery with a library containing
20,000 block-print volumes.
Gun-thafi Rtsahi ко ron
the birth-place of Milaraspa the poet and
saint.
3^'4 gun-pa —hbrin-po ньцн tha
second of three brothers; the middle one.
Зс/чад’Ц gun hbab-pa to take rest at noon
on a journey; 3^3*1 gun-tshig§ dinner
(Sch.).
З^'^С4! gufi-hdsug f^T also gang-mo,
the middle finger.
3^’3*’^ Gun-ri gufi-btsan the son
and successor of King	Khri-
sron Idehu-tysan who reigned in Tibet
about 733 A.D.
guft-la phug or
gun dmar-la phug carrot.
guft-safis la hgro-wa to
take a walk about midday, also generally
to take a walk 3^'^ gun-ion at noon.
3s gud 1. slope; declivity (Cs.).
2. separation; solitude; seclusion (Sch.).
35’3	=	logs suham
§ger-du aside; apart:
35again Jobo spoke to Phyag-dar
§t on-pa while alone in a solitary place
(A. 5).
35’3’q^’4 gud-du hbor-ica 1. to place
aslant or to one side ; З^’З'М4^4 gud-du
gegs-pa to separate (Ja.), disperse. 2. to
buy dear, at a loss ; synonymous with
3^S gun-god', in Lad. heavy or thick of
hearing; gud-nag quite deaf; deaf as
a post. 3.	gud-du hjug-pa —
log§-su bshag-pa or
222

shan-du bcug-pa to humiliate; deprecate;
to place in a false or inferior position.
5Л4 gad-pa = ^\Q hgud-pa.
JS'5 gud-po dear; expensive, v.
r gud-po.
gun loss'; damage:	fia-la
gun-phog in JK., I have suffered loss
(prop, damage has сото to me) (Ja.).
to make up a loss :	льл’огд;
in all
other places, on the other hand, they out of
pride almost daily tried to replenish their
loss (BLrom. Г JJ).
З3^ gun-dum a bottle-shaped or
cylindrical basket for fruit in Ld. (per-
haps akin to гкон-pa) (Ja.).
дин-ро in Ld. expensive; dear.
3^‘§	or §
having died or bemi dead:
de-na$ pun nii-rin tear Bram-i(
gum-$te then, not long after, tho Brahma^
having died (Hbrom. 162).
3*’4 gum-pa, v. 4g*rq hgum-pa.
gar TOZV, WC,	a tent ;
also a house made of hay or straw or grass ;
dicu-gur a sleeping tent; ^oprg^
fyshugs-gur a tent used by a great man for
his residence; д^'^'Ч gar- yol the ceiling of
a tent; gvpqN gur-kheb$ the cover or
canopy ; ras-gur tent of cotton cloth;
rgyal-gur royal pavilion;
dmag-gur a military tent; gv$tf4| gur-
nchog a magnificent tent ; gvs*] gur-tkag
tent robes; g*^ gur-ber in JK., or
gur-qin, the tent poles ; д^’3ч| gur-thog the
upper covering or outer-fly of a tent; «Y
thdb-gur hearth-tent; that which is used
as a kitchen; З^’З'-^З gur-gyi qarn-bu
tho outer canopy-like cover of a tent; the
upper part of a double tent f g*’^ gur-
phur tho pegs or pins used for pitching a
tent • g^’^X* gur-gthol tho walls of a tent;
4]Vg]5 gur-glad tho top or crown of a tent;
the passage for the smoko out of a tent;
gur-hgram lattice in the side of a
tent ; gvg* gur-lcam stakes supporting
the roof of a tent {Sch.}.
gur-khan the imaginary pavilion
or mansion of tho gods, which is formed
in tho sky, canopied by rain-bows, walled
by rays of light, supported by diamond
posts and carpctted with variegated clouds,
for the uso of tho gods when they
come to witness religious entertainments
or performances of tho pious on this
earth.
Gur-gyi mgon-po a divinity
of tho Sakya-pa School.
3^54 Gur-drag n. of a Buddhist deity
of tho Sakya-pa School.
3M4! gar-nag those of tho black tent,
or tho Black-tent Mongols; g^’VP gar-
dkar tho Whito-tont tribes of Mongolia;
Я*5’3* gcod-gur tho tent used by itiner-
ant mendicants or Shamans.
^vq’jg’^q gur-pa grba-ishan a Buddhist
congregation at 3^'3 Gyan-tse.
gvo;^ gur-lpags a perforated skin; a
hide full of holes (Sch.).
gv^ gur-ser the tribe of the Mongols
who used to live in yellow tents. The
Taranatha Lama of Urga (Tab Khureh)
in Mongolia still uses the yellow tent.
3^’3* gur-gum or 3^’3^ gur-kum
5^4, жчЬхэт saffron, crocus, marigold,

223
calendula, and similar yellow flowers
{Ja.):	gar-gum
mchin-nad kun sei rtsa kha §dom saffron
cures liver-disorders and contracts the
surface of the bowels (Rtsii.). There are
three kinds of saffron known to the
Tibetans ;	Bal-po gur-gum
the saffron of Nepal;	kha-che
gur-gum the Kashmir saffron, which is the
best, and or If’*’*!, that is brought
from distant regions (Spice-islands).
Syn.	tshiin byed dinar; 45cr
hdab brgya-wa;	rdsin drun
§kye§;	те-tog don-can ;
kun-nas hkhums*,	me-tog
ni-ma\ phra-ma-eair,	kha-
chc-§kye§ ;VV* dri-shim ;	lus-dmar\
niehi rtse-mo ; bdc-byed]
hthufi-byed\ ^^’^mchog-ldan} V^’q’q^yq
dpah-po brtan-pa (Mnon:).
gur-gur in Ld. a small
ehurn used for preparing tea. (Jd.)
gur-tig a kind of drug used
for healing or drawing sores, &c.;
^’34[g*r^?V4 rma gas rtsa tshad mkhris
nad-sel it inflames sores, cures bilious
fever.
gnl-gula quaking; shaken as
if by a strong wind :
khro-bohi §tan-stab§
mdsad-pa$ yul ehen-po geig gul-gulbyun §kad
It is said that because they assumed the
attitude of a wrathful deity, a great
eountry trembled (as if by an earth-
quake) .
gul-nag, lit. the black д’дч
gu-gul or	gug-gul nag-po, n. of a
medicine.
(ju§-pa ’Г5Т, HW, ^T<T,
яЬл fftw, ччтТя, ич, нтя, sbst.
humility, respect, reverence, devotion; also
adj. respectful, devout; very common in
the phrase gus-ptas pthyag htshal-lo, saluted
with reverence ; «’g^’q ma-gus-pa unsub-
missive, undevout;	gus-pa dan
Ьса§-ра respectfully; with dignity
and honour*;	gu§-par hgyur-ua
to be respectful; to humble one-self (Cs.)
I offer salu-
tation reverentially with the three—my
heart, speech and body : gq’q’^^q^-q^-
gus-pa chen-pos bsten-par
byin-gyi^-rlobs may the blessing be granted
to maintain the greatest devotion, gq*qv
qg^’q gus-par bsg rim-pa to behave with
respect ; g*rqv^ gus-p>ar йап туччт to
serve or attend respectfully; to listen with
respect ; g*rqvg\q to regard.
gu$-po in C. and TF. expensive,
costly, dear, v. g5*5 gud-po or $5’^
rgud-po.
gu§-so becomes very dear;
respects; worships.
ge num. for 93.
ge-wa is an auxiliary particle
signifying did (emphatically):
mche-wa^ bran kha non, ma-sohi mche-wa§
dpral-wa na yar-la lhag ge-ica by the upper
tusk he pressed on his breast, by his lower
tusk he opened asunder up to tho forehead
(Rbrom. 139).
Ge-ra n. of a country :
Ge-rahi rgyal-po she$-
pahan byun-hdug also there was one, called
the King of Ge-ra (K. du. ч 281).

224.

Gy.??? lha-pa name of a Tibetan
chief, said to have descended from the
royal lino of kings, ?.t., from Sron-bisan
sgam-po, and belonging to a place called
Ge-ra lha situated to the east of
Lhasa on the Yarn Tsang-po beyond
Chothaug.
gt-fa a kerchief for the head
hanging down behind from the shoulders.
I: ge-sar
saffron, the
corolla of a flower. There are three
kinds of ge-sar viz:—ua-ga
g(-4ir	pus-pa ge-sar
and	pad-ma ge-sar
трихит (Л/7Й.). Aec. to Cs. is
a flower ; it is said to grow in Nopal
and is called	%)ad-ma ge-sar ; acc.
to Sch. pistil, but like zc-hbru it sig-
nifies undoubtedly the organs of fructifi-
cation in general.
II: Ge-sar n. of a powerful
king ruling in Shensi in China, who on
account of his martial valour was deified
and raised to the }>osition of the God of
War. There are various accounts of him.
The people of Kham in Tibet own him
for their national war-god, while the
Mongolians say that Ge-sar was a
king of Mongolia. According to some
authors, he lived in the 7th century A.D.
According to the collection of heroic songs
called the Rgyal-drun* King Ge-sar
lived in the 8th century A.D. His origin
is, however, lost in myth.
ge-sar-gyi sgrun stories from
the works called	Aznc/ and Jang}
also extracts from the fabulous history of
Ge-sar.
ge-sar-can the lotus flower;
the filament of a lotus.
ge-sar dmar-po^ 5)glu-ipfi,
Naga Vrksa (Ж//.).
’Г’? gc-hya^ gna§ a secret abode—
used as gsafi-ska# (a mystic word)
in tho Tantra (K. g. 215).
geg$ = gag$ fqrar,
hindrance; stoppage; obstacle:
geg$-ehags’—^'&S bar-chad interruption
by an accident; danger;
to remove doubts and hindrances {Mil.);
^4	a malignant spirit causing
mischief or impediments;
4 to hinder effectually religious
doings;	four obs-
tacles to the attainment of Buddhabood:
tfq-QSj thob-pahi grogs
hgroham geg§-su hgro will you help me or
hinder mo in obtaining;
hgrub-pahi gegs impediment to the
attainment of perfection.
gel-pa tho trunk of a tree with
a spiral top:
3^ q gel-wa fin phufi flam rtsa-ua $bom
finrtsf-mo rgyas-pa the term gehca is when
the stem or thick roots of a tree grow into
a branching top.
gel-fin	a log; a post.
Gain-dar-pa
n. of a king of birds. (IT. my. % 18).
3] I: go 1. numerical sign for 123.
2. abbr. for dgu-bcu in the nineties;
go-geig 91; also	go-gni§
92, etc.
II: = in mystio language
khyu-mchog	the chief of
a herd or company {К. g. I4, 28).

225
^•*1
4J III : 1. place; room; space (prob.=
; in this sense it is usedin
mtshams med-par, without intermediate
space, t.e., close together, continuous:
hbra sna-tshogs go
mtsham$ med-par §kye$ grain of every kind
grew densely, luxuriantly:
4 go-m&hams med-par gafi-wa closely filled.
An important compound of go is found in
go-chod, the space is cut off, or filled,
m?., the matter is done with, settled; satis-
faction has been made ; colloq. also I have
got enough ; I am full:
des rgyal-wahi go-mi chod-pa by this the
victory has not yet been fully decided:
thot-bsam §gom gsum-
gyi go-chod there is intermission of hear-
ing; thinking; meditation:
q5’^*1 khycd-la go-mi-chod pahi chos doc-
trine not satisfactory to you : g^qx'|S|N'
9'^5 bu-tshab Ha §pyugs ci-phyir go-
mi-chod why should it not be sufficient that
I be banished instead of my son? 2.
place, position, rank, condition of life:
pha-yi gor in the place of his
father; go-nas according to; in
proportion to (Ja.):	rga§-na when
rank and dignity are grown old and gone;
when the position in life has been lost:
3] that is my place; my business. 3.
a way, a space, in the more general sense:
tprin-gyi go-war phyc-
na$ hoH$ have come parting the clouds:
вч’т*^a-mahi go na at the place of my
mother; with my mother (Ja.). ^’^|’q go
ldog-pa to change place, especially to turn
to the contrary (Sch,); ^5 nad-go the seat
of disease (Sell,).
go-§kab§	^ГРГ,
ягднл, interval; leisure; space;
opportunity ; in the meanwhile: qvfl^w
£$]	T^rVTq V'^q^q-^qq’^’
occasionally with companion words go-§kab§
signifies slowly, at leisure, or in power ;
just at the time: q^qKq^qS^q^S
b de-war bsdad-pahi go skab$-med there is
no chance of my sitting at ease:
dc-phyir b dag-la go-
§kab§ stsal-du gsol (A. 16) therefore I
pray for leave to avail myself of this oppor-
tunity.
go-^kal the share or portion due to
a person in accordance to his rank (Ja.).
go-khan, ^**q*pq*q go-chahi khafi-
pa arsenal (Schtr.).
Sfjgq 0o-JMroJ:=^’*V'|9r’ go-cha dan krab
coat of mail with helmet; armour, v.
go-cha.
^'^•q go-gyon-pa, go-cha gyon-
pa to wear a coat of mail, etc.; to put on
war dress.
Syn. gO-bgOS ;	^4Tq gyul
gyi cha§ shugs-pa; uro^’q^ ya-lad bgos
(Mnon.).
’fjipf go-gral or go-gra$ rank; dig-
nity (Cs.).
4]’q^’q go-bgo$ pa	the act of
equipping or arraying :=^’«‘g^q go-cha
gyon-pa to equip with armour; put on
harness, v. go-cha.
go-ca, v. go-cha.
go-cha ЧН, W, UslTV,
fWfai,	armour; harness; gear;
implements; tools;
go-cha the implement of good luck; an
amulet.
Syn.	ya-lad, *^'Jq; mtshon-
tikyob;	1ч$-$куоЬ*, lu$-sruH',
lchags-go$', shub-can;
30
226	4j-q|
dra-wa can', ^S4]^ hkhrug-go$;
ctffq lcag§-kyi bgo-ira; ^khrab; £fa] rniog*,
mgo skyob; fcsj’g rmog-shu; §^’9
Icogsshtt;	£hT3^ rmog-thur; gc/gvSJ,
khyun-thur cw\ Зрдч go-khrab (Шоп.).
^*’3Yq go-cha g yon-pa, v. ^’^,q go
gyon-pi or	go bgo$~pa.
go-cha d in beat (Schr.;
Katie. T. 139) with a ball.
a4! §v« go-chahi Skrag byed-ma.
{22 B.) (Schr.)
♦	go-chahi B^kyad-byed-ma.
(Sdir.) (22 C.)
* SfaS-j-aSaj go-chahi Rta-me hog. (Schr.)
(21 A.)
go-chahi Rdo-rje ni-ma.
(Srhr.) (20 C.)
go-chahi Rdo-rje scm$-
dpah. (19 B.)
go-chahi Rnam-tnafi. (19 C.)
♦	go-chahi Pad-ma gir-
dican. (S'dir.) (20 A.)
* ^’ЗЕа £ГЕлг§^я? go-chahi Rmo^-byed-ma.
{Schr.) (22 A.)
♦^•*5’^1’^ go-chahi Tsan-di ka. (Schr.)
{23 A.)
*	go-chahi Gfin-rje-ma.
(Schr?) (21 C.)
*	gt-chhi Пс-ru-ka nag-po.
(Schr.) (20 B.)
go-chod-po —phan-thog-po
useful; serviceable.
qiwwto don gan-byed
kyan b§grub-nuspaham mtharphyin-j)ahi mi-
ll go-chod-po zer the term go-chod-po is
applied to a man who is successful or who
accomplishes any business or duty suc-
cessfully:	mi-hdi go chotf-dam
will this man be of service ? (A. 127).
go-^nod	cummin seed
(Zam. 24).
J go-da гса-ri the Godavari river.
$4’5V44l ^5
thug$-kyi gna$ brkyad kyi-geig, be-tahi yul-
gyi [ho-thag tie sar-yod,
ho-mahi chu-mig sog$ gna$-ya
mtshan-can тай Godavari, one of the holy
rivers of Southern India, a place on its
bank near Vidharva where there is spirit-
symbol of Buddha. It contains a milky
spring (Dsam. 36).
+ Л go-dam ba n. of a drug
Syn.	yafis-pci can; ri-mo
can; «rgp’^4 ba-glaH mig\	inchog
$byin-ma;	dbafi-po bkra-wa*}
^'*5 kam-ka chen-po (Шоп.).
go-bde-wa simple; easy; that
which is easily understood:
go-bde-гса la bsam-na$ dpcr-bjod
na he uttered an example with a view to
make it easily understood (Situ. 101).
+ go-hdun, defined as
Йл,£4 tna-tshogs-sam gafi mo$-pa what you
like of different kinds.
go-hdris khycr-wa^^yv&fyx
to be friendly; intimate (A. 145).
* go-da	^7Чй«г55 Go-da
hphel-byed n. pr. (Schr.) (Ta. 2, 82).
if-w ро-ЛрЛаЯ=^Г^*« rank; place;
position :
may the blessing be accorded me
to gain the rank of an omniscient Buddha
(№l-)>
Sfq go-wa to understand; to perceive
mentally:	daH-po
pan-ti-ta kun-gyi go wa bynft first of all it
was understood by all the Bandits.
*1*1
227

go-ica	a learned, clear-
headed person;	wise men.
go-fyo or S’^f’4 by a-go-bo a kind of
vulture:	w-jpig-qv',
(jo-uohl g re-was <pi-ma shu-iva
daft, ma-shu-wahi rig$-rnam§ hju-war byed
the larynx of the vulture causes indiges-
tible meat and different kinds of food
which are not digested, to become digested
(§man.).
^Ԥ5 go-byed acc. to Jd. is a quality of
the air.
yo-fydog (go-acg)^^ go-log
misunderstand ; misapprehend; to attach
a wrong meaning (Situ. 110).
t ^’4 go-yu (Beng. Ipn) areca nut:
areca nut is the
best essence for the tee‘h and cures kidney
disease (§man.).
+ go-ra—^&^btson-ra jail; prison.
go-rim order, arrangement:
have arranged it so
as to agree with the order of things, etc.
(Situ. 101).
+	<70-n?=^’« rdsogs-pa perfected;
finished ; completed.
♦	go-re Zon=^4]’419^’CJ mnag
gshug-pa or	ran-dwaft med-pa
spontaneously ; as a matter of course;
without power to exert ono’s self in any
matter; necessarily (K. du. p 175).
Wf<4 go-la,	rgga-
nag gi sra-rtsihi rgyu-se gift-gI khu-wa 1. a
kind of gum, prob, acacia imported to Tibet
from China; ashes which have burnt with-
out ignition. 2.	lime
of burnt shell or cowries. 3. the areca nut
brought from the sub-Himalayan district
or from India is called $man go-la, i.e.,
the globular medicine;	rgya-gar
go-yu the Indian areca nut, or Зц’Ч'Ч, areca
nut from the sub-Himalaya; these two
are called ^nan-go-la (SmanT).
go-lahi-rlan
the wind which, acc. to Tibetan
astronomers, keeps the sun and the
stars moving in space :
phebs-tshog§ kyan Go-lahi
rlun-hgrosltar hgog-med-du shu your letters
should also be without let or hindrance,
like the wind which keeps the heavenly
bodies always in motion (Yig. k. 87).
go-le=.^\ga-le or dal-po
slowly.
go-sa,
n. of a town in the way to Udyana, prob,
in Ancient Kabul (S. Lam. 17.).
go-log the reverse; opposite to what
was; back again ; also for	go-su
log-pa degraded; position changed as in the
case of a superior officer subordinated, or an
inferior officer promoted to a higher posi-
tion :—dpon-po gyog master
made a subordinate or servant, or
ggog-po dpon, a servant raised to the
position of a master; ^q^g^q-q ^^-q^
4’^’S phan-par 8mra$-pa la gnod-par go-wa
Ita-bu to take a useful advice as intended
for mischief; also	opposed to
charity or misunderstand charity; ^’jgwr
reversing, misinterpreting character
or morality; 4^5’q’%*5^ bzod-pa go-log*
brtson-hgnis go-log to misunder-
stand one’s forbearance or industry; «ж
performance of the wrong
Dhyana-,	perverse or distorted
knowledge or wisdom; ^'1snifi-rje
go-log tired of showing sympathy or
compassion;	byams-pa go-log
tired of loving.

228
^4*51
or rank; office;
dignity: g	^О’14
bh-пш mkhan-po rgyal-blon sogs-kyi go-sa
Ita-bu-la like unto the position of the
lama*, professors, officers, etc.
4 qjyfl gau-ta-ma — ^*)** Gohu-ta-ma
n. of a family in
Ancient India (Л7. du, 5 133); n. of Buddha
S'akyamuni.
^4j gog in IF. for ^’25 gofi-po a lump.
чо| gog-thal ashes; burnt fragments.
^q gog-pa 1. to crawl. 2. to crumble
off; to scale off (of the plaster of a wall)
^ZJ #o0-po==^4]'w§c;q ^hig-ral byun-wa
or	nam^-chag byufi-wa dilapi-
dated ; damaged; in ruins; worn out :
SfF*'^4fq a temple in ruins:	a
chorten in ruins:
there are some who even die worn
out when they crawl about (as little
children) (Khrid. 13).
*^TQ’I4T^V2N go-bzlog lhan-skyes (Schr.)
(30 A.).
go-lihi ri-mo ггг^<тг (Kaiас,
I. 5$ 58) a circle; circular.
gon 1. price; value; also ^’чс. gofi-
thafi	gon-tshad;
nor-rdsas kyi rm gon-gi (shad the price
or valuation of things or property : Sjk’
555’^ gon dpyad-pa to apprize; to fix a price:
3fc‘qjq’q gon brgyab-pa or ^'g4|’q gofi
sgrig-pa id. In Sikkim : “ di gon ka dz6
mo" what is the price of it ? (Snd. НЬк.)
2.=^ tfeft or g^ 8non or K4] * thag-ma
also as klad	the above; in space
as well as in time (in Jl7kuw§, e.g., it is used
as a sbst. signifying elevated, alpine pasture
grounds).	go ft dan mt him,
gon-dan hdra-war, goft-bshin,
gon-mtshun$ as above (men-
tioned) ; like the above or aforesaid similar
to the above.
gon-hkhod stated above;
^S*a gofi-du yod-pa existing above; 4^’
gofi-dtt gsal war, set forth or elu-
cidated above; gofi-gi the former; tho
above;	gon-gi de rnams those
preceding;	jfa’q gon-gi sites $mo$-
pa the above statement that;
goii Bod-kyi rgyal-po the ancient or
former Tibetan kings;	gon-
gi fyad-pa It ar as has been stated above;
доп-du over it; above;
gofi-du hphags-pa taken upwards;
gone upwards; improved; progressed;
^’35 доп-du phud placed in a position of
dignity; kept on the top;	gon-du
hpho-ua,	spiritually developed,
lit. gone upwards;	gofi-du $byor-
wa ready;	gon-du mos-pa
the above mentioned; gofi-na on
it; above;	gofi-na$ from above;
goft-nas gofi-du	more
and more; higher and higher. 3jk q gofi-pa
wfa very much (Lex.); one above; the
senior (one) = ?3jk*^ §go доп-du over tho
door;	yab-kyi goft-du hda$
died before his father; dehi gon-du
before that or that time;
ma-tshogs gofi-du before they assembled or
congregated together.
Goft-gkar-rdsofi, n. of a fort
and town on the Tsang-po, where con-
victs are generally sent for punishment.
It is situated S -E. of Lhasa, in the
district of Mal-gro.
Gofi khri-bdal, hod-hbar
n. of a Bon saint believed to exist in astral
229
form in the north-west quarter. (6r.
Bon. Z),
^‘3	= gon-bu MWT a
meeting; assembly; fame; renown; glo-
bular.
gon-phud-pa=^'*№\4 goA-du
phud-pa to lift up; to ride up.
Srjk'Scw gofi-pheb$, от	gon-gi
bkah-phebsy the instructions from higher
authorities; also those arrived or received
earlier.
Зр’ч gon-wa in Ж. collar:
gon-wa na§ hdsin-pa to seize by the
collar.
^’5 gofi-bu 1. fa*?, ufw, <fn,
HT<t a globular mass, lump, heap;
gon-bu-can	clot; clotty; in
lump; in heaps;	gon-bu so-so
sfaagT, catarrh or cold;
gon-bur-by as made into globular mass or
lump. 2. agglomeration of atoms
dri ro reg
gzugs bshi-§te rdul-rdsa$ brgyadhdus gon-u-a
yin acc. to the Buddhist metaphysical con-
ception that which produces the sensation
of smell, taste, touch and sight is formed
of the following eight atoms:—(1)
rdulphra-rab, (2)	rdul-phran, (3)
leags-rdul, (4)	chu-rdul, (5)
ri-boft-rdul, (6) ^’^4 lug-rdul, (7) 5Ц'
^ч glaA-rdul, (8)	ni-mahi
hod-zer-gyi rdul (Sorig. 7.)
gon-ma 'sufk,
superior; the former; the first-named;
gofi-ma-che or	gon-ma chen-po
the most high;	Rgya-nag gon-
ma the Emperor of China;	gofi-
ma-rnam§ the gods and superior beings.
gon-ma che drug, the six superior
things of the 3^’3 Bon-po are the follow-
ing :—gsan-wa hdus-pa mysti-
cism; sti-ghar*,	mi-lus
bsam legs ;	yi-fe§ $nin-po;
§nan-wa mdog-can.
Gon-ma Chen-lun rgyal-
po the Tibetan name of the fourth Man-
chu Emperor Kyun-lun is	Lha-
skyon rgyal-po, the king protected by the
gods.
He became
very powerful, was devoted to Buddhism,
invited the Pan-cheu Bin-po-che called
Tashi Lama Pal-dan Ye-s'o (friend of
the first Governor General of India,
Mr. Warren Hastings). He erected
many temples and chaityas, and his life
was a record of miracles. He reigned
upwards of sixty years.
gon-ma mchod-yon the Dalai
Lama being the spiritual lord and the
Emperor of China being the temporal
lord:
gon-ma
mchon-yon-gyi thugs-rjer hdir-yan htsho-
kham§ bde-shin hphrin-las sltabs-hdegs la
Ihod-med-du mchi§ by the grace of the
Grand Lama and the Emperor (of China)
here too I being in good health have
been in the discharge of public service
without relaxation (Yig. k. 18).
gon-ma bshin = %*№'*$fi snon-ma
bshin as before; as the above men-
tioned ; like the aforesaid; as the previous
one.
gon-mohi gon-ma	a
superior’s superior; also more and more;
more in future.

230

Sjk’# i. gon-mo the upper one; ^’q^’
lag-pahi gon-mo	tho middle
finger. 2. tho white grouse, but applied
to various birds in Tibet of tho Tctraonidee
family : lha-bya gofi-mo is the Crossoptilon
Tibetanum, and gong-gyag the Ithaginis
geojfryoi, etc. (Snd. Hbk. pp. 170-1).
ч byihu co-ka gut's
kyis gofi-mo la smras-pa tho two little
Сока birds said to tho grouse (Rdsa.).
3ffi’-q8ta‘X’$’	gofi-
mohi $a-yis ro-tsa chu-ser mo-nad sei the
flesh of the grouso stimulates tho sexual
desire and also cures discharge of whites:
gofi-mohi mjug sgrohi
mo-nad sei tho feathers of the grouso
cure female diseases:
gofi-mohi $go-fia§ me-lhahi gdon-nad
gso the eggs of the grouso cure illness
caused by tho demons of the fire-god.
Sjk'Srjpq gon-mo sreg a pheasant, Phasi-
aniis decollates.
^’8 gofi-shu=Jfc*i$ gofi-du she 1. as
stated or prayed above. 2. a paper lantern
(Jiz.); in colloq. Tibetan “ gam-shu” a
lantern.
г7оЯ-Лог7=^ ^ Itag-hog
upper and lower; gshi-gofi folio;
gofi-ske gshogs a title of honour,
signifying his highness, excellence, etc.
Sjk’Xor^ gofi-rol-du=t£'^'^$fia-rol-du or
^’4 snon-la, before, prior to:
^'Xq’^beforo the war took place.
gofi-la above.
gofi-sa one in supreme autho-
rity or position; the sovereign.
^Vw^yq gofi-sa yas ph yin-pa
ya-rabs gofi-ma those superior persons
gone before; persons in superior or more
exalted stations.
45 god loss; damage;	god
hgyer-tca to suffer loss;	loss of
money and property; Sfrf’ god-kha,
norphyugs la nad
sna-tshogs byufi-nas fi-wa loss in property
or in cattlo by disease and othor accidents :
sgom §grub ci-byas kyafi
god-med there was no loss whatever
whether he performed meditation or
propitiation.
^5’* god-ma^&y^ hjig-pa W, чщ;
fear, loss.
gon the common gourd; pump-
kin in ТГ. (Jd.).
gon-pa (3^’q) to put on clothes,
shoes, etc.; ^'q*Vq^ gon-pa hdra-ica
re-re tho cost of a sot of anything to wear
(Rtsii.); Q to put a cap on the
head. 2. coat, clothing (Sch.).
gon-snam (3’^) serge or broad-
cloth for making robes, etc. (Rtsii.).
gon-phyifi felt used for wearing.
Чф gon-lham=&ty* gyon-lham shoes
to put on.
gob-non (spelling uncertain) in
7K. to tease; vex; irritate (Ja}.
Зрт gom-pa tn<, 4^,	жн
apace; stop: *j*’*?fa rkafi-hgros to make
a step; Sprq^vqgom-pa bor-tca topace:
gom-pa bdun Ъог-гса to
make seven steps (as a ceremony, which
may also be counted equivalent to a
religious pilgrimage, the actual perform-
ance of which is not possible).
^•q gom-pahi stabs any peculiar
manner of stepping whether in proces-
sion or in dancing.
Sffwsq
231

gom-hgros walking in step like
soldiers or a procession:
hgro-na gom-hgro$ hkhyor in walking he
missed the measure of the paces*
gom-§tans the manner of
pacing; walking in measured step.
gom-gsum Тччт< three paces ; fig.
the heavens, earth and the nether region.
q gom-gsum-pa one with three
steps.
gom-gsum gnon, 04kyab-
hjug	a name of
Vishnu when he deceived Bali in his
Bdmana or Dwarf incarnation (Mnon.).
gom$-pa 1. wnqTH one prac-
tised in any work; skilled; wont; Jfa’
q-«r3jwq practising or practised in the art
of reading ; ^jwq*^ goms-pa-can ^<?t
one who is skilled or practised in any art,
Sffwq’vgs'4 goms-par byed-pa one
who is skilled or accustomed ;
gom§-par bya$-pa	one who has
practised or studied.
gor or	ркупд§-дог=2^^\
nor-nad murrain (A. 103}.
gor-btt 1.	quadrangle.
2.	wisdom.
ЧЧ’я дот-ma ^'<4’^’*rs*rq rdo-la she-sa
bya$-pa a term of respect for stone, or
a general name for stone (Cs.); large and
small pebbles ; stones ; rubble ; boulder
stones (Sch.).
gor-ma chag—^fc'W^wq
gor-ma bkum-pa,	the-tshom med
or	nes-pa	certain; sure;
indubitable:	de-hbyu^ca
gor-ma mchag-go his coming is quite cer-
tain.
+ ^КЙ gor-mo—\ rdo,
sdafi-wahi sem$-la yanhjug gor-
mo is also applied to signify an irritable
or angry temper.
i ^'^'*4 gor-fi-$a,	a kind of
sandal wood.
^’q gol-ica, v. hgol-ica.
доз w, ЧП*Г,
sffa, uft-
cover ; dress ; garment.
The common word for coat or clothing;
there are seven kinds of stuffs for priests,
&c.:	bal-go$ woollen cloth ;
ga-nahi gos cloth of flax;	zar-
mahi доз linen;	du-khu lahi доз
silk cloth; wq^rgras-bal-gyi доз
cotton cloth; 'fp^qS'qfk ко tam-pahi
доз jute cloth;	ni-hog-gi gos
European cloth, &c.
доз-kyi rgyuhi fybyun-khtins b§tau-pa
enumeration of the materials for cloth:—
jfa’S srin-bu silk-worm ;
g,Y/qql*rq'^ZIlN гл lag dan ri-dbag§-kyi
spu-dan pags-pa §na-tshogs various hairs
and skins of sheep, goats and wild animals;
bark or fibres ;	fruits;
zar-ma sogs fibres, etc.; ЭДЖ
газ-bal sogs wool, cotton, etc.;
du-khu-lahi mi ft silk cloth, satin, etc. ;
gos-gsar new cloth; dri-med
clean cloth ; ^’^’Й gos-so-mo new or
fresh cloth; dri-та can dirty cloth ;
^•|c*q доз rnin-pa old, worn out
clothes; aS*q zad-pa or hrul-po rags
or ragged dress ; §tod-gos
upper garment of Buddhist monks ; 3’^
bla-go$=^'^ §nam-§byar the sacred rai-
ment containing thirty-two patches;
§tod-gyog$ upper cover ;
smad-gyogs or 85’^ $mad-go$ lower gar-
ment; qy$’2r*| ban-tsa-li-ka an apron of
five colours;	hdoms-dkri$ folds
round loins like the dhuti of the Hindus;

232
i^3j|
SiS’Sl]*1 §mad-dkri§ the back folds of dhuti\
smad-fam under cloth or garment;
or the petticoat-like clothes
worn by the Tibetan monks; rgyan-go$
fine dressing clothes; rgyim-go$ an every-
day coat (Jd.) ; cho$-go§ clerical garb or
garment ; pho-go$ male dress ; Ыа-до§ an
upper garment, a kind of toga ; mo-go$ a
woman’s gown ; gzab-go§ holiday or gala
clothes ;	go§ gу on-pa to put on
dress ;	go§ hbud-pa to take off
dress ; go§ brje-wa to change dress
or clothes; ^N'q^^’q go$ brtscg$-pa to put
one garment over tho other ; ^prq^’q g°§
bteg-pa to tuck up, by drawing the front
skirts under the girdle ; ^pr^q’q go$ Idab-
pu to lay or fold a coat together.
gos-kyi kkyim (rrts) a
tent; a diseased man’s wardrobe ;
go$-kyi gar	a bamboo or bar to
hang or keep the dress ;	gos-
kyii chog qes-pa	one who has
enough of clothes ;	go^-kyi
pdan-fin	a rope or string to hang
clothes.
go$-dkar white dress;
go$-dkar can	ono dressed in
white; the Goddess Sarasvati.
^’§5 r7O5-?^tZ yarn or silk thread.
Sprp’qj’wq go^-kha brgya-tham-pa one
hundred breadth-measure of blankets.
go§ khum$-pa ^Ker«q^’»r§E/q
a cloth folded as to look like waves or
winkles.
^’3^ go^-gur a tent of cloth or satin;
9ЛТ* phyin-gur a tent of felt ; g §bra or
re-gur tent of yak-hair blanket or
felt.
go§ hgyed-pa	the
folds in the garment of a monk; one who
folds clothes.
go$-grum a square rug made of
Chinese satin.
go§-$gab skirt or flap of a coat or
robo.
go$-$gam box ; chest or press for
clothes; wardrobe.
go$-$fton-can	1. one
dressed in a blue dross; the-sky. 2. 3*4’^
4^qIChag-na Dorje Bodisattva^
%tob§-bzaft, ww the brother
of Krishpa said to bean acatdra of Vishpu.
3.	gzah §pcn-pa the planet Saturn.
go§-cau a kind of sandal.
go§-can 1. 4^il(Schr.; Lebensb.
86) a tablet; a piece of cloth. 2.
go$-cau tsan-dkar qfc<hT satin.
go$-chen silk fabrics; Chinese
satin, of which the different kinds known
in Tibet are:—hor-go^ thon-thi^
nor-bu chab bdun-ma,
mdsod-go^	$kyin-khab (Kineob) em-
broidered satin; ju§,	rgyan
bshi-ma,	rgyan drug-nia,
hbrug ri$-ma,	fybrug brgya-ma.
go^chen-po =	du-ku
lahi ra$ silk-cloth (Mnon.).
go^-mchog the finest satin or
silk-cloth.
Syn. ^N’q^q go$-bzan\	kun-
dgahi go§;	srub$-med go$ (Mrlon.).
go§-no ntujqw a purchased dross; a
cloth fit to be purchased.
go§-rnin=i^^^go$ rnin-pa or
bem-po in Ld. dialect, an old coat
or dress.
Syn. zad-po\ ^’2» hrul-po*, q
dug-pa (Mnon.).
Sfprq|^ gos-brftan	a mendi-
cant who puts on a ragged garment; a
ragged dress.
233
gos-thnft trousers.
3]*гячч gos-mthah skirt of dress orrobo.
gos dug-pa old cloth ; ragged
cloth; torn cloth;	go§	dri-ша-
can dirty clothes;	go$	dri-wed
clean cloth.
3j*T4^q gos-hdug or 4’^ chu-gos bath-
ing cloth.
1. gos-pa fHH, pf. of bgo-wa,
to apply on; to paste or rub. 2. a
liniment.
gos-phyed phu-luft sleeveless
robe or garment (in Sikk.).
Sfcrg gos-phra fine-silk ; muslin.
^’§5 gos-byed sfdufa gain; accept-
ance ; performance; honour.
gos-bral *nr, naked ; with-
out dress or cover for the body.
	gos sbyed-pa	one
concealing his mendicant’s clothes.
gos-min a roof; veil; film
over the eyes; multitude.
gos-med	fWfw
a devotee who has cut off worldly ties.
gos-dmar sde	classes
of Buddhists who are dressed in red.
gos-team satin.
gos-btsems nes-pa, =
badly-sewn clothes.
gos-shig-pa ’erfn^n a wave, a
plait or fold in a garment.
gos zad-po worn-out clothes.
go$-za$-kyi htshos-ma rfz-
a female mendicant clothed in suit-
able dress; one who lives doing nothing
more than eating and dressing.
gos-zegs worn out clothes; old
olothes (Rtsii, 5).
gos-yug piece or cloth or satin,
enough for making a robe.
gos-lag colloq. (in Sikk.)
“ ko-lak) ” a coat; dress; clothes.
gos-ser can, uhrpan; a name
of Vishpu, one covered with a yellow
cloth.
go§-lhod-pa to let go a robe
which has been grasped :
gos-
nas hjus-par thon zer slu-rin sprod-zer sran-
gsum sprad-de go$ Ihod sgo-bcad one said:
“see you are held fast by your clothes ; ”
and he said: fix a price for the ensnare-
ment; ” and three srang being allotted,
the cloth was let go and the door shut.
(G, Sndg,),
go§-po or q gyos-po Ш
father-in-law; W’cjjJ wqgos-p>os bsrufts-
pa	protected by one’s father-in-
law.
gya num. used in the abbreviated
form, in the place of Wfi'Sbrgyad-cu 80;
3’^1 gya-gtig 81; З'4^ gya-gnis 82;
З'4!^ gya-gsum 83; З’ч^ gya-fyihi 84; 3 g
<7У«-/л«85; 3 VI gya-drug 86; 3 ^ gya-
bdun 87; 3’q35 gya-brgyad 88; 3'53 gya-
dgu 89.
3'i дуа-дуи=*№^ gyon-can w5
dissimulation; crookedness; intrigue;
secret machinations:
q*T de-nid gya-gyu med-pahi rnam-pa
yin-pas he was a person absolutely free
from deceitful intentions.
a’d^’3’5’^34 gnodsems daft $fa-wahi gya-
gyu sogs malice and beguiling intrigues,
eto.
31
3’^1
234
3 S дуа-ду'л-сап
crafty, deceitful, fraudulent.
3’S'SV4 gya-gyu byed-pa to intrigue ;
to plot.
3’g^?ff gya-gyur hgro that which goes
not in the direct way; a frog; smoke ; a
snake; a river:	gya-gyur hgro-
wa serpentine-motion; to move cir-
cuitously.
gya-ma gyu (meandering of rivers,
&c.) quiet; calm; gently flowing along
(Ja.). Of a man: cautious; scheming so
that ono does not know what to think of
him.
Э'И gya-fiet marvellous; inexplica-
ble, of men, occurrences, &c.
3 gya-tho=\'$\ rna-rgyan
ornament for the ear; an ear-ring.
3<ZS дУа^° a breast plate.
*	дуа-под $паЯ beau-
tiful ; of nice appearance.
gya-nom $nan-wa n. of a
celestial mansion, the residence of the
gods.
*	дуа пот-pa 9
phun-sum tshogs-pa
dwah-thatiche-wa one in abundance;
in plenty ; possessed of wealth and power.
an
gya-pa or 3q gya-wa=>?F&'4'
Яат$-ра WB spoiled; degenerated. Acc.
to Cs. deformed; disfigured ; having lost
his or her former beauty.
3*^^ gya-tsom or З’У* gya-rtsam
(to become dry ?) acc. to Cs. • haste;
hurry; rashness.
351
+ 3’^ gya-tshom9Wttl; ma
brtags-pa momentary; unstable; without
deliberation; consideration:
gya tshom-du hgro-war mi-byaho should
not go all on a sudden, without delibera-
tion.
gya-tshom-can 1. a bard
of the Magadha tribe. 2. ono in doubt.
33 дуад-ра=ъф\'иЬг1ад-ра
destroyed; ruined; acc. to Cs.diminished,
v. ч Ъдуад-ра.
дуаЯ or §*' дуг Я clay stamped
into moulds, and frequently usod as build-
ing material in Spiti, Ladak and other
parts of Tibet; 3^'^ дуаЯ-tkor earthen
wall round an estate or village; З^’Й*
дуаЯ-sgrom pis£ mould.
3е*’дуаЯ-tse pise terrace; wall of dry
earth in Ladak.
3^ дуаЯ-га cattle-yards constructed
of clay or mud.
дуаЯ-rim pise layer or one layer
of pise, i>., as much as is stamped in at a
time, about one ell in height; this fre-
quently serves for a measure of the depth
of the snow (Jd.).
3^’Хч gyafi-rh fresco or wall painting;
phug-pahi дуаЯ-ris sogs-
la in the frescoes, &c., of the caves (Ya-
scl. 45).
2JS $Уа- a tampion; a man
of great physical strength; an athlete: S’
^‘3^’$ЧАЭД da duti gyad-kyi rtsal hgran
let us compete once more in athletic dex-
terity. 35*3’*EvjW gyad-kyi hdsin
the mode of seizing
in wrestling; |35’3’$*р< gyad-kyi $ид$&$
prowess or strength of a champion.
235
gyad-rdo 1. giant stone; a quoit.
2. n. of a tribe in Tibet.
gyad дуий-ро
(Schr.; Lebensh. 98) n. of a bar-
barous tribe.
gyam a shelter; a recess in a rock,
large and wide but not deep; SVTS* brag-
gyam a shelter under a rock: *15'3*
gyam a grotto beneath a conglomerate
rock; a shelter in the steep side of a rock;
phoft-gyam or pha-boft gyam
a shelter under a beetling rock (Ja.); 3^’q
gyam-bu a little cover or shelter (C$.).
gyar-gyofl, probably 3VP
gyod-kha god-pa, loss, damage (Ja.).
gyi for 3) gt, after <5, ”, \ ®<, v. 9
kyi.
§iF Gyi-glifi Kulti, n. of a place.
3'F' Gyi-ljaft n. of a place in Tibet.
Gyi-than n. of a place and also
of a tribe in E. Tibet:
in the middle (country) are the two, viz.,
Ro-hje and Rag-$i*,
§mad-na Uli-nag Gi-than gni$ in the lower
country are Uli-nag and Gyi-than (Yig.).
gyi-na-wa 1. coarse; poor;
miserable, of food, clothes, &c.:
a miserable, starving life. 2. unsteady;
fickle (Sch.).
gyi hphyo, in
V/ gcam-ya$ bgrafi-ya$ gyi-hpho dan, n. of
a number inconceivably large (Ya-sel.
57).
gyi-nah% дуай — ^'ЧЦ'Ц
$nom la$-pa, or	la§-ka chcr-ma
thub-pa, state of inactivity, idleness:
log cho$ tham$-cad
gyi-nahi gyan la b^kyur threw all heretical
doctrines into the abyss of inaction.
(A. 158.)
g-Sk gyi-liti name of a good breed
of horses from Amdo where there are
twelve different breeds, §’5^ gyi-lin and
gnam-sa being the best among them
gyi-Ий chu-rta $йоп-
po = K№'§ quick-silver (Sman. 118). 3’«fc’
gyi-Ий chu-rta dkar-po—
q hdsin-pa dkar-po n. of a mineral
medicine, probably mercury. (Sman. M7.)
Эч gyig caoutchouc; India rubber.
gyig-$ift or ЗТ1&’ gyig-sdoti
caoutchouc tree (Sikk.).
Gyin n. of a deity, prob.
Kin-к an.
gyin-mo in W. gently sloping;
gradually descending or subsiding.
9У™> V. 5^’ kyin.
gyuuAag amalgam; 3*'«^-
to gild in the fire. (Schtr.)
Gyim-дий
Rin-chen $pun$-pa n. of an astrological
work.
ga-Sjc gyim-fifi, Хч'Й rol-mo
music, cymbal.
gyls 1. instead of 5^ kyi$, after
tho letters na, та, га, «I la. 2.
imp. of ^35’4 bgyid-pa, work honestly;

236
•du

behave well; do (so);	drafi-pur-
gyi$ do it straight: ’K^‘4 Ql/ii-pg, JX do
or let him do.
* S’4	Ькиг-ica to
honour; to esteem.
5е*дуиЛ-ro, v. gyoft-ra.
gynr imp. and pf. of
gyur-du	gyur-i
chug.
gyur-na wufreRT if it so hap-
pened; if it became so.
jvqS'^'q gyur-pahi rnam-pa ufwnr
anything changeable; subject to change.
3’3 gye-gu gw crookedness; curve;
hunch; hump; crooked back; З’З^’З^
gye-gur gynr-pa double hump-back;
met. a Bactrian camel.
3’^ Gye-gor n. of a Bon-po deity.
Gye-re n. of place on the Tsang-po,
to the south-east of Lhasa: 3’^’4Gye-re
Lha-pa n. of a very old noble family
of Tibet.
5,c' vi/efl< v- sb май.
3S'a gyed-pa, v. *35’4 hgyed-pa.
^p\\gyen-du up; upward; uphill :3V
gyen-du-hgro ’згцгн, ^[ЧсГИ going
or flowing upwards; climb up ; 3V
3’X gyen-gyi-dri fragrance; sweet
scent; fragrant; 3V^’4£’*q gyen-du ^Ца-
= у ar Ita-ica	to look
upwards.
gyen-rgyu 3^S’9,4I gyen-rgyuhi
bu-ga (P’S^ ? kha-dafi-$na) the mouth and
the nose through which the wind passes
upwards or downwards; gvj*’*3 gyen-
rgyuhi ndhu n. of a disease (Med.).
дуеп~тдуи that runs up-
wards ; fire; names of the five vital (xpqr-
дтд) winds in tho human body.
to gallop uphill;
to pass upwards; to climb up.
3V*5 gyen-ehad in W. (opp. to *v
*5 man-chad) 1. the upper part of a coun-
try; 5’^T3^’aS Pu-rig Gyen-chad, the
Upper Purig (JS.) 2 an ascent.
avv№q gyen-du hdcg$-pa to lift
high; to praise.
gycn-du hdren drawing
upwards; also marriage.
SV^l^ gyen-du brd$i$-pa
to turn up; to cock (a hat or cap).
gV^’V*41 gyen-du lus-pa to keep above
(water).
’SV^4! Gyen-mig f4W the second
of the seven lower regions under the
earth.
з^ч^’25 gzar-po a steep ascent.
gV^S4!^ gyen-fydog-pa to vomit.
gV^’y^ gyen-la drafi-po in W\
perpendicular; vertical.
3^ дуегу v. S5^‘4 dgyer-ua.
3*’4^я gyer-tegom the kind of medita-
tion practised by the Bon-po.
gyer-lin 5 rta a high
breed horse, or pony.
З*’ gye^ — ^^ 80-sor, v. ^3’4 hgye-ica.
4 3^’^ gyes-brjes <s<?r raised up; mag-
nanimous ; noble.
g*i’4 gye^-pa to analyse, resolve,
separate; to split asunder.
9*^^ gyo-dum=z*[^ ka-ra щфс,
1. rngar. 2. potsherd. 3. brick tile (Seh.).
S^|
237

3# дуо-то 1. gravel; grit. 2.
potsherd. 3. = 3’П дуе-тдо clay vessel.
Ч|Я|’Ц gyog-pci crooked; curved: ^*33
rkafi-gyog bent or crooked leg.
33*3 50/0/7-po left-handed; awkward
(&A.).
33^ 9У°93 for 39У°№ cannon; a
large gun.
3C’ gyon -want; need; indigence : 3*’
gyon hkhur-ica to be reduced to
want.
3^’^ gyoft-po
dkah-ica crooked; rough; hard to under-
stand; Г 3^*3 kha gyon-po hard-mouthed
(?>., pulling at the reins);	3^’3 sem§
gyon-po harsh; resembling a horn or
hide that can hardly be made soft ;
ш gyon-po a crooked man; an
obstinate man (A. 13i) ; ^З'ЗГ^’З $kad
gyon-po imperfect language ; ^3’3Ц’3 tshig
gyon-po impolite words; 52ГЗЦ‘ dgna У У on
a hard, cruel, dangerous enemy.
3^’q дуоп-гса ; F’3^ kha gyoft-
che very rude; impudent (Ja.).
3*’5’4 gyon-ru-ica	rough.
+	sa-shag a
film of dirt, formed of dust and other
substances, on the surface of water; scum.
SF'< gyofi-ro dried body; a mummy
(Sch.).
3S tfW, v- bgyod-pa.
SS'P gyod-kha remorse; quarrel ;
law-suit.
35'3^ gyod-gshi^^^Z'^ hkhrug-
pahi rtsa-wa the basis or grounds of a
quarrel or fight:	35’3^ the
last is the ground of contention between
lust and passion.
gyon-pa qfcfwH, xrfkfrn,
to put on ; to dress; to wear : з\ч $4Г«г
gyon-pa lu^-la gyon-pahi go$
putting on the garment that one wears :
3^| yyon-rgya materials for clothing.
3ЧЗ	gnab§-pa or
na-bzah w the garment or dress to be
worn.
$У°1 green shoots of leaves
or twigs ; 3*r5 gyol-po	a blue-
necked jay.
•ь 3^'^ 1 : gyos-рю	wife’s
father; father-in-law :	4ZJX-
lf^<f protected by the father-in-law*.
3N’^ gyo$-mo mother-in-law; the
matron of a family; also any old lady of a
family: 3^’g3 gyos-zgyug parents-in-law.
5J gra (da) one of the six early tribes
of Tibet:	*£Г§’$*г
§3bod-mi mched-pa se-rniu Idon st on daft
gra hbru-§te ru^-drug zer, the six tribes :—
Jlbru, Gra, Ston, Ldon, Rmu and fie (ori-
ginated from) the five Tibetan brothers
(bearing the same names) (<7. ZaH.).
gra-rgyas thick and abundant (as
of the mane on the neck of the lion, horse
etc.) :	sho-grod
bkal-dafi gcan-gzan gra-rgya$ hdra (the
land is well-preserved) as curds carried in
a sheep’s paunch or like the thickly-grown
mano of wild animals (youth in good
circumstance is also so described) :
kho gra-rgya§-po hdug he is very
bright and cheerful (Jig-).
Wl	238
HTSg gra-bgrig to make proper pre-
paration or arrangement or equipment
for any business, &c.
Н]1|ЧГ£’ <7r^ sgrig-pv everything put in
order; also looking neat and clean.
g-fcajq-q gra-chag$-po 1. nice and
smooth or glossy; very fine; fit and out-
wardly appearing nice. 2. appropriate;
elegant; looking well (Л. 126).
3'4^ gra-dol abbr. of tho two names of
places called Lho-gra (Lho-da) andNang-
dol (Rtsii. 25).
g*?w gra~$dcbs proper order, arrange-
ment ; also	mi-maft kha-§debb
uniform deposition :
the arrangement in the front and
of the right and left sides (Rtsii.).
gra-pad 1. n. of a great Lama who
is said to have unearthed many Buddhist
religious and medical works. 2. a net
before tho window to prevent passers-by
from looking into the room. 3. carvings
inwrood;	gro sog&
gra pad kyi gin phug rig* films and
holknved pieces of wood with carvings,
etc. (Rtsii.).
gra-phub, g Vsgra-daft phub
the bristles of barley grain and its chaff:
cs
5]’^ Gra-phyi (tfa-chyi) and g'^‘ Gra-
nan (da-naft) are names of twFo villages in
Lho-kha (Rtsii.).
Gra phyi tshoft-hdu$ n. of a
great mart of trade in Lho-kha during the
11th century A.D. (A. 90).
W4 gra-sbug^ also called
tgya-nag gi §bug-cha, a musical instrument
of Chinese make, perhaps the cymbal:
g’Sg’fc'K'K gra-sbug cha-re-re the cymbal
each pair (Rtsii.).
5]’Я gra-ma (ta-ma) ftirft,
1. awm, beard, bristle, the ears of cereals
and wild grasses have:
“when the fruits of wheat and barley
spring forth, to those w’hich сото in points
like tho Poa grass, tho namo of bearded
grain is given?’ Tho term	hbru
gra-ma-can, bearded, awned plants, is opp.
to	bbru gaft bu-сащ leguminous
plants. 2. trellis-work, lattice. 3. a tree
or shrub, probably tho Tibetan furze,
Caragana versicolor.
gra-ma
uanis gra-zur mi maft gruA-po rnam-dag ni
in tho (irregular cornered) cell many
learned and holy men lived (Jig. 36).
д*к^ Gra-ma che n. of a king of ancient
timo ;	mi-la§ §kal-ldan
gra-ma che among mon tho blosscd Gra-
ma-che (Tfy.).
д’З’ч gra-zur (tfa-zur) nfe the corner or
junction of sides also called grwa.
g’^gsra gra lcg§-pa (ta leg-pa) or g'*‘
gra ma-leg$-pa the hairs of wild
animals such as tiger or leopard, &c., when
thick and glossy aro called gra-leg§-pa.
5] I: grwa (ta) 1. angle ; corner;
side	Grwa is quarter or
direction 2. lap; lappet; extremity; 4pr
§’3 gos-kyi-grwa coat-tail :
Lo-tsa-wa$
cho$-go$ kyi grwa-na§ bzuft-ste bfum$-pa$
kyaft ma-gnan though the Lo-tsa-wa wept
seizing the lappet of his garment, yet
he (Atis'a) would not bestow it.
239
№l|
II: a school; Д3’5| klog-grwa a read-
ing school (Cs.) ; $gom-grwa a school
for meditation; E3^'5| sftag$-grwa a school
for mystical Buddhism (Cs.);	hdul-
grwa a training school; seminary; JH’SJ
$man-grica a medical school;	rtsi§-
gnea a school where mathematics is taught;
«>3’^ yig-grtca a writing school (Cs.).
Я/Г* grwa-khan vuh 1. top-
house; a dome. 2. school-house, some-
times also monk’s residence.
Sj'H^ grica-grans (la-dan) the number
of candidtae monks in a monastery.
grwa-thaft (da-than)
corner or nook in a plain.
Tq grwa-pa(ia-pa) 1. a school hoy ;
a scholar; disciple. 2. generally a monk-
pupil or novice belonging to a monastery.
grica-dpon schoolmaster; chief la-
pa or monk.
ST|3 grwa-phrug a little boy who reads,
gj'ak* grwa-tshaft (ta-tshafi)
school where monks are instructed in sacred
literature ; a section in a great monastery,
where the monks belonging to one parti-
cular school of studies live together.
grica-tshogs (ta-tshog) a congre-
gation or convention of monks.
grwa-bshir (ta-shor) ^git^S in
the four corners: the real meaning accord-
ing to Tibetan authors is чд«п<$3, on the
four sides of a house.
STS* дггса-zur a corner room or monk’s
cell"
grwa-sa (la-sa) a monastery;
S|’4r^’Ei grwa-sa chen-po (la-sa chen-po)
great departmental school attached to
large monastery;	' Vi wdshan-nid
grica-sa shig a school where the Buddhist
metaphysics is taught.
grwa-ti plate; dish in Ld. (Jd.).
33’?^' grag-stoft echo; described as 53'
brag-cha Ita-bu ston-ntd kyi
sgra, a name for anything of empty sound
as an echo from a rock: skye-me$ gray-
st on tshig-gi na-ro sgrogs an echo without
any real existence proclaims a loud cry of
words (A. 14); la shes bya-tva grag-stoft
snan-pahi glu-dbyafis a low noiseless refrain
is called lo (A. 146):
«to,	khyed-kyi grag-ston
bsgrags-pa yi§ ; kho-bohi blo-gro§ ga$-war
bya§ the echoes (or reverberations) of the
sounds you sent forth have split my senses
(llbrom. F10).
grag-pa or 33^q grags-pa l.=
sgra hbyind-pa hr the tone; pitch
of a sound or voice. 2. fame ; noise;
rumour; talk. 3. the principal or most
distinguished amongst several persons
(Jd.). 4. occasionally=^33q-
ffrag$ fw hope; contempt.
i : grags-pa 1. acc. to Jd. to
bind or fasten up a load; so also in the
colloq. 2. pf. of *33'4 hgrag-pa.
II: зга, 4rfwrT, ^fn, WTWT,
НЛ, WTH glory; also fame,
reputation, character by report; дз^'чх^’ц
notoriety; ill name; bad repute; rumour;
report:	the report of it
spread, was circulated (in most cases it
signifies good name, renown): §y<rsS’33*r
§nan-pa daft grags-pas
sahi $left tham$-cad khyab-pa the whole
earth was filled with his fame and renown;
^’33* snan-grag$ reputation.
|	240	5F4J
^^'^grags-ean 1. famous; renowned;
beautiful; splendid ; glorious; proud ;
haughty;	grag$ chcn ЯТ7WT:; of
great fame; celebrated; renowned; well
known. 2. HTzhTTS a merchant;
V’F4 grag$-$uan dkir-wa	good
name; pure fame; reputation;
grags-hdod-can ambitious; desirous of
gaining glory, of being famous;
grags-ldan	ono who is
celebrated or possessed of fame:
stian-pahi grag$-pa$
phyogs-rnams kun-tu pjrogs (his) fame
spread in all quarters (everywhere).
*	Grag$-pa rgyal-mtshan
{Schr.; Td. JI), lit. banner of
glory; n. of a governor of Tibet.
3]Ч]Ч’сг-53|	$ftan-
grags-ean	ЯсгЬт, srrfecT
illustrious; renowned;	of
groat renown; of celebrity, fame, glory;
greedy of gain and
fame.
grag$-pa thob-pa =
mkhas-pa, a learned man.
*	Grags-pa hod-zer n. pr.
{Schr.).
*	Grags-pahl bge$-gnen
n. pr. {Schr.; Td. 2, 205).
Grag$-byin	one of tho
devoted attendants of tho Buddha:
grag$-ma Paldan Lhamo, also
called 5Ч<2Г^’Й Dpal lha-mo, i.e., Cri-Deti.
3^ Grags mu-khyud n. of
a legendary king, tho sphere or circle of
whose fame was very wide.
Grays hdsin-ma (dag-dsin-ma)
the wife of the Buddha S'akya-
muni.
Grags-yas 1. fwTPf of world-
wide fame; of boundless celebrity. 2.
n. of a number. 3. n. of a district in
Khams.
qjc’q
grange a {laug-tca), also 3F^
adj. cold, cool; colloq. partakes of the na-
ture of a verb in such phrases as SF*j
graft-gi hdug, he fools cold; yraft-fto
it is cold. In such phrases, however, it is
common to insert tho word nam, the
sky, c.g. (eolloq.) nam tang-mo re, tho sky
is cold, i.e., “it is cold”; 3F{Tq graft-sky ob
ггдчщ protection from cold; warm woollen
clothos: SF44FX’4’^ 9^'S gran-tca daft
dro-ica shes-byahi by a the bird called
tho cold and warmth; this fabu-
lous bird is a native of the forest
called in Tibetan	Sgrib-pa
sfton-pahi nags, the primeval shady forest;
its sight relievos ono from the effects of
cold or boat: 3Fqthe cold will bo
changed into warmth; HFwaP^ frozen
or congealed by cold; Sp	it will
grow cold.
Syn. §^’2^ lhag$-graft.;	hkhyags;
lhags-pa; 4?ta’4 bsil-wa;	bscr-ua;
gran-reg*, SF^S graft-ftad {Mnon.).
5jCq-i^ graft-гса sei wfafrrt warm;
where there is no cold to remove.
SF^’V* gran-uahi dus fafin,
the cold season.
HF4^V> graft-wahi-nad s?fav?lcf the
oold fit of the aguo; $«‘8 grum-pu gout ;
rheumatism; arthritic pain; HF^ graft-dro
cold and warmth, temperature;
graft-gum byed-pa to shiver with cold.
graft-wahignas a cool place.
3F2F’ gran-kluft lit. cold valley; n. of
a large village under Kamba Jong on the
other side of the Kangchen Junga
mountain.
241
Sprsajl
SRI
grati-dmyal btgyad the eight
cold hells, v. dmyal-ica.
g^’g^ grati-gshi disease induced by cold,
gen. dispepsia.
gp’K<| 3 brati-reg pho-na-Q^'^ bya-
skyuti-ka the jack-daw (Mnon.).
g^’g^ grati-rluti тга a disease allied to
rheumatism, also cold in the stomach.
gratis (dang) Шг number;
дслт^я^ a multiplied number, many
times;	innumerable; g^N’u’wl^’
gratis ma-mchis-par having no number
or without number; numberless ; g^’
gratis hdebs-pa or rtsis-pa
to count; also an accountant;
gratis-brdt symbolical numerals of certain
nouns, which in some books are used
instead of the usual numerals, for instance
ftg mig, the eye for ° two” (Cs.)	1.
f^T^= sign. 2. тпн? astrologer.
gw5’$»rg^ gratis-kyi rnam-gratis
arithmetical enumeration; enumeration
of the numbers used in the sacred books
of Tibet as compiled from the work
called (^S’MF®1) mdsod-hgrel are:—(1) g^g
gcig one; (2) 4$ fychu 10; (3) brgya
100; (4) stoti 1000; (5) § khri 10,000;
(6) hbum 100,000; (7) sa-ya
1,000,000; (8) 3’ A bye-wa 10,000,000 ; (9)
duti-phyur 100,000,000; (10)
ther-hbum 1,000,000,000 ; (11)
ther-hbum chen-po 10,000,000,000; (12)
Hg’§g khragkhrig 100,000,000,000;
(13)	khrag-khrig chen-po,
1,000,000,000,000; (14) М’адя rab-bkram
10,000,000,000,000; (15)	rab-
Ъкгат chen-po 100,000,000,000,000;
(16) g$»w gtams 1,000,000,000,000,000;
(17)	glams chen-po
10,000,000,000,000,000 ; (18) «S^g dkrigs
100,000,000,000,000,000; (19) 5?jg^4*
dkrigs chen-po 1,000,000,000,000,000,000.
Next, the following are progressive
numbers increasing by multiples of ten up
to 60 figures: 20, й-gsg mi-hkhrug; 21,
S’^g-^’q mi-hkhrиg-chen-po; 22,
khyad hbyin; 23,	khyad-hbyiu
chen-po; 24,	spati-rten; 25,
spati-rten chen-po; 26,	ded-hdren;
27,	ded-hdren-chen-po; 28,
w^mthah-snati; 29, w^’^’q mthah-
snati chen-po; 30, ^g^ tf/yw-n/ys; 31,
^g*r^-q rgyu-rigs chen-po; 32,
hod-mdses; 33,	hod-nidses chen-
po; 34, V^’q dicati-po; 35,
dwan-po chen-po; 36, ^д*гяд^ legs-hbyin;
37, ^g*34gy&Yq legs-hbyin chen-po; 38,
$g*T43j rtogs-hgro; 39, ^gN’A^j’^’q rtogs-
hgro chen-po; 40, hbyiti-rdul; 41,
hbyiti-rdul chen-po; 42, J'^g^
tgya-rtags; 43,	rgya-rtags chen-
po; 44, stobs-hkhor; 45,
^’3 stobs-hkhor chcn-po; 46,
brdah-^es; 47,	brdah-ges chen-
po ; 48,	rnam-hbyuti; 49,
5 rnam-hbyuti chen-po ; 50, S^w^g stob§-
mig; 51,	s)g^q stobs-mig chen-po.
Up to this number there are Sanskrit
equivalents; from 53 to 60 there are
no Sanskrt equivalents, the Tibetans
having introduced new names to replace
lost originals. 53, byams-pa; 54,
gfriq'cr^ q byams-pa chen-po; 56, snin-
rje; 56,	stiin-rje chen-po; 57,
5дч’А dgah-wa; 58, 5g<v«r^*3 dgah-wa
chen-po ; 59, btati-snoms ; 60,
btati-snoms chen-po. These sixty
numbers are used in astronomical and
astrological calculations.
gratis-can НТЛТО 1. a countless
number. 2. mkhas-pa or ^’4'^ rig-
32
242
pa-can qfngcT an intelligent man; a learned
man (Jgnon.).
grafts-can-pa КЩ7 the oldest
of the atheistic philosophical sects of the
Brahmans, called Safikhya.
grafis-bcas 1. the dawn, or
the goddess of the dawn. 2. lit. “ together
with the number.”
grafis-hbyam$ 'W^TT num-
berless; countless.
gjww* grafa mafi-cha (4?JPW,
repeated four times] S.
gjw*^ grafts-med 1» countless;
numberless. 2. a crawling; PiRlTUT
white leprosy:	grafis-med
kyi khyad-par the distinction of being
countless, numberless;	grafts-
tned-can ЧХЧ supremo.
grans-med geig (the num-
berless one). In tho work called Manju pri-
mula Tantra (ч^г^огу^) the following
numbers are said to have been in use
in Ancient India among the laity for
worldly purposes:—From 1 to 10, t.e.,
geig to	thcr-hbum, and
11, -fl’t4] f u-rftog; 12,	mchog-nal]
13, g’^g^ skya-hphyis; 14, byc-ma; 15,
nub-nub' 16, mtsho-yas ; 17,
tdabs-phyor; 18, Г rdsi,—all those
being each a multiple of another by ten.
In the work called phal-po-che the
numbers vary after the eighth, i.en
Ъуе-гса; such as pS’PS khod-khod,
thad-dgu, Й^ГЙ4! khrig-khrig, 4WW
thams-thams and so on up to 128 places,
increasing by multiples of one hundred.
In the Lalita Vistara there are thirty-two
numbers, also increasing in multiples of a
hundred.
ЗИГ’РЦ grans-g$er to enumerate; count
the number one by one.
д;мгд-^ grafis-whgro ^rwt goes
into numbers; is counted: gjwg-cj^q
grafis-su bcug-pa, put into numbers • count-
ed:	grafi$-su yaft йжгяТч even
in number.
grab-rgyab pride; boasting
(&Л.).
I: grabs	gfom-byed; gj’f|4
gra-$grig 1. preparation; arrangement;
measures; contrivance; gjw^S’4 to make
preparation for;	to prepare
to go:	just as prepara-
tions were being made for slaughtering
them (Jf>7). 2. defined as
u signifies the certainty about the
time of immediate action”: ’Ч^’дрм^Ч
yoft-grabs fydugrw&s on the point of coming,
or am just coming; qyvgjrwcprgc/ $rdufi-
grabs byas-byuft was . about to beat or
strike; ^g]W5*r§^ fi-grabs byas-byun
was almost dying or dead; «Щ\дрч’дл*’3^‘
gsad-grabs lyas-byuft, was about to kill:
Хч д;сцг5Ц was about to get or gain;
g]W»H is about to slip or run away;
gjq^'^S is about to finish;
on mutual agreement. 3. delibera-
tion:	they were deli-
berating about me (in 7Г.).
II.-	place or object of
reflection, thought, etc.:	5 grabs-
yul Ita Ьщ дрЦ'3*1 grabs-gyis> §ton-
mo lta-bu.
gram (dam) 1.	еЛ« nan-gi
rdo a kind of stone found in water (flag).
2. grandpa s^amp; marsh; fen
(Lex.). 3, яд|5ГЙ bgrem-pa (Mill.).
243
5pl|
g*rq-|wg Gram-pa kham-bti one of the
places of pilgrimage of the Bon (6?.
Ban. 38).
gram-sa stony.
*|pj gral (dal) hphrefi-wa rff^rr
row, range series; also a rope, cord;
WT^rn, wrf%, class, stratum.
gral-mgo от g4,g,?g’*i gral-gyi
thog-ma the upper end of a row; the
uppermost place ; the seat at the head of
a table; gwg4 gya$-gral the right hand
row; *|^’g4 gyon-gral the left hand row;
ft]Kg4 tshags gral 1. the order or file of
monks in a religious congregation; 3J’«i w
many novices
sitting in rows without being awry;
дч bshug$-gral the order of seats, also the
order or row in which lamas and chiefs,
high and low, sit according to their posi-
tion or rank in any public or social gather-
ing; row of religious symbols; ^5’
row of offerings for- the gods or offer-
ings placed in one or more rows ; the
order or row in which the images axe placed
in a temple; $*g4 row or order in which
men are seated; д®Г*15* house-talk (Jd.) ;
the row of supplicants waiting for
benediction:
when you are sitting with your brethren
(fellow-believers) in one row.
g4*|g gral-tgrig or д4*з’Ц*Г* gral-du
sgrig-pa to arrange in order, dispose in
rows.
SprSto	gral-tshe$=Х<дад tshe$-gran$
date; a consecutive date.
i: gral-rimqfa line; row; file in
which monks sit in any religious service
or congregation:	rgan-gshan
gral-rim the order in which the young and
old sit; the right of seniority ;
the religious services of the per-
fected saints according to the order of
seniority (Zam.).
Syn. д4*з;дд*г* gral-du $grigt-pa; ^'3
5** tshar-du dnar;	; $’3
^5 ht-gu rgyud', gg'**]*rcpfj5 khrig chags
bkod (Mnon.).
д®г^я ii: (dal-rim) acc. to Jd. claim ;
title.
gq-jk’q gral $куой-ыаф&ц a shadow.
gral-pa a beer-house customer
(Ja).
gpraq gral-ma a small beam; rafter
(Cs); дч’д’дагдя gral-bu gral-phyam roof-
laths ; sticks which are laid close together
and covered with earth (Jd.).
gra$ class, order, series; rank,
dignity; tribe (Cs.).
gra§-pa 1. to bind, for V**4 dras-
pa. 2. (Bengali)	wooden beams
or rails.
c\
5J &>'* (dt) TO, a knife, wea-
pon ; Wyr sabre. Different kinds of
weapons :—$*g chu-gri^ g’3* gri-thun, *4’
9^'3 rai-grlhi bxiy д‘д*Г gri-gug, g’^Jg'2*
grl hkhyogrpoy dgra-sta, f$ta-ri, fg
tfa-gri,	ral-grihi hkhrul-
hkhar^ gri-$gur> 4'** sa-raft.
Syn.	^aft-lafi] *5^’* brdeg-cha^
^*’$’*1^5	gcod\ qg’jf* lag-skyoft ; g’A’
zla-ica hdsum-byed;	gyul-
du hdsin\	mtshon-chahi gshi \ $4’
§5 sgrol-byed\ 5*4’3’§^3 dpal-gyi tfM-po;
gcod-byed} g^a-ma-ka (Mfion.).
STF gri-kha the edge of a knife.
та
244

khug-cig niche;
corner (A. 57): ^ <1
у an Rdo-rje gdan-gyi gri-gu na bu$-med cig
again a woman in a niohe of the temple,
&e., at VajrSsana.
gri-gu <?Л«Й small knifo.
gri-gug a short erooked
sword»
gj’qprerf^Ei Gri gum-btsan-po one of the
anoiout kings of Tibet, son of Srib-khri-
tyean, who was assassinated with a knife.
9]*^ gri-non ^4 n. of a disease.
3 S ’I4l9l'Mel't,,^"9 fffi Ъуа gag-gi g^og-
pa Ita-bu чуЛ’-	a knifo of
tho shape of the wings of a cock.
gri bya rog-gi mchu wn-
a knife of the shape of tho
crow’s bill.
gri-mag, v. §4’4 grib-ma.
zj'^^gri-dtnar (lit. the red knife) knife
of superior quality manufactured in Tibet.
grihi-so sharp edge of a knife.
grihi tse-mo чгачч the point of
a scimitar or sword.
9ft grihu a small knifo.
9f-q gri-^a explained as gM'Q’^vsrgj’er
skye§-pa dar-ma gri-la gi-wahi $a9
flesh of an adult man who has been killed
with a sword (this flesh being used in
sorcery).
§V£a4'4 grir rnam-pa or 9J^’ ЧХ54 grir
gwd-pa or gvqgsrq grir hgum~pa to kill
(or being killed) with a knife.
5]^’^ grin-pa (din-pa) prob. tgrin-
po skilful; clever (Jit).
c\
grib (dib) shade ; defilement; stain
or spot; filth; contamination, mostly in
a religious sense: §4’^4 grib-yofi con-
tamination, pollution will arise: X*gj4 ro-
grib defilement by or from a corpse; §4’ita
grib-sel the removal of defilement; also one
in whom there is no defilement; n. of a
Buddha.	za^-grib unclean food
or pollution of food; ^4’§4 dirty clothes,
or defilement in clothes; ^4'§4 yug$-
grib or pollution of widowhood; 4q*
§4 or the defilement that is brought by
different people assembled in a marriage;
5W§4 dmar-grib or pollution of blood or
anything slaiu red-handed; 5*’3|4 pollution
by the breach of a vow; unchastity ;
3ч defilement by quarrel or fight;
defilement in slaughter pertaining to
butchers, or defilement from murdor;
9F defilement caused by oath or by the
barbarous custom of killing animals and
swearing over their blood (prevailing
among the Kham-pa tribes); ^*§4 defile-
ment from incest.
grib-kyiphu shady valley, gene-
rally on the north side of a mountain
range (cf. mfy); §4'1^|4 grib-phyog§
the shady side of a hill or mountain, the
side not exposed to the sun.
§4'^4 grib-khru$ the washing of defile-
ment.
9]4*г^ grib-can stubborn; refractory
№)
§4*h^i grib-mdo$ offerings made to Bon
deities for removing some defilement.
9]4*qpfa grib-gnon 1. WTOi, OTT sha-
dow, or 2. 4&f4S'9jq btsog-pahi grib defile-
ment from unclean things, filth, night-soil,
&o.:	^4 cho$-grwar
grul-bum grib-gnon bsrufis in a religious
school there should be protection against
defilement from harpies (Zam. 2.).
245

1
S|tr4)XV2}'‘’|X^ grib-gnon gyi gdon a demon
that defiles and poisons food; a harpy.
gjA’w grtb-ma shade; shadow; 5^5’3^'
grib-daft grib-mahi grol (Zam. %)
^Tur;	qin-gi grib-ma the shadow
of a tree.
gcra	Grib-ma §non-pohi nags
forest of the dark-blue shade in the fabu-
lous northern continent of Uttara Kuru.
gjq’m'w grib-mahi lam	the
milky-way; also a path by the shady side
of a mountain or in the valley.
grib-mahi lus ^ТШ^, the
shadowy body, i.e.y body of defilements.
ijcrita the removing of pollution
or defilement of any symbol, image, sacred
books, or offerings by religious rites.
$q*grib-so the quickly vanishing, at
sunset, of the shadows of trees, &c.;
hanging down,
also lengthening of shadows before they
vanish in the shade of night; qqqrq
long projection of shadows.
i;q'5j^ grib-sruft guarding against defile-
ment.
gjq-q^qq grib-bsafis cleansed or purified
of defilement; purification of defilement.
9|q’^|*< grib-lhags cool shade (Sch.).
Cs
Ч|£ГЧ grim-pa to hasten ; to hurry
(&Л.).
grim-tsc, acc. to Jd. a pair of
scissors (in Sikkim sounded “kyimtse”).
C\
ЧртЧ g rims-pa,	clever;
skilful; dexterous; also careful; on the
alert;	rig-pa grims-pa to be
careful; on the alert:	grwa-sa
grimt-fig be attentive in the monastic
school:	on a hill range take
care!
e\
gril (dil) (cf. ч^ргч hgril-гса) a roll;
gog-gril rolled paper; a paper roll:
kept rolled up in paper:
gos-gril a roll of satin or cloth; a
garment folded up (Cs.).
Iprp'gVq gril-kha byed-pa to make up a
parcel. (Sch.)
I: gru 1. a figure, corner, tip, any-
thing with length and breadth; 5'4^ gru-
bshi a figure with four corners, gen. a
square; yul-gru a country with
certain dimensions, t.e., the division of a
country in provinces or districts. 2.
lustre; gru-dmar a reddish lustre
from precious stones. 3. a district of
Tibet lying to the east and north of Dbus
(^•).
2J II: svb, ига, xftu, щч
general term for boat, raft, vessel; also
gru-fan a boat, ferry.
Syn.	rtags gsum-pa; $’«1^
gru-yi rab;	sgrol-war byed;
pha-mthar sgrol;	scft-ge-can;
rta-mgo-can;	chuhi-fifi-rta
(Mnon.).
STST' gru-dkar (tfu-kar) a kind of
turquoise.
5'5 gru-skya	that which falling
on water strikes it; an oar (Д(Яом.).
Syn.	skyod-bycd; qjerq^’^'j
bsgral-wahi firl-rta.
5’F gru-kha or 5’^T’ gru fan-kha or
5'^'” gru btaft-sa landing place on the side
of a river, etc.; a ferry. See maps in
Survey Report of A. K.’s journey.
J’S4! gru-khug the keel of a slip.
5*^^ gru-mkhan	navigator;
a ferry man.
П1
246
5*^1
Gru-да 1. clew; hank. 2. n. of
a country. 3. stone or paint of whitish-
blue colour.
5Jgru-gu 1. a thread-ball; yarn in
round ball. 2.	IJtshon-gyi gru-
gu n. of a village in Tibet (Jty.).
5’3'5Л Gru-gu Rgya-ra n. of a village
in Kham {Lon. 27).
5’8 gru-gla passage money at a ferry;
a boatman’s fee.
$•54,™ •char 1. rains; rainy season:
^^g^gq-q^-^n^-qS-a^ yul-gru kun-la
khyab-par hbcbs-pahi char rains that fall
over the whole country and produce a good
harvest. 2. a fine, fertile rain {Sch.).
QcU gru-ma {(ju-ma) angle; corner;
convex or concave; also edge, border, brim.
{Cs.).
gru-chod or 5*’^ grub-zin
corner; angle.
gru-gsum	a triangle; 5*^
gru-bshi a square;	gru-draft a right
angle; gru-yon or 3’®l$®i gru-gyel obli-
que angled.
5’4^ gru-bshi n. of a stone:
gru^his ]tlad-pa gso shin-
chu-ser hdcn the stone called Grub-bshi
heals the brain and draws out pus.
5’^ gru-hdren defined as 5’^’
gru nafi-du hjug-pahi §kyc-
bohi mifi, person conveyed in a boat. Peo-
ple who journey by boat are:—
guest; merchant, trader; $‘®r3fa
boat passengers.
gp gru-pa ferryman.
5’5	gru-gzins ship
{Jd.).
+ 5’^ gru-btMQ' boatman’s fee; 5’
qi^’q gru btsas-pa^'^^'^’^^ chu-la khral
$dud-pa-po fol collector of a ferry.
5’4®]^ gru-tshng^ gru-gtoft-sa a
ferry or ghat*, de nas Se-dmar gyi-gru-
tshug$-la byon-nas, then he arrived at the
ferry of Se-dmar {A. 91).
gru-tshum$-pa—F‘&W4 or Г
ifrq to sit silent, without speaking.
5’^ gru-hdsin	1. n. of
a mountain in the south of India; also
the residence of Avalokites'vara on the
small island of Puto off Shanghai; n. of
tho residence of the Grand Lama. at
Lhasa. 2. an harbour.
5’$,иЦ’®1®| gru-yi yan-lag—Ч^ gru-skya
an oar (ДГмол.).
gru-yi	gru-fan a ship
(4frfon.).
5	gru-yi g$og-pa=4£% gru-skya
oar; the wings of a boat {Шоп.).
Syn.	gruhi yan-lag;
gyob-byc\ g*q skya-ua {Шоп.).
5 'Sta’jpi gru-yis sgrol a navigator.
j’W^’q gru-las hdas-pa one
who has made a voyage.
5’^ gru-fan=^’«I’Ml gru-yi rab a ship;
S gru-fan kha—^'*^'1^ gruil-gian
sa starting or landing place of a ferry; 5’
-ЧУ4 gru fan-pa ferryman; 5’®»’ЧУ4 gru-
la shon-pa to go on a ferry-boat.
gru-mo {du-то) the elbow;
gre-mOy 3’^ ku-niy учх the elbow, or *ГЧГ^
ka-au-ni ^q^&^-q-qvqSlag-
pahi-tshigs-pa bar-pahi rtse-tog the top-
most piece of the middle joint of the arm:
5’3fafr^»r*rqi*.’q gru-mor kha tvam-ka hold-
ing a trident in the hollow of his elbow.
0R| q5’5’# lag-pahi gru-mo is defined as ne-
tcahi dp^Pa \ 5’^’B4 the hollow of the
247
I
elbow joint: Ч’Т'Й’З'Я
lag-pahi gru-mo re jo-wohi pu$-mohi
sten-na bshag resting each elbow on the
knees of the lord (A. 135).
grug-pa to break into small
pieces; to crumble; to bruise; gjspq^g^
grug-pahi hbras bruised rice (&?Л.);
grugs-bu something broken.
I: gruft-po (duft-po) = 5^*4 gruft-
tea, §byaft-po,	rig-pa grim§-
pa 1. very intelligent^* clever ; wise ;
prudent. 2. meek; mild; gentle (Cs.).
II : the corn seed that is not
rotten (Jig-)*
3^4 grub I: (dub) pronounced rub, in the
upper Himalaya’s and Shar-Khombu,
signifying in Ld. all: jq’Sflk’ grub-fi-$oft
all are dead (Ja.). JRub-te: altogether,
jointly.
SJH II: fax;
^q*q byed-pa-po dno§-su med-par rafi-raft gis
grub-pa anything accomplished or done
by itself without any agent.
gjq$$«q grub-mchog=^^ a great saint;
gjq’sjX*]* я grub-meh од-ma faxNXT a female
saint.
5=гХл grub-thob, fasj a saint, occurs in
the following passage of (Zam. 2): —5J4
зргЪг grub-thob rim-gro gral-rim
t>shin	grub-brnes one who has
gained perfection.
yrw*i: grub-rpthah 1. faxFH,
established conclusion; opinion; theory
(Zm):	there being
no conformity of doctrinal principles
between the Brahmans and the Buddhists.
jp'W ii	ihar-pahi blo-gros
resolution for liberation from miseries;
determination for obtaining .Nirvana
(Mnon.).
^’41
grub-pa 1:1. fax, faxr, та, w-
ifa, 13H, ’Ехз*; pf. of *3^ to accom-
plish 2.	grub-par byed hzug
fax^f a saint: ^wq^’q grub-pas
biag^-pa far! accomplished by a saint;
gjq'q^rq^-q taught or preached by a saint;
grub-par gyur-cig	be
it ready, complete, perfect.
II: ^’q zin-pa fa^X, fafa exist-
ing ; success; *'$4’q ma grub-pa not exist-
ing (Jd.):	grub-pa daft bde-wa
Ufa the happiness arising from yoga
or union with the supreme spirit (in Brah-
manism) and with the eternal Cunyata or
void in Buddhism :	grub-pa lus, the
formed body, either the frame, the struc-
ture, the body, or more prob, an abbre-
viation of	the body that
is made of the five skandha (aggregates);
grub-pahi don-can what is neces-
sary in the charms of necromancy for pro-
pitiation ; mustard.
^q-qS^qq^uj grub-pahi du'an-phyug=^^'
grub-chen great saint (Yig. k. 11).
Grub-pahi raft-
byon §pyan-ra§ gzig§ the saint originated or
existing by himself; the self-formed
Avalokites'vara; Ihun-grub or
зрт Ihun-gyi grub-pa	self-origi-
nated or self-formed: ^’$4 Don-grub or
^yqa^r^gjq'q Don tham§-cadgrub-pa H’XTU-
fax a name of the Buddha, iu whom there
is the fulfilment of every purpose; also the
name of a magic spell or formula.
grum-pa the Tibetan badger:
rluft
sems hdsin-pa phyi-ba-dgft grum-pat kyaft-
gsuft he said both the badger and the
marmot know how to suspend animation
5**1
248
Uf
and rlung—a reflection upon the the prac-
tices of Tibetan ascetics or nal-jor (A.
70):	grum-pahi rgyu
ma $rgyu-gzer hjom§ tho intestines of the
badger overcome colic.
grum-po a maimed person ; a
cripple.
grum-bu (Jum-bu) qt Л5 gruni-
naj also called Xя trem, gout or rheumatism.
f«-<7rwm, acc. to Jd. Vf5?54 dreg-grum
podagra; a feeling of lameness in the limbs;
ru§-grum gout affecting the bones ;
tsa-grum rheumatic pain in the
muscles. $ 5* chu-grum, 5я’VI* grum-dkar,
’^4 grum-nag seem to bo varieties of
small-pox.
grid-bum (Jid-bunt)
a class of vampire-ghouls feed-
ing in cemetories; $*rg*r* grul-bum-ma
^ГЧП41> females of the above.
n. of a medi-
cinal drug ; an esculent root, Arum cam-
pa nulatum (a cure for piles).
Syn. rtsub-mo*, 4’4^ ga-gon\ «v-ip
arfa-hjoms that which cures
piles:	bra-bo rgod; *^5* SVI!*'2! hded-
byej spofi-po (Mnon.).
grul-bum zh-
wahi nu sho-can are the following three:—
Я VI klu-dug nag), ^^gzah-dug (VI*
dkar),	gnan-dug (F) kha (Sman.
350).
gru$-po (du-po) a yak only two or
three years old (Ja.).
5) Gre (deh)	the eleventh of
the twenty-seven constellations mentioned
in works on astronomy.
Syn. mtsho-tkyet; tta-chu;
ht8ho-$kye$ (IJfton,).
STS” gre-$kye$	bom in
the constellation of
gre-ga a sheet of paper (Jd.).
5)’^ Gre-sna n. of a place in the pro-
vince of Kofi-po in Central Tibet.
дге-гса (de-?ca) = wjff'cj mgrin-pa
or £4 glo-yu ^37, что the fore part of
the neck, the throat, both wind-pipe and
the gullet; voice: 3|’«rq^’35 gre-tca fede-mo
a good voice;	gre-tca gag$-pa
obstruction in the throat; hoarseness; 5’
4’S*'4 gre-wa, d<ir-wa a stertorous voice ;
gre-bwd btafi-byed in IF. to
hawk; to hem; to clear the throat (Jd.).
a species of demons;
gre-mo female demons of this kind.
gre-mag vulg. for 3]я gra-ma
awn of barley or of Poa grass.
Sl’Sspg gre-mog hbu in IF. ant;
emmot (Jd.).
gren occurs in
Йgren-gyi don-du bcifi$-pahi ri*mo can.
(Jig. 32).
?|¥*| gren-tshag plaited wicker-
work in straight rows.
I : grehu, or drehu, a young
bear :	co-ro$ grehu-geig
phul-was Cho-ro having presented a young
bear (A. 63).
4]^ II: ЯПТ pea, peas;
sran grehu a kind of pea growing in the
Sub-Himalayas.
4J5TS||
249

gre§- ma 1. the flashing light-
ning (Se/rtr.). 2. dres-ma a kind of
plant: д*г*я49™s-
mahi ge-sar srin-gsod glan-thab$ hjoms the
pistil of dre$ma kills worms and overcomes
the diseases called glan-thabs.
gro ’FhjH wheat; 5’^ gro-skam
dry wheat.
gro-ga (do-да) or?’p gro-kha^4*,
or	fin-§tag pahi pags-pa,
white birch bark used for writing charms
on; also acc. to Jd. used for ornamenting
bows:
q-Ol • £4]Ц •	• gN wrote
these mantras on white cloth or paper or
leaves of the palmyra or the bark of the
birch which grew in their country (Suran.).
5Л** gro-don the winter granary of
wheat in Tibet; an under-ground cell
where wheat is kept during the winter.
5*^ gro-tshag sieve for sifting wheat.
дго-гса or 3j’Si gro-mo reddish grey.
й’О-Js/uw^WH^i the twenty-
second or tw’enty-third constellation in the
astronomical works of Tibet and India.
Syn. hphrog-byed; bon-po\
W^bya-ibo (Mnon.).
?‘q^’3'3’q Gro-bshin gyi na-wa
the full moon in tho month of July-
August.
?’^V3’a’q Gro-bshin-gyi zla-tca or
zla-ica bdun-pa the month of Qrarana.
gro-bshin-byed (do-shin-ch6)
hole under the ground where wheat is
kept in winter (Л. K.).
gro-yos (do-yo) parched ivheat
or corn.
gro-ril ball of dough, or lump
made of moistened wheat flour.
Sj’Sfaj gro-sog (do-soy) stalks of wheat,
wheat-straw.
gro-ma (do-та)
1. the sweet potato of Tibet. 2. name
of a herb (Vai-sn.) [the grass Seirpus
Kysoor^S. 5'5 rgya-gro or rgyahi
gro-ma the potato introduced from India :
the potato being
sweet is cooling and stops diarrhoea.
Gro-ma lun n. of a place in
the north of Tibet (Ka-thafi. 168).
Gro-tuft n. of a village in the
province of Lho-kha.
gro-lo-ma (do-lo-ma) go$-
chen a kind of satin; silk stuff.
Gro-sa village in the district of
Phenyul.
Gro-ho (do-ho)	phyag-
rgya rnam$-so a mystical word used in the
Mahdmudra Tantrik rites (K. g. £15).
grog-та or	grog-
mo (dog-mo) fhxfteRi, ant; emmet.
Syn. 5fa’3№< srin phran-ma;	rgyv-
pgyu-ra;	д^йг-rjehi-bn (Mnon.).
grog-iked waist of the ant; also
narrow as that is.
grog-mkhar ant-hill.
Syn.	brgya-byin $pyi-ico;
nor-ldan brtsegs;	grog-
mahi-tshhH;	grog-mahi mkhor
(Mnon.).
1. w a deep ravine
in which a torrent flows; the sides of such
33

250
ravines are termed gad-pa, %'З^ цч дч
cri qj^crmE/jK chu chcn-pos brus-nas
byuft-wahi grog-poham, gad-pa yaft-zcr, that
which is caused by the erosion of great
waters is also styled grogs-po or gad-pa,
5Я’Я to grog-sbuy v. ЗИ*4 grog-nia, ant
(Nag. 52).
5Я’^ grog-tshah-==2№\grog-muhi
tshan ant-hill.
I: grog-shin or ^Я’^’ cultiva-
tion in uneven narrow ground away from
villages or gen in wild places where cattle
are pastured.
II: Я’5Е. ч|1^ 5[е.м ^ ?>ч rma-
dan gzer $krafis chu sri-sel n. of a medicine
which cures obstruction of tho urine; a kind
of moss growing on the sides of chorten, and
old walls, etc.
^ЯЯ^’ grog-gyan lateral gully on
hill-side: ?Я*$ grog-chu, brook; rivulet,
v. grog-po.
?Я’Я3* grog-gzar a torrent pouring down
a ravine.
^с§гт, vr< a friend, companion, fellow-
labourer, assistant; paramour, also hus-
band ;	kha-grogs a seoming friend;
a friend in words; a false friend;
?Я^ rtin-grogs or ^’5я^ sn*n-grogs
true friend, bosom friend, associate, com-
panion, comrade, fellow; ^Я^’Й grogs-khye
playmate or play-fellow; 53*’?ЯЧ dpun-
grogs, fellow combatants comrades; ^Я
?Я^ hdug-grogs or ч^Я^’^Я4 bshugs-grogs
fellow-lodger; dgah-grogs, ЯИ^Я^
gtan-grogs spouse; husband ; wife;
^^bdod-grogs or^Y^4!” hdod-rogs sweet-
heart ; ^ёя’^Я44 mdsah-grogs a -lover; Я^‘
gzim-grogs bed-fellow (not only con-
cubine); ^Я'ЗН4 dmag-grogs ally, confe-
derate (in war) ;W‘3jopilas-grogs colleague;
journeyman; under-workman; ^Я'МЯ*^
tshig-grogs an auxiliary word. [N.-B.—In
pop. works and colloq. language the word
^Я^ sounded ro or год is combined with
verbs in tho imp. To givo a polite
turn to any request; ° nang-ro-nang ”
please givo; “ton-rog-naug ” “mil you
kindly show,” etc.
^Я**’1^ grog$-fian a bad friend.
?Я*’М grogs~dan help or assis-
tance.
grogs-hdris mutual friend-
ship,
5Я*гЗ grogs-po (tog-po) fpsn, fra, та
friend; ally.
i : grogs-byed-pa to be friend;
to make friendship; to assist; to be friends.
Й to cultivate friendship, to
be mutual friends.
: татд, та assistance; aiding.
5Я^’§5’4 grogs-byed-pa is synonymous
with	rogs-ram; in writing some-
times	$don§-grogs is also used.
5Я^'Й grogs-.mo a female friend; also
a mistress.
Syn. zla-mo*,	inflam-ma;
pho па-mo*,	kun-spyod
mtshuns-mahphrin §kyel-ma
(Mnon.).
grog$-bzan or	grogs*
bzah-po	friendship, also
sweetheart.
I: groii or grons pf. of
to die;	grnn-hjug resurrection
bringing life to a dead body, translating

251

the soul from one body to another:
45 5'	’ чч ’ ? Y 3’ 5^ ’ Ч4! ’
gjq^-5jE. having done service to religion,
and living beings he is said to have four
times performed the noble work of transla-
ting a soul from one body to another
(J, Zan.).
II: 1» ЧТИ, an inhabited place;
a village; hamlet; also house; brgya-
gron a place of a hundred; ston-gron
thousand houses or households (Jd.);
gron-la-hgro	going or gone
to the village :	gron-gsum
mthar-byed	he who has destroyed
the three habitable spheres, the god S'iva.
gron-khycr (don-khyer) gx,
ПИК,	НТ a town or city;
a place which is surrounded by a
wall, originally a palace. That is called
a country or	у til where there are
100 lakhs of households, a place where
there are 100,000 households is called
yul-hkhor or province. In a city
groft-khycr) which is gen. fortified
there should be at least 10,000 households;
a town with population less than 800 is
called a grofi in Sans. чти.
Syn.	pho-bran hkhor;
mi-gron\	gron-khyim\	lu$-
can-gna^;	dmans-hdul-gnas;
mur-ga-ti\^^sa-b§kos;
§pyod-pahi phur-bu;	hjigs-
med~gna$;	mi-b§kyod-gna§;
§5 sruh-bycd; skyon-bycd (Milon.).
Gron-khycr dgra nxrfx the
enemy of tho city, S'iva.
Gron-khycr hjig
Indra.
gron-khycr
gyi bdag-po or	yU^hkhor dwan
sheriff, also the chief of a city; also
rgyal-phran a petty Raja (Milon.).
^F^’gS Gron-khycr vpyod met. for a
crow.
*	groh-khyer dpal-yon-
can	(Schr.; Ta. 2, 166).
gron-khycr тс-tog
(&Zir.) lit. the city of flowers ; it is the
same as Patalipuira or Patna.
gron-gi gcan-gzan
met. for dog (Mnon.).
gron-gi brjod-pa nbc pro-
vincialism ; country or rural language;
gron-gi nc-hkhor 4T<rt44W the
suburbs: gfc‘<i[w3i gron-gi hthab-тпо
feuds and quarrels (among villagers).
Gron-gi bdag хлнтГчч,
the headman of a village.
grofi dra-iva-can	(5^*
gron-mthah la-dra-wa b§kor-
tea) a town surrounded with fortifications;
gron-gi dra-wa ’ччг a circle or
circuit of a village; fortification round a
city: gfc’Sjgron-gi hphren Idan-
the village flower-woman :
Gron-gi giso-wo the -chief man
in a town or village; a headman.
gron-gran§ the number of houses
in a village or town.
SjE/sjXqj gron-mchog chief city; also
scene; sphere.
groft-btficn a
§S‘q’ a lama who performs meditations or
asceticism remaining inside a village
or town;	dben-
na mibsten-pahi gron i^ncn dar-tca dafi one
not performing the practice of asceticism
by going to any solitude (Ta-scl. 21).,
^1
252

groft-gtam country speech or
language.
3^4*51	gron-pahi
gtso-bo the headman of a village or city.
gron-rdal— groft-brdal 3R-
4^, farnr a large town (which is not
enclosed by a wall) together with its
suburbs.
groft-sdchiphra-ma mkhan
=	dkrugs-$in bycd-ipkhan
one who causes or excites brawls,
feuds, etc., among village people or com-
munities.
groft-pa a villager; one holding a
house; a tenant.
groft-pahi cho§ = ^'^xjgoj q pho-
hkhrig-pa sexual union {Affton.).
groft-pahi cho§ kyi§-
та ga$-pa = ^ V^SS’4 bn-то pho-daft
ma phrad-pa virgin purity ; a maiden not
touched by a malo (8man 289).
5*5^ gron-dpon TTTWt, 3^, 4VF-
ЯТН the chief of a town or village.
5^’4 gron-ira (dong-tea) in C. aec. to
Jd. used for 2^’4 grafi-ira: cold.
gron-war the middle of a village
or hamlet.
groft-$pan$	one who is
liberated or has abandoned the life of a
layman or householder.
groft-tshig чгтщ provincialism:
-^ц|?)n-wgron-tshig gis-ma §la-dpar
=	gron-$kad kyi$-ma-hdre$
par not mixed up with provincialisms.
gron-tsho large village; town;
several hamlets taken together.
Gron-rntsho mer-mo n. of a
village in the district of w E in Lhokha:
E lab-kyi hdab Graft
rptsho mer-mo (Lon. > 30).
groft-gshi an estate ; farm (S/7/.).
gron-yul country place (Jd.).
Ф groft* (dofig), v. re^p. f0
die;	is resp. for natural
death.
?5’« grod-pa or gsu$-pa belly;
generally tho paunch of ruminating
animals; in colhq. language it is
sometimes applied to the stomach or 4’4
pho-ica:	mar-grod butter kept in
the dried paunch of a sheep.
grod-ibom (doi-bom) a large belly;
also the dried paunch of a bullock to keep
oil.
gron-can (don-can) disadvan-
tageous ; injurious.
gron-che very noxious (Jd.);
gron-medharmless; innoxious (Lex.).
^ч
I: gron-pa (don-pa) explained
as	hgro-$go chen-po, much expen-
diture ; expensive; also to expend, squan-
der :	bod-kyi mi nor
man-po gron-pa dan having squandered
much wealth and men of Tibet:
§nag-$og gron-pa (Nag.) waste or
expenditure of much paper and ink.
II: explained by SV*<VWT4?V
mi-tshan eheham bzod-cheham
bsran che-wa, applied to a great or illustrious
family, to one who is very patient or for-
bearing, a thing that is very durable and
hard.
дгоп-$аз hgro-sgo item of
expenditure; also the account of the dis-
tribution and lending of grain.

253
ail
Grom-pa rgyaft (tom~pa-
gyang) n. of a place in Tsang which con-
tained one of the twelve temples said to
have been erected by King Sron-btsan
sgam-po (Ya~sel. frl).
grol (dol)	(Schr,; Kalac. T. 5)
release; deliverance.
Grol-nin (dol-nin) the day when
the annual assembly of the lamas dissolve.
Grol-$ton (do I-tori) a festival on
the day when lamas relax after the term of
the special devotions is over.
grol-hdod wishing to be
emancipated or set free from transmigra-
tory existence and misery, etc.; abbrevia-
tion of
hkhor-ica dafi-$dng-b§fial §og§-las grol-гсаг
hdod-pa.
grol-ка (dol-ка) pf. of ‘фч
hgrol-wa; also sbst. fh'.WVU, HR,
deliverance; deliverance from worldly
existence.
grol-ica can 1. relating to
emancipation ; deliverance. 2. sbst,. pearl:
рт that has been delivered from the
oyster.
Syn. пт-tig} ^4* na-lc $am
(Mfon.).
Grol-buhi lha-tna the five
demigods or, perhaps, Naga demi-gods.
Grol-mcd hjoms
the killer of Namuci; an epithet of Indra.
I: gro§ = mol-wa 1.
advice; counsel. 2. = ^?« gtani speech;
talk;'	fykah-gros conference; com-
mittee.
II: acc. to Us. care, heed, caution.
5^gros-grogs (doi-dog) a consult-
ing friend; anyone consulted with.
5^’^ gros-can careful; cautious.
+	gro$-gcam 1 consultation.
2. = $^-g5’q gros byed-pa to consult.
gros mthun-par unanimously;
by unanimous decree.
gro$ hdri-sa (doi-di-sri) the place
where advice may be asked; an oracle.
gro§ hdebs-pa giving advice.
gro§ hdri-wa to ask (a person’s)
advice ; to consult (with one).
gros-pa (doi-pa) adviser; coun-
sellor; senator; also advice ;	gro§
byas-pa (doi-je-pa) to have consulted;
consultation; conference; ’q
gro§ byed-pa (doi-je-pa) F’quTVK to con-
sider ; to deliberate; to resolve; decide
after consderation, deliberation, etc.
Gros-mi (doi-mi) consulting man;
an adviser; sometimes in Sikkim the
headman of a village.
gros-med without asking or con-
sulting anybody; self-sufficient; careless ;
heedless.
gro$-tshod (doi-tshoi) the real
points or object of a conference:
gro$-tshod hdsin-dan ya-rabs
§pyod-pa to catch the leading and salient
points in a conference (/?</.).
gro§-ya (doi-ya) a secretary ; a
councillor.
Щ gla wages; pay; fee or remuneration
for any work done:
dgc-slon brgya-rtsa brgyad-kyi
htsho-гса gla-nas §byar the maintenance of
one hundred and eight monks was met
from the fees (he received) (A. 61).

254

gla-tca	the musk deer,
Moschus mosehiferus^ of which there are three
varieties or perhaps even species in Tibet.
Another species occurs in Amdo : Moschu§
Sifaniens;	gla-rnahi pag§ > V
q^-qsprq gfa-ica dafi rna-icahi pags-pa the
skin of tho Nao antelope and the musk-
deer.
Syn.	dri-bzan dican-po;
gla-rtsi can; sa-lu$;	rlun~
bsreg (Mnonf).
gla-gor sho-^a n. of a fruit.
Щ’дмгч gla blaf^-pa has taken or
received his wages for work.
gfa-sgafi	n. of a med-
cinal herb ;	Суper us rotundas: ПТЛТ
the root of Cyperns jurlinivs.
g|*^ gla-rnan, abbr. of	gla-dan
rfian-pa, wages and remuneration.
ap gla-pa or 51’5 gla-po or Д’З gla-Ъи
one who works on wages; a servant em-
ployed on a fixed salary; also a day-
labourer or hired workman; gyog-
gla фя service money; salary.
aj’^ gla-phor a kind of tree the wood
of which is good in turning and for making
plates and cups.
Я’I4! gla-phrug the young one of a
musk-deer.
Я’й gla-ш	a servant; a hired
workman.
gf# gla-mo 1. a hired female servant.
2. musk-doe: д'ця
gla-icahi ног-bn § §brul-sog$ dug-srun byed
the jewel of the musk deer (the musk-
pod) is a protection against snake poison,
etc.
Щ*!” gla-rtsi Ж, ^Prrfh,	musk:
glo-rtsi gro-yi tshig-ma
hdra musk is like burnt-wheat grains:
the musk that is
slightly soft, tough besides being of
strong scent, is good : Д
musk eradicates snake-poison,
kidney disease, plague.
Syn.	ri-dbag§ Ite-wa;
§brul-$krag byed;	myo^-pahi
rptshan-ma; dri-yi thod;
dri-yi go§-can;	ri-dcag§ clan;
ri-dbag$ rlsi; SI’^'^'9 gla-wahi nor-
bn (Mfion.).
Gla-risihi те-tog n. of a
flower, the Pedicularis megalantha.
SJ’W gfa-tto fo°d and wages.
arc glag or S’S4! bya-glag a bird des-
cribed as resembling an eagle, but smaller
than the vulture and larger than the hawk,
of blackish chocolate colour; carries away
kids and lambs. This bird is numerous in
Mongolia, Central Tibet and Kham. Pro-
bably the lammergayor.
glag-khra-mo a spotted species
of eagle.
glag-pa — ^'^ liag-pa upper
or back part or side :	w^z Itay-
pa the crown or upper part of the head.
Defined as	the upper back
part or blunt side of a knife or axe.
§]Ч|’Ц’О!Л Glag-pa lam n. of a place in
Tibet (Deb.).
ajT1 glags W3KC opportunity, occa-
sion, possibility:	glags htshol-
tca to seek for an opportunity:
glagt rned-par hdug now the
favourable time seems to have come; esp.
opportunity of doing harm to another,
SFI
255

of getting a hold on him (Ja):
&lag§ hned-par ml hgyur he will not
get an opportunity to do you harm.
intolerable; insupportable:
there is no possibility of helping
him; he is incurable (Jd) :	not
able to do injury or some interruption to
one’s actions.
glags-pa to go; be going;
to proceed ; to be on the point of.
I: Gian n. of a place in Tibet.
Эр’ II: ^4,	1. ox; bullock.
2. one of the signs of the Zodiac,
the Bull: SF4
glan-gi mkhri§-pa§ §byar-dug mig-la phog-
par phan the bile of the ox is useful when
contagious poison strikes upon the eye:
the spleen of the
ox is useful in sores and poisons: g^'3)
the kidney of the ox re-
moves kidney diseases:
the blood of the ox (with food) draws out
blood poison.
Syn. hgro-bycd} ^§5 hdren-
bycd\ stobs-ldan; wq bzan-po; S’
khyu-mchog (Mnon.).
III:	also called
e|ivgf? gzer-glan, colic, gripes, spasms in
the stomach and similar affections (Jd.).
g|£/wi glafi-thab§~%№\ glo-bur 1.
sudden; suddenly:	was
suddenly defeated by the enemy. 2. n. of
a disease, prob, hysterical fit.
Я^В* glan-khyim Utjp: a shed
or fold where cows are kept; an orna-
mented gateway.
gjE/g’A&q glafi-khyu rnchhog	a
bull; ox.
gjaft-khyu-ua	a bull
kept for breeding purpose.
Я^’Я5 glan-glad 1. the brains of the
bullock or ox. 2. in Tsang=soap.
glan-rgod a wild ox. This term
is applied in Tibet to the buffalo (in Tib.
mah-he).
aF’&i glan-chen = glan-po-che
?T5T, яти, w<n^, xfhs, жж,
WC, XH, W the elephant; elephant
in rut:	the skin
of the elephant is useful in black small-
pox :	^5-Эе/ glan-po
rjcs-зи mthuu-pahi rdtsag so-sohi min, i.e.y the
names of various apparatus necessary for
an elephant are the following:—gram
жт; grini-ga-ma	glan-
pohi rgyan;	bdogs-pahi ка-гга ;
a-la-na; ’Яг^пя the post to which an
elephant is tied;	lcag$-kyu the
conductor’s hook;	^fnrjwtorq mchil-
wa;	bri-ksa ka-kza ba-ra-ta
^W-’W’C^or	glan-po hi t hag-pa.
hak-ko gdsa-dsa ^iu95i=
hbod-pa shis-hdug (Mnon.).
Syn. so-ldan; so-gni$;
lag-ldan; gni$-hthun ;	niafi-
po hthufi ;	myos Ьгмп-сап;
5ЯЧ падз-tshal dgah\	mche-ica
$tob$-ldan;	sa-lud nal;	ihig-
le can ;	hkhor-lohi rkafi;
dsa-la ka;	niyo$~rnnl can; 5®4!
dbyug-pahi rna-can;	rnchotf-
rten byed\ §tob$-ldan.
glan-chen thal-dkar *the
white elephant, or one having a white fore-
head ; the chief of the elephants ($ag.):
the bile of the
elephant cures emaciation caused by poison,
etc.:	the flesh of
25(>
elephant (taken as food) cures the diseases
attributed to devils (in JF-).
8^ glaft-ehen rfsi	the
secretion of the elephant; also elephant-
ппьк.
Syn. gi-tcan (in magic) or
mystic term (Min J).
Qian rnjifi-yon a name of
Prince Sad-na Ig§-mjifi yon, son of King
Khri-sron Idehu-btsan. He was so called
on account of his prowess: ^tc/q^org'^qq*
mjin-ра yon-la §ku~
dican che-tca§ glafi-mjin yon-du grays.
a^’V glan-to the Indian bull (Ло$
taunts Indi' u*).
gq-чс Qlan*lhafi n. of a plain to the
eact of Lham.
Я^'ЗЯ glan-thug or	glan-hog
can a bull (not castrated):
glan-lhug rica-co? mgo-ehag-la phan
the horn of mi castrated bull is useful in the
fracture of the head: glan-lhttg nag rica-ro$
mdsc-la phan-par-byed the horn of a black
uncastrated bull is used in leprosy: Я^'Я*
y^q-^J^q^-y-q-^q glafi-gi rtca-gshob mchin-
pa hi Isha-ica-sel the ashes of a burnt bull’s
horn taken internally cures inflamation of
the liver.
Glan-dar-ma 1. a youthful ox.
2. n. of the King of Tibet who persecuted
the Buddhists in the ninth century A.D.
Яс'я^5 glan-hded—^'^^ thon-mkhan
the husbandman, a rustic.
gq-q-^q* glan^ю-skyofi = gl:iil-rd$i
^Ttrra a cow-herd; one who tends or
looks after cows (Mnon.).
glan-])o-rnchog	the
chief of the elephants, lit. a scent-elephant.
Syn.	glan-pohi rgyal-po*,
spo§-kyi glan-po; g’Sh*ftjrq * khyu-
yi mgon-po ; B’^,qVIkhyu-yi fydag-po ; ч*Г
’П’ч thal-kar ;	mche-atc drug-[dan;
^^•qgq-^qq’Ej gni$-hthun dtcaft-po (Mfion.).
g]q-q-<q^'q ghn-po glum-po-ft^'ty^
glafi-po nt yon-pa a wild, mad elephant
(Mnon.).
gc/q ч^-q^^qj^-q glan-po hdod-pas dreg$-
pa—^'^S glan-po rgod wild elephant; an
elephant turned wild and mad for union
with a she-elephant.
Svn.	chag$-pa§ myo$-pa*,
^Я^'З^'Я1^ VP’q Iwgs-kyus gdul-dkah-wa ;
qp5 q\Mj gyo-wa-can.; gq’q’qft glaH-po rgod\
gq-q-*q‘?№‘^N’q glan-po chan-gi$ myo$-pa;
gq-q-q^-q glan-po gfttm-po;
chan-gts dregs-pa*, g.lan-fyzi\ 2P PYq
ylan-po smyon-pa.
Glan-po §nahi glin-smad n.
of a place within the district of Shiga-tse
in Tsang.
Glan-po fofis n. of a place (in
Tib.); also one which was situated near
the ancient city of Kapilavastu.
gq’q^’prafq glan-pohi kha-loya^^'Z
gM-rdfd conductor of an elephant
(Mnon.).
gjE/qo/jQrq glifi-pohi гдуа1-ро=^'Ъ'*№*\
plafl-po-mchog (M^on.).
Glan-pohi $lob$, tfwi n. of
a very powerful giant-like king;
§pan.-rten man-hdsin glan-pohi
$tob$ (Ya-sel. 57).
ghn-pohi-gna$sz Я^ ’ч ‘
glan-po-chehi gna§ the stable where ele-
phants are kept (Mfion.)*
Яс glaii-phran^S^ glafi-phrug a
young elephant (Mixon.).
Я^9^ glaH-bre$ ox-manger; Я^‘
q5’3*r gktfi-pohi bre§ elephant-stall.
glaft-nia 1. a medicinal plant: Я^‘
яч’Й	gian-ma euros fever and
3F^|
257

female diseases. 2. a large kind of alpine
willow.
Д^’Й glan-mo or lag-ldan-ma she-
elephant: дсЙ^-адthe milk
of a she-elephant is very sustaining: Д*'Й5’
the skin of a she-
elephant cures female disease and fever.
g/ал-^шг a stallion ox:
with the warm blood of a living stal-
lion ox the circulation of poison in the
blood can be neutralized.
i: glan-rdsi a cow-keeper;
a chief herdsman.
gp’g* ii: *fhrra the keeper of an ele-
phant ; keeper of cows; Krishpa.
Syn.	glan-pohi kha-lo-pa;
gjE.’q’jq- glan-po §kyon {Mnon,),
glan-gyag dri-ldan 1. 5)’^
gi-wan	the musk-like, scented
secretion in the brains or in the stomach
of an elephant.	dom-mkhri$
bear’s bile (Sman, 353),
Glan-ri lufi-bstan n. of a
Sfitra in the Kahgyur, said to have been
delivered by Buddha when on a visit to
Li-yul.
g|^’5 glan-ru a bullock’s horn; also a
large forked stick used by the Tibetan
soldiers to rest the musket on when firing.
Д^'^’^^’Й’Й Glan-lufi gnas-khra-пю n.
of a place in Kham.
дЫ-ma-fifi or
я^й’-^q’ mdso-mo-^in a kind of tree grow-
ing largely in Tibet, the leaves of which
are burnt as incense	mystical
term) (Min,),
glan-fu a kind of sore-hoof.
Glan$-khan^-pa n. of a
learned lama come from a place called
Glan-kham^ who was invited by King
Khri-srofi, Idehu-btsan to his capital on
account of the fame of his learning.
glad or glad-pa the head;
brains; cf. 21S klad; Д5‘*< glad-la on the
top, on the head; also used as postposition
in the sense of over, close over:
chuhi glad-la close above the river or water.
SIS'S glad-rgya—^S^'^ glad-pahi rtsa
the veins of the brain.
SJS'4 glad-pa generally written as afi'4
klad-pa {Sch,), cf. lhad or S|5’4 $lad-pa,
glan-pa also Sr’4 glon-pa 1. to
patch up; to mend:	^s*q=
lhan glan-pa to sew up or patch up
torn clothes, etc. {fiag?); gjysjcq to sew
on a patch. 2. to return; lan an answer
to reply; rejoin {Lex.), 3. colloquial for
ЯН'Ч gLn-pa,
glan-glen, v. glen-pa dumb.
glam-pa or^S'^OT ^ §nam-bu
hthug-po a kind of thick blanket.
glal-wa 1. to yawn or gape:
dor-hgyin wahibrdah
a relaxation of the body by stretching the
limbs and yawning. 2. a terrific attitude
or posture of sitting:	sen-ge
tnam-bsgyifis—^'^ft!3!^ sefi-ge glal-гса
a lion’s attitude on his vanquished foe is
called glal-wa,
gla§ htsho-wa one who subsists
on salary or wages.
I: glin gw a kind of sacred
grass.
СЧ
II: 1. ffa, icf island; isolated
place; limb or part of the globe; divi-
sion of lands, large or small; continent, in
34
258
fabulous Indian sense:
§5 gliA gshan-na$ $kye$-pa tshul-bycd-
mi hdra-wa	: being of other
continents they are of a different manner
of birth.
lj£’ III: a large monastery; a monas-
tery isolated in its greatness and separate
from other jurisdiction*
gliA-chen bcu-gni$ tho
tw elvo continents according to Bon cosmo-
graphy are the following(1) V’4?fK
argjE/ (-^) GyuA-dfuA bkod-pabi-gliA; (2)
(«]«ro) Qgah-ldan lha-yi gliA ;
(3)	(qf^) Bdul-Ьа khrimg-
kyi gliA ; (4)	(flFw)
hdul SAags-kyi glin; (5) ^V^^-q-gq- $)
Tsad-med bya-wa gliA; (6)
8byin-pa mthah-ya$ gliA; (7) й’чрЧ*
qwqsvgj*	Mt-дуо bsam-gtan glin;
(8>	(«рч) Dge-rgyas yon-tan
gliA; (9)	(^1) Tshad-nicd
byams-pahi glin; (10)	S Яц (B^’)
Gnod-gbyin nor-gyi glin;' (11)
gt’ (epw) Yon-tan rgyag-pahi glifi ; (12)
Rin-chcn spiing-pahi glin ;
or	(55«) Jjol-пю glin (G. Bon. 5).
The seventeen sub-continents attached
to the twelve continents are the follow-
ing:—(1)	Rgyal-rigg
rgyal-sa hdsin-pahi glin ; (2)
Rjehu bkod-pahi glin; (3)
DraA-sroA bgro-bdul-glin; (4)
Mya-Aan metf-pahi glin; (5)
Bram-ze gtsaA-wahi gliA; (6)
Bram-ze ha$-mo gliA; (7)
Bbri-mig mtsho-yi gliA; (8)
4Xprq$-gj^ IBnags-rigg gdol-wahi gliA; (9)
Stob-chen gyad-kyi glin;
(10) wq*^5-jc- A-ba-da-rahi glin; (11)
^5 4 «Wgjq* Hgro-tca hdul-wahi glin J
(12) $ VVWqo. g|q' Khri dflA hthab-pahi
31
gliA; (13)	Rgya-lag hod-mahi
gliA; (14)	Rgyal-tno mo-khro$
gliA; (15)	Igkhab-hgro tni-
rkun glin ; (16) ^w^SVgjq* Miham ci-yi
glin; (17) ^‘3Lha-klaman-dha
Sprehti gliA (6r. Bon. 6).
QUA-ka a garden or pleasure
grove.
S*’4 gliA-Aan dispute; quarrel.
Glin-dkar t'dsoA n. of a
district in Tibet.
gliA-dar u. of a kind of cloud.
« glin-ldan-?naf iptsho
a lake whioh contains islands.
Оч
fflin~bu дц, \jf5prer a reed-pipe;
a musical reed; flageolet; the common
musical instrument of herdsmen, and con-
sists of two pipes joined together;
phred-glin flute; piocolo-flute, mostly of
metal; dge-g^h generally written
5’^’	a larger musical instru-
ment like a hautboy, used in sacred cere-
monies ; ^’Д^’ rkan-gtin trumpet made of
the human femoral bone.
8|^’« gliA-та the margin of a
lake or river.
Glin-yag^-pa n. of the
chief preist of Galdan who was born at
GliA~yag$.
gliA-log revolution; internal
d’ssension:	there
arose much civil disturbance there in
Dikhun, t.e., among the members of
the Jlbri-khuA monastery.
SJ glu *?hf, ifa, «w, Ш song ;
ditty; also a tune;
accompaniments of musical performance,
etc.; bba-ra-ta, HXcT; gar-dag an
actor; a stage-player;	fkaA*
259
5'11
pahi ttabs-sgyur falling pf the feet at the
musio or cadence of the song;
gar-gyi gtso-bo stage-master; £’4 rfta-pa
the drummer;	brduft-гоа drum-
heater ; pheb rdob-pa,
thal-mo rdob the clapper; gtin-bu tea
trombone blower;	glifi-bu mkhan
the flute-player;	pt-wail guitar, violin;
pi-wan-mkhan the violin player;
gj’fl glu-wa the singer; gar-rnkhan
dancer;	hgyur-bag-mkhan one
who shows various appearances in different
dresses, such as the clown, etc. (ДИо«.).
8Г1 glu-sgra time in singing,
134е-’ glu-chufl a little song; ditty.
gfawcm ien-pa tp sing ц
sweet song.
glu-dbyan§	sjnging ; ST
glu-dbyant-kyi fies-pa-
bdun the seven kinds of harmonical pitch
or measures of the compass of the musical
tones. These are:—bar-ma HWH,
drafaroft ЧГЧН, sa-hdsin nrenx,
drug-ldan g'^ lfia-pa
blo-gsal	hkhor-nan
f^T4T<. Then, too, there are various
definitions of songs and modes of sing-
ing. Such are:
rgyud-daft mgrin-la§ &kye$-pqhj dbyqfa, Apv
hkhor-nan glan-pohi $gra tta-
buy	khyu-mqhog bq-plgfi
$kad-kyi	d?d-hdsip
gkyeg-ni ra-yi gkya<],
drug-gkyeg tnwi-byahi gka<$-ltar ggrogg, ччл
’Б^'Я’ч^ bar-та khruA-khrufl ggra-
ggrogg Win, §|4]W5bla-gsal rta-
gkad Ita-bur hither,	Й’ЗТ
о g gX jfi(i,pa fye.top.tdfiy (fug.su, khu-
ЬУУУ Wregg^q ^^uho tV^'S«’4Va4-4'?!,
?	чч яч	rtzed-mo rlom-parhlafawa-
a«i
tn, Ina-pa dan-ni bar-mahi cfbyafy VK’S’VT S’
dpah-po
drag-po no-mtshar-du,, drug-$kye§ khyu-
mchog de-b shin-no	§c;
£5’X’«rgwq^'3 sa hdsin-pa dafl hkhor-nan
dbyafa) shin-rjehi ro-la blafis-par by a w8’
hihal-
mo hjigs-dan bcas-pa-la, blo-gsal dbyao^ni
bM^aho.
glu-dbyan$ kyi khan-pa
a stage; a place where sing-
ing is done.
3]ЛЭ^’^Г’^ gin dbyan$-mkhan a singer;
one who sings or instructs in singing.
Syn. Д’вЦ’ч glu len-pa, glu-mkhqn
(Mnon.).
glu-re$ alternate songs.
д1и-1еп-та=$*ф^ы gfa mkhan-
ma a songstress.
gia^ a thing given ap a rapsom ;
<э ;	'
5Ч’5|’а5 a ransom for life:
khohi glud-du lug brgya-gsod
slaughter a hundred sheep as a random
for him,	glud-lg btqn to гагшрщ q
scape-goat.
glud-tshab the ransom offered to
some malignant spirit, consisting of one’s
effigy made of barley or wheat-rstraw, and
its interior filled with grain, edibles, cloth,
medicines, and precious articles such as
gold, silver or coins, and then thrown in
the direction from which the evil spirit
is supposed to have come. There are
several varieties of this kind of ceremony.
glum or §baft-glum fresh
fermented rice, faarlpy, or wheat, i^sed
instead of malt in brewing beer.
Я!
260
3^1
chan btsos phab btab b$nal-na$ lafi$-pa chafi-
gi glum-mam $bafi glum yan-zer.
§] Qle a small uncultivated island;
also a grove; same as tshal огД^
glift-ka.
gle hdam$-ma 1. one having
tho disease in which urine and foecal mat-
ter pass together, t.e., by the rectum (K.
du. S J/13).	=
mt s han-med ma-nifi a hermaphrodite;
having neither tho sign of male nor of
female.
-s
gleg$ table; plate; board; any
flat piece: $Г’Д’|,гчЮТ tgo-glegt gshug-go
there was a door panel placed.
glegs-chab a buckle, clasp or ring
attached to the thong.
5}чргчч| gleg$-thag a thong, &o., fastened
round a book.
8I4*VW gleg^am 5^», gfa a volume ;
a book; leaves placed between flat boards.
SHIP'S glcg^bu 1. a label; explained as
cho$-go$ la
glin-glin grti-bshi bead-pahi gra bkag-pa, a
square or rectangular piece of cloth or
paper put as label containing the name of
books, chapters, pages, etc. (2&zy.). 2. a
tablet. 3.	bkahi-glegs-bu or
^4 fykah-qog a diploma; «Ч’З’ДЯ^’в copper
plate or tablet.
glcgs-ma, v. Д*|*1 gleg$.
щчцгЗ*’ glegs-pfi the wooden boards
which in a Tibetan book supply the
binding.
Л gleft-wa or Д w«i glefa-pa ^5 to
say, converse, relate, describe:
gtam-du gten-ica or	gsufi gleft-wa to
relate a story: oiw	lam-la
ma-thar she$ glen$-na$ as the word was sent,
the road is not passable! Ч^Д^Л’^4!’
3|*гдл1 I have mado this speech: Ч^Г
the
rumour spreading from one to another,
until it came before the lady.
§5*^ cho$-kyi sgrog-glefi byed-pa to preach
religious discourses; $^’3^ gro$-gleft coun-
cil ; consultation.
glefi-wa-po or	glefi-mo
rnkhan a story-teller.
fi***S« Qlefi-hbum a hundred thousand
stories; tho title of a book in the Hdul-wa
division of the Kahgyur or Tibetan Bud-
dhist scriptures, which contains different
stories on the behaviour of devotees, monks,
nuns, &c , who adopted the Buddhist faith,
and who violated the rules of monastic
discipline laid down by Buddha.
glen-mo or Idb-glefi
glefi-^rjod ЧПГТ, ^rrfrwY, Tnrf, wm talk;
conversation; story; account.
Д*’Ч^ glen-gshi or Д^’ЧДЗД^ gleA btlafa-
pa	any subject; primary cause:
glefi-gshi hdi-la wftpj in
this narration. 1. narration. 2. the
subject of a discourse (Cs.). 3. table of
contents; index. 4. place, scene of a con-
versation or discourse.
&кп-1кидь abbr. of
5^'q glen-pa dafi-lkugs-pa^ very stupid and
idiotic:	glen-lkugs
ikol tpyod-kyi sdug-t^fial the misery of
being stupid, of dumbness and servitude.
glen-pa ЗМ, зге, ЯГЯ,
stupid, foolish, ignorant; a thick-headed
fool; an idiot:	more
stupid than a brute:	fools that
you are each of you: Д^’ЧЗ’^Ч’^ mud-
dled ones.
।
261
I
Syn. ^’4 Idar-wa; glan-glen; Й’
mi gsal-wa; Ito-hgefis; atM’fl
le-lo-wa; ч’^ tha-qal (Mfion.).
3j«rq gleb-pa, pf. gj<w glebs, to make
flat, plain (Cs.);	leb-mor-gleb
make flat,
-4
+• 3}^^ Ц gleb$-pa,fWn to trample;
to tread down; to press down by the feet
($'</’)•
—4
aprs glem-pa to press, squeeze; to
crush, squash (Ja.).
Щ gio or gf Ido, in Ld. resp.
gshog$, 1, the side,eep. of the body: Jprwq
glo$~phab-pa to lie down on one’s side.
2. a cough.
glo-dkar or *Ик’ч| hthofi-ka 4R|^3
a small window in (the side of) a house to
let in light.
Щ’4*TJ Glo-bkra n. of a country in Tibet
\Jig^
gp^piprq glo-lkog$-pa	to cough;
to clear the throat.
Д*4^	glo-dkar or
skar-khun a small door or window.
STF glo-kha n. of a colour like the blood
of the lungs; pale-red.
STR4! glo-khttg a small money-bag
attached to the sash or girdle of a
Tibetan.
gio hgogs-pa^^'^^'^ ОГ gf
3^4 gio rgyag-pa to cough; to feel stifled
(Mnon.).
gp3]w glo-hgrams n. of a disease.
STS** glo-tgya$ a disease of the lungs;
asthma.
glo-gcoft a disease of the lungs
which increases during the night.
8^’ glo-don wind-pipe (Cs.).
glo-rdog=3№ glo-bur sudden
(^й<7-)-
glo-rdol—*F\ K^rnag-rdol excessive
expectoration.
O* glo-spir n. of a kind of shield: 5'4’
afiKV'^'SM'av5^
kul-dkor phub-ni rab-la sho-lna-ste, glo-spir
sho-re phub-skor sho-phyed y in the best Kul-
dkar shield costs five sho and that of Gio-
§pir costs a sho for each disk on it (Jig.).
gf’S*! glo-phug place where things are
kept—either in a wall or a corner of a
house, &c.:
that boy kept the gold in a niche.
afa glo-wa	the lungs ;
3'4 9'§' gto-wa bu-lfla the five anterior
lobes of the lungs; sf’q glo-wa ma Ina
the five posterior lobes of the lungs.
glo-bur	sudden; adv.
Я ’9*'^glo-bur-du suddenly; all on a sudden ;
instantaneously :	^oj qgej
glo-bur-du mi-mafi-po ^i-zoahi §dug-b$fialt}iQ
misery or calamity of many men dying
suddenly.	4 glo-bur-du hons-pa
one who has come all on a sudden;
glo-bur-zcahi don the signification
of suddenness.
gf’SVjai Ef Glo-bur rgyal-po a name of
the King of Tibet about 900 years ago.
glo-bur-nad a disease that arises
suddenly.
gio bur-гоа suddenness.
8T^ glo-hbzvr яитя a projection ;
uprising :	hbur-du sdod-pa to rise
up into sitting posture.
glo-§bub wind-pipe.
gloJa-wa convulsions of the lungs;
cough.

262

fflog fm nfHi ’rfc’ft, <тжт-
ftrarr, ^гРт, чфят, 4jwM, w
lightning ; flash of lightning;
tprin-phan-tshun hthab pa
las byuft~wa that produced from tho con-
cussion or collision of clouds. The names
of different kinds of lightning are men-
tioned in tho Kah-gyurx—glog
gzi-btiid~can the lightning with flash ; gfo’
g4) glog-stug hoi the lightning of dense
lustre, sheet-lightning;	gk>g-
rpdses phrefi-can tho lightning of beautiful
strings or zig-zags, &c. (Л7. g. *, 115).
The lightning that oomes from the south is
called	skad-btgya-p^ that of a
hundred rattles; that coming from tho
west is called	hod-nams-pa, that of
fading lustre; that which comes from tho
north is called ^гЗ’Ч^Ч’в rgyun-gyi fyfag-
po, lord of streaming flashes (K. g. 3%).
Syn. Чч1’ц’ч5’4 hjug-pa hrgya~pi\
3^ gshi-snou $kycs; 8^'3$prin-gyi
lcug~nia ;	gser-hod can ; ^'5J lus-
phra;	bde-hthuft;	skad-cig
hod;	skad-cig gsal-wa (J£fton.\
84'^5 g.hg-ldan full of light-
ning ; flashed cloud.
SF’SP’ GMbdhaft n. of a place in
Tibet proper and also in Kham.
Gloft-thaft tgron-mahi
lha-khaft n. of a monastery and temple in
Kham.
Й44 glog-pa rm silver.
glog-pahi-nad n. of a disease
mentioned in grammar, but not found
in the medical works. Ace. to Ja. 84’^5
is another name of the disease called Ij4)'4
lhog-pa— cancer.
ajs’q glod-pa^^l^lhod-pa to relax; to
loosen ч^мгч*^ fydn$-pa-glod= ч^здгч’
b$dams-pa-glod slacken binding;
to relax the mind, be at ease; 8S’4*
glod-ki тдуип-du bshugs you
may stay here always with easy mind;
ma-Qzuft wa-glod-par without
any regard to taking or giving.
glon-pa or glan-pa 1. to
return an answer ; to reply. 2. to patch,
mend.
*	glos-pa or Йкжч pwortf-pa
stupidity; ignorance.
Ji’wa glos-phab-pa to Ho on one side or
on the side :	to
lie on the side like an ox lying down.
^Ч]Ч]’Ц dgag-pa, fut. of *$|4M'4 to hinder.
^qjqj q-^'qq-q dgag-pa daft bral-wa^S^^
dgag-pa nwd-pa	open; with-
out let or hinderance ; unobstructed.
W'3 dgag-phye, v. WS&’Sft dgag-flye
bycd.
dgag-dbye^'Wft dgag-phye
wfci stopped; obstructed.
544'59'Ss dgffg-dbya byed жиж one
who stops or obstructed
VW ’^4 dgag~teh*g or VW чЗ’Зч dgagpahi
tshig и word of prohibition; objection.
V^*VTV^ dgan-dkah-wa,	khefts-
dkah-гса hard to fill up.
dgaft~war fut. of *^W4 ligefts-
wat to fill; fill up.
V’F' S}*] dgan-blug	a ladle
to pour butter in sacrificial fire.
YqKzqp’s dgaft-gzar wnft sacrificial spoon
or ladle:
bbyin-sreg blags byed^kyi gzar^bu daft skyog
Ita-bu there are two kinds of spoons in homa

263
TO
sacrificial fire, one is large called Dgaft-
gsar, and the other smaller blug-gsar,
which is used to pour butter on fire.
Dgan-gzar gin n. of a
tree, the tree resembling tiger’s feet.
Syn. *8|'^‘4 $tag-gi гкаИ-ра ;	'V*
tshcr-ma shim; sa-htsho; tshig
mail {Mnon.}.
5Ч|с/д’л dgan^h-wa full to the brim;
replete:	*nod*du khefi$-ma
khen$.
VF* dgah-pay fut. of hgcb$-pa.
dgab-bya garment; dress
{Mnon.).
dgah-wa h<h, и^н, №b
^VT, WWS, Wfc, wr, ЯНГ, xfa,
яЙн, н^гГч, хне, x^,	1.
delight; happiness ; joy. 2. vb. neut. to
rejoice ; vqx«r%q to be pleased ; VP’<r»r
to be displeased; also	to
make glad: ‘Vp was displeased:
V’JM” rejoicing greatly.
Syn. «*3’4 mgu-tca; ran$-pa;
tpro-wa; ^V5*V44 gin-tu dgah;
уan-dag dgah, yid-rafi; q dgycs-
pa ; mne$-pa ; tshim-pa ; ^’3S
bde-skyid; $5’4^ yid-bdt;	8ems
^num-pa ; rab-rdgah;	hdso-
iter-wa {Mnon.).
dgah-rky aft (Sjw^v4) n. of a
large numerical figure {Ya-sel, 75).
S^'fytdgah-skyes	very pleased; glad.
5ч1ч'’3’В'ч,д|^я dgah-ikya zul-gsum the
abbreviation of the names of the three
places situated to the west of Lhasa,
vi^.,	Dgah-wa-gdoft, g*Skyo-
mo-luft and Zul-po^ in each of which
there is a monastery.
«pp’Spqn dgah-grogs	lover; spouse;
wife ; an intimate friend {Mfion.).
W'53 dyah-dgu intercourse; asso-
ciation; merriment;	dgah-dgur
spyod-pa	to perform conjugal
rites; also to indulge in sexual enjoyment.
Dgah-can gyi-mdo^ the Su-
tra, of ^чр’Ч’-Ц Dgah-геа-сап in (2Г. d, °(
4&Z), which contains
4$ srog gcod-pahi ne$-dmig§ bcu (10); ^’^’0’
ч5’^5$чргч$ rdsun-da $mra-wahi ne$-dmig$
bcu (10);	chaft
hthun-zcahi nes-dmigs sum-bcu so-lfta (35);
ma-byin-par len-pahi
ni$-dmig$ bcu (10); ^4]
log-par дуст-pahi nes-dmigs bcu (10).
dgah-$ton	W,
festival.
Syn. «^5’4 mchod-pa\ dupion;
tgod; ner-dgah {J^fton,).
dgah-ston-^kyes producing
mirth.
dgah-^ton sbyiu an astro-
loger ; water.
dgah-bde, colloq. “ gan-de, M
joy and happiness,
dgah-dar or	dgah-
ivahi kha-gtags a scarf presented for pleas-
ing or consoling; a scarf of congratulation.
54l4’4lXc* Dgah-gdoft n. of a monastery
near Dapung which has an oracle and a
divinity called Ga-dong Ohokyong, whose
duty it is to cause rain during a drought.
I: Dgah-ldan Ga-dan) gft<f
a paradise of the Buddhists; the residence
of those sainted beings who enjoy beati-
tude, which is the peculiar privilege of
the Mahayana Buddhists. It is presided
।
264
5WI
over by the coming Buddha, now tho
Bodhisattva Maitreya. The gods residing
in it are said to live 4,000 years, the
duration of a day of which is equal to 400
human years; and the length of one’s
body is a furlong (Sorig.).
qjar <V4’5'
owing to Lord
Maitreyas’ spiritual and temporal rule
the celestial people are possessed of the
joy of a righteous life.
II: (pronouncnd Gandan) the
great monastery of G4ndan situated 35
miles N.E. of Lhasa, which was founded
by the Buddhist reformer Tsong-kha-pa.
It contains twenty-six divisions or wards
for tho residence of monks.
Grva-sa Dgah-ldan the quarters for the
re idence of the monks of Gandan are
divided into two sections 1. called
grva-tshafi go fi В ya fi-rtse which has
the following divisions or khatns-
tshau \—(\) Har-gdofi- (2) qw^T
Bsani-glo*, (3) щ’4 Kre-tp>\ (4) T$ha-
pa; (5)	Gser-khafi; (6) Rdo-
ray (7) Klu-hbumy (8) Brag-niy
(9)	; (10) JTKc/ Rgyal-rofiy (11)
Go-wa ; (12) ^’3 Kofi-po; (13)
]£nah-ri$ (Lofi. 14).	2. called
gyvi-tshafi hog Car-rtse, which
has the following divisions or
khams-tshan;—(1) ^'f4^ Rdo-khafi*, (2)
Pho-khafi у (3) £ho-pa; (4) З4!'^
tfag-re; (5) X^Co-ne; (6) Tte-$o;
(7) Zufi-chu; (8) ^а|*Ц Sog-po; (9)
Rta-hon ; (10) wwXq Mnah-ri$ ; (11)
*'4 Cha-pay (12) З^*2* ~Rafi-po\ (13)
Gufi-rn (Lofi. 14). The name
Gandan is generally fixed before the
names of monasteries and institutions
which belong to the Dgah-ldan-pa qt
Gelug-pa sect.
Qgah-ldan Khafi-gsar L
formerly the residence of King Bpon-po
Mi-l)wafi :	Dpon-po dicafi-gi
pho-brafi near Lhasa (Lofi. % 18). 2. the
residence of King %)gah-ldan Tshe-wafi is
situated to tho back of the royal monastery
of Tsho-mo-glifi in Lhasa:
5qCl'5)-51gK.-^^^^'»,§q,5|’jq‘«4,^5 (Rtsii.).
Dgah-ldan khri-pa tho lineal
successor of Tsong-kha-pa in the ecclesias-
tical throne of the great monastery of
Gandan. Ho is tho chief of the ordinary
non-in cam ate lamas and occupies tho
third place in the hierarchical precedence
of Tibet.
Dgah-ldan chos-hkhor
glifi n. of a monastery in Higher Tibet.
It is a very common name by which
several monasteries are designated.
Dgah-ldan Phun-tshog$
glifi the monastery of Phunts'o Ling situa-
ted to the west of Tashi-lhunpo in Tsang.
It contains a large number of block-prints
and religious works. It was (formerly)
Lama Taranatha’s monastery.
Gtsafi
Bkra-<p$-lhun-pohi nub-la yod, Jo-nafi
tha-rha-nha thahi dgon-pa yin, jf4ra**3qPr
^•§q^'5<c.'2i,355 $ku-gsug thug$-rten
dan, cho$-kyi phar nuifi-pa yod.
Dgah-ldan pho-brafi also
called	Sde-pa gshufi the Govern-
ment-house in Lhasa, also the Government
of Lhasa (fifew. 14)*
V’H’is dgih-spyod НЗГЧТОГ entertain-
ment ; merriment; also good behaviour.

265

dgah-^pro-can 'wj^cT: possessed
of cheerfulness and enthusiasm»
yipvcr^gQrq dgah-wa hkhyil-wa 1-
the all-good; that exists by itself; the em-
blem of purity; purity typified. 2. n. of
a gem. 3. the king’s palace.
Syn.	gyufi-drufi;
t g у al-pohi pho-bran {Mnon,),
jq Dgah-wa brga-pa (Е^Ч'Т5!'^)
one of the names of Vishnu; one of a
hundred joys {Milon.).
dgah-wa-can здтгд cheerful;
merry.
Syn.	dgah-гса myofi=
hkhrigpa or	khyim-pahi cho$,
sexual enjoyment {Milon.).
dgah-wa dman-pa sordid
pleasure; one delighting in sexual plea-
sures ; met. a cock.
dgah-wa bshitfa four pleasures
or delights are the following:—(1) wf4]* *
lkog-та mi-bde glu-la dgah; (2)
dman$-rig§ stan-mtho
la dgah; (3)	dbul-po gton-la
dgah; (4)	shin-rgan-po
gshin-nn-ma-la dgah {Can,},
Dgah-wa hod-hphro n. of
Atis'a’s residence at Nye-thang near
Lhasa: €	1
J9-boh i gzim§ ch un Dgah-wa hod-hph ro
slws-pihi glin (Л. 9S).
yi]4*qS‘q]a|*rq n: Dgah-wahi grag$-pa ТГЧ-
the Brahmaua at whose request the
Kashmirian poet Kshemendra wrote Ava- •
dana Kalpalata and several other Sanskrit
poems.
♦«^•«й-щпргч n:	(Sohr.; Bull.
184, Ш).
^ч’ч5-д'ч| dgah-wahi lm-да	the
female organ.
i; dgah-wahi dwan-po
khyab-hjag a name of
Virhnu {Milon.},
Dgah-wahi tshal—^'^^&A
rgyal-pohi skyed-tshal royal gardens ; also
the celestial gardens.
Dgah-wahi bshin	yul-
Ijofw) n. of a place; ggar-phyogs the
Orient, the East {K, d. \ 267).
dgah-zcahi ro	sexual
enjoyment..
*	dgah-wahi Ь$е§-дмеп
fq^ {Schr.},
dgah-wahi sa-gshi the female
organ.
Syn mo-rtags ; Й mo-mtshan
{Mnon.),
dgah-wahi slad fwra for the
sake of pleasure.
dgah-war byed^^'&W dgah-
grogs or rndsah-grogs or kyoh-bo
a friend; sweetheart; a hubsand {Mnon.).
dgah-tca$ bcin§ love-
bound ; bond of love.
i: dgah-wo {Schr.; Ta.
d9).
Dg'(h-bycd‘ TTH,
gf<K Rama, the hero
of the epic Ramayana; n. of a cloud.
dgah-byed ^han-pa
n, pr. {Schr.; Ta. 2 102), dear to or fond
of Nanda (the delightful).
Dgah bycd Dgra-^ta-can
лизття the third accepted incarnation of
Vishnu; his other names are—^в’^«
35
VFW	266	«fl |
Dpah-po dsa-ma;	Ag-nihi sra$ ;
$q*>Dican-chcn ; joiqsR'gN Rtul-bzan
$kye§;	Mtshon-eha mkhan ; §5'1^
Srid-sgrub ; Lu$-$kye$; ^S’SS Qcod-
]yed;	Rdul-can-mahi bu ;
|n Nan-spon §kye$ ; «**45 Pha-lad; W’<q*5|’
74r9S Aga-ni dgah-bycd (Milon.).
5^’55'dgah-bycd fin «jif^r the tree
called 5’3^’^ Spyi-shur fin.
Syn. &dun byed; lu§ ilan;
ku-ni; hod-ldan; hkhyog-po
(Milon.).
dgah-hbyam§ SH^t she who
is full of enjoyment; a number.
Dgah-ma xfh, W, W, wfnai
tho beautiful; a name of Rati, the wife of
^upid;	Dgah-mahi bdagtfaqfa
the husband of Rati.
dgih-mo sftfa good; lovely.
5R|V<*R dgah-tshafv=^% yag-po^
bzin-po and leg§-pa good; fino;
handsome :	^1 ^5’3*
among them there was one article which
was very pretty (A. 14).
V^Fdgah-t shad-pa =
to be sufficiently pleased (Khrid. 32).
dgah bshi-pa	: possess-
ed of the four joys—piety, wealth, men
and lands:	**-^ft ^^w’qR'vqR-q^q
cho$ nor mi sa-bshi hdsom-pahi dgah bshi-pa,
dgah-ya^ boundless joy
or pleasure.
dgah-yi §kye-uar fussier
bum or grown out of joy or enjoyment.
g Dgah-rab Rdo-rje n. of a
celebrated Lama of the Rdsog-chen sect
of the Rnin-ma School (Grub. F 13).
Dgah-rab dicaA-phyug
the Lord of Love, Cupid.
5*|R'Xr<j dgah-rin$ met. for tho
hog [u long in copulation ”; a dog]&
dgar 1. n. of a place; n. of a
district in Tibet. 2.=V44’4R dgah-war
5^ гаЯ-/уаг at pleasure, ad libitum;
frq. chi-dgar what is your pleasure;
according to Jd, why?
dgar-гоа ’S’Wfzw to separate;
confine; place apart (men, cattle, goods):
5R]R*5R’§R)N dgar-byahi phugs cattle to bo
penned in a fold (Cs).	gna$-
na$ dgur-wa to banish from a place; to
exile;	dgar-ivahi don-du in
special sense; in particular (Sch.). In TJr.
“gar-tc bor-cc” to set apart, exclude, shut
out; to lock up, shut up; to lay up or by;
to preserve (Л.); Dgar-rgya co-ce to
store up.
5<t|4|'q dg«l-wa, fut. of hgcl-wa.
54j*rsi dga$-pa9 v. hga^-pa\ «К’2*]'
ser-ga dga$-p>a to have cracks or be
cracked.
L nine; 53’4 dgu-fau qt 5$’
qywq dgu-bcu tham-pa ninety. 2. as met.
= many:	dgu$-thab$ gsagt
gathered by many efforts, with great diffi-
culty. 3. also sign of plural:
§’53 kham§-gsum §kyc-dgu the people of
tho three worlds: ft
this man says many things he knows
not. ft -^’sgone who know’s every-
thing; 3^’53 or many talks; many
things to say;	Skye-dguhi
bdag-po ssrnjfa the lord of all living
beings;	§kye-dguhi bdag-mo
wrqfH, the name of the step-mother
who nursed Gautama Buddha; ^5’5$
those that are; the existing many or
beings;	the goods that one
has; property;	the many good
5^1	267
ST4
tod brave ; also	4 lu^-hdod
dgur tgyur-wa to be changed,- trans-
formed ad libitum; M’53fian-ggit thub-
pa one who can suppress the wicked; also
to overcome every evil:
ud-byed dgu-bycd mi-yoft dgu-yon,
according to <7s., Ja., if you do many
things which ought not to be done, many
things will take place which ought not to
take place ;	35not count-
ing upon death among things to be
thought of; 53'Й dgu-khri the chair or
conveyance for the many, i.e., for the
dead; litter ; bier (Ja). 53’Яdgu-
glin &cu-gni$ the twelve continents
inhabited by living beings. Here dgu
would seem to act as mere plural sign.
S3dgu-gtor offerings made to evil
spirits on the 29th day of the last month
of the Tibetan calender in the monasteries
of Tibet.
53*3^ dgu-thub able to subdue the
many; one full of resources; tho all-
conquering one.
53’q dgu-pa the ninth; having, com-
prising, measuring nine, c.g., H’53’q khru
dgu-pa, measuring nine cubits (in length,
height, etc.); 53*5 dgu-po skh the ninth,
the nine, those nine; °Ц’53 lan-dgu nine
times.
55*1^4 dgu-phriigs or 53^q4 dgu-$deb$
a stage of meditation which is dependent
upon the regulation of the breath ;
rlun sgom-pahi du^-su dafi-
po. The first stage in the regulation of
the breath in the art of meditative con-
centration.
S3’q dgu-wa 1. vb. to bend; to make
crooked. 2. sbst. the act of bending,
stooping, bowing; inflection. 3. adj.
bent; stooping.
53’1^ dgu-rtseg§ n. of a yellow flower
(Св.).
53’^1^ dgu-tshigs or 53’^3%r§’^ dgu-
tshigs §kya-mo the milky-way constella-
tion.
Syn.	паиг-rnkhahi §kye-
rag$}	gnod-§byin kha-rlafi%
(Mnon.).
53'^’Яс;£^ dgu-zi gltn-po §na n. of the
enchanted sword of Gri-gum btsan-po; one
of the early kings of Tibet who was assa-
sinated (Yig. 58).
53’ЛЙК‘* Dgu-gzhun n. of a place in
Tibet (Rtsii. 70).
W4 dgug-pa, v. °33’Ч hgug-pa.
53«J|'g5’ dgug-byafi, urgent call; 533’353
dgug-gshug=^4^№ dgug-<pig§ id.
dgun vfa generally applied to
nfidnight, but at times to noon as well.
Sometimes is made equivalent to 3^'
but properly speaking 53^’ signifies
sublimity, loftiness and also profundity;
and 3^* gun signifies tho middle part,
centre. ^Y53e’^V53e' is sometimes writ-
ten as ^’З^УЗ^’ I The direct sense occurs
in	ri mthon-pv dgufi-la
$negs-pa9 a high mountain rising aloft;
53^,fi^,^^r55,5a^'?i=^5^^’53c‘' at noon,
the middle of the day ($ag.).
53^’ ГЗ dgufi-khag division of time.
53^’”^ dgtift-mkhah midnight sky,
53^**^ dgufl-char=*K4 char-pa rain
(Muon,).
53^’?^' dgufi-snift a year; a year of
one’s life.
53^3 dguft-thig the meridian line ; 53^*
dgtin thig-gi tfkyil-hkhor the
meridian circle.

268
5^1
53c'3 dguft-du or 53*’’Я^Я**’4 dguft-la
gpgs-pa gone to heaven, i.e., dead.
53*’435 dgun-fydun seven nights; a
week.
53*X‘iq dgufi-do-nub this evening ; to-
night.
dgitft
seated steadily without moving or leaning
on any side; raised to the sky.
53**^ dgufi-nio the early night;
evening; the time from 4 p.m. to 7 p.m.
53*'^Я dgufi-shag a day’s halt; halt.
53**^Л^-q dgufi-la reg-pa touching, the
sky; the meridian.
53*'^ dgun-lo the age of a respectable
or high personage ;	^tcu shab§-
kyi dgun-lo what is your honour’s age ?
53*’a*’*^V4 dguft-lo rnthon-pa^^'^ rgan-
pi an elderly person, 61 to 72 joars old
(Mnon.).
5дс*Я$Ч dgufi-g$ b or 53*’5Z^ dgufi-
dkyil tho middle of the sky.
Vxl^j $Vun fafirc; 53V3 dgun-ka tho
winter.
*53^’3’3^’^ dgun-gyi rgyal-mo {Schr.;
C.).
53*\§Я dgun-ni [dog the winter sol-
stice : 53О’?Я’^Я dgun-ni [dog-gi thig or
khor-thig the line of the winter
solstice; the tropic of Capricorn.
53V?5 dgun-stod the first part of winter.
5^-qgeH dgun-hbrum winter grapes.
535'85 dgun-smad firfiiT the after part
of the winter season ; 53V?5T3*rW dgun-
§fnd kha dus heinanta time of snow in the
beginning winter; 535’Я5,Я*’3^ time of
cold, about the end of the winter
{Rtsii.).
535 ^Я^ dgun-txhig$=^*\^ (dgun-du§)
winter time.
535’3 dgun-zla the mid-winter months,
g q qj'q zfa-tca bcu-pa, 3*^Я^ЯЧ zla-ica
Ьеи-geig-pa, Д’Ч’Ч'Д^’ч zla-wa bcu-gni$-pa.
535‘3'4’^*’ dgun-zla tha-chuft нгч. the
month of January-February.
53VJ’*9*’® dgun-zla hbrin-po De-
cember-J anuary.
535'3'^dfun-zta ra-wa нпр?Н Janu-
ary; lit. tho beginning of tho year, i.e.,
November-December.
535dgun-sa	ТГН winter
residence.
S3*’4 dgum-pay fut. of *3*гч hgum-
pa.
53* I: dgar crooked : 59^’53* 4
dbyib^dgur tra of crooked stature:
£Я*Г3*’3**’3*Г53*’*ГСЯ*< sem$-kyi$ tshugt-
kyan li($-kyi$ dgur-ma tshugs although the
mind may bend, yet do not let your body
bend (Rdsa.): ^*’^Я rgur-shig stoop
down! 5^'5 $gur-te writhing (with pain);
to bend; to submit; to humble
one’s self; ^Я^’53^ & crooked-back;
'53* drawn bent hands.
Syn. rgur; §gur (Mnon.).
S^II: many; all;	'^5
^q^-iAK	hkhor-kyi dkyil-hkhor yod^
dgur yafi yod dgur signifies ^5'4'^ yod-pa
kun all or all of those existing.
53*’^? dgur-hgro a snake; one of a
stooping gait.
534’^ dgur-po anything crooked; a
crooked man; sgur-po hump-backed ;
53^ dgur-mo a crooked woman.
^’4 I: dge-wa ^^тог, jot,
5ц:,	fw, HTtJ, if,
happiness, welfare, virtue; also adj.
happy, propitious, virtuous: S3

269
5^3) ।
dge-wahi sems a virtuous mind; WVl’q*
las dge-wa mi-dge-wa virtuous and
evil actions;	dge-wahi rtsa-
wa fundamental virtues:
3^’9'Vfa some mighty act of virtue
should be performed (Л. 65);
dge-rtsa skyed-pa to conceive the idea
of a meritorious act. There are two kinds
of dge-wa,	zag-bcas kyi
dgc-wa and	zag-med-kyi dge-wa;
the former, called or M-«$,
belongs to the world of desires and is sub-
ject to decay; tho latter is undestructible,
consisting of the enduring works of piety
performed by saints belonging to the
khams gon-та superior states of exist-
ence. There are two other kinds of dge-wa,
viz.:—hdus-byas-kyi dge-wa
and	hdus-ma bya$-kyi dge-
wa, the former consists of works done for
gain or happiness in this world;
hdtin-dii byas-pahi dge-wa consists in
paying reverence to and worshipping the
Tathagata and the incarnate saints.
may mean fasting, abstinence, as in ’the
phrase	dge-wa sruft-wa, to fast,
to abstain from food. Also alms, charity;
that which is done as a religious work.
gi dge gson dge benevolences
bestowed or given in one’s life time when
dying; 5	dge-wa hdod-par byed
ijwrerfh wishes for prosperity;
у aft dge-wa la hjig-rten-pahi dge-wa daft,
hjig-rten-las hdas-pahi dge-wa yod. Dge-гса
are of two kinds—the worldly religious
works, and the same for spiritual cul-
tures ; the former consists in phar-
$es-pa, appreciating or regarding one’s
father or knowing him as such;
mar^es-pa knowing the mother, i.e., to be
grateful to her; to regard as one’s mother;
dge-sbyoft-dufe$-pa to venerate
or revere one as a member of the Buddhist
church;	bram-zer $es-pa to respect
or pay homage to a Brahmap;
rigs-kyi naft-na rgan-pa la
rim-gro byed-pa to pay respect to the elders
of a family;	sbyin-pa gtoft-wa
to give alms in chanty; dge-beu the
observance of the ten virtuous acts;
53’5^’ hdii-qes dgu-dan the nine Samskara ;
dran-pa bcii the ten remembrances.
dge-skyes sfw charm; good
appearance; n. of a goddess.
skyon phran-
bu	skyon cuft-zad slightly defec-
tive ; a little fault.
S’Tg** dge-skyos or dge-bskyos,
a supervisor or director of
monks in a monastery. A sort of pro-
vost-sergeant in the larger monasteries
who keeps strict order and punishes trans-
gressors. He is also called wq Chos-
hkhrims-pa in some monasteries. Rockhill
calls this officer at Kumbum the Ge-kor.
Syn. 3 tse-rgod (Mnon.).
Dge-rgan I: surety ; moral
bail; a monk that is made answerable for
the moral conduct of another who is
placed under his care (Jd.).
П; lit. an old man of the
religious order.	dge-hdun
rgan-pa ordinarily signifies a school-
master, tutor: <&»|
both the spiritual teacher and worldly
teacher.
Dge-rgyas n. of a celestial region
(B. ch. 6); ono of the Rupa-dhatu or
worlds of form.
^•rorq |
270

Dge-rgya$ bye-та glifi
n. of a monastery near Sam-ye founded by
.Hirotf-sa, wife of King Khri-soft dhu*
bl san.
W-uvz—novice monk.
5$|’qj dge-bcu — ^Q'^ dgc-wa-bcu tho
ten virtues, which are as follows:—(1) sT4!’®’
srog mi-gcod-pa, (2) «	ч tna-
byin-par mi-len-pa, (3)	(shafts-
par tpyod-pa, (4)	bdon-par $mra-
tea, (5) ЗчрыгЕкчр tshig hjam-por smra-
wa, (G)	ftag nii-hchal-wa, (7) д'
q phra-ma mi-byed-pa} (8)
q-^-«r&'3vq gshan-gyi nor-li ham-pa nii-
byed-pa, (9) <W4’4]X\q*	gshan-
lignod-pahi sem$ mi-b$kyed-pi, (10)
q^’q у aft-da g-pahi Ita-wa. Those arc :
not taking life; not to take what is not
given; to observe purity of morals; to
speak the truth; to speak gently, politely;
not to break a promise; not to speak slander;
not to covet another’s property; not to do
mischief or think of doing injury to others;
to regard the purest doctrine.
’Лф dge-chu sacred water.
$4*’ Dgc-chuft one of the celestial
regions.
dgc-chc med-pa
don-dag chen-po med-pa without some im-
portant object or business:
if there be nothing very
important to be done quickly, work accord-
ing to circumstance (D. gel. 7).
Dge-b^nen	Buddhist
devotee with only eight vows to observe.
])ge-b$nen Chot-hphel the
original name of "fY J4'q$
JJbrotn-teon Rgyat-wahi hbyaft-gna$ the
founder of the Buddhist hierarchy of
Tibet {Grub. Я 5)*
J)ge-b$nen-ma ^trrfw a
female Buddhist devotee.
*	Dge^tnen dharma=£wfo cho§-
tkyob {Schr.).
dge-ktou rkycn-gsaft,
‘Й dge-bton rkyen gsan-
gi mthun-hgyur leg$-$pel bya-rgyu rnam$~
khyed-raft la bkod-mtiags $fion yon-ltar.
dge-ltat propitious prognostic.
dgc-hthud—	dge-wa
hthud-pa an uninterrupted payment of
allowances or endowments attached to
religious offices or institutions; a connected
series of pious actions or works; also the
performance of some religious observances
by several persons one following another:
drun-hkhor-du yun-rift b$dad-pa htsho-war
dge-hthudbabt daft the estimated permanent
allowances to the Drun-hkhor (civil em-
ployes) for food and lodging {D. gel. £).
Dge-druft lha-khaft n. of a
monastery in Tsang.
dge-bdiin, the third com-
ponent of the Buddhist triad or Vfa’
may bo rendered as “the priest-
hood,” “ the assemblage,” or “the church.”
•The term dge-hdun is composed of two
words, S<| dge and hdun; hdun
means hdod-pa desire:
dge-wa~daft thar-pa
tgrub-par hdod-pat na dge-bdun he is
dge-hdun who longs for piety and
emancipation:
dge-hdun btsun^pa rnamt bsan-du gtol
I beg the venerable body of monks would
hear me. In this sentence dge-hdun has
271
^•q-цс-1
the general meaning of an assembly of
religious folk. There are in particular two
kinds of dge-hdun*.
so-sor skyebohi dge-hdun the ordinary
clergy, and	hphag$-pahi
dge-hduu the sainted clergy. Four indivi-
duals of the former class collectively,
when they assemble together, form what
is called Saggha-ratua	dge-
hdun dkon-mchog. An individual of the
latter class, t>., the sainted clergy, may
singly form the Saygha-ratna. The
Saygha of the Mahayana School differed
from that of the Hinayana School. In the
Abhisatnaya of Maitreya, twenty classes
of Saqgha are enumerated as belonging to
the Hinayana School. The S'ravaka, Pra-
tyeka Buddha, Bodhisattva and the Dhar-
rnapala, who protect Buddhism, are also
included in the Saygha-ratna.
^’4	rag-lu§-pa wjnftw be-
longing or subject to the church ;
dge-hdun-la ruii-wa	suitable
for the use of the clergy.
dge-hdun skyes=^'^ ri-fo 1.
n. of a medicinal plant; gab-nun
(Min) mystic. 2. n. of a lama.
dge-hdun-gyi du$
belonging to the months following autumn
when the lamas perform religious medita-
tions, &o.
dge-hdun-gyi $de the clerical
order or class of the clergy.
dge-hdun-gyi dben byed-
pa	one who produces differences
or disunion among the clergy ; to produce
such disunion.
Sge-hdun Rgya-mtsho n. of
the Dalai Lama who died in 1851.
Dge-hdun grub-pa the
founder of the hierarchy of the Dalai
Lama.
dge-hdun bsdu-icah-
phyir for the purpose of assembling tho
clergy.
dge-hdun phal-chen-pa the
clergy of the Mahasanghika School.
dge-hdun hphel	n.
of a Buddhist saint; pr. (Schr.; Ta. 278).
*5«T^**W Dge-hdun hban§
n. pr. (Seh.; Ta. 2,127).
*dge-hdun bsrun-wa tfw-
n. of a Buddhist sage pr. (Sehr.; Ta.
2, 104).
dge-ldan — ^Q'bfi dge-wa can
possessed of virtue or of piety; pious.
Dge-ldan-pa a name of the Vl’
Dge-lugs-pa sect of Lamas founded
by Tsong-kha-pa.
5^95 dge-§pyod religious acts; acc. to
the Bon-po 5^1'95 dge-§pyod consists in erect-
ing tombs, images, caitya, painting of
holy personages and printing of the sacred
texts, making moulds of images of gods
and saints, uttering nuintras and, generally,
acquiring moral merits.
dge-phrug pupil-monk; young
boy trained as a novice monk.
^•q-gk’ dge-wa sbyon or dge-sbyon
a religious ascetic. In this term are
included all those who have taken the vows
of renouncement, i.e., mjpqt; so both
dge-tshul and dge-$loft are within
its signification; in the Southern School
only the dge-slon, i.e., the Bhikshu,
can have claim to this title provided they
live in conformity with the rules of the
Vinaya, The qualifications of a dge-$byofi
vr^'4 I
272

are the following:—dul-pa cia&
moral discipline; ^’^*rq^’ cafi (p$-p<L
daft wisdom;	$c/Ej
txhul-khrim$ kyi phufi-po yofi$-su dag-pfr
(hft purity of morals;
йе hdsin-la hjug-pa $e$-pa knowing to реГ*
form Samddhi or meditation.
q q dge-wa $byom-pay explained
S4] q gudge-wa bya§.pd
don-me^-par gshan-la ^grog-pri, to trumpet
or advertize one’s acts of charity ;
gwq dge-wa mi-$byom$-pa Mfnwa^^QT4!
to do virtue secretly, t>., without any
fuss or trumpeting or advert izement.
dge-tcahi dag-nid щтц for-
tune; good luck.
a place of
piety; a pious man.
V)qX’VK’2i dge-wahi dban-po,
q Wf5*ra §nan-fiag mfon-brjocZ
§deb-$byor gsttm-la rnkhas-pa one versed in
poetry, Abhidhana, and in rhetoiic like
the great poet Kshemendra of Kashmir.
dge-wahi rtsa-iea
tekritu-pahi b^kyed-pa
one who has done some religious acts.
5<|'qrw dge-wahi la§	good
actions.
dge-wahi bfe§~
gnen mgu-war bya-ica ^лг(ихпт^гГ
paying reverence, &c., to please a Kalya~
namitra (a Buddhist monk-scholar).
dge-war gyur-cig
good luck to you.
5^’9^ dge-bral	devoid of vir-
tue or piety.
Dgc-sbyon ehcna-po
an epithet of Buddha; 'fvqTtra dfJe~
sbyon It ar bcos-pa	in the
manner of a religious ascetic.
^ 3Сч ^1г”4 Я^ 4 dge-$byofi-du kha^-helw-
wa ’ЧЯЧ-яГёПТ one who has avowed to
betako to the life of a dge-$byoft or Cramana.
dge-$byon byed-pa ,чнлг-^тк^т
the performance of asceticism in the
manner of a Buddhist Cramana:
dge-§byoft byed-pahi eho$-bshi
’WiRiTwr ч’ят:, the four duties of
a true Craw ana, w’hieh are as follows:—(1)
ggehafi-slar mi-g$e war
bya WTWEfl	do not curse others
though you have been abused by thorn;
(2)	khros-kyafi tlar-ma
khro-war-bya	do not
be angry with others though you have been
enraged by them; (3)
чк5 mtzhati-brus kyan $lar-mi bru-war-bya
do not commit injury
to others though you have been injured
by them; (4)	^«j’qvs brdeg-
kyafi $lar mi-brdeg-p>ar bya sferarf^-
cT^TH do not beat others though you have
been beaten by them.
^•|k’W’S)^qv dge-sbyon ma-yiu-par
VW not being а
V| bge-$byor	§5’q eho$ dge-
la$ byed-pa one who has attained to a
stage of holiness by religious devotion
and works:
q^’X mtshan-dus dge-$byor-gyi i*gyun-la
cun-zad gna^-pahi tshe at night when he
was absorbed in the state of pious
devotion (Ya-sel. 11).
dge-mar=z^^bt^un-ma 1. a Bud-
dhist nun. 2, JnfvT peace.
Dge-tshul яячпе generally a
novice-monk; the first stage of a monk
after he has taken the vow of Pratrajya
or renunciation, when he has to observe-

273

thirty-d x vows before he is qualified to be
ordained as a Dge-slon; as long as
he is not admitted into the latter order
he will continue as a Qamanera though
even to eighty years old.
Dge-tshul-ma	a nun
young or old that has not yet taken the
vows of ordination belonging to the order
of Bhiksuni.
dge-mtshan giW^r^r,
lucky omen ; also entertainment, amuse-
ment or amusing;	dgc-mtshan-
can bearing lucky marks.
Dge-gshon a young student who
is studying under a tutor called dge-
tgyan, who is responsible for his education,
behaviour and moral training. He is
required to attend, when necessary, his
monk-tutor as a servant. When he is very
young he is called dge-phrug,
Dge-gyog boy or youth attend-
ing upon a monk and who works with a
view himself to enter the holy order.
When he has passedthe prescribed examin-
ations for admission, he gets the position
of a Dge-gshon.
Dge-lugs-pa. Tsong-kha-pa
founded the monastery of
Dgah-ldan rnam-par rgyal-wahi glin,
situated on the hill called eiqqj-X’M-i ЦЬгод-
ri-bo che, and resided there during the last
part of his life. His school was called
chot-rje Dgah-ldan-pahi
lugs and vulgarly	Dgah-
Idan-pahi-lugs or	Dgah-ldan
lugs-pa, which term has assumed the form
c^-^qprq Dge-lugs-pa {Grub. 5 1).
Ц; £)ge-lugs-pa one belonging
to the sect of Dgai-ldan-pa founded by
Tsong-kha-pa.
V) dge-legs or dge-гса wfl
IJH,	piety; good and auspicious
action.
Syn. bde-legs\ shi-wa; 5^’^
myan-hdas', K'Sfk* re-skon',	gnam-
bskros;	Snon-bsags-mthu; P’l
kha-rje;	rab-bsnags;	skal-
wahiphuT,	bsnags-hos;
gid bshin-hgntb',	bde-ivahi
hbyun-gnas', rab-shi\ legs-ldan9,
hun-tshogs {Mnon.).
dge-legs-ean	blessed;
glorious.
Dge-legs dpal-bzafi=
Mkhas-grub rje {Schr.; Org.
105, 5).
*5<|	Dge-legs b^es-ghen
{Sehr.; Ta. 2, 211) a good coun-
sellor ; a pious Buddhist monk.
Vl’-^ dge-fis^^9, ^'q^q-^’q dge-гса
dan ps-pa piety and blessedness.
Dge-bfes	a con-
traction of ^^'^^'^^dge-wahibges-gnen,
a Buddhist gelong who has mastered meta-
physics and the important branches of
sacred literature. Monks, also, who have
got the titles of	Rab-hbyanis-pa,
Rdo-rams-pa, &c., are by courtesy
addressed with the title of V) Dge-b^es
; others who lead a pure life and
are possessed of learning and good charac-
ter are also generally addressed as
Dge-byes, i.e.,	Dge-wahi b$es~
gnen.
i: dge-sruft WW n. pr.
{Sehr.^Ta. 2, 219).
* и:	{Sehr.; Bull.
1848, 292).
36

274
Dgc-glofl	a Bud-
dhist monk who after finishing his proba-
tionary period in a monastery has been
ordained into tho highest order. He has to
observe 253 vows.
among gelong
there are two classes : para mdrtha Bhiksu
and Sanwrti Bhiksu. The following seven,
i.e., Buddha and Bodhisattva, Pratyeka
Buddha, Arhats, such saints as on account
of their pious acts will not be born again or
will be born only once, thoso wrho have
attained to the stage of Srotdpanna, i.e.,
gone on the path of Nirvdna, belong to the
higher class or Paramartha Bhiksu. These
or some of these while even they reside in
human habitation, being possessed of
divine knowledge and wisdom, continue
in the class of Paramartha Bhiksu.
Ordinary gelong or Bhiksu, such as wear
tho yellow garments, have shaven their
heads and betaken to tho life of Pravrajya
or renunciation of all worldly concerns,
and observe the vow belonging to the
order, are called Safnrrti Bhiksu.
dge-slo^-du mi-run-tca,
dge-$lon ma-yin-pa ono
unworthy the position of a gelong.
Dge-$lon-ma firwt an ordained
nun ; she has 364 vows or restrictions to
observe;	dge-$lon-ma sun-
ph у и fi-tea	one who finds fault
with or slanders a Buddhist nun.
dge-§lon-fin acc. to Ja. is a
provincial name for the (Cedrus deodara)
Deodar tree.
Dge-slob-ma	a pupil
monk; one who is preparing himself for
t>eing admitted into the higher order.
5^1
• cjgeft.-l(i, more properly ’Seflc- '5*
tfgafi-la on; upon; in; a